Subaru Legacy & Outback 09-14, 04-05

12LE_US.
book 2
Foreword
FOREWORD
1. Foreword
A: FOREWORD
These manuals are used when performing mainte-
nance, repair or diagnosis of Subaru LEGACY.
Applicable model:
2012MY BM*****, BR*****
The manuals contain the latest information at the

time of publication. Changes in the specifications,
methods, etc. may be made without notice.
FW-2
12LE_US.book 1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS
HU
Page
1. How to Use This Manuals ..........................................................................2
12LE_US.book 2
How to Use This Manuals

1. How to Use This Manuals

A: HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS
1. STRUCTURE
Each section consists of SCT that are broken down
into SC that are divided into sections for each com-
ponent. The specification, maintenance and other
information for the components are included, and
the diagnostic information has also been added
where necessary.
2. CONTENTS
The first page has an index with tabs.
HU-2
12LE_US.book 3

3. COMPONENT
Illustrations are provided for each component. The information necessary for repair work (tightening torque,
grease up points, etc.) is described on these illustrations. Information is described using symbol.
To order parts, refer to parts catalogue.
Example:
T2
(3) (6)
T3
(7)
(5) T3
(4)
(2)
(8)
T8 T1 (1) (20)
T2 (21) T3
T6 (5)
T10 T2
T5 (1) T3
(2)
(12) (22) (23) T3
(6) (9) (14) (16)
T4 (18)
(10)
(3) (11) T1
(4) (4) (11)
(13)
(10) (15)
(9) T2
(17)
(19)
T6
(4) (10) T4
(3)
(4)
(7) (15)
T2
T11 T6 (22) T5
(3) (12) (35)
T4 (34)
T5
(8) (27) T3
(10) T2
(26)
(23) (24)
T2 (14) (25)
T7
(24)
(36)
(25)
(13) (31)
(30)
T2 T5
(10) (29) (37) (33)
(17) (28) (32)
(16)
(18)
T4
T3 T1 : Selective part
T1 : Replacement part
(21)
: Sealing point
: Should be lubricated with oil.
(20) : Should be lubricated with grease.

T9 (19)
T1 , T2 .... : Tightening torque
HU-00017
HU-3
12LE_US.book 4

4. DEFINITION OF NOTE, CAUTION AND WARNING

NOTE:
Describes supplementary explanations for efficient operation.
CAUTION:
Describes particular items to be followed and items to be prohibited to avoid vehicle or parts damage.
WARNING:
Describes items to be strictly prohibited to avoid serious injury to the person doing the work or people in the
area, and items to be strictly followed to avoid any deficiency or accident.
5. SPECIFICATION
If necessary, specifications are also included.
6. INSPECTION
Inspections to be carried out before and after maintenance are included.
HU-4
12LE_US.book 5

7. MAINTENANCE
Maintenance instructions for serviceable parts describe work area and detailed step with illustration. It also
describes the use of special tool, tightening torque, caution for each procedure.
If many serviceable parts are included in one service procedure, appropriate reference is provided for each
parts.
Example:
15.Main Shaft (A)
A: REMOVAL (B)
1) Remove the manual transmission assembly
from vehicle. <Ref. to MT-33, REMOVAL, Manual
Transmission Assembly.>
(C)
11) Tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque us-

ing ST1 and ST2.
NOTE: (D)
Secure the lock nuts in two places after tightening.
ST1 498937000 TRANSMISSION HOLDER
ST2 499987003 SOCKET WRENCH (35)
(E) (F)
Tightening torque:
118 N m (12.0 kgf-m, 86.8 ft-lb) (G)
(H)
ST2 ST1
HU-00020
(A) Component (D) Cautions (G) Tightening torque

(B) Process (E) Tool number of special tool (H) Illustration
(C) Reference (F) Name of special tool
HU-5
12LE_US.book 6

8. DIAGNOSIS
Diagnosis uses step-by-step process to make operations easier.
9. SI UNITS
Measurements in these manuals are according to the SI units. Metric and yard/pound measurements are
also included.
Example:
Tightening torque:
44 Nm (4.5 kgf-m, 33 ft-lb)
List of SI unit
Item SI units Conventional unit Remarks
Force N (Newton) kgf 1 kgf = 9.807 N
Mass (Weight) kg, g kg, g
Capacity 2, m2 or cm3 2 or cc 1 cc = 1 cm3 = 1 m2
Torque Nm kgf-m, kgf-cm 1 kgf-m = 9.807 Nm
Rotating speed rpm rpm
kgf/cm2 1 kgf/cm2 = 98.07 kPa
Pressure kPa (Kilopascal)
mmHg 1 mmHg = 0.1333 kPa
Power W PS 1 PS = 0.7355 kW
Calorie Wh cal 1 kcal = 1.163 Wh
Fuel consumption rate g/kWh g/PSh 1 g/PSh = 1.3596 g/kWh
The figure used in these manuals are described in the SI units and conventional units are described in ( ).
HU-6
12LE_US.book 7

10.EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY
List H/L Headlight
2ndr Secondary H/U Hydraulic Unit
AAI Air Assist Injection HVAC Heater, Ventilator and Air Conditioner
AAR Angular Adjusted Roller I/F Interface
A/B Airbag IG Ignition
ABS Anti-lock Brake System IN Intake
A/C Air Conditioner INT Intermittent
AC Angular Contact I/O Input/Output
ACC Accessory IR Infrared Ray
A/F Air Fuel Ratio ISC Idle Speed Control
ALT Generator LAN Local Area Network
APS Accessory Power Supply Socket LCD Liquid Crystal Display
ASSY Assembly LED Light Emitting Diode
AT Automatic Transmission LH LH (Left Hand)
ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid LHD Left Hand Drive
AUX Auxiliary Storage Unit (External Storage) LSD Limited Slip Differential
AVCS Active Valve Control System M/B Main Fuse & Relay Box
AWD All Wheel Drive MD Mini Disc
BATT Battery MID Multi Information Display
BCM Brake Control Module MFI Multi-Point Fuel Injection
BJ Bell Joint MP-T Multi-Plate Transfer
CAN Controller Area Network MT Manual Transmission
CD Compact Disc NA Natural Aspiration
CD-R/RW CD Recordable/Rewritable NC Normal Close (Relay)
COMPL Complete NO Normal Open (Relay)
CPC Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve OBD On-Board Diagnosis
CPU Central Processing Unit OP Option Parts
DCCD Drivers Control Center Differential PC Personal Computer
DOHC Double Overhead Camshaft PCD Pitch Circle Diameter
DOJ Double Offset Joint PCV Positive Crankcase Ventilation
DTC Diagnosis Trouble Code PID Parameter Identification
DVD Digital Versatile Disc or Digital Video Disc Pr Primary
EBD Electronic Brake Distribution P/S Power Steering
EBJ High-efficiency Compact Ball Fixed Joint PTJ Pillow Tripod Joint
ECM Engine Control Module P/W Power Window
EDJ High-Efficiency Compact Double Offset RAM Random Access Memory
Joint RH RH (Right Hand)
E/G Engine RHD Right Hand Drive
EGI Electronic Gasoline Injection ROM Read Only Memory
EGR Exhaust Gas Recirculation rpm Revolution Per Minute
ELR Emergency Locking Retractor Rr Rear
ETC Electronic Throttle Control SDI Subaru Diagnostic Interface
EX Exhaust SI Subaru Intelligent
F/B Fuse & Joint Box SOHC Single Overhead Camshaft
FL Fusible Link SRS Supplemental Restraint System
Ft Front SSM Subaru Select Monitor
FWD Front Wheel Drive ST Special Tool
GPS Global Positioning System STD Standard
HI High SW Switch
HID High-Intensity Discharge T/B Turbocharger
HU-7
12LE_US.book 8

TCS Traction Control System

TCM Transmission Control Module
TGV Tumble Generator Valve
T/M Transmission
TPMS Tire Pressure Monitoring System
UJ Universal Joint
UV Ultraviolet
VDC Vehicle Dynamics Control
V.I.N. Vehicle Identification Number
ViS-C Viscous Coupling
VSV Vacuum Switching Valve
VTD Variable Torque Distribution
W/H Wiring Harness
HU-8
12LE_US.book 1
SPECIFICATIONS
SPC
Page
1. LEGACY .....................................................................................................2
2. OUTBACK ..................................................................................................6
12LE_US.book 2
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
1. LEGACY
A: DIMENSION
1. SEDAN MODEL
Model 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo 2.5 L DOHC turbo 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Overall length mm (in) 4,735 (186.4)
Overall width mm (in) 1,820 (71.7)
Overall height (at C.W.) mm (in) 1,505 (59.3)
Wheelbase mm (in) 2,750 (108.3)
Front mm (in) 1,565 (61.6) 1,550 (61.0) 1,565 (61.6)
Tread
Rear mm (in) 1,570 (61.8) 1,555 (61.2) 1,570 (61.8)
Minimum road clearance mm (in) 150 (5.9)
B: ENGINE
Horizontally opposed,
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled, 4-cylinder,
Engine type liquid cooled, 6-cylinder,
4-stroke gasoline engine
Valve arrangement Overhead camshaft
92.0 91.0
Bore stroke mm (in) 99.5 79.0 (3.92 3.11)
(3.622 3.583)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.94) 3,630 (221.5)
Compression ratio 10.0 9.5 10.5
Ignition order 1324 163254
Idle speed at Park or 650100(MT)
rpm 700100 700100
Neutral position 675100(CVT)
Maximum output kW (HP)/rpm 127 (170)/5,600 198 (265)/5,600 191 (256)/6,000
350 (35.7, 258)/2,000
Maximum torque Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)/rpm 230 (23.5, 170)/4,000 334 (34.1, 247)/4,400
5,200
C: ELECTRICAL
1010(MT),
Ignition timing (at idling) BTDC 1510 158
1510(CVT)
Spark plug Type and manufacturer NGK: SIFR6A11 NGK: SILFR6B8 NGK: SILFR6C11
Generator 12 V 110 A 12 V 130 A
Battery Type and capacity (5HR) 12 V 52 AH (75D23R)
SPC-2
12LE_US.book 3
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
D: TRANSMISSION
1. MT
Model 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo 2.5 L DOHC turbo
Transmission type 6MT 6MT
Clutch type DSPD DSPD
1st 3.454 3.454
2nd 1.947 1.947
3rd 1.296 1.296
Gear ratio 4th 0.972 0.972
5th 0.825 0.780
6th 0.695 0.666
Rev. 3.636 3.636
Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid
Reduction gear (Front)
Gear ratio 4.111 4.111
Transfer Type of gear Helical Helical
Reduction gear reduction Gear ratio 1.000 1.000
(Rear) Final Type of gear Hypoid Hypoid
reduction Gear ratio 4.111 4.111
6MT: 6-forward and 1-reverse speeds with synchromesh for all gears
DSPD: Dry Single Plate Diaphragm
2. AT
Model 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Transmission type 5AT
Clutch type TCC
1st 3.540
2nd 2.264
3rd 1.471
Gear ratio
4th 1.000
5th 0.834
Rev. 2.370
1st Type of gear Helical
Reduction gear reduction Gear ratio 1.000
(Front) Final Type of gear Hypoid
reduction Gear ratio 3.083
Type of gear Hypoid
Reduction gear (Rear)
Gear ratio 3.083
5AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 5-forward speeds and 1-reverse

TCC: Torque Converter Clutch
SPC-3
12LE_US.book 4
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
3. CVT
Model 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo
Transmission type CVT
Clutch type TCC
Forward 3.525 0.558
Change gear ratio
Rev. 2.358
Transfer reduction ratio 1.000
Type of gear Hypoid
Gear ratio 3.700

CVT: Forward continuously variable speed change and 1-reverse
E: STEERING
Type Rack & pinion
Turns, lock to lock 2.8
Minimum turning Curb to curb 11.2 (36.7)
m (ft)
diameter Wall to wall 11.8 (38.7)
F: SUSPENSION
Front Macpherson strut type suspension
Rear Double wishbone type suspension
G: BRAKE
Service brake system Dual circuit hydraulic with vacuum suspended power unit
Front Ventilated disc brake
Rear Disc brake Ventilated disc brake
Parking brake Electric mechanical on rear brakes
Brake assist Standard equipment for all vehicles
H: TIRE
16 6 1/2JJ
Wheel size 16 6 1/2J 18 7 1/2J 17 7 1/2J
17 7 1/2J
P205/60 R16 91V
Tire size 225/45 R18 91W P225/50 R17 93V
P215/50 R17 90V
Type Tubeless, Steel belted radial
SPC-4
12LE_US.book 5
LEGACY
SPECIFICATIONS
I: CAPACITY
2.5 L DOHC 3.6 L DOHC
2.5 L SOHC non-turbo
Model turbo non-turbo
6MT CVT 6MT 5AT
Fuel tank 2 (US gal, Imp gal) 70 (18.5, 15.4)
Total capacity
2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2) 5.2 (5.5, 4.6) 7.8 (8.2, 6.9)
(at overhaul)
When replacing
Engine oil Filling amount of engine oil and oil 4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 4.3 (4.5, 3.8) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
engine oil filter
2 (US qt, Imp qt) When replacing
4.0 (4.2, 3.5) 6.3 (6.7, 5.5)
engine oil only
Transmission gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 3.7 (3.9, 3.3) 3.7 (3.9, 3.3)
12.0 12.5 9.6 10.0
ATF or CVTF 2 (US qt, Imp qt) (12.7 13.2, (10.1 10.6,
10.6 11.0) 8.4 8.8)
1.3 1.5 1.3 1.5
Front differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) (1.4 1.6, (1.4 1.6,
1.1 1.3) 1.1 1.3)
Rear differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.8 (0.8, 0.7)
Power steering fluid 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.7 (0.7, 0.6)
Engine coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7) 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) 6.6 (7.0, 5.8) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
SPC-5
12LE_US.book 6
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
2. OUTBACK
A: DIMENSION
1. OUTBACK MODEL
Model 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Overall length mm (in) 4,780 (188.2)
Overall width mm (in) 1,820 (71.7)
Overall height (at C.W.) mm (in) 1,680 (66.1), 1,670 (65.7)*1
Wheelbase mm (in) 2,740 (107.9)
Front mm (in) 1,550 (61.0)
Tread
Rear mm (in) 1,550 (61.0)
Minimum road clearance mm (in) 220 (8.7)
*1:
When crossbar is stored
B: ENGINE
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled, Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled,
Engine type
4-cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine 6-cylinder, 4-stroke gasoline engine
Valve arrangement Overhead camshaft
Bore stroke mm (in) 99.5 79.0 (3.92 3.11) 92.0 91.0 (3.622 3.583)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.94) 3,630 (221.5)
Compression ratio 10.0 10.5
Ignition order 1324 163254
Idle speed at Park or 650100(MT)
rpm 700100
Neutral position 675100(CVT)
Maximum output kW (HP)/rpm 127 (170)/5,600 191 (256)/6,000
Maximum torque Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)/rpm 230 (23.5, 170)/4,000 334 (34.1, 247)/4,400
C: ELECTRICAL
Ignition timing (at idling) BTDC 1010(MT), 1510(CVT) 158
Spark plug Type and manufacturer NGK: SIFR6A11 NGK: SILFR6C11
Generator 12 V 110 A 12 V 130 A
Battery Type and capacity (5HR) 12 V 52 AH (75D23R)
SPC-6
12LE_US.book 7
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
D: TRANSMISSION
1. MT
Transmission type 6MT
Clutch type DSPD
1st 3.454
2nd 1.947
3rd 1.296
Gear ratio 4th 0.972
5th 0.825
6th 0.695
Rev. 3.636
Type of gear Hypoid
Reduction gear (Front)
Gear ratio 4.444
Transfer Type of gear Helical
(Rear) Final Type of gear Hypoid
6MT: 6-forward and 1-reverse speeds with synchromesh for all gears
DSPD: Dry Single Plate Diaphragm
2. AT
Model 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Transmission type 5AT
Clutch type TCC
1st 3.540
2nd 2.264
3rd 1.471
Gear ratio
4th 1.000
5th 0.834
Rev. 2.370
Type of gear Hypoid
Gear ratio 3.083
5AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 5-forward speeds and 1-reverse

SPC-7
12LE_US.book 8
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
3. CVT
Transmission type CVT
Clutch type TCC
Forward 3.525 0.558
Change gear ratio
Rev. 2.358
Transfer reduction ratio 1.000
Type of gear Hypoid
Gear ratio 3.900

CVT: Forward continuously variable speed change and 1-reverse
E: STEERING
Model 2.5 L SOHC 3.6 L DOHC
Type Rack and pinion
Turns, lock to lock 3.2
Minimum turning Curb to curb 11.2 (36.7)
m (ft)
diameter Wall to wall 11.8 (38.7)
F: SUSPENSION
Front Macpherson strut type suspension
Rear Double wishbone type suspension
G: BRAKE
Service brake system Dual circuit hydraulic with vacuum suspended power unit
Front Ventilated disc brake
Rear Disc brake Ventilated disc brake
Parking brake Electric mechanical on rear brakes
Brake assist Standard equipment for all vehicles
H: TIRE
16 6 1/2JJ
Wheel size 17 7J
17 7J
P215/70 R16 99S
Tire size P225/60 R17 98T
P225/60 R17 98T
Type Tubeless, Steel belted radial
SPC-8
12LE_US.book 9
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
I: CAPACITY
2.5 L SOHC non-turbo 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
Model
6MT CVT 5AT
Fuel tank 2 (US gal, Imp gal) 70 (18.5, 15.4)
Total capacity
2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2) 7.8 (8.2, 6.9)
(at overhaul)
When replacing
Engine oil Filling amount of engine oil and oil 4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 4.2 (4.4, 3.7) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
engine oil filter
2 (US qt, Imp qt) When replacing
4.0 (4.2, 3.5) 6.3 (6.7, 5.5)
engine oil only
Transmission gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 3.7 (3.9, 3.3)
12.0 12.5 9.6 10.0
ATF or CVTF 2 (US qt, Imp qt) (12.7 13.2, (10.1 10.6,
10.6 11.0) 8.4 8.8)
Front differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 1.3 1.5 (1.4 1.6, 1.1 1.3)
Rear differential gear oil 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.8 (0.8, 0.7)
Power steering fluid 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.7 (0.7, 0.6)
Engine coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7) 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
SPC-9
12LE_US.book 10
OUTBACK
SPECIFICATIONS
SPC-10
12LE_US.book 1
PRECAUTION
PC
Page
1. Precaution ..................................................................................................2
12LE_US.book 2
Precaution
PRECAUTION
1. Precaution 6. AIRBAG
To prevent bodily injury from unexpected deploy-
A: CAUTION ment of airbags and unnecessary maintenance, fol-
Please clearly understand and adhere to the follow- low the instructions in this manual when performing
ing general precautions. They must be strictly fol- maintenance on the airbag components and near-
lowed to avoid minor or serious injury to the person by, around front of the vehicle (radiator panel, front
doing the work or people in the area. wheel apron, front side frame, front bumper, front
hood panel, front fender panel), around side of the
1. VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL (VDC) vehicle (front door panel, rear door panel, center
Handle the VDC as a total system. Do not disas- pillar, rear fender panel, side sill, rear wheel apron),
semble or attempt to repair parts which are not in- around rear of the vehicle (the rear seat cushion,
structed in this manual. Follow the directions in this rear floor pan, rear crossmember) and the airbag
manual when performing maintenance on the VD- wiring harnesses and nearby.
CCM&H/U. When parts other than those specified To prevent unexpected deployment, turn the igni-
are disassembled, it is possible that the VDC sys- tion switch to OFF and disconnect the ground cable
tem will not operate when needed or cause it to op- from battery, then wait at least 60 seconds to dis-
erate incorrectly and result in injury. charge backup power supply before starting work.
2. ELECTRONIC PARKING BRAKE 7. AIRBAG AND SEAT BELT PRETEN-
Handle the electronic parking brake as a total sys- SIONER DISPOSAL
tem. Do not disassemble or attempt to repair indi- To prevent bodily injury from unexpected airbag
vidual parts. Doing so could prevent the electronic deployment, do not dispose the airbag modules or
parking brake system from operating when need- seat belt pretensioner in the same way as other
ed, or the system may operate incorrectly and re- waste. Follow the special instructions for disposal
sult in injury. in this manual. Follow all government regulations
3. BRAKE FLUID concerning disposal of refuse.
If brake fluid gets in your eyes or on your skin, do 8. AIRBAG MODULE
the following: Adhere to the following when handing and storing
Wash eyes and seek immediate medical atten- the airbag module to prevent bodily injury from un-
tion. expected deployment:
Wash your skin with soap and then rinse thor- Do not hold the harnesses or connectors to carry
oughly with water. the module.
4. RADIATOR FAN Do not face the bag in the direction that it opens
towards yourself or other people.
The radiator fan may rotate without warning, even Do not face the bag in the direction that it opens
when the engine is not ON. Do not place your hand, towards the floor or walls.
cloth, tools or other items near the fan at any time.
9. AIRBAG SPECIAL TOOL
5. ROAD TEST
To prevent unexpected deployment, only use spe-
Always conduct road tests in accordance with traf- cial tools.
fic rules and regulations to avoid bodily injury and
interrupting traffic. 10.WINDOW
Always wear safety glasses when working around
any glass to prevent glass fragments from damag-
ing your eyes.
11.WINDOW ADHESIVE
Always use the recommended or equivalent adhe-
sive when attaching glass to prevent it from coming
falling, resulting in accidents and injury.
PC-2
12LE_US.book 3
Precaution
PRECAUTION
12.OIL 16.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OPERA-

When handling oil, adhere to the following to pre- TION OF HOSES, ETC.
vent unexpected accident. 1. Before the removal and installation operation
Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scatter- of hoses, etc.
ing of fuels when performing work where oil can be
spilled. If the oil spills, wipe it off immediately to pre- If you keep using the damaged or deformed
vent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for hose, it results bleeds or leakage of the fat adheres
environmental protection. or disconnection of the hose. Be careful not to spill
Follow all government and local regulations con- fat adheres on exhaust pipes, etc. during mainte-
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing. nance to prevent emitting smoke or causing fires.
Perform the operation with the hose removed. If
13.FUEL the operation is performed without removing the
When handling and storing fuel, carefully observe hose, it may damage inner surface of the hose.
the following to prevent unexpected accidents. 2. Removal and installation operation of hoses,
Be careful with fire. etc. during the inspection
Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scatter-
Follow the instructions below when remov-
ing of fuels when performing work where fuels can
ing hose.
be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe it off immediately to
prevent it from penetrating the floor or flowing out, Do not use a pointed hose remover (hose
to protect the environmental. plucker) when using a general hose remover. It
may damage the pipe surface or the hose.
Follow all government and local regulations con-
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing.
14.ENGINE COOLANT
NG
N G
When handling engine coolant, adhere to the fol-
lowing to prevent from unexpected accident.
Never remove the radiator cap since engine
coolant may blow out when it is hot.
ing of engine coolant when performing work where
engine coolant can be spilled. If the oil spills, wipe it (1)
off immediately to prevent from penetrating into
floor or flowing out for environmental protection.
OKK
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing.
15.AIR CONDITIONER REFRIGERANT
In order to prevent from global warming, avoid re-
leasing air conditioner refrigerant into the atmo-
sphere. Using a refrigerant recovery system,
discharge and reuse it.
(1)
PC-00065
(1) Hose remover
When draining hose using pliers, be sure to

cover the hose with cloth and rotate the hose
slightly to extract straight.
PC-3
12LE_US.book 4
Precaution
PRECAUTION
If you keep using the hose, perform the in-

spection below and replace the hose with a new
part if faulty. (1)
Replace the hose with a new part if it rides
over the stay or spool.
(1)
PC-00070
(1) Push against the spool. (Insert the hose and

prevent it from becoming wrinkled.)
(2) Tighten the hose outwards and apply force thor-
oughly.
PC-00071
(1) Hose rides over the stay Check if the position, direction and hose lay-
out of the hose clamp are correct. (Check if the
position, direction, length and the gap around
are correct, or if it is different from the condition
(1) before the work)
After the installation, check that the hose is in-
stalled securely and there is no leakage. (Check
if it is fixed securely with the clamp)
For hose clips and hose clamps, perform the
inspection below and replace them with a new
part if faulty.
Check for deformation, rust, damage or for-
PC-00073
eign matters.
(1) Hose rides over the spool For hose clip, check if it works and has clamp-
ing force.
Check if the surface and the inner surface of For hose clamp, check if it can tighten screw,
the hose are damaged, cracked, bend, hard- not ovalized or the screw is not damaged.
ened, softened, swelled, peeled or deformed For hose pipes, perform the inspection below
due to the adherence or the entry of the foreign and replace with a new part if faulty.
matter by bending the hose. Replace with the Check if the pipe is not damaged, rusted, peeled
new part if faulty. (peeled plates included), covered with foreign
Follow the instructions below during installa- matter, bent, compressed or cracked.
tion. For the parts below, replaces with a new part
Check carefully for assembling position. when the hose is removed or the installation
Never use lubricants. position is changed.
Insert the hose to the specified position (stop- ATF cooler hose, engine oil cooler hose, power
per or spool) securely. steering suction hose, power steering return
hose, fuel hose (delivery/return)
(2) (1)
PC-00074
PC-4
12LE_US.book 1
NOTE
NT
Page
1. Note ............................................................................................................2
12LE_US.book 2
Note
NOTE
1. Note
A: BASIC REPAIR HINT
This section describes basic points that the service operator must understand before performing the service
operation.
1. APPEARANCE
Always wear clean work clothing.
Wear a cap and protective shoes.
2. PROTECTION OF VEHICLE UNDER MAINTENANCE AND PREPARATION OF TOOLS/
EQUIPMENT
Before work, cover the vehicle body. (Ex. grille cover, fender cover, seat cover and floor mat cover)
Before performing the service operation, prepare tools, equipment, container box, grease and cloth etc.
(1)
(2) (3) (4)
(5) (6)
NT-00368
(1) Fender cover (3) Tray (5) Container box

(2) Tools/equipment case (4) Oil (6) Cloth
3. SAFETY
Before work, set the wheel stoppers to secure the vehicle.
When performing work by multiple workers, call to each other to make sure that service operation is per-
formed safely.
Before starting engine, ventilate the room.
When performing the service operation of high-temperature parts like muffler, rotating parts like fan and
other movable parts, be careful not to get burned or injured.
For the jack-up and lift up, set the tool to the proper location to support the vehicle correctly. And use the
safety device properly when lifting up.
4. SERVICE OPERATION
By identifying the vehicle problems thoroughly before work, service operation will be performed effectively.
Before removing parts, confirm the installation condition or the damage of the parts.
To reinstall parts properly, leave a note of the condition before work as necessary.
For a part which needs positioning, take appropriate action such as putting alignment marks.
For a removed part, clean it as necessary and check for damage and defect before installation.
NT-2
12LE_US.book 3
Note
NOTE
5. REMOVED PART 4. BACKUP/POWER SUPPLY FUSE

A removed part must be organized to avoid mix- Right after the vehicle has arrived, 10A backup
ing up with similar parts. When same parts are fuse is removed to avoid run-down of the battery.
used in multiple locations, such as pistons in en- Connect the backup fuse as shown in the figure. Al-
gine, manage the parts by using labels with cylin- so, delivery mode is canceled by disconnecting the
der No. so that the parts are not installed to the backup fuse from the fuse holder.
wrong location.
Always replace nonreusable parts such as gas-
ket and O-ring with new parts.
After work, have a customer confirm the re-
placed part.
6. WHEN REMOVING BATTERY
When removing battery, power supply is cut off and
the information stored in the computer memory is
volatilized. Therefore, setting information of some
device is initialized to the factory default. The de-
vice and functions initialized by removing battery
are as follows.
Clock
Set temperature of fully automatic air conditioner (1)
Automatic full open/close of drivers window

(power window needs to be initialized)
User setting items in the navigation system
(3)
Past trouble history (memory code)
B: NOTE (2)
This is the information that can improve the effi- NT-00369
ciency of maintenance and assure the sound work.
(1) Backup fuse insertion slot
1. FASTENERS NOTICE (2) Backup fuse holder
Fasteners must be tightened to the specified (3) Backup fuse
torque.
Do not apply paint, lubricant, rust retardant or other 5. IMMOBILIZER RELATED PART
substance to the surface around bolts, nuts, etc.
Doing so will make it difficult to obtain the correct Do not replace parts which have immobilizer ID (all
torque and result in looseness and other problem. ignition key, combination meter, body integrated
unit, ECM, and security control module for Canada)
CAUTION: with the parts from other vehicle.
Do not spray parts cleaner directly to rubber
parts such as bushing or other resin parts. 6. SERVICE PARTS
Use genuine parts for maximum performance and
2. STATIC ELECTRICITY DAMAGE maintenance when conducting repairs. Subaru/FHI
Do not touch the control modules, connectors, logic will not be responsible for poor performance result-
boards and other such parts when there is a risk of ing from the use of parts except for genuine parts.
static electricity. Always use a static electricity pre-
vention cord or touch grounded metal for the elimi- 7. PROTECTING VEHICLE UNDER MAIN-
nation of static electricity before conducting work. TENANCE
Make sure to attach the fender cover, seat covers,
3. BATTERY etc. before work.
When removing the battery terminal, always be
sure to turn the ignition switch to OFF and remove 8. ENSURING SECURITY DURING WORK
the battery ground cable first. When working in a group of two or more, perform
the work with calling each other to ensure mutual
safety.
NT-3
12LE_US.book 4
Note
NOTE
9. LIFT AND JACK

When using a lift or shop jack to raise a vehicle or
using rigid rack to support a vehicle, always follow
instructions concerning jack-up points and weight
limits to prevent the vehicle from falling, which
could result in injury. Be especially careful that the
vehicle is balanced before raising it. Be sure to set
the wheel stoppers when jacking-up only the front
or rear side of the vehicle.
CAUTION:
Select the lift attachment so that the side sill
does not contact the lift arm.
NOTE:
When using a lift, follow its operation manual.
When the side sill cover contacts the lift arm, use
a lift attachment.
Do not work or leave unattended while the vehi-
cle is supported with jack, support it with rigid
racks.
Be sure to use the rigid racks with rubber at-
tached to cradle to support the vehicle.
When using a lift, use an attachment or some-
thing similar.
When using a plate lift, use a rubber attachment.
Place the attachment to the specified position of
the vehicle, by adjusting front/rear and left/right
sides accordingly.
(A)
(C)
(B)
NT-00070
(A) 80 mm (3.1 in) or more

(B) 80 100 mm (3.15 3.94 in)
(C) 120 170 mm (4.72 6.69 in)
Align the cushion rubber center part of plate lift

with the center part of rubber attachment.
NT-4
12LE_US.book 5
Note
NOTE
Do not use the plate lift whose attachment does not reach the supporting locations.
Support locations
(1) (1)
NT-00360
(1) Jack-up point
Pantograph jack
(1) (1)
NT-00427
(1) Jack-up point
NT-5
12LE_US.book 6
Note
NOTE
Lift
NT-00271
CAUTION:
For models with side under skirt, use a spacer or an attachment to lift up the vehicle securely at jack
up point, without contact of side under skirt and lift.
Rigid rack
NT-00384
NT-6
12LE_US.book 7
Note
NOTE
Plate lift
(1) (2) (1)
NT-00370
(1) Jack-up point (2) Attachment
Jack-up point (When using a garage jack)
(A)
(1)
(B)
(2)
NT-00382
(A) Front (B) Rear

(1) Front cradle (2) Rear differential
CAUTION:
If jacking up the front side of the vehicle, make sure that the jack is attached at the center of the jack-
up plate not at the sides.
NT-7
12LE_US.book 8
Note
NOTE
10.TIE-DOWNS
Tie-downs are used when transporting vehicles and when using the chassis dynamo. Attach tie-down only
to the specified locations on the vehicle.
Tie-down location
(2)
(1)
NT-00381
(1) Hook for tie-down (2) Tie-down hole
Chain direction at tie-down condition

CAUTION:
Pull the front and rear of the vehicle in the opposite direction, and pull the left and right of the ve-
hicle in the same direction.
Patterns except for the followings (recommended) are not allowed.
Recommended
Tie-down direction
NT-00214
NT-8
12LE_US.book 9
Note
NOTE
Tie-down range
For ground transportation
CAUTION:
When the vehicle is tied down from vehicle inside, hook the hooks of tie-down chain on the rear tie-
down hooks from vehicle inside. When the vehicle is tied down from vehicle outside, hook the hooks
of tie-down chain on the rear tie-down hooks from vehicle outside.
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
(B)
(A)
45 45
45 45
:(C)
NT-00385
(A) Front tie-down hook (B) Rear tie-down hole (C) Chain pulling range at tie-down
condition
NT-9
12LE_US.book 10
Note
NOTE
For sea transportation
45
(D) 45
(1
38
1.
8)
(E)
45
70
45
45
(A) (B)
45
45
(F)
:(C)
NT-00386
(A) Front tie-down hook (C) Chain pulling range at tie-down (E) 1,320 mm (52.0 in)
condition
(B) Tie-down hole or wheel spoke (D) 400 mm (15.7 in) (F) When rear wheel is tied down
CAUTION:
Basically, tie down using the tie-down hole.
Tie-down procedure should be followed as much as reasonably possible depending on the deck
condition, however, lashing belt and vehicle must not contact each other. Also, if a wheel tie-down
is conducted instead of using rear tie-down hole due to the vehicle loading condition of the deck,
follow the instructions below.
1. Tie-down range must be within the backward of rear wheel as shown in the figure.
2. Wheel tie-down should be used only during sea transportation, and lashing belt should not
contact air valve while tie-down. Be careful not damage the wheel and vehicle.
3. Maximum tie-down load to each lashing belt is 5000 N (510 kgf, 1124 lbf).
4. For steel wheel, do not tie down wheels.
NT-10
12LE_US.book 11
Note
NOTE
Vehicle sinking volume at tie-down condition

CAUTION:
The vehicle sinking volume at tie-down condition should be less than 50 mm (1.97 in) and make sure
to fix the vehicle securely.
Check to see if the tensions of chains or belts at tie-down condition are appropriate in the following
procedures.
1) Before tie-down, measure the distance between the highest tire point and highest arch point at the center
of wheel.
2) After tie-down, measure the distance between the highest tire point and highest arch point at the center of
wheel.
3) If the distance (A) between the measured value of 1) and 2) above, is less than 50 mm (1.97 in), it is judged
as OK. If the distance is 50 mm (1.97 in) or more, it is judged as NG because the tension is too high.
(B) (B)
(C) (C) (A)

(A)
NT-00414
(B) Arch position before tie-down (C) Arch position after tie-down
Notes for the use of tie-down hook

When the vehicle is tied down from vehicle inside, hook the hooks of tie-down chain from vehicle inside, and
when the vehicle is tied down from vehicle outside, hook the hooks of tie-down chain from vehicle outside.
For front tie-down hook, use S hook and J hook, and for rear tie-down hole, use S hook, J hook and T hook.
T hook can be used only for rear tie-down hole.
NT-11
12LE_US.book 12
Note
NOTE
11.TOWING
Avoid towing vehicles except when the vehicle cannot be driven. For models with AWD, AT or VTD, use a
loader instead of towing. When towing other vehicles, pay attention to the following to prevent hook or vehicle
damage resulting from excessive weight.
Do not tow other vehicles with a front tie-down hook.
Make sure the vehicle towing is heavier than the vehicle being towed.
Front
Remove the hook cover, and install the towing hook.
(A)
(B)
NT-00378
(A) Hook cover (B) Towing hook (eyebolt)
Rear
Remove the hook cover, and install the towing hook.
(A)
(B)
NT-00377
(A) Hook cover (B) Towing hook (eyebolt)
NT-12
12LE_US.book 13
Note
NOTE
Precautions
Towing Precautions MT AT
Lifting up four wheels (On a trailer) Towing the vehicle after lifting up all four wheels is a
basic rule for AWD model.
NT-00023
Rope Check if both front and rear wheels are rotated nor-
mally.
AT model driving conditions: Driving speed of 30 km/h
(19 MPH) or less
Allow driving distance 50 km (31 miles) or less
NT-00024
Raising the front wheels Prohibited for full-time AWD model.
NT-00025
Lifting up the front wheels Prohibited, due to damage on bumper, front grille, etc.
Do not raise the vehicle with bumper.
NT-00026
Marked : OK, Marked : Prohibited, Marked : Conditionally OK.
NT-13
12LE_US.book 14
Note
NOTE
CAUTION:
Place the shift lever in N position during towing.
Do not lift up the rear wheels to avoid unsteady rotation.
Turn the ignition key to ACC, then check the steering wheel moves freely. (Models without the
keyless access with push button start system)
Release the parking brake to avoid tire dragging.
Since the power steering does not work, be careful for the heavy steering effort. (When engine
is stopped)
Since the servo brake does not work, be careful that the brake is not applied effectively. (When
engine is stopped)
In case of the malfunction of internal transmission or drive system, lift up four wheels (on a trail-
er) for towing.
Do not use towing hook (eye bolt) except when towing.
Make sure to detach the towing hook (eye bolt) after towing. If it remains attached, airbag may
not operate properly when receiving a shock. And it may also affect the crash performance of the
vehicle.
12.CARRIER CAR
Before lowering the vehicle from the carrier car, perform the following operations.
CAUTION:
Always perform the following operations before lowering the vehicle from the carrier car. Otherwise,
the power unit will rotate reversely, which may cause the damage to the engine, vacuum pump, and
transmission.
1) Start the engine.
2) Set the transmission shift position into driving direction of the vehicle. (When the vehicle drives forward, do
not set the transmission into R range. When the vehicle drives rearward, do not set the transmission into
1 6 speed, or D range.)
CAUTION:
Be sure to perform 2) mentioned above even if the engine cannot be started in some reasons.
13.FRONT HOOD DAMPER STAY
1) Always perform works such as inspections and maintenance with both damper stays attached.
CAUTION:
At the inspection and general maintenance, do not detach the damper stays.
(1)
NT-00366
(1) Normal attached position
NT-14
12LE_US.book 15
Note
NOTE
2) When wider hood opening is necessary, set the damper stay below as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
<Ref. to EB-2, FRONT HOOD, COMPONENT, General Description.>
CAUTION:
Always perform works such as inspections and maintenance with both damper stays attached.
Do not leave one side of damper stay removed.
The hood cannot be closed with the hood damper on the full open side. When it is necessary to
close, tie the hood striker and the radiator panel with a string etc. to fix them.
After work, set the damper stays back to the normal position and tighten the bolts to the specified
torque.
(1)
(2)
NT-00367
(1) Normal attached position (2) Installation position at full open
14.GENERAL SCAN TOOL

Using general scan tools will greatly improve the efficiency of repairing engine electronic throttle controls.
Subaru Select Monitor can be used to diagnose the engine, VDC, air conditioner and other parts.
15.AWD CIRCUIT MEASURES
1) Full-time AWD MT model
Since viscous coupling (limited slip differential) is used in the center differential, cut-off of AWD circuit cannot
be carried out.
2) Full-time AWD 5AT model
Since VTD type is used in the center differential, cut-off of AWD circuit cannot be carried out.
3) Full-time AWD CVT model
Since electronically controlled MT-P hydraulic multi-plate clutch is adapted for center differential, switch to
FWD by using Subaru Select Monitor.
NT-15
12LE_US.book 16
Note
NOTE
16.SPEEDOMETER TEST (3) Conduct the speedometer test work.

1) Rear wheel free roller system CAUTION:
(1) Set the free roller on the floor of rear wheel Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not ac-
side securely according to the wheel base and celerate or decelerate suddenly during work.
rear tread of the vehicle.
(2) Let the vehicle ride on the tester and free 17.BRAKE TEST
roller gently. 1) Full-time AWD MT model
(1) Perform this test after driving the vehicle 2 to
CAUTION:
3 km (1.24 to 1.86 miles) on road in order to sta-
Fix the vehicle using a pulling metal (chain or
bilize the viscous torque of viscous coupling.
wire) to the front and rear towing hooks or tie-
down hook to prevent the lateral runout of front (2) Keep the front or rear wheels on the ground
wheels and springing out of vehicle. for this test.
NOTE:
Effect of the viscous torque on braking force will be
added approx. 25 kg compared with FWD model.
(A)
NT-00033
(C) (A)
(A) Free roller (B)
NT-00029
(3) Set the speedometer tester.
(4) Conduct the speedometer test work. (A) Brake tester
CAUTION: (B) Position for measuring front wheel
Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not ac- (C) Position for measuring rear wheel
celerate or decelerate suddenly during work.
2) Rear wheel jack-up system (3) When the brake dragging force is large.
(1) Set the vehicle on speedometer tester. Check the dragging of brake pad or brake
shoe.
CAUTION: Since it may be affected by the viscosity of
Fix the vehicle using a pulling metal (chain or viscous coupling, jack up either of the front or
wire) to the front and rear towing hooks or tie- rear two wheels to check the each wheel rota-
down hook to prevent the lateral runout of front tion condition with the viscous coupling affec-
wheels and springing out of vehicle. tion removed.
(2) Jack up the rear wheels and set the rigid 2) Full-time AWD AT model
racks to the specified locations of side sill. (1) Keep the front or rear wheels on the ground
during measurement.
(A) (A)
NT-00034 (C) (B)
NT-00029
(A) Rigid rack
(A) Brake tester
(B) Position for measuring front wheel
(C) Position for measuring rear wheel
NT-16
12LE_US.book 17
Note
NOTE
(2) When the brake dragging force is large.

Check the dragging of brake pad or brake
shoe.
Specifications:
Braking force
Rear wheel total 10% or more of load on front or rear
wheels
Difference between 8% or less of load on front or rear
right and left wheels
wheels
Grand total 50% or more of vehicle weight at the
time of test
When measurement is difficult to carry out

because both of front wheels are locked, break
force measurement in this condition conforms
to standard grand total.
18.ON THE CAR WHEEL BALANCING
CAUTION:
Carry out the procedures after measuring the
balance of each single tire.
Set the vehicle so that the front and rear
wheels are the same height.
Release the parking brake during measure-
ment.
Rotate each wheel by hands, and make sure it
rotates without dragging.
Do not operate the clutch quickly and do not
accelerate or decelerate suddenly during work.
When an error is indicated during engine
drive, do not use the motor drive together.
1) Set the rigid rack to the specified locations of
side sill, jack up the front or rear two wheels of non-
measuring side and set the pickup stands to two
wheels of measuring side.
(A)
(B) NT-00374
(A) Balancer body

(B) Pickup stand (left and right)
2) For drive wheel, drive the tires with engine for

measurement.
3) For non-drive wheel, drive the tires from the on
the car wheel balancer for measurement.
NT-17
12LE_US.book 18
Note
NOTE
NT-18
12LE_US.book 1
IDENTIFICATION
ID
Page
1. Identification ...............................................................................................2
12LE_US.book 2
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
1. Identification
A: IDENTIFICATION
1. IDENTIFICATION NUMBER & LABEL LOCATIONS
The V.I.N. (Vehicle Identification Numbers) is used to classify the vehicle.
POSITIONING OF THE PLATE LABEL FOR IDENTIFICATION
(4)
(5) (3)
(1)
(2)
ID-00320
(1) Vehicle identification number (3) VIN cover (turbo model) (5) VIN plate
(V.I.N.)
(2) FMVSS label (U.S. model) (left (4) Intercooler (turbo model)
side)
CMVSS label (Canada model)
(left side)
Model No. label (Korea model)
(right side)
ENGINE
(1)
(2)
ID-00059
(1) Engine serial number (punch mark)

(2) Engine type (casting) crankcase upper side
ID-2
12LE_US.book 3
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REAR DIFFERENTIAL

5AT T-type
(1)
(1)
ID-00314 ID-00257
(1) Transmission serial number label and AT type (1) Identification (white paint)
label
VA1-type
CVT
(2)
(3) (1)
ID-00312
(1)
ID-00358
(1) Type (label)
(1) Label
(2) CVT type label VA2-type
(3) Transmission serial No. label
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
6MT
(1)
DI-00607
(1)
(1) Type (label)
ID-00359
(1) Transmission serial number label and MT type

label
ID-3
12LE_US.book 4
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
FMVSS LABEL, CMVSS LABEL

Example (FMVSS label)
ID-00321
MODEL NUMBER LABEL
ID-00322
ID-4
12LE_US.book 5
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
2. MEANING OF V.I.N.
The meaning of the V.I.N. is as follows:
]4S3BMAA6XC1002001[
The starting and ending brackets ( ] [ ) are stop marks.
Digits Code Meaning Details
13 4S3 Manufacturer body area 4S3: All models except OUTBACK model for C0
4S4: OUTBACK for C0
4 B Car line B: LEGACY/OUTBACK
5 M Body type M: Sedan
R: Wagon
6 A Total emission and des- A: 2.5 L non-turbo for U4
tination B: 2.5 L non-turbo for U5
C: 2.5 L non-turbo for U6
D: 3.6 L non-turbo for U5
E: 3.6 L non-turbo for U6
F: 2.5 L turbo for U4
G: 2.5 L non-turbo for C0
H: 2.5 L non-turbo for C5
J: 3.6 L non-turbo for C0
K: 2.5 L turbo for C0
L: 2.5 L non-turbo for C6
M: 3.6 L non-turbo for C6
7 A Grade A: Base
B: Premium
C: Premium + cold weather package
D: Premium + harman/kardon
E: Premium + M/R
F: Premium + harman/kardon + cold weather package
G: Premium + M/R + cold weather package
H: Premium + M/R + cold weather package + harman/kardon
J: Limited + harman/kardon
K: Limited + harman/kardon + M/R
L: Limited + M/R + navigation
M: Limited + M/R
8 6 Restraint system or 6: Manual belt, dual airbag, side airbag for seat back + curtain airbag
GVWR Class for roof (except for OUTBACK model)
C: Manual belt, dual airbag, side airbag for seat back + curtain airbag
for roof, class C (GVWR 4001 5000 lb) (for OUTBACK model)
9 X Check digit 09&X
10 C Model year C: 2012MY
11 1 Transmission type 1: Full-time AWD 6MT
2: Full-time AWD 5AT
3: Full-time AWD CVT
12 17 002001 Serial number 002001 199999: Sedan
200001 399999: Wagon
ID-5
12LE_US.book 6
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
3. MODEL NUMBER PLATE

The model number plate indicates: the applied model, the option code, the trim code, the engine type, the
transmission type, and the exterior color code. This information is helpful when placing orders for parts.
BM9CY4M
1 B Series LEGACY
2 M Body type M: Sedan
R: Wagon
3 9 Total engine displace- 9: 2.5 L AWD
ment F: 3.6 L AWD
Drive system
Suspension system
4 C Model year C: 2012MY
5 Y Destination Y: U.S.A., Canada
6 4 Grade 4: 2.5 i
5: 2.5 i Premium
6: 2.5 i Limited
C: 2.5 GT Premium
D: 2.5 GT Limited
F: 3.6 R
G: 3.6 R Premium
H: 3.6 R Limited
K: OUTBACK 2.5 i
L: OUTBACK 2.5 i Premium
M: OUTBACK 2.5 i Limited
S: OUTBACK 3.6 R
T: OUTBACK 3.6 R Premium
U: OUTBACK 3.6 R Limited
7 M Transmission, fuel feed 9: SOHC MFI CVT
system M: SOHC MFI 6MT
U: DOHC MFI 5AT
X: DOHC MFI turbo 6MT
ID-6
12LE_US.book 7
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
The engine and transmission type are as follows.

Engine
EJ253CDAFB
1 and 2 EJ Engine type EJ: 4-cylinder
EZ: 6-cylinder
3 and 4 25 Displacement 25: 2.5 L
36: 3.6 L
5 3 Fuel feed system 3: MFI non-turbo (SOHC)
5: MFI turbo
D: MFI non-turbo (DOHC, H6)
6 C Emission regulations A: For states not using California emission standards
B: For all states
C: For states using California emission standards
7 D Mounted transmission C: D5AT
D: 6MT (T75)
U: CVT
8 10 AFB Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts. For details, refer to the parts cata-
log.
Transmission
1. MT
TY756VLCCA
1 T Transmission T: Transmission
2 Y Transmission system Y: Full-time AWD MT center differential
3 and 4 75 Distance between gear 75: Between main shaft and drive pinion
center
5 6 Classification 6: 6MT
6 V Transmission specifica- V: Full-time AWD 6MT single range with viscous coupling cen-
tions ter differential
7 L Mounted engine H: 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo
L: 2.5 L DOHC turbo
8 10 CCA Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts. For details, refer to the parts cata-
log.
2. AT
TG5D8CJAAA
2 G Transmission type G: Full-time AWD 5AT center differential
3 and 4 5D Identification 5D: 5AT
5 8 Series 8: 5AT
6 C Transmission specifica- C: Full-time AWD VTD 5AT
tions
7 J Equipped vehicle J: 3.6 L DOHC non-turbo
8 10 AAA Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts. For details, refer to the parts cata-
log.
ID-7
12LE_US.book 8
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
3. CVT
TR690JHBAA
2 R Transmission type R: Full-time AWD CVT
3 and 4 69 Distance between gear 69: Between pulley centers
center
5 0 Classification 0: CVT
6 J Transmission specifica- J: Active torque split type full-time AWD CVT
tions
7 H Mounted engine H: 2.5 L SOHC non-turbo
8 10 BAA Detailed specifications Used when ordering parts. For details, refer to the parts cata-
log.
Rear differential
Code Reduction gear ratio LSD
B1 4.111 None
B2 3.900 None
XC 3.083 None
XD 3.700 None
T2 4.111 None
TP 4.444 None
ID-8
12LE_US.book 9
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
Option
U5AB
12 U5 Destination C0: Canada
C5: Canada (PZEV)
C6: Korea
U4: USA
U5: USA (for states using California emission standards)
U6: USA (for states not using California emission standards)
3 A Option equipment A: Cruise control
B: A package, power seat, cruise control
C: A package, power seat, genuine leather seat, cruise control
D: A package, cruise control
2: A package, power seat, cruise control, rearview camera
(rearview mirror with display)
3: A package, power seat, genuine leather seat, cruise control,
rearview camera (rearview mirror with display)
4: A package, power seat, genuine leather seat, cruise control,
rearview camera (navigation display)
4 B Option equipment A: Winter pack, side & curtain airbag
B: Side & curtain airbag
C: Winter pack, side & curtain airbag, sunroof
D: Side & curtain airbag, sunroof
E: Winter pack, navigation + wide monitor, side & curtain air-
bag, sunroof
F: Dark colored glass, winter pack, side & curtain airbag, sun-
roof
G: Dark colored glass, side & curtain airbag, sunroof
H: Dark colored glass, winter pack, navigation + wide monitor,
side & curtain airbag, sunroof
I: Dark colored glass, winter pack, side & curtain airbag
J: Dark colored glass, side & curtain airbag
V: Harman/kardon audio, side & curtain airbag, sunroof, winter
pack
W: Harman/kardon audio, side & curtain airbag, winter pack
Y: Dark colored glass, winter pack, harman/kardon audio, side
& curtain airbag, sunroof
Z: Dark colored glass, winter pack, harman/kardon audio, side
& curtain airbag
ID-9
12LE_US.book 10
Identification
IDENTIFICATION
ID-10
12LE_US.book 1
RECOMMENDED MATERIALS
RM
Page
1. Recommended Materials ...........................................................................2
12LE_US.book 2
Recommended Materials
1. Recommended Materials
A: RECOMMENDED MATERIALS
1. GENERAL
To insure the best performance, always use the specified oil, gasoline, adhesive, sealant, etc. or a substitute
of equivalent quality.
2. FUEL
Use unleaded gasoline to reduce air pollution, because using leaded gasoline will damage the catalytic
converter.
Do not use the low quality gasoline, or improper fuel such as diesel fuel, fuel alcohol, or gasoline additive
because they will adversely affect on engine components.
Always use gasoline that is equivalent to that prescribed in the owners manual or that of high octane val-
ue. There is the possibility of damaging or improper operation of the engine and fuel injection system if the
specifications are not observed. Use the prescribed gasoline type to maintain proper vehicle performance.
3. LUBRICANTS
Use the lubricants shown in the table below, or equivalent. See the table below to choose the correct SAE
viscosity.
Recommended materials
Lubricant
API standard ILSAC standard
Engine oil SM or SN grade Energy conserving GF-4 or GF-5
Choose oil suitable for the standard
from the right.
TR OLEUM
PE
N
IN
FOR
AM ER I CA
ST I
GASOLINE
TUTE
ENGINES
C
ER D
T I F IE
RM-00076 RM-00002
Those with the above API service labels Those with the above ILSAC certification
mark (Starburst mark)
Manual transmission gear oil GL-5
Front differential gear oil GL-5
Rear differential gear oil GL-5
RM-2
b12usena05.fm 3
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Engine oil
Non-turbo model
(C) 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40
(F) 22 4 14 32 50 68 86 104
(1)
RM-00075
(1) 5W-30 (synthetic oil) Recommended
Turbo model
(C) 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40
(F) 22 4 14 32 50 68 86 104
(1)
RM-00075
(1) 5W-30 (synthetic oil) Required
RM-3
b12usena05.fm 4
SAE viscosity No. and applicable temperature

Manual transmission gear oil, rear differential gear oil, AT and CVT front differential gear oil
(C) 30 20 10 0 10 20 30 40
(F) 22 4 14 32 50 68 86 104
90
85W
80W
75W-90
RM-00004
4. FLUID
Use the fluids specified in the table below. Do not mix two different kinds or makes of fluid.
CAUTION:
Be sure to use the recommended or equivalent ATF or CVTF. Using material except recommended
one or substitute would cause trouble.
Fluid Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Automatic transmission SUBARU CVT OIL FOR
CVT K0425Y0710
fluid LINEARTRONIC
5AT SUBARU ATF IDEMITSU: ATF HP
Power steering fluid SUBARU PS fluid K0515YA000 DEXRON III
Brake fluid FMVSS No. 116 DOT3, or DOT4
Clutch fluid FMVSS No. 116 DOT3
5. COOLANT
Use genuine coolant to protect the engine.
Engine coolant Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Coolant SUBARU SUPER COOLANT
K0670Y0001
(Concentrated type)
SUBARU SUPER COOLANT

(Diluted type)
Cooling system protective
Cooling system conditioner SOA345001
agent
6. REFRIGERANT
Standard air conditioners on Subaru vehicles use HFC134a refrigerant. Do not mix it with other refrigerants.
Also, do not use any compressor oil other than DENSO OIL 8.
Air Conditioner Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Refrigerant HFC134a
Compressor oil DENSO OIL 8
RM-4
12LE_US.book 5
7. GREASE
Use grease and supplementary lubricants shown in the table below.
Grease Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Supplementary
Oxygen sensor Spray type lubricant
lubricants
MT main shaft (spline parts)
MT main shaft (oil seal lip)
Clutch operating cylinder NICHIMOLY N-130
Release bearing
Clutch release lever
Clutch master cylinder push rod SILICONE GREASE G-40M
Gear shift lever Multemp HL-D
Clutch pedal NIGTIGHT LYW

Brake pedal No. 2 grease
Select lever Multemp D
Door latch
SILICONE GREASE G-30M 004404002
Door striker
Grease ONE LUBER SG or
Steering gearbox VALIANT GREASE M2 003608001
MO
Disc brake (Lock pin, guide pin, Brake grease
000041000
piston boot) (NIGLUBE RX-2)
Between brake pad and shim Molykote AS-880N K0777YA010
Molykote M7439
Brake pad clip
(Brake Grease 60G)
Front axle AC Olistamoly 2LN584/L0
Front axle AAR One-Luber GKN-C
Rear axle BJ
NKG106
Rear axle EBJ
Rear axle DOJ NKG205
8. ADHESIVE
Use the adhesives shown in the table below, or equivalent.
Adhesive Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Adhesive Windshield, rear window Dow Automotives adhesive:
glass, rear quarter glass, rear ESSEX U-400HV or the
gate glass and body equivalent

Glass primer: U-401 and U-
402
Painted surface primer: U-413
Rearview mirror base REPAIR KIT IN MR 65029FC000
RM-5
12LE_US.book 6
9. SEAL MATERIAL
Use the seal material shown in the table below, or equivalent.
Seal material Application point Recommended materials Item number Alternative
Seal material MT transmission case
MT extension case
MT transmission cover
5AT converter case
CVT transmission case
THREE BOND 1215 004403007 DOW CORNING No. 7038
CVT intermediate case
CVT extension case
CVT converter cover
CVT chain cover
CVT drive pinion retainer
Transmission oil pan (AT and CVT
THREE BOND 1217B K0877YA020
model)
Engine oil pan (block lower) (except
for 3.6 L model)
Cylinder block lower (cylinder block)
(except for 3.6 L model)
Camshaft cap
Oil pump (Except for 3.6 L model)
Strainer (3.6 L model)
Rocker cover (except for 2.5 L non-
turbo model) THREE BOND 1217G K0877Y0100
Oil pan (oil pan upper) (3.6 L model)
Block (oil pan upper) (3.6 L model)
Chain cover (block, head, oil pan
upper, front cam shaft cap) (3.6 L
model)
Separator cover (except for 3.6 L
model)
Scavenge pump (turbo model)
Engine oil pressure switch
Rear differential
Oil return cover mounting bolt (turbo
model)
Engine oil separator cover (when
reusing bolts) (turbo model)
Engine oil pump mounting bolt THREE BOND 1324 004403042
(when reusing the bolt) (except for 3.6
L model)
Timing belt guide cam sprocket side
mounting bolt (when reusing bolts)
(turbo model)
PCV valve (3.6 L model)
Rear differential
Service hole plug (Except for 3.6 L
THREE BOND 1105 004403010 DOW CORNING No. 7038
model)
Intake manifold nipple
Steering adjusting screw THREE BOND 1102 004403006 THREE BOND 1215
Front sealing cover (door)
3M Butyl Rubber 8626
Rear sealing cover (door)
Rear differential (side retainer bolt) THREE BOND 1110B K0879Y0020
RM-6
12LE_US.book 1
PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
PI
Page
1. Pre-delivery Inspection ...............................................................................2
12LE_US.book 2
Pre-delivery Inspection
1. Pre-delivery Inspection
A: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The purposes of the pre-delivery inspection (PDI) are as follows.
Remove the additional parts used for ensuring the vehicle quality during transportation and restore the ve-
hicle to its normal condition.
Check the vehicle before delivery is in normal condition.
Check the vehicle has no damage and no vehicle protective parts are missing while shipped or stored in
a car barn.
Make sure to deliver a complete vehicle to customer.
For above reasons, all SOA service center must carry out the PDIs before delivery of vehicle.
Besides, all SOA service center and PDI center check the condition of all vehicles to make sure to take re-
sponsibility.
B: PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION (PDI) PROCEDURE
Static Checks Just after Vehicle Receipt
Operation Check point
1. Appearance 1. If the vehicle is covered with protective coating, visually check the vehicle
body for damage and dents. If the protective coating has been removed,
visually check the painted body surfaces in detail for damage or rust.
2. Visually check the glass and light lenses for any damage, cracks or exces-
sive gaps between body sheet metal.
3. Visually check the plated parts for any damage.
4. Check the instrument panel, console and trim for stains or dirt.
2. Tire 1. Check the tires for damage, defective, and dents on wheels.
2. Check the tire air pressure.
3. Fuses If the vehicle is about to be delivered to customer, attach a back-up fuse.
4. Lock/unlock and open/close operation checks 1. Using the key, check the door can be locked or unlocked normally.
of doors. 2. Open and close all doors to check that there are no problems.
3. Operate the power door lock switch to check that all doors and the rear
gate lock and unlock normally.
5. Child safety lock Check the child safety lock system operates normally.
6. Trunk lid open/close operations 1. Press the trunk opener switch for approx. one second to check for normal
operation of the trunk lid.
2. Check that main and sub keys can lock/unlock the release lever, and that
valet key can not lock/unlock the release lever.
3. Open and close the trunk lid to see that there are no abnormal conditions.
7. Operation check of trunk lid release lever Operate the trunk lid release lever to check that the trunk lock is unlocked
normally.
8. Rear gate lock/unlock and open/close opera- 1. Open and close the rear gate to check that there are no problems.
tions 2. Check if the rear gate can be unlocked normally through the emergency
hole.
3. Operate the power door lock switch to check that all doors and the rear
gate lock and unlock normally.
9. Fuel lid opener lever Operate the fuel lid opener to check that the fuel lid is unlocked normally.
10. Accessory Check that the following accessories are provided.
Owners manual
Warranty booklet
Maintenance note
Spare key
Key number plate
Jack
Tool set
Spare tire
Towing hook (eyebolt (model with eyebolt))
Security ID plate
PI-2
12LE_US.book 3

11. Front hood lock release system Operate the front hood lock release lever to check that the front hood opens
normally.
12. Battery Check the battery for any abnormal conditions such as rust or traces of bat-
tery fluid leaks.
13. Brake fluid Check the brake fluid amount.
14. Engine oil Check the engine oil amount.
15. Transmission gear oil Check that the transmission gear oil level is normal.
16. AT front differential gear oil Check for leakage of AT front differential gear oil.
17. CVT front differential gear oil Check for no leakage of CVT front differential gear oil.
18. Rear differential gear oil Check for leakage of gear oil from the rear differential.
19. Engine coolant Check the engine coolant level.
20. Clutch fluid Check the clutch fluid amount.
21. Window washer fluid Check the window washer fluid amount.
22. Front hood latch Check that the front hood is closed normally and locked securely.
23. Keyless entry system Check that the keyless entry system operates normally.
24. Security system (Alarm system) Check that the security system (alarm system) operates normally.
25. Seat 1. Check the seat surfaces for stains or dirt.
2. Check the seat installation conditions and functionality.
3. Check that the occupant detection system for passengers seat operates
normally.
26. Seat belt 1. Check the seat belt installation conditions and functionality.
2. Check the seat belt warning system operates normally.
27. TPMS (U.S. model) 1. Turn the TPMS transmitter power supply to ON.
2. If the display of TPMS warning light does not operate normally, perform
the diagnosis by referring to TPMS (Diagnosis).
Checks with the Engine Running
28. Immobilizer system 1. Check that the engine starts with all keys that are equipped on vehicle.
2. 60 seconds after turning ignition switch from ON to ACC or OFF, or imme-
diately after removing the key, check that the security indicator light is blink-
ing.
29. Starting condition Start the engine and check that the engine starts smoothly.
30. Exhaust system Check that the exhaust noise is normal and no leaks are found.
31. Indicator and warning lights Check that all indicator lights and warning lights are operating correctly.
32. Heater & ventilation Check that the heater & ventilation system operates normally.
33. Air conditioner Check that the air conditioner operates normally.
34. Clock 1. Check that the clock operates normally.
2. Check for normal switch operation of fuel economy display.
35. Audio 1. Check that the audio system operates normally.
2. Check that the radio, CD and AUX systems operate normally.
36. Navigation system 1. Check all display functions for normal operation.
2. Check that the navigation, audio and AUX systems operate normally.
3. Check that the rearview camera operates normally.
37. Accessory power supply socket Check that the accessory power supply socket operates normally.
38. Lighting system Check that the lighting system operates normally.
39. Wiper deicer Check that the wiper deicer operates normally.
40. Illumination control Check that the illumination control operates normally.
41. Window washer Check that the window washer system operates normally.
42. Wiper Check that the wiper system operates normally.
43. Power window Check that the power window operates normally.
44. Sunroof Check that the sunroof operates normally.
45. Door mirror Check that the remote control mirror and heated mirror operate normally.
PI-3
12LE_US.book 4

46. Room mirror (RCD model) 1. Check all display functions for normal operation.
2. Check that the automatic anti-glare function operates normally.
3. Check that the compass function operates normally.
4. Check that the rearview camera operates normally.
47. Rear defogger Check that the rear defogger system operates normally.
48. Parking brake Check the parking brake for normal operations.
Dynamic Test with the Vehicle Running
49. Brake test Check the foot brake for normal operations.
50. AT, CVT shift control Check that the AT, CVT shifts normally.
51. MT shift control Check that the MT shifts normally.
52. Cruise control Check that the cruise control system operates normally.
Checks after Dynamic Test

53. ATF level Check that the ATF level is correct.
54. Power steering fluid level Check that the power steering fluid level is normal.
55. Fluid leakage Check for fluid/oil leaks.
56. Water leakage Spray the vehicle with water and check for water leaks.
57. Appearance 2 1. Remove the protective coat. (If attached)
2. Check the body paints for damage and stain.
3. Check the plated parts for damage and rust.
1. APPEARANCE
If the vehicle is covered with protective coating,
visually check the vehicle body for damage and
dents.
When the protective coating is removed, visually
check the body paints for damage or stains in detail
and repair as necessary.
Visually check the windshield glass, door glass-
es and light lenses for any damage, cracks or ex-
cessive gaps to the body sheet metal and repair as
necessary.
Visually check the plated parts, such as the
grilles and door knobs, for damage or loss of gloss
and replace the parts as necessary.
Check the instrument panel, console, and trims
for stains or dirt.
2. TIRE
Check the tires for damage, defective, and dents
on wheels.
Check and correct the tire size, spare tire and tire
air pressure described on the tire air pressure label
(drivers side).
PI-4
12LE_US.book 5
3. FUSE 4. LOCK/UNLOCK AND OPEN/CLOSE OP-

Right after the vehicle has arrived, 10A backup ERATION CHECKS OF DOORS
fuse is removed to avoid run-down of the battery. 1) Using the key, lock and unlock the door several
Connect the backup fuse as shown in the figure. Al- times to check for normal operation. Open and
so, delivery mode is canceled by disconnecting the close the door several times for smooth movement.
backup fuse from the fuse holder.
PI-00604
2) Completely close the drivers door, and then

check the smooth movement with operating door
lock knob from lock to unlock several times. Set the
door lock knob (A) to lock position. Then pull the in-
(1)
ner remote (B) to ensure that doors will not open.
For other doors, place the door lock knob (A) to lock
position and then pull the inner remote (B) to en-
sure that doors will not open.
(3)
(2) (A)
NT-00369
(1) Backup fuse insertion slot

(2) Backup fuse holder
(3) Backup fuse
(B)
PI-00612
(A) Door lock knob

(B) Inner remote
3) Close all the doors, and then press the lock on

power door lock switch at drivers side. Check that
all doors including rear gate are locked.
PI-00613
PI-5
12LE_US.book 6
4) Press the drivers side power door lock switch to 4) Pull the outer handles to ensure that doors will
unlock side. Check that all doors including rear open.
gate are unlocked.
6. OPEN/CLOSE OPERATION CHECKS OF
TRUNK LID
1) Press the trunk opener switch for approx. one
second to check for normal operation of the trunk
lid.
PI-00614
5) Check that the passengers side power door lock

switch locks and unlocks normally in the same
manner.
PI-00617
(A)
(B) 2) Open and close the trunk lid several times for
smooth movement.
3) Press the trunk opener lock button in the glove
box.
PI-00615
(A) Lock
(B) Unlock
6) Insert the key to ignition switch, and open the

drivers side door. Press lock on power door lock. PI-00609
Check that the door is not locked.
4) Check that the trunk lid will not open even when
5. CHILD SAFETY LOCK SYSTEM the trunk opener button is pressed.
1) Set the child safety lock on both rear doors to the
lock position.
2) Close the rear doors completely.
3) Check that the lock levers of the rear doors are in
the unlock position. Then, pull inner remote of rear
doors to ensure that the doors will not open.
(A)
(B)
PI-00616
(A) Lock
(B) Unlock
PI-6
12LE_US.book 7
7. TRUNK LID RELEASE HANDLE 8. LOCK/UNLOCK AND OPEN/CLOSE OP-

CAUTION: ERATIONS OF REAR GATE
Do not check the trunk lid release handle when 1) Open and close the rear gate several times for
in the trunk. If the trunk lid release handle is de- smooth movement.
fective, you may be trapped in. 2) Operate the rear gate lever to check that the rear
1) Use a flat tip screwdriver. Slide in the screwdriv- gate is locked and unlocked normally.
er through the clearance at the lock assembly until (1) Remove the cover inside the rear gate.
a click sound is heard. This is the latch lock posi-
tion.
PI-00605
(2) Operate the lever to check that the rear gate

PI-00248 is locked and unlocked normally.
2) Make sure the latch is released by pulling the
yellow trunk lid release handle in the direction of ar-
row.
PI-00606
9. FUEL LID OPENER LEVER

PI-00610 Operate the fuel lid opener to check that the fuel lid
is unlocked normally. Check that the filler cap is se-
curely closed.
PI-7
12LE_US.book 8
10.ACCESSORY Wagon model

Check that the following accessories are provided.
Owners manual
(A) (B)
Warranty booklet
Maintenance note
Spare key
Key number plate (D)
Jack
Tool set (C)
Spare tire
Towing hook (eyebolt (model with eyebolt)) PI-00666
Security ID plate
Sedan model (A) Jack handle
(B) Spare tire
(C) Jack
(D) Towing hook (eyebolt)
11.OPERATION CHECK OF FRONT HOOD

(A) LOCK RELEASE SYSTEM
Operate the front hood lock release lever (A) to
check that the front hood is unlocked normally.
(C)
(A)
(D)
PI-00607
Operate the lever (B) and check that the front hood
(B) is opened normally. Check that the front hood can
PI-00665 be supported by damper stay.
(A) Jack handle
(B) Spare tire
(C) Jack
(D) Towing hook (eyebolt)
(B)
PI-00608
PI-8
12LE_US.book 9
12.BATTERY 3.6 L model

Check the battery terminals to make sure that there
are no rust or corrosions due to fluid leaks. (A) (B)
(C)
(E)
(D)
LU-02555
(A) Oil level gauge

PI-00250
(B) Engine oil filler cap
13.BRAKE FLUID (C) F line
CAUTION: (D) L line
If the brake fluid is spilt over exhaust pipe, wipe (E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
it off with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or
causing a fire. 15.TRANSMISSION GEAR OIL
Check that the brake fluid level is normal. If the CAUTION:
amount is insufficient, carry out a brake line test to If transmission gear oil is spilt over the exhaust
identify brake fluid leaks and check the brake oper- pipe, wipe it off with a cloth to avoid emitting
ation. After that, refill the brake fluid tank with the smoke or causing a fire.
specified type of fluid. Check that the transmission gear oil level is normal.
14.ENGINE OIL If the amount of gear oil is insufficient, check that no
leaks are found. Then add the necessary amount of
CAUTION: the specified transmission gear oil.
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe
it off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
causing a fire. (A)
Check the engine oil amount. If the amount of oil is

insufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then,
add the necessary amount of the specified engine (B)
oil. (C)
2.5 L model
(A) (B) (F)

MT-02052
(C) (A) Oil level gauge

(B) Upper level
(E)
(C) Lower level
(D)
LU-02569
(A) Oil level gauge

(B) Engine oil filler cap
(C) F line
(D) L line
(E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
(F) Notch mark
PI-9
12LE_US.book 10
16.AT FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL 20.CLUTCH FLUID

CAUTION: CAUTION:
If the differential gear oil is spilt over exhaust If the clutch fluid is spilt over the exhaust pipe,
pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or
smoke or causing a fire. causing a fire.
Check that the AT front differential gear oil level is Check that the clutch fluid level is normal. If the
normal. If the amount of oil is insufficient, check amount of the fluid is insufficient, check that no
that no leaks are found. Then, add the necessary leaks are found. Then, add the necessary amount
amount of the specified AT front differential gear of the specified fluid.
oil.
(C)
(A)
F
(B)
(A)
(B)
L
CL-00753
AT-00017
(A) MAX. level
(A) Upper level (B) MIN. level
(B) Lower level (C) Reservoir tank
17.CVT FRONT DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL 21.WINDOW WASHER FLUID

CAUTION: Check that the window washer fluid level is normal.
If the front differential gear oil is spilt over ex- If the amount is insufficient, check that no leaks are
haust pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit- found. Then, add the necessary amount of washer
ting smoke or causing a fire. fluid.
Check for no leakage of CVT front differential gear
22.FRONT HOOD LATCH
oil.
Close the front hood. Check that the front hood is
18.REAR DIFFERENTIAL GEAR OIL securely latched.
CAUTION:
If the rear differential gear oil is spilt over ex-
haust pipe, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit-
ting smoke or causing a fire.
Check for leakage of gear oil from the rear differen-
tial.
19.ENGINE COOLANT
CAUTION:
If the engine coolant is spilt over exhaust pipe,
wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or
causing a fire.
Check that the engine coolant level on the reservoir
tank is normal. If the amount of engine coolant is in-
sufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then, add
the necessary amount of coolant with the specified
concentration.
PI-10
12LE_US.book 11
23.KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM 6) Press the UNLOCK button momentarily on the

keyless transmitter. Check that the drivers door is
NOTE:
unlocked and hazard light blinks twice and the
The following inspections show the initial settings.
buzzer sounds twice.
When the settings are different from the initial set-
And press the UNLOCK button momentarily
tings, use Subaru Select Monitor to check the de-
again in 5 seconds. Check that all doors (including
tails of each setting for inspections. <Ref. to
rear gate) are unlocked.
BC(diag)-16, OPERATION, User Customizing.>
1) Fully open all the door windows.
2) Remove the key from the ignition switch and
close all the doors including rear gate.
3) Press the rear gate and trunk open button for at
least one second.
Check if the trunk is opened and the hazard light
blinks twice and the buzzer sounds twice. (Sedan
model)
Check if the rear gate is unlocked and the hazard
light blinks twice and the buzzer sounds twice. PI-00662
(OUTBACK model) 7) Within a distance of 10 m from a vehicle, press
keyless transmitters LOCK button three times
within five seconds. Check that the horn honks
once and that the hazard light blinks three times.
8) Move the power door lock switch to the lock po-
sition with one of doors (including the rear gate)
opened. Next, close all the doors including rear
gate. Check if all doors are locked and buzzer
sounds once and the hazard light flashes once.
9) Check buzzer operation.
PI-00640 The buzzer sounds when the doors are locked or
unlocked. The buzzer can be turned off if desired.
4) Press the LOCK button on the keyless trans- Turn the buzzer off or on with following procedure.
mitter with one of the doors (including the rear gate
(1) Close all the doors including rear gate, then
and trunk) opened. Check if all doors are locked,
remove the key from ignition key lock.
hazard light blinks five times and the buzzer
(2) Press the power door lock switch to unlock
sounds five times and warning shows one of the
and hold it until the operation is finished.
doors (including the rear gate and trunk) open.
(3) Insert the key into ignition key lock, and in-
5) Close all the doors including rear gate and trunk.
sert and remove the key in ignition key lock 5
Press the LOCK button momentarily on the key-
times in 10 seconds.
less transmitter. Check that all the doors (including
rear gate and trunk) are locked, hazard light blinks (4) When finished step (3), open and close the
once and buzzer sounds once. drivers door once within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
When opening and closing of the door is not avail-
able within 10 seconds, hazard light blinks once
and the change over operation is cancelled. Retry
from the step (1).
(5) Hazard light blinks 3 times and the buzzer
sound turns ON or OFF.
PI-00639
PI-11
12LE_US.book 12
10) Press the PANIC button of the keyless trans- 4) Press the UNLOCK button momentarily on the
mitter. Check if the alarm condition happens (horn keyless transmitter. When the door of the drivers
sounds continuously, hazard light blinks, security seat is unlocked, the buzzer sounds twice, the haz-
indicator comes on). Check whether this condition ard light flashes twice, the room light turns on and
lasts until any button on the keyless transmitter is the security indicator light flashes once in three
pressed or lasts for 30 seconds. seconds, and the alarm system enters the release
mode.
PI-00641
PI-00662
24.SECURITY SYSTEM (ALARM SYSTEM)
5) Close all the doors including rear gate. Press the
NOTE: LOCK button momentarily on the keyless trans-
The following inspections show the initial settings. mitter. When all the doors are locked, buzzer
When the settings are different from the initial set- sounds once, hazard blinks once and the alarm
tings, use Subaru Select Monitor to check the de- system is in set condition in 30 seconds.
tails of each setting for inspections. <Ref. to 6) Unlock the door using the inner lock knob and
BC(diag)-16, OPERATION, User Customizing.> open the door while the alarm system is in the set
1) Fully open all the door windows. mode. Check if the alarm condition happens (horn
2) Remove the key from the ignition switch and sounds continuously, hazard light blinks, security
close all the doors including rear gate. indicator illuminates). Check if this condition lasts
3) Press the LOCK button momentarily on the for a maximum of three minutes or until the UN-
keyless transmitter. All doors are locked, and buzz- LOCK button of the keyless transmitter is pressed.
er sounds once, hazard blinks once, security indi-
cator light blinks faster (five times per two seconds) NOTE:
for 30 seconds and goes slower (twice per two sec- The alarm condition will cease in 30 seconds once
onds), then the alarm system is in set condition. the door is closed.
7) When none of above is applicable, perform trou-
bleshooting for the security system.
PI-00639
PI-12
12LE_US.book 13
25.SEAT (5) When the passengers seat belt is fastened,

1) Check the seat surfaces for stains or dirt. check that the passengers seat belt warning
2) Check that each seat provides full functionality in light turns off. (If no passenger is on the pas-
sliding and reclining. Check all available functions sengers seat, the seat belt warning light on
of the rear seat such as a trunk-through and center passengers seat does not operate.)
armrest. 27.TPMS
3) Check the passengers seat occupant detection 1) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and check TPMS
system. warning light for normal operation.
(1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Normal operation (IG ON (light check))
(2) Check the ON and OFF of passengers air-
bag indicator light come on simultaneously for
about 6 seconds and go off for 2 seconds, and
then only OFF illuminates again.
ON
(A)
OFF
2s
IGN ON
PI-00376
(B) 2) If the TPMS warning light display does not oper-

ate normally, check and repair the system. <Ref. to
PI-00663 TPM(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
(A) Indication for US 28.IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

(B) Indication for Canada 1) Check that the engine starts with all keys that
are equipped on vehicle.
(3) Have a person weighing approximately 70 2) 60 seconds after turning ignition switch from ON
kg (155 lb) or more sit in the passengers seat, to ACC or OFF, or immediately after removing the
and check whether the passengers airbag indi- key, check that the security indicator light is blink-
cator light illuminate or not. ing.
(4) Empty the passenger seat, then check 3) For the model for Canada, execute Each System
whether the passenger side airbag indicator Check > Integ. unit mode > SCU collation mode
light OFF illuminates. on SSMIII to check [Collation OK (no error)] is dis-
played.
26.SEAT BELT
NOTE:
1) Check installation condition of seat belt.
If malfunctions occur, refer to IMMOBILIZER (DI-
2) Pull out the seat belt and then release it. Check AGNOSIS).
that the belt retracts smoothly.
3) Check that the ALR seat belt operates normally. 29.STARTING CONDITION
4) Check seat belt warning function. Start the engine and check that the engine starts
(1) Turn the ignition switch to ON with the driv- smoothly. If the battery voltage is low, recharge or
ers and passengers seat belt detached. replace the battery. If any noises are observed, im-
(2) Check the drivers and passengers seat belt mediately stop the engine and check and repair the
warning light blink for approx. 6 seconds and abnormal components.
the buzzer sounds intermittently.
(3) Then, check the seat belt warning light illu- 30.EXHAUST SYSTEM
minates and blinks repeatedly at a cycle of ap- Listen to the exhaust noise to see if no exhaust gas
prox. 15 seconds. (If no passenger is on the leak or abnormal noises are observed.
passengers seat, the seat belt warning light on
passengers seat does not operate.) 31.INDICATOR LIGHT AND WARNING
(4) When the drivers seat belt is fastened, LIGHT
check that the drivers seat belt warning light Check that all indicator lights and warning lights op-
turns off. erate normally.
PI-13
12LE_US.book 14
32.HEATER & VENTILATION 40.ILLUMINATION CONTROL

Operate the heater & ventilation system to check Check that the illumination control operates nor-
for normal airflow outlet control, air inlet control, air- mally.
flow capacity and heating performance.
33.AIR CONDITIONER
Operate the air conditioner. Check that the A/C
compressor operates normally and enough cooling
is provided.
NOTE:
To prevent the insufficient lubrication of the air con-
ditioner, operate the air conditioner for five minutes
at idling.
34.CLOCK
Check the clock for normal operations and enough
accuracy. Check the fuel economy display switch-
es by operating the knob on the meter. Also check
there is no significant error on the outside temper-
ature display.
35.AUDIO
Check that all radio functions operate, the speakers
emit sound properly and the noise is at an accept-
able level. Also check the CD unit and AUX unit op-
erations.
36.NAVIGATION SYSTEM
1) Check all display functions for normal operation.
(Refer to the owners manual for the operation pro-
cedures.)
2) Check the map disc (DVD) are provided on vehi-
cle.
3) Check that the navigation system operates nor-
mally.
4) Check that the rearview camera operates nor-
mally.
37.ACCESSORY POWER SUPPLY SOCKET
1) Check the operation of the front accessory pow-
er supply socket.
2) Check operation of the accessory power supply
socket in console box.
38.LIGHTING SYSTEM
1) Check the headlight operation.
2) Check the stop light operation.
3) Check other lights for normal operations.
39.WIPER DEICER
Check that the wiper deicer operates normally.
NOTE:
When an ambient temperature is 5C or more, wip-
er deicer operation is cancelled. Press the switch
for 3 seconds or more to perform the compulsory
operation.
PI-14
12LE_US.book 15
41.WINDOW WASHER
Check that the window washer system injects washer fluid to the specified area of the windshield and rear
window glass shown in the figure.
Front injection position:
(A)
40
(B)
115 mm
(4.53 in)
:(C) (E) (E)
:(D) 250 mm 250 mm
(9.84 in) (9.84 in)
WW-00789
(A) Lower-side spray position center

(B) Ceramic line position on the washer nozzle cen-
ter
(C) Washer nozzle elevation angle, lower limit of
spray area
(D) Washer nozzle elevation angle, upper limit of
spray area
(E) Washer nozzle
Rear injection position:
(2.24 in)
(3.62 in)
57 mm
92 mm
56.5
PI-00646
42.WIPER
Check the front and rear wipers for normal operations.
43.POWER WINDOW
Operate the power window switches one by one to check that each of the power windows goes up and
down without noises.
Check AUTO UP/AUTO DOWN operate properly by operating the power window switch on drivers seat
side.
CAUTION:
If battery has been removed, AUTO UP does not operate properly because initialized. In this case,
perform the initial setting (reset A) and check AUTO UP operates properly.
PI-15
12LE_US.book 16
44.SUNROOF 51.MT SHIFT CONTROL

Check that the sunroof operates normally. 1) Check for smooth operation to each position. Es-
pecially, shifting to 5th 6th, and then to Rev,
45.DOOR MIRROR check for any drag.
Check that the remote control mirror and heated 2) Check the slider returns to the original position
mirror operate normally. by shifting to the Rev and then back in neutral while
46.ROOM MIRROR (RCD MODEL) pulling up the slider.
3) If the shifting operation is not smooth, readjust-
1) Check all display functions for normal operation. ment the exposed length (a) of MT gear select ca-
2) Check that the automatic anti-glare function op- ble following the figure.
erates normally.
3) Check that the compass function operates nor-
mally. (a)
4) Check that the rearview camera operates nor-
mally.
5) Perform compass calibration. <Ref. to GW-62,
CALIBRATION, ADJUSTMENT, Rearview Mirror
(RCD Model).>
(B) (A)
6) Perform compass zone setting. <Ref. to GW-63,
ZONE SETTING, ADJUSTMENT, Rearview Mirror
(RCD Model).>
(A)
47.REAR DEFOGGER 1st 3rd 5th
Check that the rear defogger system operates nor- (B)

mally.
48.PARKING BRAKE
Check the parking brake operates properly by de-
pressing brake pedal and pressing the electronic
parking brake switch.
2nd 4th 6th Rev
49.BRAKE TEST (C)
Check the foot brake for normal operations. CS-01043
50.AT, CVT SHIFT CONTROL (a) Exposed length of MT gear select cable
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (A) Extend direction of exposed length of MT gear
2) While brake pedal is not depressed, check if the select cable
select lever does not move from P range. (B) Shorten direction of exposed length of MT gear
3) While brake pedal is depressed, check if the se- select cable
lect lever moves from P range. (C) Specification of exposed length (a)
4) Set the select lever to other than P range.
5) When the ignition switch is turned to OFF, check If the shift cannot be inserted to push the reverse
if the ignition key switch cannot be removed. lock bracket 5th and 6th.
6) Set the selector lever to D range and check the Extend the exposed length (a) of MT gear select
shifting while driving the vehicle. cable.
When operate the select lever to 4th 5th, it
cannot be operated at select lever crank line.
Shorten the exposed length (a) of MT gear se-
lect cable.
52.CRUISE CONTROL
Operate the cruise control system. Check that the
system is activated and deactivated correctly.
PI-00611
PI-16
12LE_US.book 17
53.ATF LEVEL 56.WATER LEAK TEST

CAUTION: Spray the vehicle with water using a hose and
If the ATF is spilt over exhaust pipe, wipe it off check that no water enters the passenger compart-
with cloth to avoid emitting smoke or causing a ment.
fire. Before performing the water leakage test, re-
After selecting all positions (P, R, N, D), set the se- move anything that may obstruct the operation or
lect lever in P range. Idle the engine for 1 or 2 min- which must be kept dry.
utes, and measure the ATF level. If the amount is Close all the windows and doors securely. Close
insufficient, check that no leaks are found. Then, the hood and trunk lid before starting the test.
add the necessary amount of the specified ATF. Spray the vehicle with water using a hose. The
rate of water spray must be approx. 20 to 25 2
(A) (5.3 6.6 US gal, 4.4 5.5 Imp gal) per minute.
HOT
F
(B) When spraying water on areas adjacent to the floor

(C) and wheel house, increase the pressure. When
spraying water on areas other than the floor and
L
F
(B)
wheel house, decrease the pressure. But the force
(C) of water must be made strong occasionally by
COLD
L
pressing the end of the hose.

NOTE:
AT-04217
Be sure to keep the hose at least 10 cm (3.9 in)
away from vehicle.
(A) Level gauge Check the following areas.
(B) Upper level Front window and body framework mating por-
(C) Lower level tion
Door mating portions
54.POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL Glass mating portions
Rear quarter window mating portions
CAUTION:
Rear window and body framework mating por-
If any power steering fluid is spilt over the ex- tion
haust pipe, wipe it off with a cloth to avoid emit-
Around roof drips
ting smoke or causing a fire.
If any dampness in the compartments is discovered
Check that the power steering fluid level is normal.
after the water has been applied, carefully check all
If the amount is insufficient, check that no leaks are
the areas that may have possibly contributed to the
found. Then add the necessary amount of the
leak.
specified power steering fluid.
HOT MAX
COLD MAX
HOT MIN
COLD MIN
PS-01076
55.OIL LEAKAGE
Check entire areas of the vehicle for any trace of
coolant/oil (such as engine and gear oil)/fluid (such
as transmission and brake) leaks.
PI-17
12LE_US.book 18
57.APPEARANCE CHECK 2 5) Check each portion of body and all of the exteri-
1) If protective coating (lap guard) is applied, re- or parts for deformation or distortion. Also, check
move it. each light lens for cracks.
6) Peel the protective tape, vinyl wrapping and
NOTE: identification seal attached to the following places.
It is easier to remove the wrap guard using Seat
steam. Door trim
For a vehicle left for a long time or at low temper- Floor carpet
ature, sprinkle some water heated to 50 60C Side sill
(122 140F) over the vehicle to raise its surface Front hood lock release lever
temperature before peeling off the wrap guard. Do
Edge rear
not use the water heated to over 60C (140F).
Rear wiper
If the adhesive remains exist on the coated sur-
Sedan rear combination light (Trunk lid opening
face, soak a flannel rag, etc. with a small amount of
portion)
coating wax or solvent such as oil benzene and
IPA, put the soaked cloth on the remains lightly, Roof rail
and then wipe them off with a flannel rag etc. Assist rail
Keep solvent from touching the resin or rubber Door mirror (except for North America)
parts. Do not use coating wax or solvent while the
component surface temperature is high due to hot
weather etc.
If the coated surface is swollen out due to seams
or moisture, expose the vehicle to the sunlight for a
few hours or heat the seam and swollen portions
using a dryer etc.
Dispose of the peeled wrap guard as burnable
industrial garbage.
If a yellow label is attached to the fog light lens,
remove it.
2) Check the whole vehicle body for flaking paint,
damage by transportation, corrosion, dirt, cracks or
blisters.
NOTE:
It is better to determine an inspection pattern in
order to avoid missing an area, since the total in-
spection area is wide.
Do not repair the body paint unless absolutely
necessary. Also, if the vehicle is in need of repair to
remove scratches or corroded paint, the repair area
must be limited to the minimum. Re-painting and
spray painting must be avoided as much as possi-
ble.
3) Check each window glass for scratches careful-
ly. Slight damage may be removed by polishing
with cerium oxide. (Fill a cup half with cerium oxide,
and add warm water to it. Then agitate the content
until it turns to wax. Apply this wax to a soft cloth,
and polish the glass with it.)
4) Check each portion of the vehicle body and un-
derside components for the formation of rust. If rust
is discovered, remove it with sandpaper of #80 to
#180 and treat the surface with rust preventive. Af-
ter this treatment is completed, flush the portion
thoroughly, and prepare the surface for repair
painting.
PI-18
12LE_US.book 1
PERIODIC MAINTENANCE SERVICES
PM
Page
1. General Description ...................................................................................2
2. Schedule ....................................................................................................3
3. Engine Oil ...................................................................................................8
4. Engine Oil Filter ..........................................................................................9
5. Spark Plug ................................................................................................10
6. V-belt ........................................................................................................11
7. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................12
8. Fuel Line ..................................................................................................14
9. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................15
10. Air Cleaner Element .................................................................................16
11. Cooling System ........................................................................................17
12. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................18
13. Clutch System ..........................................................................................19
14. Transmission Gear Oil .............................................................................20
15. Automatic Transmission Fluid ..................................................................21
16. CVTF ........................................................................................................22
17. Front & Rear Differential Gear Oil ............................................................23
18. Brake Line ................................................................................................24
19. Brake Fluid ...............................................................................................25
20. Disc Brake Pad and Disc .........................................................................26
21. Parking Brake ...........................................................................................27
22. Suspension ..............................................................................................28
23. Wheel Bearing ..........................................................................................31
24. Axle Boots & Joints ..................................................................................32
25. Tire Rotation .............................................................................................33
26. Steering System (Power Steering) ...........................................................34
27. A/C Filter ..................................................................................................36
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
1. General Description
A: GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Be sure to perform periodic maintenance in order to
maintain vehicle performance and find problems
before they occur.
PM-2
12LE_US.book 3
Schedule
2. Schedule
A: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 1
1. MODEL WITH US SPECIFICATION
Other than U5 model
Maintenance interval
[Number of months or km (miles), whichever occurs first]
Months 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
1,000 km 4.8 12 24 36 48 60 72 81.4 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180 192 Remarks
1,000 miles 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120
1 Engine oil 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
filter 2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R R
4 Drive belt(s) I I I R
5 Camshaft drive belt I I I R
6 Fuel line (I) (I) (I) I Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I I I
9 Engine coolant Replace after the first 11 years or 220,000 km (137,500 miles), and every six years or
120,000 km (75,000 miles) thereafter
10 Clutch system I I I I I I I I
11 Transmission gear I I I I
oil
12 ATF I I I I
13 CVTF I I I I
14 Front & rear differ- I I I I
ential gear oil
15 Brake line I I I I I I I I
16 Brake fluid R R R R
17 Disc brake pad and I I I I I I I I
disc
18 Parking brake I I I I I I I I
19 Suspension I I I I I I I I
20 Wheel bearing (I) (I)
21 Axle boots and I I I I I I I I
joints
22 Tire rotation P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P P Note 3.
23 Steering system I I I I I I I I
(power steering)
24 A/C filter Replace every 15 months or 24,000 km (15,000 miles). Note 4.
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
P: Perform
(R): Recommended service for maintaining better vehicle performance
(I): Inspections recommended for vehicle safety
PM-3
12LE_US.book 4
Schedule
NOTE:
1. This inspection is not required to maintain emission warranty eligibility and it dose not affect the manufacturers obligations un-
der EPAs in-use compliance program.
2. When the vehicle is used in extremely dusty conditions, the air cleaner element should be replaced more often.
3. A tire should be replaced when the tread wear indicator appears as a solid band across the tread. The indicators appear when
the remaining tread has been worn to 1.6 mm (0.063 in) or less.
4. When the vehicle is used under extremely dusty conditions, replace the A/C filter frequently.
PM-4
12LE_US.book 5
Schedule
U5 model
To be continued to the next
Months 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75
table.
Remarks
1,000 km 4.8 12 24 36 48 60 72 81.4 96 108 120
1,000 miles 3 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75
1 Engine oil 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R
2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil 3.6 L (R) R R R R R R R R R R
filter 2.5 L R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R
4 Drive belt(s) I I
5 Camshaft drive belt I I
6 Fuel line (I) (I) Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I
10 Clutch system I I I I I
11 Transmission gear I I
oil
12 ATF I I
13 CVTF I I
14 Front & rear differ- I I
ential gear oil
15 Brake line I I I I I
16 Brake fluid R R
17 Disc brake pad and I I I I I
disc
18 Parking brake I I I I I
19 Suspension I I I I I
20 Wheel bearing (I)
21 Axle boots and I I I I I
joints
22 Tire rotation P P P P P P P P P P Note 3.
23 Steering system I I I I I
(power steering)
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
P: Perform
(R): Recommended service for maintaining better vehicle performance
NOTE:
PM-5
12LE_US.book 6
Schedule
Continued from previ-
Months 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
ous table
Remarks
1,000 km 132 144 156 168 180 192 204 216 228 240
1,000 miles 82.5 90 97.5 105 112.5 120 127.5 135 142.5 150
1 Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R
2 Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R
3 Spark plug R
4 Drive belt(s) I R I
5 Camshaft drive belt I R I
6 Fuel line (I) I (I) Note 1.
7 Air cleaner element R R R Note 2.
8 Cooling system I I I
10 Clutch system I I I I
11 Transmission gear oil I I I
12 ATF I I I
13 CVTF I I I
14 Front & rear differential I I I
gear oil
15 Brake line I I I I I
16 Brake fluid R R R
17 Disc brake pad and I I I I I
disc
18 Parking brake I I I I I
19 Suspension I I I I I
20 Wheel bearing (I) (I)
21 Axle boots and joints I I I I I
22 Tire rotation I I I I I I I I I I Note 3.
23 Steering system (power I I I I I
steering)
Symbols used:
R: Replace
I: Inspection
NOTE:
PM-6
12LE_US.book 7
Schedule
B: MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE 2
Salt or other High
Repeat Extremely
Maintenance Repeat short corrosive humidity or Repeat
Item rough/muddy cold weather
interval distance drive used or mountain towing trailer
road drive area
coastal area area
Engine oil 3.75 months R R R
6,000 km
3,750 miles
Engine oil filter 3.75 months R R R
6,000 km
3,750 miles
Fuel line 7.5 months I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Transmission 15 months R
gear oil 24,000 km
15,000 miles
ATF 15 months R
24,000 km
15,000 miles
CVTF 40,000 km R
24,855 miles
Front and rear 15 months R
Differential Gear 24,000 km
Oil
15,000 miles
Brake line 7.5 months I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Brake fluid 15 months R
24,000 km
15,000 miles
Disc brake pad 7.5 months I I I I
and disc 12,000 km
7,500 miles
Parking brake 7.5 months I I I I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Suspension 7.5 months I I I
12,000 km
7,500 miles
Axle boots and 7.5 months I I I I I
joints 12,000 km
7,500 miles
Steering system 7.5 months I I I
(power steering) 12,000 km
7,500 miles
PM-7
12LE_US.book 8
Engine Oil
3. Engine Oil
A: INSPECTION
Refer to LU section for engine oil inspection.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
<Ref. to LU(H6DO)-9, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to LU section for engine oil replacement.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, REPLACEMENT, Engine
Oil.> <Ref. to LU(H6DO)-9, REPLACEMENT, En-
gine Oil.>
PM-8
12LE_US.book 9
Engine Oil Filter

4. Engine Oil Filter

A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to LU section for engine oil filter replace-
ment. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-36, Engine Oil Filter.>
<Ref. to LU(H6DO)-15, Engine Oil Filter.>
PM-9
12LE_US.book 10
Spark Plug
5. Spark Plug
A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to IG section for spark plug replacement.
<Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, Spark Plug.> <Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, Spark Plug.> <Ref. to IG(H6DO)-
4, Spark Plug.>
PM-10
12LE_US.book 11
V-belt
6. V-belt
A: INSPECTION
Refer to ME section for V-belt inspection. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-44, INSPECTION, V-belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-43, INSPECTION, V-belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H6DO)-51, INSPECTION, V-belt.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to ME section for V-belt replacement. <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-43, V-belt.> <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
42, V-belt.> <Ref. to ME(H6DO)-51, V-belt.>
PM-11
12LE_US.book 12
Timing Belt
7. Timing Belt 2. SOHC MODEL (OTHER INSPECTIONS)

1) Remove the front timing belt cover and timing
A: INSPECTION belt cover (LH).
1. SOHC MODEL (INSPECTION OF TIMING 2) While cranking engine at least four rotations,
BELT POSITION) check the timing belt back surface for cracks or
damage. Replace the faulty timing belt with new
1) Remove the timing belt cover (LH). part as needed.
2) Turn the crank pulley to set #1 cylinder piston to 3) When the side part of timing belt is abnormally
top dead center of compression stroke and check worn (fluff or jumping out of core) or damaged,
the followings. check the idlers, tensioner, water pump pulley and
(1) Check that the arrow (A) of cam sprocket LH cam sprocket to determine idler alignment (square-
points to the upright. ness). Replace the worn timing belt with new part.
4) Install the front timing belt cover and timing belt
cover (LH).
3. DOHC MODEL (INSPECTION OF TIMING
BELT POSITION)
(A)
1) Remove the timing belt cover (LH) and (RH).
2) Turn the crank pulley and align single line mark
(A) on the intake cam sprocket (RH) with notch (B)
on timing belt cover and check the following.
PM-00531
(1) Make sure double lines (C) on intake and
exhaust cam sprocket (RH side) are aligned.
(2) Remove the sealing rubber (B) of the timing (2) Make sure single line (D) on exhaust cam
belt cover RH. sprocket (RH side) is aligned to timing belt cov-
(3) Check that the arrow (C) of cam sprocket er notch (E).
RH points to the upright.
(B)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(C)
(E)
(D)
PM-00533
PM-00532
(3) Make sure single line (A) on intake cam
3) When cam sprocket or timing belt position is off- sprocket (LH side) is aligned to timing belt cover
set, check for any defect and repair or replace as notch (B).
required. (4) Make sure double lines (C) on intake and
exhaust cam sprocket (LH side) are aligned.
PM-12
12LE_US.book 13
Timing Belt
(5) Check that the single line mark (D) on the

exhaust cam sprocket (LH side) and notch (E)
on the timing belt cover are aligned.
(B)
(A)
(C)
(E)
(D)
PM-00534
3) When cam sprocket position is offset, check for

any defect, and repair or replace as required.
4. DOHC MODEL (OTHER INSPECTIONS)
1) Remove the timing belt cover (LH).
2) While cranking engine at least four rotations,
check the timing belt back surface for cracks or
damage. Replace the faulty timing belt with new
part as needed.
3) When the side part of timing belt (arrow direction
shown in the figure) is abnormally worn (fluff or
jumping out of core) or damaged, check the idlers,
tensioner, water pump pulley and cam sprocket to
determine idler alignment (squareness). Replace
the worn timing belt with new part.
PM-00343
4) Install the timing belt cover (LH).

B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to ME section for timing belt replacement.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, Timing Belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-52, Timing Belt.>
PM-13
12LE_US.book 14
Fuel Line
8. Fuel Line
A: INSPECTION
The fuel line is located mostly internally, so check
pipes, areas near pipes, and engine compartment
piping for rust, hose damage, loose band, etc. If
faulty parts are found, repair or replace them. <Ref.
to FU(H4DOTC)-93, INSPECTION, Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evaporation Lines.>
PM-14
12LE_US.book 15
Fuel Filter
9. Fuel Filter
A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to FU section for fuel filter replacement.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-71, Fuel Filter.> <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-85, Fuel Filter.> <Ref. to FU(H6DO)-
77, Fuel Filter.>
B: INSPECTION
Replace if the filter is clogged, or time for replace-
ment has come.
PM-15
12LE_US.book 16
Air Cleaner Element

10.Air Cleaner Element

A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to IN section for air cleaner element re-
placement. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-4, Air Cleaner Ele-
ment.> <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-7, Air Cleaner
Element.> <Ref. to IN(H6DO)-4, Air Cleaner Ele-
ment.>
PM-16
12LE_US.book 17
Cooling System
11.Cooling System
A: INSPECTION
1. RADIATOR
Refer to CO section for radiator inspection. <Ref.
to CO(H4SO)-22, INSPECTION, Radiator.> <Ref.
to CO(H4DOTC)-23, INSPECTION, Radiator.>
<Ref. to CO(H6DO)-19, INSPECTION, Radiator.>
2. RADIATOR CAP
Refer to CO section for radiator cap inspection.
<Ref. to CO(H4SO)-23, INSPECTION, Radiator
Cap.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-24, INSPECTION,
Radiator Cap.> <Ref. to CO(H6DO)-20, INSPEC-
TION, Radiator Cap.>
3. COOLING FAN
Check the radiator fan operates using Subaru Se-
lect Monitor, when the coolant temperature ex-
ceeds 98C (208F). If it does not operate, check
the radiator fan system. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-8, IN-
SPECTION, Radiator Fan System.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-8, INSPECTION, Radiator Fan Sys-
tem.> <Ref. to CO(H6DO)-9, INSPECTION, Radi-
ator Fan System.>
4. COOLING SYSTEM
Start the engine, and then inspect that it does not
overheat or it is not cooled excessively. If it over-
heats or it is cooled excessively, check the cooling
system.
PM-17
12LE_US.book 18
Engine Coolant
12.Engine Coolant
A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to CO section for engine coolant replace-
ment. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-14, REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> <Ref. to
CO(H6DO)-12, REPLACEMENT, Engine Cool-
ant.>
PM-18
12LE_US.book 19
Clutch System
13.Clutch System
A: INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT
Refer to CL section for inspection and adjustment
of clutch system. <Ref. to CL-29, INSPECTION,
Clutch Pedal.> <Ref. to CL-29, ADJUSTMENT,
Clutch Pedal.>
PM-19
12LE_US.book 20
Transmission Gear Oil

14.Transmission Gear Oil

A: INSPECTION
Refer to 6MT section for transmission gear oil in-
spection. <Ref. to 6MT-24, INSPECTION, Trans-
mission Gear Oil.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to 6MT section for transmission gear oil re-
placement. <Ref. to 6MT-24, REPLACEMENT,
Transmission Gear Oil.>
PM-20
12LE_US.book 21
Automatic Transmission Fluid

15.Automatic Transmission Flu-

id
A: INSPECTION
Refer to 5AT section for ATF inspection. <Ref. to
5AT-29, INSPECTION, Automatic Transmission
Fluid.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to 5AT section for ATF replacement. <Ref.
to 5AT-29, REPLACEMENT, Automatic Transmis-
sion Fluid.>
PM-21
12LE_US.book 22
CVTF
16.CVTF
A: INSPECTION
Refer to CVT section for CVTF inspection. <Ref.
to CVT-37, INSPECTION, CVTF.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to CVT section for CVTF replacement.
<Ref. to CVT-38, REPLACEMENT, CVTF.>
PM-22
12LE_US.book 23
Front & Rear Differential Gear Oil

17.Front & Rear Differential Gear

Oil
A: INSPECTION
1. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (MT MODEL)
Front differential gear oil of MT model lubricates the
transmission and differential together. Refer to
Transmission Gear Oil for replacement proce-
dure. <Ref. to 6MT-24, INSPECTION, Transmis-
sion Gear Oil.>
2. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (AT MODEL)
Refer to 5AT section for inspection of AT model
front differential gear oil. <Ref. to 5AT-31, INSPEC-
TION, Differential Gear Oil.>
3. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (CVT MODEL)
Refer to CVT section for inspection of CVT model
front differential gear oil. <Ref. to CVT-41, IN-
SPECTION, Differential Gear Oil.>
4. REAR DIFFERENTIAL
Refer to DI section for rear differential gear oil in-
spection. <Ref. to DI-23, INSPECTION, Differential
Gear Oil.>
B: REPLACEMENT
1. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (MT MODEL)
Front differential gear oil of MT model lubricates the
transmission and differential together. Refer to
6MT section for replacement procedure. <Ref. to
6MT-24, REPLACEMENT, Transmission Gear
Oil.>
2. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (AT MODEL)
Refer to 5AT section for front differential gear oil
replacement. <Ref. to 5AT-31, REPLACEMENT,
Differential Gear Oil.>
3. FRONT DIFFERENTIAL (CVT MODEL)
Refer to CVT section for front differential gear oil
replacement. <Ref. to CVT-42, REPLACEMENT,
Differential Gear Oil.>
4. REAR DIFFERENTIAL
Refer to DI section for rear differential gear oil re-
placement. <Ref. to DI-23, REPLACEMENT, Dif-
ferential Gear Oil.>
PM-23
12LE_US.book 24
Brake Line
18.Brake Line 3. BRAKE SERVO SYSTEM

1) With the engine off, depress the brake pedal
A: INSPECTION several times applying the same pedal force.
1. BRAKE LINE Check that the travel distance should not change.
2) With the brake pedal depressed, start the en-
1) Check for scratches, swelling, corrosion, traces gine. Check that the pedal moves slightly toward
of fluid leakage on the brake hoses or pipe joints. the floor.
2) Make sure that brake pipes/hoses do not inter- 3) With the brake pedal depressed, stop the engine
fere with adjacent parts and there is no loose con- and keep the pedal depressed for 30 seconds.
nector/clamp during driving. Check that the pedal height does not change.
3) Check any trace of fluid leakage, scratches, etc. 4) A check valve is built into the brake booster nip-
on master cylinder, wheel cylinder and hydraulic ple. Disconnect the vacuum hose to inspect func-
unit. tion of check valve.
NOTE: Check that check valve ventilates from booster side
When the brake fluid level in the reservoir tank is to engine side. Also, check that there is no ventila-
lower than specified limit, the brake warning light tion from engine side to booster side.
on the combination meter will illuminate.
Visually check the brake hose for damage. (Use
a mirror where it is difficult to see) (C) (A)
(3)
(2) (1) (D)
(B)
PM-00260
(A) Brake booster

PM-00465 (B) Check valve
(C) Engine side
(1) Front brake hose (D) Brake booster side
(2) Front brake pipe
(3) Clamp 5) Check the vacuum hose for cracks or other dam-
age.
CAUTION:
(3) (1) When installing the vacuum hose on the engine
and brake booster, do not use soapy water or
lubricating oil on their connections.
(2)
6) Check that the vacuum hose is securely tight-
ened.
PM-00466
(1) Brake pipe

(2) Rear brake hose
(3) Clamp
2. SERVICE BRAKE
Refer to BR section for foot brake inspection.
<Ref. to BR-63, INSPECTION, Brake Pedal.>
PM-24
12LE_US.book 25
Brake Fluid
19.Brake Fluid
A: INSPECTION
Refer to BR section for brake fluid inspection.
<Ref. to BR-53, INSPECTION, Brake Fluid.>
B: REPLACEMENT
Refer to BR section for brake fluid replacement.
<Ref. to BR-53, REPLACEMENT, Brake Fluid.>
PM-25
12LE_US.book 26
Disc Brake Pad and Disc

20.Disc Brake Pad and Disc

A: INSPECTION
Refer to BR section for disc brake pad and disc in-
spection. <Ref. to BR-17, INSPECTION, Front
Brake Pad.> <Ref. to BR-31, INSPECTION, Rear
Brake Pad.> <Ref. to BR-19, INSPECTION, Front
Disc Rotor.> <Ref. to BR-34, INSPECTION, Rear
Disc Rotor.>
PM-26
12LE_US.book 27
Parking Brake
21.Parking Brake
A: INSPECTION
Refer to PB section for parking brake inspection.
<Ref. to PB-15, INSPECTION, Parking Brake As-
sembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
B: ADJUSTMENT
Refer to PB section for parking brake adjustment.
<Ref. to PB-15, ADJUSTMENT, Parking Brake As-
sembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
PM-27
12LE_US.book 28
Suspension
22.Suspension 5) Damage of dust boot

Visually inspect the ball joint dust boot. Replace if
A: INSPECTION ball joint is damaged.
1. FRONT SUSPENSION BALL JOINT NOTE:
When the front arm ball joint is removed or re-
1) Lift up the vehicle until front wheels are off
placed, check the toe-in of front wheel. If it is not
ground.
within the specified value, adjust the toe-in. <Ref. to
2) Grasp the bottom of tire and move it in and out in
FS-9, Wheel Alignment.>
axial direction. If movement (B) is observed be-
tween the brake disc cover (A) and end of front arm
(D), ball joint (C) may be excessively worn.
(A)
PM-00059
(D) (A)
(B) (A) Dust boot

(C)
PM-00258
3) Next, grasp the end of front arm (C) and move it 2. REAR SUSPENSION BALL JOINT
up and down. If movement (A) between the hous- 1) Lift up the vehicle until rear wheels are off
ing (D) and front arm (C) boss is observed, ball joint ground.
(B) may be excessively worn. 2) Grasp the bottom of tire and move it in and out in
axial direction.
3) If movement is observed between the brake disc
(D) cover (A) and end of front lateral link (B), ball joint
may be excessively worn.
(A)
(C)
(B)
PM-00259
4) If the relative movement is observed in the pre-

(A) (B)
ceding two steps, remove and inspect the ball joint.
If the free play exceeds standard value, replace the
ball joint. <Ref. to FS-32, Front Ball Joint.> PM-00548
4) Grasp the end of front lateral link (B) and move it

up and down. If movement is observed between
the housing (C) and front lateral link (B) boss, ball
joint may be excessively worn.
(C)
(B)
PM-00547
PM-28
12LE_US.book 29
Suspension
5) If the movement related to the previous two Rear suspension bushing

steps is observed, replace the front lateral link.
<Ref. to RS-22, Front Lateral Link.>
6) Damage of dust boot
Visually inspect the ball joint dust boot. Replace if
front lateral link is damaged.
7) Check upper arm ball joint in the same manner.
(A)
PM-00549
(A) Upper arm ball joint
3. FRONT, REAR SUSPENSION BUSHING

Apply pressure with tire lever etc, and inspect the PM-00551
bushing for excessive wear or damage. Replace
the bushings if faulty. 4. WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT
Front suspension bushing Refer to FS section for wheel arch height inspec-
tion. <Ref. to FS-10, WHEEL ARCH HEIGHT, IN-
SPECTION, Wheel Alignment.>
5. WHEEL ALIGNMENT
Measure and adjust the front and rear wheel align-
ment at a time. Refer to FS section for measure-
ment and adjustment of wheel alignment. <Ref. to
FS-9, INSPECTION, Wheel Alignment.>
6. OIL LEAKAGE OF STRUT AND SHOCK
ABSORBER
Visually inspect the front strut and rear shock ab-
sorber for oil leakage. Replace the front strut and
rear shock absorber if oil leaks excessively.
7. TIGHTNESS OF BOLTS AND NUTS
Check the bolts and nuts for looseness. Retighten
the bolts and nuts to specified torque. If the self-
locking nuts and bolts are removed, replace them
with new parts. <Ref. to FS-2, General Descrip-
tion.> <Ref. to RS-2, General Description.>
PM-00550
PM-29
12LE_US.book 30
Suspension
8. DAMAGE TO SUSPENSION PARTS

Check the following parts and the fastening portion
of the vehicle body for deformation or excessive
rusting which impairs the suspension. Thoroughly
remove the deposits of the lower spring seat of
strut where dust or mud are likely piled up. If nec-
essary, replace the damaged parts with new parts.
If minor rust formation, pitting, etc. are noted, re-
move the rust and take rust prevention measure.
Front suspension
Front arm
Cradle
Strut
Rear suspension
Sub frame
Front lateral link
Rear lateral link
Upper arm
Trailing link
Shock absorber
In the area where salt is sprayed to melt snow on
a road in winter, check suspension parts for dam-
age caused by rust every 12 months after lapse of
60 months. Take rust prevention measures as re-
quired.
PM-30
12LE_US.book 31
Wheel Bearing
23.Wheel Bearing 2. REAR WHEEL BEARING

1) Jack-up the rear side of vehicle.
A: INSPECTION 2) While holding the rear wheel by hand, swing it in
1. FRONT WHEEL BEARING and out to check bearing free play.
3) Loosen the wheel nuts, and remove the rear
NOTE: wheel.
Inspect the condition of front wheel bearing grease. 4) If the bearing free play exists in step 2) above,
1) Jack-up the front side of vehicle. attach a dial gauge to the hub and measure axial
2) While holding the front wheel by hand, swing it in play in axial direction.
and out to check bearing free play.
3) Loosen the wheel nuts, and remove the front Service limit:
wheel. Straight-ahead position within 0.05 mm
4) If the bearing free play exists in step 2) above, (0.0020 in)
attach a dial gauge to the hub and measure axial 5) Remove the DOJ of rear drive shaft from rear dif-
play in axial direction. ferential. <Ref. to DS-57, Rear Drive Shaft.>
6) While supporting rear drive shaft horizontally
Service limit: with one hand, turn the hub with the other hand to
Straight-ahead position within 0.05 mm check for noise or binding.
(0.0020 in) If the hub is noisy or binds, replace the rear axle.
5) Remove the bolts and self-locking nuts, and ex-
tract the front arm from front crossmember.
6) Remove the AAR of front drive shaft from trans-
mission. <Ref. to DS-15, Front Axle.>
7) While supporting the front drive shaft horizontal-
ly with one hand, turn the hub with the other hand to
check for noise or binding.
If the hub is noisy or binds, replace the front axle.
PM-00173
PM-00173
PM-31
12LE_US.book 32
Axle Boots & Joints

24.Axle Boots & Joints

A: INSPECTION
1. FRONT AND REAR AXLE BOOTS
Inspect the front axle boots (A) and rear axle boots
(B) for deformation, damage or failure. If faulty, re-
place with new part. <Ref. to DS-48, Front Drive
Shaft.> <Ref. to DS-57, Rear Drive Shaft.>
Front
(A)
PM-00174
Rear
(B)
PM-00175
2. PROPELLER SHAFT
Inspect the propeller shaft for damage or failure. If
faulty, replace with new part. <Ref. to DS-10, Pro-
peller Shaft.>
PM-32
12LE_US.book 33
Tire Rotation
25.Tire Rotation
A: INSPECTION
Refer to WT section for tire rotation procedures.
<Ref. to WT-5, TIRE ROTATION, INSPECTION,
Tire and Wheel.>
PM-33
12LE_US.book 34
Steering System (Power Steering)

26.Steering System (Power 2. STEERING SHAFT JOINT

Steering) When the steering wheel free play is excessive,
disconnect the universal joint of steering shaft and
A: INSPECTION check it for any play and yawing torque (at the point
of the crossing direction). Also inspect for any dam-
1. STEERING WHEEL age to sealing or worn serrations. If the joint is
1) Set the steering wheel in a straight-ahead posi- loose, retighten the mounting bolts to the specified
tion, and check the wheel spokes to make sure torque. <Ref. to PS-21, Universal Joint.>
they are correctly set in their specified positions.
Tightening torque:
2) Lightly turn the steering wheel to the left and 24 Nm (2.4 kgf-m, 17.4 ft-lb)
right to determine the point where front wheels start
to move. 3. GEARBOX
Measure the distance of the movement of steering 1) Set the steering wheel in the straight position,
wheel (periphery). then rotate it 90 in both the left and right directions.
Steering wheel free play: While steering wheel is being rotated, check the
0 17 mm (0 0.67 in) gearbox for looseness.
(1)
Tightening torque:
60 Nm (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
PM-00545
(1) Steering wheel free play

PS-01067
Move the steering wheel vertically toward the shaft 2) Check the boot for damage, cracks or deteriora-
to check if there is play in the direction. tion.
Play limit: 3) With the vehicle stopped on a level surface,
quickly turn the steering wheel to the left and right.
0.5 mm (0.020 in)
While steering wheel is being rotated, check the
3) Drive the vehicle and check the following items.
gear backlash. If any noise is noticed, adjust the
(1) Steering force:
gear backlash. <Ref. to PS-61, GEARBOX BACK-
The effort required for steering should be LASH ADJUSTMENT (SERVICING ON VEHI-
smooth and even at all points, and should not CLE), ADJUSTMENT, Steering Gearbox.>
vary.
(2) Pulled to one side:
Steering wheel should not be pulled to one side
while driving on a level surface.
(3) Wheel runout:
Steering wheel should not show any sign of
runout.
(4) Return status:
Steering wheel should return to its original posi-
tion after it has been turned and then released.
PM-34
12LE_US.book 35
Steering System (Power Steering)

4. TIE-ROD
1) Check the tie-rod and tie-rod ends for bends,
scratches or other damage.
(B)
(A)
PM-00394
(A) Tie-rod end

(B) Tie-rod
2) Confirm that the connections of knuckle ball

joints for play, and then check for damage on dust
boots and free play of ball studs. If castle nut is
loose, retighten it to the specified torque, then tight-
en further up to a maximum of 60 until the cotter
pin hole is aligned.
Tightening torque:
27 Nm (2.75 kgf-m, 19.9 ft-lb)
3) Check the lock nut on the tie-rod end for tight-
ness. If it is loose, retighten it to the specified
torque.
Tightening torque:
85 Nm (8.7 kgf-m, 62.7 ft-lb)
5. GEARBOX BOOTS
Inspect both sides of the gearbox boot as follows,
and correct the defects if necessary.
1) The (A) and (B) positions of the gearbox boot are
fitted in (A) and (C) grooves of gearbox and the rod.
2) Clips are fitted outside of positions (A) and (B) of
boot.
3) Check that there is no cracks or holes in the
boot.
NOTE:
Rotate (B) position of gearbox boot against the tor-
sion produced by the adjustment of toe-in etc. Ap-
ply grease to the groove (C).
(C)
(B)
(A)
PM-00090
PM-35
12LE_US.book 36
A/C Filter
27.A/C Filter
A: REPLACEMENT
Refer to AC section for A/C filter replacement.
<Ref. to AC-104, REPLACEMENT, A/C Filter.>
PM-36
12LE_US.book 1
2012 LEGACY SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
ENGINE 1 SECTION
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS) FU(H4SO)
EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4SO)
(AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)
INTAKE (INDUCTION) IN(H4SO)
MECHANICAL ME(H4SO)
This service manual has been prepared
to provide SUBARU service personnel
with the necessary information and data EXHAUST EX(H4SO)
for the correct maintenance and repair
of SUBARU vehicles.
COOLING CO(H4SO)
This manual includes the procedures
for maintenance, disassembling, reas-
sembling, inspection and adjustment of LUBRICATION LU(H4SO)
components and diagnostics for guid-
ance of experienced mechanics.
Please peruse and utilize this manual SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP(H4SO)
fully to ensure complete repair work for
satisfying our customers by keeping
their vehicle in optimum condition. IGNITION IG(H4SO)
When replacement of parts during
repair work is needed, be sure to use
SUBARU genuine parts. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS SC(H4SO)
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS) EN(H4SO)(diag)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD(H4SO)
All information, illustration and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication
approval.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. G2480BE2

12LE_US.book 1
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS)
FU(H4SO)
Page
2. Throttle Body ............................................................................................15
3. Intake Manifold .........................................................................................17
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .......................................................24
5. Crankshaft Position Sensor ......................................................................25
6. Camshaft Position Sensor ........................................................................27
7. Knock Sensor ...........................................................................................29
8. Throttle Position Sensor ...........................................................................31
9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor .................................32
10. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor .........................................................33
11. EGR Valve ...............................................................................................36
12. Fuel Injector .............................................................................................37
13. Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch ...................................38
14. Oil Temperature Sensor ...........................................................................40
15. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor ......................................................................42
16. Rear Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................44
17. Engine Control Module (ECM) .................................................................46
18. Main Relay ...............................................................................................47
19. Fuel Pump Relay ......................................................................................49
20. Electronic Throttle Control Relay .............................................................51
21. Fuel ..........................................................................................................53
22. Fuel Tank .................................................................................................55
23. Fuel Filler Pipe .........................................................................................62
24. Fuel Pump ................................................................................................65
25. Fuel Level Sensor ....................................................................................67
26. Fuel Sub Level Sensor .............................................................................69
27. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................71
28. Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines .......................................................73
29. Fuel System Trouble in General ..............................................................79
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Capacity 70 2 (18.5 US gal, 15.4 Imp gal)
Fuel tank
Location Under rear seat
Type Impeller
Shutoff discharge pressure 677 kPa (6.9 kgf/cm2, 98.2 psi) or less
Fuel pump
105 2 (27.7 US gal, 23.1 Imp gal)/h or more
Discharge rate
[12 V at 300 kPa (3.06 kgf/cm2, 43.5 psi)]
Fuel filter In-tank type
FU(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD
T3 T3
(3)
(4)
T2
T1
(8) (7)
(5)
(11)
(12)
(13) T2
(1)
(14)
(9)
(6)
(10)
(13)
(14)
(9)
(10)
(2)
(2)
FU-05594
FU(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
(1) Intake manifold (8) Fuel delivery pipe (14) Rubber

(2) Gasket (9) Injector
(3) Intake manifold protector RH (10) Seal ring Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Intake manifold protector LH (11) Cap T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(5) Fuel gallery RH (12) Clip T2: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(6) Fuel gallery LH (13) O-ring T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(7) Fuel pipe
FU(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
General Description
2. AIR INTAKE SYSTEM
(1) T3
(12)
T2
(13) (26)
(17) (18)
(14) T1 T2
(14)
(25) (24)
(15) (4) A
(2) T2
(5)
(16) (3)
(18) T2 (28)
(18)
(8) (10) A
(6) A (30)
(10) (29)
(19)
(10)
(18)
T4
(11)
(10)
(21)
T2
(7)
(10)
(9) (20)
(22)
(27) T2
(10)
(23)
T4
FU-06301
(1) Throttle body (14) Clip (26) Bracket

(2) Gasket (15) PCV hose E (27) Engine harness
(3) Multi-function duct (16) Clip (28) Purge control solenoid valve (U5
model)
(4) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (17) Heater hose A (29) Evaporation hose B
(5) O-ring (18) Clip (30) Evaporation hose C
(6) Gasket (19) Heater hose B
(7) PCV pipe (20) EGR valve Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) PCV hose A (21) Gasket T1: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(9) PCV hose B (22) Gasket T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Clip (23) EGR pipe adapter T3: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(11) PCV hose C (24) Evaporation hose A T4: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(12) PCV hose D (25) Purge control solenoid valve
(Other than U5 model)
(13) PCV valve
FU(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
3. CRANKSHAFT POSITION, CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS
T1
(1) T2
(2)
T1
(3)
(4) T1
FU-04926
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (3) Camshaft position sensor Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Knock sensor (4) Camshaft position sensor support T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
T2: 24 (2.4, 17.7)
FU(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7
General Description
4. FUEL TANK
T1
(8)
T1
T1
(7)
(14)
A B
(9) (23) (23)
(12)
(24) (24)
(10)
(1)
C (11)
(24)
(26)
(24)
(25)
(23)
(15)
(13)
T4
(2)
(24) B
(3)
T4 A
(16)
(17) (16)
T4
(6)
(16)
T3
C
T3
T3 (4)
(18)
(5) (16)
(19)
(20)
(21) (22)
T2 (22)
T3 T2
(22) (22)
T2 T3
T2
FU-06684
FU(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8
General Description
(1) Fuel tank (12) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (23) Cushion
(2) Fuel tank band RH (13) Fuel sub level sensor gasket (24) Cushion
(3) Fuel tank band LH (14) Fuel sub level sensor protector (25) Cushion
(4) Fuel delivery tube (15) Fuel sub level sensor filter (26) Cushion
(5) Tube clamp (16) Retainer
(6) Fuel sub delivery tube (17) Stopper Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Fuel pump assembly (18) Heat shield cover T1: 4.4 (0.4, 3.2)
(8) Fuel pump upper plate (19) Fuel tank protector RH T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(9) Fuel pump gasket (20) Fuel tank protector LH T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(10) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (21) Clip T4: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
cushion
(11) Fuel sub level sensor (22) Self-locking nut
FU(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
General Description
5. FUEL LINE
(20)
(41)
(13)
(21)
T3 (16)
(42) (19)
(15) (40)
F
G
(26) (33) F (17)
T2 G (16)
(39)
(33) (38) (18)
(25) (22)
F
(28) H
I
T5
(23) (14)
(33)
H
T1 (16)
(24) F
(27)
(27) (12)
I
C
(10) (11)
(1)
(1)
(9)
(4)
(1) (36)
C
(1)
(2)
(8)
(1) (37)
A (35)
(1) (3) (29)
(30) (34)
B (7)
A (32)
(31)
B
(5)
T4 (6) (31)
FU-06714
FU(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10
General Description
(1) Clip (18) Canister (35) Pipe clamp

(2) Fuel delivery hose (19) Drain filter (36) Fuel pipe rear grommet
(3) Evaporation hose (20) Canister protector (37) Pipe clamp
(4) Connect check cover (21) Drain tube ASSY (38) Tube clamp
(5) Hose clamp (22) Clamp (39) Tube clamp
(6) Hose clamp bracket (23) Fuel filler hose (40) Tube clamp
(7) Fuel pipe ASSY (24) Clamp (41) Tube clamp
(8) Purge hose A (25) Pressure hose (42) Clip
(9) Purge pipe (26) Fuel tank pressure sensor
(10) Purge hose B (27) Clip Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(11) Connector (28) Vacuum hose T1: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(12) Air vent hose A (29) Bushing T2: 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
(13) Circulate tube (30) Fuel pipe front grommet T3: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(14) Air vent tube (31) Pipe clamp T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(15) Circulate hose (32) Pipe clamp T5: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(16) Canister tube ASSY (33) Clip
(17) Drain valve (34) Pipe clamp
FU(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 11
General Description
6. FUEL FILLER PIPE
(3)
(1)
(2)
(4)
(5)
(10) (6)
(11) T3
(10)
(12) (7)
(14)
(13) T3
(8) T2
T1
(8)
(9)
(15)
T3
FU-06685
(1) Fuel filler cap (8) Fuel filler pipe bracket B (15) Grommet
(2) Fuel filler pipe protector (9) Fuel filler pipe bracket C
(3) Clip (10) Clip Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Neck holder A (11) Evaporation hose T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Neck holder B (12) Grommet T2: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(6) Fuel filler pipe (13) Evaporation pipe T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(7) Fuel filler pipe bracket A (14) Evaporation pipe protector
FU(H4SO)-11
12LE_US.book 12
General Description
7. FUEL PUMP
(1)
(3)
b
a
(4)
(2)
(5) (2)
(6)
a
(7)
(8)
(10)
(9)
FU-05062
(1) Fuel filter assembly (5) Fuel pump (9) Fuel level sensor
(2) Pump module spring (6) Support rubber cushion (10) Fuel temperature sensor
(3) Fuel pump harness (7) Fuel pump holder
(4) Gasket spacer (8) Fuel chamber ASSY
FU(H4SO)-12
12LE_US.book 13
General Description
C: CAUTION
Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap,
protective goggles and protective shoes when per-
forming any work.
Remove contamination including dirt and corro-
sion before removal, installation or disassembly.
Keep the disassembled parts in order and pro-
tect them from dust and dirt.
Before removal, installation or disassembly, be
sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary re-
moval, installation, disassembly and replacement.
Vehicle components are extremely hot after driv-
ing. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and
nuts to the specified torque.
Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified
points.
Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or
units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from
battery.
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the work-
ing area.
ing of fuels when performing work where fuels can
be spilled. If the oil spills, wipe it off immediately to
prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for
environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing fuel.
FU(H4SO)-13
12LE_US.book 14
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
ILLUSTRATION TOOL NUMBER DESCRIPTION REMARKS
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for draining fuel and each inspection.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for draining fuel.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
42099AE000 QUICK CONNEC- Used for removing the quick connector.
TOR RELEASE
ST42099AE000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance and voltage.
Oscilloscope Used for inspecting the waveform of each sensor.
FU(H4SO)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Throttle Body
2. Throttle Body 6) Disconnect the connectors (A) from the throttle

position sensor.
A: REMOVAL 7) Remove the bolts which secure the throttle body
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. to the multi-function duct assembly, and remove
the throttle body.
(A)
IG-02107
FU-06360
2) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake
boot assembly. B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
(A)
Tightening torque:
8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(B) (B)
IN-02668
3) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air in-

take boot assembly and air cleaner case.
4) Loosen the clamp (B) which connects the air in-
take boot assembly and throttle body.
FU-06361
NOTE:
Align the clamp hole with the protrusion of the air in-
(B) take boot assembly.
(A)
IN-02669
5) Remove the air intake boot from the throttle

body, and move it to the left side wheel apron.
IN-03133
FU-06302
FU(H4SO)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Throttle Body
Tightening torque: 5) After inspection, install the related parts in the

Clamp (A), (B) reverse order of removal.
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
2. THROTTLE SENSOR (METHOD WITH
SUBARU SELECT MONITOR)
1) Warm up the engine.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF)
(B) 3) Read the throttle opening angle signal and volt-
age of throttle sensor using Subaru Select Monitor.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, READ CURRENT
DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERA-
(A)
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
IN-02669
Throttle opening
Throttle sensor Standard
angle signal
C: INSPECTION Main 5% Approx. 0.9 V
Sub 5% Approx. 1.7 V
1. THROTTLE SENSOR (METHOD WITH
CIRCUIT TESTER) 3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
1) Warm up the engine. 1) Check that the throttle body has no deformation,
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- cracks or other damages.
66, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> 2) Check that the engine coolant hose has no
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) cracks, damage or loose part.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM connector
terminals.
FU-04956
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28
V
FU-04049
(A) To ECM connector
Throttle Accelerator
Terminal No. Standard
sensor pedal
Not
Main 18 (+) and 29 () Approx. 0.9 V
depressed
Not
Sub 28 (+) and 29 () Approx. 1.7 V
depressed
FU(H4SO)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Intake Manifold
3. Intake Manifold 7) Remove the air intake boot from the throttle
A: REMOVAL
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
FU-06302
8) Disconnect the connector from the ignition coil of

#3 cylinder.
IG-02107
3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler
cap.
boot assembly.
FU-06303
9) Remove the intake manifold protector RH.

(A)
(B) (B)
IN-02668

FU-06304
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
FU(H4SO)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Intake Manifold
10) Remove the connector (A) from the fuel injec- (2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo-
tor, and remove the fuel delivery pipe (B) from the ration hose (B) from the pipe.
fuel gallery RH.
NOTE:
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
ure. (A)
ST
(a)
(B)
FU-06306
12) Remove the generator cable clip (A) from the

intake manifold protector LH.
(a) 13) Remove the oil filler pipe (B) from the rocker
cover LH.
14) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose
(C).
(C)
(A)
(B)
FU-05483
FU-06307
(a) Slider
15) Disconnect the connector from the ignition coil
of #2 cylinder.
(B)
(A) (A)
FU-06305
FU-06308
11) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose (A) and evap-
oration hose (B). 16) Remove the intake manifold protector LH.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel.
Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push
ST in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose
(A).
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
LEASE FU-06309
FU(H4SO)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Intake Manifold
17) Remove the connector (A) from the fuel injec- 19) Remove the bolts (A) which secure the RH side
tor, and remove the fuel delivery pipe (B) from the of multi-function duct assembly to the intake mani-
fuel gallery LH. fold.
NOTE: 20) Remove the cap (B) from the intake manifold.
ure.
(A)
(B)
(a)
FU-06311
(a) 21) Remove the intake manifold from cylinder

head.
22) Remove the fuel gallery RH and fuel injector
from the intake manifold.
FU-05483
FU-04860
(a) Slider
23) Remove the fuel gallery LH, fuel pipe and fuel
injector from the intake manifold.
(B)
(A) (A)
FU-06310
FU-05102
18) Remove the clip (A) securing the engine har-
ness to the intake manifold, and remove the bolt (B)
securing the LH side of the multifunction duct as-
sembly.
(A)
(B)
FU-04853
FU(H4SO)-19
12LE_US.book 20
Intake Manifold
2. MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT ASSEMBLY 11) Disconnect the connector from the knock sen-
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- sor.
DURE, Fuel.>
FU-05458
12) Disconnect the water hose (A) and EGR pipe

(B) from the LH side of multi-function duct assem-
IG-02107 bly.
cap. (A)
4) Lift up the vehicle.
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- (B)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
6) Drain approximately 3.0 2 (3.2 US qt, 2.6 Imp
qt) of coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-14, DRAINING
OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT, Engine
Coolant.>
7) Lower the vehicle. FU-06312
8) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to
13) Disconnect the water hose from the RH side of
FU(H4SO)-17, INTAKE MANIFOLD, REMOVAL,
multi-function duct assembly.
Intake Manifold.>
9) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead
harness connector from the engine harness con-
nector and rear engine hanger.
FU-06682
14) Disconnect the connector (A) from the engine

coolant temperature sensor, and disconnect the
FU-05129 terminal (B) from oil pressure switch and the con-
nector (C) from the crankshaft position sensor.
10) Slide the engine harness connector in the di-
rection of the arrow and remove it from the rear en-
gine hanger.
(A)
(B)
(C)
FU-04962
FU-05247
FU(H4SO)-20
12LE_US.book 21
Intake Manifold
15) Disconnect the connector (A) from front oxygen 22) Remove the clip (B) securing the engine har-
(A/F) sensor and the connector (B) from the rear ness to the PCV pipe, and remove the engine har-
oxygen sensor. ness.
16) Disconnect the connector (C) from the ignition
coil of #1 cylinder.
17) Disconnect the connector (D) from the oil (A)
switching solenoid valve RH, disconnect the con- (A)
nector (E) from the oil temperature sensor RH, dis-
connect the connector (F) from the variable valve
lift diagnosis switch and disconnect the ground ter-
minal (G) from the rear engine hanger.
(B)
FU-06320
(G)
(F) (A) B: INSTALLATION

(E)
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD
(D) Install in the reverse order of removal while being
careful of the following.
Connect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
(B)
(C) FU-06314
ure.
18) Slide the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector CAUTION:
and rear oxygen sensor connector in the direction Check that there is no damage or dust on the
of the arrow and remove them from the bracket. quick connector. If necessary, clean the seal
surface of the pipe.
When connecting the quick connector, make
sure to insert the pipe all the way in before lock-
ing the slider.
When it is difficult to lock the slider, check
that the pipe is fully inserted.
Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.
FU-06315
19) Disconnect the connector from the ignition coil

of #4 cylinder.
20) Disconnect the connector (A) from the oil
switching solenoid valve LH and the connector (B)
from the camshaft position sensor LH.
(A)
(a)
(B)
(a)
FU-04858
21) Remove the bolt (A) securing the multi-function

duct assembly to the PCV pipe, and remove the
multi-function duct assembly. FU-05484
(a) Slider
FU(H4SO)-21
12LE_US.book 22
Intake Manifold
NOTE: Tightening torque:

Use a new gasket. 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
If fuel hoses or clamps are damaged, replace
them with new parts.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
T1
FU-06304
T2 T2
FU-05104
FU-06309
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2 T2
FU-04884
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-06319
NOTE:
take boot assembly.
FU-04927
IN-03133
FU-06317
FU(H4SO)-22
12LE_US.book 23
Intake Manifold
Tightening torque: Tightening torque:

Clamp (A), (B) 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
FU-06321
IN-02669
2. MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT ASSEMBLY

NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
The oil pressure switch harness must be posi-
tioned to be within the range of a 45 angle on ei-
ther left or right toward the rear of the vehicle.
FU-06318
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
45
(a)
45
FU-05471
(a) Front side of vehicle
Tightening torque: FU-06316

1.5 Nm (0.2 kgf-m, 1.1 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intake manifold and fuel pipe
have no deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.
FU-05482
FU(H4SO)-23
12LE_US.book 24
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

4. Engine Coolant Temperature 2) Immerse the engine coolant temperature sensor

and a thermometer in water.
Sensor
CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL Take care not to allow water to get into the en-
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. gine coolant temperature sensor connector.
Completely remove any water inside.
(A)
(B)
IG-02107
2) Remove the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-18,

REMOVAL, Generator.>
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-14, (C)
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
MENT, Engine Coolant.>
coolant temperature sensor, and remove the en-
gine coolant temperature sensor.
(A)
FU-04053
(A) Thermometer
(B) Engine coolant temperature sensor
(C) Hexagonal part height: To approx.1/3
3) Raise water temperature gradually, measure the

FU-06359 resistance between the engine coolant tempera-
ture sensor terminals when the temperature is
B: INSTALLATION 20C (68F) and 80C (176F).
NOTE:
NOTE: Agitate the water for even temperature distribution.
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION 2 1
1) Check that the engine coolant temperature sen-
sor has no deformation, cracks or other damages.
EC-02428
Water
temperature
20C (68F) Approx. 2.450.2 k
1 and 2
80C (176F) Approx. 0.3180.013 k
FU(H4SO)-24
12LE_US.book 25
Crankshaft Position Sensor

5. Crankshaft Position Sensor C: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER)
Measure the resistance between crankshaft posi-
tion sensor terminals.
2 1
IG-02107
2) Remove the bolt which secures crankshaft posi-

EC-02428
tion sensor to oil pump.
1 and 2 2.040.204 k
2. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

(METHOD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE)
1) Prepare an oscilloscope.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI-
66, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
3) Connect the probe to ECM connector.
FU-04974
3) Remove the crankshaft position sensor, and dis-

connect the connector from the crankshaft position
sensor.
FU-04956
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
FU-04975
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
B: INSTALLATION 31 30 29 28 27 26
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-04758
Terminal No. Probe

17 +
25
4) Start the engine and let it idle.
FU(H4SO)-25
12LE_US.book 26

5) Check the pattern is the same as the waveform

and voltage shown below.
10ms
5V
(A)
FU-04057
(A) One crankshaft rotation
6) After inspection, install the related parts in the

reverse order of removal.
3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
Check that the crankshaft position sensor has no
deformation, cracks or other damages.
FU(H4SO)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Camshaft Position Sensor

6. Camshaft Position Sensor 6) Remove the camshaft position sensor and the
camshaft position sensor support as a unit.
A: REMOVAL NOTE:
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Slide in the arrowed direction until the camshaft po-
sition sensor contacts the rocker cover LH.
IG-02107
2) Disconnect the connector from camshaft posi- FU-05132
tion sensor. 7) Remove the camshaft position sensor from the

camshaft position sensor support.
FU-04890
3) Remove the ignition coil. (LH side only) <Ref. to FU-00179

IG(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Ignition Coil.> B: INSTALLATION
4) Remove the bolt which secures camshaft posi-
tion sensor to camshaft position sensor support. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
Camshaft position sensor support
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Camshaft position sensor
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-02724
5) Remove the bolt which secures camshaft posi-

tion sensor support to camshaft cap LH.
FU-02725
FU(H4SO)-27
12LE_US.book 28

C: INSPECTION 2. OTHER INSPECTIONS

Check that the camshaft position sensor has no de-
1. CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (METH- formation, cracks or other damages.
OD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE)
FU-04956
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
31 30 29 28 27 26
FU-04934
Terminal No. Probe

24 +
30

5) Check the pattern is the same as the waveform
and voltage shown below.
LH
0
(A)
RH
0
(A) 5V
40ms
FU-04209
(A) One camshaft rotation

FU(H4SO)-28
12LE_US.book 29
Knock Sensor
7. Knock Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector from the knock sen-

sor.
A: REMOVAL
FU-04698
7) Remove the knock sensor from cylinder block.

IG-02107
boot assembly.
(A)
FU-02726
(B) (B) B: INSTALLATION

IN-02668
1) Install the knock sensor to the cylinder block.
3) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air in- NOTE:
take boot assembly and air cleaner case. The portion of the knock sensor cord that is pulled
4) Loosen the clamp (B) which connects the air in- out must be positioned at a 60 angle relative to the
take boot assembly and throttle body. engine rear.
Tightening torque:
24 Nm (2.4 kgf-m, 17.7 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
(A)
IN-02669 60
body, and move it to the left side wheel apron. FU-02727
(A) Front side of vehicle
FU-06302
FU(H4SO)-29
12LE_US.book 30
Knock Sensor
2) Connect the connector to the knock sensor. C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the knock sensor has no deforma-
tion, cracks or other damages.
2) Measure the resistance between knock sensor
terminals.
2 1
FU-04698
3) Install the air intake boot assembly.

NOTE:
take boot assembly. EC-02426

1 and 2 56028 k
IN-03133
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B)
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
4) Connect the battery ground terminal.
IG-02107
FU(H4SO)-30
12LE_US.book 31
Throttle Position Sensor

8. Throttle Position Sensor

A: SPECIFICATION
Throttle body is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the throttle position sensor from throttle
body.
Refer to Throttle Body for removal and installation
procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL,
Throttle Body.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, INSTAL-
LATION, Throttle Body.>
FU(H4SO)-31
12LE_US.book 32
Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor

9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air 2) Check the voltage changes when air is blown to
the mass air flow sensor unit in arrow direction.
Temperature Sensor
A: REMOVAL
FU-04063
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR UNIT
IG-02107 Measure the resistance between intake air temper-
2) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air ature sensor terminals.
flow and intake air temperature sensor, and re-
move the mass air flow and intake air temperature
sensor.
5 4 3 2 1
(A)
FU-04064
Temperature Terminal No. Standard

FU-06297 20C (4F) 16.02.4 k
20C (68F) 1 and 2 2.450.24 k
B: INSTALLATION 60C (140F) 0.580.087 k
Tightening torque: 3. OTHER INSPECTIONS
1 Nm (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb) 1) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
perature sensor has no deformation, cracks or oth-
C: INSPECTION er damages.
1. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR UNIT 2) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
perature sensor has no dirt.
1) Connect the battery positive terminal to terminal
No. 3 and the battery ground terminal to terminal
No. 4, the circuit tester positive terminal to terminal
No. 5 and the circuit tester ground terminal to termi-
nal No. 4.
5 4 3 2 1
V
FU-04062
FU(H4SO)-32
12LE_US.book 33
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor

10.Manifold Absolute Pressure 5) Remove the air intake boot from the throttle
Sensor
A: REMOVAL
FU-06302
6) Disconnect the connector (A) from the manifold

absolute pressure sensor, and remove the mani-
IG-02107
fold absolute pressure sensor from the multi-func-
tion duct.
boot assembly.
(A)
(A)
(B) (B) FU-06298
IN-02668

(B)
(A)
IN-02669
FU(H4SO)-33
12LE_US.book 34

B: INSTALLATION C: INSPECTION
Install in the reverse order of removal. 1) Check that the manifold absolute pressure sen-
NOTE: sor has no deformation, cracks or other damages.
Use new O-rings. 2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter-
minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to
Tightening torque: terminal No. 2, circuit tester ground terminal to ter-
2 Nm (0.2 kgf-m, 1.5 ft-lb) minal No. 2 and the circuit tester positive terminal
to terminal No. 1.
NOTE:
Use new dry-cell batteries.
Using circuit tester, check the voltage of a single
dry-cell battery is 1.6 V or more. And also check the
voltage of three batteries in series is between 4.8 V
and 5.2 V.
FU-06362
3 2 1
NOTE:
take boot assembly.
IN-03133
1.5V 1.5V 1.5V
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B) 4.8 5.2V
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
FU-04491
3) Connect the Mighty Vac to the pressure port (A)

of manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
(A)
FU-04492
FU(H4SO)-34
12LE_US.book 35

4) Check the voltage when generating vacuum and

positive pressure using Mighty Vac.
CAUTION:
Do not apply vacuum of less than 88 kPa (0.9
kgf/cm2, 12.8 psi). Doing so may damage the
manifold absolute pressure sensor.
NOTE:
When vacuum occurs at the pressure port of man-
ifold absolute pressure sensor, the voltage will drop
from the value as in step 3). When positive pres-
sure occurs, on the other hand, the voltage will rise.
Terminal
Pressure Standard
No.
88 kPa Approx. 1 V
(0.9 kgf/cm2, 12.8 psi) (when 25C (77F))
35 kPa 2 (+) and Approx. 2.6 V
(0.4 kgf/cm2, 5.1 psi) 1 () (when 25C (77F))
19 kPa Approx. 4.2 V
(0.2 kgf/cm2, 2.8 psi) (when 25C (77F))
FU(H4SO)-35
12LE_US.book 36
EGR Valve
11.EGR Valve C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the EGR valve has no deformation,
A: REMOVAL cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between EGR valve ter-
minals.
3 2 1
6 5 4
IG-02107
2) Remove the multi-function duct assembly. <Ref. FU-04101

to FU(H4SO)-20, MULTI-FUNCTION DUCT AS-
SEMBLY, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
3) Remove the EGR valve from the multi-function 2 and 1 222
duct assembly. 2 and 3 222
5 and 4 222
5 and 6 222
FU-04701
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-36
12LE_US.book 37
Fuel Injector
12.Fuel Injector C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel injector has no deformation,
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- 2) Measure the resistance between fuel injector
53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- terminals.
DURE, Fuel.>
2 1
EC-02428
IG-02107 Terminal No. Standard

3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler Approx. 12.0
1 and 2
(when 20C (68F))
cap.
FU(H4SO)-17, INTAKE MANIFOLD, REMOVAL,
Intake Manifold.>
5) Remove the bolts securing the fuel gallery to in-
take manifold.
FU-04860
6) Remove the fuel injector while lifting up the fuel

gallery.
FU-05133
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Use new O-rings, rubbers and seal rings.
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU(H4SO)-37
12LE_US.book 38
Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch

13.Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis 5) Remove the air intake boot from the throttle
Oil Pressure Switch
A: REMOVAL
FU-06302
6) Disconnect the connector from the variable

valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch.
IG-02107
7) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch.
boot assembly.
(A)
(B) (B) FU-06322
IN-02668

(B)
(A)
IN-02669
FU(H4SO)-38
12LE_US.book 39
Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure Switch

Install in the reverse order of removal. 1) Check that the variable valve lift diagnosis oil
NOTE: pressure switch does not have deformation, cracks
or damage.
Apply liquid gasket to the variable valve lift diagno-
sis oil pressure switch threads. 2) Check the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres-
sure switch installation portion for oil leakage and
Liquid gasket: oil seepage.
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
Tightening torque:
17 Nm (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
FU-06322
NOTE:
take boot assembly.
IN-03133
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B)
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
FU(H4SO)-39
12LE_US.book 40
Oil Temperature Sensor

14.Oil Temperature Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector from oil temperature

sensor.
A: REMOVAL 7) Remove the oil temperature sensor.
FU-06323
IG-02107
B: INSTALLATION
2) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake Install in the reverse order of removal.
boot assembly.
NOTE:
Apply liquid gasket to the oil temperature sensor
threads.
(A) Liquid gasket:
equivalent
Tightening torque:
(B) (B) 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
IN-02668

FU-06323
(B)
NOTE:
take boot assembly.
(A)
IN-02669

IN-03133
FU-06302
FU(H4SO)-40
12LE_US.book 41
Oil Temperature Sensor

Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B)
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the oil temperature sensor has no de-
formation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check the resistance between the oil tempera-
ture sensor terminals.
2 1
EC-02428

1 and 2 2.450.2 (when 20C (68F))
FU(H4SO)-41
12LE_US.book 42
Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor

15.Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor CAUTION:

When removing the front oxygen (A/F) sensor,
A: REMOVAL wait until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. damage the exhaust pipe.
(B)
(A)
IG-02107 FU-02735
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- (A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> (B) Rear oxygen sensor
3) Disconnect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con-
nector, and remove the clip holding the front oxy- B: INSTALLATION
gen (A/F) sensor harness.
CAUTION:
If lubricant is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe it
off completely with cloth to avoid emission of
(B)
(A)
smoke or causing a fire.
1) Before installing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, ap-
ply anti-seize compound only to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor to make the next
removal easier.
CAUTION:
(C)
FU-04697
Never apply anti-seize compound to the protec-
tor of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector Anti-seize compound:
(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
(C) Clip equivalent
2) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- Tightening torque:
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 21 Nm (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
6) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor, and leave it for
one minute or more. (B)
7) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
(A)
FU-02735
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor

(B) Rear oxygen sensor
3) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-

LATION, Front Under Cover.>
4) Lower the vehicle.
FU(H4SO)-42
12LE_US.book 43

5) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-

tor, and secure the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
ness by using the clip.
(B)
(A)
(C)
FU-04697
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector
(C) Clip
6) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,

INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor has no
2) Measure the resistance between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor terminals.
1 2
3 4
FU-04937

2.40.24
3 and 4
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4SO)-43
12LE_US.book 44
Rear Oxygen Sensor

16.Rear Oxygen Sensor CAUTION:

When removing the rear oxygen sensor, wait
A: REMOVAL until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will dam-
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. age the exhaust pipe.
(B)
(A)
IG-02107 FU-02735
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- (A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> (B) Rear oxygen sensor
3) Disconnect the rear oxygen sensor connector,
and remove the clip holding the rear oxygen sensor B: INSTALLATION
harness.
CAUTION:
If lubricant is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe it
off completely with cloth to avoid emission of
(B)
(A)
1) Before installing rear oxygen sensor, apply the
anti-seize compound only to the threaded portion of
rear oxygen sensor to make the next removal eas-
ier.
CAUTION:
(C)
FU-04697
tor of rear oxygen sensor.
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector Anti-seize compound:
(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
(C) Clip equivalent
2) Install the rear oxygen sensor.
6) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por-
tion of rear oxygen sensor, and leave it for one
minute or more. (B)
7) Remove the rear oxygen sensor.
(A)
FU-02735
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor

(B) Rear oxygen sensor

FU(H4SO)-44
12LE_US.book 45
Rear Oxygen Sensor

5) Connect the rear oxygen sensor connector, and

hold the rear oxygen sensor harness with the clip.
(B)
(A)
(C)
FU-04697
(A) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector

(B) Rear oxygen sensor connector
(C) Clip

IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the rear oxygen sensor has no defor-
mation, cracks or other damages.
2) Measure the resistance between rear oxygen
sensor terminals.
2 1
4 3
FU-04073

5.6+1.7 0.6
1 and 2
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4SO)-45
12LE_US.book 46
Engine Control Module (ECM)

17.Engine Control Module (ECM) B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. CAUTION:
When the ECM of model with immobilizer has
been replaced, be sure to perform the registra-
tion of immobilizer system. (Refer to PC appli-
cation help for Subaru Select Monitor.)
If replacing ECM or the bracket, replace both
parts with new parts at a time.
After installing the bracket to ECM, do not
separate the bracket.
If the bracket has been installed to ECM in the
wrong direction, replace both parts to new
IG-02107 parts.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- NOTE:
66, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use the
3) Remove the connectors from ECM. wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on the fuel
injection system.
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
Check that the ECM has no deformation, cracks or
other damages.
FU-04984
4) Remove the ECM from vehicle.
FU-04985
FU(H4SO)-46
12LE_US.book 47
Main Relay
18.Main Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the main relay has no deformation,
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between main relay ter-
minals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the main relay from the relay holder.
1
2
3 4
IN-02836
FU-04986
B: INSTALLATION 1 and 2 1 M or more
130.4 230.8
Install in the reverse order of removal. 3 and 4
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4SO)-47
12LE_US.book 48
Main Relay
3) Connect battery positive terminal to terminal No.

3 and battery ground terminal to terminal No. 4, and
measure the resistance between the main relay ter-
minals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

1 and 2 Less than 1
FU(H4SO)-48
12LE_US.book 49
Fuel Pump Relay

19.Fuel Pump Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel pump relay has no deforma-
A: REMOVAL tion, cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between fuel pump relay
terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the fuel pump relay from the relay hold-
er. 1
2
3 4
IN-02836

FU-04987
1 and 2 1 M or more
B: INSTALLATION 93.8 136.4
3 and 4
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4SO)-49
12LE_US.book 50
Fuel Pump Relay


measure the resistance between the fuel pump re-
lay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

1 and 2 Less than 1
FU(H4SO)-50
12LE_US.book 51
Electronic Throttle Control Relay

20.Electronic Throttle Control C: INSPECTION

Relay 1) Check that the electronic throttle control relay
has no deformation, cracks or other damages.
A: REMOVAL 2) Measure the resistance between electronic
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. throttle control relay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the electronic throttle control relay from
1
the relay holder. 2
3 4
IN-02836

1 and 2 1 M or more
FU-04988 93.8 136.4
3 and 4
(when 20C (68F))
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4SO)-51
12LE_US.book 52


measure the resistance between the electronic
throttle control relay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

1 and 2 Less than 1
FU(H4SO)-52
12LE_US.book 53
Fuel
21.Fuel 2) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST

in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect the fuel
A: PROCEDURE delivery hose.
1. RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE LEASE
WARNING: CAUTION:
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the Be careful not to spill fuel.
working area. Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
CAUTION: or cloth.
1) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse
box.
ST
FU-04949
3) Connect ST to the fuel delivery hose.

ST 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
FU-04800 4) Connect the gasoline proof hose to ST and put
2) Start the engine and run it until it stalls. the end of the hose in the container.
3) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec- 5) Drive the fuel pump and drain the fuel using Sub-
onds. aru Select Monitor. (Refer to PC application help
4) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. for Subaru Select Monitor.)
5) Install the fuse of fuel pump to the main fuse box. CAUTION:
2. DRAINING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SE- Be careful not to spill fuel.
LECT MONITOR) 6) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
draining the fuel.
WARNING:
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the 3. DRAINING FUEL (THROUGH THE FUEL
working area. FILLER HOSE)
CAUTION: WARNING:
Be careful not to spill fuel. Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the
working area.
NOTE:
If the fuel pump cannot be driven, refer to the CAUTION:
procedures for draining from the fuel filler hose. Be careful not to spill fuel.
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-53, DRAINING FUEL Fuel may remain in the fuel filler pipe. Drain-
(THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE), PROCE- ing the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
DURE, Fuel.> fill opening using the gasoline proof pump and
Be careful not to let the battery run-out. the gasoline proof hose (10 or less) before the
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- operation.
53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 1) Lift up the vehicle.
DURE, Fuel.> 2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-9, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-11, REMOVAL, Muf-
fler.>
cap.
4) Drain the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
filler opening using the gasoline proof pump and
the gasoline proof hose (10 or less).
FU(H4SO)-53
12LE_US.book 54
Fuel
5) Disconnect the fuel filler hoses from the fuel filler

pipe.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
FU-04803
6) Set the container under the vehicle and insert

the gasoline proof hose (10 or less) into the fuel
filler hose to drain the fuel.
CAUTION:
7) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
draining the fuel.
NOTE:
Correctly insert the fuel filler hose to the spool, and
then install the clamp as shown.
Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
(1) (2) (3) (4)
L/2
L
FU-05815
(1) Fuel filler hose

(2) Clamp
(3) Spool
(4) Fuel filler pipe
FU(H4SO)-54
12LE_US.book 55
Fuel Tank
22.Fuel Tank (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
service hole cover.
A: REMOVAL (C)
WARNING:
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the
working area. (D)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. (B)
53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- (C)
DURE, Fuel.> (A) FU-04991
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-53, DRAINING
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), 7) Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> sensor.
FU-06602
IG-02107 8) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel deliv-
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-34, ery tube (A). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-73, REMOVAL,
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks (A)
(B), and turn over the floor mat (C).
(C)
FU-05069
(B) (A) (A)

(B) 9) Remove the rear wheels.
FU-04990 10) Lift up the vehicle.
6) Remove the service hole cover of fuel pump. 11) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor
(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and from the rear housing.
remove the clip (B).
(2) Remove the screw (C).
FU-04994
FU(H4SO)-55
12LE_US.book 56
Fuel Tank
12) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har- 16) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
ness bracket from the upper arm. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-9, REMOVAL, Rear Exhaust
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-11, REMOVAL, Muf-
fler.>
17) Remove the heat shield cover (A).
FU-04087
13) Remove the rear brake hose bracket from rear (A)
housing.
DS-00472
18) Remove the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-10,

REMOVAL, Propeller Shaft.>
19) Remove the clip (A) securing the fuel tank pro-
tector and heat shield cover.
20) Remove the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the
fuel tank protector, and remove the fuel tank pro-
tector.
(B)
FU-04995
14) Remove the rear disc brake assembly and tie it (B) (B)
to the body side of the vehicle.
(C) (C)
(A)
FU-05655
21) Remove the bolts and nuts securing the heat

shield cover and remove the heat shield cover.
FU-05656
FU-04996
15) Remove the parking brake cable from parking

brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-10, REMOVAL, Park-
ing Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
FU(H4SO)-56
12LE_US.book 57
Fuel Tank
22) Remove the rear suspension assembly. NOTE:

WARNING: Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig-
A helper is required to perform this work. ure.
(1) Support the rear differential with the trans- 1
mission jack. 2
(2) Remove the bolt and nut which secures rear
shock absorber to rear suspension arm.
1 FU-05002
FU-03359
(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rear

suspension assembly to the body.
FU-05003
25) Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler
pipe assembly.
FU-06349
(4) Remove the rear suspension assembly.

23) Disconnect the air vent hose from the fuel tank.
FU-06686
26) Support the fuel tank with a transmission jack,

remove the fuel tank band, and remove the fuel
tank from the vehicle.
WARNING:
A helper is required to perform this work.
FU-05083 Fuel may remain in the fuel tank. This will
24) Disconnect the quick connector of the circulate cause the left and right sides to be unbalanced.
tube from evaporation pipe. Be careful not to drop the fuel tank.
FU-06350
FU(H4SO)-57
12LE_US.book 58
Fuel Tank
B: INSTALLATION 3) Connect the quick connector of the circulate

tube to the evaporation pipe as shown in the figure.
set the fuel tank and the fuel tank band in place, CAUTION:
and temporarily tighten the bolts of the fuel tank Check that there is no damage or dust on the
band. quick connector. If necessary, clean the seal
WARNING:
ly connected.
FU-06350
FU-05036
2) Correctly insert the fuel filler hose to the spool,
and then install the clamp as shown.
Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
FU-05003
4) Connect the air vent hose to fuel tank.
FU-06686
(2) (3) (4)

(1)
FU-05083
L/2
L
FU-05646
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp
(3) Spool
(4) Pipe
FU(H4SO)-58
12LE_US.book 59
Fuel Tank
5) Move the fuel tank so that the distance between (2) Support the rear suspension assembly and
the center of the positioning hole for the body (A) install the rear suspension assembly to the
and the front end of the fuel tank flange (B) be- body.
comes L, and tighten the bolts of the fuel tank
Tightening torque:
bands in the sequence shown in the figure.
T1: 70 Nm (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
CAUTION: T2: 200 Nm (20.4 kgf-m, 147.5 ft-lb)
To prevent the fuel tank from damage, after
tightening the bolts of the fuel tank bands,
make sure that the distance between the center T1 T1
of the positioning hole for the body (A) and the

front end of the fuel tank flange (B) is L.
Distance L: Center of the positioning hole for
the body (A) Front end of the fuel tank flange T2 T2
(B)
14.5 mm (0.571 in) or less
Tightening torque: FU-06352
33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb) (3) Install the rear shock absorber to the rear
suspension arm.
NOTE:
(A) Use a new self-locking nut.
L
(B)
Tightening torque:
120 Nm (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
1 2
FU-03359
7) Install the heat shield cover.

Tightening torque:
3 4 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
FU-06351
6) Install the rear suspension assembly.

WARNING:
(1) Support the rear differential with the trans-
mission jack.
FU-05656
FU(H4SO)-59
12LE_US.book 60
Fuel Tank
8) Install the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the fuel 14) Install the rear disc brake assembly.
tank protector and install the clip (A) securing the
Tightening torque:
fuel tank protector and heat shield cover.
66 Nm (6.7 kgf-m, 48.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Use a new self-locking nut.
Tightening torque:
Nut (C): 9 Nm (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
Bolt (B): 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
(B)
(B) (B)
(C) (C) FU-04546
15) Install the rear brake hose bracket to the rear

(A) housing.
Tightening torque:
33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
FU-05655
9) Install the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-11, IN-

STALLATION, Propeller Shaft.>
10) Install the heat shield cover (A).
Tightening torque:
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
FU-04995
16) Install the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har-

ness bracket to the upper arm.
NOTE:
(A) Prevent the harness identification (line) from being
twisted when installing. <Ref. to VDC-2, SPECIFI-
DS-00472 CATION, General Description.>
11) Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler. <Ref. Tightening torque:
to EX(H4SO)-9, INSTALLATION, Rear Exhaust
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-11, INSTALLATION,
Muffler.>
13) Connect the parking brake cable to the parking
brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-14, INSTALLATION,
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
FU-04087
FU(H4SO)-60
12LE_US.book 61
Fuel Tank
17) Attach the rear ABS wheel speed sensor to the 21) Attach the service hole cover of the fuel pump,
rear housing. and attach the connector and clip.
NOTE: (C)
Prevent the harness identification (line) from being

CATION, General Description.> (D)
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb) (B)
(C)
(A) FU-04991
(A) Connector
(B) Clip
(C) Screw
(D) Grommet
FU-04994 22) Set the floor mat (C), and install clips (A) and
18) Install the rear wheels. seat cushion hooks (B).
Tightening torque:
120 Nm (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
19) Connect the quick connector of the fuel delivery
tube (A). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-76, INSTALLATION,
Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
(A) (C)
(B)
(B) (A) (A)
FU-04990
23) Install the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-49,

INSTALLATION, Rear Seat.>
FU-05069
20) Install the service hole cover of fuel sub level

sensor.
IG-02107
25) Inspect the wheel alignment and adjust if nec-

essary.
C: INSPECTION
FU-06602
1) Check that the fuel tank and fuel pipe have no
deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that the fuel hose has no cracks, damage
or loose part.
FU(H4SO)-61
12LE_US.book 62
Fuel Filler Pipe

23.Fuel Filler Pipe 10) Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler
pipe assembly.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
DURE, Fuel.>
FU-06686
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), 11) Disconnect the evaporation hose (A) from fuel
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> filler pipe assembly and remove the bolts and nuts
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. securing the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle
body.
(A)
IG-02107
4) Open the fuel filler lid, and remove the filler cap.
5) Turn the fuel filler pipe protector in the direction
of the arrow to unlock and remove it.
FU-06687
FU-04044 12) Remove the fuel filler pipe assembly from the
underside of the vehicle.
6) Remove the rear wheel RH.
8) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38,
REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
9) Remove the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-16, RE-
MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.>
FU(H4SO)-62
12LE_US.book 63
Fuel Filler Pipe

B: INSTALLATION Tightening torque:

2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
1) Open the fuel filler lid.
2) Insert the fuel filler pipe assembly into the rubber
saucer from inside of the rear fender.
3) Install the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle
body and connect the evaporation hose (A) to the
fuel filler pipe assembly.
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
FU-06686
(A)
(2) (3) (4)
(1)
L/2
L
FU-05646
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp
(3) Spool
(4) Pipe
6) Install the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-18, IN-

STALLATION, Rear Sub Frame.>
FU-06687
7) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
4) Align the cutout on the fuel filler pipe protector STALLATION, Mud Guard.>
and the protrusion of the neck holder and insert 8) Lower the vehicle.
them all the way, and then turn the fuel filler pipe 9) Install the rear wheel RH.
protector in the direction of the arrow until it is
locked. Tightening torque:
120 Nm (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
FU-04104
5) Correctly insert the fuel filler hose to the spool, IG-02107

and then install the clamp as shown.
essary.
FU(H4SO)-63
12LE_US.book 64
Fuel Filler Pipe

C: DISASSEMBLY E: INSPECTION
Remove the fuel filler pipe bracket from the fuel fill- 1) Check that the fuel filler pipe does not have de-
er pipe. formation, cracks or other damages.
or loose part.
FU-05009
D: ASSEMBLY
Install the fuel filler pipe bracket to the fuel filler
pipe.
Tightening torque:
7.35 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
FU-05009
FU(H4SO)-64
12LE_US.book 65
Fuel Pump
24.Fuel Pump (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
service hole cover.
A: REMOVAL (C)
WARNING:
working area. (D)
CAUTION:
If the fuel gauge indicates that two thirds or
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain (C)
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to (A) FU-04991
spill.
NOTE: 7) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel pump,
Fuel pump assembly consists of fuel pump, fuel fil- and remove the clip (B) securing the harness.
ter, fuel chamber and fuel level sensor. 8) Disconnect the quick connector of fuel delivery
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- tube (C) and fuel sub delivery tube (D). <Ref. to
53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- FU(H4SO)-73, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery and
DURE, Fuel.> Evaporation Lines.>
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR),
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> (D)
(C)
(A)
(B)
FU-05063
9) Remove the nuts securing the fuel pump upper

plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel pump up-
per plate.
IG-02107
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-34,

REMOVAL, Rear Seat.>
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks
FU-04534
10) Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel

(C) tank.
(B)
(B) (A) (A)
FU-04990
6) Remove the service hole cover.

(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and
FU(H4SO)-65
12LE_US.book 66
Fuel Pump
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal while being
careful of the following.
Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or
foreign matter before installation.
Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position
shown in the figure.
Insert the protrusion (B) of gasket to the fuel
pump upper plate. (3 places)
Align the protrusion (C) of fuel pump assembly
with the cutout on the fuel pump upper plate.
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the or-
der as shown in the figure.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
4.4 Nm (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
(C)
2
4 7
(B) (B)
6 5
(a) 8 3
1 (A)
(B) FU-05064
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel pump has no deformation,
cracks or other damages.
2) Connect the battery positive terminal to terminal
No. 5 and the battery ground terminal to terminal
No. 6, and inspect the fuel pump operation.
WARNING:
Wipe off fuel completely.
Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump
as possible.
Do not run the fuel pump for a long time un-
der non-load condition.
2 1
4 3
6 5
FU-04110
FU(H4SO)-66
12LE_US.book 67
Fuel Level Sensor

25.Fuel Level Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
WARNING: C: INSPECTION
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the 1) Check that the fuel level sensor has no damage.
working area. 2) Measure the fuel level sensor float position.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Be careful not to spill fuel. When inspecting the fuel level sensor, perform the
If the fuel gauge indicates that two thirds or work with the sensor installed to the fuel pump.
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to
spill.
NOTE: (1)
The fuel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly.

1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to (A)
FU(H4SO)-65, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Disconnect the fuel level sensor connector.
(2)
(3)
(B)
FU-05067
(1) FULL
(2) EMPTY
(3) Fuel tank seating surface
Float position Standard

FULL to Fuel tank seating
126.44 mm (4.9760.157 in)
FU-05065
surface (A)
EMPTY to Fuel tank
3) Remove the harness from the hooks (A) on the seating surface (B)
11.04 mm (0.4330.157 in)
fuel chamber assembly and remove the fuel tem-
perature sensor (B) from fuel chamber assembly.
(A)
(B)
FU-05066
4) Press two claws (A) of the fuel level sensor, and

slide the fuel level sensor in the direction of the ar-
row to remove the fuel level sensor.
(A) (A)
FU-05015
FU(H4SO)-67
12LE_US.book 68
Fuel Level Sensor

3) Measure the resistance between fuel level sen-

sor terminals.
(A)
(B)
2 1
4 3
6 5
FU-05068
Float position Terminal No. Standard

FULL (A) 8.71.0
1 and 4
EMPTY (B) 139.12.0
FU(H4SO)-68
12LE_US.book 69
Fuel Sub Level Sensor

26.Fuel Sub Level Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel sub level
sensor, and remove the clip (B) securing the fuel
A: REMOVAL cord from fuel sub level sensor protector.
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION: (B) (A)
spill.
FU-05071
53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 7) Remove the bolts (A) securing the fuel sub level
DURE, Fuel.> sensor protector to the fuel sub level sensor upper
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-53, DRAINING plate, and remove the fuel sub level sensor protec-
FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), tor.
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 8) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel sub
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. delivery tube (B). <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-73, REMOV-
AL, Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines.>
(A)
(B)
IG-02107
FU-05072
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> 9) Remove the nuts securing the fuel sub level sen-
5) Remove the service hole cover. sor upper plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel
sub level sensor upper plate.
FU-06602
FU-04569
10) Remove the fuel sub level sensor from the fuel
tank.
FU(H4SO)-69
12LE_US.book 70

Install in the reverse order of removal while being 1) Check that the fuel sub level sensor has no dam-
careful of the following. age.
Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or 2) Measure the fuel sub level sensor float position.
Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position (A)
(1) (3)
Align protrusion (B) of the fuel sub level sensor to
the cutout in the fuel sub level sensor upper plate.
After tightening the bolts to the specified torque (B)
in the order indicated in the figure, install the fuel
sub level sensor protector.
NOTE: (2)
Use a new gasket. FU-04213
Tightening torque: (1) FULL

4.4 Nm (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb) (2) EMPTY
4 (3) Datum points
2
6
FULL to Datum point (A) 6.43.5 mm (0.2520.138 in)
EMPTY to Datum point (B) 163.33.5 mm (6.4290.138 in)
5
1
3) Measure the resistance between fuel sub level
(a) (B)
sensor terminals.
3
(A)
FU-04533
(A)
(B)
FU-05073
2 1
FU-04214

FULL (A) 8.71.0
1 and 2
EMPTY (B) 270.94.0
FU(H4SO)-70
12LE_US.book 71
Fuel Filter
27.Fuel Filter 5) Remove the fuel pump holder from the fuel filter
assembly.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
FU-05023
spill.
Be careful not to drop or apply any impact to 6) Remove the fuel pump from the fuel filter assem-
the fuel pump during work. This may deterio- bly.
rate its performance.
NOTE:
The fuel filter is built in fuel pump assembly.
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-65, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Remove the fuel level sensor and fuel tempera-
ture sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-67, REMOVAL,
Fuel Level Sensor.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the fuel filter as-
sembly.
FU-05074
FU-05024
4) Remove the claw connecting the fuel filter as-
sembly and fuel chamber assembly in order to sep-
arate the fuel filter assembly and fuel chamber
assembly.
FU-05075
FU(H4SO)-71
12LE_US.book 72
Fuel Filter
B: INSTALLATION Check that the claw connecting the fuel filter as-
sembly and fuel chamber assembly is securely fas-
1) Assemble the gasket spacer (A) and support
tened.
rubber cushion (B) to the fuel pump, and install the
fuel pump to the fuel filter assembly.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket spacer.
(B)
Use a new support rubber cushion.
Apply gasoline to the surface of gasket spacer
and support rubber cushion.
(B)
(A)
(A)
(A)
FU-03889
FU-05025
2) Install the fuel pump holder to the fuel filter as-

sembly.
FU-05075
4) Connect the fuel pump connector.
FU-03886
3) Install the pump module spring (A) to fuel filter

assembly, and install the fuel chamber assembly
FU-05074
(B).
5) Install the fuel level sensor and fuel temperature
NOTE:
sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-67, INSTALLATION,
Use a new fuel chamber assembly.
Fuel Level Sensor.>
6) Inspect the fuel level sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-67, INSPECTION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
7) Install the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-66, INSTALLATION, Fuel Pump.>
FU(H4SO)-72
12LE_US.book 73
Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

28.Fuel Delivery and Evaporation Lines

A: REMOVAL
FU-05093
WARNING:
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the working area.
CAUTION:
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCEDURE,
Fuel.>
2) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler cap.
3) Remove the floor mat. <Ref. to EI-162, REMOVAL, Floor Mat.>
4) In the engine compartment, disconnect the fuel delivery hoses (A) and evaporation hose (B).
CAUTION:
Catch the fuel from hoses using a container or cloth.
(1) Remove the connect check cover from the fuel delivery hose.
FU-05094
(2) Set the ST to the fuel pipe.

ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RELEASE
FU(H4SO)-73
12LE_US.book 74

(3) Disconnect the quick connector of the fuel

delivery hose by pushing the ST in the direction
of the arrow. (D)
(4) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- (C)
ration hose from the fuel pipe. (B)
ST (A)
(A) FU-05081
8) Remove the fuel pipe assembly from vehicle.

9) Disconnect the quick connector, and remove the
(B)
fuel delivery tube and fuel sub delivery tube from
the fuel tank.
FU-05095 When using ST
5) Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-55, 1. Attach ST to the pipe and push ST in the direc-
REMOVAL, Fuel Tank.> tion of arrow mark to disconnect the quick connec-
6) Remove the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, tor.
REMOVAL, Mud Guard.> ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE-
7) Remove the purge hose (A), purge pipe (B), air LEASE
vent hose (C) and drain tube assembly (D). CAUTION:
NOTE: Be careful not to spill fuel.
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig- Catch the fuel from hoses using a contain-
ure. er or cloth.
1 To disconnect the connector, hold (C)
shown in the figure and pull in axial direction.
2
If the connector and pipe are sticking to
each other, push and pull the connector with
ST pushed, and then pull the connector after
it starts moving freely.
When disconnecting the connector, do not
bend or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is
bent, replace with a new part.
1
NOTE:
(a) Clean the pipe and quick connector, if they are cov-
1 ered with dust.
2
(C)
ST
(A)
1 (C)
(b) EC-02590
(B)
FU-05506
(a) Air vent hose (C), drain tube ASSY (D)
(b) Purge pipe (B) (A) Quick connector
(B) Pipe
(C) Connector holding position
FU(H4SO)-74
12LE_US.book 75

2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign 2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign
matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with
plastic bag etc. plastic bag etc.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect
the retainer from the connector. the retainer from the pipe.
FU-01333 FU-05507
When not using ST 10) Remove the evaporation pipe.

1. Push the retainer in the direction of the arrow, (1) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to
disconnect the quick connector from pipe. EI-38, REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
CAUTION: (2) Remove the evaporation hose.
Catch the fuel from hoses using a contain-
er or cloth.
To disconnect the connector, hold (D)
the retainer pushed in the direction of the ar-
row, and then pull the connector after it starts
moving freely. FU-05082
(3) Remove the trunk side trim panel assembly
- side on the RH side. <Ref. to EI-110, REMOV-
AL, Rear Quarter Trim.>
NOTE: (4) Remove the evaporation pipe protector.
Clean the pipe and quick connector, if they are cov-
ered with dust.
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D) FU-05032
FU-05510
(A) Quick connector

(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(D) Connector holding position
FU(H4SO)-75
12LE_US.book 76

(5) Remove the evaporation pipe from vehicle. 4) Install the evaporation hose.
FU-05033 FU-05082
B: INSTALLATION 5) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
STALLATION, Mud Guard.>
careful of the following. 2. CONNECTING THE FUEL LINE QUICK
CONNECTOR
1. INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATION PIPE
1) Install the evaporation pipe to the vehicle. CAUTION:
Make sure there are no damage or dust on
connections. If necessary, clean seal surface of
pipe.
(A)
(a)
(b)
FU-05033
2) Install the evaporation pipe protector.

Tightening torque:
T1: 1 Nm (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb) (B)
T2: 7.5 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
(a)
T2
(b)
T1
FU-05508
FU-05034
(A) When removed using ST
3) Install the trunk side trim panel assembly - side (B) When removed without using ST
on RH side. <Ref. to EI-119, INSTALLATION, Rear (a) Seal surface
Quarter Trim.> (b) Pipe
When reusing the retainer, make sure that

neither scratches nor deformation exist on the
retainer. If it is faulty, use a new part.
FU(H4SO)-76
12LE_US.book 77

1) Connect the quick connector to pipe. When connecting the connector, do not bend
CAUTION: or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is bent, re-
place with a new part.
ly connected. (A) (a) (d)
(b)
(c)
(A)
(d)
(B)
(C)
FU-05511 (B)
(a) (d)
(A) Quick connector
(B) Retainer
(b)
(C) Pipe
(c)
Make sure the two retainer pawls are en-
gaged in their mating positions in the quick
connector. (d)
Be sure to inspect tubes and their connec-

tions for any leakage of fuel. FU-05509
To connect the connector, hold (d) shown in
the figure and push in axial direction. (A) When removed using ST
(B) When removed without using ST
(a) Quick connector
(b) Retainer
(c) Pipe
(d) Connector holding position
3. EVAPORATION HOSE CONNECTION

Connect the evaporation hose to the pipe with an
overlap of 15 to 20 mm (0.59 to 0.79 in).
L = 17.52.5 mm (0.6890.098 in)
(2) (3)
(1)
L/2
L
FU-04501
(1) Hose
(2) Clip
(3) Pipe
FU(H4SO)-77
12LE_US.book 78

4. CONNECTING THE EVAPORATION LINE

QUICK CONNECTOR
CAUTION:
connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
face of the pipe.
ly connected.
ure.
FU-05035
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel pipe has no deformation,
2) Check that the hose and tube have no cracks,
damage or loose part.
FU(H4SO)-78
12LE_US.book 79
Fuel System Trouble in General

29.Fuel System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Trouble Possible cause Corrective action
a. Fuel pump does not operate.
Inspect contact, especially ground, and tighten it
Defective terminal contact
securely.
Trouble in electromagnetic or electronic circuit
Replace the faulty parts.
parts
b. Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump.
Insufficient fuel
supply to injector Replace the fuel filter. Clean or replace the fuel tank if
c. Clogged fuel filter
necessary.
Clean, correct or replace the fuel line pipe, hose or
d. Clogged or bent fuel line pipe, hose or tube
tube.
Check the fuel line connections, correct or replace the
e. Air is mixed in fuel system.
defective part.
f. Damaged diaphragm of pressure regulator Replace the pressure regulator.
a. Loose connections of fuel line pipe, hose or Check the fuel line connections, correct or replace the
tube defective part.
Leakage or blow out b. Cracked fuel line pipe, hose or tube Replace the fuel line pipe, hose or tube.
of fuel c. Cracked fuel tank or defective welded part Replace the fuel tank.
Clean, correct or replace the fuel line pipe, hose or
d. Clogged or bent fuel line pipe, hose or tube
tube.
a. Loose connections of fuel line pipe, hose or Check the fuel line connections, correct or replace the
Gasoline smell tube defective part.
inside of compart-
b. Improper installation of rubber saucer Correct or replace the rubber saucer.
ment
c. Defective canister Replace the canister.
a. Defective operation of fuel level sensor Replace the fuel level sensor.
Defective fuel gauge
b. Defective operation of combination meter Replace the combination meter.
Noise a. Large operation noise or vibration of fuel pump Replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is left unattended for an extended period of time, water may accumulate in the fuel tank.
Fill fuel fully to prevent the problem.
In snow-covered areas, mountainous areas, skiing areas, etc. where ambient temperatures drop to 0C
(32F) or less throughout the winter season, use a water removing agent in the fuel system to prevent freez-
ing fuel system and accumulating water.
When water is accumulated in fuel filter, fill the water removing agent in the fuel tank.
Before using water removing agent, follow the cautions noted on the bottle.
FU(H4SO)-79
12LE_US.book 80

FU(H4SO)-80
12LE_US.book 1
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION

CONTROL DEVICES)
EC(H4SO)
Page
2. Front Catalytic Converter ...........................................................................3
3. Rear Catalytic Converter ............................................................................4
4. Canister ......................................................................................................5
5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve ....................................................................9
6. EGR Valve ...............................................................................................12
8. Fuel Temperature Sensor ........................................................................14
10. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor .....................................................................16
11. Drain Filter ................................................................................................18
12. Drain Valve ...............................................................................................19
13. PCV Hose Assembly ................................................................................20
14. PCV Valve ................................................................................................22
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)
A: CAUTION
Wear appropriate work clothing, including a cap, protective goggles and protective shoes when performing
any work.
Remove contamination including dirt and corrosion before removal, installation or disassembly.
Keep the disassembled parts in order and protect them from dust and dirt.
Before removal, installation or disassembly, be sure to clarify the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, in-
stallation, disassembly and replacement.
Vehicle components are extremely hot after driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated parts.
Be sure to tighten fasteners including bolts and nuts to the specified torque.
Place shop jacks or rigid racks at the specified points.
Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from battery.
B: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS Used for removing and installing the PCV
hose.
This is a general tool made by the French
company CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
To make this easier to obtain, it has been pro-
vided with a tool number.
ST18353AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Mighty Vac Used for inspecting the fuel tank pressure sensor.
EC(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
Front Catalytic Converter

2. Front Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
The front catalytic converter is integrated into the
front exhaust pipe; therefore, refer to Front Ex-
haust Pipe for the removal procedure. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
front exhaust pipe; therefore, refer to Front Ex-
haust Pipe for the installation procedure. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
2) Check for hole or rust.
EC(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
Rear Catalytic Converter

3. Rear Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
The rear catalytic converter is integrated into the
center exhaust pipe. Refer to Center Exhaust
Pipe for removal procedures. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-
8, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
center exhaust pipe. Refer to Center Exhaust
Pipe for installation procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
2) Check for hole or rust.
EC(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
Canister
4. Canister 5) Remove the clip holding the rear wiring harness.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the rear wheel LH.
3) Remove the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38,
4) Disconnect the quick connectors of the vent tube
(A), canister drain tube (B) and charge tube (C),
and remove the tubes from tube clamp (D).
NOTE: EC-02608
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig- 6) Remove the canister from vehicle.
ure.
1
1
(a)
1
EC-02609
(b) 1
EC-02615
7) Disconnect the connector from drain valve.
(a) Vent tube (A) and canister drain tube (B)
(b) Charge tube (C)
(C)
(A)
EC-02610
(B) (D)
EC-02607
EC(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
Canister
8) Disconnect the vent tube (A), canister drain tube B: INSTALLATION

(B) and charge tube (C) from the canister, and re-
1) Connect the vent tube (A), canister drain tube
move the canister drain tube (B) from canister clip
(B) and charge tube (C), and install the canister
(D).
drain tube (B) to canister clip (D).
NOTE:
CAUTION:
ure.
1 face of the pipe.
2 Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.
NOTE:
ure.
1
(a)
1
(a)
(b) 1
EC-02615

(b) Charge tube (C)
(B)
(b) EC-02616
(A)
(b) Charge tube (C)
(C) (D)
EC-02611
EC(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7
Canister
3) Install the canister to the vehicle.

(B)
Tightening torque:
8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(A)
(C) (D)
EC-02611
2) Connect the connector to the drain valve.
EC-02609
4) Secure the rear wiring harness with clip.
EC-02610
EC-02608
EC(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8
Canister
5) Attach all tubes to tube clamp (D), and connect C: INSPECTION

the quick connectors of the vent tube (A), canister
1) Check that the canister has no deformation,
drain tube (B) and charge tube (C).
CAUTION: 2) Check that the tube has no cracks, damage or
Make sure there are no damage or dust on loose part.
face of the pipe.
ly connected.
NOTE:
ure.
(a)
(b) EC-02616

(b) Charge tube (C)
(C)
(A)
(B) (D)
EC-02607
6) Install the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-

8) Install the rear wheel LH.
Tightening torque:
120 Nm (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
EC(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Purge Control Solenoid Valve

5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve 6) Disconnect the purge control solenoid valve con-
nector (A) and evaporation hose (B), and then re-
A: REMOVAL move the purge control solenoid valve.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Other than U5 model
(A)
(B)
IG-02107 EC-02556
2) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake U5 model
boot assembly.
(A)
(A)
(B) (B) (B)

EC-02714
IN-02668

(B)
(A)
IN-02669

FU-06302
EC(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10

B: INSTALLATION U5 model
NOTE:
Connect the evaporation hose as shown in the fig-
ure.
Other than U5 model
(B) (A)
EC-03058
NOTE:
take boot assembly.
EC-02557
U5 model
(A)
(B) IN-03133
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B)
EC-02619 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
(A) To multifunction duct

(B) To evaporation line
Tightening torque: (B)

6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Other than U5 model
(A)
IN-02669
EC-03057
EC(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 11

C: INSPECTION 4) Connect the terminal No. 1 to the battery positive

terminal and the terminal No. 2 to the battery
1. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE ground terminal. Check that air is discharged from
1) Check that the purge control solenoid valve has (B), when supplying air to (A).
no deformation, cracks or other damages. Other than U5 model
2) Measure the resistance between the purge con-
trol solenoid valve terminals.
2 1
2 1
EC-02426
Other than U5 model (A) (B)

1 and 2 243 (when 20C (68F))
U5 model
1 and 2 24.51.5 (when 20C (68F))
EC-02559
3) Check that air does not come out from (B) when
U5 model
air is blown into (A).
Other than U5 model
2 1
(A) (B)
EC-02558
U5 model
(B)
(B)
(A)
(A)
EC-02621
EC-02620
Check that the evaporation hose has no cracks,
EC(H4SO)-11
12LE_US.book 12
EGR Valve
6. EGR Valve
A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the FU(H4SO)
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-36, REMOVAL, EGR
Valve.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedure, refer to FU(H4SO)
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-36, INSTALLATION,
EGR Valve.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the FU(H4SO)
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-36, INSPECTION,
EGR Valve.>
EC(H4SO)-12
12LE_US.book 13
Fuel Level Sensor

7. Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-67, REMOVAL, Fuel
Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedures, refer to the
FU(H4SO) section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-67, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
Fuel Level Sensor.>
EC(H4SO)-13
12LE_US.book 14
Fuel Temperature Sensor

8. Fuel Temperature Sensor C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel temperature sensor has no
A: REMOVAL deformation, cracks or other damages.
The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor 2) Check the resistance between the fuel tempera-
are integrated into one unit; therefore, refer to Fuel ture sensor terminals.
Level Sensor for removal procedure. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-67, REMOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.> CAUTION:
When measuring the resistance, check the cir-
cuit tester specification and be careful not to
turn on electricity 3 V or more to prevent dam-
aging the fuel temperature sensor.
1 2
3 4
(A)
EC-02391
(A) Fuel temperature sensor
B: INSTALLATION EC-02452
The fuel temperature sensor and fuel level sensor Temperature Terminal No. Standard
are integrated into one unit; therefore, refer to Fuel 9.22.2 k (when the mea-
Level Sensor for installation procedure. <Ref. to 10C (14F)
sured current is 0.5 mA)
FU(H4SO)-67, INSTALLATION, Fuel Level Sen- 2.50.2 k (when the mea-
sor.> 20C (68F) 2 and 3
0.84+0.06 0.05 k (when the
50C (122F)
measured current is 1.0 mA)
(A)
EC-02391
EC(H4SO)-14
12LE_US.book 15

9. Fuel Sub Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-69, REMOVAL, Fuel
Sub Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4SO) section. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-70, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
EC(H4SO)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor

10.Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor C: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
WARNING: 1) Check that the fuel tank pressure sensor does
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the not have deformation, cracks or other damages.
working area. 2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter-
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to
terminal No. 1, circuit tester positive terminal to ter-
minal No. 2 and the circuit tester negative terminal
to terminal No. 1.
NOTE:
and 5.2 V.
IG-02107
cap. 3 2 1
4) Disconnect connector (A) from fuel tank pres-
sure sensor.
5) Pull out the vacuum hose (B) from vehicle.
6) Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor from the
bracket.
V
(A)
(B)
1.5V 1.5V 1.5V
4.8 5.2V
EC-02597
7) Disconnect the pressure hose from fuel tank FU-04486

pressure sensor and remove the fuel tank pressure 3) Check the voltage at a normal atmospheric pres-
sensor. sure.
NOTE:
The atmospheric pressure at higher altitude is low-
er than normal. Therefore, the voltage is lower than
the standard value.
Approx. 2.5 V
2 (+) and 1 ()
(when 25C (77F))
EC-02598
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
7.35 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
EC(H4SO)-16
12LE_US.book 17


on the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(A)
EC-02586

CAUTION:
Be sure to apply pressure within a range of 10
20 kPa (0.1 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1.45 2.90 psi).
Otherwise the fuel tank pressure sensor will be
damaged.
Pressure Terminal No. Standard
Approx. 0.5 V
6.67 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2,
(when 25C
0.97 psi)
2 (+) and (77F))
1 () Approx. 4.5 V
6.67 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2,
(when 25C
0.97 psi)
(77F))
Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.
EC(H4SO)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Drain Filter
11.Drain Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
Drain valve is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the drain filter from drain valve. Refer to
Canister for removal and installation procedures.
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Canister.>
EC(H4SO)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Drain Valve
12.Drain Valve
A: REMOVAL
Drain valve is integrated with canister. Refer to
Canister for removal procedure. <Ref. to
EC(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
B: INSTALLATION
Refer to Canister for the installation procedure.
<Ref. to EC(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Canister.>
C: INSPECTION
Check the resistance between drain valve termi-
nals.
2 1
EC-02455

1 and 2 20 30
EC(H4SO)-19
12LE_US.book 20
PCV Hose Assembly

13.PCV Hose Assembly 5) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from PCV
valve, and remove the PCV hose assembly (B)
A: REMOVAL from cylinder block RH and PCV pipe.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Do not remove except when the PCV hose is Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose assembly (B) by
broken. fitting the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on
1) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake the clamp as shown in the figure, and unlock the
boot assembly. clamp.
ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
ST
(A)
(B) (B)
IN-02668
ME-04374
(A)
(B)
(B)
EC-02605
(A)
IN-02669

FU-06302
EC(H4SO)-20
12LE_US.book 21
PCV Hose Assembly


Clamp (A), (B)
1) Install the PCV hose assembly (B) to the cylinder
block RH and PCV pipe, and then connect the vac- 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
uum hose (A) to the PCV valve.
NOTE:
Use a new clamp for the PCV hose assembly (B), fit
the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the (B)
clamp as shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
(A)
ST
IN-02669
C: INSPECTION
Check the PCV hose assembly for cracks, damage
or looseness.
ME-04374
(A)
(B)
EC-02605
2) Install the air intake boot assembly.

NOTE:
take boot assembly.
IN-03133
EC(H4SO)-21
12LE_US.book 22
PCV Valve
14.PCV Valve 5) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and PCV hose
(B) from the PCV valve and remove the PCV valve.
A: REMOVAL NOTE:
CAUTION: Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose (B) by fitting the
Do not remove unless the PCV valve is broken. cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
1) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake shown in the figure, and unlock the clamp.
boot assembly. ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
ST
(A)
(B) (B)
IN-02668 ME-04374

(A)
(B)
(B)
EC-02606
(A)
IN-02669

FU-06302
EC(H4SO)-22
12LE_US.book 23
PCV Valve

Clamp (A), (B)
1) Connect the vacuum hose (A) and PCV hose (B)
to the PCV valve. 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Use a new clamp for the PCV hose (B), fit the cut
out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
shown in the figure, and lock the clamp. (B)
(A)
ST
IN-02669
C: INSPECTION
1. PCV VALVE
1) Check that the PCV valve has no deformation,
ME-04374
2) Check that air is discharged from (B) when air is
blown into (A).
(A)
(B)
(B) (A)
EC-02606
2) Install the air intake boot assembly. EC-02507
NOTE: 3) Check that air does not come out from (B) when
Align the clamp hole with the protrusion of the air in- air is blown into (A).
take boot assembly.
(A) (B)
EC-02508
IN-03133
Check the vacuum hose for cracks, damage or
looseness.
EC(H4SO)-23
12LE_US.book 24
PCV Valve
EC(H4SO)-24
12LE_US.book 1
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
IN(H4SO)
Page
2. Air Cleaner Element ...................................................................................4
3. Air Cleaner Case ........................................................................................6
4. Air Intake Boot ............................................................................................8
5. Air Intake Duct ............................................................................................9
6. Resonator Chamber .................................................................................10
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
A: COMPONENT
(9)
T1
(8)
(16)
(7)
T4
(4)
(15)
(3)
T3
(5)
(6)
(12) (11)
(2)
(13)
(10)
(1)
T2
(14)
T2
(18)
(17)
IN-03065
IN(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
(1) Air intake duct (9) Clip (17) Blow-by hose

(2) Clip (10) Clamp (18) Clip
(3) Resonator chamber (11) Cover
(4) Air cleaner case (front) (12) Clip Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Spacer (13) Air intake boot ASSY T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(6) Cushion (14) Clamp T2: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
(7) Air cleaner element (15) Cushion T3: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(8) Air cleaner case (rear) (16) Mass air flow and intake air tem- T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
perature sensor
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
IN(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. Air Cleaner Element 4) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air
cleaner case (rear) and air intake boot assembly,
A: REMOVAL and then remove the clip (B) from the air cleaner
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. case (front).
(B) (A)
IN-02749
IG-02107
2) Disconnect the power steering oil pressure hose 5) Pull the air cleaner case (rear) backward of the
(suction hose) from the clip on the side of air clean- vehicle, and remove the air cleaner element.
er case (rear).
IN-02664
IN-02762 B: INSTALLATION
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air Install in the reverse order of removal.
move the clip (B). CAUTION:
Be sure to use SUBARU genuine air cleaner el-
ement depending on the engine type when re-
placing the air cleaner elements. Using other air
(A) cleaner element may affect the engine perfor-
mance.
NOTE:
(B)
Check that there are no foreign objects in the air
cleaner case.
When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align
the protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the
IN-02748
hole on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02438
Tightening torque:
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
IN(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air cleaner element has no defor-
2) Check the air cleaner element for excessive dirt.
IN(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. Air Cleaner Case 5) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air
cleaner case (rear) and air intake boot assembly,
A: REMOVAL and then remove the clip (B) from the air cleaner
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. case (front).
(B) (A)
IN-02749
IG-02107
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- 6) Remove the air cleaner case (rear) and air
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> cleaner element.
3) Disconnect the power steering oil pressure hose
(suction hose) from the clip on the side of air clean-
er case (rear).
IN-02666
7) Remove bolts (A) and nuts (B) which secure the

air cleaner case (front) to the body, and remove the
IN-02762 air cleaner case (front).
4) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air
flow and intake air temperature sensor, and re- (B)
move the clip (B).
(A)
(A)
(B)
IN-02751
IN-02748
IN(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
B: INSTALLATION 4) Connect the connector (A) to the mass air flow

and intake air temperature sensor and secure the
1) Install the bolt (A) and nut (B) which secure the
harness with clip (B).
air cleaner case (front) to the body.
Tightening torque:
Bolt (A)
(A)
6 Nm (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
Nut (B)
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(B)
(B)
IN-02748
5) Connect the power steering oil pressure hose

(suction hose) to the clip on the side of air cleaner
case (rear).
(A)
IN-02751
2) Install the air cleaner case (rear) and air cleaner

element.
NOTE:
When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align the
protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the hole
on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02762

IN-02438
3) Attach the clip (B) to the air cleaner case (front),

and tighten the clamp (A) connecting the air clean-
er case (rear) and air intake boot assembly.
IG-02107
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A) C: INSPECTION
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
1) Check that the air cleaner case has no deforma-
2) Check that the air intake boot has no cracks,
(B) (A)
IN-02749
IN(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8
Air Intake Boot

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. Air Intake Boot C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the air intake boot assembly does not
A: REMOVAL have deformation, cracks or other damages.
1) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake 2) Check there is no foreign matter in the air intake
boot assembly. boot assembly.
(A)
(B) (B)
IN-02668

(B)
(A)
IN-02669
4) Disconnect the blow-by hose and remove the air

intake boot assembly.
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
take boot assembly.
IN-03133
Tightening torque:
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
IN(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Air Intake Duct

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
5. Air Intake Duct

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the clip which secures the air intake
duct, and remove the air intake duct.
IN-02752
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air intake duct has no deforma-
2) Inspect that no foreign objects are mixed in the
air intake duct.
IN(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10
Resonator Chamber
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
6. Resonator Chamber
A: REMOVAL
The resonator chamber and air cleaner case are in-
tegrated into one unit; therefore, refer to Air Clean-
er Case for removal procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-6, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
B: INSTALLATION
er Case for installation procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4SO)-7, INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner Case.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the resonator chamber has no deforma-
IN(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 1
MECHANICAL
ME(H4SO)
Page
2. Compression ............................................................................................23
3. Idle Speed ................................................................................................24
4. Ignition Timing ..........................................................................................25
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum ...........................................................................26
6. Engine Oil Pressure .................................................................................27
7. Fuel Pressure ...........................................................................................28
8. Valve Clearance .......................................................................................29
9. Engine Assembly .....................................................................................31
10. Engine Mounting ......................................................................................39
11. Preparation for Overhaul ..........................................................................42
12. V-belt ........................................................................................................43
13. Crank Pulley .............................................................................................45
14. Timing Belt Cover .....................................................................................47
15. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................48
16. Cam Sprocket ..........................................................................................53
17. Crank Sprocket ........................................................................................54
18. Valve Rocker Assembly ...........................................................................55
19. Camshaft ..................................................................................................58
20. Cylinder Head ..........................................................................................63
21. Cylinder Block ..........................................................................................71
22. Oil Switching Solenoid Valve ...................................................................95
23. Intake and Exhaust Valve ........................................................................98
24. Piston .......................................................................................................99
25. Connecting Rod .....................................................................................100
26. Crankshaft ..............................................................................................101
27. Engine Trouble in General .....................................................................102
28. Engine Noise ..........................................................................................108
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
MECHANICAL
A: SPECIFICATION
Model 2.5 L
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled,
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder,
Belt driven,
Valve system mechanism single overhead camshaft,
4 valve/cylinder
Bore Stroke mm (in) 99.5 79.0 (3.92 3.11)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.94)
Compression ratio 10.0
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Standard 1,020 1,275 (10.4 13.0, 148 185)
(at 200 300 rpm)
Number of piston rings Pressure ring: 2, Oil ring: 1
Open BTDC 0
Constant
Engine Close ABDC 58
Low Open BTDC 0
Intake valve timing
speed Close ABDC 10
High Open BTDC 14
speed Close ABDC 62
Open BBDC30
Exhaust valve timing
Close ATDC14
Intake 0.200.04 (0.00790.0016)
Valve clearance mm (in)
Exhaust 0.250.04 (0.00980.0016)
Idle speed (For CVT model, select lever CVT model: 675100
No load Standard
in P or N range. For MT model, gear rpm MT model: 650100
shift lever in neutral position.) A/C ON Standard 700 850100
Ignition order 1324
CVT model: 1510/675
Ignition timing BTDC/rpm Standard
MT model: 1010/650
ME(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
MECHANICAL
NOTE:
US: Undersize OS: Oversize
Belt tension
Adjuster rod protrusion amount mm (in) 5.2 6.2 (0.205 0.244)
adjuster
Clearance between arm and shaft mm (in) Standard 0.020 0.054 (0.0008 0.0021)
Valve rocker
Rocker arm inside diameter mm (in) Standard 22.020 22.041 (0.8669 0.8678)
arm
Rocker shaft diameter mm (in) Standard 21.987 22.000 (0.8656 0.8661)
Bending limit mm (in) 0.025 (0.00098)
Constant Standard 40.075 40.175 (1.5778 1.5817)
Cam lobe Intake Low speed Standard 35.496 35.596 (1.3975 1.4014)
mm (in)
height High speed Standard 40.315 40.415 (1.5872 1.5911)
Exhaust Standard 39.289 39.389 (1.5468 1.5507)
Cam base circle diameter mm (in) Standard 34.00 (1.3386)
Camshaft
Base circle step of adjacent intake
mm (in) Standard 0.03 (0.001) or less
cams (low speed and high speed)
Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.055 0.090 (0.0022 0.0035)
Journal O.D. mm (in) Standard 31.928 31.945 (1.2570 1.2577)
Cylinder head journal I.D. mm (in) Standard 32.000 32.018 (1.2598 1.2605)
Thrust clearance mm (in) Standard 0.030 0.090 (0.0012 0.0035)
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder block) mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Cylinder
Grinding limit mm (in) 0.1 (0.004)
head
Standard height mm (in) 97.5 (3.84)
Seating angle between valve and valve seat 90
Valve seat Contacting width Intake Standard 0.8 1.4 (0.03 0.055)
between valve and mm (in)
valve seat Exhaust Standard 1.2 1.8 (0.047 0.071)
Clearance between Intake Standard 0.035 0.062 (0.0014 0.0024)
the valve guide and mm (in)
valve stem Exhaust Standard 0.040 0.067 (0.0016 0.0026)
Inside diameter mm (in) 6.000 6.012 (0.2362 0.2367)
Valve guide Intake 5.950 5.965 (0.2343 0.2348)
Valve stem outer diameters mm (in)
Exhaust 5.945 5.960 (0.2341 0.2346)
Intake 20.3 20.7 (0.799 0.815)
Valve guide protrusion amount mm (in)
Exhaust 16.8 17.2 (0.661 0.677)
Intake Standard 0.8 1.2 (0.03 0.047)
Head edge thickness mm (in)
Valve
Intake 120.6 (4.75)
Overall length mm (in)
Exhaust 121.7 (4.79)
Free length mm (in) 55.2 (2.173)
235.3 270.7 (24 27.6, 52.9 60.8)/
Set
45.0 (1.772)
Valve spring Tension/spring height N (kgf, lb)/mm (in)
578.9 639.9 (59.1 65.3, 130.3
Lift
143.9)/34.7 (1.366)
Squareness 2.5, 2.4 mm (0.094 in) or less
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder head) mm (in) 0.025 (0.00098)
Cylinder Cylindricality mm (in) Limit 0.015 (0.0006)
block Out-of-roundness mm (in) Limit 0.010 (0.0004)
Clearance between cylinder and
mm (in) Standard 0.015 0.005 (0.00059 0.00020)
piston at 20C (68F)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter) mm (in) To 100.005 (3.9372)
ME(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
MECHANICAL
Piston grade point mm (in) 38.2 (1.504)

A 99.510 99.520 (3.9177 3.9181)
Standard
Piston B 99.500 99.510 (3.9173 3.9177)
Outer diameter mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098) OS 99.750 99.770 (3.9272 3.9280)
0.50 (0.0197) OS 100.000 100.020 (3.9370 3.9378)
Piston pin must be fitted into position with
Degree of fit
thumb at 20C (68F).
Piston pin
Clearance between piston pin hole
mm (in) Standard 0.004 0.008 (0.0002 0.0003)
and piston pin
Top ring Standard 0.20 0.35 (0.0079 0.0138)
Piston ring gap mm (in) Second ring Standard 0.37 0.52 (0.0146 0.0205)
Piston ring Oil ring Standard 0.20 0.50 (0.0079 0.0197)
Clearance between Top ring Standard 0.040 0.080 (0.0016 0.0031)
piston ring and pis- mm (in)
ton ring groove Second ring Standard 0.030 0.070 (0.0012 0.0028)
Bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in)
mm (in) Limit 0.10 (0.0039)
in length
Connecting
rod and Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.016 0.044 (0.0006 0.0017)
connecting Standard 1.492 1.501 (0.0587 0.0591)
rod bearing Bearing size 0.03 (0.0012) US 1.510 1.513 (0.0594 0.0596)
mm (in)
(Thickness at center) 0.05 (0.0020) US 1.520 1.523 (0.0598 0.0600)
0.25 (0.0098) US 1.620 1.623 (0.0638 0.0639)
Bushing of Clearance between piston pin and
mm (in) Standard 0 0.022 (0 0.0009)
small end bushing
Cylindricality mm (in) Limit 0.004 (0.0002)
Out-of-
Crank pin mm (in) Limit 0.003 (0.0001)
roundness
Grinding limit (dia.) mm (in) To 51.750 (2.0374)
Out-of-
Crank journal mm (in) Limit 0.005 (0.0002)
roundness
Standard 51.984 52.000 (2.0466 2.0472)
Crank pin outer 0.03 (0.0012) US 51.954 51.970 (2.0454 2.0461)
mm (in)
diameter 0.05 (0.0020) US 51.934 51.950 (2.0446 2.0453)
Crankshaft 0.25 (0.0098) US 51.734 51.750 (2.0368 2.0374)
and Standard 59.992 60.008 (2.3619 2.3625)
crankshaft
Crank journal outer 0.03 (0.0012) US 59.962 59.978 (2.3607 2.3613)
bearing mm (in)
diameter 0.05 (0.0020) US 59.942 59.958 (2.3599 2.3605)
0.25 (0.0098) US 59.742 59.758 (2.3520 2.3527)
Standard 1.998 2.011 (0.0787 0.0792)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.017 2.020 (0.0794 0.0795)
#1, #3
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.027 2.030 (0.0798 0.0799)
Bearing size 0.25 (0.0098) US 2.127 2.130 (0.0837 0.0839)
(Thickness at center)
mm (in) Standard 2.000 2.013 (0.0787 0.0793)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.019 2.022 (0.0795 0.0796)
#2, #4, #5
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.029 2.032 (0.0799 0.0800)
0.25 (0.0098) US 2.129 2.132 (0.0838 0.0839)
ME(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
General Description
MECHANICAL
B: COMPONENT
1. V-BELT
(5)
(6)
(4)
(3)
(7)
T4
A
(11)
T2
(8)
T4 (2)
T6 T5
A
B
(12)
T1 B
T7 T7
(9) T5
(10)
C
C
(1)
(13)
T7
T3
ME-04541
(1) V-belt (8) Idler pulley ASSY Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) V-belt cover bracket (9) Stopper rod RH T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) V-belt tensioner ASSY (10) Stopper rod LH T2: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(4) Power steering pump bracket (11) A/C compressor T3: 22 (2.2, 16.2)
(5) Generator (12) A/C compressor bracket B T4: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(6) Generator plate (13) Front cushion rubber T5: 26.5 (2.7, 19.5)
(7) A/C compressor bracket A T6: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T7: 36 (3.7, 26.6)
ME(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
MECHANICAL
2. TIMING BELT
(5) T1 (1)
(2)
T2
T5 (3)
(6)
(4)
T4 (7)
(8)
T1
(12) T3
T1
(9) T1
T4
T4
(10)
(15) (13)
(11)
T5
(16)
(14)
T6
T1
T6
ME-04539
(1) Timing belt cover No. 2 RH (9) Automatic belt tension adjuster Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
ASSY
(2) Timing belt guide (MT model) (10) Belt idler No. 2 T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(3) Crank sprocket (11) Cam sprocket No. 2 T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(4) Timing belt cover No. 2 LH (12) Timing belt T3: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1)
(5) Cam sprocket No. 1 (13) Front timing belt cover T4: 39 (4.0, 28.8)
(6) Belt idler (A) (14) Timing belt cover LH T5: 78 (8.0, 57.5)
(7) Tensioner bracket (15) Crank pulley (MT model) T6: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-45, INSTAL-
LATION, Crank Pulley.>
(8) Belt idler (B) (16) Crank pulley (CVT model)
ME(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7
General Description
MECHANICAL
3. CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT

(1)
(20)
(2) T3
T9 T5 T2 T6
T6 (4) (26) (22) (25)

(32) T4
(7)
T7
(8)
(3)
(23)
T3
(24)
(6)
(8)
(5) T8
(9)
(10)
(30) (19)
T5
(8)
(14)
(15)
T8 (16)
(7)
T6 T2
(10) (2)
T4 (17)
(29) T3
(21) (18)
(11)
(28) (27) (19)
T2
(12)
(5) (13) T1
T6
(31) T7
T9
T3
(3)
T7
ME-05771
ME(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Rocker cover RH (16) Oil filler duct (31) Seal washer
(2) Intake valve rocker ASSY (17) O-ring (32) Washer
(3) Exhaust valve rocker ASSY (18) Rocker cover LH
(4) Camshaft cap RH (19) Stud bolt Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Oil seal (20) Rocker cover gasket RH T1: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(6) Camshaft RH (21) Rocker cover gasket LH T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(7) Plug (22) Oil switching solenoid valve RH T3: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(8) Spark plug pipe gasket (23) Oil switching solenoid valve T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
holder RH
(9) Cylinder head RH (24) Gasket T5: 17 (1.7, 12.5)
(10) Cylinder head gasket (25) Oil temperature sensor T6: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(11) Cylinder head LH (26) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil T7: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
pressure switch RH
(12) Camshaft LH (27) Oil switching solenoid valve LH T8: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-63, INSTAL-
LATION, Cylinder Head.>
(13) Camshaft cap LH (28) Oil switching solenoid valve T9: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-55, INSTAL-
holder LH LATION, Valve Rocker Assem-
bly.>
(14) Oil filler cap (29) Gasket
(15) Gasket (30) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch LH
ME(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
General Description
MECHANICAL
4. VALVE ROCKER ASSY
T2
T3
(1)
(1)
T1
(5)
(2)
(2)
(4)
T2 (3)
(3)
T2
T3
ME-02691
(1) Intake valve rocker ASSY (4) Exhaust rocker shaft Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Valve rocker nut (5) Exhaust valve rocker arm T1: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(3) Valve rocker adjusting screw T2: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
ME(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10
General Description
MECHANICAL
5. CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
(1) (1)
(4) (5) (6) (7) (8)

(3)
(2)
(2)
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8)
(3)
(4)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(3) (8)
(4)
(9)
(6)
(7)
(8)
ME-04786
(1) Exhaust valve (4) Valve spring seat (7) Valve spring retainer
(2) Intake valve (5) Intake valve oil seal (8) Valve spring retainer key
(3) Valve guide (6) Valve spring (9) Exhaust valve oil seal
ME(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 11
General Description
MECHANICAL
6. CYLINDER BLOCK
T5
T2
T6 (31) T2
(1)
(5)
(7) T10
(32)
(2) (3) (6)
(29) (4)
T2 T6
(32)
T9 T2
(10) (28)
(8) (11)
(9) T2
(10)
(4)
T2 (3)
T6
(27) (15)
(10) (28)
(4)
(14) T8
T9
(26)
T9
T3 (23) (29)
T2
(16) (3)
(10) T2 (22) (12)
(17) (33)
T6
T10
(35) (38) T2
(37) T2
(34) (24)
T4
T5 T2
(21)
(36) (30)
(13)
(25)
(18)
T1
(20)
T7
(19)
ME-05772
ME(H4SO)-11
12LE_US.book 12
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Oil pressure switch (18) Oil pan (35) O-ring

(2) Cylinder block RH (19) Drain plug (36) Oil drain pipe
(3) Service hole plug (20) Drain plug gasket (37) O-ring
(4) Gasket (21) Oil level gauge guide (38) Oil level switch
(5) Oil separator cover (22) Water pump sealing
(6) Water by-pass pipe (23) Oil filter Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Oil pump (24) Gasket T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Front oil seal (25) Water pump hose T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(9) Rear oil seal (26) Plug T3: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(10) O-ring (27) Seal T4: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(11) Service hole cover (28) Seal washer T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Cylinder block LH (29) Washer T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Water pump (30) O-ring T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) Baffle plate (31) Engine rear hanger T8: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(15) Oil filter connector (32) Oil pump seal T9: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(16) Oil strainer (33) Oil level gauge T10: <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-76, INSTAL-
LATION, Cylinder Block.>
(17) Cylinder block lower (34) O-ring
ME(H4SO)-12
12LE_US.book 13
General Description
MECHANICAL
7. CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON
(2)
T2
(1)
(3)
T3
(10)
(4)
(9)
(5)
(6) (12)
(7)
(10) (8) (13)
(11)
T1 (15)
(13)
(14) (14)
(11)
(13) T1
(13) (8) (10)

(16)
(7)
(6)
(12) (5)
(10)
(9)
(19)
(18)
(17)
(18)
(17)
ME-05773
(1) Reinforcement (CVT model) (9) Piston pin (17) Crankshaft bearing #1, #3
(2) Drive plate (CVT model) (10) Snap ring (18) Crankshaft bearing #2, #4
(3) Flywheel (MT model) (11) Connecting rod nut (19) Crankshaft bearing #5
(4) Ball bearing (MT model) (12) Connecting rod
(5) Top ring (13) Connecting rod bearing Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Second ring (14) Connecting rod cap T1: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(7) Oil ring (15) Crankshaft T2: <Ref. to CVT-133, INSTALLA-
TION, Drive Plate.>
(8) Piston (16) Woodruff key T3: <Ref. to CL-14, INSTALLATION,
Flywheel.>
ME(H4SO)-13
12LE_US.book 14
General Description
MECHANICAL
8. ENGINE MOUNTING
T4 (3)
T1
B
T4
A (2)
T3
(1)
T2
T4
ME-04465
(1) Front mounting bracket (3) Engine mounting bracket Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Front cushion rubber T1: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
T2: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
T3: 58 (5.9, 42.8)
T4: 60 (6.1, 44.3)
ME(H4SO)-14
12LE_US.book 15
General Description
MECHANICAL
C: CAUTION
any work.
Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from the bat-
tery.
All parts should be thoroughly cleaned, paying special attention to engine oil passages, pistons and bear-
ings.
Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston, bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to assem-
bly.
Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant contact the timing belt, clutch disc and flywheel.
All removed parts, if to be reused, should be reinstalled in the original positions and directions.
Bolts, nuts and washers should be replaced with new parts as required.
Even if necessary inspections have been made in advance, proceed with assembly work while making re-
checks.
Remove or install the engine in an area where chain hoists, lifting devices, etc. are available for ready use.
Be sure not to damage coated surfaces of body panels with tools, or not to stain seats and windows with
coolant or oil. Place a cover over fender, as required, for protection.
Prior to starting work, prepare the following:
Service tools, clean cloth, containers to catch coolant and oil, wire ropes, chain hoist, transmission jacks, etc.
Lift up or lower the vehicle when necessary. Make sure to support the correct positions.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH (LH side)
NOTE:
CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
also be used.
ST18231AA010
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for various inspections.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
ME(H4SO)-15
12LE_US.book 16
General Description
MECHANICAL

498267800 CYLINDER HEAD Used for replacing valve guides.
TABLE Used for removing and installing valve spring.
ST-498267800
498277200 STOPPER SET Used for preventing the torque converter from
falling when removing and installing the engine.
ST-498277200
498457000 ENGINE STAND Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (499817100).
ST-498457000
ADAPTER LH (499817100).
ST-498457100
498747300 PISTON GUIDE Used for installing piston in cylinder.
ST-498747300
ME(H4SO)-16
12LE_US.book 17
General Description
MECHANICAL

498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL Used for press-fitting of intake valve guide oil
GUIDE seals and exhaust valve guide oil seals.
ST-498857100
499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin, piston and con-
necting rod.
ST-499017100
499037100 CONNECTING ROD Used for removing and installing connecting rod
BUSHING bushing.
REMOVER AND
INSTALLER
ST-499037100
499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL Used for installing crankshaft oil seal.
SEAL INSTALLER Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
GUIDE (499597100).
ST-499587200
499587500 OIL SEAL Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
INSTALLER Used together with OIL SEAL GUIDE
(499597000).
ST-499587500
ME(H4SO)-17
12LE_US.book 18
General Description
MECHANICAL

499587700 CAMSHAFT OIL Used for installing cylinder head plug.
SEAL INSTALLER
ST-499587700
499097700 PISTON PIN Used for removing piston pin.
REMOVER ASSY
ST-499097700
499207400 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH (RH side)
ST-499207400
499497000 TORX PLUS Used for removing and installing camshaft cap.
ST-499497000
499587100 OIL SEAL Used for installing oil pump oil seal.
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
ME(H4SO)-18
12LE_US.book 19
General Description
MECHANICAL

499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
Used together with CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL
INSTALLER (499587500).
ST-499597000
SEAL GUIDE Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
ST-499597100
499718000 VALVE SPRING Used for removing and installing valve spring.
REMOVER
ST-499718000
499767200 VALVE GUIDE Used for removing valve guides.
REMOVER
ST-499767200
499767400 VALVE GUIDE Used for reaming valve guides.
REAMER
ST-499767400
ME(H4SO)-19
12LE_US.book 20
General Description
MECHANICAL

499767700 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing valve guides. (Intake side)
ADJUSTER
ST-499767700
499767800 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing valve guides. (Exhaust side)
ADJUSTER
ST-499767800
499817100 ENGINE STAND Stand used for engine disassembly and
assembly.
Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (498457000) & LH (498457100).
ST-499817100
499977100 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pulley.
WRENCH (MT model)
ST-499977100
499977400 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pulley.
WRENCH (CVT model)
ST-499977400
ME(H4SO)-20
12LE_US.book 21
General Description
MECHANICAL

499987500 CRANKSHAFT Used for rotating crankshaft.
SOCKET
ST-499987500
18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE Used for installing the crank pulley.
ST18854AA000
TOR RELEASE
ST42099AE000
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for inspecting the fuel pressure.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
42075AG690 FUEL HOSE Used for inspecting the fuel pressure.
NOTE:
This is the SUBARU genuine part.
ST42075AG690
ME(H4SO)-21
12LE_US.book 22
General Description
MECHANICAL

18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER Used for installing the valve rocker assembly
HOLDER (intake). (2-piece set)
ST18354AA000
18258AA000 SPRING Used for installing the valve rocker assembly
INSTALLER (intake).
ST18258AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Compression gauge Used for measuring compression.
Vacuum gauge Used for measuring intake manifold vacuum.
Oil pressure gauge Used for measuring engine oil pressure.
Fuel pressure gauge Used for measuring fuel pressure.
ME(H4SO)-22
12LE_US.book 23
Compression
MECHANICAL
2. Compression 11) Crank the engine by starter motor and read the
value when the needle of the compression gauge
A: INSPECTION becomes stable.
CAUTION: NOTE:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be Perform at least two measurements per cylinder,
careful not to burn yourself during measure- and make sure that the values are correct.
ment. If the compression pressure is out of standard,
1) After warming-up the engine, turn the ignition check or adjust the pistons, valves and cylinders.
switch to OFF. Compression (fully open throttle):
2) Make sure that the battery is fully charged. Standard
3) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse 1,020 1,275 kPa (10.4 13.0 kgf/cm2,
box. 148 185 psi)
Difference between cylinders
49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7 psi) or less
FU-04800
4) Start the engine and run it until it stalls.

5) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec-
onds.
6) Turn the ignition switch to OFF.
7) Remove all spark plugs. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3,
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
8) Fully open the throttle valve.
9) Check the starter motor for satisfactory perfor-
mance and operation.
10) Install the compression gauge to the spark plug
hole.
NOTE:
When using a screw-in type compression gauge,
the screw should be less than 18 mm (0.71 in) long.
ME-00192
ME(H4SO)-23
12LE_US.book 24
Idle Speed
MECHANICAL
3. Idle Speed
A: INSPECTION
1) Before checking the idle speed, check the fol-
lowing item:
(1) Check the air cleaner element is free from
clogging, ignition timing is correct, spark plugs
are in good condition, and hoses are connected
properly.
(2) Check the malfunction indicator light does
not illuminate.
3) Read the engine idle speed using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, READ CUR-
RENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
NOTE:
Idle speed cannot be adjusted manually, be-
cause the idle speed is automatically adjusted.
If idle speed is out of standard, refer to the Gen-
eral Diagnosis Table under Engine Control Sys-
tem. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic
Procedure.>
(1) Check the idle speed when no-loaded.
(Headlight, heater fan, rear defroster, radiator
fan, A/C and etc. are OFF)
Idle speed (No load, and for CVT model, select
lever in P or N range, for MT model, gear
shift lever in neutral position.):
Standard
675100 rpm (CVT model)
650100 rpm (MT model)
(2) Check the idle speed when loaded. (Turn
the A/C switch to ON and operate the com-
pressor for at least one minute before measure-
ment.)
Idle speed (A/C on, and for CVT model, select
lever in P or N range, for MT model, gear
shift lever in neutral position.):
Standard
700 850100 rpm
ME(H4SO)-24
12LE_US.book 25
Ignition Timing
MECHANICAL
4. Ignition Timing
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be
careful not to burn yourself at measurement.
1) Before checking the ignition timing, check the
following item:
clogging, spark plugs are in good condition, and
hoses are connected properly.
not illuminate.
3) Read the ignition timing using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, READ CUR-
RENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
NOTE:
If ignition timing is out of standard, check the igni-
tion control system. Refer to Engine Control Sys-
tem. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic
Procedure.>
Ignition timing [BTDC/rpm]:
Standard
1510/675 (CVT model)
1010/650 (MT model)
ME(H4SO)-25
12LE_US.book 26
Intake Manifold Vacuum

MECHANICAL
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum

A: INSPECTION
2) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold, and attach the vacuum gauge.
ME-04467
3) Keep the engine at idle speed and read the vacuum gauge indication.
NOTE:
Condition of engine inside can be diagnosed by observing the behavior of the vacuum gauge needle as de-
scribed in table below.
Intake manifold vacuum (at idling, A/C OFF):
Standard
60.0 kPa (450 mmHg, 17.72 inHg) or more
4) After inspection, install the related parts in the reverse order of removal.
Diagnosis of engine condition by inspection of intake manifold vacuum
Vacuum gauge needle behavior Possible engine condition
1. Needle is steady but lower than standard value. This ten- Leakage around intake manifold gasket, disconnection or dam-
dency becomes more evident as engine temperature rises. age of vacuum hose
2. Needle intermittently drops to position lower than standard Leakage around cylinder
value.
3. Needle drops suddenly and intermittently from standard Sticky valve
value.
4. When engine speed is gradually increased, needle begins to Weak or broken valve springs
vibrate rapidly at certain speed, and then vibration increases as
engine speed increases.
5. Needle vibrates above and below standard value in narrow Defective ignition system
range.
ME(H4SO)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Engine Oil Pressure

MECHANICAL
6. Engine Oil Pressure 5) Start the engine, and check the oil pressure.
NOTE:
A: INSPECTION Standard value is based on an engine oil temper-
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. ature of 80C (176F).
If the oil pressure is out of specification, check oil
pump, oil filter and lubrication line. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-45, INSPECTION, Engine Lubrication
System Trouble in General.>
If the oil pressure warning light is ON and oil
pressure is within specification, check the oil pres-
sure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-45, INSPECTION,
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General.>
Engine oil pressure:
IG-02107 Standard
2) Remove the oil pressure switch. <Ref. to 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) or more (at 600
LU(H4SO)-25, REMOVAL, Oil Pressure Switch.> rpm)
3) Install the oil pressure gauge to cylinder block. 294 kPa (3.0 kgf/cm2, 43 psi) or more (at
5,000 rpm)
ME-00196
IG-02107
ME(H4SO)-27
12LE_US.book 28
Fuel Pressure
MECHANICAL
7. Fuel Pressure 5) Check the fuel pressure after warming up the en-
gine.
A: INSPECTION NOTE:
CAUTION: The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa
Before removing the fuel pressure gauge, re- (0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard
lease the fuel pressure. values during high-altitude operations.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Check or replace the fuel pump and fuel delivery
Catch the fuel from hoses using a container line if the fuel pressure is out of the standard.
or cloth. Fuel pressure:
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)- Standard
53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE- 340 400 kPa (3.5 4.1 kgf/cm2, 49 58
DURE, Fuel.> psi)
2) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler 6) After inspection, install the related parts in the
cap. reverse order of removal.
3) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose from the fuel
delivery pipe, and connect the fuel pressure gauge.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push
ST1 in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose.
LEASE
ST
FU-05602
(2) Connect the fuel pressure gauge with ST2

and ST3.
NOTE:
ST2 is a SUBARU genuine part.
ST2 42075AG690 FUEL HOSE
ST3 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
ST3
ST2
ME-04897
ME(H4SO)-28
12LE_US.book 29
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
8. Valve Clearance (4) Remove the bolts, then remove the rocker
cover LH.
A: INSPECTION 9) Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of com-
CAUTION: pression stroke by rotating the crank pulley clock-
wise using the socket wrench.
it off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or NOTE:
causing a fire. When the arrow mark (A) on cam sprocket LH is at
NOTE: the top position, the #1 cylinder piston is at top
dead center of the compression stroke.
Inspection of valve clearance should be performed
while engine is cold. (A)
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE-
ME-05469
10) Measure #1 cylinder valve clearance by using

thickness gauge (A).
NOTE:
Insert the thickness gauge (A) in as horizontally
as possible with respect to the valve stem end face.
IG-02107 Lift up the vehicle, and then measure the ex-
5) Remove the timing belt cover LH. haust valve clearances.
If the measured value is not within the inspection
value, take notes of the value in order to adjust the
valve clearance later on.
Valve clearance (inspection value):
Intake
0.200.04 mm (0.00790.0016 in)
Exhaust
0.250.04 mm (0.00980.0016 in)
(A)
ME-00199
6) Remove the fuel injector. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-

37, REMOVAL, Fuel Injector.>
7) When inspecting #1 and #3 cylinders
(1) Disconnect the ignition coil from spark plug
on RH side. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, RH SIDE,
(2) Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
(3) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker ME-02696
cover RH.
(4) Remove the bolts, then remove the rocker
cover RH.
8) When inspecting #2 and #4 cylinders
(1) Disconnect the ignition coil from spark plug
on LH side. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, LH SIDE, RE-
MOVAL, Spark Plug.>
(2) Place a suitable container under the vehicle.
(3) Disconnect the PCV hose from the rocker
cover LH.
ME(H4SO)-29
12LE_US.book 30
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
11) Measure the valve clearance in #3, #2 and #4 2) Adjust the #1 cylinder valve clearance.
cylinder in the same measurement procedure as #1 (1) Loosen the valve rocker nut and screw.
cylinder in this order. (2) Set a suitable thickness gauge.
NOTE: (3) While noting the valve clearance, tighten the
Be sure to set the cylinder pistons to their re- valve rocker adjusting screw.
spective top dead centers on compression stroke (4) When the specified valve clearance is ob-
before measuring valve clearances. tained, tighten the valve rocker nut.
By rotating the crank pulley clockwise every 180 NOTE:
from the state that #1 cylinder piston is on the top Insert a thickness gauge in a direction as hori-
dead center of compression stroke, #3, #2 and #4 zontal as possible with respect to the valve stem
cylinder pistons come to the top dead center of end face.
compression stroke in this order. Lift up the vehicle and adjust the exhaust valve
12) If necessary, adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. clearances.
to ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear-
ance.> Valve clearance (adjustment value):
13) After inspection, install the related parts in the Intake
reverse order of removal. 0.200.04 mm (0.00790.0016 in)
Exhaust
NOTE: 0.250.04 mm (0.00980.0016 in)
Refer to Camshaft when installing the rocker cov-
er. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-59, INSTALLATION, Cam- Tightening torque:
shaft.> 9.75 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
B: ADJUSTMENT
CAUTION:
causing a fire.
NOTE:
Adjustment of valve clearance should be per-
formed while engine is cold.
1) Set #1 cylinder piston to top dead center of com- ME-00203
pression stroke by rotating the crank pulley clock- 3) Adjust the valve clearance in #3, #2 and #4 cyl-
wise using the socket wrench. inder in the same adjustment procedure as #1 cyl-
NOTE: inder in this order.
When the arrow mark (A) on cam sprocket LH is at NOTE:
the top position, the #1 cylinder piston is at top Be sure to set the cylinder pistons to their re-
dead center of the compression stroke. spective top dead centers on compression stroke
before adjusting valve clearances.
(A)
By rotating the crank pulley clockwise every 180
from the state that #1 cylinder piston is on the top
dead center of compression stroke, #3, #2 and #4
cylinder pistons come to the top dead center of
compression stroke in this order.
4) Ensure the valve clearances of each cylinder are
within specifications. If necessary, readjust the
valve clearances.
ME-05469
5) After adjustment, install the related parts in the
NOTE:
Refer to Camshaft when installing the rocker cov-
er. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-59, INSTALLATION, Cam-
shaft.>
ME(H4SO)-30
12LE_US.book 31
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
9. Engine Assembly 12) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead
A: REMOVAL nector and rear engine hanger.
1) Change the front hood damper mounting posi-
tion from (A) to (B), and completely open the front
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B) FU-05129
13) Slide the engine harness connector in the di-

rection of the arrow and remove it from the rear en-
gine hanger.
ME-04396
2) Remove the V-belt covers.

3) Collect the refrigerant from A/C system. <Ref. to
AC-24, Refrigerant Recovery Procedure.>
DURE, Fuel.>
FU-05247
14) Disconnect connector (A) and terminal (B) from

the generator, and remove the generator cord from
clip (C).
15) Disconnect connector (D) from the A/C com-
pressor.
(A) (B) (C)
IG-02107
cap.
7) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)- (D)
9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
8) Remove the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
ME-04240
IN(H4SO)-8, REMOVAL, Air Intake Boot.>
9) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, 16) Remove the clip which secure the generator
REMOVAL, Radiator.> cord to the intake manifold protector LH.
10) Remove the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
ME-04241
ME(H4SO)-31
12LE_US.book 32
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
17) Disconnect the following hoses. 20) Disconnect the ground cable on the engine
(1) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-76, RE- side.
MOVAL, Hose and Pipe.>
(2) Brake booster vacuum hose
ME-04533
ME-04898
(3) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose
ME-03377

22) Separate the torque converter clutch from the
ME-04216 drive plate. (CVT model)
18) Remove the power steering pump. (1) Remove the throttle body. <Ref. to
(1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle Body.>
43, REMOVAL, V-belt.> (2) Remove the manifold absolute pressure
(2) Disconnect the connector (A) from power sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-33, REMOVAL,
steering pump, and remove the power steering Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor.>
pump together with the power steering pump (3) Remove the service hole plug.
bracket from engine and stopper rod. (4) Insert the wrench into the crank pulley bolt,
and rotate the crank pulley to remove the four
bolts which hold torque converter clutch to the
(A) drive plate.
ME-04908
(3) Mount the power steering pump together

with the power steering pump bracket on RH
ME-00212
side wheel apron.
19) Lift up the vehicle. 23) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose (A) and evap-
oration hose (B).
CAUTION:
or cloth.
ME(H4SO)-32
12LE_US.book 33
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push 27) Lift up the vehicle.
ST in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect CAUTION:
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose
When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes
(A).
at the same time.
28) Remove the bolts which secure the engine
LEASE
mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine
(2) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- mounting.
ration hose (B) from the evaporation pipe.
(A)
ST
(B)
ME-04247
FU-04950
29) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the low-
24) Support the engine with a lifting device and er side of transmission to the engine.
wire ropes.
CVT model
LU-00222
ME-04228
25) Remove the stopper rod.
MT model
ME-04422
MT-00077
26) Remove the bolt and nut which secure engine
mounting to the cradle.
CAUTION:
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes
at the same time.
ME-04246
ME(H4SO)-33
12LE_US.book 34
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
31) Support the transmission with a garage jack. (3) Remove the bolts which hold the upper side
NOTE: of the transmission to the engine.
Fine adjustment of the transmission height can be CVT model
performed with this operation.
(A)
(B)
ME-04227
ME-04959 MT model
(A) Transmission
(B) Garage jack
32) Separation of engine and transmission

CAUTION:
Before removing the engine away from trans-
mission, check to be sure no work has been
overlooked.
(1) Remove the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-9, MT-01524
REMOVAL, Starter.>
(2) Attach the ST to the torque converter clutch 33) Remove the engine from the vehicle.
case. (CVT model) NOTE:
ST 498277200 STOPPER SET Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body
panels with crank pulley, oil level gauge, etc.
(1) Slightly raise the engine.
(2) Adjust the height of the transmission with
garage jack.
(3) Move the engine horizontally until main
shaft is withdrawn from clutch cover. (MT mod-
el)
(4) Slowly move the engine away from engine
ST compartment.
ME-04960
ME(H4SO)-34
12LE_US.book 35
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 5) Remove the ST from torque converter clutch

case. (CVT model)
1) Apply a small amount of grease to splines of
main shaft. (MT model) NOTE:
Be careful not to drop the ST into the torque con-
Grease:
verter clutch case when removing the ST.
NICHIMOLY N-130 or equivalent
ST 498277200 STOPPER SET
2) Position the engine in engine compartment and
align it with transmission.
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage adjacent parts or body
3) Tighten the bolts which hold upper side of trans-
mission to engine.
Tightening torque:
ST
50 Nm (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
CVT model ME-04960
6) Install the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-10, IN-

STALLATION, Starter.>
CAUTION:
at the same time.
8) Attach the bolts and nuts which hold lower side
of the transmission to engine.
ME-04227 Tightening torque:
50 Nm (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
MT model
CVT model
MT-01524
ME-04228
4) Remove the garage jack. MT model
MT-00077
ME(H4SO)-35
12LE_US.book 36
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
9) Set the engine mounting, and tighten the bolts 13) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.
which hold engine mounting to the engine.
Tightening torque:
58 Nm (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
LU-00222
14) Install the torque converter clutch to drive plate.

(CVT model)
ME-04247 (1) Insert the wrench into the crank pulley bolt,
and rotate the crank pulley to attach the four
bolts which hold torque converter clutch to the
CAUTION: drive plate.
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes NOTE:
at the same time.
Be careful not to drop bolts into the torque convert-
11) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine
er clutch case.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque:
25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
60 Nm (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
ME-00212
ME-04246
(2) Fit the plug to service hole.
12) Install the stopper rod.
(3) Install the throttle body. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
Tightening torque: 15, INSTALLATION, Throttle Body.>
36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) (4) Install the manifold absolute pressure sen-
sor. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-34, INSTALLATION,
Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor.>
ME-04422
ME(H4SO)-36
12LE_US.book 37
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
16) Connect the ground cable. 20) Install the clip which secure the generator cord
to the intake manifold protector LH.
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
ME-04241
ME-04533 21) Connect connector (D) to the A/C compressor.

22) Install the generator cord to clip (C), and con-
nect connector (A) and terminal (B) to the genera-
tor.
Tightening torque:
15 Nm (1.5 kgf-m, 11.1 ft-lb)
(A) (B) (C)
ME-03377

18) Install the power steering pump. (D)
(1) Install the power steering pump together
with the power steering pump bracket to engine
and stopper rod, and connect the connector (A) ME-04240
to the power steering pump. 23) Connect the engine harness connector to the
Tightening torque: bulkhead harness connector, attach it to the rear
engine hanger, and fasten with bolt.
Refer to COMPONENT of STARTING/
CHARGING SYSTEMS for the tightening Tightening torque:
torque. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-7, GENERATOR 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
BRACKET, COMPONENT, General Descrip-
tion.>
(A)
FU-05129
24) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to

ME-04908
(2) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43, Pipe.>
INSTALLATION, V-belt.> 25) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-21, IN-
19) Connect the following hoses. STALLATION, Radiator.>
(1) Fuel delivery hose and evaporation hose 26) Install the air intake boot assembly. <Ref. to
(2) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose IN(H4SO)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Boot.>
(3) Brake booster vacuum hose 27) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9,
(4) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-76, INSTAL- INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
LATION, Hose and Pipe.>
ME(H4SO)-37
12LE_US.book 38
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
IG-02107
29) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-14,

FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
30) Charge the A/C system with refrigerant. <Ref.
to AC-25, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Charging
Procedure.>
31) Check the CVTF level and replenish it if neces-
sary. (CVT model) <Ref. to CVT-37, ADJUST-
MENT, CVTF.>
32) Install the V-belt cover.
tion from (B) to (A), and close the front hood.
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
ME-04396
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the pipes, hoses, connectors and
clamps are securely connected.
2) Check that the engine coolant is up to specified
level.
3) Check CVTF is at the specified level. (CVT mod-
el)
4) Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leak-
age, engine coolant leakage, fuel leakage, noise or
vibration.
ME(H4SO)-38
12LE_US.book 39
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
10.Engine Mounting 9) Remove the stopper rod.
A: REMOVAL
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
ME-04422

(B) (B) mounting to the cradle.
ME-04396
ME-04249

CAUTION:
at the same time.
IG-02107 mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine
3) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly mounting.
and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan and
Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-25, REMOVAL,
Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
7) Lower the vehicle. ME-04247
8) Support the engine with a lifting device and wire
ropes.
LU-00222
ME(H4SO)-39
12LE_US.book 40
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 5) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.

1) Set the engine mounting, and tighten the bolts
Tightening torque:
58 Nm (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
LU-00222

Pipe.>
ME-04247
2) Lower the vehicle. LATION, Front Under Cover.>
CAUTION: 9) Lower the vehicle.
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes 10) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
at the same time. and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
3) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine CO(H4SO)-24, INSTALLATION, Radiator Main
mounting to the cradle. Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-25, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
Tightening torque: 11) Connect the ground cable to battery.
60 Nm (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
IG-02107
ME-04249
4) Install the stopper rod. tion from (B) to (A), and close the front hood.
36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
ME-04422 ME-04396
ME(H4SO)-40
12LE_US.book 41
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY 2) Install the front cushion rubber to the engine

mounting bracket.
1) Remove the front cushion rubber from the en-
gine mounting bracket. Tightening torque:
25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
ME-04251
2) Remove the front cushion rubber from the front ME-04251
mounting bracket. E: INSPECTION

Check that the engine mounting does not have de-
formation, cracks and any other damage.
ME-04252
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the front cushion rubber to the front
mounting bracket.
Tightening torque:
45 Nm (4.6 kgf-m, 33.2 ft-lb)
ME-04252
ME(H4SO)-41
12LE_US.book 42
Preparation for Overhaul

MECHANICAL
11.Preparation for Overhaul

A: PROCEDURE
1) After removing the engine from vehicle body, at-
tach the ST to the engine as shown in the figure.
ST1 498457000 ENGINE STAND ADAPTER
RH
LH
ST3 499817100 ENGINE STAND
ST3 ST1
ST2
ME-00221
2) In this section the procedures described under

each index are all connected and stated in order.
Engine overhaul will be completed when you go
through all steps in the procedure.
Therefore, in this section, to conduct the particular
procedure within the flow of a section, you need to
go back and conduct the procedure described pre-
viously in order to do that particular procedure.
ME(H4SO)-42
12LE_US.book 43
V-belt
MECHANICAL
12.V-belt 3) Remove the bolt securing the idler pulley to the

A/C compressor bracket, and remove the idler pul-
A: REMOVAL ley.
NOTE:
When replacing a single part, perform the work with
the engine assembly installed to body.
1. V-BELT
1) Remove the V-belt covers.
2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
3) Attach the tool to the V-belt tensioner assembly,
and rotate the tool clockwise to loosen and remove ME-04385
the V-belt.
B: INSTALLATION
1. V-BELT
CAUTION:
When reusing the V-belt, wipe off dust and
water with cloth.
Do not use the V-belt if there is any oil, grease
or coolant on the belt.
Be careful not to rub the V-belt end surface
with bare hands; exposed core may cause inju-
ry.
Wipe off any dust, oil and water on the groove
of each pulley with cloth.
(E)
(F) (G)
(D)
(B)
ME-04383 (A)
(C)
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND
IDLER PULLEY ME-04386
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43, V-
(A) V-belt
BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
(B) V-belt tensioner ASSY
2) Remove the bolt securing the V-belt tensioner
assembly to the power steering pump bracket, and (C) Crank pulley
remove the V-belt tensioner assembly. (D) Idler pulley
(E) Generator pulley
(F) Power steering pump pulley
(G) A/C compressor pulley
ME-04384
ME(H4SO)-43
12LE_US.book 44
V-belt
MECHANICAL
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND C: INSPECTION

IDLER PULLEY 1) Check the V-belt for cracks, tear or wear.
Install in the reverse order of removal. 2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
Tightening torque: 9, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb) 3) Check the V-belt tensioner assembly and idler
pulley for deformation, cracks or other damages.
4) Check that the V-belt tension indicator (A) is
within the limit (B).
(B) (A)
ME-04385
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
ME-04384
ME-04387
ME(H4SO)-44
12LE_US.book 45
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
13.Crank Pulley (2) Draw reference lines (A) and (B) using a
marker to set the socket to the crank pulley bolt
A: REMOVAL as shown in the figure.
NOTE: NOTE:
When replacing a single part, perform the work with Set the socket onto the crank pulley bolt so that ref-
the engine assembly installed to body. erence lines (A) and (B) is visible.
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43, ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
REMOVAL, V-belt.> (CVT MODEL)
2) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and remove ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
the crank pulley bolt. (MT MODEL)
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
(CVT MODEL)
(MT MODEL)
(A) (B) (A) (B)

(a) (b)
ST
ME-04524
3) Remove the crank pulley.

B: INSTALLATION
ST
1. METHOD WITHOUT ANGLE GAUGE
(A)
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed (B)
air.
ME-04945
2) Install the crank pulley.
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and (a) When using 6-point socket
thread. (b) When using 12-point socket
4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts.
(1) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Draw end line (C) on ST using a marker at
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt. the same position as reference line (B) drawn
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH on the socket in step (2).
(CVT MODEL) ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH (CVT MODEL)
(MT MODEL) ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
Tightening torque: (MT MODEL)
47 Nm (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
(C)
ST ST
(B)
ME-04527
ME-04525
ME(H4SO)-45
12LE_US.book 46
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
(4) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (2) Use the ST1 to lock the crank pulley, and
tighten the crank pulley bolt to the angle where temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt.
reference line (A) and end line (C) are aligned. ST1 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
NOTE: (CVT MODEL)
It should be approx. 60 when reference line (A) ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
and end line (C) are aligned. (MT MODEL)
ST 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH Tightening torque:
(CVT MODEL) 47 Nm (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
(MT MODEL)
Tightening angle:
605
ST1
(C)
ME-04529
ST (3) Set the ST2, use the ST1 to lock the crank
pulley, and tighten the crank pulley bolt to the
specified angle.
(A)
ME-04528 NOTE:
5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43, IN- Attach the magnet used for securing the ST2 (AN-
STALLATION, V-belt.> GLE GAUGE) to ST1.
ST1 499977400 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
2. METHOD WITH ANGLE GAUGE (CVT MODEL)
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
air. (MT MODEL)
2) Install the crank pulley. ST2 18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and
thread. Tightening angle:
4) Tighten the crank pulley bolts. 605
(1) Remove the radiator main fan motor assem-
bly and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref.
to CO(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Radiator Main
Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-25,
REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.> ST1
ST2
ME-04530
(4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly

CO(H4SO)-24, INSTALLATION, Radiator Main
Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-25,
INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan
Motor.>
5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43, IN-
STALLATION, V-belt.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the crank pulley has no deformation,
ME(H4SO)-46
12LE_US.book 47
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
14.Timing Belt Cover 3) Install the stopper rod.

Tightening torque:
A: REMOVAL 36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
NOTE:
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
45, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
ME-04422
4) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-45,

INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the timing belt cover does not have de-
ME-04422 formation, cracks and any other damage.
3) Remove the timing belt cover LH (A).
4) Remove the front timing belt cover (B).
(A)
(B)
ME-04424
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the front timing belt cover (B).
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
2) Install the timing belt cover LH (A).
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
ME-04424
ME(H4SO)-47
12LE_US.book 48
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
15.Timing Belt (1) Use the ST to turn crankshaft. Align the

mark (a) of sprocket to the mark (b) of oil pump,
A: REMOVAL and then ensure the right side cam sprocket
mark (c), cam cap and cylinder head matching
NOTE:
surface (d) or left side cam sprocket mark (e),
When replacing a single part, perform the work
timing belt cover notch (f) are properly adjusted.
with the engine assembly installed to body.
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
When performing the work with the engine in-
stalled to body, the following parts must also be re-
moved/installed.
Radiator main fan motor assembly <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-24, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-24, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Main Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
Radiator sub fan motor assembly <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-25, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan ST
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-25, IN- ME-00231
STALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
When performing the work with the engine in- (d)
stalled to body, protect the radiator with cardboards
or blankets.
(c)
1. TIMING BELT
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to (b) (a)
ME(H4SO)-47, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
3) Remove the timing belt guide. (MT model)
(f)
(e)
ME-00065 ME-02533
4) If the alignment mark or arrow mark (which indi-

cates the direction of rotation) on timing belt fade
away, put new marks before removing the timing
belt as shown in procedures below.
ME(H4SO)-48
12LE_US.book 49
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
(2) Using white paint, put an alignment mark or 2. BELT IDLER AND AUTOMATIC BELT
an arrow mark on timing belts in relation to the TENSION ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY
crank sprocket and cam sprockets. 1) Remove the belt idler.
ME-02967
ME-04980
Z1: 46.8 teeth 2) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster as-
Z2: 43.7 teeth sembly.
Z1 Z2
ME-00234
ME-00238
5) Remove the belt idler (A).
6) Remove the belt idler No. 2 (B). B: INSTALLATION
1. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUST-
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER
1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten-
sion adjuster assembly.
CAUTION:
Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
move the adjuster rod down.
Do not use a lateral type vise.
(A) Push the adjuster rod vertically.
(B) ME-02968
Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually tak-
7) Remove the timing belt. ing three minutes or more.
Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
cylinder. However, do not push in the adjuster
rod below the end face of the cylinder. Doing so
may damage the cylinder.
Do not release the press pressure until stop-
per pin is completely inserted.
(1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster
ME-00236
assembly to vertical pressing tool.
ME(H4SO)-49
12LE_US.book 50
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
(2) Slowly push in the adjuster rod with a pres- 3) Install the belt idlers.
sure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) or more until
Tightening torque:
the adjuster rod is aligned with the stopper pin
39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
hole in the cylinder.
ME-04980
ME-00239
(3) With a 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. stopper pin or a 2 2. TIMING BELT

mm (nominal) dia. hex wrench inserted into the 1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten-
stopper pin hole in cylinder, secure the adjuster sion adjuster assembly. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-49,
rod. AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS-
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION,
Timing Belt.>
2) Align the mark (B) on oil pump with the mark (A)
on crank sprocket.
(A) (B)
ME-00350
2) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster as-

sembly.
Tightening torque: ME-03975
39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
3) Turn the camshaft sprocket No. 2 using ST1,
and turn the camshaft sprocket No. 1 using ST2 so
that their alignment marks (A) come to top posi-
tions.
ST1 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
NOTE:
also be used.
ST2 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
ME-00241 (A)
ME-00243
ME(H4SO)-50
12LE_US.book 51
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
4) While aligning the alignment mark (B) on timing (1) Temporarily tighten the bolts mounting the
belt with the mark (A) on sprockets, position the timing belt guide.
timing belt properly.
(B)
(A)
ME-00230
(A) ME-05470
(2) Check and adjust the clearance between
5) Install the belt idler No. 2 (B). timing belt and timing belt guide by using thick-
ness gauge.
Tightening torque:
39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb) Clearance:
6) Install the belt idler (A). 1.00.5 mm (0.0390.020 in)
Tightening torque:
39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
ME-00246
(A)
(3) Tighten the bolts mounting the timing belt
(B) ME-02968 guide.
7) After ensuring the marks on timing belt and cam- Tightening torque:
shaft sprockets are aligned, remove the stopper pin 9.75 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
from belt tension adjuster.
ME-00247
ME-00245 9) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
8) Install the timing belt guide. (MT model) 47, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
ME(H4SO)-51
12LE_US.book 52
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
C: INSPECTION (3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves

down, replace the automatic belt tension adjust-
1. TIMING BELT er assembly with a new part.
1) Check the timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks or CAUTION:
wear. If any fault is found, replace the timing belt. Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
2) Check the condition on the back surface of the move the adjuster rod down.
timing belt. If cracks are found, replace the timing Do not use a lateral type vise.
belt. Push the adjuster rod vertically.
CAUTION: Press the adjuster rod gradually taking three
Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant minutes or more.
contact the timing belt. Remove quickly and Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
thoroughly if this happens. N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lb).
Do not bend the timing belt sharply. Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
cylinder. However, do not press the adjuster
In radial diameter h:
60 mm (2.36 in) or more
4) Measure the amount of adjuster rod protrusion
H from the end surface of the cylinder. If it is not
within specifications, replace the automatic belt
tension adjuster assembly with a new part.
h
Amount of adjuster rod protrusion H:
5.2 6.2 mm (0.205 0.244 in)
H
ME-00248

ER
1) Visually check the oil seals for leaks, and rod
ends for abnormal wear and scratches. If neces-
sary, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly. ME-00249
NOTE: 3. BELT TENSION PULLEY

Slight traces of oil at rods oil seal does not indicate
1) Check the mating surfaces of timing belt and
a problem.
contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
2) Check that the adjuster rod does not move when
scratches. Replace the automatic belt tension ad-
a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) is applied to
juster assembly with a new part if faulty.
it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness.
2) Check the belt tension pulley for smooth rota-
3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves freely
tion. Replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
when applying 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb), check it us-
assembly with a new part if abnormal noise or ex-
ing the following procedures:
cessive play occurs.
(1) Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the 3) Check the belt tension pulley for grease leakage.
end surface of cylinder. Repeat this operation
two to three times. 4. BELT IDLER
(2) With the adjuster rod moved all the way up, 1) Check the belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace
apply a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lb) to if noise or excessive play occurs.
it, and check the adjuster rod stiffness. 2) Check the outer contacting surfaces of idler pul-
ley for abnormal wear and scratches.
3) Check the belt idler for grease leakage.
ME(H4SO)-52
12LE_US.book 53
Cam Sprocket
MECHANICAL
16.Cam Sprocket NOTE:

Do not confuse cam sprockets (LH) and (RH)
A: REMOVAL during installation.
NOTE: They can be distinguished by the L or R indica-
When replacing a single part, perform the work with tion.
the engine assembly installed to body. ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- NOTE:
45, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> CAM SPROCKET WRENCH (499207100) can
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to also be used.
Tightening torque:
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, 78 Nm (8.0 kgf-m, 57.5 ft-lb)
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
4) Remove the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-27, REMOVAL, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
5) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and re-
move the cam sprocket bolt.
ST 18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH
NOTE:
also be used. ST
ME-00250
ST 499207400 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH

Tightening torque:
78 Nm (8.0 kgf-m, 57.5 ft-lb)
ST
ST
ME-00250
ST
ME-00251
3) Install the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to

FU(H4SO)-27, INSTALLATION, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
4) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-49,
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
5) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
ME-00251 47, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
6) Remove the cam sprocket.
1) Install the cam sprocket.
1) Check the cam sprocket teeth for abnormal wear
2) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and install
and scratches.
the cam sprocket bolt.
2) Make sure there is no free play between cam
sprocket and key.
3) Check the cam sprocket protrusion used for sen-
sor for damage and contamination of foreign mat-
ter.
ME(H4SO)-53
12LE_US.book 54
Crank Sprocket
MECHANICAL
17.Crank Sprocket
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48,
4) Remove the crank sprocket.
ME-04983
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the crank sprocket.
ME-04983

47, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the crank sprocket teeth for abnormal
wear and scratches.
2) Make sure there is no free play between crank
sprocket and key.
3) Check the crank sprocket protrusion used for
sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
matter.
ME(H4SO)-54
12LE_US.book 55
Valve Rocker Assembly

MECHANICAL
18.Valve Rocker Assembly NOTE:

Leave two or three threads of bolts (i) and (j) en-
A: REMOVAL gaged in order to retain the valve rocker assembly.
NOTE: (d)
(a) (j) (h)
(b)
the engine assembly installed to body. Refer to (f)
Valve Clearance for preparation procedures.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-29, Valve Clearance.>
1) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5,
REMOVAL, Ignition Coil.>
2) Disconnect the PCV hose and remove the rock- (c)
er cover. (e)
3) Remove the valve rocker assembly. (g) (i)
ME-02975
(1) Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in (3) Remove the valve rocker assembly.
the direction of the arrow to remove it from ad-
juster pin. NOTE:
ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER Set the ST in the position shown in the drawing to
remove the intake valve rocker assembly.
ST 18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER HOLDER
ST
ME-05471
ST
ME-02794
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the valve rocker assembly.
(A)
(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts equally in al-
phabetical order as shown in the figure.
(B) NOTE:
Do not temporarily tighten the bolts (i) and (j).
(C)
Set the ST in the position shown in the drawing to
ME-02744 mount the intake valve rocker assembly.
(A) Adjuster pin ST 18354AA000 VALVE ROCKER HOLDER
(B) Spring stopper
(C) Spring
(2) Remove the bolts (a) through (j) in alphabet-

ical sequence.
ST
ME-02794
(2) Tighten the bolts (a) through (h) to specified

torque.
Tightening torque:
25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
ME(H4SO)-55
12LE_US.book 56

MECHANICAL
(3) Tighten the bolts (i) through (j) to specified 5) Install the rocker cover.
torque. (1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
cover.
Tightening torque:
6 Nm (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb) NOTE:
(i) (a) (c)
Use a new rocker cover gasket.
(g)
(j) (2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
(e)
stages.
Tightening torque:
First
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(h) Second (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
(f)
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(d) (b) ME-02703 RH side
(4) Use the ST to rotate the spring stopper in (f) (a) (c)
the direction of the arrow to fasten the adjuster
pin.
ST 18258AA000 SPRING INSTALLER
(d) (b) (e)

ME-04696
LH side
ST (f) (a) (c)
ME-05471
(A)
(d) (b) (e)
ME-02716
(B)
(3) Connect the PCV hose.
(C) 6) Install the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5, IN-
ME-02705 STALLATION, Ignition Coil.>
(A) Adjuster pin C: DISASSEMBLY
(B) Spring stopper NOTE:
(C) Spring Intake valve rocker assembly cannot be disassem-
bled.
2) Remove the timing belt cover LH. 1) Remove the exhaust valve rocker arm from the
3) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- rocker shaft.
30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
4) Install the timing belt cover LH. NOTE:
Keep all the removed parts in order for re-installing
Tightening torque: in their original positions.
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) 2) Remove the nut and adjusting screw from ex-
haust valve rocker.
ME(H4SO)-56
12LE_US.book 57

MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY 2) If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, replace the

valve rocker arm or shaft, whichever shows the
NOTE: greater amount of wear.
Intake valve rocker assembly cannot be disassem-
bled. Rocker arm inside diameter:
1) Install the adjusting screw and nut to the exhaust Standard
valve rocker. 22.020 22.041 mm (0.8669 0.8678 in)
2) Insert the exhaust valve rocker arm to rocker Rocker shaft diameter:
shaft. Standard
NOTE: 21.987 22.000 mm (0.8656 0.8661 in)
Valve rocker arms, and rocker shaft have identifica- 3) If the roller or valve contact surface of valve
tion marks. Make sure the parts with same mark- rocker arm is worn or dented excessively, replace
ings are properly assembled. the valve rocker arm.
4) Check that the valve rocker arm roller rotates
E: INSPECTION smoothly. If not, replace the valve rocker arm.
1. INTAKE VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY
1) If the roller or valve contact surface of valve
rocker arm is worn or dented excessively, replace
the valve rocker assembly.
2) Check that the valve rocker arm roller rotates
smoothly. If not, replace the valve rocker assembly.
2. EXHAUST VALVE ROCKER ASSEMBLY
1) Measure the inner diameter of valve rocker arm
and outer diameter of valve rocker shaft, and con-
firm the difference (oil clearance) between the two
values.
Clearance between arm and shaft:
Standard
0.020 0.054 mm (0.0008 0.0021 in)
ME-02706
ME-00257
ME(H4SO)-57
12LE_US.book 58
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
19.Camshaft 10) Remove the camshaft cap.

(1) Remove the bolts (a) and (b) in alphabetical
A: REMOVAL sequence.
NOTE:
the engine assembly installed to body. Refer to
(a)
Valve Clearance for preparation procedures.
45, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> (b)
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, ME-02707
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> (2) Equally loosen the bolts (c) through (j) all the
4) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- way in alphabetical sequence.
53, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
(j) (h)
5) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 LH.
6) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 RH.
(d) (f)
NOTE:
When removing the timing belt cover, be careful not
to damage the seal rubber.
(e)
(c)
(g) (i) ME-02708
(3) Remove the bolts (k) through (p) in alpha-

betical sequence using ST.
ST 499497000 TORX PLUS
(n) (p) (l)
ME-00258
7) Remove the tensioner bracket.
(m)
(k)
(o) ME-02709
(4) Remove the camshaft cap.

11) Remove the camshaft.
12) Remove the oil seal.
ME-04984
13) Remove the plug from rear side of camshaft.
8) Remove the camshaft position sensor support. CAUTION:
(LH side only)
Do not scratch the journal surface when remov-
9) Remove the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to ing the oil seal.
ME(H4SO)-55, REMOVAL, Valve Rocker Assem-
14) Similarly, remove the camshaft RH.
bly.>
ME(H4SO)-58
12LE_US.book 59
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION (4) Tighten the TORX bolts (e) through (j) in al-
phabetical sequence using the ST.
1) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to camshaft jour-
ST 499497000 TORX PLUS
nals, and install the camshaft.
2) Install the camshaft cap. Tightening torque:
(1) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
camshaft cap. (g) (e) (i)
NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
or equivalent
(h)
(j)
(f) ME-02712
(5) Tighten the bolts (k) through (r) in alphabet-

ical sequence.
Tightening torque:
9.75 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
(k) (m)
ME-02710
NOTE: (q) (o)

Apply a coat of liquid gasket of 3 mm (0.12 in) in di-
ameter (A) along the edge (B) of camshaft cap (C)
mating surface.
(A) (p)
(r)
(n) (l) ME-02713
(6) Tighten the bolts (s) and (t) in alphabetical

(B) sequence.
(C) NOTE:
Use a new seal washer.
Install and tighten the seal washer to the bolt.
ME-00265
Tightening torque:
(2) Temporarily tighten the bolts (a) through (d) 9.75 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
in alphabetical sequence.
(c) (a) (s)
(t)
(b)
(d)
ME-02714
ME-02711
(3) Install the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to

ME(H4SO)-55, INSTALLATION, Valve Rocker
Assembly.>
ME(H4SO)-59
12LE_US.book 60
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
3) Apply a coat of engine oil to camshaft oil seal pe- 7) Install the tensioner bracket.
riphery and oil seal lips and install the oil seal (A) on
Tightening torque:
camshaft using ST1 and ST2.
24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Use a new oil seal.
ST1 499597000 OIL SEAL GUIDE
ST2 499587500 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
ST1
ME-04984
ST2 8) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 RH.
(A)
Tightening torque:
ME-02596 5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
4) Apply a coat of engine oil to plug periphery and 9) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 LH.
install the plug (A) using ST. Tightening torque:
ST 499587700 CAMSHAFT OIL SEAL IN- 5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
STALLER
(A)
ST
ME-00274
ME-05472
10) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
5) Install the camshaft position sensor support. (LH 53, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
side only) 11) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-49,
Tightening torque: INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 12) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to
6) Similarly, install the camshaft RH. ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
ME(H4SO)-60
12LE_US.book 61
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
13) Install the rocker cover. C: INSPECTION

(1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
1) Measure the bend, and repair or replace if nec-
cover.
essary.
NOTE:
Camshaft bend limit:
0.025 mm (0.00098 in)
(2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
stages.
Tightening torque:
First
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Second (only (a) and (b) are tightened)
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
RH side
(f) (a) (c) ME-00275
2) Check the journal for damage and wear. Re-

place if faulty.
3) Check the cam face condition, and remove the
minor faults by grinding with oil stone. If offset wear
occurs, replace it.
4) Measure the Cam height H, Cam base circle
diameter A, and base circle step of adjacent in-
(d) (b) (e)
take cams (low speed and high speed). If it ex-
ME-04696 ceeds the standard or offset wear occurs, replace
LH side it.
(f) (a) (c) Cam lobe height H:
Unit: mm (in)
40.075 40.175
Constant Standard
(1.5778 1.5817)
35.496 35.596
Intake Low speed Standard
(1.3975 1.4014)
40.315 40.415
High speed Standard
(1.5872 1.5911)
(d) (b) (e) 39.289 39.389
ME-02716 Exhaust Standard
(1.5468 1.5507)
(3) Connect the PCV hose.
14) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to Cam base circle diameter A:
ME(H4SO)-47, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov- Standard
er.> 34.00 mm (1.3386 in)
15) Install the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-5, Base circle step of adjacent intake cams (low
INSTALLATION, Ignition Coil.> speed and high speed):
16) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-45, Standard
INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.> 0.03 mm (0.001 in) or less
A
ME-00276
ME(H4SO)-61
12LE_US.book 62
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
5) Measure the outer diameter of camshaft journal

and inner diameter of cylinder head journal, and
check the difference (oil clearance) between the
two values. If the oil clearance is not within the
standard, replace the camshaft or cylinder head as
necessary.
Unit: mm (in)
0.055 0.090
Oil clearance Standard
(0.0022 0.0035)
31.928 31.945
Camshaft journal O.D. Standard
(1.2570 1.2577)
32.000 32.018
Cylinder head journal I.D. Standard
(1.2598 1.2605)
6) Measure the thrust clearance with setting the

dial gauge at end surface of camshaft. If the thrust
clearance is not within the standard or there is off-
set wear, replace the camshaft caps and cylinder
head as a set. If necessary, replace the camshaft.
Camshaft thrust clearance:
Standard
0.030 0.090 mm (0.0012 0.0035 in)
ME(H4SO)-62
12LE_US.book 63
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
20.Cylinder Head 11) While tapping the cylinder head with a plastic
hammer, separate it from cylinder block. Remove
A: REMOVAL the bolts (a) and (c) to remove cylinder head.
NOTE:
(e) (c)
with the engine assembly installed to body. Refer to
Valve Clearance for preparation procedures. (a)
stalled to body, the following parts must also be re- (b)
moved/installed.
Front exhaust pipe <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-5, RE- ( f)
MOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.> <Ref. to (d) ME-05473
EX(H4SO)-6, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust 12) Remove the cylinder head gasket.
Pipe.>
1) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to CAUTION:
FU(H4SO)-17, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- cylinder head and cylinder block.
45, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> 13) Similarly, remove the right side cylinder head.
3) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to B: INSTALLATION
4) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, 1) Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block.
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> CAUTION:
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
53, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> cylinder head and cylinder block.
6) Remove the bolts which secure A/C compressor
NOTE:
bracket to cylinder head.
Use a new cylinder head gasket.
7) Remove the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to
(1) Clean the bolt threads and the bolt holes in
ME(H4SO)-55, REMOVAL, Valve Rocker Assem-
the cylinder block
bly.>
8) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-58, CAUTION:
REMOVAL, Camshaft.> To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts,
9) Remove the oil level gauge guide. (LH side) clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing
10) Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical with compressed air to eliminate engine cool-
sequence as shown in the figure. ant etc.
(2) Apply a sufficient coat of engine oil to the
NOTE:
washer and bolt thread.
Leave bolts (a) and (c) engaged by three or four
(3) Tighten all bolts to 40 Nm (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5
threads to prevent the cylinder head from falling.
ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
(4) Retighten all bolts to 95 Nm (9.7 kgf-m,
(c)
(e ) 70.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
CAUTION:
(a ) If the bolt makes stick-slip sound during tight-
ening, repeat the procedure from step (1). In
this case, the cylinder head gasket can be re-
(b)
used.
(f )
(5) Loosen all the bolts by 180 in the reverse
order of installing, and loosen them further by
(d ) ME-05473
180.
(6) Tighten all bolts to 10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-
lb) in alphabetical order.
22.1 ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
ME(H4SO)-63
12LE_US.book 64
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(9) Retighten all bolts by 80 90 in alphabet- 10) Install the rocker cover.
ical order. (1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
(10) Retighten all bolts by 40 45 in alphabet- cover.
ical order. NOTE:
CAUTION: Use a new rocker cover gasket.
The tightening angle of the bolt should not ex- (2) Temporarily tighten the bolts in alphabetical
ceed 45. order shown in the figure, tighten them in two
(11) Retighten bolts (a) and (b) by 40 45. stages.
CAUTION: Tightening torque:
Make sure the total tightening angle of steps First
(10) and (11) does not exceed 90. 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(a ) (f ) 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
RH side
(c ) (a)
(f) (c)
(d)
(b)
(e ) ME-05474
2) Similarly, install the right side cylinder head.

3) Install the oil level gauge guide. (LH side) (d) (e)
(b)
ME-04696
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) LH side
4) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-59, IN- (f) (a) (c)
STALLATION, Camshaft.>
5) Install the valve rocker assembly. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-55, INSTALLATION, Valve Rocker As-
sembly.>
6) Install the A/C compressor bracket on cylinder
head.
Tightening torque:
36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) (d) (b) (e)
ME-02716
7) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-53,
INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.> 11) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
8) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-49, ME(H4SO)-47, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov-
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.> er.>
9) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- 12) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-45,
30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.> INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
13) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
21, INSTALLATION, Intake Manifold.>
ME(H4SO)-64
12LE_US.book 65
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Place the cylinder head on the ST.
ST 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
2) Compress the valve spring and remove the
valve spring retainer key using ST. Remove each
valve and valve spring.
ST 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
NOTE:
Keep all the removed parts in order for re-install-
ing in their original positions.
Mark each valve to prevent confusion.
Pay careful attention not to damage the lips of in-
take valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil seals.
For removal and installation procedures of the
valve guide, intake valve oil seal and exhaust valve
oil seal, refer to INSPECTION. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-68, VALVE GUIDE, INSPECTION, Cyl-
inder Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-70, INTAKE AND
EXHAUST VALVE OIL SEAL, INSPECTION, Cyl-
inder Head.>
ST
ME-00280
ME(H4SO)-65
12LE_US.book 66
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
(2)
(1)
(11)
(8)
(9)
(12)
(10)
(2) (13)
(3)
(4) (14)
(5)
(6)
(7)
ME-06055
(1) Valve (6) Valve spring retainer (11) Plug

(2) Valve guide (7) Valve spring retainer key (12) Camshaft cap
(3) Valve spring seat (8) Spark plug pipe gasket (13) Valve rocker ASSY
(4) Oil seal (9) Camshaft (14) Seal washer
(5) Valve spring (10) Oil seal
1) Install the valve spring and valve.

(1) Coat the stem of each valve with engine oil and insert the valve into valve guide.
NOTE:
When inserting the valve into valve guide, use special care not to damage the oil seal lip.
(2) Set the cylinder head on ST.
(3) Install the valve spring and valve spring retainer.
NOTE:
Be sure to install the valve spring with its close-coiled end facing the cylinder head side.
(4) Set the ST on valve spring.
ST 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
ST
ME-00280
ME(H4SO)-66
12LE_US.book 67
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(5) Compress the valve spring and fit the valve NOTE:
spring retainer key. Uneven torque for the cylinder head bolts can
cause warpage. When reassembling, pay special
attention to the torque so as to tighten evenly.
(B) (A)
(C)
(A)
(B) (C) (B)
ME-02816
ST
(A) Valve spring retainer key ME-00285
(B) Valve spring
(C) Valve spring retainer 2. VALVE SEAT
Inspect the intake and exhaust valve seats, and
(6) After installing, tap the valve spring retainers correct the contact surfaces with a valve seat cutter
lightly with a plastic hammer for better seating. if they are defective or when valve guides are re-
placed.
E: INSPECTION
Contacting width of valve and valve seat W:
1. CYLINDER HEAD
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene- Standard
trant tester on the important sections to check for Intake (A)
fissures. 0.8 1.4 mm (0.03 0.055 in)
Check that there are no marks of gas leaking or wa- Exhaust (B)
ter leaking on gasket installing surface. 1.2 1.8 mm (0.047 0.071 in)
2) Place the cylinder head on the ST.
3) Measure the warping of the cylinder head sur- (A) (B)
face that mates with cylinder block using a straight
edge (A) and thickness gauge (B).
If the warping exceeds the limit, correct the surface
by grinding it with a surface grinder. W
W
Warping limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
ME-00397
Grinding limit:
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Standard height of cylinder head:
97.5 mm (3.84 in)
ME-00287
ME(H4SO)-67
12LE_US.book 68
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
3. VALVE GUIDE (2) Insert the ST2 into valve guide and press it
1) Check the clearance between valve guide and down to remove the valve guide.
valve stem. The clearance can be checked by mea- ST1 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
suring respectively the outer diameter of valve ST2 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
stem with a micrometer and the inner diameter of
valve guide with a caliper gauge.
Clearance between the valve guide and valve
stem: ST2
Standard
Intake
0.035 0.062 mm (0.0014 0.0024 in)
Exhaust ST1
0.040 0.067 mm (0.0016 0.0026 in) ME-00290
(3) Turn the cylinder head upside down and

place the ST as shown in the figure.
Intake side
ST 499767700 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
Exhaust side
ST 499767800 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
(A)
ME-00763
(A) Valve guide ST
Y
(A)
X
ME-00291
(A) Valve guide
(4) Before installing a new valve guide, make

sure that neither scratches nor damages exist
on the inner surface of valve guide holes in cyl-
ME-00289 inder head.
2) If the clearance between the valve guide and
valve stem exceeds the standard, replace the valve
guide or valve itself, whichever shows greater
amount of wear or damage. See the following pro-
cedure for valve guide replacement.
Valve guide inner diameter:
6.000 6.012 mm (0.2362 0.2367 in)
Valve stem outer diameters:
Intake
5.950 5.965 mm (0.2343 0.2348 in)
Exhaust
5.945 5.960 mm (0.2341 0.2346 in)
(1) Place the cylinder head on ST1 with the
combustion chamber upward so that valve
guides fit the holes in ST1.
ME(H4SO)-68
12LE_US.book 69
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(5) Put a new valve guide, coated with sufficient If the inner surface of valve guide becomes lus-
oil, in the cylinder head, and insert the ST1 into trous and the ST does not chip, use a new ST or
valve guide. Press in until the valve guide upper remedy the ST.
end is flush with the upper surface of ST2. ST 499767400 VALVE GUIDE REAMER
ST1 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
Intake side
ST2 499767700 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
Exhaust side
ST2 499767800 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
ST
ST1
ST2
ME-04393
(8) After reaming, clean the valve guide to re-

move chips.
(9) Recheck the contact condition between
valve and valve seat after replacing the valve
ME-00292 guide.
(6) Check the valve guide protrusion amount
4. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE
L.
1) Inspect the flange of valve and valve stem, and
Valve guide protrusion amount L: replace the valve with a new part if damaged, worn,
Intake deformed, or if dimension H in the figure is out-
20.3 20.7 mm (0.799 0.815 in) side of the specified limit.
Exhaust
16.8 17.2 mm (0.661 0.677 in) Head edge thickness H:
Intake (A)
Standard
0.8 1.2 mm (0.03 0.047 in)
L
Exhaust (B)
Standard
1.0 1.4 mm (0.039 0.055 in)
(A) (A)
ME-04917
(A) Valve guide
H
(7) Ream the inside of valve guide using ST.
Put the ST in valve guide, and rotate the ST
slowly clockwise while pushing it lightly. Bring
the ST back while rotating it clockwise.
NOTE:
Apply engine oil to the ST when reaming.
If the inner surface of valve guide is damaged,
(B)
the edge of ST should be slightly ground with oil
stone.
ME-04825
ME(H4SO)-69
12LE_US.book 70
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
2) Put a small amount of grinding compound on the 6. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL
valve seat surface, and lap the valve and valve seat SEAL
surface. Replace with a new valve oil seal after lap- 1) For the following, replace the oil seal with a new
ping. part.
NOTE: See the procedure 2) and subsequent for replace-
It is possible to differentiate between the intake ment procedures.
valve and the exhaust valve by their overall length. When the lip is damaged.
Valve overall length: When the spring is out of the specified position.
Intake When readjusting the surfaces of valve and
valve seat.
120.6 mm (4.75 in)
When replacing the valve guide.
Exhaust
121.7 mm (4.79 in) 2) Place the cylinder head on ST1, and use ST2 to
press-fit the oil seal.
5. VALVE SPRING ST1 498267800 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
1) Check the valve springs for damage, free length, ST2 498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE
and tension. Replace the valve spring if it is not NOTE:
within the standard value presented in the table. Apply engine oil to oil seal before press-fitting.
2) To measure the squareness of the valve spring, When press-fitting the oil seal, do not use a ham-
stand the valve spring on a surface plate and mea- mer to strike in.
sure its deflection at the top of the valve spring us- The intake valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil
ing a try square. seals are distinguished by their colors.
mm Color of rubber part:
Free length 55.2 (2.173)
(in)
Intake [Gray]
235.3 270.7 Exhaust [Green]
Set (24 27.6, 52.9 60.8)/45.0
Tension/spring (1.772)
height N (kgf,
lb)/mm (in) 578.9 639.9 ST2
Lift (59.1 65.3, 130.3 143.9)/
34.7 (1.366)
Squareness 2.5, 2.4 mm (0.094 in) or less ST1
ME-00284
ME-00283
ME(H4SO)-70
12LE_US.book 71
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
21.Cylinder Block 16) Remove the oil pump from cylinder block using
a flat tip screwdriver.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
Before conducting this procedure, drain the engine cylinder block and oil pump.
oil completely.
1) Remove the engine from the vehicle. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-31, REMOVAL, Engine Assembly.>
FU(H4SO)-17, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-48, ME-00138
6) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to 17) Remove the front oil seal from the oil pump.
ME(H4SO)-54, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.> 18) Remove the clip holding the oil level switch har-
7) Remove the generator and A/C compressor with ness from cylinder block.
their brackets.
8) Remove the cylinder head. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
63, REMOVAL, Cylinder Head.>
9) Remove the drive plate. (CVT model) <Ref. to
CVT-133, REMOVAL, Drive Plate.>
10) Remove the clutch disc and cover. (MT model)
<Ref. to CL-11, REMOVAL, Clutch Disc and Cov-
er.>
11) Remove the flywheel. (MT model) <Ref. to CL-
14, REMOVAL, Flywheel.> ME-04392
12) Remove the oil separator cover.
19) Remove the oil pan and cylinder block lower.
13) Remove the water by-pass pipe for heater.
14) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- (1) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is
16, REMOVAL, Water Pump.> on the upper side.
(2) Remove the bolts which secure the oil pan
15) Remove the bolts which secure oil pump to cyl-
to the cylinder block lower.
inder block.
(3) Insert an oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
NOTE: tween cylinder block lower and oil pan, and re-
When disassembling and checking the oil pump, move the oil pan.
loosen the relief valve plug before removing the oil
pump. CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tools in
place of oil pan cutter.
LU-00015
ME(H4SO)-71
12LE_US.book 72
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(4) Remove the bolts which secure the cylinder

block lower to the cylinder block, and remove
the cylinder block lower by using flat tip screw-
driver.
CAUTION:
Insert the flat tip screwdriver to the position
shown in the figure, and be careful not to dam-
age the mating surface of the cylinder block
and cylinder block lower.
ME-04426
20) Remove the oil strainer.

21) Remove the baffle plate.
22) Remove the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-36,
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
23) Remove the water pipe assembly.
ME-04985
ME(H4SO)-72
12LE_US.book 73
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-04723
(1) Service hole plug (4) Piston pin (7) Seal washer
(2) Gasket (5) Service hole cover (8) Washer
(3) Snap ring (6) O-ring
24) Remove the service hole plugs using a hexagon wrench [14 mm].
ME-00140

26) Rotate the crankshaft to bring #1 and #2 pistons to bottom dead center position, then remove the piston
snap ring through service hole of #1 and #2 cylinders.
ME-00141
ME(H4SO)-73
12LE_US.book 74
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
27) Draw out the piston pin from #1 and #2 pistons

using ST.
ST 499097700 PISTON PIN REMOVER
ASSY
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the original combination
of piston, piston pin and cylinder.
ST
ME-03325
28) Similarly draw out the piston pins from #3 and

#4 pistons.
29) Remove the cylinder block connecting bolt on
the RH side.
30) Loosen the cylinder block connecting bolt on
the LH side by 2 to 3 turns.
31) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is on
the upper side, and remove the cylinder block con-
necting bolt.
ME(H4SO)-74
12LE_US.book 75
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
32) Separate the cylinder block LH and RH.

NOTE:
When separating the cylinder block, do not allow the connecting rod to fall or damage the cylinder block.
(5)
(7)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(6) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
ME-04724
(1) Cylinder block (4) Crankshaft bearing (6) Seal washer

(2) Rear oil seal (5) Piston (7) Washer
(3) Crankshaft
33) Remove the rear oil seal.
34) Remove the crankshaft along with the connect-
ing rods.
35) Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder
block using a hammer handle.
NOTE:
Press the crankshaft bearing at the end opposite
to locking lip to remove.
Be careful not to confuse the crankshaft bearing
combination.
36) Remove each piston from the cylinder block us-
ing a wooden bar or hammer handle.
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the original combination
of piston and cylinder.
ME(H4SO)-75
12LE_US.book 76
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION
(6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (7)
(3)
(3)
(7) (2)
(6)
(7)
(6)
ME-04725
(1) Crankshaft bearing (4) Rear oil seal (6) Seal washer
(2) Crankshaft (5) O-ring (7) Washer
(3) Cylinder block
1) Remove oil on the mating surface of cylinder block before installation. Apply a coat of engine oil to the
bearing and crankshaft journal.
2) Position the crankshaft and O-ring on cylinder block RH.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
3) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of cylinder block RH, and position cylinder block LH.
NOTE:
Do not allow liquid gasket to jut into O-ring grooves, oil passages, bearing grooves, etc.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) or equivalent
ME-00145
ME(H4SO)-76
12LE_US.book 77
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Apply a coat of engine oil to the washer and bolt 8) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
thread. bolts (E J) further in alphabetical order.
Use a new seal washer. 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
5) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting
bolts on the LH side (A D) in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: (E)
(G)
10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) (J)
(A)
(H)
(D) (I) (F)
ME-00841
9) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting

(B) bolts (A D) further in alphabetical order.
(C) (A), (C): Angle tightening
ME-00840
Tightening angle:
6) Tighten the 10 mm cylinder block connecting 90
bolts on the RH side (E J) in alphabetical order. (B), (D): Torque tightening
10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) 40 Nm (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5 ft-lb)
(G) (E) (A)

(J)
(D)
(B)
(H)
(I) (F) (C)
ME-00841 ME-00840
7) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting 10) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting
bolts (A D) further in alphabetical order. bolts (E J) further in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: Tightening angle:
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) 90
(A) (G) (E)

(J)
(D)
(B)
(C) (H)
(I) (F)
ME-00840 ME-00841
ME(H4SO)-77
12LE_US.book 78
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
11) Tighten the 8 mm and 6 mm cylinder block con- 15) Position the upper rail gap at (C) in the figure.
necting bolts on the LH side (A H) in alphabetical
order.
(C)
Tightening torque:
(A) (G): 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb) 25
(H): 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
25
(G)
(C)
(C) (A) (B)
(E)
RH LH
ME-02722
16) Align the upper rail spin stopper (E) to the side
hole (D) on the piston.
(D) (E)
(D) (F)
(H) ME-00147
12) Apply a coat of engine oil to the oil seal inner

periphery and outer periphery, and install the rear
oil seal using ST1 and ST2.
NOTE:
Use a new rear oil seal.
ST1 499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
ME-02471
GUIDE
ST2 499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL IN- 17) Position the expander gap at (F) in the figure on
STALLER the 180 opposite direction of (C).
(A)
180
ST2
(F) (C)
(B)
(C) (F)
180
RH LH
ST1
ME-04998 ME-02723
(A) Rear oil seal

18) Set the lower rail gap at position (G), located
120 clockwise from (C) in the figure.
(B) Mounting bolts for drive plate or flywheel
120
13) Position the top ring gap at (A) or (B) in the fig- (G)
ure. (C)
14) Position the second ring gap at 180 on the re-
verse side the top ring gap.
180 180 (C)

(G)
120
RH LH
ME-02724
(B) (A) (A) (B)
NOTE:
Make sure ring gaps do not face the same direc-
tion.
RH LH Make sure ring gaps are not within the piston
ME-02721 skirt area.
ME(H4SO)-78
12LE_US.book 79
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
19) Install the snap ring.

Before positioning the piston on the cylinder block, attach the snap ring in the service hole of the cylinder
block, and the piston hole on the opposite side.
NOTE:
Use new snap rings.
#3
#1
#4
(A)
#2
ME-04764
(A) Front side
(5) T
(4) (5)
(1) (3) (4)

(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)
ME-04730
(1) Piston (4) Gasket Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Piston pin (5) Service hole plug T: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(3) Snap ring
ME(H4SO)-79
12LE_US.book 80
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
20) Install the piston. (3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to piston pin,
(1) Set the parts so that the #1 and #2 cylinders and insert the piston pin into piston and con-
are on the upper side. necting rod through service hole.
(2) Using the ST1, turn the crankshaft so that (4) Install the snap ring.
#1 and #2 connecting rods are set at bottom NOTE:
dead center. Use new snap rings.
ST1 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pistons and
cylinders and insert pistons in their cylinders us-
ing ST2.
ST2 498747300 PISTON GUIDE
ST1
ME-00159
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the threaded portion

of the service hole plug.
ST2 Liquid gasket:
ME-00157 THREE BOND 1105 (Part No. 004403010) or
NOTE: equivalent
Face the piston front mark towards the front of the
engine.
ME-00160
RH (A) LH
ME-04918
(A) Front mark
21) Install the piston pin.

(1) Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3.
(2) Insert ST3 into the service hole to align pis-
ton pin hole with connecting rod small end.
ST3 499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE
ST1
ST3
ME-00158
ME(H4SO)-80
12LE_US.book 81
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(6) Install the service hole plug and gasket.

NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
70 Nm (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
ME-00140
(5)
T2 T1
(6)
(4)
(3)
(1) (2) (7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-05040
(1) Piston (5) Service hole plug Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Piston pin (6) Service hole cover T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Snap ring (7) O-ring T2: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(4) Gasket
(7) Set the parts so that the #3 and #4 cylinders are on the upper side. Following the same procedures
as used for #1 and #2 cylinders, install the pistons and piston pins.
(8) Install the service hole cover.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME(H4SO)-81
12LE_US.book 82
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
22) Install the water pipe assembly. 24) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of
NOTE: cylinder block lower, and install the cylinder block
lower.
Use new O-rings.
CAUTION:
Tightening torque:
Be careful not to apply any liquid gasket to the
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
O-ring attachment section.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Before installing the cylinder block lower, clean
the mating surface of cylinder block lower and cyl-
inder block.
Liquid gasket:
ME-04985 or equivalent
23) Install the baffle plate.
NOTE: (A)
Use a new seal.
Make sure that the seals (A) are installed secure-
ly on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in the
figure below.
(A)
LU-02581
(A) O-ring
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
LU-00052
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T1
T2
ME-04327
ME(H4SO)-82
12LE_US.book 83
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
25) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil 27) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of
pan, and install the oil pan. the oil separator cover and the threaded portion of
NOTE: bolt (A) shown in the figure (when reusing the bolt),
and then install the oil separator cover.
Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating
surface of oil pan and cylinder block. NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Use new oil separator cover.
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) Liquid gasket:
or equivalent Mating surface
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No.
K0877Y0100) or equivalent
(A) bolt thread (when reusing bolts)
equivalent
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
LU-02580
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
ME-03333
28) Install the drive plate. (CVT model) <Ref. to

CVT-133, INSTALLATION, Drive Plate.>
29) Install the flywheel. (MT model) <Ref. to CL-14,
INSTALLATION, Flywheel.>
LU-02583 30) Install the clutch disc and cover. (MT model)
<Ref. to CL-11, INSTALLATION, Clutch Disc and
26) Secure the oil level switch harness to the cylin- Cover.>
der block with clip.
31) Install the oil pump.
(1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal.
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
NOTE:
Use a new front oil seal.
ME-04392
ST
LU-00021
ME(H4SO)-83
12LE_US.book 84
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of (5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread
oil pump. shown in figure. (when reusing bolts)
NOTE: Liquid gasket:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
Liquid gasket: equivalent
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) Tightening torque:
or equivalent 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
ME-00165 ME-04946
(A) O-ring 32) Install the water pump and gasket.

NOTE:
(3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the inside of When installing the water pump, tighten bolts in
front oil seal. two stages in alphabetical order as shown in the
figure.
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
First: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second: 12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)
ME-00312
(4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block. (E) (F)

CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the front oil seal
during installation.
Make sure the front oil seal lip is not folded. ME-06054
NOTE: 33) Install the water by-pass pipe for heater.

Align the flat surface of oil pumps inner rotor with Tightening torque:
that of crankshaft before installation.
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Use new O-rings.
34) Install the oil filter.
Do not forget to assemble O-rings.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-36, INSTALLATION, Engine
Oil Filter.>
35) Install the cylinder head. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
63, INSTALLATION, Cylinder Head.>
36) Install the generator and A/C compressor with
their brackets.
Tightening torque:
36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
37) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
54, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprocket.>
ME(H4SO)-84
12LE_US.book 85
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
39) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to

ME(H4SO)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clearance.>
40) Install the rocker cover.
cover.
NOTE:
(2) Temporarily tighten the rocker cover bolts in
alphabetical order shown in the figure, and then
tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order
in two steps.
Tightening torque:
First
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
RH side
(f) (a) (c)
(d) (b) (e)

ME-04696
LH side
(f) (a) (c)
(d) (b) (e)

ME-02716
41) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to

ME(H4SO)-47, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cov-
er.>
43) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-
21, INSTALLATION, Intake Manifold.>
44) Install the engine to the vehicle. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-35, INSTALLATION, Engine Assem-
bly.>
ME(H4SO)-85
12LE_US.book 86
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
(7)
(6)
(6)
(5)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
ME-04732
(1) Top ring (4) Snap ring (6) Connecting rod bearing
(2) Second ring (5) Connecting rod (7) Connecting rod cap
(3) Oil ring
1) Remove the connecting rod cap.
2) Remove the connecting rod bearing.
NOTE:
Keep the removed connecting rods, connecting rod
caps and bearings in order so that they are kept in
their original combinations/groups, and not mixed
together.
3) Remove the piston rings using piston ring ex-
pander.
4) Remove the oil ring by hand.
NOTE:
Arrange the removed piston rings in proper order,
to prevent confusion.
5) Remove the snap ring.
ME(H4SO)-86
12LE_US.book 87
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(8)
T (7)
(7)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(5)
(4)
ME-04733
(1) Top ring (5) Side mark Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Second ring (6) Connecting rod T: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(3) Oil ring (7) Connecting rod bearing
(4) Snap ring (8) Connecting rod cap
1) Apply engine oil to the surface of the connecting
rod bearings, and install the connecting rod bear-
ings on connecting rods and connecting rod caps.
2) Position each connecting rod with the side with a
side mark facing forward, and install it.
3) Attach the connecting rod cap, and tighten with
connecting rod nut.
Make sure the arrow on connecting rod cap faces
the front during installation.
NOTE:
Each connecting rod has its own mating cap.
Make sure that they are assembled correctly by
checking their matching number.
When tightening the connecting rod nuts, apply
oil on the threads.
Tightening torque:
45 Nm (4.6 kgf-m, 33.2 ft-lb)
4) Install the oil ring upper rail, expander and lower
rail by hand.
5) Install the second ring and top ring using piston
ring expander.
NOTE:
Assemble so that the piston ring mark R faces the
top side of the piston.
ME(H4SO)-87
12LE_US.book 88
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
E: INSPECTION Standard diameter:

A: 99.505 99.515 mm (3.9175 3.9179 in)
1. CYLINDER BLOCK B: 99.495 99.505 mm (3.9171 3.9175 in)
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
trant tester on the important sections to check for
fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak-
ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface.
2) Check the oil passages for clogging.
3) Inspect the cylinder head surface that mates
with cylinder block for warping by using a straight
edge, and correct by grinding if necessary.
Warping limit:
0.025 mm (0.00098 in)
(A) (B)
Grinding limit:
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
#5
5
Standard height of cylinder block: #4
4
201.0 mm (7.91 in) #3
#2 (F)
2. CYLINDER AND PISTON
A
#1 (D)
B
1) The cylinder bore size is stamped on the front
upper face of the cylinder block.
NOTE: (E) (C)
Measurement should be performed at a temper- ME-00170

ature of 20C (68F).
Standard sized pistons are classified into two (A) Main journal size mark
grades, A and B. These grades should be used (B) Cylinder block (RH) (LH) combination mark
as guide lines in selecting a standard piston. (C) #1 cylinder bore size mark
(D) #2 cylinder bore size mark
(E) #3 cylinder bore size mark
(F) #4 cylinder bore size mark
ME(H4SO)-88
12LE_US.book 89
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2) Measure inner diameter of each cylinder. 4) Measure outer diameter of each piston.
Measure the inner diameter of each cylinder in both Measure the outer diameter of each piston at the
the thrust and piston pin directions at the heights as height as shown in the figure. (Thrust direction)
shown in the figure, using a cylinder bore gauge. NOTE:
NOTE: Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of 20C (68F).
ture of 20C (68F).
Piston grade point H:
Cylindricality: 38.2 mm (1.504 in)
Limit
Piston outer diameter:
0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
Standard
Out-of-roundness:
A: 99.510 99.520 mm (3.9177 3.9181 in)
Limit
B: 99.500 99.510 mm (3.9173 3.9177 in)
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) oversize:
99.750 99.770 mm (3.9272 3.9280 in)
(A) (B)
0.50 mm (0.0197 in) oversize:
100,000 100.020 mm (3.9370 3.9378 in)
H
H1
H2
ME-00172
H3
H4 5) Calculate the clearance between cylinder and
piston.
NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
ture of 20C (68F).
ME-04734 Clearance between cylinder and piston at 20C
(68F):
(A) Piston pin direction
Standard
(B) Thrust direction
0.015 0.005 mm (0.00059 0.00020 in)
H1 10 mm (0.39 in)
6) Boring and honing
H2 45 mm (1.77 in) (1) If any of the measured value of cylindricality,
H3 80 mm (3.15 in) out-of-roundness or cylinder-to-piston clear-
H4 115 mm (4.53 in) ance is out of standard or if there is any damage
on the cylinder wall, rebore it to replace with an
3) When the piston is to be replaced due to general oversize piston.
or cylinder wear, select a suitable sized piston by
measuring the piston clearance. CAUTION:
When any of the cylinders needs reboring, all
other cylinders must be bored at the same time,
and replaced with oversize pistons.
ME(H4SO)-89
12LE_US.book 90
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(2) If the cylinder inner diameter exceeds the 4) Check the snap ring installation groove (A) on
limit after boring and honing, replace the cylin- the piston for burr. If necessary, remove burr from
der block. the groove so that the piston pin can lightly move.
NOTE:
Immediately after reboring, the cylinder diameter
may differ from its real diameter due to temperature
rise. Thus, when measuring the cylinder diameter, (A)
wait until it has cooled to room temperature.
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit:
To 100.005 mm (3.9372 in)
3. PISTON AND PISTON PIN
1) Check the piston and piston pin for damage, ME-00175
cracks or wear. Replace if faulty. 5) Check the snap ring for distortion, cracks and
2) Check the piston ring groove for wear or dam- wear.
age. Replace if faulty.
3) Make sure that the piston pin can be inserted 4. PISTON RING
into the piston pin hole with a thumb at 20C (68F). 1) If the piston ring is broken, damaged or worn, or
Replace if faulty. if its tension is insufficient, or when the piston is re-
placed, replace the piston ring with a new part of
Clearance between piston pin hole and piston
the same size as piston.
pin:
Standard NOTE:
0.004 0.008 mm (0.0002 0.0003 in) The top ring and second ring have the mark to
determine the direction for installing. When install-
ing the ring to piston, face marks to the top side.
Oil ring consists of the upper rail, expander and
lower rail. When installing oil ring on piston, be
careful of the direction of each rail.
(A)
ME-00173 (B)
(C)
(A)
(B)
ME-00174
(C)
ME-02480
(A) Upper rail

(B) Expander
(C) Lower rail
ME(H4SO)-90
12LE_US.book 91
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2) Using the piston, insert the piston ring and oil 5. CONNECTING ROD
ring into the cylinder block so that they are perpen- 1) Replace the connecting rod, if the large or small
dicular to the cylinder wall, and measure the piston end thrust surface is damaged.
ring gap using a thickness gauge. 2) Check for bend or twist using a connecting rod
Standard aligner. Replace the connecting rod if the bend or
mm (in) twist exceeds the limit.
0.20 0.35
Top ring Limit of bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in
(0.0079 0.0138)
length:
0.37 0.52
Piston ring gap Second ring 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
(0.0146 0.0205)
0.20 0.50
Oil ring rail (A)
(0.0079 0.0197)
(B)
ME-00177
3) Fit the piston ring straight into the piston ring (A)
groove, then measure the clearance between pis-
ton ring and piston ring groove with a thickness
gauge. (B)
NOTE:
Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston
ring groove and piston ring. ME-05475
Standard
mm (in) (A) Thickness gauge
Clearance 0.040 0.080 (B) Connecting rod
Top ring
between pis- (0.0016 0.0031)
ton ring and 3) Install the connecting rod with bearings attached
piston ring 0.030 0.070 to the crankshaft, and using a thickness gauge,
Second ring
groove (0.0012 0.0028) measure the thrust clearance. If the thrust clear-
ance exceeds the standard or uneven wear is
found, replace the connecting rod.
Connecting rod thrust clearance:
Standard
0.070 0.330 mm (0.0028 0.0130 in)
ME-00178
ME-00180
4) Inspect the connecting rod bearing for scar,

peeling, seizure, melting, wear, etc.
ME(H4SO)-91
12LE_US.book 92
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
5) Measure the oil clearance on each connecting (1) Remove the bushing from connecting rod
rod bearing using plastigauge. If any oil clearance with ST and press.
is not within the standard, replace the defective (2) Press the bushing with the ST after applying
bearing with a new part of standard size or under- oil on the periphery of new bushing.
size as necessary. ST 499037100 CONNECTING ROD BUSH-
Connecting rod oil clearance: ING REMOVER AND IN-
STALLER
Standard
0.016 0.044 mm (0.0006 0.0017 in)
Unit: mm (in)
Bearing size ST
Outer diameter of
Bearing (Thickness at cen-
crank pin
ter)
1.492 1.501 51.984 52.000
Standard
(0.0587 0.0591) (2.0466 2.0472)
0.03
1.510 1.513 51.954 51.970
(0.0012)
(0.0594 0.0596) (2.0454 2.0461) ME-00182
Undersize
0.05
1.520 1.523 51.934 51.950
(3) Make two 3 mm (0.12 in) holes in the
(0.0020) pressed bushing to match the pre-manufac-
(0.0598 0.0600) (2.0446 2.0453)
Undersize tured holes on the connecting rod, then ream
0.25
1.620 1.623 51.734 51.750 the inside of the bushing.
(0.0098) (4) After completion of reaming, clean the bush-
(0.0638 0.0639) (2.0368 2.0374)
Undersize ing to remove chips.
6) Inspect the bushing at connecting rod small end, 6. CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT
and replace with a new part if worn or damaged. BEARING
7) Measure the piston pin clearance at connecting 1) Clean the crankshaft completely, and check it for
rod small end. If the measured value is not within cracks using liquid penetrant tester. If defective, re-
the standard, replace it with a new part. place the crankshaft.
Clearance between piston pin and bushing: 2) Measure warping of the crankshaft. If it exceeds
Standard the limit, correct or replace it.
0 0.022 mm (0 0.0009 in) NOTE:
If a suitable V-block is not available, using just the
#1 and #5 crankshaft bearings on cylinder block,
position the crankshaft on cylinder block. Then,
measure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge.
Crankshaft bend limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
ME-00181
ME-00183
ME-00174
8) The replacement procedure for the connecting

rod small end bushing is as follows.
ME(H4SO)-92
12LE_US.book 93
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
3) Inspect the crank journal and crank pin for wear. If they are not within the standard, replace the bearing
with a suitable (undersize) one, and replace or grind to correct the crankshaft as necessary. When grinding
the crank journal or crank pin, finish them to the specified dimensions according to the undersize bearing to
be used.
Crank pin:
Cylindricality
Limit
0.004 mm (0.0002 in)
Out-of-roundness
Limit
0.003 mm (0.0001 in)
Grinding limit (dia.)
To 51.750 mm (2.0374 in)
Crank journal:
Cylindricality
Limit
0.006 mm (0.0002 in)
Out-of-roundness
Limit
0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
To 59.758 mm (2.3527 in)
ME-00184
Unit: mm (in)
Crank journal outer diameter
Crank pin outer diameter
#1, #3 #2, #4, #5
59.992 60.008 59.992 60.008 51.984 52.000
Journal O.D.
(2.3619 2.3625) (2.3619 2.3625) (2.0466 2.0472)
Standard
Bearing size 1.998 2.011 2.000 2.013 1.492 1.501
(Thickness at center) (0.0787 0.0792) (0.0787 0.0793) (0.0587 0.0591)
59.962 59.978 59.962 59.978 51.954 51.970
Journal O.D.
0.03 (0.0012) (2.3607 2.3613) (2.3607 2.3613) (2.0454 2.0461)
Undersize Bearing size 2.017 2.020 2.019 2.022 1.510 1.513
59.942 59.958 59.942 59.958 51.934 51.950
Journal O.D.
0.05 (0.0020) (2.3599 2.3605) (2.3599 2.3605) (2.0446 2.0453)
59.742 59.758 59.742 59.758 51.734 51.750
Journal O.D.
0.25 (0.0098) (2.3520 2.3527) (2.3520 2.3527) (2.0368 2.0374)
ME(H4SO)-93
12LE_US.book 94
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Use a thickness gauge to measure the thrust

clearance of crankshaft at #5 crank journal bearing.
If clearance exceeds the standard, replace the
bearing.
Crankshaft thrust clearance:
Standard
0.030 0.115 mm (0.0012 0.0045 in)
ME-00322
5) Inspect individual crankshaft bearings for signs

of flaking, seizure, melting and wear.
6) Measure the oil clearance on each crankshaft
bearing using plastigauge. If the measured value is
out of standard, replace the defective bearing with
an undersize one, and replace or grind to correct
the crankshaft as necessary.
Crankshaft oil clearance:
Standard
0.010 0.030 mm (0.0004 0.0012 in)
ME(H4SO)-94
12LE_US.book 95
Oil Switching Solenoid Valve

MECHANICAL
22.Oil Switching Solenoid Valve 5) Remove the air intake boot from the throttle
A: REMOVAL
1. RH SIDE
FU-06302
6) Remove the bolt, and disconnect the bulkhead

nector and rear engine hanger.
IG-02107
boot assembly.
(A)
FU-05129
(B) (B) 7) Slide the engine harness connector in the direc-

tion of the arrow and remove it from the rear engine
IN-02668
hanger.
(B)
FU-05247
(A)
8) Disconnect the connector from the oil switching
solenoid valve.
9) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve.
IN-02669
10) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-38, REMOV-
AL, Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure
Switch.>
11) Remove the oil temperature sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-40, REMOVAL, Oil Temperature Sen-
sor.>
ME(H4SO)-95
12LE_US.book 96

MECHANICAL
12) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve holder 11) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve holder
from the cylinder head. from the cylinder head.
(A) (C) (B)
(B)
(F )
(D)
(E)
(D)
ME-05774 (C) (A) ME-02727
(A) Oil switching solenoid valve (A) Oil switching solenoid valve
(B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch (B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
(C) Oil temperature sensor (C) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(D) Oil switching solenoid valve holder (D) Gasket
(E) Gasket
(F) Washer B: INSTALLATION
1. RH SIDE
2. LH SIDE
NOTE:
Use a new gasket and washer.
Apply liquid gasket to variable valve lift diagnosis
oil pressure switch threads.
Install the oil switching solenoid valve to the
holder, then install it to the cylinder head.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
IG-02107 T3: 17 Nm (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43, T4: 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
REMOVAL, V-belt.> Liquid gasket:
3) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
45, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> equivalent
4) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to (A) (C)
ME(H4SO)-47, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> T1
T4
REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> (B) (F )
T2
6) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- T3
53, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
7) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 LH. (D)
8) Disconnect the connector from the oil switching
(E)
solenoid valve.
9) Remove the oil switching solenoid valve.
ME-05776
10) Remove the variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-38, REMOV- (A) Oil switching solenoid valve
AL, Variable Valve Lift Diagnosis Oil Pressure (B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
Switch.>
(C) Oil temperature sensor
(D) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(E) Gasket
(F) Washer
ME(H4SO)-96
12LE_US.book 97

MECHANICAL
Tightening torque: 2. LH SIDE

6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Apply liquid gasket to variable valve lift diagnosis
oil pressure switch threads.
Install the oil switching solenoid valve to the
holder, then install it to the cylinder head.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-05129 T2: 10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
T3: 17 Nm (1.7 kgf-m, 12.5 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Align the clamp hole with the protrusion of the air in- Liquid gasket:
take boot assembly. THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or
equivalent
(B)
T3
T2
(D)
IN-03133
(C) (A) T1
ME-05775
Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B) (A) Oil switching solenoid valve
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb) (B) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch
(C) Oil switching solenoid valve holder
(D) Gasket
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
ME(H4SO)-97
12LE_US.book 98
Intake and Exhaust Valve

MECHANICAL
23.Intake and Exhaust Valve

A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to Cylinder Head for removal and installa-
tion procedures of the intake and exhaust valves.
<Ref. to ME(H4SO)-63, REMOVAL, Cylinder
Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-63, INSTALLATION,
Cylinder Head.>
ME(H4SO)-98
12LE_US.book 99
Piston
MECHANICAL
24.Piston
A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to Cylinder Block for removal and installa-
tion procedures of pistons. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-71,
REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
76, INSTALLATION, Cylinder Block.>
ME(H4SO)-99
12LE_US.book 100
Connecting Rod
MECHANICAL
25.Connecting Rod
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of connecting rods. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-71, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-76, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
ME(H4SO)-100
12LE_US.book 101
Crankshaft
MECHANICAL
26.Crankshaft
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of the crankshaft. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-71, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref.
to ME(H4SO)-76, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
ME(H4SO)-101
12LE_US.book 102
Engine Trouble in General

MECHANICAL
27.Engine Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
NOTE:
The RANK shown in the chart shows the possibilities of the cause of trouble in order from Very often to
Rarely.
A Very often
B Sometimes
C Rarely
Symptoms Problem parts etc. Possible cause RANK
1. Engine does not start.
1) Starter does not turn. Starter Defective battery-to-starter harness B
Defective starter switch C
Defective inhibitor switch C
Defective starter B
Battery Improper connection of terminal A
Run-down battery A
Defective charging system B
Friction Seizure of crankshaft and connecting rod bearing C
Seized camshaft C
Seized or stuck piston and cylinder C
Immobilizer system <Ref. to IM(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
2) Initial combustion does Starter Defective starter C
not occur. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay A
Clogged fuel line C
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel B
Timing belt Degradation, etc. B
Defective timing B
Compression Incorrect valve clearance C
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket C
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head C
gasket
Improper valve sealing C
Defective valve stem C
Worn or broken valve spring B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston C
Incorrect valve timing B
Improper engine oil (low viscosity) B
ME(H4SO)-102
12LE_US.book 103

MECHANICAL

3) Initial combustion occurs. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Defective intake manifold gasket B
Defective throttle body gasket B
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay C
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
4) Engine stalls after initial Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
combustion. Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct B
Loosened or cracked PCV hose C
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose C
Defective intake manifold gasket B
Dirty air cleaner element C
Fuel line Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
ME(H4SO)-103
12LE_US.book 104

MECHANICAL

2. Rough idle and engine Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
stall Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Defective PCV valve C
Loosened oil filler cap B
Clogged fuel line C
Timing belt Defective timing C
Compression Incorrect valve clearance B
Loosened spark plug or defective gasket B
Loosened cylinder head bolt or defective cylinder head B
gasket
Improper valve sealing B
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston B
Incorrect valve timing A
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure B
Defective rocker cover gasket C
Cooling system Over-heating C
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction A
Stuck or damaged throttle valve B
ME(H4SO)-104
12LE_US.book 105

MECHANICAL

3. Low output, hesitation and Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
poor acceleration Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose B
Defective PCV valve B
Dirty air cleaner element A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay B
Clogged fuel line B
Lack of fuel or insufficient fuel C
Timing belt Defective timing B
gasket
Over-cooling C
ME(H4SO)-105
12LE_US.book 106

MECHANICAL

4. Surging Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element B
Clogged fuel line B
gasket
Worn or broken valve spring C
Cooling system Over-heating B
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction C
5. Engine does not return to Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
idle. Intake system Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Others Stuck or damaged throttle valve A
6. Dieseling (Run-on) Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction B
7. After burning in exhaust Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
system Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct C
Loosened oil filler cap C
gasket
Lubrication system Incorrect oil pressure C
Cooling system Over-cooling C
ME(H4SO)-106
12LE_US.book 107

MECHANICAL

8. Knocking Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened oil filler cap B
Cooling system Over-heating A
9. Excessive engine oil con- Intake system Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
sumption Defective PCV valve B
Compression Defective valve stem A
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston A
Lubrication system Loosened oil pump attaching bolts and defective gas- B
ket
Defective oil filter gasket B
Defective crankshaft oil seal B
Defective rocker cover gasket B
Loosened oil drain plug or defective gasket B
Loosened oil pan fitting bolts or defective oil pan B
10. Excessive fuel consump- Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
tion Intake system Dirty air cleaner element A
gasket
ME(H4SO)-107
12LE_US.book 108
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
28.Engine Noise
A: INSPECTION
Type of sound Condition Possible cause
Valve mechanism is defective.
Incorrect valve clearance
Sound increases as engine
Regular clicking sound Worn valve rocker
speed increases.
Worn camshaft
Broken valve spring
Worn crankshaft main bearing
Oil pressure is low.
Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
Heavy and dull clank
Damaged engine mounting
Oil pressure is normal.
Loosened flywheel mounting bolt
Ignition timing advanced
Sound is noticeable when
High-pitched clank (Spark Accumulation of carbon inside combustion chamber
accelerating with an overload
knock) Wrong heat range of spark plug
condition.
Improper octane value gasoline
Sound is reduced when fuel Worn crankshaft main bearing
Clank when engine speed is
injector connector of noisy cyl- Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
1,000 to 2,000 rpm
inder is disconnected. *
Sound is reduced when fuel Worn cylinder liner and piston ring
injector connector of noisy cyl- Broken or stuck piston ring
Knocking sound when engine inder is disconnected. * Worn piston pin and hole at piston end of connecting rod
is operating under idling speed
and engine is warm Sound is not reduced if each Worn cam sprocket
fuel injector connector is dis- Worn camshaft journal bore in cylinder head
connected in turn. *
Squeaky sound Insufficient generator lubrication
Rubbing sound Poor contact of generator brush and rotor
Gear scream when starting Defective ignition starter switch

engine Worn gear and starter pinion
Sound like polishing glass with Loose V-belt

a dry cloth Defective water pump shaft
Insufficient compression
Hissing sound
Air leakage in air intake system, hose, connection or manifold
Loose timing belt
Timing belt noise
Timing belt contacting with adjacent part
Valve noise Incorrect valve clearance
* When disconnecting the fuel injector connector, the malfunction indicator light illuminates and DTC is stored in ECM memory.
Therefore, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspection
Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.> after connecting the fuel injector connector.
ME(H4SO)-108
12LE_US.book 1
EXHAUST
EX(H4SO)
Page
2. Front Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................5
3. Center Exhaust Pipe ..................................................................................8
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................9
5. Muffler ......................................................................................................11
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
EXHAUST
A: COMPONENT
Models other than C6 model
(5) (30)
(8)
(6) T1
(7)
T8
(9) (31)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(1) (4) T8
(3)
T10
(18) (11)
T2 T3
T9
(28)
(16) (24)
(10) T3
(23) (22)
T2
(12) (13)
T2
(20)
(14)
(17) (15)
T2
(19) T2
T7
(20)
T5
(25)
(32)
T5
T4
T2 T5
(21)
(29)
T2
(26) T6
T2
(27) T2
EX-02821
EX(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
EXHAUST
C6 model
(5) (30)
(8)
(6) T1
(7)
T8
(9) (31)
(2)
(5)
(6)
(1) (4) T8
(3)
T10
(18) (11)
T2 T3
T9
(28)
(16) (24)
(10) T3
(23) (22)
T2
(12) (13)
T2
(20)
(14)
(17) (15)
T2
(19) T2
T7
(20)
(25)
T5
T4
T2 T5
(21)
(29)
T2
(26) T6
T2
(27) T2
EX-02833
EX(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
EXHAUST
(1) Gasket (16) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (31) Cushion rubber (with protrusion)
(2) Spring (17) Front catalytic converter (32) Hanger bracket (MT model)
(3) Chamber (18) Rear oxygen sensor
(4) Rear exhaust pipe (19) Gasket Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(5) Cushion rubber (without protru- (20) Gasket T1: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
sion)
(6) Self-locking nut (21) Front exhaust pipe T2: 13 (1.3, 9.6)
(7) Gasket (22) Front exhaust pipe upper cover LH T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(8) Muffler (23) Front exhaust pipe upper cover T4: 23 (2.3, 17.0)
RH
(9) Bolt (24) Front catalytic converter upper T5: 30 (3.1, 22.1)
cover
(10) Center exhaust pipe front upper (25) Front catalytic converter lower T6: 35 (3.6, 25.8)
cover cover
(11) Rear catalytic converter upper (26) Front exhaust pipe lower cover RH T7: 40 (4.1, 29.5)
cover
(12) Center exhaust pipe (27) Front exhaust pipe lower cover LH T8: 48 (4.9, 35.4)
(13) Rear catalytic converter (28) Band T9: <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-42, INSTAL-
LATION, Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
(14) Rear catalytic converter lower (29) Hanger bracket (CVT model) T10: <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-44, INSTAL-
cover LATION, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
(15) Center exhaust pipe front lower (30) Muffler cutter (models with muffler
cover cutter)
B: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
If any fat adheres to the exhaust pipe, wipe it off.
Otherwise a fire may happen.
EX(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
2. Front Exhaust Pipe C6 model
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Vehicle components are extremely hot after
driving. Be wary of receiving burns from heated
parts.
EX-02528
7) Remove the nuts which hold front exhaust pipe

onto cylinder heads.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the front exhaust pipe
and center exhaust pipe assembly.
IG-02107
3) Disconnect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con-

nector (A) and rear oxygen sensor connector (B)
and remove the clip (C) fastening the harness.
EX-02529
(B)
8) Remove the bolt which holds center exhaust
(A)
pipe to hanger bracket.
(C)
EX-02527

6) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from center ex-
haust pipe.
EX-02530
9) Remove the front exhaust pipe and center ex-
haust pipe from vehicle as a unit.
CAUTION:
The front exhaust pipe and center exhaust
pipe assembly are very heavy. Be careful not to
drop the exhaust pipes when removing.
After removing the front exhaust pipe and
center exhaust pipe assembly, do not pull the
rear exhaust pipe with excessive force.
EX-02822
EX(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
10) Remove the center exhaust pipe from the front 4) Temporarily tighten the nuts which hold front ex-
exhaust pipe. haust pipe to cylinder heads.
EX-02712 EX-02529
11) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear 5) Install the rear exhaust pipe to center exhaust
oxygen sensor from front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to pipe.
FU(H4SO)-42, REMOVAL, Front Oxygen (A/F) NOTE:
Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-44, REMOVAL, Rear Use a new gasket.
Oxygen Sensor.>
Tightening torque:
B: INSTALLATION 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
1) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear ox-
ygen sensor to the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to Models other than C6 model
FU(H4SO)-42, INSTALLATION, Front Oxygen (A/
F) Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-44, INSTALLA-
TION, Rear Oxygen Sensor.>
2) Install the center exhaust pipe to front exhaust
pipe.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
40 Nm (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5 ft-lb) EX-02822
C6 model
EX-02712
3) Install the front exhaust pipe and center exhaust

EX-02528
pipe as a unit to the vehicle.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
EX(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
6) Tighten the bolts which secure the center ex- 11) Connect the battery ground terminal.
haust pipe to the hanger bracket.
Tightening torque:
35 Nm (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
IG-02107

EX-02530
C: INSPECTION
7) Tighten the nuts which hold front exhaust pipe to 1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
cylinder heads. leaks.
Tightening torque: 2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
30 Nm (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb)
EX-02529

10) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-
tor (A) and rear oxygen sensor connector (B), and
fasten the harness with the clip (C).
(B)
(A)
(C)
EX-02527
EX(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
3. Center Exhaust Pipe

A: REMOVAL
After removing the center exhaust pipe and front
exhaust pipe as a unit, separate them. Refer to
Front Exhaust Pipe for the removal procedure.
<Ref. to EX(H4SO)-5, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
Install the center exhaust pipe and front exhaust
pipe as a unit. Refer to Front Exhaust Pipe for the
installation procedure. <Ref. to EX(H4SO)-6, IN-
STALLATION, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
EX(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe 5) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the cushion
rubber.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
CAUTION: Be careful not to let the muffler contact the rear
Vehicle components are extremely hot after bumper.
parts.
2) Remove the center exhaust pipe from rear ex-
haust pipe.
EX-02789
B: INSTALLATION
1) Apply a coat of spray type lubricant to the mating
area of cushion rubber.
2) Install the rear exhaust pipe to cushion rubber.
EX-02822 NOTE:
C6 model After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
installing.
EX-02528
3) Remove the muffler from rear exhaust pipe.

EX-02789
CAUTION:
3) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the muffler.
Be careful not to drop the rear exhaust pipe.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket and self-locking nut.
Tightening torque:
48 Nm (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
EX-02531

EX-02531
EX(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
4) Install the center exhaust pipe to rear exhaust

pipe.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
EX-02822
C6 model
EX-02528

C: INSPECTION
leaks.
3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.
EX(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 11
Muffler
EXHAUST
5. Muffler
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
parts.
2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the muffler.
EX-02531

4) Remove the muffler from the cushion rubber.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the muffler during remov-
al.
EX-02532
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
After assembling, degrease the lubricant which
installing.
Tightening torque:
48 Nm (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX(H4SO)-11
12LE_US.book 12
Muffler
EXHAUST
EX(H4SO)-12
12LE_US.book 1
COOLING
CO(H4SO)
Page
2. Radiator Fan System .................................................................................7
3. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................14
4. Water Pump .............................................................................................16
5. Thermostat ...............................................................................................18
6. Radiator ....................................................................................................20
7. Radiator Cap ............................................................................................23
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor ...........................................................24
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor .............................................................25
10. Reservoir Tank .........................................................................................26
11. Engine Cooling System Trouble in General .............................................27
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
COOLING
A: SPECIFICATION
Electric fan + Forced engine coolant circulation
Cooling system
system
Total engine MT: approx. 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
coolant 2 (US qt, Imp qt)
capacity CVT: approx. 6.4 (6.8, 5.6)
Type Centrifugal impeller type
Discharge rate 2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min. 200 (52.8, 44.0)
Discharge
Pump speed Discharge pressure 6,000 rpm 225.4 kPa (23 mAq)
performance
Engine coolant temperature 80C (176F)
Water pump Impeller diameter mm (in) 76 (2.99)
Number of impeller vanes 8
Pump pulley diameter mm (in) 60 (2.36)
Clearance between impeller and
mm (in) Standard 0.5 1.6 (0.020 0.063)
case
Type Wax pellet type
Starting temperature to open 86 90C (187 194F)
Thermostat Fully opens 95C (203F)
Valve lift mm (in) 9.0 (0.354) or more
Valve bore mm (in) 35 (1.38)
Main fan W 90
Motor input
Sub fan W 90
Radiator fan
Fan diameter / Main fan 300 mm (11.81 in)/4
Blade Sub fan 300 mm (11.81 in)/5
Type Down flow, pressure type
687.4 340 16
Core dimensions Width Height Thickness mm (in)
(27.06 13.39 0.63)
Positive Standard 93 123 (0.95 1.25, 14 18)
Radiator Pressure range pressure side Limit 83 (0.85, 12)
in which cap kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
valve is open Negative 1.0 to 4.9 or less
Standard
pressure side (0.01 0.05, 0.1 0.7)
Fins Corrugated fin type
Reservoir
Capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.45 (0.48, 0.40)
tank
Recommended materials Item number Alternative


(Concentrated type)
Coolant
K0670Y0001
(Diluted type)
Water for dilution Distilled water Soft water or tap water
agent
CO(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
COOLING
B: COMPONENT
1. WATER PUMP
(2)
(1)
T1
(7)
(7)
(4) (3)
T2 (5)
(6)
CO-02782
(1) Water pump ASSY (5) Gasket Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (6) Thermostat cover T1: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(3) Heater by-pass hose (7) Clip Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(4) Thermostat T2: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
CO(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
COOLING
2. RADIATOR & RADIATOR FAN
(5)
(6) (8)
(5)
T2
T1
T2
(7)
T1
T3 (10)
(9)
(4) (11)
(3)
(12)
(20)
(2)
(13)
(5)
A (21)
A (14)
(14)
(16)
B (14)
B (17)
(19)
(18) (1)
(5)
(15)
CO-02939
(1) Radiator lower cushion (10) Radiator sub fan shroud (19) O-ring
(2) Radiator (11) Radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan (20) Radiator cap
motor ASSY
(3) Radiator upper cushion (12) Radiator main fan shroud (21) CVTF pipe
(4) Radiator upper bracket (13) Radiator main fan, radiator main
fan motor ASSY
(5) Clip (14) Clip (CVT model) Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Radiator inlet hose (15) CVTF radiator inlet hose (CVT T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
model)
(7) Engine coolant reservoir tank cap (16) CVTF radiator outlet hose (CVT T2: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
model)
(8) Over flow hose (17) Radiator outlet hose T3: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(9) Engine coolant reservoir tank (18) Radiator drain plug
CO(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
General Description
COOLING
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
battery.
ing of engine coolant when performing work where
engine coolant can be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe
it off immediately to prevent from penetrating into
floor or flowing out for environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing engine
coolant.
CO(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
COOLING
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
499977400 CRANK PULLEY Used for removing and installing the crank pul-
WRENCH ley. (CVT model)
ST-499977400
WRENCH ley. (MT model)
ST-499977100
18231AA010 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing cam sprocket.
WRENCH NOTE:
also be used.
ST18231AA010
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for troubleshooting the electrical system.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Radiator cap tester Used for checking radiator and radiator cap.
CO(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
2. Radiator Fan System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
TO POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
MB-6 FB-35 MB-7 FB-39

M/B FUSE NO. 8 F/B FUSE NO. 26 M/B FUSE NO. 7 F/B FUSE NO. 22
(B) (IG) (B) (IG)
14
17
20
21
10
13
2
MAIN
FAN A/C
MOTOR MAIN MAIN SUB RELAY HOLDER
FAN FAN FAN
B473 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY B497
1
15
16
22
19
18
11
12
B482
1
B12
B11
J/C
3
B479
B : B135 ECM
SUB FAN MOTOR
B473 B479 B497 B: B135
B482 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
3 4 5 1
2 1 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
6
2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 7
18
12 16 19
10 11 14 15
13 17 20 21 22
A/C RELAY HOLDER
CO-02650
CO(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
B: INSPECTION
Operating condition:
Radiator fan operates depending on the radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature
or the radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load, whichever is higher as an operation
mode.
Radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature
(A)
(1)
(2)
(3) (B)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
CO-02946
(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) Engine coolant temperature
(1) High-Speed (4) 96C (205F) (7) 101C (214F)

(2) Low-Speed (5) 98C (208F)
(3) OFF (6) 100C (212F)
CO(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load
(A)
(1)
(2)
(3) (B)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
CO-02662
(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) A/C compressor refrigerant pres-
sure
(1) High-Speed (4) 0.8 MPa (8.16 kgf/cm2, 116 psi) (7) 1.5 MPa (15.30 kgf/cm2, 218 psi)
(2) Low-Speed (5) 1.125 MPa (11.47 kgf/cm2, 163
psi)
(3) OFF (6) 1.25 MPa (12.75 kgf/cm2, 181 psi)
CO(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
DIAGNOSIS:
Radiator main fan and radiator sub fans do not rotate under the above operating conditions.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at low
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. speed?
3) Perform the compulsory operation check for
the radiator fan relay using Subaru Select Mon-
itor.
NOTE:
When performing a forced operation radiator
fan relay check using the Subaru Select Moni-
tor, the radiator main fan and radiator sub fan
will repeat low speed revolution high speed
revolution OFF in this order.
Subaru Select Monitor
For detailed operation procedures, refer to PC
application help for Subaru Select Monitor.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Radiator main fan Go to step 27.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at high system is normal.
itor.
NOTE:
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO SUB FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
LAY.
2) Remove the sub fan relay from A/C relay
holder.
3) Measure the voltage between sub fan relay
connector and chassis ground.
Connector & terminal
(B497) No. 10 (+) Chassis ground ():
LAY.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
5 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the power
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply line.
2) Remove the fuse No. 7.
3) Check the condition of fuse.
CO(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 11
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 8. Replace the sub
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan AC-30, Relay and
relay terminals. Fuse.>
Terminals
No. 10 No. 11:
8 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 9. Replace the sub
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 13 and fan relay. <Ref. to
No. 12 of the sub fan relay. AC-30, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan Fuse.>
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 No. 11:
9 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN RE- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 10. Repair the open
LAY CONNECTOR AND SUB FAN MOTOR circuit of harness
CONNECTOR. between sub fan
1) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan relay connector
motor. and sub fan motor
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector.
sub fan relay connector and sub fan motor con-
nector.
(B482) No. 2 (B497) No. 11:
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN MO- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 11. Repair the open
TOR CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN RELAY 2 circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between sub
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay fan motor connec-
holder. tor and main fan
2) Measure the resistance of harness between relay 2 connector.
sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2
connector.
(B482) No. 1 (B497) No. 18:
11 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the sub Repair the poor Go to step 12.
Check poor contact of sub fan motor connector. fan motor connector? contact of sub fan
motor connector.
12 CHECK SUB FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 13. Replace the sub
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter- rotate? fan motor. <Ref. to
minal No. 2 of the sub fan motor, and the ground CO(H4SO)-25,
() terminal to terminal No. 1. Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
13 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 2. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 14. Replace the main
Measure the resistance between main fan relay fan relay 2. <Ref. to
2 terminals. AC-30, Relay and
Terminals Fuse.>
No. 21 No. 18:
14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 15. Repair the open
RELAY 2 CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN MO- circuit of the har-
TOR CONNECTOR. ness between
1) Disconnect the connector from the main fan main fan relay 2
motor. connector and
2) Measure the resistance of the harness main fan motor
between main fan relay 2 connector and main connector.
fan motor connector.
(B473) No. 2 (B497) No. 21:
CO(H4SO)-11
12LE_US.book 12
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

15 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF MAIN FAN Is the resistance less than 5 ? Go to step 16. Repair the open
MOTOR. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between main fan ness between the
motor connector and chassis ground. main fan motor
Connector & terminal connector and
(B473) No. 1 Chassis ground: chassis ground or
poor contact of the
joint connector.
16 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the
Repair the poor Go to step 17.
Check poor contact of main fan motor connec- main fan motor connector? contact of main fan
tor. motor connector.
17 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator main fan Go to step 18. Replace the main
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter-
rotate? fan motor. <Ref. to
minal No. 2 of the main fan motor, and the CO(H4SO)-24,
ground () terminal to terminal No. 1. Radiator Main Fan
and Fan Motor.>
LAY CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. between sub fan
2) Measure the resistance between the sub relay connector
fan relay connector and ECM connector. and ECM.
(B135) No. 11 (B497) No. 12:
19 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Check the DTC.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM Repair the trouble
connector. cause. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
39, Read Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
20 CHECK MAIN FAN RELAY 1. Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 21. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 1. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main fan relay 1 from A/C relay AC-30, Relay and
holder. Fuse.>
3) Measure the resistance between main fan
relay 1 terminals.
Terminals
No. 14 No. 15:
1) Connect terminals No. 17 and No. 16 of the fan relay 1. <Ref. to
main fan relay 1 to the battery. AC-30, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between terminals Fuse.>
of main fan relay 1 switch.
Terminals
No. 14 No. 15:
(B473) No. 2 (B497) No. 15:
CO(H4SO)-12
12LE_US.book 13
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

RELAY 1 CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of the har-
1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. ness between
2) Measure the resistance between the main main fan relay 1
fan relay 1 connector and ECM connector. connector and
Connector & terminal ECM.
(B135) No. 12 (B497) No. 16:
Measure the resistance between the main fan ness between
relay 2 connector and ECM connector. main fan relay 2
(B135) No. 12 (B497) No. 22: ECM.
25 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 26.
2) Remove the fuse No. 8 and No. 26.
26 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Repair the power
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM supply circuit to the
connector. main fuse box.
27 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 20. Go to step 28.
If the both fans do not rotate at high speed in the rotate?
condition of step 2, check whether the radiator
sub fan is rotating.
RELAY 2. circuit of the har-
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay ness between
holder. main fan relay 2
2) Measure the resistance between main fan connector and
relay 2 connector and chassis ground. chassis ground or
Connector & terminal poor contact of the
(B497) No. 19 Chassis ground: joint connector.
29 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAIN FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 30. Repair the power
LAY 2. supply line.
2) Measure the voltage between main fan relay
2 connector and chassis ground.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 2. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main fan relay 2. AC-30, Relay and
3) Measure the resistance between main fan Fuse.>
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 No. 19:
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 20 and fan relay 2. <Ref. to
No. 22 of the main fan relay 2. AC-30, Relay and
2) Measure the resistance between main fan Fuse.>
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 No. 19:
CO(H4SO)-13
12LE_US.book 14
Engine Coolant
COOLING
3. Engine Coolant NOTE:

The SUBARU Super Coolant contains anti-freeze
A: REPLACEMENT and anti-rust agents, and is especially made for
Subaru engines with an aluminum cylinder block.
1. DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT Be sure to use SUBARU Super Coolant, since oth-
1) Lift up the vehicle. er coolant may cause corrosion.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- 3) Fill engine coolant into the reservoir tank up to
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> FULL level.
3) Remove the drain plug to drain engine coolant
into container.
NOTE:
Remove the radiator cap so that engine coolant will
drain faster.
FULL
FULL
LOW
LOW
CO-00269
4) Close the radiator cap and start the engine.

Race 5 to 6 times at 3,000 rpm or less, then stop
the engine. (Complete this operation within 40 sec-
onds.)
CO-02632 5) Wait for one minute after the engine stops, and
4) Install the drain plug. open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant level
5) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL- drops, add engine coolant into radiator up to the fill-
LATION, Front Under Cover.> er neck position.
6) Perform the procedures 4) and 5) again.
2. FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT 7) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
1) Pour cooling system conditioner through the fill- properly.
er neck. 8) Start the engine and operate the heater at max-
imum hot position and the blower speed setting to
Cooling system protective agent: LO.
Refer to SPECIFICATION for cooling sys- 9) Run the engine at 2,000 rpm or less until radiator
tem protective agent. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, fan starts and stops.
SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
2) Pour engine coolant into the radiator up to the NOTE:
filler neck position. Be careful with the engine coolant temperature to
prevent overheating.
Recommended engine coolant: 10) Stop the engine and wait until the engine cool-
Refer to SPECIFICATION for recommended ant temperature lowers to 30C (86F) or less.
engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, SPECI- 11) Open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant lev-
FICATION, General Description.> el drops, add engine coolant into the radiator up to
Engine coolant level: the filler neck position and the reservoir tank to
Refer to SPECIFICATION for engine cool- FULL level.
ant level. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICA- 12) Attach the radiator cap correctly.
TION, General Description.> 13) Set the heater setting to maximum hot position
and the blower speed setting to LO and start the
Engine coolant concentration: engine. Perform racing at 3,000 rpm or less. If the
Refer to ADJUSTMENT for the recommend- flowing sound is heard from the heater core, repeat
ed engine coolant concentration. <Ref. to the procedures from step 9).
CO(H4SO)-15, ADJUSTMENT, Engine Cool-
ant.>
CO(H4SO)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Engine Coolant
COOLING
B: ADJUSTMENT
1. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE SUBARU SUPER COOLANT CONCENTRATION
CAUTION:
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration must be used from 50 to 60% to assure the best performance
of the anti-freeze and anti-rust agents.
To adjust the concentration of SUBARU Super Coolant according to temperature, find the proper SUBARU
Super Coolant concentration in the table, and add diluting water to the SUBARU Super Coolant (concentrat-
ed type) until it reaches the proper dilution.
Relationship of SUBARU Super Coolant concentration and freezing temperature
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration 50% 55% 60%
Freezing temperature 36C (33F) 41C (42F) 50C (58F)
Recommended Engine Coolant and Water for Dilution:

Refer to SPECIFICATION for the recommended engine coolant and diluting water. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
CO(H4SO)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Water Pump
COOLING
4. Water Pump 12) Remove the water pump.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43,
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
ME(H4SO)-47, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> CO-00021
TIMING BELT, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> B: INSTALLATION
6) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster. 1) Install the water pump onto cylinder block LH.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
When installing the water pump, tighten the bolts
in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in
figure.
Tightening torque:
1st
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
CO-00016
2nd
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
7) Remove the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
(B)
FU(H4SO)-27, REMOVAL, Camshaft Position
(C)
Sensor.> (A)
8) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to (D)
ME(H4SO)-53, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
9) Remove the belt cover No. 2 LH.
(E) (F)
ME-06054
2) Install the hose to water pump.

3) Install the tensioner bracket.
Tightening torque:
24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
CO-00019
ME-04984
ME-04984
11) Disconnect the hose from water pump.
CO(H4SO)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Water Pump
COOLING
4) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH. C: INSPECTION

Tightening torque: 1) Check the water pump bearing for smooth rota-
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) tion.
2) Check the water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3) Make sure the impeller is not abnormally de-
formed or damaged.
4) Inspect the clearance between impeller and
pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case:
Standard
0.5 1.6 mm (0.020 0.063 in)
CO-00019
5) Install the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to

ME(H4SO)-53, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
6) Install the camshaft position sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-27, INSTALLATION, Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
7) Install an automatic belt tension adjuster with the
tension rod held by a pin. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-49,
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS- CO-00293
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION,
Timing Belt.> 5) After water pump installation, check pulley shaft
for engine coolant leaks or noise. If leaks or noise
are noted, replace the water pump assembly.
TIMING BELT, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
47, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt Cover.>
11) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43, IN-
STALLATION, V-belt.>
12) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-21, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator.>
CO(H4SO)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Thermostat
COOLING
5. Thermostat B: INSTALLATION
1) Install a gasket to thermostat.
A: REMOVAL
1) Lift up the vehicle. NOTE:
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- Use a new gasket.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 2) Install the thermostat and thermostat cover.
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-14, NOTE:
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE- Install the parts with the jiggle pin facing upward.
Tightening torque:
4) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo-
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
stat cover.
(D)
CO-00270
5) Remove the thermostat cover, and then remove

the gasket and thermostat.
(C)
(B)
(A)
CO-02784
(A) Thermostat cover

(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
(D) Jiggle pin
(C) 3) Connect the radiator outlet hose to thermostat

(B) cover.
(A) 5) Lower the vehicle.
CO-02783
(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
CO(H4SO)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Thermostat
COOLING
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the thermostat does not have defor-
mation, cracks or damage.
2) Check that the thermostat valve closes com-
pletely at an ambient temperature.
3) Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in
water. Raise water temperature gradually, and
check the temperature and valve lift when the valve
begins to open and when the valve is fully opened.
Replace the thermostat if faulty.
NOTE:
During the test, agitate the water for even tem-
perature distribution.
Leave the thermostat in the boiling water for
five minutes or more before measuring the valve
lift.
Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like to
avoid contacting with container bottom.
Starting temperature to open:
86 90C (187 194F)
Full open temperature:
95C (203F)
Total valve lift:
9.0 mm (0.354 in) or more
(A)
(B)
CO-02420
(A) Thermometer
(B) Thermostat
CO(H4SO)-19
12LE_US.book 20
Radiator
COOLING
6. Radiator 9) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-

26, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
A: REMOVAL 10) Disconnect the connector (A) from the main fan
motor and the connector (B) from the sub fan mo-
CAUTION:
tor.
The radiator is pressurized when the engine
and radiator are hot. Wait until engine and radi-
ator cool down before working on the radiator.
(A)
CO-02624
IG-02107
(B)
4) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-14,
DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
5) Disconnect the radiator outlet hose from thermo- CO-02625
stat cover. 11) Disconnect the radiator inlet hoses from the en-
gine.
CO-00270
6) Disconnect the CVTF radiator hose from the CO-02617

CVTF pipe. (CVT model) 12) Remove the grille bracket.
NOTE: NOTE:
Plug the CVTF pipe to prevent CVTF from leaking. Remove ten clips when removing the grille bracket.
CO-02664 CO-02618
CO(H4SO)-20
12LE_US.book 21
Radiator
COOLING
13) Remove the radiator upper brackets. 3) Install the radiator upper brackets.
Tightening torque:
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
CO-02619
14) Lift the radiator up and away from vehicle.

15) Remove the radiator lower cushion from the ve- CO-02619
hicle body.
4) Attach the grille bracket.
CO-02620
CO-02618
B: INSTALLATION 5) Connect the radiator inlet hose.
1) Install the radiator lower cushion to the vehicle
body.
CO-02617
CO-02620
2) Install the radiator to vehicle.

NOTE:
Make pins on the lower side of radiator be fitted into
the radiator lower cushions.
CO(H4SO)-21
12LE_US.book 22
Radiator
COOLING
6) Connect the connector (A) to the radiator main 12) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL-
fan motor and the connector (B) to the sub fan mo- LATION, Front Under Cover.>
tor connector. 13) Lower the vehicle.
(A)
CO-02624
IG-02107

(B)
16) Adjust the CVTF level. (CVT model) <Ref. to
CVT-37, ADJUSTMENT, CVTF.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator does not have deforma-
tion, cracks or damage.
CO-02625
7) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-9, loose part.
INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.> 3) Remove the radiator cap, fill the radiator with en-
8) Install the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)- gine coolant, and then install the radiator cap tester
26, INSTALLATION, Reservoir Tank.> to the filler neck of radiator.
10) Connect the CVTF radiator hose. (CVT model)
NOTE:
Use a new CVTF radiator hose.
CO-02588
4) Apply a pressure of 157 kPa (1.6 kgf/cm2, 23

psi) to the radiator, and check the following items.
Leakage from the radiator or its vicinity
CO-02664 Leakage from the hose or its connections
11) Connect the radiator outlet hose. CAUTION:
Engine should be turned off.
Wipe engine coolant from check points in ad-
vance.
Be careful not to deform the filler neck of ra-
diator when installing and removing the radia-
tor cap tester.
Be careful of engine coolant from spurting
out when removing the radiator cap tester.
CO-00270
CO(H4SO)-22
12LE_US.book 23
Radiator Cap
COOLING
7. Radiator Cap
A: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator cap does not have defor-
2) Attach the radiator cap tester to radiator cap.
CO-00044
3) Increase pressure until the radiator cap tester

gauge needle stops. Radiator cap is functioning
properly if it holds the service limit pressure for 5
6 seconds. Replace the radiator cap if its valve
opens at less than the service limit.
Standard:
93 123 kPa (0.95 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 18
psi)
Service limit:
83 kPa (0.85 kgf/cm2, 12 psi)
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove foreign matter and rust from
the cap in advance. Otherwise, results of pres-
sure test will be incorrect.
CO(H4SO)-23
12LE_US.book 24
Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor

COOLING
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan B: INSTALLATION

Motor CAUTION:
Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
A: REMOVAL nected.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the clip which holds the main fan motor
assembly connector onto the radiator main fan
shroud.
2) Remove the bolts which hold the main fan motor
assembly onto the radiator main shroud.
IG-02107
2) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-

26, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the main fan mo-
tor assembly.
CO-00098
D: ASSEMBLY
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
Tightening torque:
CO-02860 5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
4) Remove the CVTF radiator hose from the clip of E: INSPECTION
the radiator main fan shroud. (CVT model)
Check that the radiator main fan, radiator main fan
5) Remove the bolts which hold the radiator main shroud and main fan motor assembly do not have
fan shroud onto the radiator. deformation, cracks or damage.
CO-02621
6) Remove the radiator main fan and fan motor

from vehicle.
CO(H4SO)-24
12LE_US.book 25
Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor

COOLING
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan B: INSTALLATION

Motor CAUTION:
Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
A: REMOVAL nected.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the clip which holds the radiator sub fan
motor assembly connector onto the radiator sub
fan shroud.
2) Remove the bolts which hold the sub fan motor
assembly onto the radiator sub fan shroud.
IG-02107

3) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan motor
assembly.
CO-00098
D: ASSEMBLY
Tightening torque:
CO-02861 5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
4) Remove the CVTF radiator hose from the clip of E: INSPECTION
the radiator sub fan & fan motor. (CVT model)
Check that the radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan
5) Remove the bolts which hold the radiator sub fan shroud and sub fan motor assembly do not have
shroud onto the radiator. deformation, cracks or damage.
CO-02622
6) Remove the radiator sub fan and fan motor from

vehicle.
CO(H4SO)-25
12LE_US.book 26
Reservoir Tank
COOLING
10.Reservoir Tank
A: REMOVAL
1) Pull out the over flow hose (A) from the reservoir
tank.
2) Pull out the reservoir tank to the arrow direction
while pushing the claw (B).
(B)
(A)
CO-02623
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the reservoir tank does not have de-
formation, cracks or damage.
2) Make sure the over flow hoses are not cracked,
damaged or loose.
3) Make sure the engine coolant level is between
FULL and LOW.
CO(H4SO)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

COOLING
11.Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Replenish engine coolant, inspect for leakage, and
a. Insufficient engine coolant
repair it if necessary.
b. Loose timing belt Repair or replace timing belt tensioner.
c. Oil on timing belt Replace.
d. Malfunction of thermostat Replace.
e. Malfunction of water pump Replace.
f. Clogged engine coolant passage Clean.
Inspect and repair ignition control system. <Ref. to
g. Improper ignition timing
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
h. Clogged or leaking radiator Clean, repair or replace.
Over-heating i. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Replace the engine coolant. If ineffective, check, repair
j. Improper engine oil in engine coolant
or replace engine components.
Inspect and repair the fuel injection system. <Ref. to
k. Air/fuel mixture ratio too lean
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
l. Excessive back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace.
m. Insufficient clearance between piston and cylinder Adjust or replace.
n. Slipping clutch Repair or replace.
o. Dragging brake Adjust.
Inspect the radiator fan relay, engine coolant tempera-
p. Defective radiator fan
ture sensor or fan motor and replace them.
a. Ambient temperature extremely low Partly cover radiator front area.
Over-cooling
b. Defective thermostat Replace.
a. Loosened or damaged connecting units on hoses Repair or replace.
b. Leakage from water pump Replace.
c. Leakage from water pipe Repair or replace.
Retighten cylinder head bolts or replace cylinder head
Engine coolant d. Leakage around cylinder head gasket
gasket.
leaks
e. Damaged or cracked cylinder head and cylinder
Repair or replace.
block
f. Damaged or cracked thermostat cover Repair or replace.
g. Leakage from radiator Repair or replace.
a. Timing belt problem Replace.
b. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Noise
c. Defective water pump bearing Replace water pump.
d. Defective water pump mechanical seal Replace water pump.
CO(H4SO)-27
12LE_US.book 28

COOLING
CO(H4SO)-28
12LE_US.book 1
LUBRICATION
LU(H4SO)
Page
2. Oil Pressure System ................................................................................11
3. Engine Oil .................................................................................................13
4. Oil Pump ..................................................................................................15
5. Oil Pan and Strainer .................................................................................19
6. Oil Pressure Switch ..................................................................................25
7. Engine Oil Cooler .....................................................................................27
8. Oil Catch Tank .........................................................................................29
9. Scavenge Pump .......................................................................................30
10. Oil Pipe .....................................................................................................31
11. Engine Oil Filter ........................................................................................36
12. Oil Level Switch ........................................................................................37
13. Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General ........................................45
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
LUBRICATION
A: SPECIFICATION
Non-turbo model
Lubrication method Forced lubrication
Pump type Trochoid type
Inner rotor 9
Number of teeth
Outer rotor 10
Outer rotor diameter thickness mm (in) 76 10 (2.99 0.39)
Tip clearance between inner and
mm (in) Standard 0.04 0.14 (0.0016 0.0055)
outer rotors
Case clearance between outer rotor
mm (in) Standard 0.10 0.175 (0.0039 0.0069)
and pump case
Side clearance between inner rotor
mm (in) Standard 0.02 0.07 (0.0008 0.0028)
and pump case
Oil pump
Relief valve spring Installed length mm (in) 54.7 (2.154)
Load when installed N (kgf, lbf) 93.1 (9.49, 20.93)
Discharge 2
kPa (kgf/cm , psi) 98 (1.0, 14)
600 rpm pressure
Performance Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 4.6 (4.9, 4.0) or more
(Oil temperature 80C
Discharge
(176F)) kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 294 (3.0, 43)
5,000 rpm pressure
Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 47.0 (49.7, 41.4) or more
Relief valve working pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 588 (6.0, 85)
Filter type Full-flow filter type
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 800 (124)
Filtration area cm2 (sq in)
Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 555 (86)
Oil filter By-pass valve opening pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 160 (1.63, 23.2)
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 68 65 (2.68 2.56)
Outer diameter width mm (in)
Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 67.4 65.3 (2.65 2.57)
Installation screw specifications M 20 1.5
Type Immersed contact point type
Oil pressure Operating voltage power consumption 12 V 3.4 W or less
switch Warning light operating pressure 2
kPa (kgf/cm , psi) 14.7 (0.15, 2.1)
Proof pressure kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) 981 (10, 142) or more
Total capacity (at overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.8 (5.1, 4.2)
Engine oil When replacing engine oil and oil filter 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.2 (4.4, 3.7)
When replacing engine oil only 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.0 (4.2, 3.5)
LU(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
LUBRICATION
Recommended oil:
CAUTION:
It is acceptable to fill an engine with oil of another brand when replacing the oil, but make sure to use
the following engine oil specified by Subaru.
Engine oil standard SAE viscosity No.
5W-30 (synthetic oil)
TR OLEUM
PE
IN
FOR
AM ER I CA
ST I
GASOLINE
TUTE
or ENGINES
C
ER D
T I F IE
RM-00076 RM-00002
Those with the API standard SM Those with the ILSAC standard GF-4
Energy Conserving or SN or GF-5 starburst mark displayed on
Resource Conserving logo. top of the container.
NOTE:
The proper viscosity oil helps the engine maintain its ideal temperature, and cranking speed increased by re-
ducing viscosity friction in hot condition.
LU(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
LUBRICATION
Turbo model
Lubrication method Forced lubrication
Pump type Trochoid type
Inner rotor 9
Number of teeth
Outer rotor 10
Outer rotor diameter thickness mm (in) 78 11 (3.07 0.43)
Tip clearance between inner and
mm (in) Standard 0.04 0.14 (0.0016 0.0055)
outer rotors
Case clearance between outer
mm (in) Standard 0.10 0.175 (0.0039 0.0069)
rotor and pump case
Side clearance between inner rotor
mm (in) Standard 0.02 0.07 (0.0008 0.0028)
and pump case
Oil pump
Relief valve spring Installed length mm (in) 54.7 (2.154)
Load when installed N (kgf, lbf) 93.1 (9.49, 20.93)
Discharge 2, psi)
kPa (kg/cm 98 (1.0, 14)
600 rpm pressure
Performance Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 6.4 (6.8, 5.6) or more
(Oil temperature 80C
Discharge
(176F)) kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 392 (4.0, 56.8)
6,000 rpm pressure
Discharge rate 2 (US qt, Imp qt)/min. 63.0 (66.6, 55.4) or more
Relief valve working pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 538 (5.5, 78)
Filter type Full-flow filter type
Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 800 (124)
Filtration area cm2 (sq in)
Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 555 (86)
Oil filter By-pass valve opening pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 160 (1.63, 23.2)
Outer diameter Outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in) (Black) 68 65 (2.68 2.56)
mm (in)
width Outer diameter: 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (Blue) 67.4 65.3 (2.65 2.57)
Installation screw specifications M 20 1.5
Type Immersed contact point type
Oil pressure Operating voltage power consumption 12 V 3.4 W or less
switch Warning light operating pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 14.7 (0.15, 2.1)
Proof pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi) 981 (10, 142) or more
Total capacity (at overhaul) 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 5.2 (5.5, 4.6)
Engine oil When replacing engine oil and oil filter 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.3 (4.5, 3.8)
When replacing engine oil only 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 4.0 (4.2, 3.5)
LU(H4SO)-4
b12usen108.fm 5
General Description
LUBRICATION
Required oil:
CAUTION:
Use 5W-30 (synthetic oil).
It is acceptable to fill an engine with oil of another brand when replacing the oil, but make sure
to use the following engine oil specified by Subaru.
Engine oil standard SAE viscosity No.
5W-30 (synthetic oil)
TR OLEUM
PE
IN
FOR
AM ER I CA
ST I
GASOLINE
TUTE
or ENGINES
C
ER D
T I F IE
RM-00076 RM-00002
Those with the API standard SM Those with the ILSAC standard GF-4
Energy Conserving or SN or GF-5 starburst mark displayed on
Resource Conserving logo. top of the container.
NOTE:
The proper viscosity oil helps the engine maintain its ideal temperature, and cranking speed increased by re-
ducing viscosity friction in hot condition.
LU(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
LUBRICATION
B: COMPONENT
Non-turbo model
T6 (13)
(16)
(15)
(14)
T3
(17)
(12)
(29)
(11) (28)
T3 (18)
(32)
T3 T10
T3
T4
T3
(9)
T2
(20)
(8) T9 (31) (19) T3
(7) (33)
(6)
(36)
(24)
(27)
(35) (30) T3
(5) (10)
T3
(4) (2)
T5
(34)
(21)
(3) T8
(1) (23) (22)
T1
(26)
T7 (25) LU-02799
LU(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7
General Description
LUBRICATION
(1) Plug (17) O-ring (33) O-ring

(2) Gasket (18) Baffle plate (34) Oil drain pipe
(3) Relief valve spring (19) O-ring (35) O-ring
(4) Relief valve (20) Oil strainer (36) Oil level switch
(5) Front oil seal (21) Oil level gauge guide
(6) Oil pump case (22) O-ring Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Inner rotor (23) Oil pan T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Outer rotor (24) Oil level gauge T2: 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(9) Oil pump cover (25) Drain plug T3: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Oil filter (26) Drain plug gasket T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(11) O-ring (27) Cylinder block lower T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(12) Oil pump ASSY (28) Seal T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(13) Oil pressure switch (29) Rocker cover T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(14) Oil filler duct (30) O-ring T8: 44 (4.5, 32.5)
(15) Gasket (31) Oil filter connector T9: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
(16) Oil filler cap (32) Plug T10: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
LU(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8
General Description
LUBRICATION
Turbo model
(16) (30)
T6
(33)
T3
(17)
(18)
(44)
T3 (19)
(31)
(15) (20)
T10
(14)
(35)
(37)
(29)
T3 (36) T4
T3
(13)
(37)
(37)
T3 (9) T2
(22)
(45) (21) T3
(8) (37)
T3 (42)
(7) (11) (23)
(6) (41)
(38) (34)
T9
(12) T3 (40) (26) T3
(5) (39) T3
(4) T3 T5
(2) (43)
(24)
(25)
(3) T8 (32)
(1)
T1
(10) (27)
T7 (28)
LU-02800
LU(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
General Description
LUBRICATION
(1) Plug (20) Baffle plate (39) O-ring

(2) Gasket (21) O-ring (40) O-ring
(3) Relief valve spring (22) Oil strainer (41) Oil level switch
(4) Relief valve (23) Cylinder block lower (42) O-ring
(5) Front oil seal (24) Oil level gauge guide (43) Oil drain pipe
(6) Oil pump case (25) Oil pan (44) Scavenge pump
(7) Inner rotor (26) O-ring (45) Oil cooler hose B
(8) Outer rotor (27) Drain plug gasket
(9) Oil pump cover (28) Drain plug Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(10) Oil filter (29) Gasket T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(11) Oil cooler connector (30) Oil filler cap T2: 5.4 (0.6, 4.0)
(12) Oil cooler pipe (31) Seal T3: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(13) Oil cooler (32) O-ring T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(14) O-ring (33) Gasket T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(15) Oil pump ASSY (34) Oil level gauge T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(16) Oil pressure switch (35) Plug T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(17) Oil filler duct (36) Oil cooler hose A T8: 44 (4.5, 32.5)
(18) O-ring (37) Clip T9: 54 (5.5, 39.8)
(19) Rocker cover (38) Oil cooler pipe stay T10: 69 (7.0, 50.9)
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
battery.
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emitting
ing of fuels when performing work where oil can be
spilled. If the oil spills, wipe it off immediately to pre-
vent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for
environmental protection.
cerning disposal of refuse when disposing of oil.
LU(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10
General Description
LUBRICATION
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18332AA000 OIL FILTER Used for removing and installing black oil filter
WRENCH (outer diameter: 68 mm (2.68 in)).
ST18332AA000
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Oil filter wrench (65/67 mm 14 flutes) Used for removing and installing blue oil filter (outer diameter:
67.4 mm (2.65 in)).
LU(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 11
Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION
2. Oil Pressure System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
FB-30
F/B FUSE NO. 5
(IG)
19
OIL PRESSURE
COMBINATION
WARNING
METER
LIGHT
i 10
8
i1
35
B 36
B 21
*
E2
E 11
: 2.5 L NON-TURBO MODEL : 31

* 2.5 L TURBO MODEL : 45
OIL
PRESSURE
SWITCH
i10 B21 (BLACK) B36
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 28 42
43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
LU-02597
LU(H4SO)-11
12LE_US.book 12
Oil Pressure System

LUBRICATION
B: INSPECTION
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Does the warning light illumi- Go to step 2. Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) nate? the combination
2) Check the warning light in the combination meter. <Ref. to IDI-
meter. 11, INSPECTION,
Combination Meter
System.>
2 CHECK HARNESS CONNECTOR BETWEEN Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the oil Go to step 3.
COMBINATION METER AND OIL PRES- pressure switch.
SURE SWITCH. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. LU(H4SO)-25, Oil
2) Disconnect the connector from oil pressure Pressure Switch.>
switch.
4) Measure the voltage of harness between oil
pressure switch connector and chassis ground.
(E11) No. 1 (+) Chassis ground ():
3 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Is the resistance less than 10 Repair the harness Repair or replace
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ? and connector. the combination
2) Remove the combination meter. NOTE: meter. <Ref. to IDI-
3) Measure the resistance of combination In this case, repair 11, INSPECTION,
meter. the following item: Combination Meter
Terminals Open circuit of System.>
No. 8 No. 19: harness between
combination meter
and oil pressure
switch
Poor contact of
combination meter
connector
Poor contact of
oil pressure switch
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
LU(H4SO)-12
12LE_US.book 13
Engine Oil
LUBRICATION
3. Engine Oil B: REPLACEMENT

A: INSPECTION CAUTION:
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the
CAUTION: under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit-
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the ting smoke or causing a fire.
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit- 1) Open the oil filler cap for quick draining of engine
ting smoke or causing a fire. oil.
1) Park the vehicle on a level surface. 2) Lift up the vehicle.
2) Remove the oil level gauge and wipe away the 3) Remove the service hole cover of the under cov-
oil. er. (Large under cover model)
3) Reinsert the oil level gauge all the way. Be sure
that the oil level gauge is correctly inserted and
properly orientated.
4) Pull out the oil level gauge again, and check the
oil level. If the engine oil level is below L line,
check for oil leakage from engine and add oil to
bring the level up to F line.
5) Start the engine to circulate the oil in engine
room.
6) After turning off the engine, wait a few minutes
for the oil to return to the oil pan before checking LU-02570
the level. 4) Drain engine oil by loosening the drain plug.
NOTE: NOTE:
Just after driving or while the engine is warm, en- Prepare the container for draining of engine oil.
gine oil level shows in the range between the F Models with small and medium size under cov-
line and the notch mark. This is caused by thermal ers
expansion of engine oil.
To prevent overfilling of engine oil, do not add oil
above F line when the engine is cold.
As the oil level gauge is used for daily mainte-
nance, F line and L line is set assuming that the
engine is cold.
(A) (B) (F)
(C) LU-02571
(E) Models with large under cover

(D)
LU-02569
(A) Oil level gauge

(B) Oil filler cap
(C) F line
(D) L line
(E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt) LU-02572
(F) Notch mark
LU(H4SO)-13
12LE_US.book 14
Engine Oil
LUBRICATION
5) After draining the engine oil, tighten the engine 8) Select engine oil of adequate quality and viscos-
oil drain plug. ity and fill it through the oil filler duct to the F line
NOTE: on the oil level gauge. Make sure that the vehicle is
parked on a level surface when checking oil level.
Use a new drain plug gasket.
Recommended oil:
Tightening torque:
Refer to SPECIFICATION for recommended
41.7 Nm (4.3 kgf-m, 30.8 ft-lb)
oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION,
Models with small and medium size under cov-
General Description.>
ers
Engine oil capacity:
Refer to SPECIFICATION for engine oil ca-
pacity. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICA-
TION, General Description.>
9) Close the oil filler cap.
10) Start the engine to circulate the oil in engine
room.
11) After stopping the engine, recheck the oil level.
If necessary, add engine oil up to the F line on oil
level gauge.
LU-02571
Models with large under cover (A) (B) (F)
(C)
(E)
(D)
LU-02569
LU-02572 (A) Oil level gauge

(B) Oil filler cap
6) Install the service hole cover of the under cover.
(Large under cover model) (C) F line
(D) L line
(E) Approx. 1.0 2 (1.1 US qt, 0.9 Imp qt)
(F) Notch mark
LU-02570
LU(H4SO)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
4. Oil Pump 8) Remove the oil pump by using flat tip screwdriv-
er.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
1) Remove the collector cover. (turbo model) Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. the cylinder block and oil pump.
IG-02107 LU-00016
3) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-20, 9) Remove the front oil seal from the oil pump.
REMOVAL, Radiator.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-21,
REMOVAL, Radiator.> B: INSTALLATION
4) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. <Ref. to 1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal.
FU(H4SO)-25, REMOVAL, Crankshaft Position ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-35, REMOVAL, NOTE:
Crankshaft Position Sensor.>
5) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-
16, REMOVAL, Water Pump.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-16, REMOVAL, Water Pump.>
6) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-54, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-62, REMOVAL, Crank
Sprocket.> ST
7) Remove the bolts which install oil pump onto cyl-
inder block.
NOTE:
LU-00021
When disassembling and checking the oil pump,
loosen the relief valve plug before removing the oil 2) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil
pump. pump.
NOTE:
Liquid gasket:
or equivalent
LU-00015
(A)
ME-00165
(A) O-ring
LU(H4SO)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inside of front oil 10) Connect the battery ground terminal.
seal.
IG-02107
ME-00312
C: DISASSEMBLY
4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block.
Remove the screw which secures oil pump cover
CAUTION: and then disassemble oil pump. Inscribe alignment
Be careful not to damage the front oil seal marks on the inner rotor and outer rotor so that they
during installation. can be replaced in their original positions during re-
Make sure the front oil seal lip is not folded. assembly.
NOTE: NOTE:
Align the flat surface of oil pumps inner rotor with Before disassembling the oil pump, remove the re-
that of crankshaft before installation. lief valve.
Use new O-rings.
Do not forget to assemble O-rings.
5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread (E)
shown in figure. (when reusing bolts)
(D)
Liquid gasket:
(C)
equivalent (B)
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
(F) (I)
(G)
(H)
ME-04946
6) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- LU-00020

54, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprocket.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-62, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprock- (A) Front oil seal
et.> (B) Oil pump case
7) Install the water pump. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-16, (C) Inner rotor
INSTALLATION, Water Pump.> <Ref. to (D) Outer rotor
CO(H4DOTC)-17, INSTALLATION, Water Pump.> (E) Oil pump cover
8) Install the crankshaft position sensor. <Ref. to (F) Relief valve
FU(H4SO)-25, INSTALLATION, Crankshaft Posi-
(G) Relief valve spring
tion Sensor.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-35, INSTAL-
LATION, Crankshaft Position Sensor.> (H) Plug
9) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4SO)-21, IN- (I) Gasket
STALLATION, Radiator.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
22, INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
LU(H4SO)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
D: ASSEMBLY 5) Install the oil pump cover.

1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal. Tightening torque:
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER T1: 5.4 Nm (0.6 kgf-m, 4.0 ft-lb)
NOTE: T2: 44 Nm (4.5 kgf-m, 32.5 ft-lb)
T1
(E)
(D)
(C)
(B)
ST
LU-00021 (A)
2) Apply a coat of engine oil to the inner rotor and (F) (G) (I)
outer rotor. (H)
3) Install the inner rotor and outer rotor.
4) Assemble the oil relief valve and install relief
valve spring and plug.
NOTE: T2
Use a new gasket.
LU-02134
(A) Front oil seal

(B) Oil pump case
(C) Inner rotor
(D) Outer rotor
(E) Oil pump cover
(F) Relief valve
(G) Relief valve spring
(H) Plug
(I) Gasket
LU(H4SO)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Oil Pump
LUBRICATION
E: INSPECTION 3. SIDE CLEARANCE

Measure the gap between the inner rotor and the
1. TIP CLEARANCE oil pump case to measure the clearance between
Measure the tip clearance of rotors. If the clearance the inner rotor and the oil pump cover as shown in
is out of standard, replace the rotors as a set. the figure. If clearance is out of standard, replace
Tip clearance between inner and outer rotors: the rotor or the oil pump case.
Standard Side clearance between inner rotor and pump
0.04 0.14 mm (0.0016 0.0055 in) case:
Standard
0.02 0.07 mm (0.0008 0.0028 in)
LU-00023
2. CASE CLEARANCE
LU-00025
Measure the clearance between outer rotor and oil
pump case. If clearance is out of standard, replace 4. OIL RELIEF VALVE
the oil pump case. Check the valve for assembly condition and dam-
Case clearance between outer rotor and pump age, and the relief valve spring for damage and de-
case: terioration. Replace the parts if defective.
Standard Relief valve spring:
0.10 0.175 mm (0.0039 0.0069 in) Free length
73.7 mm (2.902 in)
Installed length
54.7 mm (2.154 in)
Load when installed
93.1 N (9.49 kgf, 20.93 lbf)
5. OIL PUMP CASE
Check for worn shaft hole, clogged oil passage,
worn rotor chamber, cracks and other faults.
LU-00024 6. FRONT OIL SEAL
Check the front oil seal lips for deformation and
hardening, wear.
LU(H4SO)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Oil Pan and Strainer

LUBRICATION
5. Oil Pan and Strainer 2. CYLINDER BLOCK LOWER

1) Remove the collector cover. (turbo model)
A: REMOVAL 2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery.
1. OIL PAN
IG-02107
IG-02107 boot assembly. (non-turbo model)
4) Drain the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE- (A)
PLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>

<Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Ex- (B) (B)
haust Pipe.>
6) Remove the bolts which secure the oil pan to the IN-02668
cylinder block lower. 4) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air in-
take boot assembly and air cleaner case. (non-tur-
bo model)
take boot assembly and throttle body. (non-turbo
model)
LU-02583 (B)
7) Insert an oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-

tween cylinder block lower and oil pan, and remove
the oil pan. (A)
CAUTION:
IN-02669
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tool in place
of oil pan cutter.
LU(H4SO)-19
12LE_US.book 20

LUBRICATION
6) Remove the air intake boot from the throttle CAUTION:

body, and move it to the left side wheel apron. (non- Insert the flat tip screwdriver to the position
turbo model) shown in the figure, and be careful not to dam-
age the mating surface of the cylinder block
and cylinder block lower.
FU-06302
7) Remove the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to

IN(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> ME-04426
8) Support the engine with a lifting device and wire 14) Remove the oil strainer from the cylinder block
ropes. lower.
15) Remove the oil level switch from the cylinder
block lower. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-37, REMOVAL, Oil
Level Switch.>
(G)
LU-00222
9) Lift up the vehicle. (I)
CAUTION: (F)
at the same time.
10) Remove the oil pan. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-19,
(E)
OIL PAN, REMOVAL, Oil Pan and Strainer.>
(H)
11) Remove the engine mounting. <Ref. to (D)
ME(H4SO)-39, REMOVAL, Engine Mounting.> (K)
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-38, REMOVAL, Engine (C) (J)
Mounting.>
12) Remove the bolt which secures the cylinder
(B)
block lower to the cylinder block.
(A)
LU-02598
(A) Oil pan

(B) Oil drain pipe
(C) Cylinder block lower
(D) O-ring
(E) Oil strainer
(F) Baffle plate
LU-02635
(G) Cylinder block
13) Use a flat tip screwdriver through the gap be- (H) O-ring
tween the cylinder block and cylinder block lower to (I) Seal
remove the cylinder block lower.
(J) O-ring
(K) Oil level switch
LU(H4SO)-20
12LE_US.book 21

LUBRICATION
B: INSTALLATION 6) Connect the battery ground terminal.
1. OIL PAN
NOTE:
Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating sur-
face of oil pan and cylinder block.
1) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil
pan, and install the oil pan.
NOTE:
IG-02107
Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) 7) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
or equivalent PLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
2. CYLINDER BLOCK LOWER
NOTE:
Before installing the cylinder block lower, clean the
mating surface of cylinder block lower and cylinder
block.
1) Make sure that the seals (A) are installed se-
curely on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in
the figure below.
NOTE:
LU-02580
Use a new seal.
2) Tighten the bolts to install the oil pan to the cyl-
inder block lower. (A)
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
LU-00052

Tightening torque:
LU-02583
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION,
Front Exhaust Pipe.>
LU(H4SO)-21
12LE_US.book 22

LUBRICATION
3) Install the oil drain pipe to the cylinder block low- 5) Install the oil strainer to the cylinder block lower.
er. NOTE:
(1) Draw a reference line (A) on the oil drain Use new O-rings.
pipe using a marker as shown in the figure.
Tightening torque:
Oil drain pipe protrusion L:
10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
90.0 mm (3.54 in)
6) Install the O-ring to the cylinder block lower.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Install the O-ring with the metal side facing up-
ward.
L
7) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of the
oil pan, and install the cylinder block lower.
(A)
CAUTION:
Be careful not to apply any liquid gasket to the
LU-02608 O-ring (A).
(2) Insert the oil drain pipe up to the reference NOTE:
line (A) using a plastic hammer. Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Be careful not to deform the oil drain pipe. THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
or equivalent
(A)
(A)
LU-02601
LU-02581
(3) Measure the oil drain pipe protrusion L and
check that the value is within the specified (A) O-ring
range.
Oil drain pipe protrusion L:
Standard
89.0 91.0 mm (3.50 3.58 in)
LU-02600
4) Install the oil level switch to the cylinder block

lower. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-38, INSTALLATION, Oil
Level Switch.>
LU(H4SO)-22
12LE_US.book 23

LUBRICATION
8) Tighten the bolts to install the cylinder block low- 11) Lower the vehicle.
er to the cylinder block. CAUTION:
Tightening torque: When lowering the vehicle, lower the lift up de-
T1: 5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) vice and wire ropes at the same time.
T2: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 12) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.
T3: 10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
T4: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
(G)
(I)
LU-00222
(F) 13) Install the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
T2 T3 14) Install the air intake boot assembly. (non-turbo
(E)
T2
model)
(H)
NOTE:
(D)
(K)
(C)
(J)
take boot assembly.
T4
(B) T2
(A)
T1
LU-02599
(A) Oil pan

(B) Oil drain pipe
(C) Cylinder block lower
(D) O-ring IN-03133
(E) Oil strainer Tightening torque:

(F) Baffle plate Clamp (A), (B)
(G) Cylinder block 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
(H) O-ring
(I) Seal
(J) O-ring
(K) Oil level switch
(B)
9) Install the engine mount. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-
40, INSTALLATION, Engine Mounting.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-39, INSTALLATION, Engine Mount- (A)
ing.>
10) Install the oil pan. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-21, OIL IN-02669
PAN, INSTALLATION, Oil Pan and Strainer.>
LU(H4SO)-23
12LE_US.book 24

LUBRICATION
IG-02107
16) Install the collector cover. (turbo model)

17) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT, Engine Oil.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the oil pan, oil strainer and baffle plate
do not have deformation, cracks or damage.
LU(H4SO)-24
12LE_US.book 25
Oil Pressure Switch

LUBRICATION
6. Oil Pressure Switch B: INSTALLATION

1) Apply liquid gasket to the oil pressure switch
A: REMOVAL threads.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
IG-02107

REMOVAL, Generator.> LU-00129
3) Disconnect the terminal from oil pressure switch.
2) Install the oil pressure switch to cylinder block.
Tightening torque:
25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
LU-02615
4) Remove the oil pressure switch.
LU-02616
3) Connect the terminal to the oil pressure switch.
LU-02616
LU-02615
4) Install the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-18, IN-

STALLATION, Generator.>
LU(H4SO)-25
12LE_US.book 26
Oil Pressure Switch

LUBRICATION
IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the oil pressure switch does not have
deformation, cracks or damage.
2) Check the oil pressure switch installation portion
for oil leakage and oil seepage.
LU(H4SO)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Engine Oil Cooler

LUBRICATION
7. Engine Oil Cooler 8) Remove the oil cooler connector (D) and oil cool-
er (E).
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
causing a fire.
NOTE:
Turbo model is equipped with engine oil cooler.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- (G)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> (F)
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- (C)
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- (E)
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> (G)
EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
(J ) (G)
5) Remove the engine oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)- (B)
(G) (H)
36, REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.>
6) Remove the bolt (B) holding the oil cooler pipe (B)
(D) (A)
(A) to the oil pump.
7) Remove the oil cooler pipe (A), oil cooler hose A (B) (I)
(C) and oil cooler hose B (J). LU-02802
(A) Oil cooler pipe

(B) Bolt
(C) Oil cooler hose A
(D) Oil cooler connector
(E) Oil cooler
(F) Gasket
(G) Clip
(H) Oil cooler pipe stay
(I) O-ring
(J) Oil cooler hose B
LU(H4SO)-27
12LE_US.book 28
Engine Oil Cooler

LUBRICATION

T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 54 Nm (5.5 kgf-m, 39.8 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Use new gaskets and O-rings.
After installing, check the engine oil level and re-
plenish it if necessary. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, IN-
SPECTION, Engine Oil.>
After temporarily installing the oil cooler pipe,
tighten the bolts in alphabetical order as shown be-
low.
(G)
(F)
(C)
(B)
(E)
(G)
(C)
(A) (J )
(G) (B) (G)
(H)
LU-02613 T1
(A) (B)
(D) T2
(B) T1
T1 (I)
LU-02803
(A) Oil cooler pipe

(B) Bolt
(C) Oil cooler hose A
(D) Oil cooler connector
(E) Oil cooler
(F) Gasket
(G) Clip
(H) Oil cooler pipe stay
(I) O-ring
(J) Oil cooler hose B
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the engine oil cooler, oil cooler pipe
and oil cooler connector do not have deformation,
cracks or damage.
2) Make sure the oil cooler hoses are not cracked,
damaged or loose.
3) Check the coolant paths for clogs while spraying
compressed air.
4) Make sure the mating surfaces of the cylinder
block do not have damage.
LU(H4SO)-28
12LE_US.book 29
Oil Catch Tank

LUBRICATION
8. Oil Catch Tank

A: REMOVAL
For the removal procedures, refer to IN (H4DOTC)
section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-23, REMOVAL, Oil
Catch Tank.>
B: INSTALLATION
For the installation procedures, refer to IN
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-23, IN-
STALLATION, Oil Catch Tank.>
C: INSPECTION
For the inspection procedures, refer to IN
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-24, IN-
SPECTION, Oil Catch Tank.>
LU(H4SO)-29
12LE_US.book 30
Scavenge Pump
LUBRICATION
9. Scavenge Pump B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Do not start applying liquid gasket from (A) as
If engine oil is spilt onto the exhaust pipe, wipe shown in the following figure.
causing a fire. NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
NOTE:
The scavenge pump is installed on turbo models.
1) Lift up the vehicle. Liquid gasket:
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> or equivalent
3) Remove the union bolt (A) which fixes the oil
pipe (C) to the scavenge pump (E). (A)
4) Remove the bolt (D) which fixes the scavenge
pump (E) to the cylinder head, and remove the
scavenge pump using a flat tip screwdriver.
CAUTION:
Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces
of the cylinder head and scavenge pump.
LU-02602
Tightening torque:
(A)
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B)
(C) T2: 29 Nm (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
T2
(E)
(A)
(D) LU-02577
(B)
(C)
(A) Union bolt
(B) Gasket T1
(C) Oil pipe

(E)
(D) Bolt (D) LU-02578
(E) Scavenge pump
(A) Union bolt
(B) Gasket
(C) Oil pipe
(D) BOLT
(E) Scavenge pump
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the scavenge pump and oil pipe have
no deformation, cracks and other damages.
2) Check that the scavenge pump has no cracks,
LU(H4SO)-30
12LE_US.book 31
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
10.Oil Pipe CAUTION:

In order to prevent damaging the oil inlet pipe,
A: REMOVAL fix the section (a) shown in the figure when
loosing the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid the
NOTE:
part from rotating together while loosening the
Turbo model is equipped with oil pipe.
nut.
1) Remove the collector cover.
(a)
EX-02549
IG-02107
3) Remove the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-

17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> (C)
6) Remove the ground cable from the oil outlet
(B) (A)
pipe.
7) Disconnect the oil outlet hose from the oil outlet
pipe. EX-02550

10) Remove the union bolt (B) securing the oil out-
let pipe (A) from the scavenge pump.
11) Remove the bolts (C) and (D) securing the oil
outlet pipe (A) to the cylinder head, and remove the
oil outlet pipe (A).
(B)
EX-02548
(D)
8) Remove oil inlet pipe B (B) from oil inlet pipe A
(A), and remove the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe (A)
C (C) and oil inlet pipe A (A).
(C)
LU-02585
LU(H4SO)-31
12LE_US.book 32
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
12) Remove the oil inlet pipe B (A) from the oil inlet 18) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
pipe C (C). ME(H4DOTC)-44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
CAUTION: 19) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
In order to avoid damaging the oil inlet pipe C ME(H4DOTC)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
(C), fix the section (a) shown in the figure so 20) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to
that it will not rotate together when loosening ME(H4DOTC)-52, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A). 21) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-61, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.>
(a)
LU-02586
13) Remove the bolt (B) securing the oil inlet pipe B CO-02908
(A) to the cylinder head and stay, and remove the
oil inlet pipe B (A). 23) Remove the oil pipe.
14) Remove the union bolt (D) securing the oil inlet (B) (A)
pipe C (C) to the cylinder head, and remove the oil
(E )
inlet pipe C (C). (C) (E )
(E )
(B)
(A) (C)
(D)
(B)
(B)
(E )
(D)
(A)
(E )
ME-05030
(A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion)

(B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion)
LU-02587
(C) Oil pipe RH
15) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to (D) Oil pipe LH
FU(H4DOTC)-18, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.>
(E) Gasket
16) Remove the radiator main fan and radiator sub
fan. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radia-
tor Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
17) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
42, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
LU(H4SO)-32
12LE_US.book 33
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
B: INSTALLATION 3) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH.

1) Inspect the union bolt with filter. <Ref. to Tightening torque:
LU(H4SO)-35, INSPECTING UNION BOLT WITH 5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
FILTER, INSPECTION, Oil Pipe.>
2) Install the oil pipe.
NOTE:
Be careful of the install location of the union bolt;
the location will differ depending on the presence of
filter.
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
CO-02908
T2: 29 Nm (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
(B) (A)
T1 T2 ME(H4DOTC)-61, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
T2
(E ) et.>
(C) (E )
(E ) 5) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-55,
ME(H4DOTC)-49, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt
Cover.>
7) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
44, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
8) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-42,
INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
9) Install the radiator main fan and the radiator sub
(B) fan. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION,
T2
(E )
Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub
(D)
Fan and Fan Motor.>
10) Install the intake manifold. <Ref. to
(A)
FU(H4DOTC)-22, INSTALLATION, Intake Mani-
fold.>
(E ) 11) Install the oil inlet pipe C (C) to the cylinder
T2
LU-02710 head with the union bolt (D).
(A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion) NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
(C) Oil pipe RH Tightening torque:
(D) Oil pipe LH 29 Nm (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
(E) Gasket 12) Temporarily install the oil inlet pipe B (A) to the
oil inlet pipe C (C).
13) Install the oil inlet pipe B (A) to the cylinder
head with the bolt (B).
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
LU(H4SO)-33
12LE_US.book 34
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
14) Tighten the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A). 17) Tighten the union bolt (B) of the oil outlet pipe
CAUTION: (A).
In order to avoid damaging the oil inlet pipe C Tightening torque:
(C), fix the section (a) shown in the figure so 29 Nm (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
that it will not rotate together when tightening
the flare nut of the oil inlet pipe B (A). (B)
(D)
(A)
(a)
LU-02586
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(B)
A
(C)
(A) (C)
(D)
LU-02585

19) Install the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe (C)
(B)
and oil inlet pipe A (A), and install oil inlet pipe B (B)
to oil inlet pipe A (A).
CAUTION:
fix the section (a) shown in the figure when
tightening the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid
the part from rotating together while tightening
the nut.
LU-02587
15) Temporarily install the oil outlet pipe (A) to the

scavenge pump using the union bolt (B).
16) Secure the oil outlet pipe (A) to the cylinder (a)
head and stay with bolts (C) and (D).
Tightening torque: EX-02549
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
LU(H4SO)-34
12LE_US.book 35
Oil Pipe
LUBRICATION
Tightening torque: C: INSPECTION

T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb) 1. INSPECTING UNION BOLT WITH FILTER
Check the filter part of union bolt for clogging or
damage, and if defective, replace the union bolt
T1 with filter with the new part.
(C)
(B) (A)
(E )
(C) (E )
(E )
(B) T2 (A)
EX-02555
20) Attach the ground cable to the oil outlet pipe.

Tightening torque:
7 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.2 ft-lb)
21) Connect the oil outlet hose to the oil outlet pipe.
(B)
(E )
(D)
(A)
(E )
ME-05030
EX-02548
(C) Oil pipe RH
24) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- (D) Oil pipe LH
18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.> (E) Gasket
1) Check that the oil pipe and union bolt have no
2) Check that there are no oil leaks or oil oozing
from the oil pipe attachment section.
IG-02107
26) Install the collector cover.
LU(H4SO)-35
12LE_US.book 36
Engine Oil Filter

LUBRICATION
11.Engine Oil Filter B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
Do not tighten excessively, or oil may leak.
CAUTION: 1) Clean the oil filter installation surface on the cyl-
If the engine oil is spilt over exhaust pipe or the inder block or engine oil cooler.
under cover, wipe it off with cloth to avoid emit- 2) Obtain a new oil filter and apply a thin coat of en-
ting smoke or causing a fire. gine oil to the seal rubber.
1) Lift up the vehicle. 3) Install the oil filter turning it by hand, being care-
2) Remove the service hole cover of under cover. ful not to damage the seal rubber of the oil filter.
Medium under cover model Tighten the oil filter (Black) with an outer diame-
ter of 68 mm (2.68 in) (approx. 1 rotation) after the
seal rubber of the oil filter comes in contact with cyl-
inder block. When using a torque wrench, tighten to
14 Nm (1.4 kgf-m, 10.3 ft-lb).
Tighten the oil filter (Blue) with an outer diameter
of 67.4 mm (2.65 in) (approx. 7/8 rotation) after the
seal rubber of the oil filter comes in contact with cyl-
inder block. When using a torque wrench, tighten to
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb).
LU-02575
4) Return the service hole cover to its original posi-
tion.
Models with large under cover 5) Lower the vehicle.
6) After installing, check the engine oil level and re-
C: INSPECTION
1) After installing the oil filter, run the engine and
make sure that no oil is leaking around seal rubber.
NOTE:
The filter element and filter case are permanently
LU-02570 jointed; therefore, interior cleaning is not neces-
3) Remove the oil filter. sary.
Black oil filter 2) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-
Remove it using the ST. 13, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
ST 18332AA000 OIL FILTER WRENCH (OUT-
ER DIAMETER: 68 MM (2.68
IN) FOR OIL FILTER)
Blue oil filter
Remove it using the general tool (65/67 mm 14
flutes).
LU-02576
LU(H4SO)-36
12LE_US.book 37
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
12.Oil Level Switch 6) Remove the clip holding the oil level switch har-
ness.
A: REMOVAL Turbo model
IG-02107

4) Drain the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
5) Disconnect the connector of the oil level switch
from the engine harness.
LU-02619
Non-turbo model
LU-02617
LU-02714
LU(H4SO)-37
12LE_US.book 38
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
7) Remove the oil level switch from the cylinder 2) Hold the oil level switch harness with the clip.
block lower. Turbo model
LU-02618
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the oil level switch to the cylinder block
lower.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Apply a coat of engine oil to the O-rings.
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
LU-02619
Non-turbo model
LU-02618
LU-02715
LU(H4SO)-38
12LE_US.book 39
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
3) Connect the connector of the oil level switch to

the engine harness.
LU-02617

6) Refill the engine oil. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, RE-
7) Check the engine oil level. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-
13, INSPECTION, Engine Oil.>
IG-02107
LU(H4SO)-39
12LE_US.book 40
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
C: WIRING DIAGRAM
FB-30 FB-17
F/B FUSE NO. 5 F/B FUSE NO. 7
(IG) (B) : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
*1 AMONG 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 AND 6
J/C : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
2 2
*2 AMONG 7, 8, 9, 10, 11 AND 12
* * *3 : NON-TURBO MODEL : 10
i82 TURBO MODEL : 1
19
20 COMBINATION
I/F POWER SUPPLY METER
LOW CIRCUIT
ENGINE OIL i10
WARNING LIGHT
DRIVE CIRCUIT MICRO COMPUTER
CAN TRANSCEIVER &

RECEIVER
32
33
39
*1
28
17
J/C
i 98
B 1 3 6 ECM
*1
26
B 21
OIL LEVEL SWITCH
3
*
E2
E 130
B21
i82 B136 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
i10
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
i98 1 2 3 4 5 6
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
7 8 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
LU-02653
LU(H4SO)-40
12LE_US.book 41
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
D: INSPECTION
1. INSPECTION WHEN LOW ENGINE OIL WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL. Is engine oil level normal? Go to step 2. Replace engine oil
or refill, and check
again while the oil
level is normal con-
dition. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>
To turn off the low
engine oil warning
light, install the
spare fuse at the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in the
main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the low
engine oil warning
light turns off.
Remove the spare
fuse installed to fin-
ish.
NOTE:
The engine oil level
switch is normal, if
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
2 CHECK LAN SYSTEM. Has a DTC of the LAN system Perform the diag- Go to step 3.
been input? nosis according to
DTC.
LU(H4SO)-41
12LE_US.book 42
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK OIL LEVEL SWITCH CIRCUIT. Is the Oil level switch signal To turn off the low Go to step 4.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF). displayed in Subaru Select engine oil warning
2) Read the current data for engine in the Sub- Monitor HIGH? light, install the
aru Select Monitor to confirm the item for Oil spare fuse at the
level switch. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, delivery (test)
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR- mode fuse in the
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select main fuse box.
Monitor.> <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Then turn the igni-
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR- tion switch to ON
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select (engine off) again,
Monitor.> to confirm the low
engine oil warning
light turns off.
Remove the spare
ish.
NOTE:
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
4 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Is combination meter OK? Go to step 5. Replace the com-
Perform the self-diagnosis of combination bination meter.
meter to check if there are any faults in the com- <Ref. to IDI-21,
bination meter. <Ref. to IDI-6, OPERATION, REMOVAL, Com-
Combination Meter System.> bination Meter.>
5 CHECK SECURE CONNECTION OF CON- Is there any insecure connec- Remedy the con- Go to step 6.
NECTOR BETWEEN ENGINE HARNESS tion? nection condition.
AND OIL LEVEL SWITCH. Then, to turn off
the low engine oil
warning light,
install the spare
fuse at the delivery
(test) mode fuse in
the main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the low
engine oil warning
light turns off.
Remove the spare
ish.
NOTE:
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
LU(H4SO)-42
12LE_US.book 43
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK OIL LEVEL SWITCH. Is the Oil level switch signal Replace the oil Go to step 7.
1) Deliberately short circuits by connecting the displayed in Subaru Select level switch. <Ref.
engine harness connector terminal and chassis Monitor HIGH? to LU(H4SO)-37,
ground. REMOVAL, Oil
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF). Level Switch.>
3) Read the current data for engine in the Sub-
aru Select Monitor to confirm the item for Oil
level switch. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR-
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select
Monitor.> <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NOR-
MAL MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select
Monitor.>
(E130) No. 1 Chassis ground:
NECTOR BETWEEN BULKHEAD HARNESS tion? nection condition.
AND ENGINE HARNESS. Then, to turn off
the low engine oil
warning light,
install the spare
(test) mode fuse in
the main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the low
engine oil warning
light turns off.
Remove the spare
ish.
NOTE:
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
8 CHECK ENGINE HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 9. Repair or replace
1) Disconnect the connector on the oil level the open circuit of
switch side for the engine harness. engine harness.
2) Disconnect the connector on the bulkhead
harness side for the engine harness.
3) Measure the resistance between connector
terminals.
Non-turbo model
(E2) No. 10 (E130) No. 1:
Turbo model
(E2) No. 1 (E130) No. 1:
LU(H4SO)-43
12LE_US.book 44
Oil Level Switch

LUBRICATION
Step Check Yes No

NECTOR BETWEEN ENGINE CONTROL tion? nection condition.
MODULE (ECM) AND BULKHEAD HAR- Then, to turn off
NESS. the low engine oil
Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- warning light,
66, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> install the spare
(test) mode fuse in
the main fuse box.
Then turn the igni-
tion switch to ON
(engine off) again,
to confirm the low
engine oil warning
light turns off.
Remove the spare
ish.
NOTE:
the low engine oil
level warning light
turns off with the
delivery (test)
mode fuse in-
stalled.
10 CHECK BULKHEAD HARNESS. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the Repair or replace
1) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to engine control the open circuit of
EI-66, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> module (ECM). the bulkhead har-
2) Disconnect the engine control module <Ref. to ness.
(ECM) side connector for the bulkhead har- FU(H4SO)-46,
ness. REMOVAL, Engine
3) Disconnect the engine harness connectors Control Module
from the bulkhead harness. (ECM).> <Ref. to
4) Measure the resistance between connector FU(H4DOTC)-58,
terminals. REMOVAL, Engine
Connector & terminal Control Module
Non-turbo model (ECM).>
(B136) No. 26 (B21) No. 10:
Turbo model
(B136) No. 26 (B21) No. 1:
1) Check that the oil level switch does not have deformation, cracks, or damage.
2) Check the oil level switch installation part for oil leakage and oil seepage.
LU(H4SO)-44
12LE_US.book 45
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

LUBRICATION
13.Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Before performing diagnostics, make sure that the engine oil level is correct and no oil leakage exists.
a. Oil pressure switch failure
Cracked diaphragm or oil leakage within switch Replace.
Broken spring or seized contacts Replace.
b. Low oil pressure
Clogging of oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil by-pass valve in oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace.
Warning light remains ON. Clogged oil passage Clean.
Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump
Replace.
rotor
Clogged oil strainer or broken pipe Clean or replace.
c. No oil pressure
Insufficient engine oil (degradation, etc.) Replace.
Broken pipe of oil strainer Replace.
Stuck oil pump rotor Replace.
a. Defective combination meter Replace.
Warning light does not illu-
b. Poor contact of switch contact points Replace.
minate.
c. Disconnection of wiring Repair.
a. Defective terminal contact Repair.
b. Defective wiring harness Repair.
c. Oil pressure switch failure
Cracked diaphragm or oil leakage within switch Replace.
Broken spring or seized contacts Replace.
d. Low oil pressure
Warning light flickers
momentarily. Clogging of oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil by-pass valve in oil filter Replace.
Malfunction of oil relief valve in oil pump Clean or replace.
Clogged oil passage Clean.
Excessive tip clearance and side clearance of oil pump
Replace.
rotor
Clogged oil strainer or broken pipe Clean or replace.
LU(H4SO)-45
12LE_US.book 46
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General

LUBRICATION
LU(H4SO)-46
12LE_US.book 1
SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS
SP(H4SO)
Page
2. Accelerator Pedal .......................................................................................4
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Accelerator pedal Stroke At pedal pad 54 59 mm (2.13 2.32 in)
B: COMPONENT
(2)
(1)
(4)
(3)
SP-02085
(1) Accelerator pedal ASSY (3) Accelerator plate Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Clip (4) Accelerator stopper T: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
sion before removal or installation.
Keep the parts in order and protect them from
dust and dirt.
Before removal or installation, be sure to clarify
the failure. Avoid unnecessary removal, installa-
tion, disassembly and replacement.
points.
the battery.
SP(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for inspecting the accelerator pedal.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring voltage.
SP(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
Accelerator Pedal
2. Accelerator Pedal D: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL SEN-
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. SOR AREA (METHOD WITH CIRCUIT
TESTER)
1) Remove the glove box lid assembly, glove box
lower cover, instrument panel side cover RH and
glove box back panel. <Ref. to EI-66, REMOVAL,
Glove Box.>
3) Measure the voltage between ECM connector
terminals.
IG-02107
2) Disconnect the connector (A).

3) Remove the nut (B) securing accelerator pedal
assembly and remove the accelerator pedal as-
sembly.
(A)
FU-04956
Main sensor side
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
V
SP-02078
(B)
Sub sensor side
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20
SP-02086 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque: V
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) SP-02079
C: DISASSEMBLY (A) To ECM connector

NOTE:
The accelerator pedal cannot be disassembled.
SP(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
Accelerator Pedal
Accelerator Accelerator
pedal sensor pedal
Not
depressed 1V
Main (Full closed) 23 (+) and 29
()
Depressed
3.5 V
(Full opened)
Not
depressed 1V
Sub (Full closed) 31 (+) and 30
()
Depressed
3.5 V
(Full opened)

2. CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL SEN-
SOR AREA (METHOD WITH SUBARU SE-
LECT MONITOR)
2) Read the accelerator pedal opening angle signal
and voltage of accelerator pedal sensor using Sub-
aru Select Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
MODE), OPERATION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, READ CURRENT
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.> <Ref. to
EN(H6DO)(diag)-35, READ CURRENT DATA
FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE), OPERATION,
Subaru Select Monitor.>
Accelerator pedal Accelerator pedal
Standard
sensor opening angle signal
0.0% 1V
Main
100.0% 3.5 V
0.0% 1V
Sub
100.0% 3.5 V
1) Check that the accelerator pedal does not have
deformation, cracks or damage.
2) Check for smooth operation when the accelera-
tor pedal is depressed.
3) Check if the accelerator pedal returns to its orig-
inal position smoothly when the pedal is released.
SP(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
Accelerator Pedal
SP(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 1
IGNITION
IG(H4SO)
Page
2. Spark Plug ..................................................................................................3
3. Ignition Coil ................................................................................................5
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
IGNITION
A: SPECIFICATION
Item Specifications
Type FK 0376
Ignition coil Ignition system Independent ignition coil
Manufacturer Diamond Electric
Manufacturer and type NGK: SIFR6A11
Thread size (diameter, pitch, length) mm 14, 1.25, 19
Spark plug
Spark plug gap mm (in) Standard 1.0 1.1 (0.039 0.043)
Electrode Iridium
B: COMPONENT
T1
T2
(1)
(2)
T2 T1
(1)
(2)
IG-02103
(1) Spark plug (2) Ignition coil Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
T1: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
T2: 21 (2.1, 15.5)
C: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
IG(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
Spark Plug
IGNITION
2. Spark Plug 3) Remove the bolt (B), and remove the ignition
coil.
A: REMOVAL
Spark plug:
(B) (B)
Refer to SPECIFICATION for the spark
plug. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-2, SPECIFICATION,
General Description.>
1. RH SIDE (A)
(A)
IG-02154
4) Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket.

B: INSTALLATION
1. RH SIDE
Tightening torque (Spark plug):
IG-02107 21 Nm (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
2) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
IN(H4SO)-6, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.> 9 Nm (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from the ignition
coil. 2. LH SIDE
4) Remove the bolt (B), and remove the ignition Install in the reverse order of removal.
coil. Tightening torque (Spark plug):
21 Nm (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
(B) (B) Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
9 Nm (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the spark plug for abnormalities. If defec-
tive, replace the spark plug.
(A)
(A)
(C)
IG-02153

2. LH SIDE
(A)
(B) IG-02094
(A) Terminal damage

(B) Crack or damage in insulator
(C) Damaged gasket
2) Check the spark plug electrode and condition of

IG-02107 the insulator. If abnormal, check and repair the
cause and replace the spark plug.
2) Disconnect the connector (A) from the ignition
coil.
IG(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
Spark Plug
IGNITION
(1) Normal: (4) Overheating:

Brown to grayish-tan deposits and slight elec- White or light gray insulator with black or brown
trode wear indicate correct spark plug heat spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate en-
range. gine overheating, wrong selection of fuel, or
loose spark plugs.
IG-00011
IG-00014
(2) Carbon fouled:
Dry fluffy carbon deposits on insulator and elec- 3) Using a nylon brush, etc., clean and remove the
trode are mostly caused by slow speed driving carbon or oxide deposits from the spark plug. If de-
in the city, weak ignition, too rich fuel mixture, posits are too stubborn, replace the spark plugs.
etc. After cleaning the spark plugs, check the spark
plug gap L using a gap gauge. If it is not within the
standard, replace the spark plug.
NOTE:
Never use a plug cleaner.
Do not use a metal brush as it may damage the
electrode area.
Spark plug gap L:
Standard
1.0 1.1 mm (0.039 0.043 in)
IG-00012
(3) Oil fouled:

Wet black deposits show oil entrance into com-
bustion chamber through worn piston rings or L
increased clearance between valve guides and
valve stems.
IG-02108
IG-00013
IG(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
Ignition Coil
IGNITION
3. Ignition Coil
A: REMOVAL
Direct ignition type is adopted. Refer to Spark
Plug for removal procedure. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3,
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
9 Nm (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedure, refer to Diagnostics for
Engine Starting Failure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
70, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting Failure.>
IG(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
Ignition Coil
IGNITION
IG(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 1
STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS
SC(H4SO)
Page
2. Starter ........................................................................................................9
3. Generator .................................................................................................18
4. Battery ......................................................................................................28
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
1. 2.5 L MODEL
Item Specifications
Vehicle model CVT MT
Type Reduction type
Model 428000-4790 428000-4780
Manufacturer DENSO
Voltage and output 12 V 1.6 kW
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise (when observed from pinion)
Number of pinion teeth 9
Voltage 11 V
Current 90 A or less
No-load characteristics
Starter Rotating
1,900 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 8V
Current 370 A
Load characteristics Torque 11.1 Nm (1.1 kgf-m, 8.2 ft-lb) or more
Rotating
910 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 3V
Lock characteristics Current 750 A or less
Torque 15.5 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.4 ft-lb) or more
Rotating-field three-phase type, voltage regulator built-in type, with load
Type
response control system
Model A3TG6191
Manufacturer Mitsubishi Electric
Voltage and output 12 V 110 A
Polarity on ground side Negative
Direction of rotation Clockwise (when observed from pulley side)
Stator connection 3-phase type
Generator
1,500 rpm 50 A or more
Output current 2,500 rpm 91 A or more
Regulated voltage 14.1 14.8 V [20C (68F)]
Rotor slip ring outer Standard 22.7 mm (0.894 in)
diameter Limit 22.1 mm (0.870 in)
Standard 18.5 mm (0.728 in)
Brush length
Limit 5.0 mm (0.197 in)
Battery Type and capacity 12 V 52 AH (75D 23R)
SC(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
2. 3.6 L MODEL
Item Specifications
Vehicle model AT
Type Reduction type
Model 428000-5250
Manufacturer DENSO
Voltage and output 12 V 1.6 kW
Direction of rotation Counterclockwise (when observed from pinion)
Number of pinion teeth 9
Voltage 11 V
Current 90 A or less
No-load characteristics
Starter Rotating
1,550 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 8V
Current 370 A
Load characteristics Torque 12.8 Nm (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 ft-lb) or more
Rotating
800 rpm or more
speed
Voltage 3V
Lock characteristics Current 750 A or less
Torque 19.0 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) or more
Rotating-field three-phase type, voltage regulator built-in type, with load
Type
response control system
Model A3TJ3591
Manufacturer Mitsubishi Electric
Voltage and output 12 V 130 A
Polarity on ground side Negative
Direction of rotation Clockwise (when observed from pulley side)
Stator connection 3-phase type
Generator
Output current 2,500 rpm 108 A or more
Regulated voltage 14.1 14.8 V [20C (68F)]
Rotor slip ring outer Standard 22.7 mm (0.894 in)
diameter Limit 22.1 mm (0.870 in)
Standard 22.5 mm (0.886 in)
Brush length
Limit 5.0 mm (0.197 in)
Battery Type and capacity 12 V 52 AH (75D 23R)
SC(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. STARTER
T4
(2)
(5)
(4)
(3)
T2
T3
(11)
(10) T1
(13)
(9)
(12)
(8)
(1)
(6)
(7)
SC-02441
(1) Starter housing (8) Starter plate Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Magnet switch ASSY (9) Yoke T1: 1.4 (0.1, 1.0)
(3) Shift lever (10) Armature T2: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(4) Starter seal (11) Brush holder ASSY T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(5) Overrunning clutch ASSY (12) Drain duct T4: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(6) Washer (13) Starter cover
(7) Planetary gear
SC(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5
General Description
2. GENERATOR
2.5 L model
(6) (7)
(5)
(4)
(3)
T1
(2)
(1)
T1
T2
(13)
(12)
(11)
(10)
(9)
(8)
SC-02121
(1) Pulley nut (7) Bearing (13) Terminal B

(2) Pulley (8) Stator coil
(3) Front cover (9) IC regulator Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Ball bearing (10) Brush T1: 4.7 (0.5, 3.5)
(5) Bearing retainer (11) Rectifier T2: 108 (11.0, 79.8)
(6) Rotor (12) Rear cover
SC(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
3.6 L model
(7) (8)
(6)
(5)
(4)
(3)
T1
(2)
(1)
T5
T2
T3
(14)
T2
(13)
T4 (12)
(11)
(10)
T4
(9)
SC-02298
(1) Pulley nut (8) Bearing Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Pulley (9) Stator coil T1: 4.4 (0.4, 3.2)
(3) Front cover (10) IC regulator T2: 3.9 (0.4, 2.9)
(4) Ball bearing (11) Brush T3: 117.5 (12.0, 86.7)
(5) Bearing retainer (12) Rectifier T4: 2 (0.2, 1.5)
(6) Spacer (13) Rear cover T5: 8.9 (0.9, 6.6)
(7) Rotor (14) Terminal B
SC(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7
General Description
3. GENERATOR BRACKET
2.5 L model
T2 (5)
(6)
(4)
T4
(3)
(7)
T5
T3
T4
(2)
(8) A
(1)
T5
T6
T7 (9) T7
(10)
T1
T7
T4
SC-02439
(1) V-belt cover bracket (6) Generator plate Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Collector cover bracket (7) A/C compressor bracket T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) V-belt tensioner ASSY (8) Idler pulley T2: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(4) Power steering pump bracket (9) Stopper rod RH T3: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(5) Generator (10) Stopper rod LH T4: 22 (2.2, 16.2)
T5: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
T6: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T7: 36 (3.7, 26.6)
SC(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8
General Description
3.6 L model
T2
(1)
(2)
(3)
T3
T1
T3
SC-02368
(1) Generator (3) Collector cover bracket Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Power steering pump bracket T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
T2: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
T3: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
C: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Circuit tester Used for measuring resistance, voltage and current.
SC(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Starter
2. Starter 5) Remove the air intake boot from the throttle

body, and move it to the left side wheel apron. (2.5
A: REMOVAL L non-turbo model)
FU-06302
IG-02107 6) Loosen the clamp (A) which connects the air in-
2) Remove the cover (A) and clip (B) from air intake take boot assembly. (3.6 L model)
boot assembly. (2.5 L non-turbo model) 7) Loosen the bolt (B) which secures the air intake
boot assembly to the collector cover bracket. (3.6 L
model)
(A)
(A)
(B) (B)
IN-02668

take boot assembly and air cleaner case. (2.5 L
non-turbo model)
take boot assembly and throttle body. (2.5 L non- (B)
turbo model)
(A)
(B)
FU-06646
(A) 8) Remove the air intake boot assembly, and move

it to the left side wheel apron. (3.6 L model)
IN-02669
FU-06459
9) Remove the intercooler. (turbo model) <Ref. to

IN(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
SC(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10
Starter
10) Disconnect the connector (B) and terminal (A) Tightening torque:
from starter. 10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
SC-00006 SC-02474
11) Remove the starter from transmission. 2.5 L non-turbo model

NOTE: NOTE:
For the MT model, a bolt is used in place (A). Align the clamp hole with the protrusion of the air in-
(A)
take boot assembly.
SC-02363
IN-03133
B: INSTALLATION
Install in the reverse order of removal. Tightening torque:
Clamp (A), (B)
NOTE: 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
For the MT model, a bolt is used in place (A).
Tightening torque:
50 Nm (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
(A)
IN-02669
SC-02363
SC(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 11
Starter
3.6 L model 2) Remove the nuts fastening the magnet switch

assembly to the starter housing, then remove the
Tightening torque:
magnet switch assembly.
Clamp (A)
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
Bolt (B)
6.5 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.8 ft-lb)
(A)
SC-02129
3) Remove the starter seal.
(B)
(A)
SC-02130
4) Remove the through bolts on both sides, and re-

move the starter housing.
FU-06646
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the nut which holds terminal M (A) of
the magnet switch assembly, then disconnect the
harness from the terminal.
(A) SC-02131
SC-02128
SC-02132
SC(H4SO)-11
12LE_US.book 12
Starter
5) Remove the shift lever. 8) Remove the planetary gear (A) and washer (B)
from internal gear.
(A)
(A) (B)
(A)
SC-02133
SC-02443
6) Remove the overrunning clutch assembly from
the yoke. 9) Remove the screws, and remove the starter cov-
er from the brush holder assembly.
NOTE:
Separate the starter cover by pressing the brush
holder assembly using the screws so that the as-
sembly stays onto the armature side.
SC-02142
SC-02136
7) Remove the starter plate.
SC-02143
SC-02442
SC(H4SO)-12
12LE_US.book 13
Starter
10) Remove the brush holder assembly from the 2) Install the brush holder assembly to the arma-
armature. ture.
NOTE: NOTE:
Spread the brush with your fingers, being careful Spread the brush with your fingers, being careful
not to damage the brush. not to damage the brush.
SC-02144 SC-02144
11) Remove the armature from the yoke. 3) Install the starter cover, and secure it to the
brush holder assembly with the screws.
SC-02145
SC-02142
D: ASSEMBLY
4) Assemble the planetary gear (A) and washer (B)
1) Install the armature to the yoke. to the internal gear.
(1) Apply grease to the planetary gear installa-
tion position.
Grease:
DENSO HL50
(2) Install the planetary gear to the pin.
(3) Apply grease to the planetary gear, internal
gear, washer, and upper part of the pin.
NOTE:
SC-02145 Apply grease so that it contacts each gear.
Be careful not to allow dirt to get in.
Grease:
DENSO HL50
(A)
(A) (B)
(A)
SC-02443
SC(H4SO)-13
12LE_US.book 14
Starter
(4) Install the starter plate. 7) Install the starter housing, and tighten through
bolts on both sides.
Tightening torque:
6 Nm (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
SC-02442
5) Assemble the overrunning clutch assembly to

the yoke.
SC-02132
SC-02131
8) Install the starter seal.
SC-02136
6) Install the shift lever.

SC-02130
NOTE:
Apply grease to the contact portion of the shift le-
ver.
Grease:
DENSO HL50
SC-02133
SC(H4SO)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Starter
9) Install the magnet switch assembly to the starter E: INSPECTION

housing, and tighten the nuts.
1. SWITCH ASSEMBLY
NOTE:
Apply grease to the shift lever installation position. Using a circuit tester (set to ohm), check that
there is continuity between terminals S and M, and
Grease: between terminal S and ground.
DENSO HL50 Also check to be sure there is no continuity be-
Tightening torque: tween terminals M and B.
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb) Terminal/Resistance:
S M/1 or less
S Ground/1 or less
M B/1 M or more
(C)
SC-02129
(A)
10) Install the harness to the terminal M (A) of the (B)
magnet switch assembly, and tighten the nut.
SC-00181
Tightening torque:
10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) (A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M
(C) Terminal B
2. SWITCH ASSEMBLY OPERATION

(A)
NOTE:
Perform each test in a short period of time (3 5
sec).
1) Suction test
Check that the pinion gear comes flying out when
SC-02128 the harness is disconnected from terminal M and
connected as shown in the figure.
(B)
(A)
SC-02086
(A) Terminal S
(B) Terminal M
SC(H4SO)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Starter
2) Holding test For these performance tests, use the circuit shown
Check that the pinion gear remains flying out after in figure.
the cable is disconnected from terminal M.
(B) B
S (B) (A)
M
(C) +
12V
V A
(A)
SC-00077
SC-02087
(A) Variable resistance
(A) Terminal S (B) Magnetic switch
(B) Terminal M (C) Starter body
3) Returning test 1) No-load test

With terminal S connected to the positive terminal, Adjust the variable resistance with the switch on
and terminal M and starter body connected to the until the voltage is 11 V, and read the value dis-
battery ground terminal to suction the main contact played on the ammeter to measure rotating speed.
point, check that the pinion gear returns to its orig- Compare these values with the standard.
inal position when terminal S is disconnected.
No-load test (standard):
(B) Voltage/Current
Max. 11 V/90 A or less
Rotating speed
2.5 L model
1,900 rpm or more
3.6 L model
(A) 1,550 rpm or more
2) Load test
SC-02088 Apply the specified braking torque to starter. The
condition is normal if the current draw and rotating
(A) Terminal S
speed are within standard.
(B) Terminal M
Load test (standard):
3. PERFORMANCE TEST Voltage/Load
The starter should be submitted to performance 2.5 L model
tests whenever it has been overhauled, to assure 8 V/11.1 Nm (1.1 kgf-m, 8.2 ft-lb) or more
its satisfactory performance when installed on the 3.6 L model
engine. 8 V/12.8 Nm (1.3 kgf-m, 9.4 ft-lb) or more
Three performance tests, no-load test, load test,
and lock test, are presented here; however, if the Current/Rotating speed
load test and lock test cannot be performed, carry 2.5 L model
out at least the no-load test. 370 A/910 rpm or more
3.6 L model
370 A/800 rpm or more
SC(H4SO)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Starter
3) Lock test
With the starter stalled, or not rotating, measure the
torque developed and current draw when the volt-
age is adjusted to standard voltage.
Lock test (standard):
Voltage/Current
3 V/750 A or less
Torque
2.5 L model
15.5 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.4 ft-lb) or more
3.6 L model
19.0 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) or more
Check that the starter does not have deformation,
cracks and any other damage.
SC(H4SO)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Generator
3. Generator B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Tightening torque:
T1: 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
T2: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T1 T2
IG-02107
2) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-43, V- SC-02374

BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-42, V-BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.> C: DISASSEMBLY
<Ref. to ME(H6DO)-51, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
3) Disconnect the connector and terminal from 1. 2.5 L MODEL
generator. 1) Remove the four through-bolts.
SC-02372 SC-00078
4) Remove the collector cover bracket or v-belt 2) Use a drier to heat the rear cover (A) portion to
cover bracket. 50C (122F).
(A)
SC-02373 SC-00079
5) Remove the generator from the bracket.
SC-02375
SC(H4SO)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Generator
3) Insert the end of a flat tip screwdriver into the 5) Use the following procedures to remove the ball
gap between stator core and front cover. Pry them bearings.
apart to disassemble. (1) Remove the bolt, and then detach the bear-
ing retainer.
(A)
(A)
SC-00080
SC-00081
(A) Screwdriver
(2) Firmly attach an appropriate tool (such as a
4) Using a vise, support the rotor and remove the correct size socket wrench) to the bearing inner
pulley nut, then remove the rotor from the front cov- race.
er.
CAUTION:
When holding the rotor with a vise, place alumi-
num plates or wooden pieces on the vise jaws
to prevent rotor from damage.
SC-00082
(3) Use the press to push the ball bearings out

from the front cover.
6) Using the bearing puller, remove the bearings
from the rotor.
SC-00035
(A)
(B)
(C) SC-00046
(D)
SC-00036
(A) Front cover

(B) Pulley
(C) Pulley nut
(D) Rotor
SC(H4SO)-19
12LE_US.book 20
Generator
7) Disconnect the connection between the rectifier 9) Use the following procedures to remove the
and stator coil, then remove the stator coil. brush.
CAUTION: (1) Remove the cover A.
The rectifier is easily damaged by heat. Do not
allow a 180 270 W soldering iron to contact
(A)
the terminals for 5 seconds or more at a time.
SC-00086
(A) Cover A
SC-00083 (2) Remove the cover B.

8) Use the following procedures to remove the IC
(A)
regulator.
(1) Remove the screws which secure the IC
regulator to the rear cover.
SC-00087
(A) Cover B
(3) Disconnect the connection and remove the

SC-00084
brush.
(2) Disconnect the connection between the IC
regulator and rectifier, then remove the IC reg-
ulator.
SC-00088
10) Remove the rectifier as follows.

(1) Remove the bolts which secure the rectifier.
SC-00085
SC-00089
SC(H4SO)-20
12LE_US.book 21
Generator
(2) Remove the cover on terminal B. 3) Insert the end of a flat tip screwdriver into the
gap between stator core and front cover. Pry them
apart to disassemble.
(A)
SC-00090 (A)
(3) Remove the nuts of terminal B, then remove

SC-00080
the rectifier.
(A) Screwdriver
4) Using a vise, support the rotor and remove the

pulley nut, then remove the rotor from the front cov-
er.
CAUTION:
When holding the rotor with a vise, place alumi-
num plates or wooden pieces on the vise jaws
to prevent rotor from damage.
SC-00091
2. 3.6 L MODEL
1) Remove the four through-bolts.
SC-00035
(A)
SC-00078 (B)
2) Use a drier to heat the rear cover (A) portion to

50 60C (122 140F).
(A)
(C)
(D)
SC-02300
(A) Front cover

(B) Pulley
(C) Pulley nut
(D) Rotor
SC-02299
SC(H4SO)-21
12LE_US.book 22
Generator
5) Use the following procedures to remove the ball 8) Remove four screws which secure the IC regu-
bearings. lator to the rear cover, then remove the IC regula-
(1) Remove the bolt, and then detach the bear- tor.
ing retainer.
SC-02302
SC-00081
9) Use the following procedures to remove the
(2) Firmly attach an appropriate tool (such as a brush.
correct size socket wrench) to the bearing inner (1) Remove the cover A.
race.
(A)
SC-02303
SC-00082
(A) Cover A
(3) Use the press to push the ball bearings out
from the front cover. (2) Remove the cover B.
6) Using the bearing puller, remove the bearings
from the rotor. (A)
SC-02304
SC-00046 (A) Cover B

7) Remove six bolts between the rectifier and stator
(3) Disconnect the connection and remove the
coil, then remove the stator coil.
brush.
SC-02301
SC-02305
SC(H4SO)-22
12LE_US.book 23
Generator
10) Remove the rectifier as follows. D: ASSEMBLY

(1) Remove the cover on terminal B.
1. 2.5 L MODEL
NOTE:
Refer to component for tightening torque of each
part. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-5, GENERATOR, COM-
PONENT, General Description.>
After assembling, manually turn the pulley to
check that the rotor rotates smoothly.
1) Push of the brush
SC-02307 Before assembling the front and rear parts, press
(2) Remove the nut on terminal B. the brush down into the brush holder, then fix the
brush in that position by inserting a [1 mm (0.04 in)
dia., 40 50 mm (1.6 2.0 in) long] wire through
the hole as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
After re-assembling, remove the wire.
(A)
SC-02308
(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rectifier,

and remove the rectifier.
SC-00092
(A) Wire
2) Install the ball bearings.

(1) Set the ball bearings in the front cover, then
securely install an appropriate tool (such as a
socket wrench of proper size) to the bearing
SC-02306
outer race.
(2) Using a press to press the ball bearings into
the specified location.
(3) Install the bearing retainer.
3) Use a press to install the bearings (rear side) to
the rotor shaft.
4) Heat the bearing box in rear cover to 50 60C
(122 140F), and then press the rear bearing
into rear cover.
CAUTION:
Do not apply grease to the rear bearings. If
there is any oil on the bearing box, remove it
completely.
SC(H4SO)-23
12LE_US.book 24
Generator
2. 3.6 L MODEL E: INSPECTION

1. DIODE (2.5 L MODEL)
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Refer to component for tightening torque of each
part. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-5, GENERATOR, COM- There is the possibility of damaging the diodes
if a mega-tester (used to measure high voltag-
PONENT, General Description.>
es) or a similar measuring instrument is used.
After assembling, manually turn the pulley to
Never use a mega tester or equivalent for this
check that the rotor rotates smoothly.
test.
1) Push of the brush
1) Check for continuity between the diode lead and
Before assembling the front and rear parts, press positive side heat sink. If resistance is 1 or more
the brush down into the brush holder, then fix the only in the direction from the diode lead to the heat
brush in that position by inserting a [1 mm (0.08 in) sink, replace the rectifier.
dia., 40 50 mm (1.6 2.0 in) long] wire through
the hole as shown in the figure. (A) (B)
CAUTION:
After re-assembling, remove the wire.
(A)
SC-00042
(A) Diode lead

(B) Heat sink (positive side)
SC-00092
2) Check for continuity between the negative side
(A) Wire heat sink and diode lead. If resistance is 1 or
more only in the direction from the heat sink to the
2) Install the ball bearings. diode lead, replace the rectifier.
(1) Set the ball bearings in the front cover, then
securely install an appropriate tool (such as a (A)
socket wrench of proper size) to the bearing
outer race.
(2) Using a press to press the ball bearings into
the specified location.
(B)
(3) Install the bearing retainer.
3) Use a press to install the bearings (rear side) to
the rotor shaft.
4) Heat the bearing box in rear cover to 50 60C
SC-00043
(122 140F), and then press the rear bearing
into rear cover. (A) Diode lead
CAUTION: (B) Heat sink (negative side)
Do not apply grease to the rear bearings. If
there is any oil on the bearing box, remove it
completely.
SC(H4SO)-24
12LE_US.book 25
Generator
2. DIODE (3.6 L MODEL) 3) Using a circuit tester, check the resistance be-
tween slip rings. If resistance exceeds the stan-
CAUTION:
dard, replace the rotor.
There is the possibility of damaging the diodes
if a mega-tester (used to measure high voltag- Standard:
es) or a similar measuring instrument is used. Approx. 1.8 2.2
Never use a mega tester or equivalent for this
test.
1) Check for continuity between the diode lead and
terminal E or B. If continuity is not as shown in the
table, replace the rectifier.
At analog type tester
Tester lead
Continuity
lead +lead
E P1, P2, P3, P4, Yes
B P5, P6 None SC-00044
P1, P2, P3, P4, E None 4) Check the continuity between slip ring and rotor
P5, P6 B Yes core or shaft. If there is continuity, replace the rotor
because the rotor coil is grounded.
At digital type tester
Tester lead
Continuity
lead +lead
E P1, P2, P3, P4, None
B P5, P6 Yes
P1, P2, P3, P4, E Yes
P5, P6 B None
P4 P5 P6
P3 SC-00045
5) Check the ball bearings. If there is any noise, or

P2 the rotor does not rotate smoothly, replace the
bearings.
P1
4. STATOR COIL (2.5 L MODEL)
E
B 1) Inspect continuity between the stator coil lead
wire terminals. If the resistance is 1 M or more, re-
place the stator coil.
SC-02310
(A)
3. ROTOR
1) Inspect the slip rings for contamination or any
roughness on the sliding surface. Repair the slip
ring surface using a lathe or sand paper.
2) Measure the slip ring outer diameter. Replace
the rotor if the slip ring is worn.
Slip ring outer diameter:
Standard
SC-00047
22.7 mm (0.894 in)
Limit (A) Stator
22.1 mm (0.870 in)
SC(H4SO)-25
12LE_US.book 26
Generator
2) Inspect the continuity between the stator coil sta- 2) Insulation test
tor core and lead wire terminals. If the resistance is Inspect the continuity between the stator coil stator
1 or less, replace the stator coil. core and lead wire terminals. If there is continuity,
replace the stator coil because the stator coil is
grounded.
SC-00048
5. 3.6 L MODEL SC-02314

1) Continuity test
Inspect the continuity between the stator coil termi- 6. BRUSH
nals. If continuity is not as shown in the table, re- 1) Measure the length of each brush. Replace the
place the stator coil. brush if wear exceeds service limits. There is a ser-
vice limit mark (A) on each brush.
(A)
Brush length:
1 2 3 4 5 6
2.5 L model
Standard (1)
18.5 mm (0.728 in)
Limit (2)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
3.6 L model
SC-02349 Standard (1)
22.5 mm (0.886 in)
(A) Terminals Limit (2)
5.0 mm (0.197 in)
3
2 4
1
5 (2)
(A)
6
(1)
SC-02311
SC-02313
SC(H4SO)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Generator
2) Using a spring pressure indicator, push the

brush into the brush holder until its tip protrudes 2
mm (0.08 in). Then measure the pressure of brush
spring. If the pressure is 2.648 N (270 g, 9.52 oz) or
less, replace the brush spring with a new part.
4.609 5.786 N (470 590 g, 16.58 20.810
oz) pressure is required on the new spring.
SC-00093
7. BALL BEARING
Check the ball bearings. Replace the ball bearings
if there is resistance in the rotation, or if there is any
abnormal noise.
Check that the generator does not have deforma-
tion, cracks and any other damage.
SC(H4SO)-27
12LE_US.book 28
Battery
4. Battery C: INSPECTION
A: REMOVAL WARNING:
Electrolyte is corrosive acid, and has toxici-
1) After disconnecting the battery ground terminal, ty; be careful of handling the fluid.
remove the terminal cover, then disconnect the Make sure the electrode does not come into
positive terminal. contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Especially
2) Remove the battery cable holder from the bat- at contact with eyes, flush with water for 15
tery rod. minutes and get prompt medical attention.
3) Remove flange nut from the battery rod and re- In addition, be careful not to let the electrode
move battery holder. contact with the coated parts.
Be careful when handling the batteries be-
cause they produce explosive gases.
Be sure to keep battery away from any fire.
For safety, in case an explosion does occur,
wear eye protection or shield your eyes when
working near any battery. In addition, never
lean over the battery.
Ventilate sufficiently when using or charging
battery in enclosed space.
SC-02377 Before starting work, remove rings, metal
watch-bands, and other metal jewelry.
4) Remove the battery.
Never allow metal tools to contact the posi-
B: INSTALLATION tive battery terminal and anything connected to
Install in the reverse order of removal. it while you are at the same time in contact with
any other metallic portion of the vehicle.
Tightening torque:
3.5 Nm (0.4 kgf-m, 2.6 ft-lb) 1. EXTERNAL PARTS
NOTE: Check the battery case, top cover, vent plugs, and
terminal posts for dirt or cracks. If necessary, clean
Clean the battery cable terminals and apply
with water and wipe with a dry cloth.
grease to retard the formation of corrosion.
Apply a thin coat of grease on the terminal posts to
Connect the positive (+) terminal, and then con-
prevent corrosion.
nect the negative () terminal of the battery.
After the battery is installed, initial diagnosis of 2. ELECTROLYTE LEVEL
the electronic throttle control is performed. Wait for Check the electrolyte level in each cell. If the level
10 seconds or more after turning the ignition switch is below MIN level, bring the level to MAX level by
to ON, and then start the engine. pouring distilled water into the battery cell. Do not
fill beyond MAX level.
3. SPECIFIC GRAVITY OF ELECTROLYTE
1) Measure specific gravity of electrolyte using a
hydrometer and a thermometer.
Specific gravity varies with temperature of electro-
lyte so that it must be corrected at 20C (68F) us-
ing the following calculation:
S20 = St + 0.0007 (t 20)
S20: Specific gravity corrected at electrolyte
temperature of 20C (68F)
St: Measured specific gravity
t: Measured temperature (C)
Judge whether or not battery must be
charged, according to corrected specific
gravity.
Standard specific gravity: 1.220 1.290 [at
20C (68F)]
SC(H4SO)-28
12LE_US.book 29
Battery
2) Measuring the specific gravity of the electrolyte 4. QUICK CHARGING

in the battery will disclose the state of charge of the
CAUTION:
battery. The relation between specific gravity and
Observe the items in 3. NORMAL CHARG-
state of charge is as shown in the figure.
ING.
1.28
Never use 10 A or more when charging the
Specific gravity [20C (68F)]
1.26
battery because it will shorten the battery life.
1.24
1.22
Quick charging is a method that the battery is
1.20
charged in a short period of time with a relatively
1.18 large current by using a quick charger.
1.16 Since a large current flow raises electrolyte temper-
1.14 ature, the battery is subject to damage if the large
1.12 current is used for prolonged time. For this reason,
100% 75% 50% 22% 0%
Complete charge Charging condition (%) quick charging must be carried out within a current
Specific gravity and state of charge SC-00094 range that will not raise the electrolyte temperature
to 40C (104F) or more.
D: MEASUREMENT Also the quick charging is a temporary mean to
WARNING: bring battery voltage up to some level, and battery
Do not bring an open flame close to the battery should be charged slowly with low current as a rule.
when working.
CAUTION:
Prior to charging, corroded terminals should
be cleaned with a brush and common caustic
soda solution.
Be careful since battery electrolyte overflows
while charging the battery.
Observe instructions when handling the bat-
tery charger.
Before charging the battery on the vehicle,
disconnect the battery ground terminal to pre-
vent damage of generator diodes or other elec-
trical units.
1. JUDGMENT OF BATTERY IN CHARGED
CONDITION
1) Specific gravity of electrolyte should be held
within the specific range from 1.250 to 1.290 for
one hour or more.
2) Voltage per battery cell should be held at a spe-
cific value in a range from 2.5 to 2.8 V for one hour
or more.
2. CHECK CONDITION OF CHARGE WITH
HYDROMETER
Hydrometer
State of charge Corrective action
indicator
Green dot 65% or more
Load test
Dark dot 65% or less
Charge battery
Replace the battery.*
Clear dot Low electrolyte
(If cranking is difficult)
* Check electrical system before replacement.
3. NORMAL CHARGING
Charge the battery at the current value specified by
manufacturer or at approximately 1/10 of batterys
ampere-hour rating.
SC(H4SO)-29
12LE_US.book 30
Battery
SC(H4SO)-30
12LE_US.book 1
ENGINE (DIAGNOSTICS)
EN(H4SO)(diag)
Page
1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure .......................................................................2
2. Check List for Interview ..............................................................................4
4. Electrical Component Location ..................................................................9
5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal ................................................17
6. Engine Condition Data .............................................................................26
7. Data Link Connector ................................................................................27
8. General Scan Tool ...................................................................................28
9. Subaru Select Monitor ..............................................................................33
10. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .....................................................39
11. Inspection Mode .......................................................................................40
12. Drive Cycle ...............................................................................................45
13. Clear Memory Mode .................................................................................51
14. System Operation Check Mode ...............................................................52
15. Malfunction Indicator Light .......................................................................53
16. Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure ....................................................63
17. Diagnostic Procedure for Subaru Select Monitor Communication ...........76
18. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................................................78
19. Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................86
20. General Diagnostic Table .......................................................................292
12LE_US.book 2
Basic Diagnostic Procedure

1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure

A: PROCEDURE
1. ENGINE
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE START FAILURE. Does the engine start? Go to step 2. Inspection using
1) Ask the customer when and how the trouble Diagnostics for
occurred using the interview check list. <Ref. to Engine Start Fail-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-4, CHECK, Check List for ure. <Ref. to
Interview.> EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Start the engine. 63, Diagnostics for
Engine Starting
Failure.>
2 CHECK ILLUMINATION OF MALFUNCTION Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 3. Inspection using
INDICATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? General Diagnos-
tic Table. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
292, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
3 CHECK COMMUNICATION STATUS. Does Subaru Select Monitor or Go to step 4. Inspection using
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. general scan tool communicate Diagnostics Pro-
2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- with vehicle normally? cedure for Subaru
eral scan tool to the data link connector. Select Monitor
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and run the Communication.
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Subaru Select Monitor 76, Diagnostic Pro-
For detailed procedures, refer to Subaru Select cedure for Subaru
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Monitor
Select Monitor.> Communication.>
General scan tool
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the
general scan tool operation manual.
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Record the DTC. Repair the related
Read DTC using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- Select Monitor or general scan Repair the trouble parts.
eral scan tool. tool? cause. <Ref. to NOTE:
NOTE: EN(H4SO)(diag)- If DTC is not
Subaru Select Monitor 78, List of Diagnos- shown on display
Refer to Read Diagnostic Trouble Code for tic Trouble Code although the mal-
detailed operation procedure. <Ref. to (DTC).> function indicator
EN(H4SO)(diag)-39, Read Diagnostic Trouble Go to step 5. light illuminates,
Code (DTC).> perform the diag-
General scan tool nosis of malfunc-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tion indicator light
general scan tool operation manual. circuit or combina-
tion meter. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
53, Malfunction In-
dicator Light.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-2
12LE_US.book 3

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA. Is freeze frame data displayed Record the freeze Go to step 6.
Check the freeze frame data using the Subaru on Subaru Select Monitor or frame data. Repair
Select Monitor or general scan tool. general scan tool? the cause of fault,
NOTE: and go to the next
Subaru Select Monitor step. Go to step 6.
For detailed procedures, refer to Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru
Select Monitor.>
General scan tool
6 PERFORM DIAGNOSIS. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Inspect using Finish the diagno-
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to Select Monitor or general scan Diagnostic Proce- sis.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.> tool? dure with Diagnos-
2) Perform the Inspection Mode or Drive Cycle. tic Trouble Code
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, Inspection (DTC). <Ref. to
Mode.> <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-45, Drive EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Cycle.> 86, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-3
12LE_US.book 4
Check List for Interview

2. Check List for Interview

A: CHECK
1. CHECK LIST NO. 1
Check the following item when problem has occurred.
NOTE:
Use copies of this page for interviewing customers.
Customers name Engine No.
Date of purchase Fuel type
Date of repair km
Odometer reading
V.I.N. miles
Weather Fine
Cloudy
Rainy
Snowy
Various/Others:
Ambient air temperature C (F)
Hot
Warm
Cool
Cold
Place Highway
Suburbs
Inner city
Uphill
Downhill
Rough road
Others:
Engine temperature Cold
Warming-up
After warming-up
Any temperature
Others:
Engine speed rpm
Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
Driving conditions Not affected
At starting
While idling
At racing
While accelerating
While cruising
While decelerating
While turning (RH/LH)
Headlight ON/ OFF Rear defogger ON/ OFF
Blower ON/ OFF Audio ON/ OFF
A/C compressor ON/ OFF Rear entertainment system ON/ OFF
Radiator fan ON/ OFF Car phone ON/ OFF
Front wiper ON/ OFF Wireless device ON/ OFF
Rear wiper ON/ OFF
EN(H4SO)(diag)-4
12LE_US.book 5

2. CHECK LIST NO. 2

Check the following item about the vehicles state when the malfunction indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
a) Other warning lights or indicators illuminate: Yes / No
Fuel level warning light
Charge warning light
Engine coolant temperature warning light
Oil pressure warning light
ATF temperature warning light or SPORT indicator light
Drivers control center differential indicator light
ABS warning light
VDC warning light
Cruise indicator light
SI-CRUISE warning light
Immobilizer indicator light
STEERING warning light
Electronic parking brake warning light
Glow indicator light
Sedimenter warning light
Others:
b) Fuel level
Lack of fuel: Yes / No
Indicator position of fuel gauge:
Experienced running out of fuel: Yes / No
c) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords: Yes / No
What:
d) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses: Yes / No
What:
e) Installing of other parts except genuine parts: Yes / No
What:
Where:
f) Occurrence of noise: Yes / No
From where:
What kind:
g) Occurrence of smell: Yes / No
From where:
What kind:
h) Intrusion of water into engine compartment or passenger compartment: Yes / No
i) Troubles occurred
Engine does not start.
Engine stalls during idling.
Engine stalls while driving.
Engine speed decreases.
Engine speed does not decrease.
Rough idling
Poor acceleration
Back fire
After fire
Does not shift.
Excessive shift shock
EN(H4SO)(diag)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
3. General Description 7) Use ECM mounting stud bolts at the body side
grounding point when measuring voltage and resis-
A: CAUTION tance inside the passenger compartment.
1) Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the
ECM, main relay and fuel pump relay.
CAUTION:
Do not use electrical test equipment on the
airbag system circuits.
Be careful not to damage the airbag system
wiring harness when servicing the ECM, TCM, (A)
main relay and fuel pump relay.
2) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity.
Doing so will damage the ECM instantly, and other EN-07713
parts will also be damaged.
(A) Stud bolt
3) Do not disconnect the battery terminals while the
engine is running. A large counter electromotive 8) Use the engine ground terminal or engine as-
force will be generated in the generator, and this sembly for the grounding point to chassis when
voltage may damage electronic parts such as ECM measuring the voltage and resistance in engine
etc. compartment.
4) Before disconnecting the connectors of each
sensor and ECM, be sure to turn the ignition switch
to OFF. Perform the Clear Memory Mode after con-
necting the connectors. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
51, Clear Memory Mode.>
5) When measuring the voltage or resistance of in-
dividual sensor or all electrical control modules,
use a tapered pin with a diameter of less than 0.6
mm (0.024 in). Do not insert the pin 4 mm (0.16 in)
or more into the part.
EN-07710
CAUTION:
When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use 9) Every engine control system-related part is a
the wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on precision part. Do not drop them.
the fuel injection system. 10) Observe the following cautions when installing
NOTE: a radio in vehicle.
When replacing the ECM of the models with Immo- CAUTION:
bilizer, immobilizer system must be registered. To The antenna must be kept as far apart as pos-
do so, all ignition keys and ID cards need to be pre- sible from control module. (ECM is installed at
pared. Refer to the PC application help for Subaru the back of the glove box.)
Select Monitor. The antenna feeder must be placed as far
6) Take care not to allow water to get into the con- apart as possible from the ECM and engine
nectors when servicing or washing the vehicle in control system harness.
rainy weather. Avoid exposure to water even if the Carefully adjust the antenna for correct
connectors are waterproof. matching.
When mounting a large power type radio, pay
special attention to the three items mentioned
above.
Incorrect installation of the radio may affect
the operation of ECM.
11) When disconnecting the fuel hose, release the
fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-53, RELEASING
OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-6
12LE_US.book 7
General Description
12) Warning lights may illuminate when performing C: NOTE

driving test with jacked-up or lifted-up condition, but
The on-board diagnostic (OBD) system detects
this is not a system malfunction. The reason for this
and indicates a fault in various inputs and outputs
is the speed difference between the front and rear
of the complex electronic control. Malfunction indi-
wheels. When engine control system diagnosis is
cator light in the combination meter indicates oc-
finished, perform the VDC memory clearance pro-
currence of a fault or trouble.
cedure of self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(di-
ag)-25, Clear Memory Mode.> Further, against such a failure of sensors as may
disable the drive, the fail-safe function is provided
B: INSPECTION to ensure the minimal drivability.
Before performing diagnostics, check the following The OBD system incorporated with the vehicles
item which might affect engine problems. within this type of engine complies with OBD-II reg-
ulations. The OBD system monitors the compo-
1. BATTERY nents and the system malfunction listed in Engine
1) Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity Section which affects on emissions.
of the electrolyte. When the system decides that a malfunction oc-
curs, malfunction indicator light illuminates. At the
Standard voltage: 12 V same time of the malfunction indicator light illumi-
Specific gravity: 1.260 or more nation or blinking, a DTC and a freeze frame en-
2) Check the condition of the main and other fuses, gine conditions are stored into on-board computer.
and harnesses and connectors. Also check for The OBD system stores freeze frame engine
proper grounding. condition data (engine load, engine coolant tem-
perature, fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
2. ENGINE GROUND speed, etc.) into on-board computer when it detects
Make sure that the engine ground terminal has no a malfunction.
contamination, corrosion or looseness and is prop- Freeze frame engine condition data are stored
erly connected to the engine. until the DTCs are cleared. However when such
malfunctions as fuel trim fault and misfire are de-
tected with the freeze frame engine condition data
stored, they are rewritten into those related to the
fuel trim fault and misfire.
When the malfunction does not occur again for
three consecutive driving cycles*, malfunction indi-
cator light is turned off, but DTC remains at on-
board computer.
*: One driving cycle means the period between the
ignition switch ON and the ignition switch OFF after
EN-07710
driving.
When performing diagnosis, connect the Subaru
Select Monitor or general scan tool to the vehicle.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-7
12LE_US.book 8
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
SOCKET
ST-499987500
EN(H4SO)(diag)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Electrical Component Location

4. Electrical Component Location

A: LOCATION
1. CONTROL MODULE
(1)
(3) (2) (4)

EN-07690
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Delivery (test) mode fuse (4) Data link connector
(2) Malfunction indicator light
(1)
CHECK
ENGINE
CHECK
ENGINE (2)
EN-07715 EN-07716
(3)
(4)
EN-07511 EN-07717
EN(H4SO)(diag)-9
12LE_US.book 10

2. SENSOR
(3) (4) (2)
(1) (8) (7) (5) (6)

EN-07691
(1) Mass air flow and intake air tem- (4) Electronic throttle control (7) Crankshaft position sensor
perature sensor
(2) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (5) Knock sensor (8) Engine oil temperature sensor
(3) Engine coolant temperature sen- (6) Camshaft position sensor
sor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-10
12LE_US.book 11

(2)
(1)
EN-07595 EN-07596
(3)
(4)
EN-07597 EN-07598
(5) (6)
EN-07599 EN-07600
(7)
(8)
EN-07601 EN-07602
EN(H4SO)(diag)-11
12LE_US.book 12

(4)
(2)
(3)
(1)
EN-07603
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (3) Front catalytic converter (4) Rear catalytic converter
(2) Rear oxygen sensor
(1) (2) (3)
(4)
EN-07692
(1) Fuel level sensor (3) Fuel tank pressure sensor (4) Fuel sub level sensor
(2) Fuel temperature sensor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-12
12LE_US.book 13

(3)
(1)
(2)
EN-07718 EN-07719
(4)
EN-07720
EN(H4SO)(diag)-13
12LE_US.book 14

3. SOLENOID VALVE, ACTUATOR, EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PARTS AND IGNITION

SYSTEM PARTS
(3) (4) (2) (1)
(4) (3)
EN-07693
(1) Purge control solenoid valve (3) Oil switching solenoid valve (4) Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
pressure switch
(2) EGR control valve
EN(H4SO)(diag)-14
12LE_US.book 15

(3)
(1)
(2)
EN-07605 EN-07606
(4)
EN-08625
(3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (2)
(8) (9) (10) (1) (11) (13) (12) (14)

EN-07694
(1) Starter (6) Electronic throttle control relay (11) Starter relay
(2) Fuel pump (7) Fuel pump relay (12) Canister
(3) Main relay (8) Radiator main fan relay 1 (13) Drain valve
(4) IG relay (9) Radiator main fan relay 2 (14) Drain filter
(5) A/F, oxygen sensor relay (10) Radiator sub fan relay
EN(H4SO)(diag)-15
12LE_US.book 16

(2)
(1)
EN-07512 EN-07752
(3)
(4)
(5)
(9)
(6)
(8)
(7)
(10)
EN-07721 EN-07514
(14)
(13)
(12)
(11)
EN-07722 EN-07723
4. TRANSMISSION
(2)
(1)
EN-07518 EN-07724
(1) Inhibitor switch (CVT model) (2) Neutral position switch (MT
model)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

A: ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION
TO A: B134 TO B: B135 TO C: B136 TO D: B137
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 31 30 29 28 27 26
EN-05288
Con- Termi- Signal (V)

Description nector nal Ignition SW ON Engine ON Note
No. No. (engine OFF) (idling)
Crankshaft Signal (+) B137 17 0 7 +7 Waveform
position Signal () B137 25 0 0
sensor Shield B137 31 0 0
Camshaft Signal (+) B137 24 0 7 +7 Waveform
position Signal () B137 30 0 0
Approx. 0.9 Approx. 0.6 0.7 Fully closed:
Main B134 18 (After engine is (After engine is Approx. 0.6
warmed up.) warmed up.) Fully open: Approx. 4.0
Electronic Approx. 1.7 Approx. 1.5 1.6 Fully closed:
throttle control Sub B134 28 (After engine is (After engine is Approx. 1.5
Power supply B134 19 5 5
Ground (sensor) B134 29 0 0
Electronic throttle control motor Drive frequency:
B134 2 Duty waveform Duty waveform
(+) 500 Hz
() 500 Hz
Electronic throttle control motor
B135 7 10 13 12 14
power supply
Electronic throttle control motor ON: 0 ON: 0 When ignition switch is
B135 17
relay OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14 turned to ON: ON
EN(H4SO)(diag)-17
12LE_US.book 18


Main sensor Fully closed: 1.0 Fully closed: 1.0
B135 23
signal Fully opened: 3.5 Fully opened: 3.5
Main power
B135 21 5 5
supply
Ground (Main
Accelerator B135 29 0 0
sensor)
pedal position
sensor Sub sensor sig- Fully closed: 1.0 Fully closed: 1.0
B135 31
nal Fully opened: 3.5 Fully opened: 3.5
Sub power sup-
B135 22 5 5
ply
Ground (Sub
B135 30 0 0
sensor)
Signal (+) B136 19 2.7 2.9
Front oxygen
Signal () B136 18 2.35 2.25
(A/F) sensor
Shield B136 9 0 0
Rear oxygen Signal B136 20 0 0 0.9
Front oxygen Signal 1 B136 6 10 13 1 14 Duty waveform
(A/F) sensor
heater Signal 2 B136 5 10 13 1 14 Duty waveform
Rear oxygen sensor heater sig-
B135 6 10 13 1 14 Duty waveform
nal
Engine coolant temperature sen- After engine is warmed
B137 22 1.0 1.4 1.0 1.4
sor up.
CVT model
Cranking: 8 14
MT model
Starter switch B136 16 0 0
Cranking with the
clutch pedal pressed:
8 14
ON: 0.5 or less ON: 0.5 or less
Starter relay control B135 26
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Ignition switch B136 30 10 13 12 14
CVT model: Switch is
ON when select lever is
in P range or N
ON: 0
Neutral position switch B136 35 range.
OFF: 120.5
MT model: Switch is
ON when the shift lever
is in neutral.
When fuse is installed:
Delivery (test) mode switch B136 34 10 13 13 14
0
Signal B137 2 2.5 2.5
Knock sensor
Shield B137 8 0 0
Ignition switch OFF:
Back-up power supply B136 2 10 13 12 14
10 13
B137 7 10 13 12 14
Control module power supply
B136 1 10 13 12 14
#1 B134 21 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#2 B134 22 0 0 or 5 Waveform
Ignition control
#3 B134 31 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#4 B134 32 0 0 or 5 Waveform
EN(H4SO)(diag)-18
12LE_US.book 19


#1 B134 10 10 13 1 14 Waveform
#2 B134 11 10 13 1 14 Waveform
Fuel injector
#3 B134 12 10 13 1 14 Waveform
#4 B134 13 10 13 1 14 Waveform
Fuel pump relay control B136 33
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Main fan relay control B135 12
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Sub fan relay control B135 11
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Self-shutoff control B135 13 0.5 or less 0.5 or less
C6 model
Malfunction indicator light B135 33 Light ON: 1 or less
Light OFF: 10 14
Engine speed output B135 15 0 13 or more Waveform
Engine oil temperature sensor After engine is warmed
B137 21 1.0 1.4 1.0 1.4
signal up.
ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
Purge control solenoid valve B137 6 Duty waveform
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Signal 1 B134 8 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14 Waveform
EGR control Signal 2 B134 9 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14 Waveform
valve Signal 3 B134 20 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14 Waveform
Signal 4 B134 30 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14 Waveform
Power steering oil pressure ON: 1 or less ON: 1 or less
B137 28
switch OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Oil level switch B136 26 0 0 Oil level LOW: 10 14
Oil switching Drive frequency:
Signal (+) B134 7 0 Duty waveform
solenoid valve 300 Hz
RH Signal () B134 15 0 0
Oil switching Drive frequency:
Signal (+) B134 5 0 Duty waveform
solenoid valve 300 Hz
LH Signal () B134 14 0 0
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
B137 14 0 0
pressure switch RH
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil
B137 13 0 0
pressure switch LH
Manifold absolute pressure sen-
B137 20 3.4 3.8 1.4 1.8
sor
Signal B136 22 0.3 4.5
Air flow sensor Shield B136 10 0 0
Ground B136 11 0 0
Intake air temperature sensor
B136 31 0.3 4.6 0.3 4.6
signal
Immobilizer communication B135 25 1 or less 4 or more 1 or less 4 or more
SSM communication B135 14 1 or less 4 or more 1 or less 4 or more
B134 19 5 5
Sensor power supply
B135 22 5 5
EN(H4SO)(diag)-19
12LE_US.book 20


B134 29 0 0
Sensor
B135 30 0 0
Engine 1 B134 6 0 0
Engine 2 B134 4 0 0
Ground
Engine 3 B134 3 0 0
Engine 4 B137 1 0 0
Engine 5 B137 3 0 0
Body B136 4 0 0
When clutch pedal is When clutch pedal is
depressed: 0 depressed: 0
Clutch switch B135 9
released: 10 13 released: 12 14
When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
Brake switch 1 depressed: 0 depressed: 0
B136 15
(brake switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
Brake switch 2 depressed: 10 13 depressed: 12 14
B136 3
(stop light switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
released: 0 released: 0
ON: 0 ON: 0
Cruise control main switch B136 13
OFF: 5 OFF: 5
When operating noth- When operating noth-
ing: 3.5 4.5 ing: 3.5 4.5
When operating RES/ When operating RES/
ACC: 2.5 3.5 ACC: 2.5 3.5
Cruise control command switch B136 12
When operating SET/ When operating SET/
COAST: 0.5 1.5 COAST: 0.5 1.5
When operating CAN- When operating CAN-
CEL: 0 0.5 CEL: 0 0.5
Ambient temperature:
Fuel temperature sensor B136 23 2.5 3.8 2.5 3.8
25C (77F)
Value after removing
Fuel tank pressure sensor B136 21 2.3 2.7 2.3 2.7 fuel filler cap and
installing again
Drain valve B135 4
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
CAN commu- (Hi) B136 17 2.5 3.5 2.5 3.5 Waveform
nication (Lo) B136 28 1.5 2.5 1.5 2.5 Waveform
EN(H4SO)(diag)-20
12LE_US.book 21

Input/output name:
Crankshaft position sensor
Measuring condition:
After warming-up
At idling
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR 0
ONE CRANKSHAFT ROTATION
CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR 0
10 ms
5V ONE CAMSHAFT ROTATION
EN-07430
EN(H4SO)(diag)-21
12LE_US.book 22

F/B FUSE No. 4

DATA LINK
M/B FUSE No. 12 CONNECTOR
CVT
CVT
MT
C2 B9
MT
STARTER RELAY
CLUTCH
SWITCH
IGNITION SWITCH
B26
F/B FUSE No. 21 CVT
MT
MT
B14
CLUTCH START
SWITCH DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE FUSE
1 C34
NEUTRAL
POSITION SWITCH
1 MT
JOINT
CONNECTOR
C4
MT
INHIBITOR SWITCH C35

CVT CVT
P R N D
MT
B23
CVT
C16
STARTER MOTOR
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
POSITION SENSOR
B21
B31
C30
F/B FUSE No. 12
M/B FUSE No. 20

B29
FUEL
PUMP B22
RELAY
C33
FUEL
PUMP FUEL TANK
C21
PRESSURE
SENSOR
POWER STEERING
OIL PRESSURE B30 JOINT
SWITCH CONNECTOR
D28
2 3 4
EN-08626
EN(H4SO)(diag)-22
12LE_US.book 23

M/B FUSE No. 16

M/B FUSE No. 13
M/B FUSE No. 15
M/B FUSE No. 14
A/F, OXYGEN
SENSOR
RELAY
MAIN IG
RELAY RELAY
A21
B13 IGNITION COIL No. 1
A22
ELECTRONIC IGNITION COIL No. 2
THROTTLE
5
CONTROL
RELAY A31
IGNITION COIL No. 3
B7
B17
A32
IGNITION COIL No. 4
7
C1
D7
B15
COMBINATION METER
B33
C6
PURGE CONTROL D6
SOLENOID VALVE
A5
A8 OIL SWITCHING
A14 SOLENOID VALVE LH
A7
OIL SWITCHING
A9 A15 SOLENOID VALVE RH
EGR
CONTROL VALVE
A20
VVL DIAGNOSIS
D13
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH LH
A30
VVL DIAGNOSIS
6 D14
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH RH
C6 : C6 MODEL
EN-09178
EN(H4SO)(diag)-23
12LE_US.book 24

6
4
A10
FUEL INJECTOR No. 1
A18
A11
FUEL INJECTOR No. 2 A28
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE
A1 CONTROL
A2
A12
FUEL INJECTOR No. 3 A19
A13
FUEL INJECTOR No. 4
MANIFOLD
D20 ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
B4
DRAIN VALVE
D21
ENGINE OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
D22 ENGINE
MASS COOLANT
AIR FLOW & C31 TEMPERATURE
INTAKE SENSOR
AIR C11
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
C10
D2
C22
D8 KNOCK
SENSOR
A29
8 9
EN-09179
EN(H4SO)(diag)-24
12LE_US.book 25

BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B25

(IMMOBILIZER)
C17 3
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT FUEL
(CAN COMMUNICATION) C28 C23 TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
OIL LEVEL SWITCH

C13
C26
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
C12
B12
MAIN FAN RELAY
C3
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
B11
SUB FAN RELAY
C15
BRAKE SWITCH
C5
8 5
C6
FRONT
OXYGEN C18 D17
CRANKSHAFT
(A/F)
C19 D25 POSITION
SENSOR
SENSOR
C20
REAR D24 CAMSHAFT

OXYGEN POSITION
D30
SENSOR SENSOR
B6 D31
7 C9
9
D3
A3 A4
D1 A6
ENGINE GROUND ENGINE GROUND

EN-08629
EN(H4SO)(diag)-25
12LE_US.book 26
Engine Condition Data

6. Engine Condition Data

Contents Specifications
17.6 40.5 (%): Idling
Engine load
14.7 29.8 (%): 2,500 rpm racing
After engine is warmed up.
Set the select lever in P range or N range, or the shift lever in neutral.
Turn the A/C to OFF.
Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Data Link Connector

7. Data Link Connector

A: NOTE
This connector is used for Subaru Select Monitor.
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools other than Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the cir-
cuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
EN-07824
Terminal No. Contents Terminal No. Contents

1 Blank 9 Blank
2 Blank 10 Blank
3 Blank 11 Blank
4 Ground 12 Blank
5 Ground 13 Blank
6 CAN communication (Hi) 14 CAN communication (Lo)
7 Subaru Select Monitor signal 15 Blank
8 Blank 16 Power supply
EN(H4SO)(diag)-27
12LE_US.book 28
General Scan Tool

8. General Scan Tool

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE GENERAL SCAN TOOL
1) Prepare a scan tool (general scan tool) required by SAE J1978.
2) Connect the general scan tool to data link connector located in the lower portion of the instrument panel
(on the drivers side).
EN-07712
3) Using the general scan tool, call up each data. General scan tool functions consist of:
(1) MODE $01: Current powertrain diagnostic data
(2) MODE $02: Powertrain freeze frame data
(3) MODE $03: Emission-related powertrain DTC
(4) MODE $04: Clear/Reset emission-related diagnostic information
(5) MODE $06: Request on-board monitoring test results for intermittently monitored systems
(6) MODE $07: Request on-board monitoring test results for continuously monitored systems
(7) MODE $09: Request vehicle information
4) Read out the data according to repair procedures. (For detailed operation procedure, refer to the general
scan tool operation manual.)
NOTE:
For details concerning DTC, refer to List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-78,
List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
2. MODE $01: (CURRENT POWERTRAIN DIAGNOSTIC DATA)
Refer to data denoting the current operating condition of analog input/output, digital input/output or the pow-
ertrain system.
A list of the support data and PID (Parameter Identification) codes are shown in the following table.
PID Data Unit of measure
Number of emission-related powertrain DTC, and malfunction indicator light status and diag-
$01
nosis support information
$03 Fuel system control status
$04 Calculated engine load value %
$05 Engine coolant temperature C
$06 Short term fuel trim %
$07 Long term fuel trim %
$0B Intake manifold absolute pressure kPa
$0C Engine speed rpm
$0D Vehicle speed MPH
$0E Ignition timing advance
$0F Intake air temperature C
$10 Intake air amount g/s
$11 Throttle valve opening angle %
$13 Air fuel ratio sensor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-28
12LE_US.book 29
General Scan Tool


Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor (Bank 1
$15 V and %
Sensor 2)
$1C Supporting OBD system
$1F Elapsed time after starting the engine sec
$21 Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light illuminates miles
$24 A/F value and A/F sensor output voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1) and V
$2C Target EGR %
$2D EGR deviation %
$2E Evaporative purge %
$2F Fuel level %
$30 Number of warm ups after DTC clear
$31 Travel distance after DTC clear miles
$32 Fuel tank pressure Pa
$33 Barometric pressure kPa
$34 A/F value and A/F sensor current (Bank 1 Sensor 1) and mA
$3C Catalyst temperature #1 C
$41 Diagnostic monitor of each drive cycle
$42 ECM power voltage V
$43 Absolute load %
$44 A/F target lambda
$45 Relative throttle opening angle %
$46 Ambient temperature C
$47 Absolute throttle opening angle 2 %
$49 Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute accelerator opening angle 2 %
$4C Target throttle opening angle %
$4D Engine operating time while malfunction indicator lit min
$4E Elapsed time after DTC clear min
$51 Fuel used
$5A Relative accelerator opening angle %
$65 Neutral status
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturers operation manual to access current powertrain diagnostic data
(MODE $01).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-29
12LE_US.book 30
General Scan Tool

3. MODE $02 (POWERTRAIN FREEZE FRAME DATA)

Refer to data denoting the operating condition when trouble is detected by on-board diagnosis system.
$02 DTC that caused the freeze frame data storage required by CARB
$06 Short term fuel trim (Bank 1 Sensor 1) %
$07 Long term fuel trim (Bank 1 Sensor 1) %
Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor (Bank 1
$15 V and %
Sensor 2)
$2C Target EGR %
$2D EGR deviation %
$2F Fuel level %
$43 Absolute load %
$65 Neutral status
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturers instruction manual to access freeze frame data (MODE $02).
4. MODE $03 (EMISSION-RELATED POWERTRAIN DTC)
Refer to List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for information about data denoting emission-related pow-
ertrain DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-78, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-30
12LE_US.book 31
General Scan Tool

5. MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION)

Refer to the mode used to clear or reset emission-related diagnostic information (OBD-II trouble diagnostic
information).
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturers instruction manual to clear the emission-related diagnostic in-
formation (MODE $04).
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10 seconds or
more after turning the ignition switch to ON, and then start the engine.
6. MODE $06
Refer to diagnostic value of troubleshooting and data of test limit indicated on the support data bit sequence
table. A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
OBDMID TID SID Diagnostic item
$84 $1E
A/F sensor range failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$85 $1E
$86 $20
$91 $20
$92 $10
$A3 $20
$01 $A4 $10
$AC $10 A/F sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$AD $10
$AE $10
$AF $10
$CD $20
$CF $20
$07 $0B
$08 $0B Oxygen sensor drop failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$A5 $0B
$02 $05 $10
Oxygen sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$06 $10
$D1 $10
Oxygen sensor delay failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$D2 $01
$21 $89 $20 Catalyst deterioration diagnosis (Bank 1)
$31 $8A $FD EGR system diagnosis
$39 $93 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Cap off)
$94 $FE
$3B $95 $FE Evaporative emission control system (0.04 inch leak)
$A6 $FE
$96 $FE
$C1 $FE
$C2 $FE
$C3 $FE
$C4 $FE
$3C $C5 $FE Evaporative emission control system (0.02 inch leak)
$C6 $35
$C7 $FE
$C8 $FE
$C9 $FE
$CA $FE
$3D $98 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Purge flow)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-31
12LE_US.book 32
General Scan Tool


$41 $9B $14 A/F sensor heater characteristics failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$42 $A2 $24 Oxygen sensor heater characteristics failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$0B $24
$A1 Misfire monitoring (All cylinders)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$A2 Misfire monitoring (#1 cylinder)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
7. MODE $07
Refer to the data of DTC (pending code) for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time.
8. MODE $09
Refer to data of vehicle specification (V.I.N., calibration ID, diagnosis frequency etc.).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-32
12LE_US.book 33

9. Subaru Select Monitor

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor.
2. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)
NOTE:
A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
*: For models without cruise control, the brake switch signal does not change.
Unit of mea-
Content Display Note (at idling)
sure
Engine load Engine Load % 21.0%
85C or 185F or more
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temperature C or F
(after warm-up)
A/F correction #1 A/F Correction #1 % 0.8%
A/F learning #1 A/F Learning #1 % 0.0%
200 300 mmHg, 26.7
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure Mani. Absolute Pressure 40 kPa, 7.8 11.8
inHg or psig
inHg or 3.8 5.8 psig
700 rpm (Agree with the
Engine speed signal Engine Speed rpm
tachometer indication)
km/h or 0 km/h or 0 MPH (at park-
Meter vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed
MPH ing)
Ignition timing signal Ignition Timing deg 14 16 deg
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. C or F (Ambient air temperature)
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m 2.5 g/s or 0.33 lb/m
Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle % 2.0%
Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0.1 0.7 V
Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 14 V
Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Voltage V 1.26 V
Injection 1 pulse width Fuel Injection #1 Pulse ms 2.82 ms
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure (Atmospheric pressure)
inHg or psig
(Air intake absolute pres-
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold relative pressure Mani. Relative Pressure sure Atmospheric pres-
inHg or psig
sure)
Learned ignition timing Learned Ignition Timing deg 0 deg
Acceleration opening angle signal Accel. Opening Angle % 0.0%
Fuel temperature signal Fuel Temperature C or F +20C or +68F
Purge control solenoid duty ratio CPC Valve Duty Ratio % 0 3%
Number of EGR steps No. of EGR steps STEP 0 STEP
A/F sensor current value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Current mA 0.2 0.2 mA
A/F Sensor #1 Resis-
A/F sensor resistance value 1 32
tance
A/F sensor output lambda 1 A/F Sensor #1 1.0
Throttle motor duty Throttle Motor Duty % 15%
Throttle motor voltage Throttle Motor Voltage V (Battery voltage)
Sub throttle sensor voltage Sub-Throttle Sensor V 1.52 V
EN(H4SO)(diag)-33
12LE_US.book 34

Unit of mea-
sure
Main throttle sensor voltage Main-Throttle Sensor V 0.66 V
Sub accelerator sensor voltage Sub-Accelerator Sensor V 0.68 V
Main acceleration sensor voltage Main-Accelerator Sensor V 0.68 V
Memorized Cruise km/h or
Memory vehicle speed 0 km/h or 0 MPH
Speed MPH
Fuel level sensor signal Fuel level resistance 2 96
Engine oil temperature signal Engine Oil Temperature C 85C (after warm-up)
Oil switching solenoid valve duty RH OSV Duty R % 16.9%
Oil switching solenoid valve duty LH OSV Duty L % 16.9%
Oil switching solenoid valve current RH OSV Current R mA 192 mA
Oil switching solenoid valve current LH OSV Current L mA 192 mA
Variable valve lift lift mode VVL Lift Mode 1
#1 cylinder roughness monitor Roughness Monitor #1 0
Knock sensor correction Knocking Correction deg 0.0 deg
mmHg, kPa, +7.7 mmHg, +1.1 kPa,
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure
inHg or psig +0.31 inHg or +0.15 psig
AT vehicle ID signal AT Vehicle ID Signal ON/OFF
D-check require Flag D-check Require Flag OFF
Delivery Mode Connec- OFF
Delivery (test) mode terminal tor (Test Mode Connec-
tor)
Neutral position switch signal Neutral Position Switch ON
Soft idle switch signal Idle Switch Signal ON
Ignition switch signal Ignition Switch ON
Power steering switch signal P/S Switch OFF (when OFF)
Air conditioning switch signal A/C Switch OFF (when OFF)
Starter switch signal Starter Switch OFF
Rear oxygen monitor Rear O2 Rich Signal Rich/Lean
Knocking signal Knocking Signal OFF
Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Sig. ON
Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft Position Sig. ON
Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger SW OFF (when OFF)
Blower fan switch signal Blower Fan SW OFF (when OFF)
Light switch signal Light Switch OFF (when OFF)
Radiator fan relay 1 signal Radiator Fan Relay #1 OFF (when OFF)
Fuel pump relay signal Fuel Pump Relay ON output
Drain valve signal Vent. Solenoid Valve OFF output
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch signal 1 Eng. Oil Press. SW 1 ON
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch signal 2 Eng. Oil Press. SW 2 ON
AT coordinate retard angle demand signal Retard Signal from AT OFF
AT coordinate fuel cut demand signal Fuel Cut signal from AT OFF
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque down prohibition
Ban of Torque Down ON
output
Request Torque Down
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque down demand OFF
VDC
EN(H4SO)(diag)-34
12LE_US.book 35

Unit of mea-
sure
Torque Permission Sig-
AT coordinate permission signal ON (OFF on MT vehicles)
nal
Electronic throttle control motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay ON
Clutch switch signal Clutch Switch OFF (when OFF)
Stop light switch signal Stop Light Switch OFF (when OFF)
SET/COAST switch signal SET/COAST Switch OFF (when OFF)
RES/ACC switch signal RESUME/ACCEL Switch OFF (when OFF)
Brake switch signal* Brake Switch OFF (when OFF)
Main switch signal Main Switch OFF (when OFF)
Cruise control cancel switch signal CC Cancel SW OFF (when OFF)
Malfunction indicator light signal MIL On Flag OFF (when unlit)
Oil level switch Oil level switch HIGH level
3. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)
NOTE:
Unit of mea-
Contents Display Note (at idling)
sure
Number of diagnosis code Number of Diag. Code: 0
Condition of malfunction indicator light MI(MIL) OFF
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Supp) YES
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Rdy) YES
Fuel system monitoring
Monitoring test of fuel system YES
(Supp)
(Rdy)
Component monitoring
Monitoring test of comprehensive component YES
(Supp)
(Rdy)
Catalyst Diagnosis
Test of catalyst YES
(Supp)
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Rdy) NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Supp) NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Rdy) N/A
Evaporative purge sys-
Test of evaporative emission purge control system YES
tem (Supp)
Test of evaporative emission purge control system NO
tem (Rdy)
Secondary air system
Secondary air system test NO
(Supp)
Secondary air system test N/A
(Rdy)
A/C system refrigerant
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant NO
(Supp)
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant N/A
(Rdy)
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Supp) YES
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Rdy) NO
O2 Heater Diagnosis
Test of oxygen sensor heater YES
(Supp)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-35
12LE_US.book 36

Unit of mea-
sure
O2 Heater Diagnosis
Test of oxygen sensor heater NO
(Rdy)
Test of EGR system EGR system (Supp) YES
Test of EGR system EGR system (Rdy) NO
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1 Cl_normal
Engine load data Calculated load value 23.0 %
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. 92 C
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Short term fuel trim B1 0.8 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Long term fuel trim B1 0.0 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure 28 kPa
Engine speed signal Engine Speed 700 rpm
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed 0 km/h
#1 Cylinder ignition timing Ignition timing adv. #1 16.0
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. 36 C
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow 2.7 g/s
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle 13 %
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 0.7 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #12 0.0 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD System OBD/OBD2
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 Supported
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 Supported
Elapsed time after engine start Time Since Engine Start sec
Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light illumi-
Lighted MI lamp history km
nates
A/F lambda signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 1.001
A/F sensor output signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 2.79 V
Target EGR Commanded EGR %
EGR deviation EGR Error %
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge 0 %
Fuel level signal Fuel Level %
Number of warm ups after DTC clear Number of warm-ups
Travel distance after DTC clear Meter since DTC cleared km
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure 32.00 Pa
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure Atmospheric pressure kPa
A/F sensor current (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 0.00 mA
Catalyst temperature #1 Catalyst Temperature #11 C
Misfire monitoring
Monitoring test of misfire YES
(Enable)
Misfire monitoring
Monitoring test of misfire NO
(Comp)
(Enable)
Monitoring test of fuel system NO
(Comp)
(Enable)
Monitoring test of comprehensive component NO
(Comp)
Catalyst Diagnosis
(Enable)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-36
12LE_US.book 37

Unit of mea-
sure
Catalyst Diagnosis
Test of catalyst NO
(Comp)
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Enable) N/A
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Comp) N/A
tem (Enable)
tem (Comp)
(Enable)
(Comp)
(Enable)
(Comp)
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Enable) YES
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Comp) NO
O2 Heater Diagnosis
(Enable)
O2 Heater Diagnosis
Test of oxygen sensor heater NO
(Comp)
Test of EGR system EGR system (Enable) YES
Test of EGR system EGR system (Comp) NO
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage 13.789 V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value 22 %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio 0.976
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. 2 %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature Ambient air temperature C
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 32 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#1 13 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. 0 %
Engine operating time while malfunction indicator light lit Time while MIL lighted min
Elapsed time after DTC clear Time since DTC cleared min
Type of fuel Type of fuel GAS
Relative acceleration opening angle Relative Accelera. Pos. 0 %
AT drive status/MT gear
Neutral condition NEUT
status
EN(H4SO)(diag)-37
12LE_US.book 38

4. READ FREEZE FRAME DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

NOTE:
Description Display Unit of measure
DTCs of freeze frame data Freeze frame data
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1
Engine load data Calculated load value %
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. C or F
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Short term fuel trim B1 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor Long term fuel trim B1 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH
Ignition timing advance for #1 cylinder Ignition timing adv. #1
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. C or F
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle %
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #12 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD System
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12
Target EGR Commanded EGR %
EGR deviation EGR Error %
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge %
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature C or F
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 %
Absolute accelerator opening angle 1 Accelerator Pedal Pos.#1 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. %
Neutral condition AT drive status/MT gear status
5. V.I.N REGISTRATION
1) On Main Menu display, select {Each System Check}.
2) On System Selection Menu display, select {Engine Control System}.
3) Click the [OK] button after the information of engine type has been displayed.
4) On the Engine Diagnosis display, select {Entry VIN}.
5) Perform the procedures shown on the display screen.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-38
12LE_US.book 39
Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

10.Read Diagnostic Trouble

Code (DTC)
A: OPERATION
1. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
For details concerning DTC, refer to List of Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC). <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-78, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
Refer to data denoting emission-related powertrain
DTC.
Code (DTC).>
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturers instruc-
tion manual to access powertrain DTC (MODE
$03).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-39
12LE_US.book 40
Inspection Mode
11.Inspection Mode
A: PROCEDURE
Perform the diagnosis shown in the following DTC table.
When performing the diagnosis not listed in List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC), refer to the item on the
drive cycle. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-45, Drive Cycle.>
DTC Item Condition
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
P0077 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit High (Bank 1)
P0083 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit High (Bank 2)
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch A Circuit Low
P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch A Circuit High
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank1 Sensor2)
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit Low Input
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit High Input
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High
P0201 Injector #1
P0202 Injector #2
P0203 Injector #3
P0204 Injector #4
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low
P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch B Circuit High
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Circuit
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Circuit Range/Performance
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor A Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
Camshaft Position Sensor A Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Sin-
P0341
gle Sensor)
P0351 Ignition Coil A Primary/Secondary Circuit
P0352 Ignition Coil B Primary/Secondary Circuit
P0353 Ignition Coil C Primary/Secondary Circuit
P0354 Ignition Coil D Primary/Secondary Circuit
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Open
P0448 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Shorted
EN(H4SO)(diag)-40
12LE_US.book 41
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P0452 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Low Input
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor High Input
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Low
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit High
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor A
P0512 Starter Request Circuit
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key
P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit Range/Performance
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Performance (Bank 1)
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL Request)
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1)
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1)
P1160 Return Spring Failure
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction
P1570 Antenna
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure (Except Antenna Circuit)
P1574 Key Communication Failure
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM
P1578 Meter Failure
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor A Minimum Stop Performance
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch D Circuit Low Input
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch D Circuit High Input
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch E Circuit Low Input
P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch E Circuit High Input
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch A/B Voltage Correlation
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch D/E Voltage Correlation
P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/Performance
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High
EN(H4SO)(diag)-41
12LE_US.book 42
Inspection Mode
1. PREPARATION FOR THE INSPECTION 2. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR

MODE 1) Check that no DTC remains after clearing mem-
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more ory. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory
and fuel remains approx. half [20 40 2 (5.3 Mode.>
10.6 US gal, 4.4 8.8 Imp gal)]. 2) Warm up the engine.
2) Lift up the vehicle using a garage jack and place 3) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to
it on rigid racks, or drive the vehicle onto free roll- EN(H4SO)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL, Gen-
ers. eral Description.>
WARNING:
Before lifting up the vehicle, ensure parking
brake is applied.
Do not use a pantograph jack in place of a rig-
id rack.
Secure a rope or wire to the front or rear tow-
ing hooks to prevent the lateral runout of front
wheels.
Before rotating the wheels, make sure that
there is no one in front of the vehicle. Besides EN-05692
while the wheels are rotating, make sure that no 4) Prepare PC with Subaru Select Monitor in-
one approaches the vehicle front side. stalled.
Make sure that there is nothing around the 5) Connect the USB cable to SDI (Subaru Diagno-
wheels. For AWD model, pay attention to all sis Interface) and USB port on the personal com-
four wheels. puter (dedicated port for the Subaru Select
While servicing, do not depress or release Monitor).
the clutch pedal or accelerator pedal quickly re-
gardless of the engine speed. Quick operation NOTE:
may cause the vehicle to drop off the free roller. The dedicated port for the Subaru Select Monitor
To prevent the vehicle from slipping due to means the USB port which was used to install the
vibration, do not place anything between rigid Subaru Select Monitor.
rack and the vehicle. 6) Connect the diagnosis cable to SDI.
7) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of the
fuse box.
CAUTION:
Do not use any fuses that are installed on the
vehicle.
(A)
(A)
EN-07555
(B)
EN-00041
(A) Rigid rack

(B) Free roller
EN(H4SO)(diag)-42
12LE_US.book 43
Inspection Mode
8) Connect SDI to data link connector located in the 3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
lower portion of the instrument panel (on the driv- 1) Check that no DTC remains after clearing mem-
ers side). ory. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-31, MODE $04
CAUTION: (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba- NOSTIC INFORMATION), OPERATION, General
ru Select Monitor and general scan tool. Scan Tool.>
main fuse box.
CAUTION:
vehicle.
(A)
EN-07712
9) Start the PC.

10) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF)
and run the PC application for Subaru Select Mon-
itor.
11) On Main Menu display, select {Each System
Check}. EN-07555
12) On System Selection Menu display, select 4) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-
{Engine Control System}. nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
13) Click the [OK] button after the information of panel (on the drivers side).
engine type has been displayed.
14) On Engine Diagnosis display, select {Dealer CAUTION:
Check Mode Procedure}. Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba-
15) When the Perform Inspection (Dealer Check) ru Select Monitor and general scan tool.
Mode ? is shown on the screen, click the [Next]
button.
16) Perform subsequent procedures as instructed
on the display screen.
If trouble still remains in the memory, the corre-
sponding DTC appears on the display screen.
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to
PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor.
For details concerning DTC, refer to List of Di- EN-07712
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC). <Ref. to 5) Start the engine.
NOTE:
Code (DTC).>
Ensure the selector lever is placed in the P
Release the parking brake.
range before starting. (CVT model)
The speed difference between front and rear
Depress the clutch pedal when starting engine.
wheels may illuminate the ABS warning light, but
(MT model)
this does not indicate a malfunction. When en-
gine control system diagnosis is finished, per- 6) Turn the neutral position switch to ON using se-
form the VDC memory clearance procedure of lect lever or shift lever.
self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25, 7) Depress the brake pedal to turn the brake switch
Clear Memory Mode.> ON. (CVT model)
8) Keep the engine speed in 2,500 3,000 rpm
range for 40 seconds.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-43
12LE_US.book 44
Inspection Mode
9) Place the select lever or shift lever in D position

(CVT model) or 1st gear (MT model) and drive the
vehicle at 5 to 10 km/h (3 to 6 MPH).
NOTE:
For AWD model, release the parking brake.
this does not indicate a malfunction. When engine
control system diagnosis is finished, perform the
VDC memory clearance procedure of self-diagno-
sis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25, Clear Memory
Mode.>
10) Using the general scan tool, check for DTC and
record the result(s).
NOTE:
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-78, List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-44
12LE_US.book 45
Drive Cycle
12.Drive Cycle
A: PROCEDURE
It is necessary to perform the drive cycle listed below if DTC is not found in the Inspection Mode. It is possible
to complete diagnosis of the DTC by performing the indicated drive cycle. After the repair for the DTC, per-
form a necessary drive cycle and make sure the function recovers and the DTC is recorded.
1. PREPARATION FOR DRIVE CYCLE
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more and fuel remains approx. half [20 40 2 (5.3 10.6 US
gal, 4.4 8.8 Imp gal)].
2) After performing the diagnostics and Clear Memory Mode, check that no DTC remains. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is removed.
NOTE:
Perform the drive cycle after warming up the engine except when the engine coolant temperature at en-
gine start is specified.
Perform the drive cycle twice if the DTC in the list is marked with *. After completing the first drive cycle,
stop the engine and perform second diagnosis in same condition.
2. DRIVE CYCLE A
DTC Item Condition
Engine coolant temperature at
*P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control engine start is less than 20C
(68F).
*P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Temperature for Stable Operation
Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulat-
*P0128
ing Temperature)
*P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 Sensor2)
*P014C O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P014D O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P015A O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P015B O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
Complete diagnosis with drive
*P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1)
cycle B or C as well.
*P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1)
*P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Circuit Range/Performance
*P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected
*P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
*P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak) engine start is less than 30C
(86F).
*P0451 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor
*P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) engine start is less than 30C
(86F).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-45
12LE_US.book 46
Drive Cycle
DTC Item Condition

*P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off) engine start is less than 30C
(86F).
*P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function Problem
*P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Lean (Bank 1)
*P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too Rich (Bank 1)
Diagnostic procedure:
1) Drive for 20 minutes or more at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for one minute.
3. DRIVE CYCLE B
DTC Item Condition
cycle A or C as well.
*P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent
*P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected
*P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher Than Expected
1) Drive at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for ten minutes.
4. DRIVE CYCLE C
DTC Item Condition
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 1)
P0028 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Range/Performance (Bank 2)
*P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correlation
P0076 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low (Bank 1)
P0082 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit Low (Bank 2)
*P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/Performance
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P013A O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
*P013B O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
*P013E O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
*P013F O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-46
12LE_US.book 47
Drive Cycle
DTC Item Condition

cycle A or B as well.
*P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit Malfunction (Low Input)
P1493 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit Malfunction (High Input)
Drive according to the drive pattern described below.
(H)
(C)
97 (60)
(D) (F) (G)
64 (40)
(B) (E)
(A)
0
50 100 150 (I)
EN-00842
(A) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (D) Decelerate with fully closed throt- (G) Stop the vehicle with throttle fully
more. tle to 64 km/h (40 MPH) or less. closed.
(B) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (E) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 64 (H) Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
or more within 20 seconds. km/h (40 MPH) or less.
(C) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 97 (F) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (I) Sec.
km/h (60 MPH) or more. or more within 10 seconds.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-47
12LE_US.book 48
Drive Cycle
5. DRIVE CYCLE D
DTC Item Condition
*P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit Range/Performance
NOTE:
In drive cycle D, one drive cycle will be established when both the drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis have
completed.
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure of the items below before starting the engine.
Engine coolant temperature is less than 30C (86F).
Remaining fuel is 10 2 (2.6 US gal, 2.2 Imp gal) or more.
Battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Idle the engine until engine coolant temperature is at least 10C (18F) higher than it was when engine
started.
3) After the engine has reached the state of procedure 2), idle the engine for another 5 minutes or more.
STUCK DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure that the battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Drive for approximately 50 2 (13.2 US gal, 11 Imp gal) of fuel.
NOTE:
It is acceptable to drive the vehicle intermittently.
Do not disconnect the battery terminals during stuck diagnosis. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the
battery terminals.)
6. DRIVE CYCLE E
DTC Item Condition
*P0461 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Range/Performance
3) Drive for approximately 30 2 (7.9 US gal, 6.6 Imp gal) of fuel.
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the battery terminals while diagnosing. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the bat-
tery terminals.)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-48
12LE_US.book 49
Drive Cycle
7. DRIVE CYCLE F
DTC Item Condition
*P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance
1) Make sure that the engine coolant temperature is less than 30C (86F).
2) Drive according to the drive pattern described below.
(A)
(2) (4) (6)

80 km/h
(50 MPH)
0
(3) (5) (7) (B)
(1)
EN-07588
(A) Vehicle speed (B) Elapsed time
(1) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (4) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a (6) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a
more after engine start. constant speed of 80 km/h (50 constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more. MPH) or more.
(2) Drive for 8 minutes or more at a (5) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 (7) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 sec-
constant speed of 80 km/h (50 seconds or more. onds.
MPH) or more.
(3) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30
seconds or more.
NOTE:
There is no given transition time between idling and cruising.
Driving at constant speed only on a downhill causes smaller engine load and may result in failure to obtain
a right diagnostic result.
When the engine stops while performing drive cycle F, perform it again from the state of procedure 1).
EN(H4SO)(diag)-49
12LE_US.book 50
Drive Cycle
8. DRIVE CYCLE H
DTC Item Condition
*P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance
*P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance
2) With the ignition switch ON (engine OFF), read the engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature and
fuel temperature. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE),
3) If the values from step 2) satisfy the following two conditions, idle the engine for one minute.
Condition:
|Engine coolant temperature Intake air temperature| 5C (9F)
|Engine coolant temperature Fuel temperature| 2C (3.6F)
NOTE:
If the conditions are not satisfied, turn the ignition switch to OFF and wait until the parameters are satisfied.
For CVT models, hold the select lever to P range or N range at idling, and for MT models, the shift lever
in the neutral position at idling.
9. DRIVE CYCLE J
DTC Item Condition
P2610 ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance
1) Idle the engine for 15 minutes or more.

3) After 6 hours passed from the start of step 2), read the temporary code using the Subaru Select Monitor.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-39, OPERATION, Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-50
12LE_US.book 51
Clear Memory Mode

13.Clear Memory Mode

A: OPERATION
NOTE:
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is
performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10
seconds or more after turning the ignition switch to
ON, and then start the engine.
For clear memory procedures using the general
scan tool, refer to General Scan Tool Instruction
Manual.
NOTE:
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is per-
formed after memory clearance. Wait for 10 sec-
onds or more after turning the ignition switch to ON,
and then start the engine.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51
12LE_US.book 52
System Operation Check Mode

14.System Operation Check

Mode
A: OPERATION
CAUTION:
After executing the system operation check
mode, execute the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, OPERATION, Clear Memo-
ry Mode.>
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to PC ap-
plication help for Subaru Select Monitor.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52
12LE_US.book 53
Malfunction Indicator Light

15.Malfunction Indicator Light

A: PROCEDURE
1. Activation of malfunction indicator light. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-53, ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT,
Malfunction Indicator Light.>

2. Malfunction indicator light does not come on. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-55, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Malfunction Indicator Light.>

3. Malfunction indicator light does not go off <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-57, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO
OFF, Malfunction Indicator Light.>

4. Malfunction indicator light does not blink <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-59, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK,

5. Malfunction indicator light remains blinking <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-61, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS
BLINKING, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
B: ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION 2) After starting the engine, the malfunction indica-

INDICATOR LIGHT tor light goes out. If it does not go off, any of the en-
gine and emission control system has malfunction.
1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine
OFF), the malfunction indicator light (A) in the com- (1)
(3)
bination meter illuminates.
NOTE: (4)
If the malfunction indicator light does not illuminate, (2)

perform diagnostics of the malfunction indicator (3)
light circuit or the combination meter circuit. <Ref. (4)

to EN(H4SO)(diag)-55, MALFUNCTION INDICA-
(5)
TOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON, Malfunction
Indicator Light.> (6)
EN-01679
(1) No faulty
(2) Trouble occurs
(3) ON
CHECK
ENGINE
(4) OFF
(5) Ignition switch ON
(6) Engine start
CHECK
ENGINE (A)
EN-07714
EN(H4SO)(diag)-53
12LE_US.book 54

3) If the diagnostic system detects a misfire which (3) Malfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of
could damage the catalyst, the malfunction indica- 3 Hz after diagnosis if there is no trouble. Mal-
tor light will blink at a cycle of 1 Hz. function indicator light illuminates if faulty.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4) (4)
(6)
(3)
(5)
EN-01680 EN-01681
(1) ON (1) ON
(2) OFF (2) OFF
(3) Ignition switch ON (3) Ignition switch ON
(4) Engine start (4) 1 second
(5) Misfire start
(6) 1 second
4) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) with igni-

tion switch to OFF.
CAUTION:
vehicle.
(A)
EN-07555
(1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON

(engine OFF), the malfunction indicator light il-
luminates.
(2) After the engine starts, malfunction indicator
light blinks in a cycle of 0.5 Hz. (During diagno-
sis)
EN(H4SO)(diag)-54
12LE_US.book 55

C: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON

TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine OFF), malfunction indicator light does not illuminate.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
F/B No. 5 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3
19
COMBINATION : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

METER
* ARRANGEMENT
EC EC : EXCEPT FOR C6 MODEL

i10
C6
DRIVE CIRCUIT C6 : C6 MODEL

39
6
M/B
DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE B138
FUSE No. 36
i3 1 2
*
18
B38
E *
B33
C34
C4
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B72 B38
1 2 3 1 2
B: B135 C: B136
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B138 i10 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
EN-09180
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK VEHICLE SPECIFICATION. Is the vehicle except for C6 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
model?
2 CHECK DTC. Is DTC of LAN system dis- Check the appro- Replace the meter
played? <Ref. to LAN(diag)-10, priate DTC using case assembly of
OPERATION, Read Diagnostic the List of Diag- combination meter.
Trouble Code (DTC).> nostic Trouble <Ref. to IDI-21,
Code (DTC). Combination
<Ref. to Meter.>
LAN(diag)-32, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-55
12LE_US.book 56

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 7. Go to step 4.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM.
4) Measure the voltage between ECM connec-
tor and chassis ground.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN COMBINA- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Check the follow-
TION METER AND IGNITION SWITCH CON- ing item and repair
NECTOR. if necessary.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. NOTE:
2) Remove the combination meter. <Ref. to Blown out of fuse
IDI-21, Combination Meter.> Open circuit or
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. short circuit to
4) Measure the voltage between combination ground in harness
meter connector and chassis ground. of power supply
Connector & terminal circuit
(i10) No. 19 (+) Chassis ground ():
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 6. Repair the harness
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. and connector.
Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and combination meter connector. In this case, repair
Connector & terminal the following item:
(B135) No. 33 (i10) No. 6: Open circuit in
harness between
ECM and combi-
nation meter con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of combi- Repair the poor Replace the meter
Check for poor contact of combination meter nation meter connector? contact of combi- case assembly of
connector. nation meter con- combination meter.
nector. <Ref. to IDI-21,
Combination
Meter.>
7 CHECK ECM CONNECTOR. Is the ECM connector correctly Go to step 8. Connect the ECM
Check the connection of ECM connector. connected? connector cor-
rectly.
8 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Does the malfunction indicator Repair the poor Replace the ECM.
Check for poor connection by shaking or pulling light illuminate? contact of ECM <Ref. to
ECM connector and harness. connector. FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-56
12LE_US.book 57

D: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF

TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Although malfunction indicator light comes on when the engine runs, DTC is not shown on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool display.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
1 3
19

METER
* ARRANGEMENT

i10
C6

39
6
M/B
DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE B138
FUSE No. 36
i3 1 2
*
18
B38
E *
B33
C34
C4
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B72 B38
1 2 3 1 2
B: B135 C: B136
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B138 i10 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
EN-09180
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK DTC. Is DTC of engine or LAN sys- Check the appro- Go to step 2.
tem displayed? <Ref. to priate DTC using
EN(H4SO)(diag)-39, OPERA- the List of Diag-
TION, Read Diagnostic Trouble nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).> Code (DTC).
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
78, List of Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).> <Ref. to
LAN(diag)-32, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-57
12LE_US.book 58

Step Check Yes No

model?
3 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Does the malfunction indicator Replace the ECM.
Replace the meter
Perform the self-diagnosis for combination light illuminate and go off nor- <Ref. to case assembly of
meter system. <Ref. to IDI-6, SELF-DIAGNO- mally? FU(H4SO)-46,combination meter.
SIS DISPLAY MODE, OPERATION, Combina- Engine Control
<Ref. to IDI-21,
tion Meter System.> Module (ECM).>
Combination
Meter.>
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 5. Replace the ECM.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. FU(H4SO)-46,
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. Engine Control
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Module (ECM).>
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the meter Repair the ground
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. more? case assembly of short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. combination meter. ness between
2) Remove the combination meter. <Ref. to <Ref. to IDI-21, ECM and combi-
IDI-21, Combination Meter.> Combination nation meter con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Meter.> nector.
chassis ground.
(B135) No. 33 Chassis ground:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-58
12LE_US.book 59

E: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is open.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light does not blink during Inspection Mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
1 3
19

METER
* ARRANGEMENT

i10
C6

39
6
M/B
DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE B138
FUSE No. 36
i3 1 2
*
18
B38
E *
B33
C34
C4
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B72 B38
1 2 3 1 2
B: B135 C: B136
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B138 i10 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
EN-09180
EN(H4SO)(diag)-59
12LE_US.book 60

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. Repair the mal-
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? function indicator
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. light circuit. <Ref.
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is to
removed. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) 55, MALFUNC-
TION INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Mal-
function Indicator
Light.>
model?
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Does the malfunction indicator Repair the ground Go to step 4.
COMBINATION METER CONNECTOR. light illuminate? short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ness between
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. ECM and combi-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nation meter con-
nector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND DE- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
LIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. In this case, repair
3) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. the following item:
CAUTION: Open circuit of
Do not use any fuses that are installed on harness between
the vehicle. ECM and delivery
4) Measure the resistance of harness between (test) mode fuse
ECM connectors. Poor contact of
Connector & terminal joint connector
(B136) No. 34 (B136) No. 4:
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the ECM.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM <Ref. to
connector. FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-60
12LE_US.book 61

F: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS BLINKING

DIAGNOSIS:
The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is short-circuited to ground.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light blinks when delivery (test) mode fuse is not connected.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
1 3
19

METER
* ARRANGEMENT

i10
C6

39
6
M/B
DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE B138
FUSE No. 36
i3 1 2
*
18
B38
E *
B33
C34
C4
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B72 B38
1 2 3 1 2
B: B135 C: B136
4 5 6 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
13 14 15 16 17 18 19
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
B138 i10 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
5 6 7 8 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
EN-09180
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK DELIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. System is normal.
1) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is light blink? NOTE:
removed. Malfunction indica-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor light blinks at a
cycle of 3 Hz when
delivery (test)
mode fuse is at-
tached.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-61
12LE_US.book 62

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND DE- Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the ECM. Repair the short
LIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. more? <Ref. to circuit to ground in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. FU(H4SO)-46, harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. Engine Control ECM and delivery
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Module (ECM).> (test) mode fuse.
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-62
12LE_US.book 63
Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

16.Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

A: PROCEDURE
1. Check of the fuel amount

2. Inspection of starter motor circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-64, STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting
Failure.>

3. Inspection of ECM power supply and ground line <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-68, CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE
OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM), Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>

4. Inspection of ignition control system <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-70, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>

5. Inspection of fuel pump circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-72, FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>

6. Inspection of fuel injector circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-74, FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Fail-
ure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-63
12LE_US.book 64

B: STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51,
Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2
IGNITION SWITCH
B72
STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT
B12 T3 T7
CVT
2
CLUTCH STROKE
SENSOR (CLUTCH STARTER MOTOR
MT
START SWITCH)
B501
CVT
1
CVT
B14
MT M
B26
C16
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07701
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BATTERY. Is the voltage 12 V or more? Go to step 2. Charge or replace
Check the battery voltage. the battery.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF STARTER MOTOR. Does the starter motor oper- Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
ate?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-64
12LE_US.book 65

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? <Ref. to Check the appro- The circuit has
EN(H4SO)(diag)-39, OPERA- priate DTC using returned to a nor-
TION, Read Diagnostic Trouble the List of Diag- mal condition at
Code (DTC).> nostic Trouble this time. Repro-
Code (DTC). duce the failure,
<Ref. to and then perform
EN(H4SO)(diag)- the diagnosis
78, List of Diagnos- again.
tic Trouble Code NOTE:
(DTC).> In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
short circuit of har-
ness may be the
cause.
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the starter Go to step 5.
TOR. motor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. SC(H4SO)-9,
2) Disconnect the connector from starter Starter.>
motor.
3) Turn the ignition switch to START.
4) Measure the voltage between the starter
motor connector and the engine ground.
(B14) No. 1 (+) Engine ground ():
NOTE:
For CVT model, place the select lever in P
range or N range. For MT model, depress the
clutch pedal.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the power
AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR. supply circuit.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition
switch.
3) Measure the voltage between ignition
switch connector and chassis ground.
6 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 7. Replace the igni-
Measure the resistance between ignition switch tion switch. <Ref.
terminals after turning the ignition switch to to SL-58,
START position. REPLACEMENT,
Terminals Ignition Key Lock.>
No. 3 No. 2:
No. 3 No. 6:
7 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 8. Repair open or
LAY. short circuit to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ground in harness
2) Remove the starter relay. between starter
3) Connect the connector to ignition switch. relay and ignition
4) Measure the input voltage between starter switch connector.
relay connector and chassis ground after turn-
ing the ignition switch to START position.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-65
12LE_US.book 66

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK STARTER RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 9. Replace the starter
1) Connect the battery to starter relay termi- relay. <Ref. to
nals No. 1 and No. 2. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Measure the resistance between starter 9, Electrical Com-
relay terminals. ponent Location.>
Terminals
No. 3 No. 4:
9 CHECK TRANSMISSION TYPE. Is the transmission type CVT? Go to step 10. Go to step 14.
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 11. Repair the open
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. starter relay con-
3) Measure the resistance of harness connec- nector.
tor between ECM and starter relay.
(B493) No. 1 (B135) No. 26:
11 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 12. Repair the harness
LAY AND INHIBITOR SWITCH CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connector from inhibitor In this case, repair
switch. the following item:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between Open circuit in
starter relay connector and inhibitor relay con- harness between
nector. starter relay con-
Connector & terminal nector and inhibitor
(B493) No. 3 (T7) No. 6: switch connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN INHIBITOR Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 13. Repair the harness
SWITCH AND STARTER MOTOR. and connector.
Measure the resistance of harness between the NOTE:
inhibitor switch and starter motor. In this case, repair
(T7) No. 9 (B14) No. 1: Open circuit in
harness between
inhibitor switch
connector and
starter motor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
13 CHECK INHIBITOR SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Check the ECM Replace the inhibi-
1) Place the select lever in P range or N power supply and tor switch. <Ref. to
range. ground line. <Ref. CVT-95, Inhibitor
2) Measure the resistance between inhibitor to Switch.>
switch terminals. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Terminals 68, CHECK
No. 6 No. 9: POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-66
12LE_US.book 67

Step Check Yes No

14 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 15. Repair the open
LAY AND CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR CON- circuit in harness
NECTOR. between starter
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. relay connector
2) Disconnect the connector from clutch stroke and clutch stroke
sensor. sensor connector.
3) Measure the resistance of harness between
starter relay connector and clutch stroke sensor
connector.
(B493) No. 1 (B501) No. 2:
CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. between ECM and
2) Measure the resistance of harness between clutch stroke sen-
ECM and clutch stroke sensor connector. sor connector.
(B135) No. 26 (B501) No. 1:
16 CHECK CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 17. Replace the clutch
Measure the resistance between clutch stroke stroke sensor.
sensor terminals while depressing the clutch. <Ref. to PB(diag)-
Terminals 10, Electrical Com-
No. 1 No. 2: ponent Location.>
17 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN STARTER RE- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Check the ECM Repair the open
LAY AND STARTER MOTOR. power supply and circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ground line. <Ref. ness between
starter relay connector and starter motor. to starter relay con-
Connector & terminal EN(H4SO)(diag)- nector and starter
(B493) No. 3 (B14) No. 1: 68, CHECK motor.
POWER SUPPLY
AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-67
12LE_US.book 68

C: CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MOD-

ULE (ECM)
CAUTION:
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, PROCEDURE,
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
B220 F/B No. 12 SBF-5 MAIN SBF
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7
C2
A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
B21
40
35
34
37
36
E2
E E
B21 A: B134 B: B135 B220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 5 9 13
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B72 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07702
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK MAIN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 2. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main relay. FU(H4SO)-47,
3) Connect the battery to main relay terminals Main Relay.>
No. 1 and No. 2.
4) Measure the resistance between main relay
terminals.
Terminals
No. 3 No. 4:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-68
12LE_US.book 69

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 ? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and chassis ground. In this case, repair
(B134) No. 3 Chassis ground: Open circuit in
(B134) No. 4 Chassis ground: harness between
(B134) No. 6 Chassis ground: ECM and engine
(B137) No. 1 Chassis ground: ground terminal
(B137) No. 3 Chassis ground: Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the open or
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ground short circuit
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of harness of
chassis ground. power supply cir-
Connector & terminal cuit.
4 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF MAIN RELAY. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Repair the open or
Measure the voltage between main relay con- ground short circuit
nector and chassis ground. of harness of
Connector & terminal power supply cir-
(B220) No. 1 (+) Chassis ground (): cuit.
5 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. circuit in harness
2) Install the main relay. between ECM and
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. main relay connec-
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and tor.
chassis ground.
6 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check ignition con- Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol system. <Ref. and connector.
2) Connect the connector to ECM. to NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4SO)(diag)- In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and 70, IGNITION the following item:
chassis ground. CONTROL SYS- Open circuit in
Connector & terminal TEM, Diagnostics harness between
(B136) No. 1 (+) Chassis ground (): for Engine Starting ECM and main re-
(B137) No. 7 (+) Chassis ground (): Failure.> lay connector
Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
Poor contact of
ECM connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-69
12LE_US.book 70

D: IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-40, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
M/B No. 14 B134 ECM
21
22
31
32
E
IG RELAY
8
7
B220 B21
49
32
33
11
5
E2
E31 E32 E33 E34

1
3
E
IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL IGNITION COIL

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E31 E33 B21 B220 B134
E32 E34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
1
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
2
42 43 44 45 46 47
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07703
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SPARK PLUG CONDITION. Is the spark plug condition nor- Go to step 2. Replace the spark
1) Remove the spark plug. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)- mal? plug. <Ref. to
3, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> IG(H4SO)-3,
2) Check the spark plug condition. <Ref. to Spark Plug.>
IG(H4SO)-3, INSPECTION, Spark Plug.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-70
12LE_US.book 71

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM FOR SPARKS. Does spark occur at each cylin- Check fuel pump Go to step 3.
1) Connect the spark plug to ignition coil. der? system. <Ref. to
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-
FU(H4SO)-53, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- 72, FUEL PUMP
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> CIRCUIT, Diag-
3) Contact the spark plug thread portion to nostics for Engine
engine. Starting Failure.>
4) While opening the throttle valve fully, crank
the engine to check that spark occurs at each
cylinder.
3 CHECK IGNITION COIL POWER SUPPLY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
CIRCUIT. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil. In this case, repair
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between ignition coil Open circuit or
connector and engine ground. short circuit to
Connector & terminal ground in harness
(E31) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): of power supply
(E32) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): circuit
(E33) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): Poor contact of
(E34) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): coupling connector
Blown out of fuse
(M/B No. 14)
4 CHECK HARNESS OF IGNITION COIL Is the resistance less than 5 ? Go to step 5. Repair the open
GROUND CIRCUIT. circuit in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ignition
2) Measure the resistance of harness between coil connector and
ignition coil connector and engine ground. engine grounding
Connector & terminal terminal.
(E31) No. 3 Engine ground:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 6. Repair the harness
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and ignition coil connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal Open circuit of
(B134) No. 21 (E31) No. 2: harness between
(B134) No. 22 (E32) No. 2: ECM and ignition
(B134) No. 31 (E33) No. 2: coil connector
(B134) No. 32 (E34) No. 2: Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IG- Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 7. Repair the ground
NITION COIL CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance of harness between ness between
ECM and engine ground. ECM and ignition
Connector & terminal: coil connector.
(B134) No. 21 Engine ground:
7 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the igni-
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM tion coil. <Ref. to
connector. IG(H4SO)-5, Igni-
tion Coil.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-71
12LE_US.book 72

E: FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
M/B No. 20
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
1 3
FUEL PUMP RELAY
21
17
19 33
20 E
B136 ECM
B220
B38
14
i3
i155
2
R333
FUEL PUMP
5 1
M 6 2
R58 R57 R15
B72 R58 B38 B136 B220
1 2
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
4 5 6 3 4 5 6 17
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
5 6 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
i155
R57
1 2
3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11
EN-07704
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATING SOUND OF FUEL Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Go to step 2.
PUMP. ating sound? injector circuit.
Check if the fuel pump operates for two seconds <Ref. to
when turning the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
NOTE: 74, FUEL INJEC-
Fuel pump operation can be executed using the TOR CIRCUIT,
Subaru Select Monitor. Diagnostics for
For detailed procedures, refer to SYSTEM OP- Engine Starting
ERATION CHECK MODE. <Ref. to Failure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Operation Check
Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-72
12LE_US.book 73

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF FUEL PUMP. Is the resistance less than 5 ? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. and connector.
2) Remove the fuel pump access hole lid. NOTE:
3) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump. In this case, repair
4) Measure the resistance of harness connec- the following item:
tor between fuel pump and chassis ground. Open circuit in
Connector & terminal harness between
(R58) No. 6 Chassis ground: fuel pump connec-
tor and chassis
grounding terminal
Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FUEL PUMP. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the fuel Go to step 4.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. pump. <Ref. to
2) Measure the voltage between fuel pump FU(H4SO)-65,
connector and chassis ground. Fuel Pump.>
(R58) No. 5 (+) Chassis ground ():
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 5. Repair the harness
AND FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. and connector.
fuel pump connector and fuel pump relay con- the following item:
nector. Open circuit in
(R58) No. 5 (B220) No. 20: fuel pump connec-
tor and fuel pump
relay connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 6. Repair the short
AND FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
fuel pump and fuel pump relay connector. fuel pump connec-
Connector & terminal tor and fuel pump
(R58) No. 5 Chassis ground: relay connector.
6 CHECK FUEL PUMP RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 7. Replace the fuel
1) Remove the fuel pump relay. pump relay. <Ref.
2) Connect the battery to fuel pump relay ter- to FU(H4SO)-49,
minals No. 17 and No. 19. Fuel Pump Relay.>
3) Measure the resistance between fuel pump
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 20 No. 21:
FUEL PUMP RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Measure the resistance of harness between fuel pump relay
ECM and fuel pump relay connector. connector.
(B136) No. 33 (B220) No. 19:
8 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF FUEL PUMP Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the open or
RELAY. contact of ECM ground short circuit
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector. of harness of
2) Measure the voltage between fuel pump power supply cir-
relay connector and chassis ground. cuit.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-73
12LE_US.book 74

F: FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
Check or repair only faulty parts.
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2
FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR FUEL INJECTOR

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B21 B134 B220
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07705
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATION OF EACH FUEL INJEC- Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Go to step 2.
TOR. ating sound? pressure. <Ref. to
While cranking the engine, check each fuel ME(H4SO)-28,
injector emits operating sound. Use a sound INSPECTION,
scope or attach a screwdriver to the injector to Fuel Pressure.>
listen to sounds for this check.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-74
12LE_US.book 75

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EACH FUEL IN- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
JECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector. In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between fuel injector Open circuit in
connector and the engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal main relay connec-
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): tor and fuel injector
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): connector
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): Poor contact of
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): main relay connec-
tor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. In this case, repair
3) Measure the resistance of harness between the following item:
ECM and fuel injector connector. Open circuit in
#1 (B134) No. 10 (E5) No. 1: ECM and fuel in-
#2 (B134) No. 11 (E16) No. 1: jector connector
#3 (B134) No. 12 (E6) No. 1: Poor contact of
#4 (B134) No. 13 (E17) No. 1: coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 5. Repair the short
FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal injector connector.
#1 (B134) No. 10 Chassis ground:
5 CHECK EACH FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 20 ? Go to step 6. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between each fuel fuel injector. <Ref.
injector terminals. to FU(H4SO)-37,
Terminals Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 No. 2:
6 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Inspection using
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM General Diagnos-
connector. tic Table. <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
292, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-75
12LE_US.book 76
Diagnostic Procedure for Subaru Select Monitor Communication

17.Diagnostic Procedure for Subaru Select Monitor Communication

A: COMMUNICATION FOR INITIALIZING IMPOSSIBLE
DIAGNOSIS:
Open or short circuit in data link connector
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Subaru Select Monitor communication failure
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
M/B No. 12
ECM
E
A: B134 B: B135
C: B136 D: B137
B14
C4
D1
A3
A6
D3
A4
B546
* *
*
* B21
34
35
36
37
40
B138 E2
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
16
7
4
5
B40 : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

E * ARRANGEMENT
A: B134 B: B135
B138 B546
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B21
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
C: B136 D: B137
B40 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-09298
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT. Does SDI or general scan tool Go to step 4. Go to step 2.
Connect the SDI (Subaru Diagnosis Interface) turn ON?
or general scan tool to data link connector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-76
12LE_US.book 77

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the power
Measure the voltage between data link connec- supply circuit.
tor and chassis ground. NOTE:
Connector & terminal In this case, repair
(B40) No. 16 (+) Chassis ground (): the following item:
Open or ground
ness between bat-
tery and data link
connector
Blown out of fuse
(M/B No. 12)
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DATA LINK Is the resistance less than 5 ? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CONNECTOR AND CHASSIS GROUND. contact of data link and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. connector. NOTE:
data link connector and chassis ground. the following item:
(B40) No. 5 Chassis ground: ECM and data link
connector
Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and engine
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
DATA LINK CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM, TCM, In this case, repair
VDC CM, airbag CM and body integrated unit. the following item:
When disconnecting the connector from air- harness between
bag CM, always follow the precautions on ECM and data link
AB section. <Ref. to AB-9, CAUTION, Gener- connector
al Description.> Poor contact of
3) Measure the resistance of harness between coupling connector
ECM and data link connector.
(B135) No. 14 (B40) No. 7:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Repair the poor Repair the ground
DATA LINK CONNECTOR. more? contact of the ECM short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between data link con- or data link con- ness between
nector and chassis ground. nector. ECM and data link
Connector & terminal connector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-77
12LE_US.book 78
List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

18.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Note
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-86, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLE-
Range/Performance (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure
with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Range/Performance (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-90, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
Sensor 1) CUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-92, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-94, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-96, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-98, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIR-
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correla- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-100, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSI-
tion TION CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
Low (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High (Bank 1) NOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
Low (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High (Bank 2) NOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-109, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-110, DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Input CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-112, DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW
Input CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-114, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
ric Pressure Circuit Low Input SURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baromet- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-116, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRES-
ric Pressure Circuit High Input SURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-78
12LE_US.book 79

DTC Item Note

P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-118, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
cuit Range/Performance SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
cuit Low SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
cuit High SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-123, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
Low TURE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-125, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA-
High TURE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-127, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
A Circuit Low SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
A Circuit High SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-131, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEM-
Closed Loop Fuel Control PERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Procedure
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Tempera- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-132, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOL-
ture for Stable Operation ANT TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-132, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
Temperature Below Thermostat Reg- (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING
ulating Temperature) TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-133, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
1 Sensor 1) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-135, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-137, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-138, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIV-
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-140, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
ble Code (DTC).>
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-142, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P013A O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-144, DTC P013A O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE
Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2) - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P013B O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-145, DTC P013B O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE
Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2) - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
EN(H4SO)(diag)-79
12LE_US.book 80

DTC Item Note

P013E O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-145, DTC P013E O2 SENSOR DELAYED
to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2) RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure
P013F O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-145, DTC P013F O2 SENSOR DELAYED
to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2) RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-146, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIV-
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) ITY DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-148, DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT
Sensor2) (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P014C O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-149, DTC P014C O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE
Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1) - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P014D O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-149, DTC P014D O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE
Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1) - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P015A O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-149, DTC P015A O2 SENSOR DELAYED
P015B O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-149, DTC P015B O2 SENSOR DELAYED
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-149, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1),
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-150, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1),
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-152, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Range/Performance A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Low Input A CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
High Input A CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-157, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
cuit Range/Performance SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0197 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-158, DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0198 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-160, DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0201 Injector #1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-162, DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1, Diagnostic Proce-
B Circuit Low SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
EN(H4SO)(diag)-80
12LE_US.book 81

DTC Item Note

B Circuit High SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-169, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-175, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
or Single Sensor) LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-177, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
or Single Sensor) HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-179, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SEN-
SOR A CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-181, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SEN-
Range/Performance SOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor A Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-182, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
(Bank 1 or Single Sensor) A CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor A Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-184, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
Range/Performance (Bank 1 or Single A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR),
Sensor) Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0351 Ignition Coil A Primary/Secondary <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-186, DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/SEC-
Circuit ONDARY CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0352 Ignition Coil B Primary/Secondary <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-188, DTC P0352 IGNITION COIL B PRIMARY/SEC-
Circuit ONDARY CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0353 Ignition Coil C Primary/Secondary <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-188, DTC P0353 IGNITION COIL C PRIMARY/
Circuit SECONDARY CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0354 Ignition Coil D Primary/Secondary <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-188, DTC P0354 IGNITION COIL D PRIMARY/
(DTC).>
P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-189, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-190, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
Threshold (Bank 1) BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-194, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
tem Leak Detected (Small Leak) TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Procedure
tem Vent Control Circuit Open TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Procedure
tem Vent Control Circuit Shorted TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Proce-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-81
12LE_US.book 82

DTC Item Note

tem Pressure Sensor TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
tem Pressure Sensor High Input TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
tem Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Proce-
tem Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/ TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic
Off) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-209, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
Control Valve Circuit Low TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-211, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
Control Valve Circuit High TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-213, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIR-
Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-213, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIR-
CUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-213, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIR-
CUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-214, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor A <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-214, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A,
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-215, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Than Expected RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-216, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM
Than Expected RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-217, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CON-
Performance TROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-225, DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING
mance PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-226, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT,
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to IM(diag)-16, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diagnos-
tic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-228, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Access Memory (RAM) Error RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-228, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Memory (ROM) Error READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
EN(H4SO)(diag)-82
12LE_US.book 83

DTC Item Note

P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-229, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Per- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-230, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
formance (Bank 1) TROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-230, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYS-
Request) TEM (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-231, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(AT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low (MT <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-233, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
Model) CUIT LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-235, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(AT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High (MT <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-237, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
Model) CUIT HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-239, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
mance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-241, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/
mance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-242, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE,
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-243, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
Problem VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-244, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL
Malfunction (Low Input) #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Malfunction (High Input) #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
EN(H4SO)(diag)-83
12LE_US.book 84

DTC Item Note

P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-251, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT
LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-253, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to IM(diag)-17, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to IM(diag)-19, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY,
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure (Except Antenna <Ref. to IM(diag)-20, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
Circuit) ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE, Diag-
nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-24, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Procedure
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-255, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Lean (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System Too <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-261, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Rich (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-267, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CON-
Range/Performance TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure
Low TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High TROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor A <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-275, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
Minimum Stop Performance SENSOR A MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
D Circuit Low Input SENSOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
D Circuit High Input SENSOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
E Circuit Low Input SENSOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
E Circuit High Input SENSOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with
A/B Voltage Correlation SENSOR/SWITCH A/B VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure
D/E Voltage Correlation SENSOR/SWITCH D/E VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure
EN(H4SO)(diag)-84
12LE_US.book 85

DTC Item Note

P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-289, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-289, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
CUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-290, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIR-
CUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2610 ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off Timer <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-290, DTC P2610 ECM/PCM INTERNAL ENGINE
Performance OFF TIMER PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus Off Detection <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-291, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS OFF
DETECTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-291, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-291, DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-291, DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-291, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL,
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-291, DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL,
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-291, DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL,
EN(H4SO)(diag)-85
12LE_US.book 86
Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

19.Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 1)
DTC DETECTING CONDITION:
Immediately at fault recognition
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-9, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B137 ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
14
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
21
E2
E71
1
VVL DIAGNOSIS
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH RH
EN-07708
EN(H4SO)(diag)-86
12LE_US.book 87

Step Check Yes No

VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL and connector.
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Warm up the engine. In this case, repair
2) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the following item:
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM Open circuit in
and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure harness between
switch RH. ECM and variable
4) Measure the resistance of harness between valve lift diagnosis
ECM and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- oil pressure switch
sure switch RH connector. RH connector
Connector & terminal Poor contact of
(B137) No. 14 (E71) No. 1: coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 3. Repair the ground
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL more? short circuit in har-
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between the variable ECM and variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch RH con- valve lift diagnosis
nector and engine ground. oil pressure switch
Connector & terminal RH connector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit to power
PRESSURE SWITCH RH CONNECTOR. supply in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. between ECM and
2) Measure the voltage between the variable variable valve lift
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch RH con- diagnosis oil pres-
nector and engine ground. sure switch RH
(E71) No. 1 (+) Engine ground ():
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Replace the oil End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to switching solenoid
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.> valve RH. <Ref. to
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC. ME(H4SO)-95, Oil
Switching Solenoid
Valve.> After
replacement, go to
the next step. Go to
step 5.
5 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Check for oil rout- End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to ing.
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-87
12LE_US.book 88

B: DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE (BANK 2)
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B137 ECM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
13
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
22
E2
E72
1
VVL DIAGNOSIS
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH LH
EN-07709
EN(H4SO)(diag)-88
12LE_US.book 89

Step Check Yes No

VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL and connector.
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. NOTE:
1) Warm up the engine. In this case, repair
3) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM Open circuit in
and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure harness between
switch LH. ECM and variable
4) Measure the resistance of harness between valve lift diagnosis
ECM and variable valve lift diagnosis oil pres- oil pressure switch
sure switch LH connector. LH connector
Connector & terminal Poor contact of
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL more? short circuit in har-
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between the variable ECM and variable
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch LH con- valve lift diagnosis
nector and engine ground. oil pressure switch
Connector & terminal LH connector.
VARIABLE VALVE LIFT DIAGNOSIS OIL circuit to power
PRESSURE SWITCH LH CONNECTOR. supply in harness
2) Measure the voltage between the variable variable valve lift
valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch LH con- diagnosis oil pres-
nector and engine ground. sure switch LH
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Replace the oil End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to switching solenoid
EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory Mode.> valve LH. <Ref. to
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC. ME(H4SO)-95, Oil
Switching Solenoid
Valve.> After
replacement, go to
the next step. Go to
step 5.
5 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? Check for oil rout- End.
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to ing.
2) After idling the engine, check the DTC.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-89
12LE_US.book 90

C: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detected when two consecutive driving cycles with fault occur.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-11, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-90
12LE_US.book 91

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Start and warm up the engine. In this case, repair
3) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and Open circuit in
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and front oxy-
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. gen (A/F) sensor
Connector & terminal connector
(B136) No. 18 (E24) No. 2:
(B136) No. 19 (E24) No. 1:
2 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance 2 3 ? Go to step 3. Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. sor. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-42,
No. 3 No. 4: Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the front
Check for poor contact of ECM and front oxygen front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- contact of ECM or oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector. nector? front oxygen (A/F) sor. <Ref. to
sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-42,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-91
12LE_US.book 92

D: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-92
12LE_US.book 93

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FRONT OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN (A/F) SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- In this case, repair
gen (A/F) sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Open circuit in
4) Measure the voltage between front oxygen harness between
(A/F) sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay connector
(E24) No. 4 (+) Engine ground (): and front oxygen
(A/F) sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Malfunction of A/
F, oxygen sensor
relay
TOR. NOTE:
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. In this case, repair
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Open circuit in
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and front oxy-
(B136) No. 5 (E24) No. 3: gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 6 (E24) No. 3: connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Measure the resistance of harness between and connector.
ECM and chassis ground. NOTE:
(B134) No. 3 Chassis ground: the following item:
(B134) No. 4 Chassis ground: Open circuit of
(B137) No. 3 Chassis ground: ground
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance 2 3 ? Repair the poor Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen contact of ECM oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. connector. sor. <Ref. to
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-93
12LE_US.book 94

E: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-94
12LE_US.book 95

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and front oxygen (A/F)
chassis ground. sensor connector.
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT FOR ECM. Is the resistance less than 5 ? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. contact of ECM and connector.
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. NOTE:
chassis ground. In this case, repair
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-95
12LE_US.book 96

F: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY BATTERY E25

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
SENSOR A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-96
12LE_US.book 97

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO REAR OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connector from rear oxygen In this case, repair
sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen harness between
sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay connector
(E25) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): and rear oxygen
sensor connector
Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. and connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and the following item:
oxygen sensor connector. Open circuit in
(B135) No. 6 (E25) No. 1: ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance 5 7 ? Repair the poor Replace the rear
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen contact of ECM oxygen sensor.
sensor connector terminals. connector. <Ref. to
No. 2 No. 1: Rear Oxygen Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-97
12LE_US.book 98

G: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
Step Check Yes No

REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between ECM and
chassis ground. rear oxygen sensor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-98
12LE_US.book 99

Step Check Yes No

1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. contact of ECM and connector.
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-99
12LE_US.book 100

H: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-21, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Are there holes, loose bolts or Repair the air Go to step 2.
disconnection of hose on air intake system.
intake system?
2 CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Is the value in Mani. Absolute Go to step 3. Replace the mani-
SENSOR. Pressure 73.3 106.6 kPa fold absolute pres-
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until (550 800 mmHg, 21.65 sure sensor. <Ref.
coolant temperature is higher than 75C 31.50 inHg) when the ignition is to FU(H4SO)-33,
(167F). turned ON, and 20.0 46.7 Manifold Absolute
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to P kPa (150 350 mmHg, 5.91 Pressure Sensor.>
range or N range, and for MT models, place 13.78 inHg) during idling?
the shift lever in the neutral position.
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF.
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
5) Read the value of Mani. Absolute Pres-
sure using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen-
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
General scan tool
General Scan Tool Instruction Manual.
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the value in Throttle Open- Go to step 4. Replace the elec-
Using the Subaru Select Monitor or a general ing Angle with the throttle fully tronic throttle con-
scan tool, read the value in Throttle Opening closed less than 5%? trol. <Ref. to
Angle. FU(H4SO)-15,
NOTE: Throttle Body.>
tor.>
General scan tool
4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the value in Throttle Open- Replace the mani- Replace the elec-
ing Angle with the throttle fully fold absolute pres- tronic throttle con-
open 85% or more? sure sensor. <Ref. trol. <Ref. to
to FU(H4SO)-33, FU(H4SO)-15,
Manifold Absolute Throttle Body.>
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-100
12LE_US.book 101

I: DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
15
7
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
23
24
E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E69
1 2
E69
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH
EN-07625
EN(H4SO)(diag)-101
12LE_US.book 102

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM the following item:
and oil switching solenoid valve RH. Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of harness between harness between
ECM and oil switching solenoid valve RH. ECM and oil
Connector & terminal switching solenoid
(B134) No. 7 (E69) No. 1: valve RH connec-
(B134) No. 15 (E69) No. 2: tor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 3. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- more? circuit to ground in
NECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and oil
chassis ground. switching solenoid
Connector & terminal valve RH connec-
(B134) No. 7 Chassis ground: tor.
3 CHECK OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE Is the resistance 6 12 ? Repair the poor Replace the oil
RH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve RH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve RH terminals. solenoid valve RH ME(H4SO)-95, Oil
Terminals connector. Switching Solenoid
No. 1 No. 2: Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-102
12LE_US.book 103

J: DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)

CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
15
7
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
23
24
E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E69
1 2
E69
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH
EN-07625
EN(H4SO)(diag)-103
12LE_US.book 104

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 2. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- circuit to power
NECTOR. supply in harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM oil switching sole-
and oil switching solenoid valve RH. noid valve RH con-
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE RH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
Measure the resistance of harness between In this case, repair
ECM and oil switching solenoid valve RH con- the following item:
nector. Open circuit in
(B134) No. 7 (E69) No. 1: ECM and oil
(B134) No. 15 (E69) No. 2: switching solenoid
valve RH connec-
tor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
RH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve RH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve RH terminals. solenoid valve RH ME(H4SO)-95, Oil
EN(H4SO)(diag)-104
12LE_US.book 105

K: DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2)

CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
14
5
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
27
28
E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E70
1 2
E70
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH
EN-07626
EN(H4SO)(diag)-105
12LE_US.book 106

Step Check Yes No

SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
and oil switching solenoid valve LH. Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
oil switching solenoid valve LH. ECM and oil
Connector & terminal switching solenoid
(B134) No. 5 (E70) No. 1: valve LH connec-
(B134) No. 14 (E70) No. 2: tor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 3. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and oil
chassis ground. switching solenoid
Connector & terminal valve LH connec-
(B134) No. 5 Chassis ground: tor.
LH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve LH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve LH terminals. solenoid valve LH ME(H4SO)-95, Oil
EN(H4SO)(diag)-106
12LE_US.book 107

L: DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2)

CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
14
5
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
27
28
E2 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E70
1 2
E70
1
OIL SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH
EN-07626
EN(H4SO)(diag)-107
12LE_US.book 108

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND OIL Is the voltage less than 1 V? Go to step 2. Repair the short
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- circuit to power
NECTOR. supply in harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM oil switching sole-
and oil switching solenoid valve LH. noid valve LH con-
chassis ground.
SWITCHING SOLENOID VALVE LH CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
Measure the resistance between ECM and oil In this case, repair
switching solenoid valve LH connector. the following item:
Connector & terminal Open circuit in
(B134) No. 14 (E70) No. 2: ECM and oil
switching solenoid
valve LH connec-
tor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
LH. contact of ECM switching solenoid
Measure the resistance between oil switching and oil switching valve LH. <Ref. to
solenoid valve LH terminals. solenoid valve LH ME(H4SO)-95, Oil
EN(H4SO)(diag)-108
12LE_US.book 109

M: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-25, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT
RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
Poor driving performance
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the mass
priate DTC using air flow and intake
the List of Diag- air temperature
nostic Trouble sensor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC). FU(H4SO)-32,
<Ref. to Mass Air Flow and
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Intake Air Temper-
78, List of Diagnos- ature Sensor.>
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-109
12LE_US.book 110

N: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2
* * : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
B83
C31
C10
C22
B30
C11
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08674
EN(H4SO)(diag)-110
12LE_US.book 111

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Air Flow Sensor Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. Voltage less than 0.2 V? detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Air Flow Sensor Volt- cuit has returned to
age using Subaru Select Monitor. a normal condition
NOTE: at this time. Repro-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to duce the failure,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. and then perform
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MASS AIR Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE and connector.
SENSOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass the following item:
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. Open circuit in
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. harness between
4) Measure the voltage between mass air flow main relay and
and intake air temperature sensor connector mass air flow and
and engine ground. intake air tempera-
Connector & terminal ture sensor con-
(B3) No. 3 (+) Engine ground (): nector
Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit in harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the mass air flow
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. and intake air tem-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between perature sensor
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- connector.
perature sensor connector.
(B136) No. 22 (B3) No. 5:
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and mass air
chassis ground. flow and intake air
Connector & terminal temperature sen-
(B136) No. 22 Chassis ground: sor connector.
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or air flow and intake
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and air temperature
tor. intake air tempera- sensor. <Ref. to
ture sensor con- FU(H4SO)-32,
nector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-111
12LE_US.book 112

O: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

*
B83
C31
C10
C22
B30
C11
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08674
EN(H4SO)(diag)-112
12LE_US.book 113

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Voltage 5 V or more? detected, the cir-
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the value of Air Flow Sensor Repair the short Go to step 3.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- Voltage 5 V or more? circuit of harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass mass air flow and
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. intake air tempera-
3) Start the engine. ture sensor con-
4) Read the value of Air Flow Sensor Volt- nector.
age using Subaru Select Monitor.
NOTE:
tor.>
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- and connector.
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor Open circuit in
connector and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and mass air
(B3) No. 4 Engine ground: flow and intake air
temperature sen-
sor connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mass Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of mass air flow and air flow and intake air tempera- contact of mass air air flow and intake
intake air temperature sensor connector. ture sensor connector? flow and intake air air temperature
temperature sen- sensor. <Ref. to
sor connector. FU(H4SO)-32,
Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-113
12LE_US.book 114

P: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-32, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE E21
SENSOR
1 2 3
2
1
3
E21
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
20
19
7
B21
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D20
A19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07628
EN(H4SO)(diag)-114
12LE_US.book 115

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Mani. Absolute Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. Pressure less than 13.3 kPa detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Mani. Absolute Pres- (100 mmHg, 3.94 inHg)? cuit has returned to
sure using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen- a normal condition
eral scan tool. at this time. Repro-
NOTE: duce the failure,
Subaru Select Monitor and then perform
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the diagnosis
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. again.
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
tor.> In this case, tem-
General scan tool porary poor con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tact of connector,
general scan tool operation manual. temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MANIFOLD Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold In this case, repair
absolute pressure sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Open circuit of
4) Measure the voltage between manifold harness between
absolute pressure sensor connector and ECM and manifold
engine ground. absolute pressure
Connector & terminal sensor connector.
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- and connector.
SOR CONNECTOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. the following item:
3) Measure the resistance of harness between Open circuit of
ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor harness between
connector. ECM and manifold
Connector & terminal absolute pressure
(B137) No. 20 (E21) No. 1: sensor connector.
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 5. Repair ground
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- more? short circuit of har-
SOR CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and manifold
chassis ground. absolute pressure
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of ECM and manifold manifold absolute pressure contact of ECM or fold absolute pres-
absolute pressure sensor connector. sensor connector? manifold absolute sure sensor. <Ref.
pressure sensor to FU(H4SO)-33,
connector. Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-115
12LE_US.book 116

Q: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-34, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE E21
SENSOR
1 2 3
2
1
3
E21
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
20
19
7
B21
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D20
A19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07628
EN(H4SO)(diag)-116
12LE_US.book 117

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Pressure 119.5 kPa (896.5 detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Mani. Absolute Pres- mmHg, 35.29 inHg) or more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the value of Mani. Absolute Repair the short Go to step 3.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- Pressure 119.5 kPa (896.5 circuit to power in
SOR CONNECTOR. mmHg, 35.29 inHg) or more? harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and manifold
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold absolute pressure
absolute pressure sensor. sensor connector.
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
manifold absolute pressure sensor connector Open circuit of
and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and manifold
(E21) No. 2 Engine ground: absolute pressure
sensor connector.
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mani- Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of manifold absolute fold absolute pressure sensor contact of manifold absolute pres-
pressure sensor connector. connector? fold absolute pressure sensor. <Ref.
sure sensor to FU(H4SO)-33,
connector. Manifold Absolute
Pressure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-117
12LE_US.book 118

R: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-36, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- Is the value of Coolant Temp. Replace the mass Check for DTC
TURE. 75C (167F) or more? air flow and intake P0125. <Ref. to
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. air temperature EN(H4SO)(diag)-
2) Read the value of Coolant Temp. using sensor. <Ref. to 131, DTC P0125
the Subaru Select Monitor or a general scan FU(H4SO)-32, INSUFFICIENT
tool. Mass Air Flow and COOLANT TEM-
NOTE: Intake Air Temper- PERATURE FOR
Subaru Select Monitor ature Sensor.> CLOSED LOOP
For detailed operation procedures, refer to FUEL CONTROL,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. Diagnostic Proce-
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- dure with Diagnos-
tor.> tic Trouble Code
General scan tool (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-118
12LE_US.book 119

S: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

*
B83
C31
C10
C22
B30
C11
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08674
EN(H4SO)(diag)-119
12LE_US.book 120

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Intake Air Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. Temp. 120C (248F) or detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Intake Air Temp. using more? cuit has returned to
the Subaru Select Monitor or a general scan a normal condition
tool. at this time. Repro-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the mass Repair the short
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? air flow and intake circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. air temperature harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor. <Ref. to ECM and mass air
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and FU(H4SO)-32, flow and intake air
the mass air flow and intake air temperature Mass Air Flow and temperature sen-
sensor. Intake Air Temper- sor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and ature Sensor.>
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-120
12LE_US.book 121

T: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

*
B83
C31
C10
C22
B30
C11
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B3 B: B135 C: B136 B220

B83
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08674
EN(H4SO)(diag)-121
12LE_US.book 122

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Temp. less than 40C ( detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Intake Air Temp. using 40F)? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Go to step 3.
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and
tor. intake air tempera-
ture sensor con-
nector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and the following item:
the mass air flow and intake air temperature Open circuit in
sensor. harness between
3) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and mass air
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- flow and intake air
perature sensor connector. temperature sen-
Connector & terminal sor connector
(B136) No. 31 (B3) No. 1: Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 (B3) No. 2: joint connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the mass
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness air flow and intake
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply air temperature
1) Connect all connectors. between ECM and sensor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. mass air flow and FU(H4SO)-32,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and intake air tempera- Mass Air Flow and
chassis ground. ture sensor con- Intake Air Temper-
Connector & terminal nector. ature Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-122
12LE_US.book 123

U: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-43, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
E8
E2
19
8
B21
D22
A29
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
B21
E8 A: B134 D: B137 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-08632
EN(H4SO)(diag)-123
12LE_US.book 124

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Coolant Temp. Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. 150C (302F) or more? detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Coolant Temp. using cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the Repair short cir-
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR more? engine coolant cuit in harness to
CONNECTOR. temperature sen- ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to ECM and engine
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and FU(H4SO)-24, coolant tempera-
engine coolant temperature sensor. Engine Coolant ture sensor con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Temperature Sen- nector.
chassis ground. sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-124
12LE_US.book 125

V: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-45, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
E8
E2
19
8
B21
D22
A29
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
B21
E8 A: B134 D: B137 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-08632
EN(H4SO)(diag)-125
12LE_US.book 126

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. less than 40C (40F)? detected, the cir-
ness may be the
cause.
Check for poor contact of ECM and engine cool- engine coolant temperature contact of ECM or
ant temperature sensor connector. sensor connector? engine coolant
temperature sen-
sor connector.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and the following item:
engine coolant temperature sensor. Open circuit in
ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor ECM and engine
connector. coolant tempera-
(B137) No. 22 (E8) No. 2: nector
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit to power in engine coolant
CONNECTOR. harness between temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. ECM and engine sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. coolant tempera- FU(H4SO)-24,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Engine Coolant
chassis ground. nector. Temperature Sen-
Connector & terminal sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-126
12LE_US.book 127

W: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT

LOW
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-47, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
ELECTRONIC M/B No. 13
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-127
12LE_US.book 128

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to ground in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tronic throttle con-
electronic throttle control. trol connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 (B136) No. 4:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the elec- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? tronic throttle con- circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4SO)-15, ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal Throttle Body.> tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 6 Engine ground: trol connector.
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-128
12LE_US.book 129

X: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-129
12LE_US.book 130

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
electronic throttle control. Open circuit in
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
Connector & terminal ic throttle control
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
1) Connect the connector to ECM. In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance between electronic the following item:
throttle control connector and engine ground. Open circuit of
(E57) No. 3 Engine ground: ECM and engine
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ECM and elec-
2) Measure the voltage between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control connector and engine ground. trol connector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Repair the poor Repair the short
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit to power in
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. ECM and elec-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the electronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle control connector.
nectors. trol if defective.
Connector & terminal <Ref. to
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 18: FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-130
12LE_US.book 131

Y: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-51, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERA-
TURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine does not return to idle.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK TIRE SIZE. Is the tire size as specified and Go to step 2. Replace the tire.
the same size as three other
wheels?
2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant normal? Go to step 3. Fill or replace the
Check the following items: engine coolant.
Amount of engine coolant <Ref. to
Engine coolant freeze CO(H4SO)-14,
Contamination of engine coolant REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
3 CHECK THERMOSTAT. Does the thermostat remain Replace the ther- Replace the
opened? mostat. <Ref. to engine coolant
CO(H4SO)-18, temperature sen-
Thermostat.> sor. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-24,
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-131
12LE_US.book 132

Z: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-53, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the resistance of engine cool- Repair the poor Replace the
SENSOR. ant temperature sensor differ- contact of ECM engine coolant
1) Disconnect the connectors from the engine ent between when engine connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature sensor. coolant is cold and after sor. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between engine warmed up? FU(H4SO)-24,
coolant temperature sensor terminals when the Engine Coolant
engine coolant is cold and after warmed up. Temperature Sen-
Terminals sor.>
No. 1 No. 2:
AA:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-55, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Thermostat remains open.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant amount Go to step 2. Refill the engine
normal? coolant. <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-14,
Engine Coolant.>
2 CHECK RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator fan continu- Repair radiator fan Replace the ther-
1) Start the engine. ously rotate for 3 minutes or circuit. <Ref. to mostat. <Ref. to
2) Check the radiator fan operation. more during idling? CO(H4SO)-24, CO(H4SO)-18,
Radiator Main Fan Thermostat.>
and Fan Motor.>
and <Ref. to
CO(H4SO)-25,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-132
12LE_US.book 133

AB:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-59, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 2.
CONNECTOR AND COUPLING CONNEC- tor? remove any water
TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-133
12LE_US.book 134

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and front oxy-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and gen (A/F) sensor
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. connector.
chassis ground.
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of front Repair the poor Replace the front
Check for poor contact of the front oxygen (A/F) oxygen (A/F) sensor connec- contact of front oxygen (A/F) sen-
sensor connector. tor? oxygen (A/F) sensor. <Ref. to
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-134
12LE_US.book 135

AC:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-61, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-135
12LE_US.book 136

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Replace the front
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in oxygen (A/F) sen-
TOR. the harness sor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and FU(H4SO)-42,
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- front oxygen (A/F) Front Oxygen (A/F)
gen (A/F) sensor. sensor connector. Sensor.>
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-136
12LE_US.book 137

AD:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-63, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
SPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair the exhaust Replace the front
NOTE: system? system. oxygen (A/F) sen-
Check the following items. sor. <Ref. to
Loose installation of front portion of exhaust FU(H4SO)-42,
pipe onto cylinder heads Front Oxygen (A/F)
Loose connection between front exhaust pipe Sensor.>
and front catalytic converter
Damage of exhaust pipe resulting in a hole
EN(H4SO)(diag)-137
12LE_US.book 138

AE:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-138
12LE_US.book 139

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. Open circuit in
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. ECM and front oxy-
Connector & terminal gen (A/F) sensor
coupling connector
sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-42,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-139
12LE_US.book 140

AF:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-68, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-140
12LE_US.book 141

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR DATA. Is the value of Rear O2 Sen- Go to step 5. Go to step 2.
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant sor 0.490 V or more?
temperature is higher than 75C (167F), and
keep the engine speed at 3,000 rpm. (2 minutes
maximum)
2) Read the value of Rear O2 Sensor using
the Subaru Select Monitor or a general scan
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
2 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNEC- Has water entered the connec- Completely Go to step 3.
TOR AND COUPLING CONNECTOR. tor? remove any water
inside.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and In this case, repair
rear oxygen sensor. the following item:
ECM and rear oxygen sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and rear oxy-
(B136) No. 20 (E25) No. 3: gen sensor con-
(B134) No. 29 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 0.5 V? Replace the rear Repair the harness
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. oxygen sensor. and connector.
1) Connect the connector to ECM. <Ref. to NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4SO)-44, In this case, repair
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen Rear Oxygen Sen- the following item:
sensor connector and chassis ground. sor.> Open circuit in
(E25) No. 3 (+) Chassis ground (): ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
5 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Replace the rear
Check exhaust system parts. system? faulty parts. oxygen sensor.
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4SO)-44,
Looseness and improper fitting of exhaust Rear Oxygen Sen-
system parts sor.>
Damage (crack, hole etc.) of parts
Loose part and improper installation between
front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sen-
sor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-141
12LE_US.book 142

AG:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-71, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-142
12LE_US.book 143

Step Check Yes No

1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant sor 0.250 V or less?
rapidly reduce the engine speed from 3,000
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
inside.
(B134) No. 29 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
system parts sor.>
sor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-143
12LE_US.book 144

AH:DTC P013A O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 2)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-72, DTC P013A O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - RICH
TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-144
12LE_US.book 145

Step Check Yes No

nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen ness between
sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and rear oxy-
Connector & terminal gen sensor con-
(E25) No. 3 Chassis ground: nector.
3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the rear Even if DTC is
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen oxygen sensor. detected, the cir-
sensor terminals. <Ref. to cuit has returned to
Terminals FU(H4SO)-44, a normal condition
No. 3 No. 4 Rear Oxygen Sen- at this time. Repro-
sor.> duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
AI: DTC P013B O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SEN-
SOR 2)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P013A. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-144, DTC P013A O2 SENSOR
SLOW RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
AJ:DTC P013E O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1
SENSOR 2)
NOTE:
Code (DTC).>
AK:DTC P013F O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1
SENSOR 2)
NOTE:
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-145
12LE_US.book 146

AL:DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1

SENSOR2)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-80, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-146
12LE_US.book 147

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
inside.
(B134) No. 29 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-147
12LE_US.book 148

Step Check Yes No

gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
system parts sor.>
sor
AM:DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2)

Refer to DTC P0037 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-96, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-148
12LE_US.book 149

AN:DTC P014C O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-84, DTC P014C O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - RICH
TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
Loose installation of front portion of exhaust FU(H4SO)-42,
AO:DTC P014D O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P014C. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-149, DTC P014C O2 SENSOR
Code (DTC).>
AP:DTC P015A O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1
SENSOR 1)
NOTE:
Code (DTC).>
AQ:DTC P015B O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1
SENSOR 1)
NOTE:
Code (DTC).>
AR:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
Refer to DTC P0172 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-150, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO
RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-149
12LE_US.book 150

AS:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-92, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Are there holes or loose bolts Repair the exhaust Go to step 2.
on exhaust system? system.
intake system?
3 CHECK FUEL PRESSURE. Is the measured value 340 Go to step 4. Repair the follow-
WARNING: 400 kPa (3.5 4.1 kg/cm2, 49 ing item.
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the 58 psi)? Fuel pressure is
working area. too high:
CAUTION: Clogged fuel line
Be careful not to spill fuel. or bent hose
Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Fuel pressure is
28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> too low:
CAUTION: Improper fuel
Release fuel pressure before removing the pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. Clogged fuel line
4 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the value of Coolant Temp. Go to step 5. Replace the
SENSOR. 75C (167F) or more? engine coolant
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. temperature sen-
2) Read the value of Coolant Temp. using sor. <Ref. to
the Subaru Select Monitor or a general scan FU(H4SO)-24,
tool. Engine Coolant
NOTE: Temperature Sen-
Subaru Select Monitor sor.>
tor.>
General scan tool
EN(H4SO)(diag)-150
12LE_US.book 151

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Is the value of Mass Air Flow Go to step 6. Replace the mass
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. 2.0 5.0 g/s (0.26 0.66 lb/m)? air flow and intake
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until air temperature
coolant temperature is higher than 75C sensor. <Ref. to
(167F). FU(H4SO)-32,
2) For CVT models, set the select lever to P Mass Air Flow and
range or N range, and for MT models, place Intake Air Temper-
the shift lever in the neutral position. ature Sensor.>
5) Read the value of Mass Air Flow using
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
6 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Repair the poor Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from Intake Air Temp.. Is the contact of ECM flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until obtained value 10 50C ( connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 70C 18 90F)? sor. <Ref. to
(158F). FU(H4SO)-32,
5) Open the front hood.
6) Measure the ambient temperature.
7) Read the value of Intake Air Temp. using
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
EN(H4SO)(diag)-151
12LE_US.book 152

AT:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-94, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the fuel
priate DTC using temperature sen-
the List of Diag- sor. <Ref. to
nostic Trouble EC(H4SO)-14,
Code (DTC). Fuel Temperature
<Ref. to Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-152
12LE_US.book 153

AU:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
3
R58
R57
11
7
R15
R333
3
8
i155
i3
11
5
B38
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

*
*
*
B83
C23
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R58 R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6 3 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08675
EN(H4SO)(diag)-153
12LE_US.book 154

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value in Fuel Temp. Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
2) Using the Subaru Select Monitor, read the cuit has returned to
value in Fuel Temp.. a normal condition
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the fuel Repair the ground
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? temperature sen- short circuit of har-
TOR. sor. <Ref. to ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. EC(H4SO)-14, ECM and fuel
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and Fuel Temperature pump.
fuel temperature sensor. Sensor.>
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-154
12LE_US.book 155

AV:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
2
3
R58
R57
11
7
R15
R333
3
8
i155
i3
11
5
B38

*
*
*
B83
C23
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R58 R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 1 2 3 7 8 9 10 11 12
4 5 6 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6 3 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08675
EN(H4SO)(diag)-155
12LE_US.book 156

Step Check Yes No

tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair any poor Go to step 3.
Check any poor contact of the ECM and fuel ECM or fuel temperature sen- contact of the ECM
temperature sensor connectors. sor connectors? or fuel temperature
sensor connectors.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
fuel temperature sensor. Open circuit in
3) Measure the resistance of the harness harness between
between the ECM and fuel temperature sensor ECM and fuel tem-
connector. perature sensor
(B136) No. 23 (R58) No. 2: Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 (R58) No. 3: coupling connector
Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the fuel
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM EC(H4SO)-14,
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and fuel tempera- Fuel Temperature
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Sensor.>
chassis ground. nector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-156
12LE_US.book 157

AW:DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-101, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the
priate DTC using engine oil tempera-
the List of Diag- ture sensor. <Ref.
nostic Trouble to FU(H4SO)-40,
Code (DTC). Oil Temperature
<Ref. to Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-157
12LE_US.book 158

AX:DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

SOR LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
1
2
E75
E2
19
6
B21
A29
D21
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
B21
A: B134 D: B137
E75 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-09181
EN(H4SO)(diag)-158
12LE_US.book 159

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Oil Tempera- Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. ture 215C (419F) or more? detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Oil Temperature using cuit has returned to
Subaru Select Monitor. a normal condition
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the Repair the short
GINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CON- more? engine oil tempera- circuit to ground in
NECTOR. ture sensor. <Ref. the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. to FU(H4SO)-40, between the ECM
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM Oil Temperature and engine oil tem-
and engine oil temperature sensor. Sensor.> perature sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-159
12LE_US.book 160

AY:DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH

SOR HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
ENGINE OIL
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
1
2
E75
E2
19
6
B21
A29
D21
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
B21
A: B134 D: B137
E75 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 26 27 28 29 30 31 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-09181
EN(H4SO)(diag)-160
12LE_US.book 161

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Oil Tempera- Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Start the engine. ture less than 40C (40F)? detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Oil Temperature using cuit has returned to
Subaru Select Monitor. a normal condition
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair the poor Go to step 3.
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or engine oil temperature contact of ECM or
engine oil temperature sensor connectors. sensor connectors? engine oil tempera-
ture sensor con-
nector.
GINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
and engine oil temperature sensor. Open circuit in
between the ECM and engine oil temperature ECM and engine
sensor connector. oil temperature
Connector & terminal sensor connector
GINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CON- circuit to power in engine oil tempera-
NECTOR. harness between ture sensor. <Ref.
1) Connect all connectors. ECM and engine to FU(H4SO)-40,
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. oil temperature Oil Temperature
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and sensor connector. Sensor.>
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-161
12LE_US.book 162

AZ:DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-105, DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1, Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B21 B134 B220
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07705
EN(H4SO)(diag)-162
12LE_US.book 163

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FUEL INJEC- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
TOR. and connector.
Connector & terminal main relay and fuel
DTC P0201; (E5) No. 2 (+) Engine injector connector
ground (): Poor contact of
DTC P0202; (E16) No. 2 (+) Engine main relay connec-
ground (): tor
DTC P0203; (E6) No. 2 (+) Engine Poor contact of
ground (): coupling connector
DTC P0204; (E17) No. 2 (+) Engine
ground ():
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. ECM connector
3) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- and fuel injector
tor connector and engine ground. connector.
DTC P0201; (E5) No. 1 Engine ground:
ECM connector and fuel injector connector. In this case, repair
DTC P0201; (B134) No. 10 (E5) No. 1: Open circuit in
DTC P0202; (B134) No. 11 (E16) No. 1: harness between
DTC P0203; (B134) No. 12 (E6) No. 1: ECM connector
DTC P0204; (B134) No. 13 (E17) No. 1: and fuel injector
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 20 ? Go to step 5. Replace the fuel
Measure the resistance between fuel injector injector. <Ref. to
terminals on the corresponding cylinder. FU(H4SO)-37,
No. 1 No. 2:
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Go to step 6.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM
connector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-163
12LE_US.book 164

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OPERATION. Does the fuel injector emit Even if DTC is Repair the poor
1) Connect all connectors. operating sound? detected, the cir- contact of fuel
2) Start the engine. cuit has returned to injector connector.
3) Check if the corresponding fuel injector a normal condition
emits operating sound. at this time. Repro-
Use a sound scope to check the operating and then perform
sound. the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
BA:DTC P0202 INJECTOR #2

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0201. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-162, DTC P0201 INJECTOR
#1, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
BB:DTC P0203 INJECTOR #3
NOTE:
BC:DTC P0204 INJECTOR #4
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-164
12LE_US.book 165

BD:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT

LOW
SOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-165
12LE_US.book 166

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4SO)-15, ECM and elec-
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-166
12LE_US.book 167

BE:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-167
12LE_US.book 168

Step Check Yes No

NECTOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 28: FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-168
12LE_US.book 169

BF:DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0304. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-170, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4
MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
BG:DTC P0302 CYLINDER 2 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
BH:DTC P0303 CYLINDER 3 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-169
12LE_US.book 170

BI: DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED

Immediately at fault recognition (A misfire which could damage catalyst occurs.)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-121, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED, Di-
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
Rough driving
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B21 B134 B220
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07705
EN(H4SO)(diag)-170
12LE_US.book 171

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground on faulty cylinders.
#1 (B134) No. 10 (+) Chassis ground ():
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector ECM and fuel
on faulty cylinders. injector connector.
3) Measure the resistance between fuel injec-
tor connector and engine ground on faulty cylin-
ders.
#1 (E5) No. 1 Engine ground:
ECM and fuel injector connector on faulty cylin- In this case, repair
ders. the following item:
#1 (B134) No. 10 (E5) No. 1: harness between
coupling connector
4 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 20 ? Go to step 5. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between fuel injector fuel injector. <Ref.
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4SO)-37,
No. 1 No. 2:
5 CHECK POWER SUPPLY LINE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of all con- and connector.
2) Measure the voltage between fuel injector nectors in fuel NOTE:
and engine ground on faulty cylinders. injector circuit. In this case, repair
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): Open circuit in
#2 (E16) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): harness between
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): the main relay con-
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): nector and fuel in-
jector connector on
faulty cylinders
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-171
12LE_US.book 172

Step Check Yes No

FUEL INJECTOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. fuel injector. <Ref.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4SO)-37,
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 No. 2:
8 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 9.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR/CRANK- or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
9 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Is the crank sprocket rusted or Replace the crank Go to step 10.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to does it have broken teeth? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-47, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-54,
Crank Sprocket.>
10 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Go to step 11.
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of
Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4SO)-48,
ment mark on cylinder block. Timing Belt.>
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT
SOCKET
11 CHECK FUEL LEVEL. Is the fuel meter indication Go to step 12. Refill the fuel so
higher than the Lower level? that the fuel meter
indication is higher
than the Lower
level, and proceed
to the next step. Go
to step 12.
12 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 14. Go to step 13.
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate or blink?
1) Clear the memory using the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-51, Clear Memory
Mode.>
2) Start the engine, and drive the vehicle 10
minutes or more.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-172
12LE_US.book 173

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK CAUSE OF MISFIRE. Was the cause of misfire identi- Finish diagnostics Repair the poor
fied when the engine is run- operation, if the contact of connec-
ning? engine has no tor.
abnormality. NOTE:
In this case, repair
the following item:
Poor contact of
ignition coil con-
nector
Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
14 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair the air Go to step 15.
system? intake system.
NOTE:
Check the follow-
ing items.
Are there air
leaks or air suction
caused by loose or
dislocated nuts
and bolts?
Are there cracks
or any disconnec-
tion of hoses?
15 CHECK MISFIRE SYMPTOM. Does the Subaru Select Moni- Go to step 18. Go to step 16.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor or general scan tool indicate
2) Check for DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)- only one DTC?
39, Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
16 CHECK DTC. Is DTC P0301 and P0303 dis- Go to step 19. Go to step 17.
played on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool?
18 ONLY ONE CYLINDER. Is there any fault in the cylin- Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
der? faulty parts. <Ref. to
Check the follow- 149, DTC P0171
ing items. SYSTEM TOO
Spark plug LEAN (BANK 1),
Ignition coil Diagnostic Proce-
Fuel injector dure with Diagnos-
Compression ra- tic Trouble Code
tio (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-173
12LE_US.book 174

Step Check Yes No

19 GROUP OF #1 AND #3 CYLINDERS. Are there any faults in #1 and Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
#3 cylinders? faulty parts. <Ref. to
tio (DTC).>
Skipping timing
belt teeth
tio (DTC).>
Skipping timing
belt teeth
21 CYLINDER AT RANDOM. Is the engine idle rough? Go to DTC P0171. Repair or replace
<Ref. to faulty parts.
EN(H4SO)(diag)- NOTE:
149, DTC P0171 Check the follow-
SYSTEM TOO ing items.
LEAN (BANK 1), Spark plug
Diagnostic Proce- Ignition coil
dure with Diagnos- Fuel injector
tic Trouble Code Compression ra-
(DTC).> tio
EN(H4SO)(diag)-174
12LE_US.book 175

BJ:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
(BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Knocking occurs.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1
E14
1 2
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
16
19
B21
E
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D8
D2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07632
EN(H4SO)(diag)-175
12LE_US.book 176

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 600 k or Go to step 2. Repair the poor
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con-
nectors.
(B137) No. 2 (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance 600 k or Replace the knock Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connector from the knock more? sensor. <Ref. to and connector.
sensor. FU(H4SO)-29, NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> In this case, repair
sensor terminals. the following item:
Terminals Open circuit in
ECM and knock
sensor connector
Poor contact of
knock sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-176
12LE_US.book 177

BK:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-124, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Knocking occurs.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1
E14
1 2
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E2
16
19
B21
E
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
A29
D8
D2
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
A: B134
42 43 44 45 46 47
ECM
D: B137 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07632
EN(H4SO)(diag)-177
12LE_US.book 178

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 500 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. k?
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM.
nectors.
(B137) No. 2 (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 500 Replace the knock Repair the short
1) Disconnect the connector from the knock k? sensor. <Ref. to circuit to ground in
sensor. FU(H4SO)-29, harness between
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> ECM and knock
sensor terminals. sensor connector.
Terminals NOTE:
No. 1 No. 2: The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the short cir-
cuit of harness.
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 2 V or more? Even if DTC is Repair the poor
1) Connect the connector to ECM. detected, the cir- contact of ECM
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. cuit has returned to connector.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and a normal condition
chassis ground. at this time. Repro-
Connector & terminal duce the failure,
(B137) No. 2 (+) Chassis ground (): and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-178
12LE_US.book 179

BL:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-126, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A
CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Failure of engine to start
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION
SENSOR E10
1 2
2
1
E10
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
15
14
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
25
17
31
B137 ECM
EN-07639
EN(H4SO)(diag)-179
12LE_US.book 180

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the crankshaft position sen- Go to step 2. Tighten the crank-
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. sor installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-25,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 3. Replace the crank-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 4 k? shaft position sen-
2) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. sor. <Ref. to
3) Measure the resistance between terminals FU(H4SO)-25,
of crankshaft position sensor connector. Crankshaft Posi-
Terminals tion Sensor.>
No. 1 No. 2:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 ? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CON- contact of ECM and connector.
NECTOR. and crankshaft NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. position sensor In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector. the following item:
ECM and crankshaft position sensor connector. Open circuit in
(B137) No. 17 (E10) No. 1: ECM and crank-
(B137) No. 25 (E10) No. 2: shaft position sen-
sor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-180
12LE_US.book 181

BM:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-128, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CONDITION OF CRANKSHAFT PO- Is the crankshaft position sen- Go to step 2. Tighten the crank-
SITION SENSOR. sor installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-25,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Are crank sprocket teeth Replace the crank Go to step 3.
Remove the timing belt cover. cracked or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-54,
Crank Sprocket.>
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the crank-
TIMING BELT. from its proper position? tion condition of shaft position sen-
Turn the crankshaft, and align alignment mark timing belt. <Ref. to sor. <Ref. to
on crank sprocket with alignment mark on cylin- ME(H4SO)-48, FU(H4SO)-25,
der block. Timing Belt.> Crankshaft Posi-
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT tion Sensor.>
SOCKET
EN(H4SO)(diag)-181
12LE_US.book 182

BN:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SIN-

GLE SENSOR)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-130, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A
CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CAMSHAFT
POSITION
E15
SENSOR
1 2
2
1
E15
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13
12
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
24
31
B137 ECM
EN-07640
EN(H4SO)(diag)-182
12LE_US.book 183

Step Check Yes No

CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
camshaft position sensor. Open circuit in
ECM and camshaft position sensor connector. ECM and camshaft
Connector & terminal position sensor
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 3. Repair short cir-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- more? cuit to ground in
TOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between camshaft ECM and camshaft
position sensor connector and engine ground. position sensor
(E15) No. 1 Engine ground: NOTE:
The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the ground
short circuit of the
harness circuit.
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 4. Tighten the cam-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-27,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
4 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Repair the poor Replace the cam-
1) Remove the camshaft position sensor. 4 k? contact of ECM or shaft position sen-
2) Measure the resistance between terminals camshaft position sor. <Ref. to
of camshaft position sensor connector. sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-27,
Terminals Camshaft Position
No. 1 No. 2: Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-183
12LE_US.book 184

BO:DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-132, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A
CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CAMSHAFT
POSITION
E15
SENSOR
1 2
2
1
E15
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
13
12
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
B21 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
30
24
31
B137 ECM
EN-07640
EN(H4SO)(diag)-184
12LE_US.book 185

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
camshaft position sensor. Open circuit in
ECM and camshaft position sensor connector. ECM and camshaft
Connector & terminal position sensor
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
(E15) No. 1 Engine ground: NOTE:
The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the ground
short circuit of the
harness circuit.
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 4. Tighten the cam-
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-27,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
4 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 5. Replace the cam-
1) Remove the camshaft position sensor. 4 k? shaft position sen-
2) Measure the resistance between terminals sor. <Ref. to
of camshaft position sensor connector. FU(H4SO)-27,
Terminals Camshaft Position
No. 1 No. 2: Sensor.>
5 CHECK CAM SPROCKET. Are cam sprocket teeth cracked Replace the cam Go to step 6.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4SO)-47, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-53,
Cam Sprocket.>
6 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the cam-
Turn the crankshaft using the ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to sor. <Ref. to
alignment mark on the cam sprocket with the ME(H4SO)-48, FU(H4SO)-27,
alignment mark on the timing belt cover LH. Timing Belt.> Camshaft Position
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT Sensor.>
SOCKET
EN(H4SO)(diag)-185
12LE_US.book 186

BP:DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-134, DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/SECOND-
ARY CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
M/B No. 14
21 B134 ECM
22
31
32
E
IG RELAY
8
7
B220 B21
49
32
33
11
5
E2
E31 E32 E33 E34

1

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E31 E33 B21 B220 B134
E32 E34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
1
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
2
42 43 44 45 46 47
3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07703
EN(H4SO)(diag)-186
12LE_US.book 187

Step Check Yes No

DTC P0351; (E31) No. 1 (+) Engine of power supply
ground (): circuit
DTC P0352; (E32) No. 1 (+) Engine Blown out of fuse
ground (): (M/B No. 14)
ground (): IG relay connector
Faulty IG relay
2) Measure the resistance between ignition ECM connector
coil connector and engine ground. and ignition coil
ECM connector and ignition coil connector. In this case, repair
DTC P0351; (B134) No. 21 (E31) No. 2: Open circuit of
DTC P0354; (B134) No. 32 (E34) No. 2: and the ignition coil
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
connector.
6 CHECK SPARK PLUG CONDITION. Is the spark plug condition nor- Replace the igni- Replace the spark
1) Remove the spark plug of the correspond- mal? tion coil. <Ref. to plug. <Ref. to
ing cylinder. <Ref. to IG(H4SO)-3, REMOVAL, IG(H4SO)-5, Igni- IG(H4SO)-3,
Spark Plug.> tion Coil.> Spark Plug.>
2) Check the spark plug condition. <Ref. to
IG(H4SO)-3, INSPECTION, Spark Plug.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-187
12LE_US.book 188

BQ:DTC P0352 IGNITION COIL B PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0351. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-186, DTC P0351 IGNITION
COIL A PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
BR:DTC P0353 IGNITION COIL C PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
NOTE:
BS:DTC P0354 IGNITION COIL D PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-188
12LE_US.book 189

BT:DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-135, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Movement performance problem when engine is low speed.
Improper idling
Movement performance problem
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Mani. Absolute Make sure that the Go to step 2.
1) Start the engine. Pressure 53.3 kPa (400 EGR control valve,
2) Read the value of Mani. Absolute Pres- mmHg, 15.75 inHg) or more? manifold absolute
sure using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen- pressure sensor
eral scan tool. and throttle body
NOTE: are installed
Subaru Select Monitor securely.
tor.>
General scan tool
2 CHECK EGR CONTROL VALVE. Are there any holes, clogged Repair the EGR Replace EGR con-
Remove the EGR control valve. lines or foreign matters in the system. trol valve. <Ref. to
EGR system? FU(H4SO)-36,
EGR Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-189
12LE_US.book 190

BU:DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK

1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-138, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY BE-
LOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Idle mixture is out of specifications.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:

M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
EN(H4SO)(diag)-190
12LE_US.book 191

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check for gas leaks or air suction caused by system? the exhaust sys-
loose or dislocated nuts and bolts, and open tem. <Ref. to
hole at exhaust pipes. EX(H4SO)-2, Gen-
NOTE: eral Description.>
Check the following positions.
Between cylinder head and front exhaust
pipe
Between front exhaust pipe and front catalytic
converter
Between front catalytic converter and rear
catalytic converter
Loose or improperly attached front oxygen
(A/F) sensor or rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Even if DTC is Go to step 3.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE DRIVING). played? detected, the cir-
1) Drive at a constant speed between 80 cuit has returned to
112 km/h (50 70 MPH). a normal condition
2) After 5 minutes have elapsed in the condi- at this time. Repro-
tion of step 1), use the Subaru Select Monitor duce the failure,
while still driving to read the waveform data. and then perform
At normal condition the diagnosis
again.
1
NOTE:
REAR OXYGEN In this case, tem-
SENSOR VOLTAGE porary poor con-
(V)
tact of connector,
0 temporary open or
1.5
A/F SENSOR
ness may be the
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1 cause.
0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06666
At abnormal condition (numerous inversion)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
1.5
A/F SENSOR
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1
0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06667
EN(H4SO)(diag)-191
12LE_US.book 192

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Go to step 4. The waveform is
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE IDLING). played? displayed at abnor-
1) Run the engine at idle. mal condition 1: Go
2) In the condition of step 1), use the Subaru to step 4.
Select Monitor to read the waveform data. The waveform is
At normal condition displayed at abnor-
mal condition 2: Go
1
to step 5.
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06668
At abnormal condition 1 (numerous inversion)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06669
At abnormal condition 2 (noise input)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06670
4 CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER. Is the catalytic converter dam- Replace the cata- Go to step 5.
aged? lytic converter.
<Ref. to
EC(H4SO)-3,
Front Catalytic
Converter.>
inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-192
12LE_US.book 193

Step Check Yes No

(B134) No. 29 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 0.5 V? Go to step 8. Repair the harness
1) Connect the connector to ECM. NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Repair the follow-
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen ing locations.
sensor connector and chassis ground. Open circuit in
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
8 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SHIELD. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the rear Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oxygen sensor. circuit of rear oxy-
2) Expose the rear oxygen sensor connector <Ref. to gen sensor har-
body side harness sensor shield. FU(H4SO)-44, ness.
3) Measure the resistance between sensor Rear Oxygen Sen-
shield and chassis ground. sor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-193
12LE_US.book 194

BV:DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (SMALL LEAK)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-141, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Fuel odor
There is a hole of more than 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. in evaporation system or fuel tank.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap tightened Go to step 2. Tighten fuel filler
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? cap securely.
2) Check the fuel filler cap.
NOTE:
The DTC is stored in memory if fuel filler cap is
or was loose or if the cap chain has caught while
tightening.
2 CHECK FUEL FILLER CAP. Is the fuel filler cap genuine? Go to step 3. Replace with a
genuine fuel filler
cap.
3 CHECK FUEL FILLER PIPE GASKET. Is there any damage to the seal Repair or replace Go to step 4.
between fuel filler cap and fuel the fuel filler cap
filler pipe? and fuel filler pipe.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-62,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Does the drain valve operate? Go to step 5. Replace the drain
1) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. valve. <Ref. to
CAUTION: EC(H4SO)-19,
Do not use any fuses that are installed on Drain Valve.>
the vehicle.
3) Operate the drain valve using the Subaru
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
The drain valve can be operated using Subaru
Select Monitor. For detailed procedures, refer
to SYSTEM OPERATION CHECK MODE.
<Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-52, System Opera-
tion Check Mode.>
5 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Does the purge control sole- Go to step 6. Replace the purge
VALVE. noid valve operate? control solenoid
Operate the purge control solenoid valve using valve. <Ref. to
the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4SO)-9,
NOTE: Purge Control
Purge control solenoid valve operation can be Solenoid Valve.>
executed using Subaru Select Monitor. For de-
tailed procedures, refer to SYSTEM OPERA-
TION CHECK MODE. <Ref. to
Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-194
12LE_US.book 195

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Go to step 7.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. on evapo- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ration line? line. <Ref. to
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is FU(H4SO)-73,
removed. Fuel Delivery and
Evaporation
Lines.>
7 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 8.
there a hole of more than 1.0 the canister. <Ref.
mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
8 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged or is Repair or replace Go to step 9.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-55, there any hole of more than 1.0 the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4SO)-55,
Fuel Tank.>
9 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Is there any hole of more than Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia., crack, the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. clogging, or disconnection, connector.
bend, misconnection of hoses
or pipes in evaporative emis-
sion control system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-195
12LE_US.book 196

BW:DTC P0447 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CON-

TROL CIRCUIT OPEN
SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E
D6
B4
B38 B21
15
48
41
1
i3 E2
i54
12
11
R99
R144 E4
1
DRAIN VALVE PURGE CONTROL

SOLENOID VALVE
B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08633
EN(H4SO)(diag)-196
12LE_US.book 197

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Even if DTC is
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM detected, the cir-
connector. cuit has returned to
a normal condition
at this time. Repro-
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO DRAIN VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
Measure the voltage between drain valve and supply circuit.
chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM ECM and drain
and drain valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the drain
valve connector and chassis ground.
(R144) No. 2 Chassis ground:
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
ECM and drain valve connector. In this case, repair
(B135) No. 4 (R144) No. 2: Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and drain
valve connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance 10 100 ? Repair the poor Replace the drain
Measure the resistance between drain valve contact of drain valve. <Ref. to
terminals. valve connector. EC(H4SO)-19,
Terminals Drain Valve.>
No. 1 No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-197
12LE_US.book 198

BX:DTC P0448 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL

CIRCUIT SHORTED
SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E
D6
B4
B38 B21
15
48
41
1
i3 E2
i54
12
11
R99
R144 E4
1

SOLENOID VALVE
B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08633
EN(H4SO)(diag)-198
12LE_US.book 199

Step Check Yes No

DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM between ECM and
and drain valve. drain valve con-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. nector.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the drain Repair the poor
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to contact of ECM
2) Measure the resistance between drain valve EC(H4SO)-19, connector.
terminals. Drain Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-199
12LE_US.book 200

BY:DTC P0451 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
2) Open the fuel flap.
2 CHECK PRESSURE VACUUM LINE. Is there any fault in pressure/ Repair or replace Replace the fuel
NOTE: vacuum line? the hoses and tank pressure sen-
Check the following items. pipes. sor. <Ref. to
Disconnection, leakage and clogging of the EC(H4SO)-16,
vacuum hoses and pipes between fuel tank Fuel Tank Pres-
pressure sensor and fuel tank sure Sensor.>
Disconnection, leakage and clogging of air
ventilation hoses and pipes between fuel filler
pipe and fuel tank
EN(H4SO)(diag)-200
12LE_US.book 201

BZ:DTC P0452 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR LOW INPUT
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
3
R47
R57
10
R15
R333
11
10
9
i155
i3
12
2
B38
*
*
B83
*
B22
C21
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136 R47

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08676
EN(H4SO)(diag)-201
12LE_US.book 202

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value in Fuel Tank Pres- Go to step 2. Even if DTC is
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. sure less than 7.41 kPa ( detected, the cir-
2) Using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen- 55.6 mmHg, 2.19 inHg)? cuit has returned to
eral scan tool, read the value in Fuel Tank a normal condition
Pressure. at this time. Repro-
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
POWER SUPPLY. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank In this case, repair
pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between the fuel tank harness between
pressure sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel tank
Connector & terminal pressure sensor
(R47) No. 3 (+) Chassis ground (): connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
the ECM and fuel tank pressure sensor connec- harness between
tor. ECM and fuel tank
(B136) No. 21 (R47) No. 2: connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and fuel tank
chassis ground. pressure sensor
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel tank pressure sen- contact of the ECM tank pressure sen-
fuel tank pressure sensor connector. sor connector? or fuel tank pressor. <Ref. to
sure sensor con- EC(H4SO)-16,
nector. Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-202
12LE_US.book 203

CA:DTC P0453 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
3
R47
R57
10
R15
R333
11
10
9
i155
i3
12
2
B38
*
*
B83
*
B22
C21
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R57 B38 B: B135 C: B136 R47

B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3
1 2 3
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4 5 6
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08676
EN(H4SO)(diag)-203
12LE_US.book 204

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. sure 7.95 kPa (59.6 mmHg, detected, the cir-
2) Using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen- 2.35 inHg) or more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the value in Fuel Tank Pres- Repair the short Go to step 3.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- sure 7.95 kPa (59.6 mmHg, circuit to power in
TOR. 2.35 inHg) or more? the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank fuel tank pressure
pressure sensor. sensor connector.
4) Using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen-
eral scan tool, read the value in Fuel Tank
Pressure.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
TOR. NOTE:
fuel tank pressure sensor connector and engine Open circuit of
ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 1 Engine ground: pressure sensor
connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
joint connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of fuel Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact of the fuel tank pressure tank pressure sensor connec- contact of fuel tank tank pressure sen-
sensor connector. tor? pressure sensor sor. <Ref. to
connector. EC(H4SO)-16,
Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-204
12LE_US.book 205

CB:DTC P0456 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (VERY SMALL LEAK)
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Fuel odor
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-62,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
the vehicle.
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
Drain valve can be operated using the Subaru
tion Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-205
12LE_US.book 206

Step Check Yes No

TROL SYSTEM LINE. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. on evap- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oration line? line. <Ref. to
Evaporation
Lines.>
mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-55, there any hole of more than 0.5 the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4SO)-55,
Fuel Tank.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-206
12LE_US.book 207

CC:DTC P0457 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECT-

ED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF)
SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Fuel odor
Fuel filler cap loose or lost
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-62,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
the vehicle.
Select Monitor.
NOTE:
tion Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-207
12LE_US.book 208

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any disconnection, Repair or replace Go to step 7.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. damage or clogging on the the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. evaporation line? line. <Ref. to
Evaporation
Lines.>
7 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 8.
the canister. <Ref.
to EC(H4SO)-5,
Canister.>
8 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 9.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4SO)-55, the fuel tank. <Ref.
Fuel Tank.> to FU(H4SO)-55,
Fuel Tank.>
9 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Are there holes, cracks, clog- Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- ging, or disconnection, miscon- the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. nection of hoses or pipes in connector.
evaporative emission control
system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-208
12LE_US.book 209

CD:DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT LOW
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-167, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E
D6
B4
B38 B21
15
48
41
1
i3 E2
i54
12
11
R99
R144 E4
1

SOLENOID VALVE
B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08633
EN(H4SO)(diag)-209
12LE_US.book 210

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO PURGE CON- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
TROL SOLENOID VALVE. supply circuit.
Measure the voltage between purge control
solenoid valve and engine ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- more? short circuit of har-
NECTOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and purge
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and control solenoid
purge control solenoid valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the purge
control solenoid valve connector and engine
ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and purge control solenoid valve. the following item:
ECM and purge
control solenoid
valve connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance 10 100 ? Repair the poor Replace the purge
VALVE. contact of purge control solenoid
1) Remove the purge control solenoid valve. control solenoid valve. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- valve connector. EC(H4SO)-9,
trol solenoid valve terminals. Purge Control
Terminals Solenoid Valve.>
No. 1 No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-210
12LE_US.book 211

CE:DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE

CIRCUIT HIGH
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B: B135 D: B137 ECM
B220 E
D6
B4
B38 B21
15
48
41
1
i3 E2
i54
12
11
R99
R144 E4
1

SOLENOID VALVE
B220
E4 R144
B21
17
1 5 9 13
1 2 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B38 D: B137 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
B: B135
42 43 44 45 46 47
i54
1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 3 4 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
11 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08633
EN(H4SO)(diag)-211
12LE_US.book 212

Step Check Yes No

PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. the harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and purge control sole-
purge control solenoid valve. noid valve connec-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the purge Repair the poor
VALVE. control solenoid contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4SO)-9,
No. 1 No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-212
12LE_US.book 213

CF:DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-171, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using level sensor and
the List of Diag- fuel sub level sen-
nostic Trouble sor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC). FU(H4SO)-67,
<Ref. to Fuel Level Sen-
EN(H4SO)(diag)- sor.> <Ref. to
78, List of Diagnos- FU(H4SO)-69,
tic Trouble Code Fuel Sub Level
(DTC).> Sensor.>
CG:DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT LOW

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0463. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-213, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL
SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
CH:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-175, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT
HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0462 or P0463 dis- Check the combi- Even if DTC is
played on the Subaru Select nation meter. <Ref. detected, the cir-
Monitor? to IDI-13, CHECK cuit has returned to
FUEL LEVEL a normal condition
SENSOR, at this time. Repro-
INSPECTION, duce the failure,
Combination Meter and then perform
System.> the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-213
12LE_US.book 214

CI: DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-177, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT IN-
TERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is DTC P0464 displayed on the Check the combi- Even if DTC is
display? nation meter. <Ref. detected, the cir-
to IDI-13, CHECK cuit has returned to
FUEL LEVEL a normal condition
SENSOR, at this time. Repro-
INSPECTION, duce the failure,
Combination Meter and then perform
System.> the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
CJ:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-180, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A, Diag-
nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK DTC OF VDC. Is DTC of VDC displayed? Perform the diag- Repair the poor
Check DTC of VDC. nosis according to contact of ECM
DTC. <Ref. to connector.
VDC(diag)-35, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-214
12LE_US.book 215

CK:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-181, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start the engine.
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Go to step 2.
priate DTC using
the List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR CLEANER ELEMENT. Is there excessive clogging on Replace the air Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. air cleaner element? cleaner element.
2) Check the air cleaner element. <Ref. to IN(H4SO)-
4, Air Cleaner Ele-
ment.>
3 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Are foreign matter found inside Remove foreign Perform the diag-
TROL. electronic throttle control? matter from elec- nosis of DTC
1) Remove the electronic throttle control. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
Body.> 267, DTC P2101
2) Check the electronic throttle control. THROTTLE
ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-215
12LE_US.book 216

CL:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-182, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
the List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair air suction Go to step 3.
1) Start and idle the engine. system? and leaks.
2) Check the following items.
Loose installation of intake manifold and
throttle body
Cracks of intake manifold gasket and throttle
body gasket
Disconnection of vacuum hoses
3 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Are foreign matter found inside Remove foreign Perform the diag-
TROL. electronic throttle control? matter from elec- nosis of DTC
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. tronic throttle con- P2101. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control. trol. EN(H4SO)(diag)-
<Ref. to FU(H4SO)-15, REMOVAL, Throttle 267, DTC P2101
Body.> THROTTLE
3) Check the electronic throttle control. ACTUATOR CON-
TROL MOTOR
CIRCUIT RANGE/
PERFORMANCE,
Diagnostic Proce-
dure with Diagnos-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-216
12LE_US.book 217

CM:DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine keeps running at higher speed than specified idle speed.
Engine keeps running at a lower speed than the specified idle speed.
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
42
43
44
45
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
2

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B21 B134 B220
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 2 6 10 14
1 2 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07705
EN(H4SO)(diag)-217
12LE_US.book 218

BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
the List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK ENGINE OIL. Is there a proper amount of Go to step 3. Replace engine oil.
engine oil? <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-13,
REPLACEMENT,
Engine Oil.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-218
12LE_US.book 219

Step Check Yes No

intake system?
Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)- Fuel pressure is
28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> too low:
CAUTION: Improper fuel
Release fuel pressure before removing the pump discharge
fuel pressure gauge. Clogged fuel line
tor.>
General scan tool
(167F). FU(H4SO)-32,
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
EN(H4SO)(diag)-219
12LE_US.book 220

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Go to step 9. Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from Intake Air Temp.. Is the flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until obtained value 10 50C ( temperature sen-
(167F). FU(H4SO)-32,
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
ders.
ECM and fuel injector on faulty cylinders. In this case, repair
#1 (B134) No. 10 (E5) No. 1: Open circuit in
Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-220
12LE_US.book 221

Step Check Yes No

terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4SO)-37,
No. 1 No. 2:
and engine ground on faulty cylinders. injector circuit. In this case, repair
#1 (E5) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): Open circuit in
#3 (E6) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): the main relay con-
#4 (E17) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): nector and fuel in-
jector connector on
faulty cylinders
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector between the ECM
on faulty cylinders. and fuel injector.
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4SO)-37,
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 No. 2:
16 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 17.
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR/CRANK- or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SHAFT POSITION SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-27,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-25,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
ME(H4SO)-47, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> ME(H4SO)-54,
Crank Sprocket.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-221
12LE_US.book 222

Step Check Yes No

alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4SO)-48,
SOCKET
19 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 20. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. tronic throttle con-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the electronic throttle control relay. FU(H4SO)-51,
3) Connect the battery to terminals No. 13 and Electronic Throttle
No. 14 of electronic throttle control relay. Control Relay.>
4) Measure the resistance between electronic
Terminals
No. 15 No. 16:
20 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 21. Repair the open or
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY. ground short circuit
Measure the voltage between electronic throttle of power supply
control relay connector and chassis ground. circuit.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit to power in
LAY CONNECTOR. the harness
1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. between ECM and
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. electronic throttle
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control relay con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis nector.
ground.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. to ground between
2) Measure the resistance between electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control relay connector and chassis trol relay
ground. connector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. between ECM and
Measure the resistance between ECM and electronic throttle
electronic throttle control relay connector. control relay con-
Connector & terminal nector.
(B135) No. 17 (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 (B220) No. 15:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-222
12LE_US.book 223

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 (B136) No. 4:
25 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 26. Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between electronic harness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. ECM and elec-
Connector & terminal tronic throttle con-
(E57) No. 4 Engine ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
NECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and electronic throttle control connector. Open circuit in
(B134) No. 18 (E57) No. 6: ECM and electron-
(B134) No. 28 (E57) No. 4: ic throttle control
Poor contact of
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-223
12LE_US.book 224

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM control connector.
nectors.
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 28:
30 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the value of Main-Throttle Go to step 31. Repair the poor
1) Connect all connectors. Sensor 0.81 0.87 V? contact of elec-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tronic throttle con-
3) Read the value of Main-Throttle Sensor trol connector.
using Subaru Select Monitor. Replace the elec-
NOTE: tronic throttle con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to trol if defective.
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. <Ref. to
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4SO)-15,
tor.> Throttle Body.>
31 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the value of Sub-Throttle Go to step 32. Repair the poor
Read the value of Sub-Throttle Sensor using Sensor 1.64 1.70 V? contact of elec-
Subaru Select Monitor. tronic throttle con-
NOTE: trol connector.
For detailed operation procedures, refer to Replace the elec-
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. tronic throttle con-
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- trol if defective.
tor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
NECTOR. NOTE:
electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
coupling connector
NECTOR. the harness
1) Connect the connector to ECM. between ECM and
3) Measure the voltage between electronic control.
throttle control connector and engine ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-224
12LE_US.book 225

Step Check Yes No

3) Measure the resistance between electronic trol connector.
35 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ELECTRONIC Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 36. Repair the short
THROTTLE CONTROL CONNECTOR. more? circuit of harness
Measure the resistance between electronic between ECM and
throttle control connectors. electronic throttle
Connector & terminal control connector.
(E57) No. 2 (E57) No. 1:
36 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 5 ? Go to step 37. Repair the harness
TROL GROUND CIRCUIT. and connector.
Measure the resistance between ECM and NOTE:
coupling connector
37 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 50 or less? Go to step 38. Replace the elec-
TROL. tronic throttle con-
Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to
throttle control terminals. FU(H4SO)-15,
Terminals Throttle Body.>
No. 2 No. 1:
38 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Does the valve return to the Repair the poor Replace the elec-
TROL. specified position? Standard contact of ECM tronic throttle con-
Move the throttle valve to the fully open and fully value: 3 mm (0.12 in) from fully connector. trol. <Ref. to
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4SO)-15,
Check that the valve returns to the specified Throttle Body.>
position when releasing fingers.
CN:DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P050A. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-217, DTC P050A COLD
START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-225
12LE_US.book 226

CO:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-189, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Diag-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2
IGNITION SWITCH
B72
STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT
B12 T3 T7
CVT
2
CLUTCH STROKE
MT
START SWITCH)
B501
CVT
1
CVT
B14
MT M
B26
C16
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07701
EN(H4SO)(diag)-226
12LE_US.book 227

Step Check Yes No

priate DTC using
the List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit to power contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. supply in harness connector.
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. starter relay con-
chassis ground.
NOTE:
range or N range.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-227
12LE_US.book 228

CP:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-191, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RAN-
DOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Even if DTC is
priate DTC using detected, the cir-
the List of Diag- cuit has returned to
nostic Trouble a normal condition
Code (DTC). at this time. Repro-
<Ref. to duce the failure,
EN(H4SO)(diag)- and then perform
78, List of Diagnos- the diagnosis
tic Trouble Code again.
(DTC).> NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
CQ:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0607. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-229, DTC P0607 THROTTLE
CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-228
12LE_US.book 229

CR:DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-193, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIR-
CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3
M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION
SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
B13
C30
C1
D7
C2
ECM
A : B134 B: B135 C : B136 D : B137

A19
A29
A18
A28
A1
A2
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
C4
E
B138
*
*
B21
18
17
20
38
19
39
37
36
35
34
40
: TERMINAL No.
E2 * OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT
6
4
2
5
3
1
E E E57 ELECTRONIC E
THROTTLE CONTROL
B138 B21 B72 E57 B220
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1 2 3 17
5 6 7 8 4 5 6 1 5 9 13
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 2 3 4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07791
EN(H4SO)(diag)-229
12LE_US.book 230

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 13 V? Go to step 2. Repair the open or
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of power supply
chassis ground. circuit.
2 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 13 15 V? Go to step 3. Repair the open or
1) Start the engine. ground short circuit
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of power supply
chassis ground. circuit.
NECTOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
4 CHECK ECM GROUND HARNESS. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Repair the follow-
1) Connect all connectors. contact of ECM ing item.
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. connector. Open circuit in
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ground circuit
chassis ground. Further tighten-
Connector & terminal ing of the engine
(B134) No. 3 (+) Chassis ground (): ground terminal
(B134) No. 4 (+) Chassis ground (): Poor contact of
(B134) No. 6 (+) Chassis ground (): coupling connector
CS:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
NOTE:
ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
CT:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to CVT section. <Ref. to CVT(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-230
12LE_US.book 231

CU:DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-198, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
: TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
B138 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9
B12 T3 T7
B138
1 2 3 4
STARTER MOTOR (MAGNET) 5 6 7 8
CVT
M
MT
B14
CVT
MT
TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SELECT CABLE. Is there any fault in select Repair or adjust Go to step 2.
cable? the select cable.
<Ref. to CS-42,
Select Cable.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-231
12LE_US.book 232

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the poor Go to step 3.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. contact of ECM
2) Place the select lever in other than P range connector.
and N range.
chassis ground.
TRANSMISSION HARNESS CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ECM and transmis-
transmission harness connector (T3). sion harness con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and nector.
chassis ground.
4 CHECK TRANSMISSION HARNESS CON- Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the inhibi- Repair short cir-
NECTOR. more? tor switch. <Ref. to cuit to ground in
1) Disconnect the connector from inhibitor CVT-95, Inhibitor harness between
switch. Switch.> transmission har-
2) Measure the resistance between transmis- ness connector
sion harness connector and engine ground. and inhibitor switch
(T3) No. 12 Engine ground:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-232
12LE_US.book 233

CV:DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-199, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
B138 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9
B12 T3 T7
B138
1 2 3 4
CVT
M
MT
B14
CVT
MT
TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792
EN(H4SO)(diag)-233
12LE_US.book 234

Step Check Yes No

2) Place the shift lever in a position other than connector.
neutral.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the neu- Repair the short
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- more? tral position switch. circuit to ground
TOR. <Ref. to 6MT-37, harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. Switches and Har- ECM and neutral
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and ness.> position switch
neutral position switch. connector.
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-234
12LE_US.book 235

CW:DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-200, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIR-
CUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
B138 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9
B12 T3 T7
B138
1 2 3 4
CVT
M
MT
B14
CVT
MT
TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SELECT CABLE. Is there any fault in select Repair or adjust Go to step 2.
cable? the select cable.
<Ref. to CS-42,
Select Cable.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-235
12LE_US.book 236

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Go to step 3.
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and connector.
chassis ground with select lever at P range
and N range.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND IN- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 4.
Repair the harness
HIBITOR SWITCH CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and In this case, repair
inhibitor switch. the following item:
ECM and inhibitor switch connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and inhibitor
(B136) No. 35 (T7) No. 6: switch connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK INHIBITOR SWITCH GROUND LINE. Is the resistance less than 5 ? Replace the inhibi- Repair the harness
Measure the resistance of harness between tor switch. <Ref. to and connector.
inhibitor switch connector and engine ground. CVT-95, Inhibitor NOTE:
Connector & terminal Switch.> In this case, repair
(T7) No. 9 Engine ground: the following item:
Open circuit of
harness between
inhibitor switch
connector and
starter motor
ground line
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
starter motor con-
nector
Poor contact of
starter motor
ground
Starter motor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-236
12LE_US.book 237

CX:DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-201, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
C: B136
C: B136 ECM
* 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
35
B138 B25
1 2
*
*
B25 T2 T2 B25
B12
MT 2 1
1 2 3 4
CVT
NEUTRAL
5 6 7 8
POSITION
9 10 11 12
SWITCH
T7
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
1 2 3 4 5
12 6
6 7 8 9
11 9
B12 T3 T7
B138
1 2 3 4
CVT
M
MT
B14
CVT
MT
TO STARTER RELAY
EN-07792
EN(H4SO)(diag)-237
12LE_US.book 238

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage less than 1 V? Repair the poor Go to step 2.
2) Place the shift lever in neutral. connector.
chassis ground.
NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
neutral position switch. Open circuit in
ECM and neutral position switch connector. ECM and neutral
Connector & terminal position switch
(B136) No. 35 (B25) No. 2: connector
joint connector
3 CHECK NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Repair the poor Replace the neu-
1) Place the shift lever in neutral. contact of neutral tral position switch.
2) Measure the resistance between neutral position switch <Ref. to 6MT-37,
position switch terminals. connector. Switches and Har-
Terminals ness.>
No. 1 No. 2:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-238
12LE_US.book 239

CY:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-202, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-239
12LE_US.book 240

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. Open circuit in
coupling connector
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-240
12LE_US.book 241

CZ:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-204, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-241
12LE_US.book 242

Step Check Yes No

TOR. ness between
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
3 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
1) Connect the connector to ECM.
chassis ground.
4 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 4.95 V or more? Go to step 5. Replace the front
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis oxygen (A/F) sen-
ground. sor. <Ref. to
Connector & terminal FU(H4SO)-42,
(B136) No. 18 (+) Chassis ground (): Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
5 CHECK OUTPUT SIGNAL FOR ECM. Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Repair the poor
Measure the voltage between ECM and chassis circuit to power in contact of ECM
ground. the harness connector.
Connector & terminal between ECM and
(B136) No. 18 (+) Chassis ground (): front oxygen (A/F)
(B136) No. 19 (+) Chassis ground (): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
DA:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-242
12LE_US.book 243

DB:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper fuel supply
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
the List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).
<Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK DRAIN HOSE. Is there clogging in the drain Replace the drain Go to step 3.
Check the drain hose for clogging. hose? hose.
3 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION. Does the drain valve operate? Repair the poor Replace the drain
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact of ECM valve. <Ref. to
2) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. connector. EC(H4SO)-19,
CAUTION: Drain Valve.>
Do not use any fuses that are installed on
the vehicle.
4) Operate the drain valve.
NOTE:
tion Check Mode.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-243
12LE_US.book 244

DC:DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P1498. <Ref. to EN(H4SO)(diag)-245, DTC P1498 EGR SOLE-
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
DD:DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
NOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
DE:DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
DF:DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
DG:DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
DH:DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-244
12LE_US.book 245

DI: DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-209, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to
GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW IN-
PUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P1496 EGR SO-
LENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine breathing
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-245
12LE_US.book 246

WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

B220
M/B No.16
4
3
1
2
ECM
E
20
30
B134
8
9
B21
25
26
48
29
30
E2
E18
2
5
3
1
4
6
EGR
CONTROL
VALVE
B21
E18 B220 B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 3 1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
4 5 6 2 6 10 14 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-09182
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EGR CON- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
TROL VALVE. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from the EGR In this case, repair
control valve. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between EGR control harness between
valve connector and engine ground. EGR control valve
Connector & terminal and main relay
(E18) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): connector
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-246
12LE_US.book 247

Step Check Yes No

EGR CONTROL VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and the following item:
EGR control valve connector. Open circuit of
DTC P1492; (B134) No. 8 (E18) No. 3: ECM and EGR
DTC P1494; (B134) No. 9 (E18) No. 1: control valve con-
DTC P1496; (B134) No. 20 (E18) No. 4: nector
DTC P1498; (B134) No. 30 (E18) No. 6: Poor contact of
coupling connector
EGR CONTROL VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short in harness
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and EGR control valve
chassis ground. connector.
DTC P1492; (B134) No. 8 Chassis
ground:
ground:
ground:
ground:
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact in ECM or Repair the poor Replace EGR con-
Check poor contact between ECM and EGR EGR control valve connector? contact of ECM or trol valve. <Ref. to
control valve connector. EGR control valve FU(H4SO)-36,
connector. EGR Valve.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-247
12LE_US.book 248

DJ:DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(HIGH INPUT)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-211, DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to
GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH IN-
PUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P1497 EGR SO-
LENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.> <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-213, DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine breathing
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-248
12LE_US.book 249

WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

B220
M/B No.16
4
3
1
2
ECM
E
20
30
B134
8
9
B21
25
26
48
29
30
E2
E18
2
5
3
1
4
6
EGR
CONTROL
VALVE
B21
E18 B220 B134

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
1 2 3 1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
4 5 6 2 6 10 14 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-09182
Step Check Yes No

EGR CONTROL VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and between the ECM
EGR control valve. and EGR control
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. valve connector.
chassis ground.
DTC P1493; (B134) No. 8 (+) Chassis
ground ():
DTC P1495; (B134) No. 9 (+) Chassis
ground ():
DTC P1497; (B134) No. 20 (+) Chassis
ground ():
DTC P1499; (B134) No. 30 (+) Chassis
ground ():
EN(H4SO)(diag)-249
12LE_US.book 250

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK EGR CONTROL VALVE. Is the resistance 20 or more? Repair the poor Replace EGR con-
Measure the resistance between EGR control contact of ECM trol valve. <Ref. to
valve terminals. connector. FU(H4SO)-36,
Terminals EGR Valve.>
DTC P1493; No. 2 No. 3:
DTC P1495; No. 2 No. 1:
DTC P1497; No. 5 No. 4:
DTC P1499; No. 5 No. 6:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-250
12LE_US.book 251

DK:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-214, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW IN-
PUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
2
IGNITION SWITCH
B72
STARTER RELAY
B493
E
1
INHIBITOR SWITCH
P R N D
MT CVT 12 6
11 9
MT
B12 T3 T7
CVT
2
CLUTCH STROKE
MT
START SWITCH)
B501
CVT
1
CVT
B14
MT M
B26
C16
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
B493 B501 B72 T7 B12 B : B135 C : B136
1 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 5 6 7 8 14 15 16
3 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
4 5 6 9 10 11 12 25 26 27
4 6 7 8 9 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07701
EN(H4SO)(diag)-251
12LE_US.book 252

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Go to step 2.
List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC). <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 3. NOTE:
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. Check the follow-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ing item and repair
2) Remove the starter relay. or replace if neces-
3) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and sary.
starter motor. Open circuit of
ECM and starter relay connector. ECM and starter
Connector & terminal relay connector
NOTE: coupling connector
range or N range.
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between ECM and connector. harness between
chassis ground. ECM and starter
Connector & terminal relay connector.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-252
12LE_US.book 253

DL:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-215, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
FUNCTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 B72 IGNITION SWITCH
BATTERY
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7
C2
A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
B21
40
35
34
37
36
E2
E E
B21 A: B134 B: B135 B220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 5 9 13
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 2 6 10 14
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 B72 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07702
Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. contact of ECM
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and connector.
chassis ground.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-253
12LE_US.book 254

Step Check Yes No

MAIN FUSE BOX CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. ness between
2) Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and battery
chassis ground. terminal.
3 CHECK M/B NO. 12 FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Repair the harness
and connector.
NOTE:
the following item:
Open circuit in
harness between
ECM and battery
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
battery terminal
EN(H4SO)(diag)-254
12LE_US.book 255

DM:DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-217, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-255
12LE_US.book 256


M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
Step Check Yes No

List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC). <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-256
12LE_US.book 257

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and front oxy-
chassis ground. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the voltage between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/
F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/ circuit to power in contact of ECM
F) sensor connector and chassis ground. the harness connector.
(E24) No. 1 (+) Chassis ground (): front oxygen (A/F)
(E24) No. 2 (+) Chassis ground (): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
intake system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-257
12LE_US.book 258

Step Check Yes No

1) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- Fuel pressure is
nector. too low:
2) Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to Improper fuel
ME(H4SO)-28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the
fuel pressure gauge.
tor.>
General scan tool
(167F). FU(H4SO)-32,
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
EN(H4SO)(diag)-258
12LE_US.book 259

Step Check Yes No

(167F). FU(H4SO)-32,
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
Depress the clutch pedal. (MT model)
tor.>
General scan tool
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
EN(H4SO)(diag)-259
12LE_US.book 260

Step Check Yes No

inside.
17 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR US- Is the value in Rear O2 Sen- Replace the front Go to step 18.
ING REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL. sor kept at 0.250 V or less for 5 oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant minutes or more? sor. <Ref. to
temperature is higher than 75C (167F), then FU(H4SO)-42,
keep the engine idling for 5 minutes or more. Front Oxygen (A/F)
2) Read the value of Rear O2 Sensor using Sensor.>
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
(B134) No. 29 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-260
12LE_US.book 261

DN:DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-219, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
TEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 2 1
4 3
11
10
9
FRONT
E A: B134
B220 OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
(A/F)
SENSOR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
E24
4
3
2
1
C: B136
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E2
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
50
51
4
3
B21
E D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
C18
C19
C5
C6
C9
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
A : B134
C : B136 ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
D : B137 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2
B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
E 2 6 10 14
19
EN-08630
EN(H4SO)(diag)-261
12LE_US.book 262


M/B No.15
12
11 1 2
10 3 4
9
E
REAR
B220
OXYGEN
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
E25
2
1
4
3
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
C: B136 D: B137
50
53
19
1
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
C20
B6
C9
A : B134 B21
B : B135
ECM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
C : B136 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D : B137
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
37
36
40
35
34
E2 B220
17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
E 19
EN-08631
Step Check Yes No

List of Diagnostic
Trouble Code
(DTC). <Ref. to
EN(H4SO)(diag)-
tic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
TOR. inside.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-262
12LE_US.book 263

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
coupling connector
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and front oxy-
chassis ground. gen (A/F) sensor
3) Measure the voltage between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/
F) sensor connector and chassis ground.
Measure the voltage between front oxygen (A/ circuit to power in contact of ECM
F) sensor connector and chassis ground. the harness connector.
(E24) No. 1 (+) Chassis ground (): front oxygen (A/F)
(E24) No. 2 (+) Chassis ground (): sensor connector.
After repair,
replace the ECM.
<Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
intake system?
EN(H4SO)(diag)-263
12LE_US.book 264

Step Check Yes No

1) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor con- Fuel pressure is
nector. too low:
2) Measure the fuel pressure. <Ref. to Improper fuel
ME(H4SO)-28, INSPECTION, Fuel Pressure.> pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the
fuel pressure gauge.
tor.>
General scan tool
(167F). FU(H4SO)-32,
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
EN(H4SO)(diag)-264
12LE_US.book 265

Step Check Yes No

(167F). FU(H4SO)-32,
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
EN(H4SO)(diag)-265
12LE_US.book 266

Step Check Yes No

inside.
17 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR US- Is the value in Rear O2 Sen- Replace the front Go to step 18.
ING REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SIGNAL. sor kept at 0.8 V or more for 5 oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Warm up the engine until engine coolant minutes or more? sor. <Ref. to
temperature is higher than 75C (167F), then FU(H4SO)-42,
keep the engine idling for 5 minutes or more. Front Oxygen (A/F)
2) Read the value of Rear O2 Sensor using Sensor.>
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
(B134) No. 29 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-266
12LE_US.book 267

DO:DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-267
12LE_US.book 268

Step Check Yes No

Terminals
No. 15 No. 16:
ground.
ground. connector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. between ECM and
(B135) No. 17 (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 (B220) No. 15:
2) Disconnect the connectors from electronic tronic throttle con-
throttle control. trol connector.
chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 (B136) No. 4:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-268
12LE_US.book 269

Step Check Yes No

defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
NECTOR. NOTE:
Poor contact of
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? circuit to power in
3) Measure the resistance between ECM control connector.
nectors.
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 18:
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 28:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-269
12LE_US.book 270

Step Check Yes No

12 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the value of Main-Throttle Go to step 13. Repair the poor
1) Connect all connectors. Sensor 0.81 0.87 V? contact of elec-
3) Read the value of Main-Throttle Sensor trol connector.
using Subaru Select Monitor. Replace the elec-
NOTE: tronic throttle con-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to trol if defective.
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. <Ref. to
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- FU(H4SO)-15,
tor.> Throttle Body.>
13 CHECK SENSOR OUTPUT. Is the value of Sub-Throttle Go to step 14. Repair the poor
Read the value of Sub-Throttle Sensor using Sensor 1.64 1.70 V? contact of elec-
Subaru Select Monitor. tronic throttle con-
NOTE: trol connector.
For detailed operation procedures, refer to Replace the elec-
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. tronic throttle con-
to EN(H4SO)(diag)-33, Subaru Select Moni- trol if defective.
tor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-15,
Throttle Body.>
NECTOR. NOTE:
electronic throttle control connector. ECM and electron-
coupling connector
1) Connect the connector to ECM. ECM and elec-
3) Measure the voltage between electronic trol connector.
3) Measure the resistance between electronic trol connector.
17 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 18. Repair the short
TROL CONNECTOR HARNESS. more? circuit of harness
Measure the resistance between electronic between ECM and
throttle control connectors. electronic throttle
Connector & terminal control connector.
(E57) No. 2 (E57) No. 1:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-270
12LE_US.book 271

Step Check Yes No

18 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance less than 5 ? Go to step 19. Repair the harness
TROL GROUND CIRCUIT. and connector.
Measure the resistance between ECM and NOTE:
coupling connector
19 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 50 or less? Go to step 20. Replace the elec-
TROL. tronic throttle con-
Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to
throttle control terminals. FU(H4SO)-15,
Terminals Throttle Body.>
No. 2 No. 1:
20 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Does the valve return to the Repair the poor Replace the elec-
TROL. specified position? Standard contact of ECM tronic throttle con-
Move the throttle valve to the fully open and fully value: 3 mm (0.12 in) from fully connector. trol. <Ref. to
closed positions with fingers. closed position FU(H4SO)-15,
Check that the valve returns to the specified Throttle Body.>
position when releasing fingers.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-271
12LE_US.book 272

DP:DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-272
12LE_US.book 273

Step Check Yes No

Terminals
No. 15 No. 16:
ground.
ground. connector.
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 ? Repair the poor Repair the open
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- contact of ECM circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. connector. between ECM and
(B135) No. 17 (B220) No. 14:
(B135) No. 7 (B220) No. 15:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-273
12LE_US.book 274

DQ:DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-274
12LE_US.book 275

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CON- Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 2. Replace the elec-
TROL RELAY. more? tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between electronic Electronic Throttle
throttle control relay terminals. Control Relay.>
Terminals
No. 15 No. 16:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT OF ELECTRONIC Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 3.
THROTTLE CONTROL RELAY POWER SUP- circuit to power in
PLY. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between electronic electronic throttle
throttle control relay connector and chassis control relay con-
ground. nector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL RE- more? contact of ECM circuit in harness
LAY CONNECTOR. connector. to ground between
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. tronic throttle con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and trol relay
chassis ground. connector.
DR:DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR A MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-275
12LE_US.book 276

DS:DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
SOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
PEDAL POSITION 1 2 3 4 5 6
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-276
12LE_US.book 277

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 2. Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? circuit to ground in
CONNECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and accelera-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tor pedal position
accelerator pedal position sensor. sensor connector.
chassis ground.
(B135) No. 23 (B136) No. 4:
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the accel- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? erator pedal. <Ref. circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- to SP(H4SO)-4, harness between
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Accelerator ECM and accelera-
ground. Pedal.> tor pedal position
(B315) No. 6 Chassis ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-277
12LE_US.book 278

DT:DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
SOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-278
12LE_US.book 279

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 2. Repair the open
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit in harness
CONNECTOR. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. accelerator pedal
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and position sensor
accelerator pedal position sensor. connector.
ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor
connector.
(B135) No. 23 (B315) No. 6:
(B135) No. 29 (B315) No. 5:
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 5 ? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- the following item:
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Open circuit of
Connector & terminal ECM and engine
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit to power
CONNECTOR. supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ness between the
2) Measure the voltage between accelerator ECM and accelera-
pedal position sensor connector and chassis tor pedal position
ground. sensor connector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 M or Repair the poor Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? contact of acceler- circuit to power
CONNECTOR. ator pedal position supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor connector. ness between the
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the accel- ECM and accelera-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- erator pedal if tor pedal position
nectors. defective. <Ref. to sensor connector.
Connector & terminal SP(H4SO)-4,
(B135) No. 21 (B135) No. 23: Accelerator
Pedal.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-279
12LE_US.book 280

DU:DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
SOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-280
12LE_US.book 281

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 2. Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? circuit to ground in
CONNECTOR. harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and accelera-
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and tor pedal position
accelerator pedal position sensor. sensor connector.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the accel- Repair the short
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? erator pedal. <Ref. circuit to ground in
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- to SP(H4SO)-4, harness between
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Accelerator ECM and accelera-
ground. Pedal.> tor pedal position
(B315) No. 3 Chassis ground: Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-281
12LE_US.book 282

DV:DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
SOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-282
12LE_US.book 283

Step Check Yes No

CONNECTOR. NOTE:
accelerator pedal position sensor. Open circuit in
ECM and accelerator pedal position sensor ECM and acceler-
connector. ator pedal position
Connector & terminal sensor connector
(B135) No. 30 (B315) No. 2: joint connector
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between accelera- the following item:
tor pedal position sensor connector and chassis Open circuit of
Connector & terminal ECM and engine
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
joint connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Go to step 4.
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR circuit to power
CONNECTOR. supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. ness between the
2) Measure the voltage between accelerator ECM and accelera-
pedal position sensor connector and chassis tor pedal position
ground. sensor connector.
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance 1 M or Repair the poor Repair the short
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR more? contact of acceler- circuit to power
CONNECTOR. ator pedal position supply in the har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor connector. ness between the
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. Replace the accel- ECM and accelera-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- erator pedal if tor pedal position
nectors. defective. <Ref. to sensor connector.
Connector & terminal SP(H4SO)-4,
(B135) No. 22 (B135) No. 31: Accelerator
Pedal.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-283
12LE_US.book 284

DW:DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH A/B

VOLTAGE CORRELATION
SOR/SWITCH A/B VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
THROTTLE
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
MAIN RELAY B220
15
E
B17
B7
ECM
A : B134 B : B135 C : B136 D : B137

A 29
A 19
A 28
A 18
D3
A6
A3
A1
A2
A4
D1
C4
*
*
B138
B21
37
36
35
40
34
20
39
38
17
18
19
E2
5
6
1

* ARRANGEMENT
E E ELECTRONIC E
E57 THROTTLE
CONTROL
E57 B138 B21 A: B134 B: B135
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 5 6 5 6 7 8 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
B220 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47 C: B136 D: B137
17 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
2 6 10 14
19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07785
EN(H4SO)(diag)-284
12LE_US.book 285

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 (B136) No. 4:
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4SO)-46,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
NECTOR. NOTE:
Poor contact of
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-285
12LE_US.book 286

Step Check Yes No

(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 18: FU(H4SO)-15,
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 28: Throttle Body.>
EN(H4SO)(diag)-286
12LE_US.book 287

DX:DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH D/E VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
SOR/SWITCH D/E VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B315
ACCELERATOR
SENSOR
B83 B138
4
B315
1 2 3 1 2 3 4
4 5 6 5 6 7 8
B21

* 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
*
* 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
* B83
42 43 44 45 46 47
* 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
B21
B23
B29
B22
B31
B30
C4
B138
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B: B135 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
B: B135
A4
D3
A6
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
B21 C: B136
37
36
34
40
35
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08677
EN(H4SO)(diag)-287
12LE_US.book 288

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Is the difference in measured Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
SENSOR OUTPUT. values for the main accelerator
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. pedal position sensor signal
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and and the sub accelerator pedal
chassis ground. position sensor signal 0 V?
Main accelerator pedal position sensor
signal
Sub accelerator pedal position sensor
signal
2 CHECK ACCELERATOR PEDAL POSITION Is the difference in measured Replace the accel- Repair the harness
SENSOR OUTPUT. values for the main accelerator erator pedal. <Ref. and connector.
1) Measure the voltage between accelerator pedal position sensor signal to SP(H4SO)-4, NOTE:
pedal position sensor connector and chassis and the sub accelerator pedal Accelerator In this case, repair
ground. position sensor signal 0 V? Pedal.> the following item:
(B315) No. 6 (+) Chassis ground (): harness between
(B315) No. 3 (+) Chassis ground (): ECM and acceler-
ator pedal position
sensor connector
Short circuit to
ground in harness
between ECM and
accelerator pedal
position sensor
connector
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND AC- Is the resistance less than 5 ? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CELERATOR PEDAL POSITION SENSOR contact of ECM and connector.
CONNECTOR. connector. NOTE:
Measure the resistance of harness between the In this case, repair
accelerator pedal position sensor connector the following item:
and chassis ground. Open circuit in
(B315) No. 5 Chassis ground: ECM and acceler-
(B315) No. 2 Chassis ground: ator pedal position
sensor connector
Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and engine
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
joint connector
EN(H4SO)(diag)-288
12LE_US.book 289

DY:DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-238, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check DTC using Replace the ECM.
List of Diagnostic <Ref. to
Trouble Code FU(H4SO)-46,
(DTC). <Ref. to Engine Control
EN(H4SO)(diag)- Module (ECM).>
78, List of Diagnos- NOTE:
tic Trouble Code The barometric
(DTC).> pressure sensor is
built into the ECM.
DZ:DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW

LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
built into the ECM.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-289
12LE_US.book 290

EA:DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH

CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
built into the ECM.
EB:DTC P2610 ECM/PCM INTERNAL ENGINE OFF TIMER PERFORMANCE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-241, DTC P2610 ECM/PCM INTERNAL ENGINE OFF
TIMER PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Inspection Mode.>.
Step Check Yes No
tic Trouble Code The soak timer IC
(DTC).> is built into the
ECM.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-290
12LE_US.book 291

EC:DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS OFF DETECTION

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to LAN section. <Ref. to LAN(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.>
ED:DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
EE:DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
EF:DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
EG:DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
EH:DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
EI: DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
EN(H4SO)(diag)-291
12LE_US.book 292
General Diagnostic Table

20.General Diagnostic Table

A: INSPECTION
1. ENGINE
NOTE:
Malfunction of parts other than those listed is also possible. <Ref. to ME(H4SO)-102, Engine Trouble in Gen-
eral.>
Symptoms Faulty parts
1) Manifold absolute pressure sensor
2) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
3) Ignition parts (*1)
4) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
1. Engine stalls during idling.
5) Crankshaft position sensor (*3)
6) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
7) Fuel injection parts (*4)
8) Electronic throttle control
5) Air intake system (*5)
2. Rough idling 7) Electronic throttle control
10) Oxygen sensor
11) Fuel pump and fuel pump relay
12) EGR control valve
13) Oil switching solenoid valve
1) Engine coolant temperature sensor
3. Engine does not return to idle. 4) Mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor
6) Accelerator pedal position sensor
7) Engine oil temperature sensor
4. Poor acceleration
9) Engine torque control signal circuit
12) Accelerator pedal position sensor
13) Engine oil temperature sensor
EN(H4SO)(diag)-292
12LE_US.book 293

Symptoms Faulty parts

5. Engine stalls, hesitates, or sputters at accelera- 5) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
tion. 6) Purge control solenoid valve
6. Surging 5) Camshaft position sensor (*3)
3) Engine coolant temperature sensor
4) Knock sensor
7. Spark knock
8. After burning in exhaust system 3) Engine coolant temperature sensor (*2)
*1: Check ignition coil and spark plug.
*2: Indicate the symptom occurring only in cold temperatures.
*3: Ensure the secure installation.
*4: Check fuel injector, fuel pressure regulator and fuel filter.
*5: Inspect air leak in air intake system.
EN(H4SO)(diag)-293
12LE_US.book 294

EN(H4SO)(diag)-294
12LE_US.book 1
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
GD(H4SO)
Page
1. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ......................................................2
2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria ....................................9
12LE_US.book 2

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Index
P0026 Intake Valve Control Solenoid Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-9, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID
cuit Range/Performance (Bank 1) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code
cuit Range/Performance (Bank 2) CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-11, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-13, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-15, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-17, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-19, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Cor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-21, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
relation CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
cuit Low (Bank 1) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
cuit High (Bank 1) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
cuit Low (Bank 2) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
cuit High (Bank 2) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-25, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIR-
Range/Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
Low Input CUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
High Input CUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baro- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-32, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
metric Pressure Circuit Low Input BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baro- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-34, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
metric Pressure Circuit High Input BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-36, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Circuit Range/Performance 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Detecting Criteria.>
Circuit Low 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-2
12LE_US.book 3

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

Circuit High 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-43, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
cuit Low CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-45, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
cuit High CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-47, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
Switch A Circuit Low SOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
Switch A Circuit High SOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-51, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERA-
for Closed Loop Fuel Control TURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Tem- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-53, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
perature for Stable Operation TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Cool- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-55, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
ant Temperature Below Thermo- COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEM-
stat Regulating Temperature) PERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-59, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-61, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-63, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-66, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-68, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-71, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE
P013A O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-72, DTC P013A O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE -
to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2) RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P013B O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-74, DTC P013B O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE -
to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2) LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P013E O2 Sensor Delayed Response - <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-76, DTC P013E O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE -
Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2) RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P013F O2 Sensor Delayed Response - <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-78, DTC P013F O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE -
Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2) LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-80, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-82, DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT
Sensor2) (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P014C O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-84, DTC P014C O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE -
to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1) RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GD(H4SO)-3
12LE_US.book 4

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

P014D O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-86, DTC P014D O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE -
to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1) LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P015A O2 Sensor Delayed Response - <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-87, DTC P015A O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE -
Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 1) RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P015B O2 Sensor Delayed Response - <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-89, DTC P015B O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE -
Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 1) LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-90, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diag-
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-92, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diag-
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-94, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
cuit Range/Performance CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
cuit Low Input CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
cuit High Input CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0196 Engine Oil Temperature Sensor <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-101, DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SEN-
Circuit Range/Performance SOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Low SOR LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
High SOR HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0201 Injector #1 <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-105, DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1, Diagnostic Trouble
Switch B Circuit Low SOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
Switch B Circuit High SOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detect-
ing Criteria.>
P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-111, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED,
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-122, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
1 or Single Sensor) (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-124, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
1 or Single Sensor) (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-4
12LE_US.book 5

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-126, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
cuit A CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-128, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
cuit Range/Performance A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-130, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A
cuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0341 Camshaft Position Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-132, DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A
cuit Range/Performance (Bank 1 or CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diag-
Single Sensor) nostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0351 Ignition Coil A Primary/Secondary <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-134, DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/SEC-
Circuit ONDARY CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0352 Ignition Coil B Primary/Secondary <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-134, DTC P0352 IGNITION COIL B PRIMARY/SEC-
P0353 Ignition Coil C Primary/Secondary <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-134, DTC P0353 IGNITION COIL C PRIMARY/SEC-
P0354 Ignition Coil D Primary/Secondary <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-134, DTC P0354 IGNITION COIL D PRIMARY/SEC-
P0400 Exhaust Gas Recirculation Flow <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-135, DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION
FLOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-138, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
Threshold (Bank 1) BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-141, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CONTROL
tem Leak Detected (Small Leak) SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code
tem Vent Control Circuit Open SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code
tem Vent Control Circuit Shorted SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code
tem Pressure Sensor SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
tem Pressure Sensor High Input SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code
tem Leak Detected (Very Small SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble
Leak) Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
tem Leak Detected (Fuel Cap SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble
Loose/Off) Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-167, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Purge Control Valve Circuit Low PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0459 Evaporative Emission System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-169, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYSTEM
Purge Control Valve Circuit High PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GD(H4SO)-5
12LE_US.book 6

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

P0461 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-171, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT
Range/Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-173, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-175, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermit- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-177, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT
tent INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor A <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-180, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A, Diag-
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-181, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
Lower Than Expected LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-182, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM
Higher Than Expected HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL
Performance SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-188, DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING
mance PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-189, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT, Diag-
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY,
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-191, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Access Memory (RAM) Error RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-192, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE
Memory (ROM) Error READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-193, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIR-
Range/Performance CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/ <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-195, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
Performance (Bank 1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P0700 Transmission Control System (MIL <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-197, DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Request) (MIL REQUEST), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-198, DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
Low (AT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-199, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
(MT Model) LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-200, DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
High (AT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-201, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT
(MT Model) HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-202, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
mance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) FORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-204, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
mance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) FORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
GD(H4SO)-6
12LE_US.book 7

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-206, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE, Diag-
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Func- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-207, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
tion Problem FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1492 EGR Solenoid Valve Signal #1 Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-209, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1
cuit Malfunction (Low Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
cuit Malfunction (High Input) CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-214, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW
INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunc- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-215, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MAL-
tion FUNCTION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBIL-
ITY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure (Except <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
Antenna Circuit) ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE,
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-216, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Trouble
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-217, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
Too Lean (Bank 1) TEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-219, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYS-
Too Rich (Bank 1) TEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Cir- <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-221, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL
cuit Range/Performance MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code
GD(H4SO)-7
12LE_US.book 8

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DTC Item Index

cuit Low MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
cuit High MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor A <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-225, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
Minimum Stop Performance SOR A MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code
Switch D Circuit Low Input SOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Switch D Circuit High Input SOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Switch E Circuit Low Input SOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Switch E Circuit High Input SOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)
Switch A/B Voltage Correlation SOR/SWITCH A/B VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
Switch D/E Voltage Correlation SOR/SWITCH D/E VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code
P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-238, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
Range/Performance RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-239, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-240, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT
P2610 ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-241, DTC P2610 ECM/PCM INTERNAL ENGINE OFF
Timer Performance TIMER PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus Off Detection <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-250, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS OFF DETEC-
TION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-251, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-252, DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-252, DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED,
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-253, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-254, DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-254, DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL, Diag-
GD(H4SO)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria

A: DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 1)
1. OUTLINE OF DIAGNOSIS
Judge as NG with either Low NG or High NG.
A variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is installed for diagnosis. It is possible to determine whether
the intake valve is in high mode (increase the amount of lift) or in low mode (suppressing the amount of lift)
when the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch is turned ON or OFF.
Normal
Variable valve lift diagnosis
Oil switching solenoid valve duty Intake valve
oil pressure switch
Large High mode OFF
Minimum Low mode ON
Low NG
When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains ON even though the intake valve tried to
enter high mode (oil switching solenoid valve duty is large), this is judged as a Low NG.
High NG
When the variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch remains OFF even though the intake valve tried to
enter low mode (oil switching solenoid valve duty is small), this is judged as a High NG.
2. COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The variable valve lift system optimizes the intake valve lift by switching between the low lift cam and the high
lift cam according to the engine speed. The amount of intake valve lift is varied by controlling the oil switching
solenoid valve duty according to signals from the ECM.
(A)
(B)
EN-05565
(A) Low lift (B) High lift
GD(H4SO)-9
12LE_US.book 10

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Secondary Parameters Enable Conditions
Battery voltage 10.9 V
After engine starting 6000 ms
Engine oil temperature 15 C (59 F)
Variable valve lift control Operation
4. GENERAL DRIVING CYCLE

Perform the diagnosis continuously 6 seconds after engine start while variable valve lift is being controlled.
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD
Abnormality Judgment
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value
Low
Duty ratio 62 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch ON
High
Duty ratio < 33 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch OFF
Time Needed for Diagnosis:

Low side: 784 ms
High side: 3000 ms
Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is more
than the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
Low
Duty ratio 62 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch OFF
High
Duty ratio < 33 %
Variable valve lift diagnosis oil pressure switch ON

Low side: 208 ms
High side: 3000 ms
B: DTC P0028 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-
FORMANCE (BANK 2)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0026. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-9, DTC P0026 INTAKE VALVE CON-
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-10
12LE_US.book 11

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
C: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect functional errors of the front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater.
Judge as NG when it is determined that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance is large when looking at en-
gine status such as deceleration fuel cut.
(1) (2) (3)

(4)
EN-08982
(1) Element cover (outer) (3) Sensor element (4) Sensor housing
(2) Element cover (inner)
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Condition established time 42000 ms
Heater current Permitted
A/F sensor heater final control Main energization sta-
tus
After fuel cut 20000 ms

Perform the diagnosis continuously after 42000 ms or more have passed since the engine started.
GD(H4SO)-11
12LE_US.book 12

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance > 50
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10000 ms

Malfunction Indicator Light Illumination: Illuminates when malfunction occurs in 2 continuous driving cy-
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance 50
GD(H4SO)-12
12LE_US.book 13

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
D: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater open or short circuit.
The front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and
the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low.
(A)
OFF
(B)
ON (D)
0V
(C)
EN-01792
(A) Battery voltage (B) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater (C) 128 ms
output voltage
(D) Low error
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform the diagnosis continuously.
GD(H4SO)-13
12LE_US.book 14

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Output voltage level Low
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control < 87.5 %
duty
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 4 ms 250 time(s)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Output voltage level High
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Less than 1 second
GD(H4SO)-14
12LE_US.book 15

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
E: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater open or short circuit.
The front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and
the output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High.
(A)
(D) OFF
(B)
ON
0V
(C)
EN-01793
(A) Battery voltage (B) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater (C) 128 ms
output voltage
(D) High error
3. ENABLE CONDITION

GD(H4SO)-15
12LE_US.book 16

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor heater control 12.5 %
duty

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-16
12LE_US.book 17

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
F: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect the rear oxygen sensor heater open or short circuit.
The rear oxygen sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and the
output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains Low.
(A)
OFF
(B)
ON (D)
0V
(C)
EN-01792
(A) Battery voltage (B) Output voltage of the rear oxygen (C) 256 ms (cycle)
sensor heater
(D) Low error
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Elapsed time after starting the engine 1 second
Engine speed < 8000 rpm

After starting the engine, perform the diagnosis continuously when engine is low speed.
GD(H4SO)-17
12LE_US.book 18

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty < 75 %

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-18
12LE_US.book 19

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
G: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect the rear oxygen sensor heater open or short circuit.
The rear oxygen sensor heater performs duty control, and the output terminal voltage at ON is 0 V, and the
output terminal voltage at OFF is the battery voltage.
Judge as NG when the terminal voltage remains High.
(A)
(D) OFF
(B)
ON
0V
(C)
EN-01793
(A) Battery voltage (B) Output voltage of the rear oxygen (C) 256 ms (cycle)
sensor heater
(D) High error
3. ENABLE CONDITION

After starting the engine, perform the diagnosis continuously when engine is low speed.
GD(H4SO)-19
12LE_US.book 20

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty 20 %

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-20
12LE_US.book 21

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
H: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

Detect problems in the intake manifold pressure sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when the intake air pressure AD value is Low whereas it seemed to be High from the viewpoint
of engine condition, or when it is High whereas it seemed to be Low from the engine condition.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765
(A) Output voltage (B) Absolute pressure
(1) Connector (2) Terminals (3) O-ring
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature 60 C (140 F)

Perform the diagnosis continuously after idling.
GD(H4SO)-21
12LE_US.book 22

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when Low side or High side becomes NG.
Judgment Value
Low
Throttle position 12
Output voltage < 1.46 V
Engine load > 0.5 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev)
(CVT model)
> 0.45 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev)
(MT model)
High
Engine speed 550 rpm 900 rpm
Throttle position < 4.4 (CVT model)
< 3.6 (MT model)
Output voltage 2.5 V
Engine load < 0.4 g/rev (0.01 oz/rev)

Low side: 5000 ms
High side: 5000 ms
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when both Low side and High side become OK.
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is longer than the time indicated, judge as OK.
Judgment Value
Low
Throttle position 12
Engine load > 0.5 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev)
(CVT model)
> 0.45 g/rev (0.02 oz/rev)
(MT model)
High
Throttle position < 4.4 (CVT model)
< 3.6 (MT model)
Engine load < 0.4 g/rev (0.01 oz/rev)

Low side: Less than 1 second
High side: Less than 1 second
GD(H4SO)-22
12LE_US.book 23

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
I: DTC P0076 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1)

Detect the open circuit of the oil switching solenoid valve.
Judge as NG when the current is small even though the output duty is large.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

Judgment Value
Duty ratio 30 %
Control current < 0.026 A

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
|Oil switching solenoid valve target cur- < 0.08 A
rent value Oil switching solenoid valve
current value|
Target current 0.11 A
GD(H4SO)-23
12LE_US.book 24

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
J: DTC P0077 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1)

Detect short circuits of the oil switching solenoid valve.
Judge as a short NG when the current is large even though the output duty is small.
2. ENABLE CONDITION

Judgment Value
Duty ratio <7%
Control current 0.465 A

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
|Oil switching solenoid valve target cur- < 0.08 A
rent value Oil switching solenoid valve
current value|

K: DTC P0082 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2)
NOTE:
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
L: DTC P0083 INTAKE VALVE CONTROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2)
NOTE:
TROL SOLENOID CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-24
12LE_US.book 25

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
M: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
Detect the malfunction of air flow sensor output properties.
Judge as a low side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a small value regardless of running in a state
where the air flow voltage increases. Judge as a high side NG when the air flow voltage indicates a large val-
ue regardless of running in a state where the air flow voltage decreases. Judge air flow sensor property NG
when the Low side or High side becomes NG.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766
(A) Air
(1) Air flow sensor (3) Voltage (V) (4) Amount of intake air (kg (lb)/s)
(2) Intake air temperature sensor
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis continuously after idling.
GD(H4SO)-25
12LE_US.book 26

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when Low side or High side becomes NG.
Judgment Value
Low
Output voltage < 1.49 V (CVT model)
< 1.47 V (MT model)
Engine speed 2500 rpm (CVT model)
2000 rpm (MT model)
Throttle opening angle 12
Intake manifold pressure 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg)
High (1)
Throttle opening angle < 4.4 (CVT model)
< 3.6 (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
High (2)
Output voltage 1.55 V (CVT model)
1.45 V (MT model)
< 3.6 (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
Fuel system diagnosis Rich side malfunction

Low: 5000 ms
High: 5000 ms
cles.
GD(H4SO)-26
12LE_US.book 27

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when both Low side and High side become OK.
Judgment Value
Low
Output voltage 1.49 V (CVT model)
1.47 V (MT model)
Engine speed 2500 rpm (CVT model)
2000 rpm (MT model)
Throttle opening angle 12
Intake manifold pressure 66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg)
High
< 3.6 (MT model)
Intake manifold pressure < 40 kPa (300 mmHg, 11.8 inHg)
Fuel system diagnosis Rich side normal

Low: Less than 1 second
High: Less than 1 second
GD(H4SO)-27
12LE_US.book 28

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
N: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect open or short circuits of the air flow sensor.
Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766
(A) Air
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-28
12LE_US.book 29

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Output voltage > 0.22 V
GD(H4SO)-29
12LE_US.book 30

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
O: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

Detect open or short circuits of the air flow sensor.
(1)
(3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01766
(A) Air
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-30
12LE_US.book 31

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-31
12LE_US.book 32

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
P: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of intake manifold pressure sensor.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-32
12LE_US.book 33

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Output voltage > 0.606 V
GD(H4SO)-33
12LE_US.book 34

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Q: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of intake manifold pressure sensor.
(1) (2)
(A)
(B)
(3)
EN-01765
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-34
12LE_US.book 35

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-35
12LE_US.book 36

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
R: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
Detect the malfunction of intake air temperature sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the intake air temperature is not varied whereas it seemed to be varied from the viewpoint
of engine condition.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
(A) Air
(1) Air flow sensor (3) Resistance value () (4) Intake air temperature C (F)
GD(H4SO)-36
12LE_US.book 37

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature at engine < 35 C (95 F)
starting
Continuous time when the vehicle speed 600 s
is less than 140 km/h (87 MPH)
Intake air amount sum value Value of Map 1
Number of experiences under conditions 3 time(s)

below
Continuous time when vehicle speed is Value from Map 2
less than 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)
Continuous time when vehicle speed is 15 s
40 km/h (24.9 MPH) or more
and
Establishing time of 1, 2 15 s
1. Intake air amount 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
2. Vehicle speed 4 km/h (2.5 MPH)
Map 1
Engine coolant temperature 20 10 0 10 20
C (F) (4) (14) (32) (50) (68)
Intake air amount sum value 50000 7400 6600 5800 4500
(g (oz)) (1763.5) (261) (232.78) (204.57) (158.72)
Map 2
Engine coolant temperature 30 0 10 20
C (F) (22) (32) (50) (68)
Continuous time (s) when
vehicle speed is less than 4 250 40 32 24
km/h (2.5 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis when the vehicle speed condition is met after warming up from a cold condition.
GD(H4SO)-37
12LE_US.book 38

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Output voltage difference between Max. < 0.02 V(Equivalent to
and Min. approximately 0.5C
(0.9F) near 25C)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Output voltage difference between Max. 0.02 V
and Min.
GD(H4SO)-38
12LE_US.book 39

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
S: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

Detect open or short circuit of the intake air temperature sensor.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
(A) Air
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-39
12LE_US.book 40

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-40
12LE_US.book 41

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
T: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect open or short circuit of the intake air temperature sensor.
(1) (3)
(2)
(A)
(4)
EN-01767
(A) Air
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-41
12LE_US.book 42

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-42
12LE_US.book 43

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
U: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open or short circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
(A) Resistance value (k) (B) Temperature C (F)
(1) Connector (2) Thermistor element
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-43
12LE_US.book 44

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-44
12LE_US.book 45

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
V: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of the engine coolant temperature sensor.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-45
12LE_US.book 46

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-46
12LE_US.book 47

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
W: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT

LOW
Detect the open or short circuit of throttle position sensor 1.
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
(1) Throttle position sensor 1 signal (3) Throttle position sensor (4) Engine control module (ECM)
(2) Throttle position sensor 2 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-47
12LE_US.book 48

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage 0.23 V

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage > 0.23 V
GD(H4SO)-48
12LE_US.book 49

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
X: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT

HIGH
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-49
12LE_US.book 50

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Sensor 1 input voltage < 4.858 V
GD(H4SO)-50
12LE_US.book 51

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Y: DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
Detect the malfunction of engine coolant temperature output property.
Judge as NG when the engine coolant temperature does not rise in driving conditions where it should.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine speed Value from Map
Map
Engine coolant temperature 40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30
C (F) (40) (22) (4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

C (F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

Perform the diagnosis only once after engine start.
GD(H4SO)-51
12LE_US.book 52

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judge as NG if the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
Engine coolant temperature < 20 C (68 F)
Timer for diagnosis after engine start Judgment value of
timer after engine start
Timer for diagnosis after engine start

a. Timer stop at fuel cut
b. During the driving conditions except a) above, timer counts up as follows.
64 ms + TWCNT ms (when at 64 ms)
TWCNT is defined as follows,
TWCNT = 0 at idle switch ON,
TWCNT show on the following table at idle switch OFF.
0 (0) 8 (5) 16 (9.9) 24 (14.9) 32 (19.9) 40 (24.9) 48 (29.8) 56 (34.8)
20 (4) 0 ms 33.4152 ms 43.6878 ms 53.9604 ms 89.076 ms 124.1916 ms 163.3671 ms 202.5426 ms
Tempera- 10 (14) 0 ms 33.4152 ms 43.6878 ms 53.9604 ms 89.076 ms 124.1916 ms 163.3671 ms 202.5426 ms
ture 0 (32) 0 ms 21.1752 ms 30.6576 ms 40.14 ms 64.3824 ms 88.626 ms 116.544 ms 144.4632 ms
C (F) 10 (50) 0 ms 12.6416 ms 25.2832 ms 37.9264 ms 60.7056 ms 83.4832 ms 109.7168 ms 123.807 ms
Judgment value of timer after engine starting

t = 573669 ms 33924 ms Ti
Ti : The lowest coolant temperature after engine start
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG when the malfunction criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-52
12LE_US.book 53

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Z: DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
Detect the malfunction of the engine coolant temperature sensor characteristics.
When the ignition is ON after the specified period of soaking time has elapsed, compare the engine coolant
temperature with intake air temperature. Judge as NG if the difference between two temperatures is larger
than the predetermined value and the engine coolant temperature becomes the specified value or more.
(1)
(A)
(B)
(2)
EN-02917
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Soaking time 21600 s
Engine coolant temperature at the last Value from Map
engine stop
Map
Estimate ambient temperature 7 8 10 25
C (F) (19.4) (46.4) (50) (77)
76.2 80.5 80.5 80.5
the last engine stop
(169.2) (176.9) (176.9) (176.9)
C (F)

Perform the diagnosis only once after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-53
12LE_US.book 54

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
All of the following conditions are estab-
lished.
Engine coolant temperature intake air > 15C (27F)
temperature
Engine coolant temperature > 40 C (104 F)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
When any one of the followings is estab-
lished.
Engine coolant temperature intake air 15C (27F)
temperature
GD(H4SO)-54
12LE_US.book 55

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AA:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

Detect malfunctions of the thermostat function.
Judge as NG when any one of the following conditions is established.
When the actual engine coolant temperature does not reach the maximum temperature necessary to per-
form other OBDII diagnosis and (Estimated engine coolant temperature actual engine coolant tempera-
ture) exceeded the predetermined value. (Judgment 1)
When the actual engine coolant temperature does not reach the range within 11C (19.8F) from the
regulated temperature and (Estimated engine coolant temperature actual engine coolant temperature)
exceeded the predetermined value. (Judgment 2)
When the difference between the estimated coolant temperature and the actual engine coolant tempera-
ture exceeds the predetermined value, and (Estimated engine coolant temperature actual engine coolant
temperature) exceeded the predetermined value. (Judgment 3)
(8) (2)
(2)
(7)
(6) (5)
(4) (1)
(9)
(3)
EN-01692
(1) Valve (4) Piston (7) Stop ring

(2) Spring (5) Guide (8) Wax element
(3) Stopper (6) Rubber seal (9) Jiggle valve
GD(H4SO)-55
12LE_US.book 56

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
<Judgment 1>
Estimate ambient temperature 7 C (19.4 F)
Vehicle speed 30 km/h (18.6 MPH)
Estimated coolant temperature Value of Map 1
<Judgment 2>
Estimated coolant temperature Value from Map 2
<Judgment 3>
Estimated coolant temperature Value from Map 3
Map 1
7 8 10 25
engine starting
(19.4) (46.4) (50) (77)
C (F)
Estimated coolant temperature 75 75 75 75
C (F) (167) (167) (167) (167)
Map 2
7 8 10 25
engine starting
(19.4) (46.4) (50) (77)
C (F)
Estimated coolant temperature 76.2 80.5 80.5 80.5
C (F) (169.2) (176.9) (176.9) (176.9)
Map 3
7 10 25 66
engine starting
(19.4) (50) (77) (150.8)
C (F)
Estimated coolant temperature 54.9 60.8 66 80.5
C (F) (130.8) (141.4) (150.8) (176.9)

Perform the diagnosis only once after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-56
12LE_US.book 57

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
When any one of the followings is established.
<Judgment 1>
Actual engine coolant temperature < Value of Map 4
and
(Estimated engine coolant temperature > Value of Map 5
actual engine coolant temperature)
<Judgment 2>
Actual engine coolant temperature < Regulated temperature
Value of Map 6
and
<Judgment 3>
Estimated engine coolant temperature > Value of Map 8
actual engine coolant temperature
and
Map 4
C (F) (19.4) (46.4) (50) (77)
Threshold Value 75 75 75 75
C (F) (167) (167) (167) (167)
Map 5
7 0 8 10 25 35
engine starting
(19.4) (32) (46.4) (50) (77) (95)
C (F)
Threshold Value 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6 1200
C (F) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9) (2160)
Map 6
C (F) (19.4) (46.4) (50) (77)
Threshold Value 15.4 11.1 11.1 11.1
C (F) (27.7) (20) (20) (20)
Map 7
7 0 8 10 25 40 45
engine starting
(19.4) (32) (46.4) (50) (77) (104) (113)
C (F)
Threshold Value 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6 1500
C (F) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9) (2700)
GD(H4SO)-57
12LE_US.book 58

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 8
C (F) (19.4) (46.4) (50) (77)
C (F) (20) (20) (20) (20)
Map 9
7 8 10 25
engine starting
(19.4) (46.4) (50) (77)
C (F)
Threshold Value 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6 1731.6
C (F) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9) (3116.9)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 300 700 seconds

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
All of the following conditions are established.
<Judgment 1>
Actual engine coolant temperature Value of Map 4
and
(Estimated engine coolant temperature Value of Map 5
<Judgment 2>
Actual engine coolant temperature Regulated tempera-
ture Value of Map 6
and
<Judgment 3>
Estimated engine coolant temperature Value of Map 8
actual engine coolant temperature
and
and
Actual engine coolant temperature Regulated tempera-
ture Value of Map 10
Map 10
C (F) (19.4) (46.4) (50) (77)
C (F) (27.7) (20) (20) (20)
GD(H4SO)-58
12LE_US.book 59

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AB:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the open or short circuit of sensor.
Judge as NG, when the element voltage is out of the specified range.
(1) (1) (A)
(2) (C) (B) (D)
EN-09361
(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Lean

(D) Rich
(1) Exhaust gas (2) ZrO2
3. ENABLE CONDITION

GD(H4SO)-59
12LE_US.book 60

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Input voltage (+) < 1.128 V
or
Input voltage () < 0.23 V
or
|Input voltage (+) Input voltage ()| < 0.644 V

Input voltage (+): 1000 ms
Input voltage (): 1000 ms
|Input voltage (+) Input voltage ()|: 1000 ms
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Input voltage (+) 1.128 V
Input voltage () 0.23 V
|Input voltage (+) Input voltage ()| 0.644 V
GD(H4SO)-60
12LE_US.book 61

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AC:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the open or short circuit of sensor.
Judge as NG, when the element voltage is out of the specified range.
(1) (1) (A)
(2) (C) (B) (D)
EN-09361

(D) Rich
3. ENABLE CONDITION

GD(H4SO)-61
12LE_US.book 62

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Input voltage (+) > 3.589 V
or
Input voltage () > 3.541 V

Input voltage (+): 1000 ms
Input voltage (): 1000 ms
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Input voltage (+) 3.589 V
Input voltage () 3.541 V
GD(H4SO)-62
12LE_US.book 63

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AD:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

Detect the slow response of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor cover has some ventilation holes for exhaust gas. Clogged ventilation holes are
diagnosed.
When the holes are clogged, the A/F output variation becomes slow comparing with the actual A/F variation
because oxygen which reaches the zirconia layer is insufficient. Therefore, if the sensor cover holes are
clogged, the rich to lean judgment in the ECM is delayed when the actual change from rich to lean occurs.
Judge as NG when the actual movement in comparison to the ECM control amount is slow.
(3)
(1) (2)
EN-08986
(1) Cover (2) Zirconia (3) Clogging
(1) (1) (A)
(2) (C) (B) (D)
EN-09361

(D) Rich
GD(H4SO)-63
12LE_US.book 64

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Time needed for all secondary parame- 1024 ms
ters to be in enable conditions
Barometric pressure > 75 kPa (563 mmHg,
22.2 inHg)
Closed loop control with main feedback Operation
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance 0 50
Elapsed time after starting the engine 120000 ms
Vehicle speed 10 km/h 200 km/h
(6.2 MPH 124.3 MPH)
Amount of intake air 10 g/s 40 g/s
(0.35 oz/s 1.41 oz/s)
Engine load < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Learning value of EVAP conc. during < 0.2
purge
Total time of operating canister purge 19.9 s

Perform diagnosis only once at a constant speed of 10 km/h 200 km/h (6.2 MPH 124.3 MPH) 120000
ms or more after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-64
12LE_US.book 65

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Calculate faf difference every 32 ms 4 , and the value difference. Calculate the diagnostic value after cal-
culating 820 time(s).
Judgment Value
parafca = td2faf/td2lmd > 0.3
where,
td2faf (N) = td2faf (n1) + |d2faf (n)|
td2lmd (N) = td2lmd (n1) + |d2lmd (n)|
add up to 32 ms 4 820 time(s).
d2faf (n) = (faf (n) faf (n1)) (faf (n1)
faf (n2))
d2lmd (n) = (lmd (n) lmd (n1)) (lmd
(n1) lmd (n2))
faf = main feedback compensation coef-
ficient every 128 milliseconds
lmd = output lambda every 128 millisec-
onds
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 32 ms 4 820 time(s)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
parafca = td2faf/td2lmd 0.3
where,
td2faf (N) = td2faf (n1) + |d2faf (n)|
td2lmd (N) = td2lmd (n1) + |d2lmd (n)|
add up to 32 ms 4 820 time(s).
d2faf (n) = (faf (n) faf (n1)) (faf (n1)
faf (n2))
d2lmd (n) = (lmd (n) lmd (n1)) (lmd
(n1) lmd (n2))
ficient every 128 milliseconds
lmd = output lambda every 128 millisec-
onds
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 32 ms 4 820 time(s)
GD(H4SO)-65
12LE_US.book 66

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AE:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
Detect open circuits of the sensor.
Judge as NG when the impedance of the element is large.
(1) (1) (A)
(2) (C) (B) (D)
EN-09361

(D) Rich
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-66
12LE_US.book 67

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Time of heater control duty at 70 % or 36000 ms
more
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance. > 500

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor impedance. 500
GD(H4SO)-67
12LE_US.book 68

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AF:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

Detect continuity NG of the oxygen sensor. If the oxygen sensor voltage reading is not within the probable
range considering the operating conditions, judge as NG.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696
(A) Electromotive force (B) Air fuel ratio (C) Rich

(D) Lean (E) Theoretical air fuel ratio (F) Comparative voltage
(1) Atmosphere (2) Exhaust gas (3) Electromotive force
GD(H4SO)-68
12LE_US.book 69

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Used for abnormality judgment
High
Secondary air system Not in operation
Closed loop control at the oxygen sensor In operation
Misfire detection every 200 rotations < 65535 time(s)
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor compensation Not in limit value
coefficient
Low (1)
coefficient
Amount of intake air 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Low (2)
coefficient
Amount of intake air < 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Current continuation time of the rear oxy- 30000 ms
gen sensor heater
Low (3)
coefficient
Amount of intake air < 10 g/s (0.35 oz/s)
Current continuation time of the rear oxy- 30000 ms
gen sensor heater
Fuel cut Experienced
GD(H4SO)-69
12LE_US.book 70

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Used for normality judgment

coefficient

After starting the engine, continuously perform the diagnosis with the same engine condition.
Judgment Value
Malfunction Criteria Threshold Value DTC
High P0138
Sensor output voltage > 1.2 V
Low P0137
Sensor output voltage < 0.03 V

High: 2500 ms
Low (1): 20000 ms
Low (2): 40000 ms
Low (3): Value from Map
Map
Fuel cut time (ms) 0 2000 10000
Time Needed for Diagnosis (ms) 40000 40000 60000
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
High P0138
Sensor output voltage 1.2 V
Low P0137
Sensor output voltage 0.03 V

High: Less than 1 second
Low (1): Less than 1 second
GD(H4SO)-70
12LE_US.book 71

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AG:DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0137. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-68, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-71
12LE_US.book 72

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AH:DTC P013A O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 2)
Detect the slow response of rich lean for rear oxygen sensor output.
When the deceleration fuel cut has occurred, detect the trouble by calculating the time when the rear oxygen
sensor output passes through the predetermined range of voltages.
Judge as NG when the response time is larger than the threshold value.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITIONS
Battery voltage > 10.9 V
Rear oxygen sensor closed loop control Operation
Current calculation time of the rear oxy- 180000 ms
gen sensor heater after starting
Engine speed when fuel cut starts 1300 rpm
Rear oxygen sensor voltage when fuel 0.55 V
cut starts
Fuel cut time 5000 ms
Engine coolant temperature when fuel 75 C (167 F)
cut starts
Estimated temperature of rear oxygen 500 C (932 F)
sensor element when fuel cut starts

Perform diagnosis once during deceleration fuel cut from a constant and high speed driving, when rear oxy-
gen sensor is warmed up sufficiently.
GD(H4SO)-72
12LE_US.book 73

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Detect the trouble by calculating the response time of the rear oxygen sensor during fuel cut.
Rear oxygen sensor (V)
(F)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(G) (H)
(E)
Fuel cut on decele ration

EN-09344
(A) 0.55 V (B) 0.50 V (C) 0.20 V

(D) 0.15 V (E) 0V (F) Diagnostic parameter
(G) Normal (H) Malfunction
Judgment Value
Time when rear oxygen sensor voltage > 491 ms
changed from 0.5 V to 0.2 V.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 seconds

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Time when rear oxygen sensor voltage 491 ms
GD(H4SO)-73
12LE_US.book 74

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AI: DTC P013B O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SEN-
SOR 2)
Detect the slow response of lean rich for rear oxygen sensor output.
After the deceleration fuel cut has occurred, detect the trouble by calculating the time when the rear oxygen
sensor output passes through the predetermined range of voltages.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696


Perform diagnosis only once after recovering from a deceleration fuel cut continued for more than predeter-
mined time.
GD(H4SO)-74
12LE_US.book 75

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Detect the trouble by calculating the response time of the rear oxygen sensor after fuel cut.
(G) (H)
(A)
(B)
(C)
(D)
(F)
(E)

EN-09345
(A) 0.55 V (B) 0.50 V (C) 0.30 V

(D) 0.25 V (E) 0V (F) Diagnostic parameter
(G) Normal (H) Malfunction
Judgment Value

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-75
12LE_US.book 76

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AJ:DTC P013E O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1

SENSOR 2)
Detect the delayed response of rear oxygen sensor output for rich lean.
After the deceleration fuel cut has started, detect the trouble by calculating the time when the rear oxygen
sensor output decreases to the predetermined voltages.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

Engine speed when fuel cut starts 1300 rpm
Rear oxygen sensor voltage when fuel 0.55 V
cut starts
cut starts
Estimated temperature of rear oxygen 500 C (932 F)
sensor element when fuel cut starts

Perform diagnosis once during deceleration fuel cut from a constant and high speed driving, when rear oxy-
gen sensor is warmed up sufficiently.
GD(H4SO)-76
12LE_US.book 77

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Detect the trouble by calculating the time from the beginning of the fuel cut to the beginning of the rear oxy-
gen sensor voltage starting to drop.
(C)
(A)
(D) (E)
(B)

EN-09346
(A) 0.5 V (B) 0V (C) Diagnostic parameter

(D) Normal (E) Malfunction
Judgment Value
changed to 0.5 V after the fuel cut
started.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
changed to 0.5 V after the fuel cut
started.
GD(H4SO)-77
12LE_US.book 78

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AK:DTC P013F O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1

SENSOR 2)
Detect the delayed response of rear oxygen sensor output for lean rich.
After the deceleration fuel cut has completed, detect the trouble by calculating the time when the rear oxygen
sensor output increases to the predetermined voltages.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

Engine speed 500 rpm
Rear oxygen sensor voltage when fuel < 0.15 V
cut has completed
cut has completed
Estimated element temperature of rear 500 C (932 F)
oxygen sensor when fuel cut has com-
pleted

Perform diagnosis only once when recovering from the deceleration fuel cut continued for more than prede-
termined time with the rear oxygen sensor warmed up sufficiently.
GD(H4SO)-78
12LE_US.book 79

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Detect the trouble by calculating the time from the completion of the fuel cut to the beginning of the rear ox-
ygen sensor voltage starting to rise.
Rear oxygen sensor (V) (C)
(D) (E)
(A)
(B)

EN-09347
(A) 0.3 V (B) 0V (C) Diagnostic parameter

(D) Normal (E) Malfunction
Judgment Value
The number of times that the rear oxy- > 3750 time(s)
gen sensor voltage changed to 0.3 V
after the fuel cut has completed (time
counter)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
The number of times that the rear oxy- 3750 time(s)
gen sensor voltage changed to 0.3 V
after the fuel cut has completed (time
counter)
GD(H4SO)-79
12LE_US.book 80

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AL:DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1

SENSOR2)
Detect the rear oxygen sensor open or short circuit. Judge as NG when the rear oxygen sensor voltage can
be determined to be abnormal considering conditions such as intake air amount, engine coolant tempera-
ture, main feedback control and deceleration fuel cut.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITION (USED ONLY FOR MALFUNCTION JUDGMENT)

Closed loop control at the rear oxygen In operation
sensor
Target output voltage of rear oxygen sen- 0.55 V + 0.05 V
sor
coefficient
Deceleration fuel cut of 5000 ms or Experienced
more.

Perform the diagnosis once after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-80
12LE_US.book 81

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Minimum output voltage > 0.15 V
or
Maximum output voltage < 0.55 V

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Diagnosis of the rear oxygen sensor volt- Incomplete
age low side
Minimum output voltage 0.15 V
Maximum output voltage 0.55 V
GD(H4SO)-81
12LE_US.book 82

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AM:DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2)

Detect the malfunction of rear oxygen sensor heater.
While observing the engine condition, judge as NG if the rear oxygen sensor impedance is great.
(1) (2) (3) (4)

(5)
EN-08983
(1) Element cover (outer) (3) Sensor element (5) Sensor housing
(2) Element cover (inner) (4) Ceramic heater
A/F sensor element impedance 50
A/F sensor heater control duty 75 %
Rear oxygen sensor heater control duty < 70 %

Perform the diagnosis continuously after 1000 ms seconds or more have passed since the engine started.
GD(H4SO)-82
12LE_US.book 83

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Output terminal for heater characteristics Low
failure detection

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Output terminal for heater characteristics High
failure detection
GD(H4SO)-83
12LE_US.book 84

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AN:DTC P014C O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
For diagnosis, detect the trouble by processing the waveform in normal driving without forcibly changing
the target air fuel ratio.
(1) (1) (A)
(2) (C) (B) (D)
EN-09361

(D) Rich
and
< 50
purge
Total time of operating canister purge 20 s
Engine load change < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Idle switch OFF

Perform diagnosis only once in a city driving including normal acceleration and deceleration.
GD(H4SO)-84
12LE_US.book 85

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
5. DIAGNOSTIC METHOD 1
Detect the malfunction by checking Cumulative value of time when changes from lean rich in compar-
ison to Time during which diagnosis is in progress.
( Senso r output)
Lea n
Ric h
Acc um ula ted time
(A)
(B)
time
EN-09340
(A) Time during which diagnosis is in (B) Cumulative value of time when
progress changes from lean rich
Judgment Value
(Cumulative value of time when < 0.39 P014C
changes from lean rich) / (Time during > 0.63 P014D
which diagnosis is in progress)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
(Cumulative value of time when 0.39 P014C
changes from lean rich) / (Time during 0.63 P014D
which diagnosis is in progress)
GD(H4SO)-85
12LE_US.book 86

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Detect the malfunction by the cumulative value obtained from the amount of variation in change.
( Senso r output)
n-2 n-1 n
EN-09341
Judgment Value
Cumulative value obtained from the < Value from Map P014C and P014D
amount of variation in change
|(lambda(n) lambda(n-1))
(lambda(n-1) lambda(n-2))|
Map
Cumulative value obtained from the amount of
variation in 0 2.5
|lambda(n) lambda(n-1)|
Cumulative value obtained from the amount of
0.3 1.2
variation in change

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Cumulative value obtained from the Value from Map P014C and P014D
amount of variation in change
|(lambda(n) lambda(n-1))
(lambda(n-1) lambda(n-2))|

AO:DTC P014D O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SEN-
SOR 1)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P014C. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-84, DTC P014C O2 SENSOR SLOW
RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-86
12LE_US.book 87

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AP:DTC P015A O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1

SENSOR 1)
For diagnosis, detect the trouble by processing the waveform in normal driving without forcibly changing
the target air fuel ratio.
(1) (1) (A)
(2) (C) (B) (D)
EN-09361

(D) Rich
and
< 50
purge
Total time of operating canister purge 20 s
Idle switch OFF

Perform diagnosis only once in a city driving including normal acceleration and deceleration.
GD(H4SO)-87
12LE_US.book 88

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Detect the malfunction depending on the average value of time necessary for to inverse the air fuel ratio
from Lean Rich Lean to Rich Lean Rich.
( Senso r output)
Lea n
Ric h
time
EN-09342
Judgment Value
Average value of time necessary for to > 300 ms P015A
inverse the air fuel ratio to Lean Rich
Lean.
Average value of time necessary for to > 400 ms P015B
inverse the air fuel ratio to Rich Lean
Rich.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 50 times of inversion

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Average value of time necessary for to 300 ms P015A
inverse the air fuel ratio to Lean Rich
Lean.
Average value of time necessary for to 400 ms P015B
inverse the air fuel ratio to Rich Lean
Rich.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 50 times of inversion
GD(H4SO)-88
12LE_US.book 89

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Detect the malfunction by calculating the average amplitude of .
(Sensor output)
Lean
Amplitude
Rich
time
EN-09343
Judgment Value
Average value for amplitude > 0.055 P015A and P015B

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Average value for amplitude 0.055 P015A and P015B

AQ:DTC P015B O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1
SENSOR 1)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P015A. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-87, DTC P015A O2 SENSOR DE-
LAYED RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
GD(H4SO)-89
12LE_US.book 90

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AR:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)

Detect fuel system malfunction by the amount of main feedback control.
Diagnostic method
Fuel system is diagnosed by comparing the target air fuel ratio calculated by ECM with the actual air fuel ratio
measured by sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
A/F main learning system In operation
Engine load Value of Map 1
Map 1
Engine speed (rpm) Idling 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
0.208 0.201 0.185 0.183 0.193 0.206 0.206 0.225 0.245
Measured value (g (oz)/rev) na
(0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling or at a constant speed after warming up the engine.
GD(H4SO)-90
12LE_US.book 91

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Compare the diagnostic value (fsobd) with the threshold value, and if a condition meeting the malfunction cri-
teria below continues for 10 s 5 time(s) or more, judge that there is a fault in the fuel system.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd tglmda) + faf + flaf Value from Map 2
In this case: sglmd = measured lambda
tglmda = target lambda
ficient (every 64 milliseconds)
flaf = main feedback learning compensa-
tion coefficient
Map 2
3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2
Amount of air (g (oz)/s) 0 (0)
(0.11) (0.23) (0.34) (0.45) (0.56) (0.68)
fsobdL1 (%) 1.4 1.4 1.332 1.25 1.25 1.25 1.25
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s 5 time(s)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd tglmda) + faf + flaf < 1.15
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 s
GD(H4SO)-91
12LE_US.book 92

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AS:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

Detect fuel system malfunction by the amount of main feedback control.
Diagnostic method
Fuel system is diagnosed by comparing the target air fuel ratio calculated by ECM with the actual air fuel ratio
measured by sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
A/F main learning system In operation
Engine load change 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Learning value of EVAP conc. < 0.2
Cumulative time of canister purge after 20 s
engine start
Continuous period after canister purge 5000 ms
starting
Engine load Value of Map 1
Map 1
Engine speed (rpm) Idling 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500
0.208 0.201 0.185 0.183 0.193 0.206 0.206 0.225 0.245
Measured value (g (oz)/rev) na
(0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.01)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling or at a constant speed after warming up the engine.
GD(H4SO)-92
12LE_US.book 93

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Compare the diagnostic value (fsobd) with the threshold value, and if a condition meeting the malfunction cri-
teria below continues for 10 s 5 time(s) or more, judge that there is a fault in the fuel system.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd tglmda) + faf + flaf < Value of Map 2
In this case: sglmd = measured lambda
tglmda = target lambda
ficient (every 64 milliseconds)
flaf = main feedback learning compensa-
tion coefficient
Map 2
3.2 6.4 9.6 12.8 16 19.2
Amount of air (g (oz)/s) 0 (0)
(0.11) (0.23) (0.34) (0.45) (0.56) (0.68)
fsobdL1 (%) 0.6 0.6 0.668 0.735 0.735 0.735 0.735

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK if the status that the criteria below are met continues for 10 seconds.
Judgment Value
fsobd = (sglmd tglmda) + faf + flaf 0.85
GD(H4SO)-93
12LE_US.book 94

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AT:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
Detect faults in the fuel temperature sensor output properties.
Diagnosis is performed in two methods (drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis). If either is NG, judge as NG. If
both are OK, Judge as OK and clear the NG.
Drift Diagnosis
Normally fuel temperature is lower than engine coolant temperature. When the fuel temperature becomes
higher than the engine coolant temperature, the range is considered to be shifted, and judged as NG.
Stuck Diagnosis
As the engine warms up (cumulative amount of intake air after starting is large), if the fuel temperature which
should rise does not, determine as being stuck and NG.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
(A) Resistance value () (B) Fuel temperature C (F)
3. ENABLE CONDITION
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
None

GD(H4SO)-94
12LE_US.book 95

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Fuel level 9.6 2 (2.54 US gal,
2.11 Imp gal)
Elapsed time after starting the engine 20 s
Engine coolant temperature Engine > 10 C (18F)
coolant temperature at engine start
Fuel temperature Engine coolant tem- 10 C (18F)
perature

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
2.11 Imp gal)
Engine coolant temperature Engine > 10 C (18F)
coolant temperature at engine start
Fuel temperature Engine coolant tem- < 10 C (18F)
perature
Engine coolant temperature < 75 C (167 F)

6. ENABLE CONDITION
Stuck Diagnosis

Perform the diagnosis continuously 20 seconds after starting engine.
GD(H4SO)-95
12LE_US.book 96

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Accumulated amount of intake air 551043 g (19435.29
oz)
Fuel temperature difference between < 2 C (3.6F)
Max. and Min.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Fuel temperature difference between 2 C (3.6F)
Max. and Min.
GD(H4SO)-96
12LE_US.book 97

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AU:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-97
12LE_US.book 98

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-98
12LE_US.book 99

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AV:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel temperature sensor.
(A)
(B)
EN-01700
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-99
12LE_US.book 100

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-100
12LE_US.book 101

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AW:DTC P0196 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
Detect for abnormal values in the oil temperature sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when the oil temperature does not rise even though the engine is running under a condition
where it should rise.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine speed Value from Map
Map
C (F) (40) (22) (4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

C (F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
Engine speed
500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500
rpm

Perform the diagnosis continuously after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-101
12LE_US.book 102

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Engine oil temperature < 15 C (59 F)
After engine start oil temperature sensor Judgment value for after engine
characteristic diagnosis timer. start oil temperature sensor char-
acteristic diagnosis timer
After engine start oil temperature sensor characteristic diagnosis timer (timer for diagnosis).
a. Timer stop at fuel cut
b. During the driving conditions except a) above, timer counts up as follows.
64 ms + TOILCNT ms (when at 64 ms)
Where, TOILCNT is determined as follows,
TOILCNT = 0 at idle switch ON
For TOILCNT at Idle switch off, refer to the following table.
0 (0) 8 (5) 16 (9.9) 24 (14.9) 32 (19.9) 40 (24.9) 48 (29.8) 56 (34.8)
20 (4) 64 ms 73.3 ms 84 ms 96.6 ms 113.7 ms 135 ms 162 ms 197.4 ms
Temperature
C (F)
0 (32) 64 ms 73.5 ms 84.5 ms 97.4 ms 115.6 ms 138.5 ms 168 ms 207.6 ms
10 (50) 102.2 ms 114.8 ms 129.4 ms 146.7 ms 171.7 ms 203.4 ms 245.1 ms 302.1 ms
After engine start oil temperature characteristic diagnosis timer judgment value (t).
t = 1882940 ms 43302 ms Ti (t 2400000)
Ti = The lowest coolant temperature after starting the engine.
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Engine oil temperature 15 C (59 F)
GD(H4SO)-102
12LE_US.book 103

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AX:DTC P0197 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR LOW

Detect the open or short circuit of the oil temperature sensor.
Judge as NG when outside of the judgment value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-103
12LE_US.book 104

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AY:DTC P0198 ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of the oil temperature sensor.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-104
12LE_US.book 105

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
AZ:DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1

Based on the self-diagnostic result of the injector driving IC, judge the injector driving circuit as normal or ab-
normal.
Injector driving IC detects the status of fuel remains injected or fuel is not injected as a malfunction.
Elapsed time after starting the engine >1s
Engine speed > 500 rpm
Injection time 1000 s
and
< 120000000/engine
speed 1000 s
Injection status Not during fuel cut
and
Not during asynchro-
nous injection con-
trolled by crankshaft
position sensor

Judgment Value
Injector driving IC information Malfunction

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Injector driving IC information Normal
GD(H4SO)-105
12LE_US.book 106

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BA:DTC P0202 INJECTOR #2

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0201. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-105, DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1, Diag-
BB:DTC P0203 INJECTOR #3
NOTE:
BC:DTC P0204 INJECTOR #4
NOTE:
GD(H4SO)-106
12LE_US.book 107

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BD:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT

LOW
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-107
12LE_US.book 108

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Sensor 2 input voltage > 1.07 V
GD(H4SO)-108
12LE_US.book 109

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BE:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT

HIGH
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-109
12LE_US.book 110

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-110
12LE_US.book 111

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Detect the presence of misfire occurrence. (Revolution fluctuation method)
Monitoring Misfire which influences exhaust deterioration (1.5 times of FTP) and catalyst damage is made
obligatory by the law. Misfire affecting these two has two patterns below. :
Intermittent misfire (The same cylinder misfires in random, or different cylinders misfire in random.): FTP
1.5 times misfire
Every time misfire (The same cylinder misfires every time.): FTP 1.5 times misfire, Catalyst damage mis-
fire
The following detecting methods are adopted for these detection.
1) Intermittent misfire: FTP 1.5 times misfire
180 Interval Difference Method (MT: 1,800 rpm or less; CVT: None)
360 Interval Difference Method (whole range)
720 Interval Difference Method (3,000 rpm or more)
2) Misfire every time: FTP 1.5 times misfire, Catalyst damage misfire
360 Interval Difference Method
2. ENABLE CONDITION
All secondary parameters enable condi- 1024 ms
tions
Intake manifold pressure change at < Value of Map 1
180CA
Throttle position change during 16 milli- < 21
seconds
Fuel shut-off function Not in operation
2.11 Imp gal)
Vehicle dynamic control or AT torque Not in operation
control
Evaporative system leak check Not in operation
Intake manifold pressure Value from Map 2
Battery voltage 8V
Fuel parameter determination Not extremely low vol-
atility
Engine speed change during 32 millisec- < 1000 rpm
onds
Map 1
CVT model
rpm 700 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3
(mmHg, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100,
inHg) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9)
MT model
rpm 650 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 5500 6000 6300
kPa 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3 13.3
(mmHg, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100, (100,
inHg) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9) 3.9)
GD(H4SO)-111
12LE_US.book 112

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 2 (PZEV CVT model)

Normal ignition
Barometric pressure (kPa (mmHg, inHg))
66.7 76.4 80 83.7 86.2 91.3 100.4
(500.0 , 19.7) (573.0 , 22.6) (600.0 , 23.6) (628.0 , 24.7) (647.0 , 25.5) (685.0 , 27) (753.0 , 29.6)
21.3 21.3 22.1 22.8 24.2 25.4 27.7
680
(160.0 , 6.3) (160.0 , 6.3) (166.1 , 6.5) (171.0 , 6.7) (181.8 , 7.2) (190.5 , 7.5) (208.1 , 8.2)
19.5 19.5 20.6 22.8 21.8 23.2 24.7
1200
(146.4 , 5.8) (146.4 , 5.8) (154.5 , 6.1) (170.8 , 6.7) (163.9 , 6.5) (174.2 , 6.9) (185.6 , 7.3)
18 18 18.7 21.6 19.8 21 23.1
1500
(135.2 , 5.3) (135.2 , 5.3) (140.6 , 5.5) (162.2 , 6.4) (148.2 , 5.8) (157.2 , 6.2) (173.1 , 6.8)
17.9 17.9 18.4 21.6 21.8 22.8 24.1
2000
(134.4 , 5.3) (134.4 , 5.3) (138.2 , 5.4) (162.2 , 6.4) (163.8 , 6.4) (171.3 , 6.7) (180.8 , 7.1)
20.3 20.3 21.4 22.1 22 23.5 24.8
2500
(152.4 , 6) (152.4 , 6) (160.4 , 6.3) (166.0 , 6.5) (164.9 , 6.5) (176.4 , 6.9) (186.1 , 7.3)
21.3 21.3 22 22.4 23.1 24.1 25.2
3000
(159.7 , 6.3) (159.7 , 6.3) (165.2 , 6.5) (167.8 , 6.6) (173.2 , 6.8) (180.6 , 7.1) (189.2 , 7.4)
Engine
24.5 24.5 25.6 25.7 26.2 27.7 28.5
speed 3500
(183.8 , 7.2) (183.8 , 7.2) (192.1 , 7.6) (193.1 , 7.6) (196.5 , 7.7) (208.1 , 8.2) (213.6 , 8.4)
(rpm)
25.3 25.3 26.5 26.3 27.1 28.2 28.7
4000
(190.1 , 7.5) (190.1 , 7.5) (198.5 , 7.8) (197.2 , 7.8) (203.1 , 8) (211.9 , 8.3) (215.4 , 8.5)
27.4 27.4 28.5 28.3 29.1 30.3 30.7
4500
(205.2 , 8.1) (205.2 , 8.1) (213.6 , 8.4) (212.4 , 8.4) (218.3 , 8.6) (227.0 , 8.9) (230.5 , 9.1)
29.4 29.4 30.5 30.3 31.1 32.3 32.7
5000
(220.4 , 8.7) (220.4 , 8.7) (228.8 , 9) (227.5 , 9) (233.4 , 9.2) (242.2 , 9.5) (245.7 , 9.7)
31.4 31.4 32.5 32.3 33.1 34.3 34.8
5500
(235.5 , 9.3) (235.5 , 9.3) (243.9 , 9.6) (242.7 , 9.6) (248.6 , 9.8) (257.3 , 10.1) (260.8 , 10.3)
33.4 33.4 34.5 34.4 35.2 36.3 36.8
6000
(250.7 , 9.9) (250.7 , 9.9) (259.1 , 10.2) (257.8 , 10.2) (263.7 , 10.4) (272.5 , 10.7) (276.0 , 10.9)
34.6 34.6 35.7 35.6 36.4 37.5 38
6300
(259.8 , 10.2) (259.8 , 10.2) (268.2 , 10.6) (266.9 , 10.5) (272.8 , 10.7) (281.6 , 11.1) (285.1 , 11.2)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
GD(H4SO)-112
12LE_US.book 113

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Idling ignition
66.7 76.4 80 83.7 86.2 91.3 100.4
(500.0 , 19.7) (573.0 , 22.6) (600.0 , 23.6) (628.0 , 24.7) (647.0 , 25.5) (685.0 , 27) (753.0 , 29.6)
21.3 21.3 22.1 22.8 24.2 25.4 27.7
680
(160.0 , 6.3) (160.0 , 6.3) (166.1 , 6.5) (171.0 , 6.7) (181.8 , 7.2) (190.5 , 7.5) (208.1 , 8.2)
20.9 20.9 22 23 23.4 24.9 27.2
1200
(156.7 , 6.2) (156.7 , 6.2) (164.8 , 6.5) (172.7 , 6.8) (175.5 , 6.9) (186.5 , 7.3) (204.3 , 8)
19.8 19.8 20.4 25.8 21.5 23 24
1500
(148.2 , 5.8) (148.2 , 5.8) (153.1 , 6) (193.3 , 7.6) (161.1 , 6.3) (172.9 , 6.8) (180.1 , 7.1)
18.2 18.2 20 25.1 22.3 21.7 24.2
2000
(136.6 , 5.4) (136.6 , 5.4) (150.3 , 5.9) (188.5 , 7.4) (167.3 , 6.6) (163.0 , 6.4) (181.9 , 7.2)
20.5 20.5 21.3 24.3 22.8 23.7 24.8
2500
(153.8 , 6.1) (153.8 , 6.1) (159.7 , 6.3) (182.4 , 7.2) (170.7 , 6.7) (178.1 , 7) (185.8 , 7.3)
20.9 20.9 21.7 22.8 22.8 24.3 25.3
3000
(156.7 , 6.2) (156.7 , 6.2) (163.1 , 6.4) (170.7 , 6.7) (170.8 , 6.7) (181.9 , 7.2) (190.1 , 7.5)
Engine
24.7 24.7 25.4 26 26.5 28 28.9
speed 3500
(185.3 , 7.3) (185.3 , 7.3) (190.5 , 7.5) (194.8 , 7.7) (198.7 , 7.8) (209.8 , 8.3) (216.6 , 8.5)
(rpm)
25.3 25.3 26.3 26.5 26.7 28.1 28.7
4000
(189.7 , 7.5) (189.7 , 7.5) (197.3 , 7.8) (199.1 , 7.8) (200.5 , 7.9) (211.0 , 8.3) (215.7 , 8.5)
27.3 27.3 28.3 28.6 28.7 30.1 30.8
4500
(204.9 , 8.1) (204.9 , 8.1) (212.5 , 8.4) (214.3 , 8.4) (215.6 , 8.5) (226.1 , 8.9) (230.8 , 9.1)
29.3 29.3 30.3 30.6 30.8 32.2 32.8
5000
(220.0 , 8.7) (220.0 , 8.7) (227.6 , 9) (229.4 , 9) (230.8 , 9.1) (241.3 , 9.5) (246.0 , 9.7)
31.4 31.4 32.4 32.6 32.8 34.2 34.8
5500
(235.2 , 9.3) (235.2 , 9.3) (242.8 , 9.6) (244.6 , 9.6) (246.0 , 9.7) (256.4 , 10.1) (261.1 , 10.3)
33.4 33.4 34.4 34.6 34.8 36.2 36.8
6000
(250.3 , 9.9) (250.3 , 9.9) (257.9 , 10.2) (259.7 , 10.2) (261.1 , 10.3) (271.6 , 10.7) (276.3 , 10.9)
34.6 34.6 35.6 35.8 36 37.4 38
6300
(259.4 , 10.2) (259.4 , 10.2) (267.0 , 10.5) (268.8 , 10.6) (270.2 , 10.6) (280.7 , 11.1) (285.4 , 11.2)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
GD(H4SO)-113
12LE_US.book 114

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 2 (PZEV MT model)

Normal ignition
66.7 75.8 79.4 84.2 85.7 90.9 99.3
(500.0 , 19.7) (569.0 , 22.4) (596.0 , 23.5) (632.0 , 24.9) (643.0 , 25.3) (682.0 , 26.9) (745.0 , 29.3)
20.2 20.2 21.3 22.6 23.2 23.8 24.4
680
(151.9 , 6) (151.9 , 6) (159.6 , 6.3) (169.6 , 6.7) (173.7 , 6.8) (178.3 , 7) (183.2 , 7.2)
18.9 18.9 19.9 20.9 21.4 22.3 23.3
1200
(141.8 , 5.6) (141.8 , 5.6) (149.1 , 5.9) (156.7 , 6.2) (160.5 , 6.3) (167.4 , 6.6) (175.0 , 6.9)
16.5 16.5 17.2 18 18.7 18.8 19.6
1500
(123.9 , 4.9) (123.9 , 4.9) (128.9 , 5.1) (134.9 , 5.3) (140.0 , 5.5) (141.4 , 5.6) (147.0 , 5.8)
16.2 16.2 17.1 17.7 18.2 18.9 19.9
2000
(121.7 , 4.8) (121.7 , 4.8) (128.5 , 5.1) (132.9 , 5.2) (136.3 , 5.4) (142.0 , 5.6) (149.6 , 5.9)
17.2 17.2 17.9 18.6 18.7 19.4 20.7
2500
(128.9 , 5.1) (128.9 , 5.1) (134.3 , 5.3) (139.7 , 5.5) (140.2 , 5.5) (145.2 , 5.7) (155.4 , 6.1)
17.2 17.2 17.8 18.6 19.2 20.2 21.2
3000
(128.8 , 5.1) (128.8 , 5.1) (133.2 , 5.2) (139.3 , 5.5) (144.0 , 5.7) (151.4 , 6) (159.2 , 6.3)
Engine
20.6 20.6 21.1 22.3 22.4 23.2 24.5
speed 3500
(154.5 , 6.1) (154.5 , 6.1) (158.1 , 6.2) (167.1 , 6.6) (168.4 , 6.6) (173.7 , 6.8) (184.0 , 7.2)
(rpm)
21.3 21.3 22 22.6 22.8 23.8 24.2
4000
(160.0 , 6.3) (160.0 , 6.3) (165.1 , 6.5) (169.7 , 6.7) (171.2 , 6.7) (178.9 , 7) (181.5 , 7.1)
23.8 23.8 24.5 25.2 25.7 26.2 26.9
4500
(178.5 , 7) (178.5 , 7) (183.9 , 7.2) (188.8 , 7.4) (192.7 , 7.6) (196.6 , 7.7) (202.2 , 8)
27.4 27.4 27.8 28.7 28.9 29.4 30.3
5000
(205.3 , 8.1) (205.3 , 8.1) (208.4 , 8.2) (215.0 , 8.5) (216.8 , 8.5) (220.7 , 8.7) (227.1 , 8.9)
30.8 30.8 31.4 32 32.5 33 34.1
5500
(230.8 , 9.1) (230.8 , 9.1) (235.2 , 9.3) (240.2 , 9.5) (243.8 , 9.6) (247.6 , 9.7) (256.1 , 10.1)
35.9 35.9 37.6 37.8 36.7 38.7 39.2
6000
(269.4 , 10.6) (269.4 , 10.6) (282.2 , 11.1) (283.3 , 11.2) (275.0 , 10.8) (290.0 , 11.4) (294.2 , 11.6)
37.1 37.1 38.8 39 37.9 39.9 40.4
6300
(278.5 , 11) (278.5 , 11) (291.3 , 11.5) (292.4 , 11.5) (284.1 , 11.2) (299.1 , 11.8) (303.3 , 11.9)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
GD(H4SO)-114
12LE_US.book 115

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Idling ignition
66.7 75.8 79.4 84.2 85.7 90.9 99.3
(500.0 , 19.7) (569.0 , 22.4) (596.0 , 23.5) (632.0 , 24.9) (643.0 , 25.3) (682.0 , 26.9) (745.0 , 29.3)
20.8 20.8 21.3 22.9 23.4 24.2 25.1
680
(156.2 , 6.1) (156.2 , 6.1) (160.1 , 6.3) (171.8 , 6.8) (175.3 , 6.9) (181.3 , 7.1) (188.0 , 7.4)
20.7 20.7 21.4 22.4 22.9 23.9 24
1200
(155.5 , 6.1) (155.5 , 6.1) (160.7 , 6.3) (167.8 , 6.6) (171.9 , 6.8) (179.6 , 7.1) (180.0 , 7.1)
19.7 19.7 20.2 21.3 21.3 22 23.8
1500
(147.9 , 5.8) (147.9 , 5.8) (151.7 , 6) (159.5 , 6.3) (160.1 , 6.3) (164.8 , 6.5) (178.5 , 7)
19.6 19.6 20.5 21.4 21.6 22.3 23.9
2000
(146.9 , 5.8) (146.9 , 5.8) (153.9 , 6.1) (160.6 , 6.3) (162.3 , 6.4) (167.2 , 6.6) (179.6 , 7.1)
21 21 21.7 23.1 23.2 23.7 25.5
2500
(157.6 , 6.2) (157.6 , 6.2) (162.7 , 6.4) (173.1 , 6.8) (173.9 , 6.8) (177.9 , 7) (191.1 , 7.5)
22.2 22.2 23.1 24.3 24.4 25.2 26.9
3000
(166.6 , 6.6) (166.6 , 6.6) (173.5 , 6.8) (182.6 , 7.2) (183.2 , 7.2) (189.0 , 7.4) (201.9 , 7.9)
Engine
25.9 25.9 26.8 27.6 29.7 28.4 30.3
speed 3500
(194.3 , 7.7) (194.3 , 7.7) (201.0 , 7.9) (207.4 , 8.2) (222.8 , 8.8) (212.8 , 8.4) (227.3 , 9)
(rpm)
25.3 25.3 26.1 26.8 26.9 27.4 28.7
4000
(190.1 , 7.5) (190.1 , 7.5) (195.6 , 7.7) (200.8 , 7.9) (202.1 , 8) (205.5 , 8.1) (215.2 , 8.5)
27.1 27.1 27.8 28.9 28.3 28.4 29.9
4500
(203.4 , 8) (203.4 , 8) (208.2 , 8.2) (217.1 , 8.5) (212.6 , 8.4) (212.8 , 8.4) (224.1 , 8.8)
28.3 28.3 28.8 29.6 29.7 29.9 31.3
5000
(212.6 , 8.4) (212.6 , 8.4) (216.3 , 8.5) (222.0 , 8.7) (222.4 , 8.8) (224.5 , 8.8) (234.6 , 9.2)
31.3 31.3 32.1 32.6 32.6 33.1 34.6
5500
(234.7 , 9.2) (234.7 , 9.2) (241.0 , 9.5) (244.8 , 9.6) (244.2 , 9.6) (248.1 , 9.8) (259.4 , 10.2)
36.2 36.2 35.9 37.2 37.1 38.8 39.6
6000
(271.4 , 10.7) (271.4 , 10.7) (269.2 , 10.6) (279.3 , 11) (278.0 , 10.9) (291.2 , 11.5) (297.3 , 11.7)
37.4 37.4 37.1 38.4 38.3 40 40.8
6300
(280.5 , 11) (280.5 , 11) (278.3 , 11) (288.4 , 11.4) (287.1 , 11.3) (300.3 , 11.8) (306.4 , 12.1)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
GD(H4SO)-115
12LE_US.book 116

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 2 (CVT model except for PZEV)

Normal ignition
66.7 (500.0 , 19.7) 100.4 (753.0 , 29.6)
700 27.6 (207.0 , 8.1) 27.6 (207.0 , 8.1)
1000 25.6 (192.0 , 7.6) 25.6 (192.0 , 7.6)
1500 22.9 (172.0 , 6.8) 22.9 (172.0 , 6.8)
2000 23.2 (174.0 , 6.9) 23.2 (174.0 , 6.9)
2500 23.9 (179.0 , 7) 23.9 (179.0 , 7)
Engine 3000 23.6 (177.0 , 7) 23.6 (177.0 , 7)
speed 3500 26.8 (201.0 , 7.9) 26.8 (201.0 , 7.9)
(rpm) 4000 29.7 (223.0 , 8.8) 29.7 (223.0 , 8.8)
4500 32.3 (242.0 , 9.5) 32.3 (242.0 , 9.5)
5000 34.1 (256.0 , 10.1) 34.1 (256.0 , 10.1)
5500 36 (270.0 , 10.6) 36 (270.0 , 10.6)
6000 37.9 (284.0 , 11.2) 37.9 (284.0 , 11.2)
6300 40 (300.0 , 11.8) 40 (300.0 , 11.8)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Idling ignition
66.7 (500.0 , 19.7) 100.4 (753.0 , 29.6)
700 27.6 (207.0 , 8.1) 27.6 (207.0 , 8.1)
1000 25.6 (192.0 , 7.6) 25.6 (192.0 , 7.6)
1500 22.9 (172.0 , 6.8) 22.9 (172.0 , 6.8)
2000 23.2 (174.0 , 6.9) 23.2 (174.0 , 6.9)
2500 23.9 (179.0 , 7) 23.9 (179.0 , 7)
Engine 3000 23.6 (177.0 , 7) 23.6 (177.0 , 7)
speed 3500 26.8 (201.0 , 7.9) 26.8 (201.0 , 7.9)
(rpm) 4000 29.7 (223.0 , 8.8) 29.7 (223.0 , 8.8)
4500 32.3 (242.0 , 9.5) 32.3 (242.0 , 9.5)
5000 34.1 (256.0 , 10.1) 34.1 (256.0 , 10.1)
5500 36 (270.0 , 10.6) 36 (270.0 , 10.6)
6000 37.9 (284.0 , 11.2) 37.9 (284.0 , 11.2)
6300 40 (300.0 , 11.8) 40 (300.0 , 11.8)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
GD(H4SO)-116
12LE_US.book 117

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 2 (MT model except for PZEV)

Normal ignition
66.7 (500.0 , 19.7) 100.4 (753.0 , 29.6)
650 26.4 (198.0 , 7.8) 26.4 (198.0 , 7.8)
1000 24.8 (186.0 , 7.3) 24.8 (186.0 , 7.3)
1500 21.1 (158.0 , 6.2) 21.1 (158.0 , 6.2)
2000 20.1 (151.0 , 5.9) 20.1 (151.0 , 5.9)
2500 20.3 (152.0 , 6) 20.3 (152.0 , 6)
Engine 3000 20.9 (157.0 , 6.2) 20.9 (157.0 , 6.2)
speed 3500 26.2 (196.7 , 7.7) 26.2 (196.7 , 7.7)
(rpm) 4000 30.2 (226.3 , 8.9) 30.2 (226.3 , 8.9)
4500 34.1 (256.0 , 10.1) 34.1 (256.0 , 10.1)
5000 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2) 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2)
5500 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2) 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2)
6000 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2) 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2)
6300 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2) 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Idling ignition
66.7 (500.0 , 19.7) 100.4 (753.0 , 29.6)
650 26.4 (198.0 , 7.8) 26.4 (198.0 , 7.8)
1000 24.8 (186.0 , 7.3) 24.8 (186.0 , 7.3)
1500 21.1 (158.0 , 6.2) 21.1 (158.0 , 6.2)
2000 20.1 (151.0 , 5.9) 20.1 (151.0 , 5.9)
2500 20.3 (152.0 , 6) 20.3 (152.0 , 6)
Engine 3000 20.9 (157.0 , 6.2) 20.9 (157.0 , 6.2)
speed 3500 26.2 (196.7 , 7.7) 26.2 (196.7 , 7.7)
(rpm) 4000 30.2 (226.3 , 8.9) 30.2 (226.3 , 8.9)
4500 34.1 (256.0 , 10.1) 34.1 (256.0 , 10.1)
5000 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2) 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2)
5500 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2) 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2)
6000 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2) 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2)
6300 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2) 34.7 (260.0 , 10.2)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)

If conditions are met, it is possible to detect the misfires from idling to high engine speed. However, to
avoid excessive load or harm to the engine, perform diagnosis at idle.
Perform the diagnosis continuously.
GD(H4SO)-117
12LE_US.book 118

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
When a misfire occurs, the engine speed will decrease and the crankshaft position speed will change. Cal-
culate the interval difference value (diagnostic value) from crankshaft position speed by the following formu-
la, and judge whether a misfire is occurring or not comparing the calculated result with judgment value. Count
the number of misfires, if the misfire ratio is higher during 1000 revs. or 200 revs., judge corresponding cyl-
inders as NG.
Diagnostic value cal- Misfire detection every single NG judgment (Misfire occurrence judg-
culation ignition ment required by the law) (Compare
(Calculate from angle (Compare diagnostic value number of misfire with judgment value)
speed) with judgment value)
180 Interval Difference FTP 1.5 times misfire NG judgment
Method Catalyst damage misfire NG judgment
360 Interval Difference
Method
720 Interval Difference
Method
As shown in the following figure, pick a cylinder as the standard and name it omg 0. And the former crank-
shaft position speed is named omg 1, the second former crankshaft position speed is named omg 2, the third
is named omg 3, etc.
(A) #3 #2 #4 #1 #3 #2 #4 #1 #3 #2
(B) omg7 omg6 omg5 omg4 omg3 omg2 omg1 omg0
EN-01774
(A) Ignition order (B) Crankshaft position speed
GD(H4SO)-118
12LE_US.book 119

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic value domg 180 = (omg 1 omg 0) (omg 5 omg 1)/4
Judge as a misfire in the following cases.
domg 180 > judgment value of positive side
domg 180 judgment value of negative side
(Diagnostic value before 180 CA)
domg180
Threshold valve (positive number)
domg180
Threshold valve (negative number)
Judged as misfire.
EN-02877

Diagnostic value domg 360 = (omg 1 omg 0) (omg 3 omg 2)
Misfire judgment domg 360 > Judgment value Judge as misfire
domg360
Threshold valve
domg360
Judged as misfire.
EN-03273
GD(H4SO)-119
12LE_US.book 120

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Diagnostic value domg 720 = (omg 1 omg 0) (omg 5 omg 4)
Misfire judgment domg 720 > Judgment value Judge as misfire
domg720
Threshold valve
domg720
Judged as misfire.
EN-03274
FTP 1.5 times misfire (Misfire occurrence level which influences exhaust gas)
Judgment Value (Judge that malfunction occurs when the misfire ratio is high in 1000 engine revs.)
FTP emission diagnostic value 17 100/2000% in
1000 revs. (PZEV model)
30 100/2000% in
1000 revs. (except for
PZEV model)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1000 engine revs.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
FTP emission diagnostic value < 17 100/2000% in
1000 revs. (PZEV model)
< 30 100/2000% in
1000 revs. (except for
PZEV model)
GD(H4SO)-120
12LE_US.book 121

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Catalyst damage misfire (Misfire occurrence level damaging catalyst)

Judgment Value
Catalyst damage misfire diagnostic value Value from Map 3
Map 3
Intake air (g(oz)/rev)
0.16 0.28 0.4 0.52 0.64 0.76 0.92 1.1
(0.01) (0.01) (0.01) (0.02) (0.02) (0.03) (0.03) (0.04)
700 100 100 100 100 90 80 64 48
1000 100 100 100 100 90 80 63 44
1500 100 100 90 80 73 67 54 40
2000 80 80 80 80 68 57 51 44
2500 80 80 73 67 62 57 51 44
Engine 3000 67 67 62 57 51 44 44 44
speed 3500 67 67 56 44 40 36 34 31
(rpm) 4000 57 57 44 31 24 20 20 20
4500 44 44 33 31 20 20 20 20
5000 44 44 38 31 20 20 20 20
5500 36 36 31 27 20 20 20 20
6000 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
6300 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Catalyst damage misfire diagnostic < Value of Map 3
value

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0301. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-111, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MIS-
FIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
NOTE:
BI: DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED
NOTE:
GD(H4SO)-121
12LE_US.book 122

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BJ:DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
Detect the open or short circuit of knock sensor.
(1) (4) (5)
(2)
(A)
(3)
EN-01707
(A) To knock sensor harness
(1) Case (3) Piezoelectric element (5) Resistance

(2) Weight (4) Nut
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-122
12LE_US.book 123

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-123
12LE_US.book 124

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BK:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
Detect the open or short circuit of knock sensor.
(1) (4) (5)
(2)
(A)
(3)
EN-01707
(A) To knock sensor harness
(1) Case (3) Piezoelectric element (5) Resistance

(2) Weight (4) Nut
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-124
12LE_US.book 125

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-125
12LE_US.book 126

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BL:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT

Detect the open or short circuit of the crankshaft position sensor.
Judge as NG when the crank signal is not input even though the starter was rotated.
(A)
#1BTDC10 CA #3BTDC10 CA #2BTDC10 CA #4BTDC10 CA #1BTDC10 CA
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05538
(A) Cam signal (B) Crankshaft signal
(1)
(3)
(2)
EN-05539
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (2) Crank sprocket (3) Crankshaft half-turn
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-126
12LE_US.book 127

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Starter switch ON
Crankshaft position sensor signal Not detected
Battery voltage 8V

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Crankshaft position sensor signal Input exists
Battery voltage 8V
GD(H4SO)-127
12LE_US.book 128

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BM:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
Detect for faults in crankshaft position sensor output properties.
Judge as NG when there is a problem in the number of crankshaft signals for every revolution of crankshaft.
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05538
(1)
(3)
(2)
EN-05539
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (2) Crank sprocket (3) Crankshaft half-turn
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Battery voltage 8V
GD(H4SO)-128
12LE_US.book 129

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Perform the diagnosis continuously under 3000 rpm engine speed.
Judgment Value
Cylinder number identification Completed
Amount of crank sensor signal during 1 Not = 30
rev of crankshaft.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Amount of crank sensor signal during 1 = 30
rev of crankshaft.
GD(H4SO)-129
12LE_US.book 130

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BN:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SIN-

GLE SENSOR)
Detect the open or short circuit of the camshaft position sensor.
Judge as NG when the number of camshaft signals remains abnormal.
Number of camshaft signal = 2 is normal at two engine revolution.
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05541
(A) Camshaft signal (B) Crankshaft signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-130
12LE_US.book 131

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Battery voltage 8V
Amount of camshaft sensor signal during Not = 2
2 revs of crankshaft.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Two engine revs. 4 time(s)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Voltage 8V
Amount of camshaft sensor signal during =2
2 revs.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Two engine revs.
GD(H4SO)-131
12LE_US.book 132

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BO:DTC P0341 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR)
Detect the malfunction of camshaft position sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the camshaft line signal input timing is shifted from the crankshaft signal because of tim-
ing belt tooth chip etc.
OK NG OK NG
(A)
(B)
10 CA 30 CA 30 CA
EN-05542
(1) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
(2)
EN-01782
(1) Boss (3) Air gap (5) Camshaft one revolution (crank-
shaft two revolutions)
(2) Cam sprocket (4) Camshaft position sensor
GD(H4SO)-132
12LE_US.book 133

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Battery voltage 8V
Engine operation Idling
Misfire Not detected
Engine speed variation for 4 ms 12799.8 rpm

Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed.
Judgment Value
Position of camshaft position sensor sig- Not between BTDC
nal 10CA and BTDC
80CA
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 10 time(s) engine revolutions

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Position of camshaft position sensor sig- Between BTDC10CA
nal and BTDC80CA
GD(H4SO)-133
12LE_US.book 134

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BP:DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

Based on the self-diagnostic result of the ignition coil driving IC, judge the ignition coil driving circuit as normal
or abnormal.
The ignition coil driving IC detects no ignition status as a malfunction.
Elapsed time after starting the engine >1s
Engine speed > 500 rpm
Ignition energization time > 2000 s
Ignition status Not during ignition cut

Judgment Value
Ignition driving IC information Malfunction

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition driving IC information Normal

BQ:DTC P0352 IGNITION COIL B PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0351. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-134, DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A
PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
BR:DTC P0353 IGNITION COIL C PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
NOTE:
BS:DTC P0354 IGNITION COIL D PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
NOTE:
GD(H4SO)-134
12LE_US.book 135

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
BT:DTC P0400 EXHAUST GAS RECIRCULATION FLOW

Detect EGR system malfunction.
Intake manifold pressure (negative pressure) is constant because the throttle valve is fully closed during de-
celeration fuel cut. At this time, when the EGR valve is opened/closed, the intake manifold pressure will
change. EGR System OK/NG is judged by the range of this change.
(7)
(1)
(6)
(5)
(2)
(4)
(3)
EN-02192
(1) ECM (4) CPU (6) Main relay

(2) Detecting circuit (5) EGR valve (7) Battery power supply
(3) Switching circuit
GD(H4SO)-135
12LE_US.book 136

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature 75 C(167 F)
Intake manifold pressure (absolute pressure) < 44 kPa (330 mmHg, 13 inHg)
Ambient air temperature 5 C(41 F)
Throttle position < 0.25
Atmospheric pressure 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Fuel shut-off function In operation
Neutral switch OFF
After neutral switch ON/OFF change Value from Map
No load change (A/C, power steering, light- 5000 ms
ing, rear defogger, heater fan and radiator
fan)
Map
C (F) (40) (22) (4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
After neutral switch change
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
msec

C (F) (104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
After neutral switch change
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
msec

During deceleration fuel cut from 53 km/h (approx. 33 MPH) or more, perform diagnosis once.
Be careful of vehicle speed and engine speed. (Diagnosis will not be completed if the vehicle speed and en-
gine speed conditions become out of specification due to deceleration.)
Measure the pressure values when the enable conditions are established, and perform diagnosis by calcu-
lating those results.
1. Label the intake manifold pressure value as PMOF1, which is observed when enable conditions are es-
tablished, and set the EGR target step to 50 steps (nearly full open).
2. Label the intake manifold pressure value as PMON, which is observed after one second has passed since
EGR target step was set to 50 steps (when the enable conditions were established), and set the EGR target
step to 0.
3. Label the intake manifold pressure as PMOF2, which is observed after one second has passed since EGR
target step was set to 0 (after two seconds have passed since the enable conditions were established).
Judgment Value
PMON (PMOF1 + PMOF2)/2 < 2.5 kPa (18.63
mmHg, 0.7 inHg)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time
GD(H4SO)-136
12LE_US.book 137

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
cles.
Start dignosis
(A) (B) (C)
ON
Deceleration fuel cut
OFF
Diagnosis enable condition
(Open)
(D)
EGR target step
(Close)
(Open)
EGR actual step
(Close)
PMON
Intake manifold pressure
(During normal condition) PMOF2
PMOF1
DIagnostic mode timer
EN-05568
(A) 3000 ms (B) 1000 ms (C) 1000 ms

(D) 45 step(s)
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
PMON (PMOF1 + PMOF2)/2 2.5 kPa (18.63
mmHg, 0.7 inHg)
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 1 time
GD(H4SO)-137
12LE_US.book 138

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1)
Detect the deterioration of the catalyst function.
Though the front oxygen sensor output would change slowly with a new catalyst, the sensor output with a de-
teriorated catalyst becomes high and the inversion time is shortened.
For this reason, the catalyst diagnosis is carried out by monitoring the front oxygen sensor output and com-
paring it with the front oxygen (A/F) sensor output.
(1) (2)
(A) (3)
(B) (3)
(C) (D)
EN-01713
(A) Normal (B) Deterioration (C) Output waveform from the front
oxygen (A/F) sensor
(D) Output waveform from the front
oxygen sensor
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (2) Front oxygen sensor (3) Catalytic converter
GD(H4SO)-138
12LE_US.book 139

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Engine coolant temperature 75 C (167 F) (PZEV model)
70 C (158 F) (CVT model
except for PZEV)
75 C (167 F) (MT model
except for PZEV)
Estimated catalyst temperature 580 C (1076 F) (CVT model)
600 C (1112 F) (MT model)
Learning value of evaporation gas density < 0.2
Sub feedback In operation
Evaporative system diagnosis Not in operation
Time of difference (< 0.10) between actual 1000 ms
lambda and target lambda
Vehicle speed > 75 km/h (46.6 MPH)
Amount of intake air 5 g/s (0.18 oz/s) (PZEV CVT
model)
7 g/s (0.25 oz/s) (except for
PZEV CVT model)
and
< 40 g/s (1.41 oz/s)
Engine load change every 0.5 engine revs. < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Rear oxygen output change from 660 mV or Experienced after fuel cut
less to 660 mV or more
Elapsed time after starting the engine 225 s (PZEV model)
218 s (except for PZEV model)
Purge execution calculated time 0s

Perform the diagnosis only once at a constant 75 km/h (46.6 MPH) or higher.
GD(H4SO)-139
12LE_US.book 140

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
After the enable conditions have been established, calculate the front oxygen (A/F) sensor lambda value de-
viation sum value ( |(sglmdn sglmdn1)|), and rear oxygen sensor output voltage deviation sum value (
|(ro2sadn ro2sadn1)|) in every 32 ms 4 times. If the front oxygen (A/F) sensor lambda value deviation
sum value ( |(sglmdn sglmdn1)|) is the predetermined value or more, calculate the diagnostic value.
If the duration of time while the following conditions are met is within the time indicated, judge as NG.
Judgment Value
|(ro2sadn ro2sadn1)| / |(sglmdn > 11 (PZEV model)
sglmdn1)| > 19.5 (CVT model
except for PZEV)
> 16 (MT model
except for PZEV)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear the NG if the continuous time while the following conditions are established is within
the predetermined time.
Judgment Value
|(ro2sadn ro2sadn1)| / |(sglmdn 11 (PZEV model)
sglmdn1)| 19.5 (CVT model
except for PZEV)
16 (MT model
except for PZEV)
GD(H4SO)-140
12LE_US.book 141

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

ED (SMALL LEAK)
The evaporative system monitor detects leak up to 0.020 inch in the fuel tank and evaporative emissions sys-
tem. If the fuel cap is not present or has not been correctly tightened after a refueling event, a malfunction is
also detected. These malfunctions are detected by monitoring the fuel tank and system pressure during an
intrusive pull-down pressure test. Pull down is accomplished via the purge valve while the engine is running.
Monitors run during the first idle after engine start and while driving.
The diagnostic is classified into two monitors. The first monitor detects a 0.040 inch leak, fuel cap loose/off,
and canister purge valve stuck open/close whilst the other monitor detects a 0.020 inch leak when the vehicle
is moving or during the first idle. Failures, DTCs and monitor methods are as follows.
P0457 Fuel cap loose/off or CPC valve stuck open/ Monitor 1
close
P0442 0.040 inch leak Monitor 1
P0456 0.020 inch leak Monitor 2
(4)
(1) (3)
(2)
(5)
(14)
(13)
(15)
(8)
(7)
(9)
(11) (10)
(12) (6)
EN-07995
(1) Fuel gauge (6) Canister (11) Fuel level sensor

(2) Intake manifold (7) Drain valve (CCV) (12) Fuel tank
(3) Throttle body (8) Drain filter (13) Fuel cut valve
(4) Purge control solenoid valve (CPC (9) Shut-off valve (14) Fuel tank pressure sensor
valve)
(5) Engine control module (ECM) (10) Fuel temperature sensor (15) Vent valve
GD(H4SO)-141
12LE_US.book 142

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Monitor 1
P0457 Fuel cap loose/off or CPC valve stuck open/close
P0442 0.040 inch leak check
This monitor detects CPC valve stuck open/close, fuel cap loose/off, and 0.040 inch leak in the evaporative
emission system by monitoring the fuel tank system pressure an intrusive pull-down pressure test. The mon-
itor consists of Modes Z, A, B, C and D. There are three judgment times for these malfunctions. CPC valve
stuck open is performed in Mode Z, CPC valve stuck closed or fuel cap loose/off is in Mode B, 0.040 inch leak
is in Mode D.
Required time for each
Mode Description of each mode
mode
CPC valve: Closed
CCV: Closed
The system requires 3000 ms to measure the pressure difference.
Mode Z
(1) Pressure difference < 0.9 kPa (6.5 mmHg, 0.3 inHg) 3000 ms
(Monitoring of CPC stuck open)
Judged as Fail of CPC stuck open [P0457]
(2) Pressure difference 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
Move to Mode A
Mode A The system requires 10000 ms to measure the pressure increase
10000 ms
(Estimation of Evap. Generation) (evpp1), and then move to Mode B.
CPC valve: Open
Negative pressure is introduced to the fuel tank.
(1) Elapsed time in Mode B 10000 ms
and
Mode B
(Minimum tank pressure) (Initial tank pressure) > 0.5 kPa (4 Average: 7 s
(Negative Pressure Introduction/
mmHg, 0.2 inHg) (Depends on the tank
Monitoring of Fuel cap off or CPC
Judged as Fail of Fuel cap off or CPC stuck close [P0457] condition)
stuck close)
(2) Elapsed time in Mode B 10000 ms + 25000 ms
Judged as Fail of Fuel cap off or CPC stuck close [P0457]
(3) Fuel tank pressure 1.4 kPa (10.5 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)
Move to Mode C
CPC valve: Closed
When the tank pressure comes up to the target pressure (1.3
Mode C kPa (9.75 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)), the monitor moves to Mode D. Average: 7 s
(Keeping Negative Pressure / Pass (Depends on the tank
in Mode C) If the fuel tank pressure does not exceed the 1.3 kPa (9.75 condition)
mmHg, 0.4 inHg) after 14013 ms, the system judges as Pass in
Mode C and moves to Final Judgment.
The monitor requires 10000 ms to measure the pressure change
(evpp2) and calculates the monitor value (evpp2 1.5 evpp1),
where Mode A (evpp1) is the generated vapor pressure. The cal-
culated value (evpp2 1.5 evpp1) is then compared to a cali-
Mode D brated threshold table as a function of fuel temperature and fuel
(Pressure Measurement / Pass Fail level. The system judges as a Pass/Fail in Mode D and then 10000 ms
in Mode D) moves to Final Judgment.
(1) evpp2 1.5 evpp1 > Fail Threshold (Map 1) Fail in Mode
D
(2) evpp2 1.5 evpp1 Pass Threshold (Map 1) Pass in
Mode D
The monitor is completed in the following order
Final Judgment (1) Judged as Fail in Mode D Fail of 0.040 inch leak [P0442]
0.128 s
(Pass / Fail) (2) Judged as Pass in Mode C / Mode D Pass of 0.040 inch
leak
GD(H4SO)-142
12LE_US.book 143

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 1 (Threshold value for 0.040 inch leak)

Fuel temperature (C (F))
15 (59) 25 (77) 35 (95) 45 (113)
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) 0.3 (2.1, 0.1) 0.3 (2.1, 0.1) 0.3 (2.3, 0.1) 0.3 (2.4, 0.1)
0.3 (2.32, 0.4 (2.73, 0.4 (2.88,
Fuel Level 27 (7.13, 5.94) 0.3 (2.5, 0.1)
0.1) 0.1) 0.1)
2 (US gal,
Imp gal) 0.4 (2.88, 0.4 (2.97, 0.4 (3.23, 0.5 (3.43,
43 (11.36, 9.46)
0.1) 0.1) 0.1) 0.1)
59.5 (15.72, 13.09) 0.5 (3.5, 0.1) 0.5 (3.5, 0.1) 0.5 (3.5, 0.1) 0.5 (3.7, 0.1)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Monitor 2
P0456 0.020 inch leak check
This monitor detects a very small leak (0.020 inch) in the evaporative emissions system by monitoring the
fuel tank and system pressure during an intrusive pull-down pressure test. Pull down is accomplished via the
purge valve while the engine is running. The monitor runs during the first idle after engine start and also while
the vehicle is running.
START
Engine Sta rt
Monitor du r ing the first idle No

Ena b le conditions are met
Yes
Monitor whilst r unning No
Ena ble conditions are met
Perfor m the monitor

dur ing the first idle
Yes
Perfor m the monitor

while r unning
No
Monitor
Complete
Yes
END
EN-09348
GD(H4SO)-143
12LE_US.book 144

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Monitor 2 (first idle condition)

mode
CPC valve: Closed
CCV: Closed
Low vapor flag

At the beginning of the monitor test when;
Low vapor flag OFF
Fuel temperature is lower than Map 2 listed value
Mode A 10000 ms
Intake air temperature is lower than Map 3 listed value
(Estimation of Evap. Generation) Low vapor flag ON
The system sets Low vapor flag = ON. Low vapor flag is used in
128 ms
Mode A, Mode C, and Mode D.
The system measures the generated vapor pressure increase

( P1) in the specific time period (*1), and then moves to Mode B.
(*1) Low vapor flag OFF: 10000 ms, Low vapor flag ON: 128 ms
CPC valve: Open
Average: 13 s
Mode B Negative pressure is introduced to the fuel tank via engine mani-
(Depends on the tank
(Negative Pressure Introduction) fold vacuum. When the fuel tank pressure reaches the target pres-
condition)
sure (1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)), the monitor moves to
Mode C.
CPC valve: Closed
After a calibrated time period (*2) has elapsed since the tank pres- Low vapor flag OFF
sure comes up to the target pressure (1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.4 Average: 21 s
Mode C
inHg)), move to Mode D. Low vapor flag ON
(Keeping Negative Pressure / Pass
Average: 10 s
in Mode C)
If the fuel tank pressure does not exceed the target pressure (1.3 (Depends on the tank
kPa (10 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)) after Map 4 (ms), the system is condition)
judged as Pass in Mode C and moves to Final Judgment.
(*2) Low vapor flag OFF: 10000 ms, Low vapor flag ON: 2000 ms
The monitor requires 10000 ms to measure the pressure change
( P2) and calculates the monitor value ( P2- P1), where
Mode A ( P1) is the generated vapor pressure. The calculated
value ( P2- P1) is then compared to a calibrated threshold
Mode D table as a function of fuel temperature and fuel level. The system
(Pressure Measurement / Fail or judges as a Pass/Fail in Mode D and then moves to Final Judg- 10000 ms
Pass in Mode D) ment.
(1) P2 P1 > Fail Threshold (*3) Fail in Mode D
(2) P2 P1 Pass Threshold (*4) Pass in Mode D
(*3) Low vapor flag OFF: Map 5, Low vapor flag ON: Map 7
(*4) Low vapor flag OFF: Map 6, Low vapor flag ON: Map 8
Final Judgment (1) Judged as Fail in Mode D Fail of 0.020 inch leak [P0456]
0.128 s
(Pass / Fail) (2) Judged as Pass in Mode C / Mode D Pass of 0.020 inch
leak
Map 2 (Fuel temperature threshold for Low vapor flag)

Fuel Level
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) 35 (9.25, 7.7) 59.5 (15.72, 13.09)
2 (US gal, Imp gal)
Fuel temperature threshold
5 (41) 10 (50) 15 (59)
C (F)
Map 3 (intake air temperature threshold for Low Vapor Flag)

Fuel Level
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) 35 (9.25, 7.7) 59.5 (15.72, 13.09)
2 (US gal, Imp gal)
Intake air temperature threshold
5 (41) 10 (50) 15 (59)
C (F)
GD(H4SO)-144
12LE_US.book 145

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 4 (Period for judgment of Pass in Mode C)

Fuel Level
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) 35 (9.25, 7.7) 50 (13.21, 11) 59.5 (15.72, 13.09)
2 (US gal, Imp gal)
Period for Pass in Mode C
23000 16000 12000 9500
(ms)
Map 5 (Threshold value for 0.020 inch leak in Mode D under normal condition)
40 45 50
0 (32) 10 (50) 15 (59) 20 (68) 25 (77) 30 (86) 35 (95)
(104) (113) (122)
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) (0.70, (0.70, (0.70, (0.70, (0.90, (1.10, (1.10, (1.10, (1.10, (1.10,
0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
Fuel Level 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
2 (US gal, 35 (9.25, 7.7) (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (1.00, (1.20, (1.20, (1.20, (1.20, (1.20,
Imp gal) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
59.5 (15.72, 13.09) (0.90, (0.90, (0.90, (0.90, (1.10, (1.30, (1.30, (1.30, (1.30, (1.30,
0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0.1) 0.1) 0.1) 0.1) 0.1)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Map 6 (Threshold value for Pass in Mode D under normal conditions)

40 45 50
0 (32) 10 (50) 15 (59) 20 (68) 25 (77) 30 (86) 35 (95)
(104) (113) (122)
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60,
0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
Fuel Level 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
2 (US gal, 35 (9.25, 7.7) (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60, (0.60,(0.60,
Imp gal) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1
59.5 (15.72, 13.09) (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (0.80, (0.80,
0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0) 0)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Map 7 (Threshold value for 0.020 inch leak in Mode D with under low vapor conditions)
0 (32) 10 (50) 15 (59) 20 (68)
Fuel Level 10.5 (2.77, 2.31) 0.1 (0.80, 0) 0.1 (0.80, 0) 0.1 (0.80, 0) 0.1 (0.80, 0)
2 (US gal, 35 (9.25, 7.7) 0.1 (0.90, 0) 0.1 (0.90, 0) 0.1 (0.90, 0) 0.1 (0.90, 0)
Imp gal) 59.5 (15.72, 13.09) 0.1 (1, 0) 0.1 (1, 0) 0.1 (1, 0) 0.1 (1, 0)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Map 8 (Threshold value for Pass in Mode D with under low vapor conditions)
0 (32) 10 (50) 15 (59) 20 (68)
Fuel Level 10.5 (2.77, 2.31) 0.1 (0.60, 0) 0.1 (0.60, 0) 0.1 (0.60, 0) 0.1 (0.60, 0)
2 (US gal, 35 (9.25, 7.7) 0.1 (0.7, 0) 0.1 (0.7, 0) 0.1 (0.7, 0) 0.1 (0.7, 0)
Imp gal) 59.5 (15.72, 13.09) 0.1 (0.80, 0) 0.1 (0.80, 0) 0.1 (0.80, 0) 0.1 (0.80, 0)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
GD(H4SO)-145
12LE_US.book 146

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Monitor 2 (vehicle running condition)

mode
CPC valve: Closed
Average: 7 s
Mode A-1 Fuel tank pressure is adjusted to zero. If the fuel tank pressure is
(Zero adjust) close to the ambient pressure, the system waits 5000 ms for stabi-
condition)
lization of the tank pressure prior to moving to Mode A-2.
CCV: Closed
Mode A-2
The system requires 30000 ms to measure the pressure increase 30000 ms
(Estimation of Evap. Generation)
(P1), and then move to Mode B.
CPC valve: Open
Negative pressure is introduced to the fuel tank via engine mani- Average: 22 s
Mode B
fold vacuum. When the fuel tank pressure reaches the target pres- (Depends on the tank
(Negative Pressure Introduction)
sure (2 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.6 inHg)), the monitor moves to Mode condition)
C.
CPC valve: Closed
Average: 5 s
Mode C When the tank pressure comes up to target pressure (2 kPa (15
(Keeping Negative Pressure) mmHg, 0.6 inHg)) or the calibrated period (Map 9) has passed,
condition)
move to Mode D.
The system calculates the integrated pressure change
(ptepap1sum) which is compensated by P1 (the generated vapor
pressure),
ptepap1sum (n) = ptepap1sum (n1) + ptepap1 (2 kPa (15
mmHg, 0.6 inHg))
ptepap1 = (Fuel tank pressure) (P1) / (Mode A-2 time)
Mode D (Elapsed time in Mode D) Average: 134 s
(Pressure Measurement / Pass Fail When the calibrated period (Map 10) has passed or the tank pres- (Depends on the tank
in Mode D) sure reaches the Ambient pressure (0 kPa (0 mmHg, 0 inHg)), the condition)
system compares the monitor value (ptepap1sum) to a calibrated
threshold table as a function of elapsed time in Mode D and fuel
level. The system judges as Pass/Fail in Mode D and then
moves to Final Judgment.
(1) ptepap1sum > Fail Threshold (Map 11) Fail in Mode D
(2) ptepap1sum Pass Threshold (Map 12) Pass in Mode D
Final Judgment
(1) Judged as Fail in Mode D Fail of 0.020 inch leak [P0456] 0.128 s
(Pass / Fail)
(2) Judged as Pass in Mode D Pass of 0.020 inch leak
Map 9 (Maximum time of Mode C)

Fuel Level
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) 27 (7.13, 5.94) 43 (11.36, 9.46) 59.5 (15.72, 13.09)
2 (US gal, Imp gal)
Maximum time of Mode C
21208 19288 9742 8057
(ms)
Map 10 (Maximum time of Mode D)

Fuel Level
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) 35 (9.25, 7.7) 60 (15.85, 13.2)
2 (US gal, Imp gal)
Maximum time of Mode D
210000 153000 92000
(ms)
GD(H4SO)-146
12LE_US.book 147

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 11 (Threshold value for 0.020 inch leak in Mode D)

Elapsed time in Mode D (ms)
15104 30080 45056 60032 75008 89984 104960 119936
46.2 95.8 160.2 238.2 328.5 430.3 542.9
12.9 (97
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) (347 , (719 , (1202 , (1787 , (2464 , (3228 , (4073 ,
, 3.8)
13.6) 28.3) 47.3) 70.3) 97) 127.1) 160.4)
Fuel Level 17.6 62.3 128.8 213.7 314.8 430.4 559.3 700.2
2 (US gal, 35 (9.25, 7.7) (132 , (467 , (966 , (1603 , (2361 , (3229 , (4196 , (5252 ,
Imp gal) 5.2) 18.4) 38) 63.1) 93) 127.1) 165.2) 206.8)
23.9 85.8 178.4 296.5 436.5 594.8 768.5 954.5
60 (15.85, 13.2) (179 , (644 , (1338 , (2225 , (3274 , (4462 , (5766 , (7161 ,
7.1) 25.4) 52.7) 87.6) 128.9) 175.7) 227) 281.9)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)

135040 150016 164992 179968 194944 209920 225024
10.5 667.3 799.9 941.4 1091.6 1248.9 1413.1 1585.2
(2.77, (5006 , (6000.557386, (7062.512067, (8188.783117, (9368.900911, (10601.09904, (11891.64027,
2.31) 197.1) 236.2) 278.1) 322.4) 368.9) 417.4) 468.2)
Fuel Level 35 852.9 1014.1 1183.7 1360.8 1544.8 1734.4 1930.4
2 (US gal, (9.25, (6399 , (7607.513887, (8880.01467, (10208.32601, (11588.8928, (13010.99648, (14481.68432,
Imp gal) 7.7) 251.9) 299.5) 349.6) 401.9) 456.3) 512.2) 570.1)
60 1151.6 1353.7 1560 1768.6 1978.5 2186.7 2394.6
(15.85, (8639 , (10155.06483, (11702.76626, (13267.6991, (14842.44065, (16404.00719, (17963.98126,
13.2) 340.1) 399.8) 460.7) 522.3) 584.3) 645.8) 707.2)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
Map 12 (Threshold value for Pass in Mode D)

15104 30080 45056 60032 75008 89984 104960 119936
39.9 82.8 138.5 205.8 283.9 371.8 469.2
11.1 (83
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) (300 , (621 , (1039 , (1544 , (2130 , (2789 , (3520 ,
, 3.3)
11.8) 24.5) 40.9) 60.8) 83.8) 109.8) 138.6)
Fuel Level 15.2 53.8 111.3 184.7 272 372 483.4 605.1
2 (US gal, 35 (9.25, 7.7) (114 , (404 , (835 , (1385 , (2041 , (2790 , (3626 , (4539 ,
Imp gal) 4.5) 15.9) 32.9) 54.5) 80.3) 109.9) 142.8) 178.7)
20.7 74.2 154.1 256.3 377.2 514.1 664.2 824.9
60 (15.85, 13.2) (155 , (557 , (1156 , (1922 , (2830 , (3856 , (4983 , (6188 ,
6.1) 21.9) 45.5) 75.7) 111.4) 151.8) 196.2) 243.6)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)

135040 150016 164992 179968 194944 209920 225024
576.7 691.2 813.6 943.3 1079.3 1221.2 1369.9
10.5 (2.77, 2.31) (4326 , (5186 , (6103 , (7077 , (8097 , (9161 , (10277 ,
170.3) 204.2) 240.3) 278.6) 318.8) 360.7) 404.6)
Fuel Level 737.1 876.4 1023 1176 1335 1498.8 1668.3
2 (US gal, 35 (9.25, 7.7) (5530 , (6574 , (7674 , (8822 , (10015 , (11244 , (12515 ,
Imp gal) 217.7) 258.8) 302.1) 347.3) 394.3) 442.7) 492.7)
995.2 1169.8 1348.1 1528.4 1709.8 1889.7 2069.4
60 (15.85, 13.2) (7466 , (8776 , (10114 , (11466 , (12827 , (14176 , (15524 ,
293.9) 345.5) 398.2) 451.4) 505) 558.1) 611.2)
kPa (mmHg, inHg)
GD(H4SO)-147
12LE_US.book 148

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Monitor 1
Ambient pressure 75 kPa (563 mmHg, 22.2 inHg)
Fuel tank pressure 4 kPa (30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg)
and
< 2.7 kPa (20 mmHg, 0.8 inHg)
Elapsed time after previous EVAP monitor was 230000 ms
finished/canceled
Total time of canister purge operation 120000 ms
Learning value of EVAP concentration < 0.08
and
< 4000 rpm
Intake manifold vacuum 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg, 3.9 inHg)
(= ambient pressure intake manifold pres-
sure)
Closed loop air fuel ratio control Active
Fuel temperature < 45 C (113 F)
Intake air temperature 10 C (14 F)
Fuel level 10.5 2 (2.77 US gal, 2.31 Imp gal)
and
< 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal, 13.09 Imp gal)

Soak time 18000 s
Accumulated intake air mass after engine start Map 13
and
< 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal, 13.09 Imp gal)
Fuel tank pressure 0.7 kPa (5.106 mmHg, 0.2 inHg)
and
< 0.7 kPa (5.106 mmHg, 0.2 inHg)
Adapted fuel tank pressure 0.3 kPa (2.507 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
and
< 0.3 kPa (2.507 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
and
< 2000 rpm
Intake manifold vacuum 13.3 kPa (100 mmHg, 3.9 inHg)
sure)
Vehicle speed < 2 km/h (1.2 MPH)
Idle switch ON
GD(H4SO)-148
12LE_US.book 149

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Elapsed time after previous EVAP monitor was 60000 ms
finished/canceled
Total time of canister purge operation 120000 ms
and
< 59.5 2 (15.72 US gal, 13.09 Imp gal)
All conditions below are satisfied 5000 ms
Fuel tank pressure 0.7 kPa (5 mmHg, 0.2 inHg)
and
< 0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
and
< 4000 rpm
Intake manifold vacuum 8 kPa (60 mmHg, 2.4 inHg)
sure)
Short term fuel trim > 0.9
Fuel level with large smoothing coefficient < Map 14
Fuel level with small smoothing coefficient
Learning value of EVAP density < 0.08
Map 13 (Accumulated intake air mass after engine start)

10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
start
(14) (32) (50) (68) (86) (104) (122) (140)
C (F)
Accumulated intake air mass
520 520 500 480 440 310 280 270
after engine start
(18.34) (18.34) (17.64) (16.93) (15.52) (10.93) (9.88) (9.52)
g (oz)
Map 14 (Threshold value the fuel slosh detection)

43 45 50 60
Fuel Level 10 (2.64, 20 (5.28, 25 (6.61, 30 (7.93,
(11.36, (11.89, (13.21, (15.85,
2 (US gal, Imp gal) 2.2) 4.4) 5.5) 6.6)
9.46) 9.9) 11) 13.2)
Fuel level change for detection
5 (1.32, 5 (1.32, 5 (1.32, 5 (1.32, 5 (1.32, 5 (1.32, 6 (1.59, 8 (2.11,
of fuel slosh
1.1) 1.1) 1.1) 1.1) 1.1) 1.1) 1.32) 1.76)
2 (US gal, Imp gal)
GD(H4SO)-149
12LE_US.book 150

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Monitor 1
Perform the diagnosis when the cumulative time of canister purge after engine start becomes 120 seconds
or more, at a vehicle speed of 32 km/h (20 MPH) or more.
If judgment cannot be made, repeat the diagnosis after a predetermined interval has passed.
Perform the diagnosis only once at the fast idle (the idling before starting to move) after soaking of 5 hours
or more, in conditions that A/F feedback has been executed and catalytic converter has been warmed up (ap-
prox. 25 seconds after engine start).
If judgment cannot be made, or the diagnosis cannot be performed at fast idle, do not repeat the diagnosis
in this driving cycle.
Perform this procedure only when the diagnosis cannot be completed at fast idle.
Perform the diagnosis when the cumulative time of canister purge after engine start becomes 120 seconds
or more, at a vehicle speed of 30 km/h (18.6 MPH) or more.
If judgment cannot be made, repeat the diagnosis after a predetermined interval has passed.
Monitor 1
CPC valve stuck open
At the beginning of the Monitor 1, system performs CPC valve stuck open monitor in Mode Z. CPC valve and
CCV are closed and the fuel tank pressure is monitored. The pressure transition over a calibrated time is then
used to determine if the CPC valve is stuck open.
CPC valve stuck open test at Mode Z of Monitor 1
Mode Z Mode A
(A)
CPC no r mal
Fuel tank pressure
Pressure dif ference in Mode Z

CPC stu c k open
closed
CCV
open
open closed
CPC
EN-09349
(A) 3000 ms
Judgment
Pressure difference in Mode Z < 0.9 kPa (6.5 mmHg, 0.3 inHg) Fail [CPC valve stuck open]: P0457
Pressure difference in Mode Z 0.4 kPa (3 mmHg, 0.1 inHg) Pass move to Mode A
Fuel cap loose/off and CPC valve stuck close
Fuel cap loose/off and CPC valve stuck close monitor is performed in Mode B of Monitor 1. The engine low-
ers the fuel tank pressure using intake manifold vacuum via the operation of the CPC valve. The pressure
transition over a calibrated time is then used to determine if the Fuel cap loose/off or CPC valve stuck closed.
GD(H4SO)-150
12LE_US.book 151

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Fuel cap off or CPC stuck close at Mode B of Monitor 1
Mode Z Mode A Mode B Mode C

(A) (B) AVE . 7 s
Fuel tank
pressure (Min . tank pressure in Mode B)
- (Ini . Tank pressure in Mode B)
CPC & Fuel cap no r mal Fuel cap off or CPC stu c k closed
Mode B
(C)
Target P
(D)
closed
CCV
open
Fuel cap off or CPC stu c k closed
open
open closed
CPC
closed
CPC & Fuel cap no r mal
EN-09350
(A) 3000 ms (B) 10000 ms (C) 10000 ms

(D) 1.4 kPa (10.5 mmHg, 0.4
inHg)
Judgment
Elapsed time in Mode B 10000 ms and (Minimum tank pressure in Mode B) (Initial tank pressure in
Mode B) > 0.5 kPa (4 mmHg, 0.2 inHg) Fail [Fuel cap off or CPC valve stuck close]: P0457
Fuel tank pressure 1.4 kPa (10.5 mmHg, 0.4 inHg) Pass move to Mode C
Fuel cap loose at Mode B of Monitor 1
Mode Z Mode A Mode B Mode C

(A) (B) AVE . 7 s
Fuel tank
pressure
Fuel cap loose

Target P
(D) Mode B
closed (C)
CCV
open
Fuel cap loose
open
open closed
CPC
closed
EN-09351
(A) 3000 ms (B) 10000 ms (C) 10000 ms + 25000 ms

(D) 1.4 kPa (10.5 mmHg, 0.4
inHg)
GD(H4SO)-151
12LE_US.book 152

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment
Elapsed time in Mode B 10000 ms + 25000 ms Fail [Fuel cap loose]: P0457
Fuel tank pressure 1.4 kPa (10.5 mmHg, 0.4 inHg) Pass move to Mode C
0.040 inch leak check
0.040 inch evaporative leak monitor is executed through Mode A to Mode D of Monitor 1. The engine lowers
the fuel tank pressure using intake manifold vacuum via the canister purge operation during engine running.
Once the tank pressure reaches a calibrated target (below atmospheric pressure) the purge valve is closed
and the fuel tank pressure is monitored. The pressure transition over a calibrated time period is then used to
determine if the fuel tank system has a leak.
0.040 inch EVAP monitor test
Final judgment
Mode Z Mode A Mode B Mode C Mode D

Positi ve
(A) (B) AVE . 7 s AVE . 7 s (C)
Fuel tank
pressure evpp1
evpp2 (Leak)
Negati ve
evpp2 (No leak)
(E)
(D)
closed
open open
CCV
open
open closed closed

CPC
EN-09352
(A) 3000 ms (B) 10000 ms (C) 10000 ms

(D) 1.4 kPa (10.5 mmHg, 0.4 (E) 1.3 kPa (9.75 mmHg, 0.4
inHg) inHg)
Judgment
evpp2 1.5 evpp1 > Map 1 Fail [0.040 inch Leak]: P0442
evpp2 1.5 evpp1 Map 1 Pass [No Leak]
GD(H4SO)-152
12LE_US.book 153

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0.020 inch leak check at first idle condition
An intrusive evaporative leak monitor test is run following the first engine start after a calibrated engine off
soak period. The engine lowers the fuel tank pressure using intake manifold vacuum via the purge valve op-
eration during engine idle. Once the tank pressure reaches a calibrated target (below atmospheric pressure)
the purge valve is closed and the fuel tank pressure is monitored. The pressure transition over a calibrated
time period is then used to determine if the fuel tank system has a leak.
Intrusive EVAP Monitor test at first Idle
Final judgment
Engine Sta rt Positi ve
Mode A Mode B Mode C Mode D
(A) AVE . 13 s (AVE . 10 s or 21 s) (B)
P1
Fuel tank
pressure
Negati ve
Del ay (C)
P2 (Leak)
P2 (No leak)
Target P
(D)
closed
open open
CCV
closed open closed
CPC
EN-09353
(A) 128 ms or 10000 ms (B) 10000 ms (C) 2000 ms or 10000 ms

(D) 1.3 kPa (10 mmHg, 0.4 inHg)
Judgment
P2 P1 > Map 5 or Map 7 Fail [0.020 inch Leak]: P0456
P2 P1 Map 6 or Map 8 Pass [No Leak]
GD(H4SO)-153
12LE_US.book 154

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

0.020 inch Monitor during Vehicle Running (moving) Conditions
While the vehicle is vehicle running, the diagnostic intrusively pulls-down the fuel tank pressure using man-
ifold vacuum via the purge valve. Once the tank pressure reaches a calibrated target (below atmospheric
pressure) the purge valve is closed and the fuel tank pressure is monitored. The pressure transition over a
calibrated time period is then used to determine if the fuel tank system has a leak.
Intrusive EVAP Monitor Test (Vehicle Running)
Mode A-1 Mode A-2 Mode B Mode C Mode D

(Ave . 7 s) (A) (Ave . 22 s) (Ave . 5 s) (Ave . 134 s)
Positi ve
P1
Fuel tank
pressure
Negati ve
ptepap1 (Leak)
ptepap1 (No Leak)
Target P
(B)
ptepap1: fuel tank pressure compensated by P1
closed
open open
CCV
open open open
CPC
closed closed
Leak
ptepap1sum
No Leak
ptepap1sum: the inte gr ated pressure change compensated by P1
EN-09354
(A) 30000 ms (B) 2 kPa (15 mmHg, 0.6 inHg)
Judgment
ptepap1sum > Map 11 Fail [0.020 inch Leak]: P0456
ptepap1sum Map 12 Pass [No Leak]
GD(H4SO)-154
12LE_US.book 155

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

TROL CIRCUIT OPEN
Detect open or short circuit of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when the ECM output level differs from the actual terminal level.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294
(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (15) Diaphragm

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (16) Movable core
(3) Diode (10) Plate (17) Spring
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (18) Cover
(5) End plate (12) Housing (19) O-ring
(6) Body (13) Filter
(7) Yoke (14) Retainer
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-155
12LE_US.book 156

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage when ECM out- Low
puts OFF signal

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage when ECM out- High
puts OFF signal
GD(H4SO)-156
12LE_US.book 157

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT SHORTED
Detect open or short circuit of the drain valve.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294
(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (15) Diaphragm

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (16) Movable core
(3) Diode (10) Plate (17) Spring
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (18) Cover
(5) End plate (12) Housing (19) O-ring
(6) Body (13) Filter
(7) Yoke (14) Retainer
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage when ECM out- High
puts ON signal
GD(H4SO)-157
12LE_US.book 158

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage when ECM out- Low
puts ON signal
GD(H4SO)-158
12LE_US.book 159

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SENSOR
Detect malfunctions of tank pressure sensor output property by the following two diagnoses.
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
To detect drift malfunction and offset malfunction of tank pressure sensor, activate ECM in the predetermined
soaking time after turning the ignition switch OFF, and check that the tank pressure sensor input value is
equivalent to the barometric pressure.
For vehicles equipped with pressure control valve, be sure to open the pressure control valve when perform-
ing the diagnosis, because the pressure inside the tank increases if the ambient temperature rises during
soaking.
Stuck Diagnosis
When there is no pressure variation, which should have occurred in the tank considering the operation sta-
tus, judge as NG.
(A)
(1) (2)
(B)
(C)
EN-04462
(A) Output voltage (B) Input voltage (C) To fuel tank
(1) Connector (2) Terminals
GD(H4SO)-159
12LE_US.book 160

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
<DRIFT DIAGNOSIS>
Soaking time 3600 s 2 time(s)
Ignition switch OFF
Atmospheric pressure 75 kPa (563 mmHg,
22.2 inHg)
Intake air temperature > 10 C (14 F)
and
< 55 C (131 F)
Cumulative amount of purge during pre- Value from Map
vious driving cycle
Fuel level when the ignition switch is 10.5 2 (2.77 US gal,
OFF 2.31 Imp gal)
and
< 59.5 2 (15.72 US
gal, 13.09 Imp gal)
Map
Ambient air temperature 25 35 40 45
C (F) (77) (95) (104) (113)
Cumulative amount of purge
during previous driving cycle 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0) 0 (0)
g (oz)
<Stuck Diagnosis>
2.11 Imp gal)
22.2 inHg)

<DRIFT DIAGNOSIS>
Perform the diagnosis only once when 3600 s 2 time(s) has passed after the ignition switch is OFF.
<Stuck Diagnosis>
Perform the diagnosis continuously after 60 s have passed since the engine started.
Pay attention to the fuel level and temperature.
GD(H4SO)-160
12LE_US.book 161

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
<DRIFT DIAGNOSIS>
Judge as NG when one of the following conditions is established.
Judgment Value
Tank pressure sensor learning value 0.7 kPa (5.106
mmHg, 0.2 inHg)
or
< 0.7 kPa (5.106
mmHg, 0.2 inHg)
Tank pressure sensor measured value 0.3 kPa (2.507
Tank pressure sensor learning value mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
or
< 0.3 kPa (2.507
mmHg, 0.1 inHg)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Tank pressure sensor learning value < 0.7 kPa (5.106
mmHg, 0.2 inHg)
and
0.7 kPa (5.106
mmHg, 0.2 inHg)
Tank pressure sensor measured value < 0.3 kPa (2.507
Tank pressure sensor learning value mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
and
0.3 kPa (2.507
mmHg, 0.1 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-161
12LE_US.book 162

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
<Stuck Diagnosis>
Judgment Value
Number of times that the difference 16 time(s)
between the Max. fuel level every 60 s
and Min. fuel level every 60 s is 2 2
(0.53 US gal, 0.44 Imp gal) or more (with
enable condition established)
Maximum Minimum tank pressure < 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg,
(with enable condition completed) 0 inHg)
Maximum Minimum fuel temperature 7 C (12.6F)
(with enable condition completed)
If the difference between the Max. fuel level every 60 s and Min. fuel level every 60 s is less than 2 2 (0.53
US gal, 0.44 Imp gal), extend 60 s and make judgment with the Max. and Min. values for the fuel level in 60
s 2. If there is no difference after the extension of 60 s, extend the time (60 s 3, 60 s 4, 60 s 5) and
continue the judgment. If the difference between the Max. fuel level every 60 s and Min. fuel level every 60
s is 2 2 (0.53 US gal, 0.44 Imp gal) or more, the diagnosis counter counts up.
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 60 s 16 time(s) or more
cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Maximum Minimum tank pressure 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg,
0 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-162
12LE_US.book 163

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SENSOR LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(A)
(1) (2)
(B)
(C)
EN-04462
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-163
12LE_US.book 164

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure < 7.4 kPa (55.6
mmHg, 2.2 inHg)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure 7.4 kPa (55.6
mmHg, 2.2 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-164
12LE_US.book 165

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

SENSOR HIGH INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(A)
(1) (2)
(B)
(C)
EN-04462
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Time needed for all secondary parame- 5000 ms
ters to be in enable conditions
All conditions of EVAP canister purge Completed
Learning value of evaporation gas con- < 0.08
centration (left and right)
Main feedback compensation coefficient 0.9
(left and right)

Perform the diagnosis when purging enable conditions are met without idling.
GD(H4SO)-165
12LE_US.book 166

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure 7.9 kPa (59.6 mmHg,
2.3 inHg)
22.2 inHg)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure < 7.9 kPa (59.6
mmHg, 2.3 inHg)

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0442. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-141, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0442. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-141, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-166
12LE_US.book 167

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT LOW
Detect open or short circuit of the purge control solenoid valve.
(B) (A)
EN-02197
(A) To canister (B) To intake manifold
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform the diagnosis after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-167
12LE_US.book 168

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Duty ratio of ON < 0.75
Terminal output voltage Low

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage High
GD(H4SO)-168
12LE_US.book 169

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT HIGH
Detect open or short circuit of the purge control solenoid valve.
(B) (A)
EN-02197
(A) To canister (B) To intake manifold
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform the diagnosis after starting the engine.
GD(H4SO)-169
12LE_US.book 170

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Duty ratio of ON 0.25
Terminal output voltage High

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Terminal output voltage Low
GD(H4SO)-170
12LE_US.book 171

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Detect malfunctions of the fuel level sensor output property.
If the fuel level does not vary in a particular driving condition / engine condition where it should, judge as NG.
(A)
0 (B)
EN-01734
(A) Fuel level (B) Resistance
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-171
12LE_US.book 172

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
oz)
Max. min. values of fuel level output < 2.6 2 (0.69 US gal,
0.57 Imp gal)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
oz)
Max. min. values of fuel level output 2.6 2 (0.69 US gal,
0.57 Imp gal)
GD(H4SO)-172
12LE_US.book 173

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel level sensor. Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1) (5)
(4)
(2) (3)
EN-05371
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Fuel sub level sensor (4) Detecting circuit
(2) Fuel level sensor (5) Body integrated unit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-173
12LE_US.book 174

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-174
12LE_US.book 175

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CH:DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open or short circuit of fuel level sensor. Judge as NG if out of specification.
(1) (5)
(4)
(2) (3)
EN-05371
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Fuel sub level sensor (4) Detecting circuit
(2) Fuel level sensor (5) Body integrated unit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

GD(H4SO)-175
12LE_US.book 176

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-176
12LE_US.book 177

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CI: DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIRCUIT INTERMITTENT

Detect the unstable output faults from the fuel level sensor caused by noise. Judge as NG when the max. val-
ue and cumulative value of output voltage variation of the fuel level sensor is larger than the threshold value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Elapsed time after starting the engine 1s
Idle switch ON
2.31 Imp gal)
and
< 59.5 2 (15.72 US
gal, 13.09 Imp gal)
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH) 10000 ms

Always perform the diagnosis continuously at idle speed.
Pay attention to the fuel level.
GD(H4SO)-177
12LE_US.book 178

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Calculate the Max. value (DELFLMAX) and cumulative value (SUMFL) of output voltage variation of fuel level
sensor during 12.2 seconds. Judge it normal when both max. and cumulative values are not over the thresh-
old value. Otherwise, when either of them is over the threshold value, the diagnosis counter counts up. Judge
as NG if the counter indicated 4 time(s).
Diagnosis condition
(A)
Diagnosis timer
Fuel level sensor (C)

A/D value (D)
Amount of Fuel level

output voltage variation
Calculate the Max. value (DELFLMAX)

and the cumulative value (SUMFL).
6
5
4
3
2
1
Diagnosis counter 0
(B)
EN-05569
(A) 12288 ms (B) NG at 4 time(s) counts (C) Malfunction

(D) Normal
GD(H4SO)-178
12LE_US.book 179

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Integrated times of the condition reaching 4 time(s)
follows,
DELFLMAX Value from Map
or
SUMFL 23.8 V
At this time,
DELFLMAX: Maximum difference of sen-
sor output for 12288 ms
SUMFL: Integrated value of the sensor
output deviation for 12288 ms
Map
10, 2.64, 20, 5.28, 25, 6.61, 30, 7.93, 43, 11.36, 45, 11.89, 50, 13.21,
Fuel level (2, US gal, Imp gal)
2.2 4.4 5.5 6.6 9.46 9.9 11
Measured voltage (V) 0.248 0.519 0.796 0.6 1.025 1.069 1.402
The diagnosis counter does not count up when the following conditions are completed within 12288 ms.
Maximum value minimum value of 0 kPa (0.375 mmHg,
change of tank pressure during 12288 0 inHg)
ms
Maximum value minimum value of bat- 1.09 V
tery voltage during 12288 ms

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
DELFLMAX < Value from Map
SUMFL < 23.8 V
At this time,
DELFLMAX: Maximum difference of sen-
sor output for 12288 ms
SUMFL: Integrated value of the sensor
output deviation for 12288 ms
GD(H4SO)-179
12LE_US.book 180

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CJ:DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR A

Judge NG when the received data from VDCCM&H/U is abnormal vehicle speed, and the vehicle speed data
is impossible.
Vehicle speed signals are taken in to the VDC control module and hydraulic control unit, and normal/errone-
ous data of the ABS wheel speed sensor is received by CAN communication from the VDC control module
and hydraulic control unit.
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Always perform diagnosis more than 2000 ms after starting the engine.
Judgment Value
Front ABS wheel speed sensor status Malfunction
Either of the following is established
Front left wheel speed 300 km/h (186.4
MPH)
Front right wheel speed 300 km/h (186.4
MPH)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Front left wheel speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
and
< 300 km/h (186.4
MPH)
Front right wheel speed > 0 km/h (0 MPH)
and
< 300 km/h (186.4
MPH)
GD(H4SO)-180
12LE_US.book 181

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CK:DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED
Detect the malfunction that actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling. Judge as
NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
22.2 inHg)
2.11 Imp gal)
Elapsed time after starting the engine 10.49 s
Feedback of ISC In operation
Lambda value (left and right) 0.81
and
< 1.1
After switching air conditioner to ON/ 5.1 s
OFF
After intake manifold pressure changes > 5.1 s
by 4 kPa (30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg) or more.
Elapsed time after switching neutral > 5.1 s
position switch to ON/OFF
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling after warming up engine.
Judgment Value
Actual engine speed Targeted engine < 100 rpm
speed
Feedback compensation for ISC Max.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Actual engine speed Targeted engine 100 rpm
speed
GD(H4SO)-181
12LE_US.book 182

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CL:DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED
Detect the malfunction that actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling. Judge as
NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed during idling.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
22.2 inHg)
2.11 Imp gal)
Elapsed time after starting the engine 10.49 s
Feedback of ISC In operation
Lambda value (left and right) 0.81
and
< 1.1
After switching air conditioner to ON/ 5.1 s
OFF
After intake manifold pressure changes > 5.1 s
by 4 kPa (30 mmHg, 1.2 inHg) or more.
Elapsed time after switching neutral > 5.1 s
position switch to ON/OFF
Vehicle speed 0 km/h (0 MPH)

Perform the diagnosis continuously at idling after warming up engine.
Judgment Value
Actual Target engine speed 200 rpm
Feedback compensation for ISC Min.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Actual Target engine speed < 200 rpm
GD(H4SO)-182
12LE_US.book 183

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CM:DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

When cold, the abnormality in the control of target engine speed increase is detected. (P050A)
Judge as NG if the exhaust gas temperature diagnosis or idle speed diagnosis is NG.
Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis
Judge as NG when the estimated exhausted gas temperature in 14 seconds after the cold start is below the
specified value.
Idle speed diagnosis
Judge as NG when actual engine speed is not close to target engine speed at cold start.
Detect malfunctions of the catalyst advanced idling retard angle control. (P050B)
Judge as NG when ECM is not controlling the angle properly during catalyst advanced idling retard angle
control.
Final ignition timing diagnosis
Judge as NG when actual retard amount is under the specified value at cold start.
GD(H4SO)-183
12LE_US.book 184

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
<Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis>
Engine condition In operation
Elapsed time after gear position change 3000 ms
(P D or N D)
ISC feedback In operation
Throttle opening angle < 0.37
Fuel property Not extremely low volatility
Target retard amount 8 CA (CVT model)
8 CA (MT model)
<Idle speed diagnosis>
(P D or N D)
<Final ignition timing diagnosis>
(P D or N D)
Target retard amount Value from Map 3
Map 1 (PZEV model)

40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30
engine starting
(40) (22) (4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
C (F)
Intake air amount sum value 1070 840 680 570 500 480 480 480
g (oz) (37.74) (29.63) (23.98) (20.1) (17.64) (16.93) (16.93) (16.93)

40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
engine starting
(104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
C (F)
g (oz) (16.93) (15.87) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7)
GD(H4SO)-184
12LE_US.book 185

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Map 1 (except for PZEV model)

40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30
engine starting
(40) (22) (4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
C (F)
g (oz) (41.27) (35.62) (30.33) (25.75) (22.57) (20.1) (19.05) (18.69)

40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
engine starting
(104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
C (F)
g (oz) (17.99) (16.58) (14.46) (14.46) (14.46) (14.46) (14.46) (14.46)
Map 2 (PZEV model)

40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30
engine starting
(40) (22) (4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
C (F)
g (oz) (37.74) (29.63) (23.98) (20.1) (17.64) (16.93) (16.93) (16.93)

40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
engine starting
(104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
C (F)
g (oz) (16.93) (15.87) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7) (12.7)

40 30 20 10 0 10 20 30
engine starting
(40) (22) (4) (14) (32) (50) (68) (86)
C (F)
g (oz) (41.27) (35.62) (30.33) (25.75) (22.57) (20.1) (19.05) (18.69)

40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110
engine starting
(104) (122) (140) (158) (176) (194) (212) (230)
C (F)
g (oz) (17.99) (16.58) (14.46) (14.46) (14.46) (14.46) (14.46) (14.46)
Map 3
Engine coolant tem- 40 C 30 C 20 C 10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C
perature (40 F) (22 F) (4 F) (14 F) (32 F) (50 F) (68 F) (86 F) (104 F) (122 F) (140 F)
Target retard
3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA
amount

Perform the diagnosis at cold start.
GD(H4SO)-185
12LE_US.book 186

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Exhaust gas temperature diagnosis
Calculate the estimated exhaust gas temperature when the diagnostic enable condition is established. Judge
as NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Estimated exhaust gas temperature < Value of Map 4
Map 4 (PZEV model)

Engine coolant
40 C 30 C 20 C 10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C
temperature at
(40 F) (22 F) (4 F) (14 F) (32 F) (50 F) (68 F) (86 F) (104 F) (122 F)
engine starting
Threshold value 140 C 140 C 140 C 140 C 140 C 138 C 138 C 138 C 138 C 138 C
(CVT model) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (280.4 F) (280.4 F) (280.4 F) (280.4 F) (280.4 F)
(MT model) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (280.4 F) (280.4 F) (280.4 F) (280.4 F) (257 F) (239 F)

Engine coolant tem-
40 C 30 C 20 C 10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C
perature at engine
(40 F) (22 F) (4 F) (14 F) (32 F) (50 F) (68 F) (86 F) (104 F) (122 F)
starting
(CVT model) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (275 F) (266 F) (257 F) (257 F)
(MT model) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (284 F) (275 F) (266 F) (248 F) (239 F)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Estimated exhaust gas temperature Value of Map 4
GD(H4SO)-186
12LE_US.book 187

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Idle speed diagnosis

Judgment Value
Actual engine speed Target engine < 125 rpm
speed

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Actual engine speed Target engine 125 rpm
speed

Final ignition timing diagnosis
Judgment Value
Final ignition timing ignition timing dur- > Value of Map 5
ing CSERS*
*: Ignition timing during CSERS (Cold
Start Emission Reduction Strategy) =
Base ignition timing retard amount
Map 5
Engine coolant 40 C 30 C 20 C 10 C 0 C 10 C 20 C 30 C 40 C 50 C 60 C
temperature (40 F) (22 F) (4 F) (14 F) (32 F) (50 F) (68 F) (86 F) (104 F) (122 F) (140 F)
Threshold Value 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA 3.5 CA

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Final ignition timing ignition timing dur- Value of Map 5
ing CSERS*
*: Ignition timing during CSERS (Cold
Start Emission Reduction Strategy) =
Base ignition timing retard amount
GD(H4SO)-187
12LE_US.book 188

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CN:DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIMING PERFORMANCE

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P050A. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-183, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE
AIR CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-188
12LE_US.book 189

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CO:DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIRCUIT

Detect the open or short circuit of starter SW.
Judge as ON NG when the starter SW signal remains ON.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
Engine condition After engine starting
Starter OFF signal Not detected
Battery voltage 8V

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Starter OFF signal Detected
Battery voltage 8V
GD(H4SO)-189
12LE_US.book 190

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CP:DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY

DTC Item Outline of Diagnosis
Incorrect immobilizer key (Use of unregistered key in body inte-
grated unit)
P1570 Antenna Faulty antenna
Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and
ECM
IMM Circuit Failure (Except
P1572 Communication failure between body integrated unit and ECM
Antenna Circuit)
Failure of body integrated unit to verify key (transponder) ID code
or transponder failure
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM ECM malfunctioning
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM Body integrated unit malfunctioning
Reference code incompatibility between body integrated unit and
P1578 Meter Failure
combination meter
2. ENABLE CONDITION
When starting the engine.
Perform the diagnosis only after starting the engine.
Judge as NG when the conditions for the outline of the diagnosis of the top are established.
GD(H4SO)-190
12LE_US.book 191

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CQ:DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY

(RAM) ERROR
Detect the malfunction of microcomputer (RAM).
When there is a problem in the CPU normal RAM, judge as NG.
If it is possible to write data to the whole area of RAM in the initial routine, and is possible to read the same
data, it is judged as OK, and if not, NG.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None
Diagnosis with the initial routine.

Perform the diagnosis as soon as the ignition switch is turned to ON.
Judgment Value
Write the specified value into the RAM. The written value can-
not be read.

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Write the specified value into the RAM. The written value can
be read.
GD(H4SO)-191
12LE_US.book 192

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CR:DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MODULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM)

ERROR
Judge as NG when SUM value of ROM is outside the standard value.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON

Judge as NG if the criteria below are met.
Judgment Value
SUM value of ROM Standard
Time Needed for Diagnosis: Undetermined

GD(H4SO)-192
12LE_US.book 193

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CS:DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYSTEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
Judge as NG when any one of the followings is established.
(1) Monitoring IC operates abnormally. (Monitoring IC malfunction)
(2) Input amplifier circuit of throttle position sensor 1 operates abnormally. (fourfold amplifier malfunction)
(3) CPU operates abnormally. (Instruction/flow check)
(4) A/D converter operates abnormally. (ADC malfunction)
(5) EEPROM operates abnormally. (EEPROM malfunction)
(6) Output IC operates abnormally. (Output driver malfunction)
(9) (1)
(2)
(8) (7)
(12) (10)
(3)
(7)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(13) (11)
(6)
(7)
EN-08016
(1) Throttle position sensor (6) Accelerator pedal position sensor (10) CPU
2
(2) Throttle position sensor 1 (7) I/F circuit (11) Monitoring IC
(3) Throttle position sensor 2 (8) Amplifier circuit (12) EEPROM
(4) Accelerator pedal position sensor (9) Engine control module (ECM) (13) Output IC
(5) Accelerator pedal position sensor
1
GD(H4SO)-193
12LE_US.book 194

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
(1) Battery voltage 6V
(3) ETC control Permitted
(5) Starter switch OFF
(5) Battery voltage >6V
(6) Battery voltage 10.9 V

Judgment Value
(1) Monitoring IC operation The result and esti-
mated value match.
(2) | Throttle position sensor 1 opening <3
angle (Throttle position sensor 1 open-
ing angle after passing amplifier)/4 |
(3) Main CPU calculation result The result and esti-
mated value match.
(4) | Standard voltage Voltage reading | < 0.078125 V
(5) EEPROM writing Writing completed
(6) Communication with output IC Possible to communi-
cate

(1): 200 ms
(2): 24 ms
(3): 192 ms
(4): 200 ms
(5): 48 ms
(6): 2500 ms
GD(H4SO)-194
12LE_US.book 195

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CT:DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE

(BANK 1)
Judge as NG when the target opening angle and actual opening angle is mismatched or the current to motor
is the specified duty or more for specified time continuously.
(3) (1)
(4)
(2)
EN-01863
(1) Motor (3) Engine control module (ECM) (4) Drive circuit
(2) Throttle position sensor
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Normal operation of electronic throttle ON
control

Always perform the diagnosis continuously when the electronic throttle control is operating.
Judgment Value
Difference between target opening angle Within the OK range of
and actual opening angle judgment value
detail
Output duty to drive circuit < 95 %

Difference between target opening angle and actual opening angle:
NG judgment: Refer to the judgment time detail.
OK judgment: 2000 ms
Output duty to drive circuit: 2000 ms
GD(H4SO)-195
12LE_US.book 196

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Details of Judgment Value
(Y5)
Difference between
target opening angle
and
actual opening angle ( ) (NG area)
(Y4)
(Y3)
(Y1) (OK area)
(Y2)
0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4) (X5)
Target throttle opening angle ( )

EN-08017
(X1) 6.915 (X2) 11.565 (X3) 15.785

(X4) 21.285 (X5) 29.965
(Y1) 4.65 (Y2) 4.22 (Y3) 5.5

(Y4) 8.68 (Y5) 25
Judgment time detail
(Y1)
Judgment time
(milliseconds)
(Y2)
(Y3)
(Y4)
0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)
Throttle position sensor 1 opening angle ()

EN-08018
(X1) 8.049999237 (X2) 9.5 (X3) 14.5

(X4) 23.5
(Y1) 1000 ms (Y2) 400 ms (Y3) 304 ms

(Y4) 248 ms
NOTE:
Judgment time is constantly 1000 ms with Actual opening angle Target opening angle.
GD(H4SO)-196
12LE_US.book 197

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CU:DTC P0700 TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (MIL REQUEST)

Judge as NG when there is CAN communication with the TCM and there is a MIL lighting request.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
MIL lighting request from TCM Yes

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
MIL lighting request from TCM None
GD(H4SO)-197
12LE_US.book 198

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CV:DTC P0851 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (AT MODEL)

Judge the open or short circuit of the neutral SW.
Judge as NG when the ECM neutral terminal input differs from the reception data from TCM.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter relay OFF

Perform the diagnosis continuously in 2 seconds after starting the engine.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when P/ LOW (ON)
N range in TCM are OFF and when
the other switches are ON
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 100 time(s)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when P/ HIGH (OFF)
N range in TCM are OFF and when
the other switches are ON
GD(H4SO)-198
12LE_US.book 199

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CW:DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL)

Detect the open or short circuit of neutral SW.
Judge as NG when there is no change in the neutral SW even if the driving shift was applied. (There is neutral
SW ON/OFF inversion from the vehicle speed and engine speed.)
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter relay OFF

Judge NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed determined times or more after the neutral SW
change.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing LOW (ON) continues.
from a to b below)
Driving condition change From a) to b)
a) Engine speed 550 rpm 900 rpm &
Vehicle speed = 0 km/h (0 MPH)
b) Engine speed 1600 rpm 2550 rpm
& Vehicle speed 64 km/h (39.8 MPH)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear NG when there is change in the neutral SW.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing Changes to HIGH
from a to b below) (OFF).
GD(H4SO)-199
12LE_US.book 200

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CX:DTC P0852 PARK/NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (AT MODEL)

Judge the open or short circuit of the neutral SW.
Judge as NG when the ECM neutral terminal input differs from the reception data from TCM.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter relay OFF

Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when P/ HIGH (OFF)
N range in TCM are ON and when the
other switches are OFF

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal in ECM when P/ LOW (ON)
N range in TCM are ON and when the
other switches are OFF
GD(H4SO)-200
12LE_US.book 201

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CY:DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL)

Detect the open or short circuit of neutral SW.
Judge as NG when there is no change in the neutral SW even if the driving shift was applied. (There is neutral
SW ON/OFF inversion from the vehicle speed and engine speed.)
2. ENABLE CONDITION
Starter relay OFF

Judge NG when the malfunction criteria below are completed determined times or more after the neutral SW
change.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing HIGH (OFF) contin-
from a to b below) ues.

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK and clear NG when there is change in the neutral SW.
Judgment Value
Neutral switch signal (while changing Changes to LOW
from a to b below) (ON).
GD(H4SO)-201
12LE_US.book 202

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
CZ:DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
Detect that value remains low.
Judge as NG when lambda value is abnormal in accordance with value of front oxygen (A/F) sensor and
running conditions such as vehicle speed, amount of intake air, engine coolant temperature, sub feedback
control, etc.
value = Actual air fuel ratio/Theoretical
air fuel ratio
> 1: Lean
< 1: Rich
(1) (1) (A)
(2) (C) (B) (D)
EN-09361

(D) Rich
GD(H4SO)-202
12LE_US.book 203

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Time needed for all secondary parameters to be in enable 4096 ms
conditions
Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution
Rear oxygen sensor output voltage Feedback target voltage 0.2 V 0.1 V
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Min.
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Max.
Load change at 180 CA < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Targeted lambda value load compensation coefficient 0.03 0.000

Perform diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 20 km/h (12.4 MPH) or more after 60000 ms have
passed since the engine started.
Judgment Value
value < 0.85

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
value 0.85
GD(H4SO)-203
12LE_US.book 204

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DA:DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1

SENSOR1)
Detect that value remains high.
Judge as NG when lambda value is abnormal in accordance with value of front oxygen (A/F) sensor and
running conditions such as vehicle speed, amount of intake air, engine coolant temperature, sub feedback
control, etc.
value = Actual air fuel ratio/Theoretical
air fuel ratio
> 1: Lean
< 1: Rich
(1) (1) (A)
(2) (C) (B) (D)
EN-09361

(D) Rich
GD(H4SO)-204
12LE_US.book 205

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Time needed for all secondary parameters to be in enable 4096 ms
conditions
Rear oxygen sensor sub feedback Execution
Rear oxygen sensor output voltage Feedback target voltage 0.2 V 0.1 V
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Min.
or rear oxygen sensor sub feedback compensation coefficient On Max.
Load change at 180 CA < 0.02 g/rev (0 oz/rev)
Targeted lambda value load compensation coefficient 0.03 0.000

Perform diagnosis continuously at a constant speed of 20 km/h (12.4 MPH) or more after 60000 ms have
passed since the engine started.
Judgment Value
value > 1.15

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
value 1.15
GD(H4SO)-205
12LE_US.book 206

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DB:DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE

Judge as NG when the valve is opened more than the default opening angle, but does not move to the close
direction with the motor power stopped.
(1) (8)
S S
(3) (7)
(6)
(2)
(4) (5)
EN-01866
(1) Opener spring (4) Full closed stopper (7) DC motor

(2) Return spring (5) Throttle valve (8) Main and sub throttle sensor
(3) Intermediate stopper (6) Gear
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Motor continuity OFF

Ignition switch ON OFF
Ignition switch OFF ON (Only after clearing memory)
Judgment Value
Opening variation after continuity is set 2
to OFF

GD(H4SO)-206
12LE_US.book 207

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DC:DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM

Detect the abnormal function (stuck closed) of the drain valve.
Judge as NG when fuel tank pressure is low.
(19) (14) (15) (16) (8) (7) (4) (5) (6) (19) (18)
(9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (17) (2) (1) (3)

EN-02294
(1) Bobbin (8) Magnetic plate (14) Retainer

(2) Coil (9) Shaft (15) Diaphragm
(3) Diode (10) Plate (16) Movable core
(4) Stator core (11) Valve (17) Spring
(5) End plate (12) Housing (18) Cover
(6) Body (13) Filter (19) O-ring
(7) Yoke
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Drain valve Open
22.2 inHg)
Tank pressure when starter is OFF 0.7 kPa (5 mmHg,
ON 0.2 inHg)
and
0.4 kPa (2.9 mmHg,
0.1 inHg)

GD(H4SO)-207
12LE_US.book 208

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure 4 kPa (30 mmHg, 1.2
inHg)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Fuel tank pressure > 4 kPa (30 mmHg, 1.2
inHg)
Cumulative time when all the malfunction 30000 s
criteria below are met.
Purge control solenoid valve duty Not = 0
Fuel temperature 10 C (14 F) 70 C
(158 F)
Intake manifold relative pressure 26.7 kPa ( 200
mmHg, 7.9 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-208
12LE_US.book 209

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DD:DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
Detects open or short circuit of EGR.
(5)
(1)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(4)
EN-02051
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Detecting circuit (5) Battery voltage
(2) Computer unit (CPU) (4) Switch circuit (6) Main relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
EGR valve target position > 0 step

Perform diagnosis continuously during EGR operation.
GD(H4SO)-209
12LE_US.book 210

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM out- Low level
puts OFF signal
or
Terminal voltage level when EGR oper- Low level
ates

Malfunction Indicator Light: Illuminates as soon as a malfunction occurs.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM out- High level
puts OFF signal
Terminal voltage level when EGR oper- High level
ates
GD(H4SO)-210
12LE_US.book 211

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DE:DTC P1493 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(HIGH INPUT)
Detects open or short circuit of EGR.
(5)
(1)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(4)
EN-02051
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Detecting circuit (5) Battery voltage
(2) Computer unit (CPU) (4) Switch circuit (6) Main relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
EGR valve target position > 0 step

GD(H4SO)-211
12LE_US.book 212

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM out- High level
puts ON signal
or
Terminal voltage level when EGR oper- High level
ates

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Terminal voltage level when ECM out- Low level
puts ON signal
Terminal voltage level when EGR oper- Low level
ates
GD(H4SO)-212
12LE_US.book 213

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DF:DTC P1494 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P1492. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-209, DTC P1492 EGR SOLENOID
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (LOW INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Cri-
teria.>
DG:DTC P1495 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #2 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
VALVE SIGNAL #1 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION (HIGH INPUT), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
DH:DTC P1496 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
teria.>
DI: DTC P1497 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #3 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
Criteria.>
DJ:DTC P1498 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(LOW INPUT)
NOTE:
teria.>
DK:DTC P1499 EGR SOLENOID VALVE SIGNAL #4 CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
(HIGH INPUT)
NOTE:
Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-213
12LE_US.book 214

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DL:DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

Detect the open or short circuit of starter SW.
Judge as OFF NG when it becomes after engine start despite no starter ON experience.
None

Judge as OFF NG when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Starter ON signal Not detected
Engine condition Change from pre-start
to post-start
Battery voltage 8V

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judge as OFF OK and clear the NG if the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
Starter ON Experienced
Starter ON diagnosis No diagnosis experi-
ence
Battery voltage 8V
GD(H4SO)-214
12LE_US.book 215

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DM:DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION

Detect the open/short circuit of back-up power supply circuit.
Judge as NG when the backup power voltage is low.
2. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value
Voltage of back-up power supply Low

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Voltage of back-up power supply High
GD(H4SO)-215
12LE_US.book 216

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DN:DTC P1570 ANTENNA

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC P0513. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-190, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMO-
BILIZER KEY, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
DO:DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY
NOTE:
DP:DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT ANTENNA CIRCUIT)
NOTE:
DQ:DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE
NOTE:
DR:DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM
NOTE:
DS:DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM
NOTE:
DT:DTC P1578 METER FAILURE
NOTE:
GD(H4SO)-216
12LE_US.book 217

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DU:DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
Detect the malfunction of fuel system from the size of the sub feedback learning value.
Control the sub feedback learning and judge as NG when the learning value is in the lean zone.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Conditions for carrying out the sub feed- Completed
back learning
Continuous time when all conditions are 1s
established.

Perform the diagnosis continuously when the vehicle is idling or running at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more.
GD(H4SO)-217
12LE_US.book 218

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value < 0.032

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value 0.032 + 0
GD(H4SO)-218
12LE_US.book 219

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DV:DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)
Detect the malfunction of fuel system from the size of the sub feedback learning value.
Sub feedback learning is being performed. When the learning value goes to the rich side, judge as NG.
(E)
(3)
V (1)
(A) (F)
(2) (2)
(C) (B) (D)
EN-01696

3. ENABLE CONDITION
Conditions for carrying out the sub feed- Completed
back learning
Continuous time when all conditions are 1s
established.

Perform the diagnosis continuously when the vehicle is idling or running at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more.
GD(H4SO)-219
12LE_US.book 220

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value 0.032 (PZEV model)
0.02 (except for
PZEV model)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Sub feedback learning value < 0.032 + 0 (PZEV
model)
< 0.02 + 0 (except for
PZEV model)
GD(H4SO)-220
12LE_US.book 221

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DW:DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/

PERFORMANCE
Judge as NG when the motor current becomes large or drive circuit is heated.
12V 12V
(1)
(6)
(2) (3)
(4) (7)
(2) (5)
EN-01867
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (4) Drive circuit (6) Electronic throttle control relay
(2) Detecting circuit (5) Temperature detection circuit (7) Motor
(3) Overcurrent detection circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Under control of electronic throttle con- ON
trol

GD(H4SO)-221
12LE_US.book 222

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Motor current 8A
Drive circuit inner temperature 175C (347F)

500 ms (NG judgment)
2000 ms (OK judgment)
GD(H4SO)-222
12LE_US.book 223

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DX:DTC P2102 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW

Judge as NG when the electronic throttle control power is not supplied even when ECM sets the electronic
throttle control relay to ON.
12V 12V
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3) (5)
EN-01868
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Drive circuit (5) Motor
(2) Voltage detection circuit (4) Electronic throttle control relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Electronic throttle control relay output ON

Judgment Value
Motor power voltage 5V

GD(H4SO)-223
12LE_US.book 224

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DY:DTC P2103 THROTTLE ACTUATOR CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH

Judge as NG when the electronic throttle control power is supplied even when ECM sets the electronic throt-
tle control relay to OFF.
12V 12V
(1)
(4)
(2)
(3) (5)
EN-01868
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Drive circuit (5) Motor
(2) Voltage detection circuit (4) Electronic throttle control relay
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Electronic throttle control relay output OFF

When ignition switch ON OFF
Ignition switch OFF ON (Only after clearing memory)
Judgment Value
Motor power voltage 5V

GD(H4SO)-224
12LE_US.book 225

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
DZ:DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR A MINIMUM STOP

PERFORMANCE
Judge as NG when full close point learning cannot conducted or abnormal value is detected.
(1) (3)
(2)
(4)
EN-01869
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Motor (4) Throttle position sensor
(2) Drive circuit
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON OFF
Ignition switch (only after clear memory) OFF ON

Perform the diagnosis at full closed point learning.
Judgment Value
Throttle sensor opening angle at full 10.127 or more,
close point learning 19.872 or less
Throttle opening angle when the ignition 1.683
switch is ON Throttle minimum stop
position
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 8 80 ms

GD(H4SO)-225
12LE_US.book 226

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EA:DTC P2122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
Detect the open or short circuit of accelerator pedal position sensor 1.
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Accelerator pedal position sensor (4) Accelerator pedal position sensor
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-226
12LE_US.book 227

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-227
12LE_US.book 228

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EB:DTC P2123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-228
12LE_US.book 229

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-229
12LE_US.book 230

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EC:DTC P2127 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT

LOW INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-230
12LE_US.book 231

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-231
12LE_US.book 232

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
ED:DTC P2128 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT

HIGH INPUT
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-232
12LE_US.book 233

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-233
12LE_US.book 234

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EE:DTC P2135 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH A/B VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
Judge as NG when the signal level of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2.
(3)
(4)
(1)
(2)
EN-01859
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-234
12LE_US.book 235

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the NG range of
judgment value
detail
(Y5) (NG area)
(Y4)
Sensor output (Y3)

difference ()
(Y2)
(Y1) (OK area)
0
0
(X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)
Throttle position sensor 1 opening angle ()

EN-08032
(X1) 2.125 (X2) 4.25 (X3) 9

(X4) 31.625
(Y1) 5.15 (Y2) 6.15 (Y3) 8.28

(Y4) 10.4 (Y5) 12.4

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the OK range of
judgment value
detail
GD(H4SO)-235
12LE_US.book 236

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EF:DTC P2138 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH D/E VOLT-

AGE CORRELATION
Judge as NG when the signal level of throttle position sensor 1 is different from the throttle position sensor 2.
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
EN-01861
2 signal
1 signal
3. ENABLE CONDITION
Ignition switch ON
Battery voltage 6V

GD(H4SO)-236
12LE_US.book 237

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the NG range of
judgment value
detail
(Y5)
(Y4) (NG area)
Sensor output
(Y3)
difference ()
(Y2)
(Y1)
(OK area)
0
0 (X1) (X2) (X3) (X4)
Accelerator pedal position sensor 1 opening angle ()
EN-08033
(X1) 0.6 (X2) 1.2 (X3) 2

(X4) 4
(Y1) 1.465 (Y2) 1.597 (Y3) 1.663

(Y4) 2.455 (Y5) 3.116

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Signal difference between two sensors Within the OK range of
judgment value
detail
GD(H4SO)-237
12LE_US.book 238

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EG:DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE

Detect the malfunction of barometric pressure sensor output property.
Judge as NG when the barometric pressure sensor output is largely different from the intake manifold pres-
sure at engine start.
The barometric pressure sensor is built into the ECM.
3. ENABLE CONDITION

Perform the diagnosis once at ignition switch ON.
Judgment Value
|Barometric pressure Intake manifold 26.7 kPa (200
pressure| mmHg, 7.9 inHg)
|Intake manifold pressure at engine start < 1.3 kPa (9.99
Intake manifold pressure| mmHg, 0.4 inHg)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
|Barometric pressure Intake manifold < 26.7 kPa (200
pressure| mmHg, 7.9 inHg)
GD(H4SO)-238
12LE_US.book 239

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EH:DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW

Detect the open/short circuit of the barometric pressure sensor.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-239
12LE_US.book 240

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EI: DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH

Detect the open/short circuit of the barometric pressure sensor.
3. ENABLE CONDITION
None

Judgment Value

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
GD(H4SO)-240
12LE_US.book 241

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EJ:DTC P2610 ECM/PCM INTERNAL ENGINE OFF TIMER PERFORMANCE

Detect malfunction of soaking timer IC by the five diagnoses below.
Monitor Number Explanation Time required for diagnosis
Monitor #1
Perform diagnosis of the soaking timer IC accuracy 196 ms
<Timer diagnosis>
Monitor #2 Perform diagnosis of the soaking timer IC counter
4000 ms
<Full count diagnosis> function
Monitor #3 Perform diagnosis of communication between ECM
196 ms
<Soaking timer IC setting diagnosis> and soaking timer IC
Monitor #4 Perform diagnosis of the soaking timer IC accuracy
3000 ms
<Timer diagnosis (during soaking)> during soaking
Monitor #5
Perform diagnosis of wake-up function 64 ms
<Wake-up diagnosis>
more than 10 min soak:more than 3 h
ignition swich
main relay
driving cycle
ECM counter
1h
Soak Timer IC counter
Monitoring #4
Monitoring #1 Monitoring #5
Monitoring #2 Monitoring #3
EN-09090
The soaking timer IC is built into the ECM.
GD(H4SO)-241
12LE_US.book 242

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
<Timer diagnosis>
Ignition switch OFF
Elapsed time after starting the engine > 600 s
< Full count diagnosis & soaking timer IC setting diagnosis>
Ignition switch OFF
<Timer diagnosis (during soaking)>
Ignition switch OFF
Number of wake-up < 2 time(s)
<Wake-up diagnosis>
Ignition switch ON
Wake-up activation time setting Completed
Time in the soaking timer IC > 3600 s 2 time(s)

Perform the diagnosis only once when 10 minutes have passed after the engine start and the ignition switch
is OFF, and also when the ignition switch is ON after the soaking of five hours or more.
GD(H4SO)-242
12LE_US.book 243

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
<Timer diagnosis>
Start the count up operation of counters in ECM and in soaking timer IC when the engine is started.
Judge as timer malfunction if the difference between the counter in ECM and counter in soaking timer IC ex-
ceeds the allowable limit when the ignition switch is OFF.
Timer Monitoring
ignition swich
main relay
driving cycle
ECM counter
Malfunction
OK
Malfunction
EN-08952
Judgment Value
|osoaktimcpu osoaktimic| / osoaktim- > 0.24
cpu
osoaktimcpu = Counter in ECM

osoaktimic = Counter in soaking timer IC
Normality Judgment
Judge as OK when the following conditions are established.
Judgment Value
|osoaktimcpu osoaktimic| / osoaktim- 0.24
cpu
GD(H4SO)-243
12LE_US.book 244

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
<Full count diagnosis>

After the timer diagnosis is completed, reset the counter in soaking timer IC and start the count up operation.
Judge as full count diagnosis malfunction if counter in soaking timer IC is not $3FF (1023 count) after 4 sec-
onds.
Counter Monitoring
ignition swich
main relay
driving cycle
4 sec
ECM counter
OK
Malfunction
EN-08953
Judgment Value
osoakfcntic $3FF (1023 count)
osoakfcntic = Counter in soaking timer

IC
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
osoakfcntic = $3FF (1023 count)
GD(H4SO)-244
12LE_US.book 245

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
<Soaking timer IC setting diagnosis>

When setting the activation setting time to soaking timer IC, compare the writing value to soaking timer IC
with read out value. Judge as malfunction if the values do not match 3 times in a row.
Soak Timer IC Monitoring
ignition swich
main relay
driving cycle
ECM counter
Malfunction
number of retrying
the Soak Timer
IC setting
OK
EN-09338
Judgment Value
Writing value and read out value when Unmatch
setting the soaking timer
Number of retrying the soaking timer set- 3 times
ting
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Writing value and read out value when Match
setting the soaking timer
GD(H4SO)-245
12LE_US.book 246

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
<Timer diagnosis (during soaking)>

Wake-up at the predetermined interval until five hours have passed after the ignition switch is OFF, and com-
pare the counter in soaking timer IC with the counter in ECM.
Judge as malfunction if the counter in soaking timer IC is counted up to maximum value (1023 count) when
the counter in ECM is 1637 ms, or if the counter in soaking timer IC is not counted up to maximum value
(1023 count) when the counter in ECM is 2455 ms.
Wake up period Wake up period

(3 sec) (10 30 min)
ignition switch
main relay
ECM counter
5 hours
Wake up
Soak Timer IC counter 1 hour
Evaporative leak diagnosis

Timer diagnostic during soak
Condition for monitoring

Malfunction $3FF (1023count)
OK
Malfunction
$000 (0count)
ECM counter
0 sec 1.637 sec 2.455 sec
EN-08981
GD(H4SO)-246
12LE_US.book 247

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
When any one of the followings is established.
lished.
Counter in ECM 1637 ms
Counter in soaking timer IC = $3FF (1023 count)
lished.
Counter in soaking timer IC $3FF (1023 count)
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Following conditions are established.
lished.
Counter in soaking timer IC $3FF (1023 count)
lished.
Counter in soaking timer IC = $3FF (1023 count)
<Wake-up diagnosis>
Store the number of wake-up activation when the ECM wakes up by the soaking timer IC.
GD(H4SO)-247
12LE_US.book 248

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Next time when the ignition switch is ON, if the number of wake-up activation does not reach the predeter-
mined value even though the counter in soaking timer IC exceeds the activation setting time, judge as wake-
up malfunction.
ignition swich
main relay
driving cycle
ECM counter
OK
number of
wake-up
Malfunction
EN-09339
Judgment Value
Number of wake-up < 2 time(s)
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Number of wake-up 2 time(s)
GD(H4SO)-248
12LE_US.book 249

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
Driving cycle Completed
When any one of the followings is estab-
lished.
Timer diagnosis NG
Full count diagnosis NG
Soaking timer IC setting diagnosis NG
Timer diagnosis (during soaking) NG
Wake-up diagnosis NG
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 18620 s (Approx. 5 hours)

cles.
Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Ignition switch ON
Driving cycle Completed
lished.
Timer diagnosis OK
Full count diagnosis OK
Soaking timer IC setting diagnosis OK
Timer diagnosis (during soaking) OK
Wake-up diagnosis OK
Time Needed for Diagnosis: 18620 s (Approx. 5 hours)
GD(H4SO)-249
12LE_US.book 250

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EK:DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS OFF DETECTION

Detect malfunction of CAN communication.
Judge as NG when CAN communication failure has occurred.
(Common Specifications)
CAN Protocol 2.0 B (Active)
Frame Format: 11 Bit ID Frame (Standard Frame)
Conforms to ISO11898
Communication Speed: 500 kbps
None

Judgment Value
Starter switch OFF
Engine run
bus off flag or error warning flag set (error)

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Engine run
bus off flag or error warning flag clear (No error)
GD(H4SO)-250
12LE_US.book 251

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EL:DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT LOADED

Judge as NG when CAN communication failure has occurred between TCM, VDC CM and body integrated
unit.
None

Judgment Value
Starter switch OFF
Engine run
ID received from control module con- None during 500 milli-
nected to CAN seconds

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Engine run
ID received from control module con- Yes
nected to CAN
GD(H4SO)-251
12LE_US.book 252

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EM:DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT LOADED

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0101. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-251, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA
NOT LOADED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
EN:DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT LOADED
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0101. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-251, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA
NOT LOADED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-252
12LE_US.book 253

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EO:DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNORMAL

Judge as NG when data received from TCM, VDC CM and body integrated unit is not normal.
None

Judgment Value
Starter switch OFF
Engine run
Data updated from control module con- None during 2000 mil-
nected to CAN liseconds

Normality Judgment
Judgment Value
Engine run
Data updated from control module con- Yes
nected to CAN
GD(H4SO)-253
12LE_US.book 254

GENERAL DESCRIPTION
EP:DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNORMAL

NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0402. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-253, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA AB-
NORMAL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
EQ:DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNORMAL
NOTE:
For the detection standard, refer to DTC U0402. <Ref. to GD(H4SO)-253, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA AB-
NORMAL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
GD(H4SO)-254
12LE_US.book 1
2012 LEGACY SERVICE MANUAL QUICK REFERENCE INDEX
ENGINE 2 SECTION
FUEL INJECTION (FUEL SYSTEMS) FU(H4DOTC)
EMISSION CONTROL
EC(H4DOTC)
(AUX. EMISSION CONTROL DEVICES)
INTAKE (INDUCTION) IN(H4DOTC)
MECHANICAL ME(H4DOTC)
This service manual has been prepared
to provide SUBARU service personnel
with the necessary information and data EXHAUST EX(H4DOTC)
for the correct maintenance and repair
of SUBARU vehicles.
COOLING CO(H4DOTC)
This manual includes the procedures
for maintenance, disassembling, reas-
sembling, inspection and adjustment of LUBRICATION LU(H4DOTC)
components and diagnostics for guid-
ance of experienced mechanics.
Please peruse and utilize this manual SPEED CONTROL SYSTEMS SP(H4DOTC)
fully to ensure complete repair work for
satisfying our customers by keeping
their vehicle in optimum condition. IGNITION IG(H4DOTC)
When replacement of parts during
repair work is needed, be sure to use
SUBARU genuine parts. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEMS SC(H4DOTC)
EN(H4DOTC)
(diag)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION GD(H4DOTC)
All information, illustration and specifi-

cations contained in this manual are
based on the latest product information
available at the time of publication
approval.
FUJI HEAVY INDUSTRIES LTD. G2480BE3

12LE_US.book 1
FU(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Throttle Body ............................................................................................15
3. Intake Manifold .........................................................................................18
4. Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor .......................................................34
5. Crankshaft Position Sensor ......................................................................35
6. Camshaft Position Sensor ........................................................................37
7. Knock Sensor ...........................................................................................39
8. Throttle Position Sensor ...........................................................................41
9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor .................................42
10. Manifold Absolute Pressure Sensor .........................................................43
11. Fuel Injector .............................................................................................45
12. Tumble Generator Valve Assembly .........................................................48
13. Tumble Generator Valve Actuator ............................................................49
14. Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve ...............................................................50
15. Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve ..........................................................52
16. Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor ......................................................................54
17. Rear Oxygen Sensor ................................................................................56
18. Engine Control Module (ECM) .................................................................58
19. Main Relay ...............................................................................................59
20. Fuel Pump Relay ......................................................................................61
21. Electronic Throttle Control Relay .............................................................63
22. Fuel Pump Control Unit ............................................................................65
23. Fuel ..........................................................................................................66
24. Fuel Tank .................................................................................................68
25. Fuel Filler Pipe .........................................................................................75
26. Fuel Pump ................................................................................................79
29. Fuel Filter .................................................................................................85
30. Fuel Damper ............................................................................................87
31. Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines ...........................................88
32. Fuel System Trouble in General ..............................................................94
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Capacity 70 2 (18.5 US gal, 15.4 Imp gal)
Fuel tank
Install locations Under rear seat
Type Impeller
Shutoff discharge pressure 850 kPa (8.67 kgf/cm2, 123.3 psi) or less
Fuel pump
175 2 (46.2 US gal, 38.5 Imp gal)/h or more.
Discharge rate
[12 V at 300 kPa (3.06 kgf/cm2, 43.5 psi)]
Fuel filter In-tank type
FU(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
B: COMPONENT
1. INTAKE MANIFOLD 1
(40) T5
T7 A
(2)
(41) T2
T4 (4)
T6 T2 (3)
(1)
(12) T7 (5) (3)
(14) (6)
(8)
(13)
C G
C T4 (7) (8)
F
H (15)
T8 (11) D (8)
E B
(20)
(16) (21) T1 (23) (9)
(17) (11)
(24) (10)
T4
(18) T1
(22) T4
T1
(19) D I
T8 H
E
(23) (24) F
T4 A (23) (26)
(27) I
T8
T1
(23)
(34) T4
(25) (24)
T8 (30) (31) T9
T1
(35) (32) G
(33) (27)
T4 (23)
(31) (28)
(29) (23) (30)
(32) T1
B T9
(33) (36) (31)
T8 T8
T3
(32)
(33) T8
(37)
(39)
(36)
(38)
(37) T8 T8
(38)
FU-06365
FU(H4DOTC)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
(1) Intake manifold (19) Vacuum hose D (37) Gasket

(2) Vacuum control hose (20) Purge control solenoid valve 2 (38) Knock pin
(3) Clamp (21) Vacuum hose E (39) Intake manifold protector LH
(4) Intake duct (22) Vacuum hose F (40) Nipple
(5) Throttle body (23) Clamp (41) O-ring
(6) O-ring (24) Fuel hose A
(7) Preheater hose A (25) Fuel delivery pipe Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(8) Clip (26) Fuel hose B T1: 1.25 (0.1, 0.9)
(9) Preheater hose B (27) Fuel pipe T2: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
(10) Pressure regulator vacuum hose (28) O-ring T3: 3.45 (0.4, 2.5)
(11) O-ring (29) Pressure regulator T4: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(12) Purge control solenoid valve 1 (30) O-ring T5: 7.8 (0.8, 5.8)
(13) Vacuum hose A (31) Grommet T6: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(14) Vacuum hose B (32) Fuel injector T7: 8.3 (0.8, 6.1)
(15) Solenoid valve bracket (33) Seal ring T8: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
(16) Manifold absolute pressure sensor (34) PCV pipe T9: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(17) Vacuum hose C (35) Intake manifold protector RH
(18) Filter (36) Tumble generator valve ASSY
FU(H4DOTC)-4
12LE_US.book 5
General Description
2. INTAKE MANIFOLD 2
(1)
(2) T1
T2
(4)
(7)
(3)
(5) T1 (7)
(8)
(10)
(11)
(6)
(10) (9)
(5)
FU-06366
(1) Intake manifold (6) Clip (11) Brake booster vacuum hose
(2) Engine harness (7) Clip
(3) Vacuum hose A (8) Vacuum hose B Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) PCV pipe (9) Vacuum hose C T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(5) Clip (10) Clip T2: 19 (1.9, 14.0)
FU(H4DOTC)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
3. CRANKSHAFT POSITION, CAMSHAFT POSITION AND KNOCK SENSORS
(4) T1
T2
T1
T1
(3)
(1) (2)
(6)
T1
(5)
T1
(7)
T1
T1 T1
FU-04844
(1) Crankshaft position sensor (5) Exhaust camshaft position sensor Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
LH
(2) Knock sensor (6) Exhaust camshaft position sensor T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
RH
(3) Intake camshaft position sensor (7) Engine harness cover T2: 24 (2.4, 17.7)
LH
(4) Intake camshaft position sensor
RH
FU(H4DOTC)-6
12LE_US.book 7
General Description
4. FUEL TANK
(23)
T1
(8)
T1
T1
A
(7)
(14)
B C
(9) (24) (24)
(12)
(25)
(25)
(10)
(1)
(25) D (11)
(27)
(25)
(26)
(24)
(15)
(13)
T4
(2)
C
(25)
(3) B
T4 (16)
(16)
(17) T4
(16) (6)
(16)
A
T3 D
T3
(4)
T3
(18)
(19)
(20) (5) (16)
(28)
(21) (22)
T2 (22)
T3 T2
(22) (22)
T2 T3
T2
FU-06367
FU(H4DOTC)-7
12LE_US.book 8
General Description
(1) Fuel tank (13) Fuel sub level sensor gasket (25) Cushion
(2) Fuel tank band RH (14) Fuel sub level sensor protector (26) Cushion
(3) Fuel tank band LH (15) Fuel sub level sensor filter (27) Cushion
(4) Fuel delivery tube (16) Retainer (28) Tube clamp
(5) Fuel return tube (17) Stopper
(6) Fuel sub delivery tube (18) Heat shield cover Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Fuel pump assembly (19) Fuel tank protector RH T1: 4.4 (0.4, 3.2)
(8) Fuel pump upper plate (20) Fuel tank protector LH T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(9) Fuel pump gasket (21) Clip T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(10) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (22) Self-locking nut T4: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
cushion
(11) Fuel sub level sensor (23) Rubber cap
(12) Fuel sub level sensor upper plate (24) Cushion
FU(H4DOTC)-8
12LE_US.book 9
General Description
5. FUEL LINE
(25)
(58)
(26)
T4 (21) (23)
(38) (57) G
F
(56)
(42) (59) F
(31) T3 (22)
(37) (21)
H (55)
(40) I
(40) (33) (24)
(39) (44) (40) D
(40) F
(41) (40) (30) (31) (27)
(36) (28) T6
(40) (35)
E
(59) I
(54) G
T2 (40) (21)
(34) (29) D F
(32)
(31) (27)
T4 H
(19) (17) (21)
E F
(17) (49)
(18)
(20)
(17) (43)
(1)
C
(17) (16)
(15)
(5)
(1) (52)
T1 (7) C
(10) (1)
T1
(14)
(12) (1) (53)
(12)
(51)
(1) (6) (4) A
(5) (45)
B (46) (50)
(13)
(2)
(3)
(47) (48)
(12)
(9) T1
(12)
A
T1
B (47)
(8)
T5 (11)
FU-06368
FU(H4DOTC)-9
12LE_US.book 10
General Description
(1) Clip (24) Canister (47) Pipe clamp

(2) Fuel return hose A (25) Canister protector (48) Pipe clamp
(3) Fuel return hose B (26) Drain tube ASSY (49) Clip
(4) Evaporation hose (27) Connector (50) Pipe clamp
(5) Connect check cover (28) PCV drain hose (51) Pipe clamp
(6) Fuel delivery hose A (29) PCV outlet hose (52) Fuel pipe rear grommet
(7) Fuel delivery hose B (30) Pressure control solenoid valve (53) Pipe clamp
(8) Fuel damper holder (31) Clip (54) Hose clamp
(9) Fuel damper (32) Pressure control solenoid valve (55) Tube clamp
ASSY
(10) Fuel damper (33) PCV inlet hose (56) Tube clamp
(11) Fuel damper bracket (34) Clamp (57) Tube clamp
(12) Clamp (35) Fuel filler hose (58) Tube clamp
(13) Fuel pipe ASSY (36) Charge hose (59) Clip
(14) Purge hose A (37) Circulate hose
(15) Purge pipe (38) Circulate tube Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(16) Air vent hose A (39) Pressure hose T1: 1.25 (0.1, 0.9)
(17) Clip (40) Clip T2: 2.0 (0.2, 1.5)
(18) Connector (41) Vacuum hose T3: 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
(19) Air vent hose B (42) Fuel tank pressure sensor T4: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(20) Connector (43) Purge hose B T5: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(21) Canister tube ASSY (44) Clamp T6: 8 (0.8, 5.9)
(22) Drain valve (45) Bushing
(23) Drain filter (46) Fuel pipe front grommet
* It can be reused if the quick connector side is disconnected.
FU(H4DOTC)-10
12LE_US.book 11
General Description
6. FUEL FILLER PIPE

(3)
(1) (10)
(2) T2
(4)
(11)
(12)
(5)
(11)
(14) (6)
(15) T4
(13)
A
T4
(14)
(16) (7)
A
(18)
(17) T4
(8) T3
T1 T4
(8)
B
B
(9)
(19)
T4
FU-06369
(1) Fuel filler cap (10) Shut valve (19) Grommet

(2) Fuel filler pipe protector (11) Clip
(3) Clip (12) Evaporation hose A Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Neck holder A (13) Evaporation pipe A T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Neck holder B (14) Clip T2: 4.5 (0.5, 3.3)
(6) Fuel filler pipe (15) Evaporation hose B T3: 7.35 (0.7, 5.4)
(7) Fuel filler pipe bracket A (16) Grommet T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(8) Fuel filler pipe bracket B (17) Evaporation pipe B
(9) Fuel filler pipe bracket C (18) Evaporation pipe protector
FU(H4DOTC)-11
12LE_US.book 12
General Description
7. FUEL PUMP
(1)
(3)
B
A
(4)
(2)
(5) (2)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(10)
(9)
FU-05589
(1) Fuel filter ASSY (5) Fuel pump (9) Fuel level sensor
(2) Pump module spring (6) Support rubber cushion (10) Fuel temperature sensor
(3) Fuel pump harness (7) Fuel pump holder
(4) Gasket spacer (8) Fuel chamber ASSY
FU(H4DOTC)-12
12LE_US.book 13
General Description
C: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scattering of fuels when performing work where fuels can be
spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe it off immediately to prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing out for envi-
ronmental protection.
Follow all government and local regulations concerning disposal of refuse when disposing fuel.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
18371AA000 CONNECTOR Used for disconnecting the quick connector on
REMOVER the fuel return hose side of the engine compart-
ment (intake manifold).
ST18371AA000
18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for draining fuel.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
TOR RELEASE
ST42099AE000
FU(H4DOTC)-13
12LE_US.book 14
General Description

1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for draining fuel and each inspection.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Oscilloscope Used for inspecting the waveform of each sensor.
Sensor socket Used for removing and installing the front oxygen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sen-
sor.
FU(H4DOTC)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Throttle Body
2. Throttle Body 8) Disconnect the connector from the throttle posi-

tion sensor, and disconnect the preheater hose
A: REMOVAL from the throttle body.
FU-04953
9) Remove the bolts which secure the throttle body

IG-02107 to the intake manifold and remove the throttle body.
qt) of coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14, DRAIN-
ING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
7) Remove the bolts which secure the engine har- FU-06370
ness and PCV pipe to the intake manifold, and re-
move the intake duct from the throttle body.
FU-04952
FU(H4DOTC)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Throttle Body
Install in the reverse order of removal. 1. THROTTLE SENSOR INSPECTION
NOTE: (METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER)
Use new O-rings. 1) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI-
When installing the intake duct to the throttle 66, REMOVAL, Glove Box.>
body, align the protrusion (a) on the intake duct to 2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF)
the installation position mark (b) on the throttle 3) Check the voltage between ECM connector ter-
body to install. minals.
(b)
(a)
FU-04706 FU-04956
Tightening torque: (A)

8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28
V
FU-04049
FU-04954 (A) To ECM connector
Tightening torque: Throttle Accelerator

T1: 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb) Terminal No. Standard
sensor pedal
T2: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) Not
depressed Approx. 0.6 V
T1 Main (Full closed) 18 (+) and 29 ()
T2 Depressed
Approx. 4.04 V
(Full opened)
Not
depressed Approx. 1.48 V
Sub (Full closed) 28 (+) and 29 ()
Depressed
Approx. 4.23 V
(Full opened)
FU-04955
FU(H4DOTC)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Throttle Body
2. THROTTLE SENSOR INSPECTION

(METHOD WITH SUBARU SELECT MONI-
TOR)
2) Read the throttle opening angle signal and volt-
age of throttle sensor using Subaru Select Monitor.
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, READ CURRENT
TION, Subaru Select Monitor.>
Throttle opening
Throttle sensor Standard
angle signal
0.0% Approx. 0.6 V
Main
100.0% Approx. 4.04 V
0.0% Approx. 1.48 V
Sub
100.0% Approx. 4.23 V
1) Check that the throttle body has no deformation,
2) Check that the preheater hose has no cracks,
FU(H4DOTC)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Intake Manifold
3. Intake Manifold 10) Disconnect the connectors from wastegate

control solenoid valve, and remove the clip (A)
A: REMOVAL which secure the engine harness.
1) Remove the collector cover. (A)
AC-24, PROCEDURE, Refrigerant Recovery Pro-
cedure.>
3) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES-
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
FU-04709

12) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.>
14) Disconnect the A/C pressure hoses from A/C
compressor. <Ref. to AC-76, REMOVAL, Hose and
IG-02107 Pipe.>
5) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler 15) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose.
cap.
qt) of coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14, DRAIN-
ING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
9) Disconnect the connector (A) from the exhaust
camshaft position sensor and the connector (B) ME-04380
form the exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve.
16) Remove the brake booster vacuum hose from
the clip (A).
(B) 17) Remove the bolts (B) which secure the engine
harness and PCV pipe to the intake manifold, and
remove the intake duct from the throttle body.
(A)
(A)
(B) (B)
(A)
FU-06324
(B)
FU-06215
FU(H4DOTC)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Intake Manifold
18) Disconnect the connector from the throttle po- 22) Disconnect the bulkhead harness connector
sition sensor, and disconnect the preheater hose from the engine harness connector (brown).
from the throttle body.
ME-04376
FU-04953
23) Remove the bolt securing the bulkhead har-
19) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the PCV ness connector bracket, and disconnect the bulk-
valve. head harness connector from the engine harness
connector (black).
FU-04957
ME-04377
20) Disconnect the vacuum hose from blow-by
pipe, and remove the bolt securing the blow-by 24) Remove the engine harness connector from
pipe to the PCV pipe. the engine rear hanger.
FU-06325 ME-04378
21) Disconnect the vacuum control hose (A) from 25) Disconnect the connector (A) from the engine
PCV pipe, and remove the PCV pipe from the in- coolant temperature sensor, connector (B) from the
take manifold protector RH. oil pressure switch, and connector (C) from the
crankshaft position sensor.
(A)
(B)
(C)
(A)
FU-06326
FU-04962
FU(H4DOTC)-19
12LE_US.book 20
Intake Manifold
26) Disconnect the connector (A) from front oxygen 29) Disconnect the connector from the intake cam-
(A/F) sensor and the connector (B) from the rear shaft position sensor.
oxygen sensor.
(B)
(A)
(A)
FU-04724
27) Remove the clip which secure the generator

cord to the intake manifold protector LH.
FU-04727
30) Disconnect the connector from the intake oil

ME-04963 flow control solenoid valve.
28) Disconnect the connector from the knock sen-
sor.
FU-06327
FU-06328
31) Disconnect the connector (A) from oil level

switch.
FU(H4DOTC)-20
12LE_US.book 21
Intake Manifold
32) Disconnect the connector (B) from ignition coil, 34) Disconnect the fuel return hose using the ST.
and remove the clips (C) and bolt (D) securing the ST 18371AA000 CONNECTOR REMOVER
engine harness or oil level switch harness to the
CAUTION:
rocker cover.
or cloth.
(C) (1) Attach ST to the fuel return pipe as shown in
the figure.
(B)
ST
ME-04969
(D) (A) (2) Insert the front side of ST into the quick con-
(B) nector.
(C)
FU-06329
33) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST

delivery hose.
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE- ST
LEASE
ME-04970
CAUTION:
Be careful not to spill fuel. (3) Insert the back side of ST into the quick con-
Catch the fuel from hoses using a container nector and push ST in the direction of arrow
or cloth. mark to disconnect the fuel return hose.
(A)
ST
(B) (C)
ST
ME-04382 ME-04971
(A) Fuel delivery hose

(B) Fuel return hose
(C) Evaporation hose
FU(H4DOTC)-21
12LE_US.book 22
Intake Manifold
35) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapora- B: INSTALLATION

tion hose from the fuel pipe.
1) Install the intake manifold onto cylinder heads.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
FU-04611
36) Remove the intake manifold from cylinder

head.
FU-06330
2) Connect the fuel delivery hose, fuel return hose,

and evaporation hose.
(A)
FU-06330
(B) (C)
FU-05059

3) Connect the connector (A) to the oil level switch.
FU(H4DOTC)-22
12LE_US.book 23
Intake Manifold
4) Connect the connector (B) to ignition coil, and 6) Connect the connector to the intake camshaft
secure the engine harness or oil level switch har- position sensor.
ness to the rocker cover with clips (C) and bolt (D).
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(C)
(B)
(D) (A)
(B)
FU-04727
7) Connect the connector to the knock sensor.

(C)
FU-06329
5) Connect the connector to the intake oil flow con-

trol solenoid valve.
FU-06327
8) Secure the generator cord to the intake manifold

protector LH with a clip.
ME-04963
FU-06328
FU(H4DOTC)-23
12LE_US.book 24
Intake Manifold
9) Connect the connector (A) to the front oxygen 12) Connect the bulkhead harness connector to the
(A/F) sensor and the connector (B) from to the rear engine harness connector (black), and install the
oxygen sensor. bolt securing the bulkhead harness connector
bracket.
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(B)
(A)
(A)
FU-04724
10) Connect the connector (A) to the engine cool-

ant temperature sensor, connector (B) to the oil
pressure switch, and the connector (C) to the ME-04377
crankshaft position sensor.
13) Connect the bulkhead harness connector to the
engine harness connector (brown).
(A)
(B)
(C)
FU-04962
11) Install the engine harness connector to the en- ME-04376

gine rear hanger. 14) Install the PCV pipe to the intake manifold pro-
tector RH, and connect vacuum control hose (A) to
the PCV pipe.
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-04378
(A)
FU-06326
FU(H4DOTC)-24
12LE_US.book 25
Intake Manifold
15) Install the blow-by pipe to the PCV pipe, and 18) Install the intake duct to the throttle body.
connect vacuum hose to the blow-by pipe. NOTE:
Tightening torque: When installing the intake duct to the throttle body,
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) align the protrusion (a) on the intake duct to the in-
stallation position mark (b) on the throttle body to
install.
(b)
(a)
FU-06325
16) Connect the vacuum hose to PCV valve. FU-04706
Tightening torque:
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
FU-04957
17) Connect the preheater hose to the throttle

body, and connect the connector to the throttle po-
FU-06331
sition sensor.
19) Install the bolts which secure the engine har-
ness and PCV pipe to the intake manifold, and in-
stall the brake booster vacuum hose to the clip (A).
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
FU-04953
FU-06373
FU(H4DOTC)-25
12LE_US.book 26
Intake Manifold
20) Connect the brake booster vacuum hose. 26) Connect the connector (A) to the exhaust cam-
shaft position sensor and the connector (B) to the
exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve.
(B)
(A)
ME-04380
21) Install the A/C pressure hoses to A/C compres-

sor. <Ref. to AC-76, INSTALLATION, Hose and
Pipe.>
22) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
23) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to (A)
IN(H4DOTC)-12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake (B)

Duct.>
25) Connect the connectors to the wastegate con-
trol solenoid valve, and secure the engine harness
with clip (A).
FU-06215
(A)
FU-04709
IG-02107
30) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14,

Procedure.>
FU(H4DOTC)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Intake Manifold
C: DISASSEMBLY 5) Disconnect the vacuum hose from the intake

manifold and fuel delivery pipe.
1) Remove the intake manifold protector RH from
intake manifold.
FU-04738
FU-06371 6) Disconnect the connector from the manifold ab-

solute pressure sensor, and remove the solenoid
2) Remove the gray connector (A), the black con-
valve bracket assembly from the intake manifold.
nector (B), and the clip (C) which holds the engine
harness from the intake manifold protector LH.
(C)
FU-04739
(A) (B)
FU-04735 7) Disconnect the connectors from the purge con-
trol solenoid valves 1 and 2.
3) Remove the engine ground terminal from the in-
take manifold protector LH, and remove the intake
manifold protector LH from the intake manifold.
FU-04740
8) Remove the throttle body from the intake mani-

FU-06372 fold.
4) Remove the filter assembly.
FU-06332
FU-04737
FU(H4DOTC)-27
12LE_US.book 28
Intake Manifold
9) Disconnect the connector from the fuel injector 11) Remove the bolts which hold fuel pipe onto in-
and tumble generator valve assembly, and remove take manifold.
the engine harness from the intake manifold.
FU-04972
FU-06333
12) Remove the fuel injector.
10) Remove the bolts which secure the fuel deliv-
ery pipe assembly to the intake manifold, and dis-
connect the pressure regulator vacuum hose from
the intake manifold.
FU-04971
FU-04747
FU(H4DOTC)-28
12LE_US.book 29
Intake Manifold
13) Disconnect vacuum hose (A), vacuum control 16) Remove the tumble generator valve assembly
hose (B) and brake booster vacuum hose (C) from from the intake manifold.
the intake manifold.
(B)
(C)
(A)
FU-06334
14) Remove the bolts which secure the fuel deliv-

ery pipe to the intake manifold, loosen the clamps
which hold the fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe,
and remove the fuel delivery pipe and fuel pipe.
FU-04751
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the tumble generator valve assembly onto
intake manifold.
FU-06199
NOTE:
15) Remove the nipple from the intake manifold. Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
8.3 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 6.1 ft-lb)
FU-06192
FU-04751
FU(H4DOTC)-29
12LE_US.book 30
Intake Manifold
2) Install the nipple to the intake manifold. 5) Connect vacuum hose (A), vacuum control hose
NOTE: (B) and brake booster vacuum hose (C) to the in-
take manifold.
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
7.8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.8 ft-lb) (B)
(C)
(A)
FU-06334
6) Install the fuel injector.

FU-06192
3) Set the fuel delivery pipe and fuel pipe, and con-
nect the fuel hose to the fuel delivery pipe. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-93, CONNECTING THE FUEL DE-
LIVERY HOSE, FUEL RETURN HOSE AND FUEL
HOSE, INSTALLATION, Fuel Delivery, Return and
Evaporation Lines.>
FU-06271
4) Install the fuel delivery pipe to the intake mani-

fold.
FU-04747
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-06272
FU(H4DOTC)-30
12LE_US.book 31
Intake Manifold
7) Install the bolts which secure fuel pipe to the in- 9) Set the engine harness to the intake manifold,
take manifold. and connect the connector to the fuel injector and
tumble generator valve assembly.
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-06333
FU-04972 10) Install the throttle body to the intake manifold.

8) Install the bolts which secure fuel delivery pipe to NOTE:
the intake manifold, and connect the pressure reg- Use new O-rings.
ulator vacuum hose to the intake manifold. Tightening torque:
Tightening torque: 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
FU-06332
FU-04971
11) Connect the connectors to the purge control
solenoid valves 1 and 2.
FU-04740
FU(H4DOTC)-31
12LE_US.book 32
Intake Manifold
12) Install the solenoid valve bracket assembly to 15) Install the intake manifold protector LH to the
the intake manifold, and connect the connector to intake manifold, and install the engine ground ter-
the manifold absolute pressure sensor. minal to the intake manifold protector.
Tightening torque: NOTE:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) Route the gray connector and black connector un-
der the intake manifold protector as shown in the
figure.
(c) (b)
(a)
FU-04739
13) Connect the vacuum hose to the intake mani- FU-04753

fold and fuel delivery pipe.
(a) Intake manifold protector
(b) Gray connector
(c) Black connector
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-04738
14) Install the filter assembly.
FU-06372
16) Install the gray connector (A), the black con-

harness to the intake manifold protector LH.
FU-04737
(C)
(A) (B)
FU-04735
FU(H4DOTC)-32
12LE_US.book 33
Intake Manifold
17) Install the intake manifold protector RH to the

intake manifold.
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-06371
E: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intake manifold and fuel pipe
have no deformation, cracks and other damages.
loose part.
FU(H4DOTC)-33
12LE_US.book 34
Engine Coolant Temperature Sensor

4. Engine Coolant Temperature 2) Immerse the engine coolant temperature sensor

and a thermometer in water.
Sensor
CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL Take care not to allow water to get into the en-
1) Remove the collector cover. gine coolant temperature sensor connector.
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. Completely remove any water inside.
(A)
(B)
IG-02107

REMOVAL, Generator.> (C)
4) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE-
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.>
coolant temperature sensor, and remove the en-
gine coolant temperature sensor.
FU-04053
(A)
(A) Thermometer
(B) Engine coolant temperature sensor
(C) Hexagonal part height: To approx.1/3
3) Raise water temperature gradually, measure the

resistance between the engine coolant tempera-
FU-06337 ture sensor terminals when the temperature is
20C (68F) and 80C (176F).
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Install in the reverse order of removal. Agitate the water for even temperature distribution.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) 2 1
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the engine coolant temperature sen-
EC-02428
Water tempera-
ture
20C (68F) 2.450.2 k
1 and 2
80C (176F) 0.3180.013 k
FU(H4DOTC)-34
12LE_US.book 35

5. Crankshaft Position Sensor C: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
1) Remove the collector cover. (METHOD WITH CIRCUIT TESTER)
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 1) Measure the resistance between crankshaft po-
sition sensor terminals.
2 1
IG-02107
EC-02428
3) Remove the bolt which secures crankshaft posi-
tion sensor to oil pump. Terminal No. Standard
1 and 2 2.040.204 k
2. CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR

(METHOD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE)
FU-04974
4) Remove the crankshaft position sensor, and dis-

connect the connector from the crankshaft position
sensor.
FU-04956
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
FU-04975
31 30 29 28 27 26
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) FU-04758
Terminal No. Probe

17 +
25
FU(H4DOTC)-35
12LE_US.book 36

5) Check that the pattern is the same as the wave-

form and voltage shown below.
10ms
5V
(A)
FU-04057
(A) One crankshaft rotation

Check that the crankshaft position sensor has no
FU(H4DOTC)-36
12LE_US.book 37

6. Camshaft Position Sensor 3) Remove the camshaft position sensor LH.
A: REMOVAL
1. INTAKE SIDE
Camshaft position sensor RH
FU-03520
2. EXHAUST SIDE
IG-02107
2) Disconnect the connector (A) from the camshaft

position sensor RH, and remove the camshaft po-
sition sensor RH.
(A)
IG-02107

4) Disconnect the connector (A) from the camshaft
position sensor, and remove the camshaft position
sensor.
FU-05807
RH side
Camshaft position sensor LH
(A)
FU-05808
LH side
IG-02107

(A)
FU-05809
FU(H4DOTC)-37
12LE_US.book 38

B: INSTALLATION Exhaust camshaft position sensor
1. INTAKE SIDE (A)

7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Install in the reverse order of removal. 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
Tightening torque: 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 31 30 29 28 27 26
2. EXHAUST SIDE
Tightening torque:
FU-04762
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION (A) To ECM connector
1. CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR (METH- Camshaft position

OD WITH OSCILLOSCOPE) Terminal No. Probe
sensor
1) Prepare an oscilloscope. RH 24 +
Intake
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- LH 16 +
66, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> RH 23 +
3) Connect the probe to ECM connector. Exhaust
LH 29 +
RH and LH 30

5) Check that the pattern is the same as the wave-
form and voltage shown below.
(B) 0
10ms
(A) 5V
(C) 0
FU-04956
Intake camshaft position sensor

(D) 0
(A)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 (E) 0
25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 FU-04763
31 30 29 28 27 26
(A) One camshaft rotation
(B) Intake camshaft position sensor RH
(C) Intake camshaft position sensor LH
(D) Exhaust camshaft position sensor RH
(E) Exhaust camshaft position sensor LH
FU-04757
(A) To ECM connector 6) After inspection, install the related parts in the
Check that the camshaft position sensor has no de-
formation, cracks or other damages.
FU(H4DOTC)-38
12LE_US.book 39
Knock Sensor
7. Knock Sensor B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the knock sensor to the cylinder block.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the collector cover. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. The portion of the knock sensor cord that is pulled
out must be positioned at a 60 angle relative to the
engine rear.
Tightening torque:
24 Nm (2.4 kgf-m, 17.7 ft-lb)
(A)
IG-02107

17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> 60
4) Disconnect the connector from the knock sen-
sor. FU-04883
(A) Front side of vehicle
2) Connect the connector to the knock sensor.
FU-04764
5) Remove the knock sensor from cylinder block.
FU-04764
3) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-18,

INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
4) Connect the ground cable to battery.
FU-04882
IG-02107
FU(H4DOTC)-39
12LE_US.book 40
Knock Sensor
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the knock sensor has no deforma-
2) Measure the resistance between knock sensor
terminals.
2 1
EC-02426

1 and 2 56028 k
FU(H4DOTC)-40
12LE_US.book 41
Throttle Position Sensor

8. Throttle Position Sensor

A: SPECIFICATION
Throttle body is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the throttle position sensor from throttle
body.
Refer to Throttle Body for removal and installation
procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL,
Throttle Body.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-16, IN-
STALLATION, Throttle Body.>
FU(H4DOTC)-41
12LE_US.book 42
Mass Air Flow and Intake Air Temperature Sensor

9. Mass Air Flow and Intake Air 2) Check that the voltage changes when air is
blown to the mass air flow sensor unit from arrow
Temperature Sensor direction.
A: REMOVAL
FU-04063
2. CHECK INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE

IG-02107 SENSOR UNIT
2) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air Measure the resistance between intake air temper-
flow and intake air temperature sensor, and re- ature sensor terminals.
move the mass air flow and intake air temperature
sensor.
5 4 3 2 1
(A)
FU-04064
FU-05810
Temperature Terminal No. Standard
20C (4F) 16.02.4 k
B: INSTALLATION 20C (68F) 1 and 2 2.450.24 k
Install in the reverse order of removal. 60C (140F) 0.5800.087 k
Tightening torque: 3. OTHER INSPECTIONS

1 Nm (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb)
1) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
C: INSPECTION perature sensor has no deformation, cracks or oth-
er damages.
1. CHECK MASS AIR FLOW SENSOR UNIT 2) Check that the mass air flow and intake air tem-
1) Connect battery positive terminal to terminal No. perature sensor has no dirt.
3 and battery ground terminal to terminal No. 4, cir-
cuit tester positive terminal to terminal No. 5 and
the circuit tester negative terminal to terminal No. 4.
5 4 3 2 1
V
FU-04062
FU(H4DOTC)-42
12LE_US.book 43

10.Manifold Absolute Pressure C: INSPECTION

Sensor 1) Check that the manifold absolute pressure sen-
A: REMOVAL 2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter-
1) Remove the collector cover. minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. terminal No. 1, circuit tester positive terminal to ter-
minal No. 2 and the circuit tester negative terminal
to terminal No. 1.
NOTE:
and 5.2 V.
IG-02107
3) Disconnect the connector (A) from manifold ab- 3 2 1

solute pressure sensor, and remove the filter as-
sembly (B) from intake manifold.
4) Remove the manifold absolute pressure sensor
from the solenoid valve bracket.
(A)
V
(B)
1.5V 1.5V 1.5V

FU-04976
B: INSTALLATION 4.8 5.2V

FU-04486
Tightening torque:
3) Check the voltage at a normal atmospheric pres-
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) sure.
NOTE:
the standard value.
Approx. 2.2 V
2 (+) and 1 ()
(when 25C (77F))
FU(H4DOTC)-43
12LE_US.book 44


of manifold absolute pressure sensor.
(A)
FU-04487

CAUTION:
Do not apply vacuum of less than 88 200
kPa (0.9 2.04 kgf/cm2, 12.8 29.0 psi). Do-
ing so may damage the manifold absolute pres-
sure sensor.
NOTE:
When vacuum occurs at the pressure port of man-
ifold absolute pressure sensor, the voltage will drop
from the value as in step 3). When positive pres-
sure occurs, on the other hand, the voltage will rise.
Terminal
Pressure Standard
No.
88 kPa (0.9 kgf/cm2, Approx. 1.0 V (when
12.8 psi) 2 (+) and 25C (77F))
152 kPa (1.55 kgf/cm2, 1 () Approx. 4.5 V (when
22.0 psi) 25C (77F))
FU(H4DOTC)-44
12LE_US.book 45
Fuel Injector
11.Fuel Injector 8) Remove the bolts which hold fuel pipe onto in-
take manifold.
A: REMOVAL
1. RH SIDE
FU-06340
9) Remove the fuel injector.
IG-02107
cap.
FU(H4DOTC)-18, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> FU-06341
6) Remove the intake manifold protector RH from

2. LH SIDE
intake manifold.
FU-06371
7) Disconnect the connector from the fuel injector

and tumble generator valve assembly.
IG-02107
cap.
FU-06339
FU(H4DOTC)-45
12LE_US.book 46
Fuel Injector
6) Remove the gray connector (A), the black con- 10) Remove the fuel injector.
harness from the intake manifold protector LH.
(C)
FU-06344
(A) (B)
FU-04735 B: INSTALLATION
7) Remove the engine ground terminal from the in- 1. RH SIDE
take manifold protector LH, and remove the intake Install in the reverse order of removal.
manifold protector LH from the intake manifold.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings, grommets, and seal rings.
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-06372
8) Disconnect the connector from fuel injector.
FU-06340
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-06343
9) Remove the bolt which secures the fuel delivery

pipe to the intake manifold.
FU-06345
FU-04980
FU(H4DOTC)-46
12LE_US.book 47
Fuel Injector
2. LH SIDE
NOTE:
Use new O-rings, grommets, and seal rings.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
T1 T2
FU-04981
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb)
FU-06346
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel injector has no deformation,
2) Measure the resistance between fuel injector
terminals.
2 1
EC-02428

Approx. 12.0
1 and 2
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4DOTC)-47
12LE_US.book 48
Tumble Generator Valve Assembly

12.Tumble Generator Valve As- 8) Remove the tumble generator valve assembly
from the intake manifold.
sembly
A: REMOVAL
IG-02107
cap.
5) Remove the intake manifold. <Ref. to FU-04751
6) Disconnect the connector from the tumble gen- B: INSTALLATION
erator valve assembly. Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
8.3 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 6.1 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the tumble generator valve assembly
2) Check tumble generator valve for contamination
FU-06347
or clogging.
7) Remove the fuel injector. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-45, REMOVAL, Fuel Injector.>
FU(H4DOTC)-48
12LE_US.book 49
Tumble Generator Valve Actuator

13.Tumble Generator Valve Ac-

tuator
A: SPECIFICATION
The tumble generator valve assembly cannot be
disassembled.
Refer to Tumble Generator Valve Assembly for
removal and installation procedures. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-48, REMOVAL, Tumble Generator
Valve Assembly.> <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-48, IN-
STALLATION, Tumble Generator Valve Assem-
bly.>
FU(H4DOTC)-49
12LE_US.book 50
Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve

14.Oil Flow Control Solenoid 6) Disconnect the connector (A) from the oil flow
control solenoid valve, and remove the oil flow con-
Valve trol solenoid valve from the cylinder head.
A: REMOVAL
1. INTAKE SIDE
Oil flow control solenoid valve is a unit with front
camshaft cap.
Refer to Camshaft for the removal procedure.
(A)
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-63, REMOVAL, Cam-
shaft.>
2. EXHAUST SIDE
FU-05812
B: INSTALLATION
1. INTAKE SIDE
Refer to Camshaft for installation procedure.
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-66, INSTALLATION, Cam-
shaft.>
2. EXHAUST SIDE
IG-02107
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
4) Remove the center exhaust pipe. (LH side only)
<Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Center Ex-
haust Pipe.>
5) Remove ground cable (A) from the engine har-
ness cover, and remove the engine harness cover
from the engine. (LH side only)
FU-05813
Tightening torque:
(A) T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 7 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.2 ft-lb)
FU-04774
(A)
T2
T1 T1
FU-04862
FU(H4DOTC)-50
12LE_US.book 51
Oil Flow Control Solenoid Valve

C: DISASSEMBLY 3) Attach the oil return cover and gasket.
1. INTAKE SIDE NOTE:

Use a new gasket.
1) Remove the two mounting bolts securing oil re-
turn cover, and remove the oil return cover and Tightening torque:
gasket. 9 Nm (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
2) Remove the bolt securing oil flow control sole-
noid valve, and remove the oil flow control solenoid
valve. (D)
(C)
(B) (A)
(D)
(C)
(B) (A)
FU-05700
(A) Oil flow control solenoid valve

FU-05699 (B) Oil return cover
(C) Gasket
(A) Oil flow control solenoid valve (D) Front camshaft cap
(B) Oil return cover
(C) Gasket 2. EXHAUST SIDE
(D) Front camshaft cap The oil flow control solenoid valve on exhaust side
cannot be disassembled.
2. EXHAUST SIDE
E: INSPECTION
The oil flow control solenoid valve on exhaust side
cannot be disassembled. 1) Check that the oil flow control solenoid valve has
no deformation, cracks or other damages.
D: ASSEMBLY 2) Measure the resistance between the oil flow
control solenoid valve terminals.
1. INTAKE SIDE
1) Install the oil flow control solenoid valve.
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) 2 1
2) Apply liquid gasket to the two bolts securing oil
return cover.
Liquid gasket:
equivalent
EC-02428

7.40.5
1 and 2
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4DOTC)-51
12LE_US.book 52
Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve

15.Wastegate Control Solenoid B: INSTALLATION

Valve Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
A: REMOVAL Use new O-rings.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. When tightening the boost control solenoid
valve, check that it is securely seated.
Tightening torque:
4 Nm (0.4 kgf-m, 3.0 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1. WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE
1) Check that the wastegate control solenoid valve
IG-02107 has no deformation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check the resistance between the wastegate
2) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly. control solenoid valve terminals.
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator
Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
3) Remove the screws which hold the wastegate
control solenoid valve to the intake duct.
2 1
EC-02426

1 and 2 243 (when 20C (68F))
FU-04777
4) Lift up the vehicle. 3) Check that air does not come out from (B) when
5) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- air is blown into (A).
6) Disconnect the connector and air control hose
from the wastegate control solenoid valve, and re-
(A)
move the wastegate control solenoid valve from the
intake duct.
(B)
FU-04779
FU-04778
FU(H4DOTC)-52
12LE_US.book 53
Wastegate Control Solenoid Valve

4) Connect the battery positive terminal to the ter-

minal No. 1 and the battery negative terminal to the
terminal No. 2. Check that air is discharged from
(B), when supplying air to (A).
2 1
(A)
(B)
FU-04780
Check that the air control hose has no cracks, dam-
age or loose part.
FU(H4DOTC)-53
12LE_US.book 54

16.Front Oxygen (A/F) Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
If lubricant is spilt over the exhaust pipe, wipe it
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
causing a fire.
1) Before installing front oxygen (A/F) sensor, ap-
ply anti-seize compound only to the threaded por-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor to make the next
removal easier.
CAUTION:
tor of front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
IG-02107
Anti-seize compound:
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
2) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly. equivalent
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator 2) Install the front oxygen (A/F) sensor.
3) Disconnect the connector from the front oxygen Tightening torque:
(A/F) sensor, and remove the clip (A) holding the 30 Nm (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb)
front oxygen (A/F) sensor harness.
(A)
FU-04782
FU-04982 3) Connect the front oxygen (A/F) sensor connec-
4) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por- tor, and secure the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
tion of front oxygen (A/F) sensor, and leave it for ness by using the clip (A).
one minute or more.
5) Remove the front oxygen (A/F) sensor by using
a sensor socket.
CAUTION:
When removing the front oxygen (A/F) sensor,
wait until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will
damage the exhaust pipe. (A)
FU-04982
4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly.

<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radi-
ator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
FU-04782
FU(H4DOTC)-54
12LE_US.book 55

IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the front oxygen (A/F) sensor has no
2) Measure the resistance between front oxygen
(A/F) sensor terminals.
1 2
3 4
FU-04072

2.40.24
1 and 2
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4DOTC)-55
12LE_US.book 56
Rear Oxygen Sensor

17.Rear Oxygen Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
If lubricant is spilt over the exhaust pipe, wipe it
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. off with cloth to avoid emission of smoke or
causing a fire.
1) Before installing rear oxygen sensor, apply the
anti-seize compound only to the threaded portion of
rear oxygen sensor to make the next removal eas-
ier.
CAUTION:
tor of rear oxygen sensor.
IG-02107
Anti-seize compound:
NEVER-SEEZ NSN, JET LUBE SS-30 or
2) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly. equivalent
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator 2) Install the rear oxygen sensor.
3) Disconnect the connector from the rear oxygen Tightening torque:
sensor, and remove the clip (A) holding the rear ox- 30 Nm (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb)
ygen sensor harness.
(A)
FU-04784
FU-04983
3) Connect the connector to the rear oxygen sen-
4) Apply spray-type lubricant to the threaded por- sor, and hold the rear oxygen sensor harness with
tion of rear oxygen sensor, and leave it for one clip (A).
minute or more.
5) Remove the rear oxygen (A/F) sensor by using a
sensor socket.
CAUTION:
When removing the rear oxygen sensor, wait
until exhaust pipe cools, otherwise it will dam-
age the exhaust pipe. (A)
FU-04983
4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly.

<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radi-
FU-04784
FU(H4DOTC)-56
12LE_US.book 57
Rear Oxygen Sensor

IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the rear oxygen sensor has no defor-
2) Measure the resistance between rear oxygen
sensor terminals.
1 2
3 4
FU-04072

5.6+0.8 0.6
1 and 2
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4DOTC)-57
12LE_US.book 58
Engine Control Module (ECM)

18.Engine Control Module (ECM) B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. CAUTION:
When the ECM of model with immobilizer has
been replaced, be sure to perform the registra-
tion of immobilizer system. (Refer to PC appli-
cation help for Subaru Select Monitor.)
If replacing ECM or the bracket, replace both
parts with new parts at a time.
After installing the bracket to ECM, do not
separate the bracket.
If the bracket has been installed to ECM in the
wrong direction, replace both parts to new
IG-02107 parts.
2) Remove the glove box lid assembly. <Ref. to EI- NOTE:
66, REMOVAL, Glove Box.> When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use the
3) Remove the connectors from ECM. wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on the fuel
injection system.
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
Check that the ECM has no deformation, cracks or
other damages.
FU-04984
4) Remove the ECM from vehicle.
FU-04985
FU(H4DOTC)-58
12LE_US.book 59
Main Relay
19.Main Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the main relay has no deformation,
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between main relay ter-
minals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the main relay from the relay holder.
1
2
3 4
IN-02836
FU-04986
B: INSTALLATION 1 and 2 1 M or more
130.4 230.8
Install in the reverse order of removal. 3 and 4
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4DOTC)-59
12LE_US.book 60
Main Relay

measure the resistance between the main relay ter-
minals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

1 and 2 Less than 1
FU(H4DOTC)-60
12LE_US.book 61
Fuel Pump Relay

20.Fuel Pump Relay C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel pump relay has no deforma-
A: REMOVAL tion, cracks or other damages.
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. 2) Measure the resistance between fuel pump relay
terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the fuel pump relay from the relay hold-
er. 1
2
3 4
IN-02836

FU-04987
1 and 2 1 M or more
B: INSTALLATION 93.8 136.4
3 and 4
(when 20C (68F))
FU(H4DOTC)-61
12LE_US.book 62
Fuel Pump Relay


measure the resistance between the fuel pump re-
lay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

1 and 2 Less than 1
FU(H4DOTC)-62
12LE_US.book 63

21.Electronic Throttle Control C: INSPECTION

Relay 1) Check that the electronic throttle control relay
A: REMOVAL 2) Measure the resistance between electronic
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. throttle control relay terminals.
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
IG-02107

3) Remove the electronic throttle control relay from
1
the relay holder. 2
3 4
IN-02836

1 and 2 1 M or more
FU-04988 93.8 136.4
3 and 4
(when 20C (68F))
B: INSTALLATION
FU(H4DOTC)-63
12LE_US.book 64


measure the resistance between the electronic
(1)
(2) (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(3) (4)
1
2
3 4
FU-04077

1 and 2 Less than 1
FU(H4DOTC)-64
12LE_US.book 65
Fuel Pump Control Unit

22.Fuel Pump Control Unit

A: REMOVAL
IG-02107
2) Remove the trunk trim panel assembly - side on

the RH side. <Ref. to EI-110, REMOVAL, Rear
Quarter Trim.>
3) Remove the fuel pump control unit.
FU-04793
4) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump control

unit.
FU-04795
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
Check that the fuel pump control unit has no defor-
FU(H4DOTC)-65
12LE_US.book 66
Fuel
23.Fuel 2. DRAINING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SE-

LECT MONITOR)
A: PROCEDURE
WARNING:
1. RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the
working area.
WARNING:
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the CAUTION:
working area. Be careful not to spill fuel.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Be careful not to spill fuel. If the fuel pump cannot be driven, refer to the
1) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse procedures for draining from the fuel filler hose.
box. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-67, DRAINING FUEL
(THROUGH THE FUEL FILLER HOSE), PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
Be careful not to let the battery run-out.
2) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST
delivery hose.
FU-04800
LEASE
2) Start the engine and run it until it stalls. CAUTION:
3) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec- Be careful not to spill fuel.
onds. Catch the fuel from hoses using a container
4) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. or cloth.
5) Install the fuse of fuel pump to the main fuse box.
(A)
ST
(B) (C)
ME-04382

3) Connect ST to the fuel delivery hose.

ST 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
4) Connect the gasoline proof hose to ST and put
the end of the hose in the container.
5) Drive the fuel pump and drain the fuel using Sub-
aru Select Monitor. (Refer to PC application help
for Subaru Select Monitor.)
CAUTION:
6) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
draining the fuel.
FU(H4DOTC)-66
12LE_US.book 67
Fuel
3. DRAINING FUEL (THROUGH THE FUEL 8) Install the related parts in the reverse order after
FILLER HOSE) draining the fuel.
WARNING: NOTE:
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the Correctly insert the fuel filler hose to the spool, and
working area. then install the clamp as shown.
Be careful not to spill fuel. 2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
Fuel may remain in the fuel filler pipe. Drain-
(1) (2) (3) (4)
ing the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
fill opening using the gasoline proof pump and
the gasoline proof hose (10 or less) before the
operation.
2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
<Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL, Rear Ex- L/2
haust Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-17, REMOV-
AL, Muffler.> L
FU-05815
MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.> (1) Fuel filler hose
4) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler (2) Clamp
cap. (3) Spool
5) Drain the fuel from the fuel filler pipe through the
(4) Fuel filler pipe
filler opening using the gasoline proof pump and
the gasoline proof hose (10 or less).
6) Disconnect the fuel filler hose from the fuel filler
pipe assembly.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
FU-04989
7) Set the container under the vehicle and insert

the gasoline proof hose (10 or less) into the fuel
filler hose to drain the fuel.
CAUTION:
FU(H4DOTC)-67
12LE_US.book 68
Fuel Tank
24.Fuel Tank (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
service hole cover.
A: REMOVAL (C)
WARNING:
working area. (D)
CAUTION:
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- (C)
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> (A) FU-04991
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAIN-
ING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), 7) Remove the service hole cover of fuel sub level
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> sensor.
FU-06348
IG-02107 8) Disconnect the quick connector of fuel delivery
4) Remove the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-34, tube (A) and fuel return tube (B). <Ref. to
REMOVAL, Rear Seat.> FU(H4DOTC)-88, REMOVAL, Fuel Delivery, Re-
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks turn and Evaporation Lines.>
(B), and turn over the floor mat (C). (A)
(B)
(C)
FU-04993
(B)
(B) (A) (A)
FU-04990 9) Remove the rear wheels.
6) Remove the service hole cover of fuel pump. 10) Lift up the vehicle.
(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and 11) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor
remove the clip (B). from the rear housing.
FU-04994
FU(H4DOTC)-68
12LE_US.book 69
Fuel Tank
12) Remove the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har- 16) Remove the rear exhaust pipe and muffler.
ness bracket from the upper arm. <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-15, REMOVAL, Rear Ex-
haust Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-17, REMOV-
AL, Muffler.>
17) Remove the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-10,
REMOVAL, Propeller Shaft.>
18) Remove the clip (A) securing the fuel tank pro-
tector and heat shield cover.
19) Remove the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the
fuel tank protector, and remove the fuel tank pro-
tector.
FU-04087 (B)
13) Remove the rear brake hose bracket from rear

housing. (B) (B)
(C) (C)
(A)
FU-04997
20) Remove the bolts and nuts securing the heat

shield cover and remove the heat shield cover.
FU-04995
14) Remove the rear disc brake assembly and tie it

to the body side of the vehicle.
FU-04998
21) Remove the rear suspension assembly.

WARNING:
mission jack.
(2) Remove the bolt and nut which secures rear
shock absorber to rear suspension arm.
FU-04996
15) Remove the parking brake cable from parking

brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-10, REMOVAL, Park-
ing Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).> FU-03359
FU(H4DOTC)-69
12LE_US.book 70
Fuel Tank
(3) Remove the bolts which secure the rear

suspension assembly to the body.
FU-05003
25) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A), PCV inlet

FU-06349 hose (B) and circulate hose (C) from the fuel filler
(4) Remove the rear suspension assembly. pipe assembly.
22) Disconnect the PCV drain hose (A) and PCV
outlet hose (B) from the pressure control solenoid
(C) (B)
valve.
(A)
(A)
(B)
FU-05049

remove the fuel tank band, and remove the fuel
FU-05000 tank from the vehicle.
23) Disconnect the air vent hose from the fuel tank. WARNING:
Fuel may remain in the fuel tank. This will
cause the left and right sides to be unbalanced.
Be careful not to drop the fuel tank.
FU-05001
24) Disconnect the quick connector of the circulate

tube from evaporation pipe.
NOTE:
FU-06350
ure.
1
1 FU-05002
FU(H4DOTC)-70
12LE_US.book 71
Fuel Tank
B: INSTALLATION 3) Connect the quick connector of the circulate

tube to the evaporation pipe as shown in the figure.
set the fuel tank and the fuel tank band in place, CAUTION:
and temporarily tighten the bolts of the fuel tank Check that there is no damage or dust on the
band. quick connector. If necessary, clean the seal
WARNING:
ly connected.
FU-06350
FU-05036
2) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A), PCV inlet
hose (B) and circulate hose (C) to the spool or stop-
per, then attach the clamp or clip as shown in the
figure.
Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
(C) (B)
FU-05003
4) Connect the air vent hose to fuel tank.
(A)
FU-05049
(2) (3) (4)

(1)
FU-05001
5) Connect the PCV drain hose (A) and PCV outlet

L/2 hose (B) to the pressure control solenoid valve.
L
FU-05646
(A)
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp or clip (B)
(3) Spool or bump
(4) Pipe
FU-05000
FU(H4DOTC)-71
12LE_US.book 72
Fuel Tank
6) Move the fuel tank so that the distance between 7) Install the rear suspension assembly.
the center of the positioning hole for the body (A) WARNING:
and the front end of the fuel tank flange (B) be-
comes L, and tighten the bolts of the fuel tank
bands in the sequence shown in the figure.
mission jack.
CAUTION: (2) Support the rear suspension assembly and
To prevent the fuel tank from damage, after install the rear suspension assembly to the
tightening the bolts of the fuel tank bands, body.
make sure that the distance between the center
of the positioning hole for the body (A) and the Tightening torque:
front end of the fuel tank flange (B) is L. T1: 70 Nm (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
T2: 200 Nm (20.4 kgf-m, 147.5 ft-lb)
Distance L: Center of the positioning hole for
the body (A) Front end of the fuel tank flange
(B) T1 T1
14.5 mm (0.571 in) or less

Tightening torque:
33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
T2 T2
(A)
L
(B) FU-06352
(3) Install the rear shock absorber to the rear

suspension arm.
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
120 Nm (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
1 2
3 4
FU-06351 FU-03359
8) Install the heat shield cover.

Tightening torque:
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
FU-04998
FU(H4DOTC)-72
12LE_US.book 73
Fuel Tank
9) Install the bolts (B) and nuts (C) securing the fuel 15) Install the rear brake hose bracket to the rear
tank protector and install the clip (A) securing the housing.
fuel tank protector and heat shield cover.
Tightening torque:
Nut (C): 9 Nm (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
Bolt (B): 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
(B)
(B) (B)
(C) (C)
(A)
FU-04995
16) Install the rear ABS wheel speed sensor har-

FU-04997 ness bracket to the upper arm.
10) Install the propeller shaft. <Ref. to DS-11, IN- NOTE:
STALLATION, Propeller Shaft.> Prevent the harness identification (line) from being
11) Install the rear exhaust pipe and muffler. <Ref. twisted when installing. <Ref. to VDC-2, SPECIFI-
to EX(H4DOTC)-15, INSTALLATION, Rear Ex- CATION, General Description.>
haust Pipe.> <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-17, INSTAL-
LATION, Muffler.> Tightening torque:
12) Lower the vehicle. 7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
13) Connect the parking brake cable to the parking
brake assembly. <Ref. to PB-14, INSTALLATION,
Parking Brake Assembly (Rear Disc Brake).>
14) Install the rear disc brake assembly.
Tightening torque:
66 Nm (6.7 kgf-m, 48.7 ft-lb)
FU-04087
17) Attach the rear ABS wheel speed sensor to the

rear housing.
NOTE:
Prevent the harness identification (line) from being
FU-04546 CATION, General Description.>
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
FU-04994
FU(H4DOTC)-73
12LE_US.book 74
Fuel Tank
18) Install the rear wheels. 22) Set the floor mat (C), and install clips (A) and
seat cushion hooks (B).
Tightening torque:
120 Nm (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
19) Connect the quick connector of fuel delivery
tube (A) and fuel return tube (B). <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-91, INSTALLATION, Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evaporation Lines.>
NOTE: (C)
When connecting, be careful not to reverse the de-
livery side and return side.
(B)
(A) (B) (A) (A)
FU-04990
23) Install the rear seat cushion. <Ref. to SE-49,

INSTALLATION, Rear Seat.>
(B)
FU-04993
20) Install the service hole cover of fuel sub level

sensor.
IG-02107

essary.
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel tank and fuel pipe have no
FU-06348 or loose part.
21) Attach the service hole cover of the fuel pump,
and attach the connector and clip.
(C)
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A) FU-04991
(A) Connector
(B) Clip
(C) Screw
(D) Grommet
FU(H4DOTC)-74
12LE_US.book 75
Fuel Filler Pipe

25.Fuel Filler Pipe 10) Disconnect the fuel filler hose (A), PCV inlet
hose (B) and circulate hose (C) from the fuel filler
A: REMOVAL pipe assembly.
WARNING:
Place NO OPEN FLAMES signs near the (C) (B)
working area.
CAUTION:
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- (A)
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAIN-
FU-05049
ING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR),
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 11) Disconnect the evaporation hose (A) from fuel
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. filler pipe assembly and remove the bolts and nuts
securing the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle
body.
(A)
IG-02107
4) Open the fuel filler lid, and remove the filler cap.
5) Turn the fuel filler pipe protector in the direction
of the arrow to unlock and remove it.
FU-05007
FU-04044
12) Remove the fuel filler pipe assembly from the
6) Remove the rear wheel RH. underside of the vehicle.
8) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38,
MOVAL, Rear Sub Frame.>
FU(H4DOTC)-75
12LE_US.book 76
Fuel Filler Pipe

B: INSTALLATION 5) Securely insert the fuel filler hose (A), PCV inlet
hose (B) and circulate hose (C) to the spool or stop-
1) Open the fuel filler lid.
per, then attach the clamp or clip as shown in the
2) Insert the fuel filler pipe assembly into the rubber
figure.
saucer from inside of the rear fender.
3) Install the fuel filler pipe assembly to the vehicle Tightening torque:
body and connect the evaporation hose (A) to the 2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
fuel filler pipe assembly.
Tightening torque: (C) (B)
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
(A)
(A)
FU-05049
(2) (3) (4)

(1)
L/2
L
FU-05646
(1) Hose
(2) Clamp or clip
FU-05007 (3) Spool or bump
(4) Pipe
4) Align the cutout on the fuel filler pipe protector
and the protrusion of the neck holder and insert
6) Install the rear sub frame. <Ref. to RS-18, IN-
them all the way, and then turn the fuel filler pipe
STALLATION, Rear Sub Frame.>
protector in the direction of the arrow until it is
7) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
locked.
9) Install the rear wheel RH.
Tightening torque:
120 Nm (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
FU-04104
IG-02107

essary.
FU(H4DOTC)-76
12LE_US.book 77
Fuel Filler Pipe

C: DISASSEMBLY D: ASSEMBLY
1) Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe. 1) Temporarily tighten the bolts securing the fuel
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-21, REMOVAL, Shut filler pipe bracket to the fuel filler pipe.
Valve.>
2) Remove the evaporation pipe from the fuel filler
pipe.
FU-05009
2) Install the evaporation pipe to the fuel filler pipe.

FU-05008 Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
3) Remove the fuel filler pipe bracket from the fuel
filler pipe.
FU-05008
FU-05009
FU(H4DOTC)-77
12LE_US.book 78
Fuel Filler Pipe

3) Tighten the bolts securing the fuel filler pipe

bracket to the fuel filler pipe.
Tightening torque:
7.35 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
FU-05010
4) Install the shut valve to the fuel filler pipe. <Ref.

to EC(H4DOTC)-21, INSTALLATION, Shut
Valve.>
E: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel filler pipe and evaporation
pipe do not have deformation, cracks or other dam-
ages.
loose part.
FU(H4DOTC)-78
12LE_US.book 79
Fuel Pump
26.Fuel Pump (3) Push the grommet (D) down and remove the
service hole cover.
A: REMOVAL (C)
WARNING:
working area. (D)
CAUTION:
more of the fuel is remaining, be sure to drain (C)
fuel before starting work to avoid the fuel to (A) FU-04991
spill.
NOTE: 7) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel pump,
Fuel pump assembly consists of fuel pump, fuel fil- and remove the clip (B) securing the harness.
ter, fuel chamber and fuel level sensor. 8) Disconnect the quick connector of fuel delivery
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to tube (C), fuel return tube (D) and fuel sub delivery
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- tube (E). <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-88, REMOVAL,
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines.>
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAIN- 9) Remove the rubber cap (F) from nut.
ING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), (D)
PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (E)
(F)
(C)
(A)
(B)
FU-05011
10) Remove the nuts securing the fuel pump upper

plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel pump up-
IG-02107 per plate.
5) Remove the clips (A) and seat cushion hooks
FU-04534
(C) 11) Remove the fuel pump assembly from the fuel
tank.
(B)
(B) (A) (A)
FU-04990

(1) Disconnect the fuel cord connector (A), and
FU(H4DOTC)-79
12LE_US.book 80
Fuel Pump
Install in the reverse order of removal while being 1) Check that the fuel pump has no deformation,
careful of the following. cracks or other damages.
Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or 2) Connect battery positive terminal to terminal No.
foreign matter before installation. 5 and battery ground terminal to terminal No. 6, and
Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position inspect the fuel pump operation.
shown in the figure. WARNING:
Insert the protrusion (B) of gasket to the fuel Wipe off fuel completely.
pump upper plate. (3 places) Keep the battery as far apart from fuel pump
Align the protrusion (C) of fuel pump assembly as possible.
with the cutout on the fuel pump upper plate. Do not run the fuel pump for a long time un-
Tighten the nuts to the specified torque in the order non-load condition.
der as shown in the figure.
After assembly, install the rubber cap (D) to the
2 1
position shown in the figure.
4 3
NOTE: 6 5
Use a new gasket.
Do not forget to install the rubber cap (D).
Tightening torque:
4.4 Nm (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb)
(C)
2 FU-04110
4 7
(B) (B)
6 5
(D)
(a) 8 3
1 (A)
(B) FU-05012
FU(H4DOTC)-80
12LE_US.book 81
Fuel Level Sensor

27.Fuel Level Sensor 4) Press two claws (A) of the fuel level sensor, and
slide the fuel level sensor in the direction of the ar-
A: REMOVAL row to remove the fuel level sensor.
WARNING:
working area. (A) (A)
CAUTION:
spill.
FU-05015
NOTE:
The fuel level sensor is built in fuel pump assembly. B: INSTALLATION
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to Install in the reverse order of removal.
FU(H4DOTC)-79, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel filter as- C: INSPECTION
sembly. 1) Check that the fuel level sensor has no damage.
2) Measure the fuel level sensor float position.
NOTE:
When inspecting the fuel level sensor, perform the
work with the sensor installed to the fuel pump.
(1)
FU-05013
(A)
3) Remove the harness from the hooks (A) on the
fuel chamber assembly and remove the fuel tem-
(2)
perature sensor (B) from fuel chamber assembly. (3)
(B)
FU-05016
(1) FULL
(2) EMPTY
(3) Fuel tank seating surface
(A)
(B)
FULL to Fuel tank seating
126.44 mm (4.9760.157 in)
surface (A)
FU-05014 EMPTY to Fuel tank seating
11.04 mm (0.4330.157 in)
surface (B)
FU(H4DOTC)-81
12LE_US.book 82
Fuel Level Sensor

3) Measure the resistance between fuel level sen-

sor terminals.
(A)
(B)
2 1
4 3
6 5
FU-05017

FULL (A) 8.71.0
1 and 4
EMPTY (B) 139.12.0
FU(H4DOTC)-82
12LE_US.book 83

28.Fuel Sub Level Sensor 6) Disconnect the connector (A) from fuel sub level
sensor, and remove the clip (B) securing the fuel
A: REMOVAL cord from fuel sub level sensor protector.
WARNING:
working area.
(B)
CAUTION: (A)
spill.
FU-05018
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- 7) Remove the bolts (A) securing the fuel sub level
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> sensor protector to the fuel sub level sensor upper
2) Drain fuel. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, DRAIN- plate, and remove the fuel sub level sensor protec-
ING FUEL (WITH SUBARU SELECT MONITOR), tor.
PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 8) Disconnect the quick connector on the fuel sub
3) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. delivery tube (B). <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-88, RE-
MOVAL, Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation
Lines.>
(A)
IG-02107 (B)

FU-05019
5) Remove the service hole cover. 9) Remove the nuts securing the fuel sub level sen-
sor upper plate to the fuel tank and remove the fuel
sub level sensor upper plate.
FU-06348
FU-04569
10) Remove the fuel sub level sensor from the fuel
tank.
FU(H4DOTC)-83
12LE_US.book 84

Install in the reverse order of removal while being 1) Check that the fuel sub level sensor has no dam-
careful of the following. age.
Make sure the sealing portion is free from fuel or 2) Measure the fuel sub level sensor float position.
Align protrusion (A) of the gasket to the position (A)
(1) (3)
Align protrusion (B) of the fuel sub level sensor to
the cutout in the fuel sub level sensor upper plate.
After tightening the bolts to the specified torque (B)
in the order indicated in the figure, install the fuel
sub level sensor protector.
NOTE: (2)
Use a new gasket. FU-04213
Tightening torque: (1) FULL

4.4 Nm (0.4 kgf-m, 3.2 ft-lb) (2) EMPTY
4 (3) Datum points
2
6
FULL to Datum point (A) 6.43.5 mm (0.2520.138 in)
EMPTY to Datum point (B) 163.33.5 mm (6.4290.138 in)
5
1
3) Measure the resistance between fuel sub level
(a) (B)
sensor terminals.
3
(A)
FU-04533
(A)
(B)
FU-05020
2 1
FU-04214

FULL (A) 8.71.0
1 and 2
EMPTY (B) 270.94.0
FU(H4DOTC)-84
12LE_US.book 85
Fuel Filter
29.Fuel Filter 5) Remove the fuel pump holder from the fuel filter
assembly.
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
FU-05023
spill.
Be careful not to drop or apply any impact to 6) Remove the fuel pump from the fuel filter assem-
the fuel pump during work. This may deterio- bly.
rate its performance.
NOTE:
The fuel filter is built in fuel pump assembly.
1) Remove the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-79, REMOVAL, Fuel Pump.>
2) Remove the fuel level sensor and fuel tempera-
ture sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, REMOVAL,
Fuel Level Sensor.>
3) Disconnect the connector from the fuel filter as-
sembly.
FU-05021
FU-05024
4) Disengage the claw connecting the fuel filter as-
sembly and fuel chamber assembly, and separate
fuel filter assembly and fuel chamber assembly.
FU-05022
FU(H4DOTC)-85
12LE_US.book 86
Fuel Filter
B: INSTALLATION Check that the claw connecting the fuel filter as-
sembly and fuel chamber assembly is securely fas-
1) Assemble the gasket spacer (A) and support
tened.
rubber cushion (B) to the fuel pump, and install the
fuel pump to the fuel filter assembly.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket spacer.
(B)
Use a new support rubber cushion.
Apply gasoline to the surface of gasket spacer
and support rubber cushion.
(B)
(A)
(A)
(A)
FU-03889
FU-05025
2) Install the fuel pump holder to the fuel filter as-

sembly.
FU-05022
4) Connect the fuel pump connector.
FU-03886
3) Install the pump module spring (A) to fuel filter

assembly, and install the fuel chamber assembly
FU-05021
(B).
5) Install the fuel level sensor and fuel temperature
NOTE:
sensor. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, INSTALLA-
Use a new fuel chamber assembly.
TION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
6) Inspect the fuel level sensor. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-81, INSPECTION, Fuel Level Sen-
sor.>
7) Install the fuel pump assembly. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-80, INSTALLATION, Fuel Pump.>
FU(H4DOTC)-86
12LE_US.book 87
Fuel Damper
30.Fuel Damper
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
2) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose (A) and fuel re-
turn hose (B) from the fuel damper, and remove the
fuel damper.
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the delivery side with the
return side of the fuel damper.
(A)
(A)
(B)
(B)
FU-06353
B: INSTALLATION
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the delivery side with
the return side of the fuel damper.
For information about connecting fuel delivery
hose and fuel return hose, refer to Fuel Delivery,
Return & Evaporation Lines. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-93, CONNECTING THE FUEL DE-
LIVERY HOSE, FUEL RETURN HOSE AND FUEL
HOSE, INSTALLATION, Fuel Delivery, Return and
Evaporation Lines.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel damper has no deformation,
or loose part.
FU(H4DOTC)-87
12LE_US.book 88
Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines

31.Fuel Delivery, Return and Evaporation Lines

A: REMOVAL
FU-05027
WARNING:
CAUTION:
1) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCE-
DURE, Fuel.>
2) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler cap.
3) Remove the floor mat. <Ref. to EI-162, REMOVAL, Floor Mat.>
4) In the engine compartment, disconnect the fuel delivery hoses, fuel return hoses and evaporation hoses.
CAUTION:
Catch the fuel from hoses using a container or cloth.
(1) Remove the connect check cover from the fuel delivery hose and fuel return hose.
FU-05028
(2) Set the ST to the fuel pipe.

ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RELEASE
FU(H4DOTC)-88
12LE_US.book 89

(3) Disconnect the quick connector of the fuel

delivery hose and fuel return hose by pushing
the ST in the direction of the arrow. (F)
(4) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapo- (D)
ration hose from the fuel pipe. (E)
(B)
ST (C) (A)
FU-05030
(A)
8) Remove the fuel pipe assembly from vehicle.
(C) 9) Disconnect the quick connector, then disconnect
(B)
the fuel delivery tube, fuel return tube and fuel sub
delivery tube.
FU-06354 When using ST
1. Attach ST to the pipe and push ST in the direc-
tion of arrow mark to disconnect the quick connec-
tor.
LEASE
5) Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-
68, REMOVAL, Fuel Tank.> CAUTION:
6) Remove the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, Be careful not to spill fuel.
REMOVAL, Mud Guard.> Catch the fuel from hoses using a contain-
7) Remove the purge hose (A), purge pipe (B), air er or cloth.
vent hose (C), PCV outlet hose (D), PCV drain To disconnect the connector, hold (C)
hose (E) and drain tube assembly (F). shown in the figure and pull in axial direction.
NOTE: If the connector and pipe are sticking to
Disconnect the quick connector as shown in the fig- each other, push and pull the connector with
ure. ST pushed, and then pull the connector after
it starts moving freely.
1
2 bend or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is
NOTE:
ered with dust.
1
(C)
(a) ST
1
2
(A)
(C)
(B)
FU-05506
(A) Quick connector

(B) Pipe
(b)
1 (C) Connector holding position
EC-02590
(a) Air vent hose (C), drain tube ASSY (F)

(b) PCV outlet hose (D), PCV drain hose (E)
FU(H4DOTC)-89
12LE_US.book 90

2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign 2. To prevent from damaging or entering foreign
matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with matter, wrap the pipes and quick connectors with
plastic bag etc. plastic bag etc.
CAUTION: CAUTION:
When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect When reusing the retainer, do not disconnect
the retainer from the connector. the retainer from the pipe.
FU-01333 FU-05507
When not using ST 10) Remove the evaporation pipe.

1. Push the retainer in the direction of the arrow, (1) Remove the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to
disconnect the quick connector from pipe. EI-38, REMOVAL, Mud Guard.>
CAUTION: (2) Remove the evaporation hose.
Catch the fuel from hoses using a contain-
er or cloth.
To disconnect the connector, hold (D)
the retainer pushed in the direction of the ar-
row, and then pull the connector after it starts
moving freely. FU-05031
(3) Remove the trunk side trim panel assembly
- side on the RH side. <Ref. to EI-110, REMOV-
AL, Rear Quarter Trim.>
NOTE: (4) Remove the evaporation pipe protector.
ered with dust.
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D) FU-05032
FU-05510
(A) Quick connector

(B) Retainer
(C) Pipe
(D) Connector holding position
FU(H4DOTC)-90
12LE_US.book 91

(5) Remove the evaporation pipe from vehicle. 4) Install the evaporation hose.
FU-05033 FU-05031
B: INSTALLATION 5) Install the rear mud guard RH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-
careful of the following. 2. CONNECTING THE FUEL LINE QUICK
CONNECTOR
1. INSTALLATION OF EVAPORATION PIPE
1) Install the evaporation pipe to the vehicle. CAUTION:
connections. If necessary, clean seal surface of
pipe.
(A)
(a)
(b)
FU-05033
2) Install the evaporation pipe protector.

Tightening torque:
T1: 1 Nm (0.1 kgf-m, 0.7 ft-lb) (B)
T2: 7.5 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
(a)
T2
(b)
T1
FU-05508
FU-05034
(A) When removed using ST
3) Install the trunk side trim panel assembly - side (B) When removed without using ST
on RH side. <Ref. to EI-119, INSTALLATION, Rear (a) Seal surface
Quarter Trim.> (b) Pipe
When reusing the retainer, make sure that

neither scratches nor deformation exist on the
retainer. If it is faulty, use a new part.
FU(H4DOTC)-91
12LE_US.book 92

1) Connect the quick connector to pipe. When connecting the connector, do not bend
CAUTION: or twist the tube forcibly. If the tube is bent, re-
place with a new part.
ly connected. (A) (a) (d)
(b)
(c)
(A)
(d)
(B)
(C)
FU-05511 (B)
(a) (d)
(A) Quick connector
(B) Retainer
(b)
(C) Pipe
(c)
Make sure the two retainer pawls are en-
gaged in their mating positions in the quick
connector. (d)
Be sure to inspect tubes and their connec-

To connect the connector, hold (d) shown in
the figure and push in axial direction. (A) When removed using ST
(B) When removed without using ST
(a) Quick connector
(b) Retainer
(c) Pipe
(d) Connector holding position
FU(H4DOTC)-92
12LE_US.book 93

3. CONNECTING THE FUEL DELIVERY L = 17.52.5 mm (0.6890.098 in)

HOSE, FUEL RETURN HOSE AND FUEL
(2) (3)
HOSE (1)
Connect the fuel delivery hose, fuel return hose,

and fuel hose as shown in the figure.
CAUTION:
If the connection portion has a spool or stop-
per, do not allow the end of the hose to bend or L/2
ride over by inserting the hose too deep.
Be sure to inspect hoses and their connec- L
NOTE: (1) Hose

Use new fuel delivery hose, fuel return hose, and (2) Clip
fuel hose. (3) Pipe
Tightening torque:
1.25 Nm (0.1 kgf-m, 0.9 ft-lb) 5. CONNECTING THE EVAPORATION LINE
QUICK CONNECTOR
L1: 2.51.5 mm (0.0980.059 in)
CAUTION:
L2: 22.52.5 mm (0.8860.098 in) Make sure there are no damage or dust on
(3) (4) (5) (6) connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
face of the pipe.
(1) Make sure that the quick connector is secure-
ly connected.
L1
L2
ure.
(2)
L1 FU-04503
(1) When there is a spool or bump

(2) When there is no spool or bump
(3) Pipe
(4) Spool or bump
(5) Clamp
(6) Hose
4. EVAPORATION HOSE CONNECTION

Connect the evaporation hose to the pipe with an
overlap of 15 to 20 mm (0.59 to 0.79 in).
FU-05035
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the fuel pipe has no deformation,
2) Check that the hose and tube have no cracks,
FU(H4DOTC)-93
12LE_US.book 94

32.Fuel System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
a. Fuel pump does not operate.
Inspect contact, especially ground, and tighten it
Defective terminal contact
securely.
Trouble in electromagnetic or electronic cir-
Replace the faulty parts.
cuit parts
b. Decline of fuel pump function Replace the fuel pump.
Insufficient fuel sup-
ply to injector Replace the fuel filter. Clean or replace the fuel tank if
c. Clogged fuel filter
necessary.
Clean, correct or replace the pipe, hose or tube of the
d. Clogged or bent pipe, hose or tube of fuel line
fuel line.
Check the fuel line connections, and repair or replace
e. Air is mixed in fuel system.
the defective part.
f. Damaged diaphragm of pressure regulator Replace the pressure regulator.
a. Loose connection in pipe, hose or tube of fuel Check the fuel line connections, and repair or replace
line the defective part.
Leakage or run-out b. Cracks in pipe, hose or tube of fuel line Replace the pipe, hose or tube of the fuel line.
of fuel c. Cracks or defective welded part of fuel tank Replace the fuel tank.
Clean, correct or replace the pipe, hose or tube of the
d. Clogged or bent pipe, hose or tube of fuel line
fuel line.
a. Loose connection in pipe, hose or tube of fuel Check the fuel line connections, and repair or replace
Gasoline smell line the defective part.
inside of compart-
b. Improper installation of rubber saucer Correct or replace the rubber saucer.
ment
c. Defective canister Replace the canister.
a. Defective operation of fuel level sensor Replace the fuel level sensor.
Defective fuel gauge
b. Defective operation of combination meter Replace the combination meter.
Noise a. Big operation noise or vibration from fuel pump Replace the fuel pump.
NOTE:
When the vehicle is left unattended for an extended period of time, water may accumulate in the fuel tank.
Fill fuel fully to prevent the problem.
In snow-covered areas, mountainous areas, skiing areas, etc. where ambient temperatures drop to 0C
(32F) or less throughout the winter season, use a water removing agent in the fuel system to prevent freez-
ing fuel system and accumulating water.
When water is accumulated in fuel filter, fill the water removing agent in the fuel tank.
Before using water removing agent, follow the cautions noted on the bottle.
FU(H4DOTC)-94
12LE_US.book 1
EMISSION CONTROL (AUX. EMISSION

CONTROL DEVICES)
EC(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Front Catalytic Converter ...........................................................................3
3. Rear Catalytic Converter ............................................................................4
4. Canister ......................................................................................................5
5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve ....................................................................9
7. Fuel Temperature Sensor ........................................................................15
9. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor .....................................................................17
10. Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly .............................................19
11. Drain Filter ................................................................................................20
12. Shut Valve ................................................................................................21
13. Drain Valve ...............................................................................................22
14. PCV Hose Assembly ................................................................................23
15. PCV Valve ................................................................................................24
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
A: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
B: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
hose.
This tool is made by the French company
CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
To make it easier to obtain, it has been provided
with a tool number.
ST18353AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Mighty Vac Used for inspecting the fuel tank pressure sensor.
EC(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 3
Front Catalytic Converter

2. Front Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
center exhaust pipe (front). Refer to Center Ex-
haust Pipe for removal procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
haust Pipe for installation procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-13, INSTALLATION, Center Ex-
haust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EC(H4DOTC)-3
12LE_US.book 4
Rear Catalytic Converter

3. Rear Catalytic Converter

A: REMOVAL
haust Pipe for removal procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Center Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
haust Pipe for installation procedures. <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-13, INSTALLATION, Center Ex-
haust Pipe.>
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EC(H4DOTC)-4
12LE_US.book 5
Canister
4. Canister 5) Remove the clip holding the rear wiring harness.
A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the rear wheel LH.
3) Remove the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38,
4) Disconnect the quick connectors of the vent tube
(A), canister drain tube (B), charge tube (C) and
PCV drain tube (D), and remove the tubes from
tube clamp (E). EC-02592
NOTE: 6) Remove the canister from vehicle.
ure.
1
(a)
1
EC-02593
(b)
1
EC-02590
7) Disconnect the connector from drain valve.

(b) Charge tube (C) and PCV drain tube (D)
(A) (D)
EC-02594
(E)
(B) (C)
EC-02911
EC(H4DOTC)-5
12LE_US.book 6
Canister
8) Disconnect the vent tube (A), canister drain tube B: INSTALLATION

(B), charge tube (C) and PCV drain tube (D) from
1) Connect the vent tube (A), canister drain tube
canister, and remove the canister drain tube (B)
(B), charge tube (C) and PCV drain tube (D) to can-
and PCV drain tube (D) from canister clip (E).
ister, and install the canister drain tube (B) and
NOTE: PCV drain tube (D) to canister clip (E).
CAUTION:
ure.
1 connections. If necessary, clean the seal sur-
2 face of the pipe.
ly connected.
NOTE:
ure.
(a)
1
(a)
1
(b) EC-02590

(B)
(b) EC-02596
(A)
(D) (a) Vent tube (A) and canister drain tube (B)
(C)
(E)
EC-02595
EC(H4DOTC)-6
12LE_US.book 7
Canister
3) Install the canister to the vehicle.

Tightening torque:
(B) 8 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.9 ft-lb)
(A)
(D)
(C)
(E)
EC-02595
2) Connect the connector to the drain valve.
EC-02593
4) Secure the rear wiring harness with clip.
EC-02594
EC-02592
EC(H4DOTC)-7
12LE_US.book 8
Canister
5) Attach all tubes to tube clamp (E), and connect C: INSPECTION

the quick connectors of the vent tube (A), canister
1) Check that the canister has no deformation,
drain tube (B), charge tube (C) and PCV drain tube
(D).
2) Check that the tube has no cracks, damage or
CAUTION: loose part.
face of the pipe.
ly connected.
NOTE:
ure.
(a)
(b) EC-02596

(A) (D)
(E)
(B) (C)
EC-02911
6) Install the rear mud guard LH. <Ref. to EI-38, IN-

8) Install the rear wheel LH.
Tightening torque:
120 Nm (12.2 kgf-m, 88.5 ft-lb)
EC(H4DOTC)-8
12LE_US.book 9

5. Purge Control Solenoid Valve 6) Remove the nut securing the purge control sole-
noid valve 1 to the solenoid valve bracket assem-
A: REMOVAL bly.
1. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 1
EC-02583
7) Disconnect the connector (A) and vacuum hose

(B) from the purge control solenoid valve 1, and re-
move the purge control solenoid valve 1.
IG-02107
(B)
4) Remove the bolt securing the solenoid valve
bracket assembly from intake manifold.
(A)
EC-02540

EC-02581
5) Remove the bolts securing the PCV pipe and en-

gine harness from intake manifold.
IG-02107

EC-02582
EC(H4DOTC)-9
12LE_US.book 10

4) Remove the bolt securing the solenoid valve B: INSTALLATION

bracket assembly from intake manifold.
NOTE:
Connect the vacuum hose as shown in the figure.
(A)
EC-02581
5) Remove the bolts securing the PCV pipe and en-

gine harness from intake manifold.
(c) (a)
(B)
EC-02582
6) Remove the nut securing the purge control sole-

noid valve 2 to the solenoid valve bracket assem- (c) (b)
EC-02543
bly.
(A) Purge control solenoid valve 1
(B) Purge control solenoid valve 2
(a) To intake manifold
(b) To intake duct
(c) To fuel pipe
EC-02584
7) Disconnect the connector (A) and vacuum hose

(B) from the purge control solenoid valve 2, and re-
move the purge control solenoid valve 2.
(A)
(B)
EC-02623
EC(H4DOTC)-10
12LE_US.book 11

Tightening torque: 2. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE 2

6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
Connect the vacuum hose as shown in the figure.
(A)
EC-02583
(c) (a)
(B)
EC-02582
Tightening torque:
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) (c) (b)
EC-02543
(A) Purge control solenoid valve 1

(B) Purge control solenoid valve 2
(a) To intake manifold
(b) To intake duct
(c) To fuel pipe
EC-02581
EC(H4DOTC)-11
12LE_US.book 12

Tightening torque: C: INSPECTION

6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
1. PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
1) Check that the purge control solenoid valve has
no deformation, cracks or other damages.
2) Measure the resistance between the purge con-
trol solenoid valve terminals.
2 1
EC-02584
EC-02426

Purge control 32 2
solenoid valve 1 (when 20C (68F))
1 and 2
Purge control 24 3
EC-02582 solenoid valve 2 (when 20C (68F))
Tightening torque: 3) Check that air does not come out from (B) when
19 Nm (1.9 kgf-m, 14.0 ft-lb) air is blown into (A).
Purge control solenoid valve 1
(B) (A)
EC-02581
EC-02430
(B) (A)
EC-02550
EC(H4DOTC)-12
12LE_US.book 13

4) With terminal No. 1 connected to the battery

positive terminal and terminal No. 2 to the battery
ground terminal, check that air comes out from (B)
when air is blown into (A).
2 1
(B) (A)
EC-02433
2 1
(B) (A)
EC-02551
looseness.
EC(H4DOTC)-13
12LE_US.book 14
Fuel Level Sensor

6. Fuel Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the FU
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81,
REMOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedures, refer to the FU
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, IN-
STALLATION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the
FU(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81,
INSPECTION, Fuel Level Sensor.>
EC(H4DOTC)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Fuel Temperature Sensor

7. Fuel Temperature Sensor C: INSPECTION

1) Check that the fuel temperature sensor has no
A: REMOVAL deformation, cracks or other damages.
Fuel temperature sensor is integrated with the fuel 2) Check the resistance between the fuel tempera-
level sensor. Refer to Fuel Level Sensor for re- ture sensor terminals.
moval procedure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, RE-
MOVAL, Fuel Level Sensor.> CAUTION:
When measuring the resistance, check the cir-
cuit tester specification and be careful not to
turn on electricity 3 V or more to prevent dam-
aging the fuel temperature sensor.
(A)
1 2
3 4
EC-02585
B: INSTALLATION EC-02452
Refer to Fuel Level Sensor for the installation pro- Temperature Terminal No. Standard
cedure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-81, INSTALLA- 9.22.2 k (when the mea-
TION, Fuel Level Sensor.> 10C (14F)
2.50.2 k (when the mea-
20C (68F) 2 and 3
0.84+0.06 0.05 k (when the
50C (122F)
measured current is 1.0 mA)
(A)
EC-02585
EC(H4DOTC)-15
12LE_US.book 16

8. Fuel Sub Level Sensor

A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to the FU
(H4DOTC) section. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-83,
REMOVAL, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
B: INSTALLATION
INSTALLATION, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedures, refer to the
INSPECTION, Fuel Sub Level Sensor.>
EC(H4DOTC)-16
12LE_US.book 17

9. Fuel Tank Pressure Sensor B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
Tightening torque:
WARNING:
7.35 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.4 ft-lb)
working area.
EC-02599
C: INSPECTION
IG-02107
1. FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR
cap. 1) Check that the fuel tank pressure sensor does
3) Lift up the vehicle. not have deformation, cracks or other damages.
4) Disconnect connector (A) from fuel tank pres- 2) Connect dry-cell battery positive terminal to ter-
sure sensor. minal No. 3 and dry-cell battery ground terminal to
5) Pull out the vacuum hose (B) from vehicle. terminal No. 1, circuit tester positive terminal to ter-
6) Remove the fuel tank pressure sensor from the minal No. 2 and the circuit tester negative terminal
bracket. to terminal No. 1.
(A)
NOTE:
(B) dry-cell battery is 1.6 V or more. And also check the
and 5.2 V.
3 2 1
EC-02597
7) Disconnect the pressure hose from fuel tank

pressure sensor and remove the fuel tank pressure
sensor.
1.5V 1.5V 1.5V

EC-02598
4.8 5.2V
FU-04486
EC(H4DOTC)-17
12LE_US.book 18

3) Check the voltage at a normal atmospheric pres-

sure.
NOTE:
the standard value.
Approx. 2.5 V
2 (+) and 1 ()
(when 25C (77F))

on the fuel tank pressure sensor.
(A)
EC-02586

CAUTION:
Be sure to apply pressure within a range of 10
20 kPa (0.1 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1.45 2.90 psi).
Otherwise the fuel tank pressure sensor will be
damaged.
Terminal
Pressure Standard
No.
6.67 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2, Approx. 0.5 V (when
0.97 psi) 2 (+) and 25C (77F))
6.67 kPa (0.07 kgf/cm2, 1 () Approx. 4.5 V (when
0.97 psi) 25C (77F))
Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.
EC(H4DOTC)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Assembly

10.Pressure Control Solenoid C: INSPECTION

Valve Assembly 1. PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
A: REMOVAL VALVE ASSEMBLY
1) Check that the pressure control solenoid valve
assembly has no deformation, cracks or other dam-
ages.
2) Check the resistance between the pressure con-
trol solenoid valve assembly terminals.
2 1
IG-02107

3) Disconnect connector (A) from the pressure con-
trol solenoid valve assembly. EC-02587
4) Disconnect the PCV drain hose (B), PCV inlet
hose (C) and PCV outlet hose (D) from the pres- Terminal No. Standard
sure control solenoid valve assembly. 1 and 2 20 30
5) Remove the nut (E) securing the bracket to the
fuel tank and remove the pressure control solenoid 2. OTHER INSPECTIONS
valve assembly. Check that the hose has no cracks, damage or
loose part.
(E)
(B)
(A)
(D) (C)
EC-03069
6) Remove the pressure control solenoid valve

from the bracket.
EC-03070
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
EC(H4DOTC)-19
12LE_US.book 20
Drain Filter
11.Drain Filter
A: SPECIFICATION
Drain valve is a non-disassembled part, so do not
remove the drain filter from drain valve. Refer to
Canister for removal and installation procedures.
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-6, INSTALLATION, Canis-
ter.>
EC(H4DOTC)-20
12LE_US.book 21
Shut Valve
12.Shut Valve
A: REMOVAL
WARNING:
working area.
CAUTION:
1) Remove the fuel filler pipe. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-75, REMOVAL, Fuel Filler Pipe.>
2) Remove the shut valve from the fuel filler pipe.
EC-02602
3) Disconnect the evaporation hose from shut

valve and remove the shut valve.
EC-02912
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
4.5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.3 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the shut valve does not have defor-
2) Check that the evaporation hose has no cracks,
EC(H4DOTC)-21
12LE_US.book 22
Drain Valve
13.Drain Valve
A: REMOVAL
Drain valve is integrated with canister. Refer to
Canister for removal procedure. <Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Canister.>
B: INSTALLATION
Refer to Canister for the installation procedure.
<Ref. to EC(H4DOTC)-6, INSTALLATION, Canis-
ter.>
C: INSPECTION
Check the resistance between drain valve termi-
nals.
2 1
EC-02455

1 and 2 20 30
EC(H4DOTC)-22
12LE_US.book 23
PCV Hose Assembly

14.PCV Hose Assembly B: INSTALLATION

1) Install the PCV hose assembly to the cylinder
A: REMOVAL block RH and blow-by pipe assembly and connect
CAUTION: the vacuum hose to the intake manifold.
Do not remove except when the hose is broken. NOTE:
1) Remove the collector cover. Use a new clamp for the PCV hose assembly, fit
2) Remove the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> clamp as shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
3) Disconnect the vacuum hose from intake mani- ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
fold and remove the PCV hose assembly from cyl-
inder block RH and blow-by pipe assembly.
NOTE: ST
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose assembly by fit-
ting the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp as shown in the figure, and unlock the
clamp.
ME-04374
ST
ME-04374
EC-02588

C: INSPECTION
Check the PCV hose assembly for cracks, damage
or looseness.
EC-02588
EC(H4DOTC)-23
12LE_US.book 24
PCV Valve
15.PCV Valve B: INSTALLATION

1) Connect the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum hose
A: REMOVAL (B) to the PCV valve.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Do not remove unless the PCV valve is broken. Use a new clamp for the vacuum hose (B), fit the
1) Remove the collector cover. cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
2) Remove the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.> ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
3) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum
hose (B) from the PCV valve and remove the PCV
valve. ST
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the vacuum hose (B) by fitting
the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp.
ME-04374
ST
(A)
(B)
ME-04374
EC-02589

(A)
C: INSPECTION
(B)
1. PCV VALVE
1) Check that the PCV valve has no deformation,
EC-02589 cracks or other damages.
2) Check that air is discharged from (B) when air is
blown into (A).
(B) (A)
EC-02507
EC(H4DOTC)-24
12LE_US.book 25
PCV Valve
3) Check that air does not come out from (B) when
air is blown into (A).
(A) (B)
EC-02508
looseness.
EC(H4DOTC)-25
12LE_US.book 26
PCV Valve
EC(H4DOTC)-26
12LE_US.book 1
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
IN(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Air Cleaner Element ...................................................................................7
3. Air Cleaner Case ........................................................................................8
4. Air Intake Boot ..........................................................................................10
5. Air Intake Duct ..........................................................................................12
6. Intake Duct ...............................................................................................13
7. Intercooler ................................................................................................17
8. Turbocharger ............................................................................................20
9. Oil Catch Tank .........................................................................................23
10. Scavenge Pump .......................................................................................25
11. Air By-pass Valve .....................................................................................26
12. Resonator Chamber .................................................................................28
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
A: COMPONENT
1. AIR CLEANER
T1
(1)
(3)
(2)
(12)
(4)
T2
(13)
T4
(5)
(6)
T4
T2 T3
(12) (7)
(8)
(14) (9)
(11)
T4 (15) (10)
(12)
T2
(17)
(16)
(12)
T5 T4
T2
IN-02982
(1) Mass air flow and intake air tem- (9) Air intake duct (17) Duct bracket
perature sensor
(2) Air cleaner case (rear) (10) Clip
(3) Clip (11) Resonator chamber Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Air cleaner element (12) Clamp T1: 1 (0.1, 0.7)
(5) Air cleaner case (front) (13) Air intake boot A T2: 2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
(6) Cushion (14) Turbo duct T3: 6 (0.6, 4.4)
(7) Spacer (15) Air intake boot B T4: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(8) Cushion (16) Cushion T5: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
IN(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. INTAKE DUCT
T2 (15)
(13)
(21) T3
(12) (8)
(8)
(8) (8)
(21) (8)
(14) (20)
(18)
(18)
A (18) T3
(22) T3 (18)
(21) (8) B I
(16)
C D
I (8)
C D
E
A (17)
F
B T3
G H (18)
(10)
G H
(11) (18)
E
F
(B)
(9)
(5) (7) L
(6)
(8)
(23) J
(21) K (A)
T1
(3)
(4)
(19)
T2
(2)
J
L (1)
K
IN-03033
(A) To oil catch tank (B) To air by-pass valve
(1) Intake duct (11) Vacuum control hose (21) Clamp

(2) Boost hose ASSY (12) Blow-by pipe (22) Clip
(3) Air control hose (13) PCV pipe (23) Clip
(4) Wastegate control solenoid valve (14) Blow-by pipe ASSY A
(5) Vacuum hose A (15) PCV hose ASSY Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Vacuum hose B (16) Blow-by pipe ASSY B T1: 4 (0.4, 3.0)
(7) Vacuum hose C (17) Water pipe ASSY T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(8) Clamp (18) Clamp T3: 6.5 (0.7, 4.8)
(9) Vacuum hose D (19) O-ring
(10) Hose clip stay ASSY (20) Clamp
IN(H4DOTC)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. INTERCOOLER
(9)
T1
(5) T2
(10)
(3)
(4)
T2
(1)
T1
(5)
(5)
(6)
(13)
T1
(12)
T2
(14) (2)
(11) (8)
(15) (7) T2
T1
(14)
IN-02903
(1) Intercooler (8) Intercooler stay LH (15) Intake boot

(2) Clip (9) Cushion
(3) Spacer (10) Intake duct B Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Cushion (11) O-ring T1: 3 (0.3, 2.2)
(5) Clamp (12) Clamp T2: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(6) Intake duct A (13) Air by-pass valve
(7) Intercooler stay RH (14) Clip
IN(H4DOTC)-4
12LE_US.book 5
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. TURBOCHARGER
(3)
T3
(2)
(4)
(5) T1
(4)
(6)
(7) (1)
(8)
(7) T5
(7)
(13)
(10)
(11)
(9)
(7)
(10) T1
T4
(12)
(14)
(15)
T1
T1
T2
IN-02983
(1) Turbocharger (9) Water pipe Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Oil inlet pipe (10) Union bolt T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Union bolt (11) Exhaust stay T2: 10.5 (1.1, 7.7)
(4) Gasket (12) Exhaust cover T3: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(5) Boost hose ASSY (13) Gasket T4: 31.5 (3.2, 23.2)
(6) Gasket (14) Oil catch tank T5: 36.5 (3.7, 26.9)
(7) Gasket (15) Oil catch tank stay
(8) Water pipe connector
IN(H4DOTC)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
B: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
C: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
hose.
CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
with a tool number.
ST18353AA000
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Mighty Vac Used for checking waste gate actuator and air by-pass valve.
IN(H4DOTC)-6
12LE_US.book 7
Air Cleaner Element

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2. Air Cleaner Element B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Remove the suction hose from intake duct and CAUTION:
air cleaner case (rear). Be sure to use SUBARU genuine air cleaner el-
ement depending on the engine type when re-
placing the air cleaner elements. Using other air
cleaner element may affect the engine perfor-
mance.
NOTE:
Check that there are no foreign objects in the air
cleaner case.
If the protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) is
removed when removing the air cleaner element,
align the protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to
the hole on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02679
IN-02723
2) Remove the clip (A) from the air cleaner case C: INSPECTION
(front). 1) Check that the air cleaner element has no defor-
2) Check the air cleaner element for excessive dirt.
(A)
IN-02724
3) Open the air cleaner case to remove the air

cleaner element.
IN-02725
IN(H4DOTC)-7
12LE_US.book 8
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3. Air Cleaner Case 5) Loosen the clamp (C) securing the air intake
boot, and remove the clip (D) from the air cleaner
A: REMOVAL case (front).
(C)
(B)
(A)
(D)
IN-02726
IG-02107 6) Remove the air cleaner case (rear) and air

2) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to cleaner element.
IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> 7) Remove bolts (A) and nuts (B) which secure the
3) Remove the suction hose from intake duct and air cleaner case (front) to the body, and remove the
air cleaner case (rear). air cleaner case (front).
(B)
(A)
IN-03034
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the bolt (A) and nut (B) which secure the
air cleaner case (front) to the body.
Tightening torque:
Bolt (A)
6 Nm (0.6 kgf-m, 4.4 ft-lb)
Nut (B)
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
IN-02723 (B)
4) Disconnect the connector (A) from the mass air

move the clip (B) which holds the mass air flow and
intake air temperature sensor harness.
(A)
IN-03034
IN(H4DOTC)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Air Cleaner Case

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
2) Set the air cleaner element to the air cleaner 6) Install the suction hose to intake duct and air
case (front), and install the air cleaner case (rear). cleaner case (rear).
NOTE:
When installing the air cleaner case (rear), align the
protrusion of the air cleaner case (rear) to the hole
on the air cleaner case (front) to install.
IN-02679
3) Install the clip (A) to the air cleaner case (front).

4) Hold the mass air flow and intake air tempera-
ture sensor harness with the clip (B), and connect
the connector (C) to the mass air flow and intake air
temperature sensor.
IN-02723
(C) (B) 7) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
(A)
IN-02728
5) Tighten the clamp which secures the air intake

boot.
Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb) IG-02107
C: INSPECTION
Check that the air cleaner case has no deforma-
IN-02729
IN(H4DOTC)-9
12LE_US.book 10
Air Intake Boot

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
4. Air Intake Boot B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
1) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. NOTE:
When installing the air intake boot to the vehicle,
pay attention to the mounting hole position, and
align the protrusion for stopping rotation of cushion
to the cutout portion on the turbo duct.
(B)
IG-02107 (A)

3) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
4) Lift up the vehicle. (E)
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> (G)
6) Remove the air intake boot from the intake duct. (F)
(D)
(G)
(F)
(C)
IN-02691
(A) Attachment hole

(B) Not used
IN-03035 (C) Turbo duct
7) Lower the vehicle. (D) Cushion
8) Remove the nuts which secure the air intake (E) Duct bracket
boot to the vehicle, and remove the air intake boot (F) Cutout portion
from the upper side of the vehicle. (G) Protrusion portion
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
IN-03047
IN-02685
IN(H4DOTC)-10
12LE_US.book 11
Air Intake Boot

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
IN-03048
C: DISASSEMBLY
Remove the air intake boot from the turbo duct.
IN-03049
D: ASSEMBLY
Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
E: INSPECTION
Check that the air intake boot and turbo duct have
no cracks, damage or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-11
12LE_US.book 12
Air Intake Duct

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
5. Air Intake Duct

A: REMOVAL
Remove the clip which secures air intake duct then
remove the air intake duct.
IN-02731
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the air intake duct has no deforma-
2) Inspect that no foreign objects are mixed in the
air intake duct.
IN(H4DOTC)-12
12LE_US.book 13
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
6. Intake Duct 7) Disconnect the connector from the wastegate

control solenoid valve.
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
Do not remove except when the intake duct is
broken.
IN-02763
8) Loosen the clamp securing the air intake boot

(A) to the intake duct, and remove the air intake
boot (A) from intake duct.
9) Disconnect the vacuum hose (B) from intake
duct, and unlock the clip securing the air by-pass
IG-02107 valve (C) to the intake duct.
3) Disconnect the vacuum hose from PCV pipe. NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the vacuum hose (B) by fitting
clamp.
ST
IN-03036
4) Disconnect the vacuum hose (A) from blow-by

pipe and remove the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum
hose (C) from clip (B).
ME-04374
(C)
(A)
(B)
(B)
(C)
IN-02733
(A)
IN-03037
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 10) Disconnect the air control hose (A).
IN(H4DOTC)-13
12LE_US.book 14
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
11) Remove the bolts which secure the intake duct 2) Install the air by-pass valve (C) and air intake
to the turbocharger, and remove the intake duct. boot (A) to the intake duct, and connect the vacuum
hose (B) to the intake duct.
NOTE:
Use a new clamp for the vacuum hose (B), fit the
cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
(A) ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
ST
IN-03038
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the bolts which secure the intake duct to
the turbocharger, and connect the air control hose
(A).
NOTE: ME-04374
Use new O-rings.
Be careful not to pinch the O-ring. Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) (B)
(C)
(A)
(A)
IN-03037
3) Connect the connector to the wastegate control

IN-03038
solenoid valve.
IN-02763

IN(H4DOTC)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
6) Install the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum hose 7) Connect the vacuum hose to PCV pipe.
(C) to the clip (B), and connect the vacuum hose
(A) to the blow-by pipe.
NOTE:
Install the vacuum hose as shown in the figure.
(b)
(a)
(g)
IN-03036
(c)
A
A B
B
C
C D
D
(h)
(e)
E (f)
E IG-02107
F F

(d) C: DISASSEMBLY
IN-03138
1) Remove the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum hose
(a) Blow-by pipe
(B) from intake duct.
(b) PCV pipe
(c) Hose clip stay ASSY
(d) Intake duct (B)
(e) Vacuum hose (C)

(f) Vacuum hose (A) (A)
(g) Clip
(h) Clip
IN-03040
(C)
(A) 2) Remove the wastegate control solenoid valve
and air control hose from the intake duct.
(B)
IN-02733
IN-02765
IN(H4DOTC)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Intake Duct
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the wastegate control solenoid valve and
air control hose to the intake duct.
Use new O-rings.
When tightening the boost control solenoid
valve, check that it is securely seated.
Tightening torque:
4 Nm (0.4 kgf-m, 3.0 ft-lb)
IN-02765
2) Install the vacuum hose (A) and vacuum hose

(B) from intake duct.
(B)
(A)
IN-03040
E: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intake duct, PCV pipe and blow-
by pipe have no deformation, cracks or other dam-
ages.
2) Check that the vacuum hose and air control
hose have no cracks, damage or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Intercooler
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
7. Intercooler (1) Remove the suction hose from intake duct.
A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the clamp (A) which holds the intake
duct to the intercooler, and remove bolts which se-
cure the intercooler to the intercooler stay LH.
IN-02740
(2) Disconnect the connector (A) from power

steering pump, and remove the power steering
pump together with the power steering pump
(A) bracket from engine and stopper rod.
IN-02737
3) Loosen the clamp (A) securing the intake duct to (A)

the intercooler, and remove the bolt securing the in-
tercooler to the intercooler stay RH to remove the
intercooler.
IN-03050

(A) with the power steering pump bracket on RH
side wheel apron.
8) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly.
<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator
IN-03041 Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
4) Remove the brake booster vacuum hose from 9) Remove the engine coolant hose from the clip
the clip (A), and remove the intercooler stay RH (A).
and intercooler stay LH. 10) Remove the bolts which secure the intake duct
to the turbocharger, and remove the air by-pass
valve from the intake duct.
(A)
(A)
IN-03042
5) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-42, IN-02696

REMOVAL, V-belt.>
REMOVAL, Generator.>
7) Remove the power steering pump.
IN(H4DOTC)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Intercooler
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
11) Remove the intake duct from intake manifold. 5) Install the power steering pump.
(1) Install the power steering pump together
with the power steering pump bracket to engine
and stopper rod, and connect the connector (A)
to the power steering pump.
Tightening torque:
Refer to COMPONENT of STARTING/
CHARGING SYSTEMS for the tightening
torque. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-7, GENERATOR
BRACKET, COMPONENT, General Descrip-
IN-03043 tion.>
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the intake duct to the intake manifold. (A)
IN-03050
(2) Install the suction hose to the intake duct.

IN-03043
2) Attach the engine coolant hose to the clip (A).

3) Install the air by-pass valve to the intake duct,
and install the bolts which secure the intake duct to
the turbocharger.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Be careful not to pinch the O-ring.
IN-02740
Tightening torque:
T1: 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb) 6) Install the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-18, IN-
T2: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) STALLATION, Generator.>
(A)
8) Install the intercooler stay RH and intercooler
stay LH, and install the brake booster vacuum hose
to the clip (A).
Tightening torque:
16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
T1
T2
IN-02697
4) Install the radiator sub fan motor assembly.

<Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radi- (A)
IN-03042
IN(H4DOTC)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Intercooler
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
9) Place the intercooler and attach the bolt to se-

cure the intercooler to the intercooler stay RH. And
tighten the clamp to secure the intake duct to the in-
tercooler.
Tightening torque:
T1: 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
T2: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
T2 T1
IN-03044
10) Install the bolts which secure the intercooler to

the intercooler stay LH, and tighten the clamp
which holds the intake duct to the intercooler.
Tightening torque:
T1: 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
T2: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
T2
T1
IN-02743

C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the intercooler and intercooler stay
have no deformation, cracks or other damages.
2) Check that the intake duct has no cracks, dam-
age or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-19
12LE_US.book 20
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
8. Turbocharger 4) Remove the exhaust cover from the turbocharg-

er.
A: REMOVAL
Remove the turbo charger and front exhaust pipe
as a unit. Refer to Front Exhaust Pipe for the re-
moval procedure. <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-5, RE-
MOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.> <Ref. to
EX(H4DOTC)-10, DISASSEMBLY, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
B: INSTALLATION
Refer to Front Exhaust Pipe for the installation
IN-02707
procedure. <Ref. to EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLA-
TION, Front Exhaust Pipe.> <Ref. to 5) Remove the exhaust stay from the turbocharger.
EX(H4DOTC)-11, ASSEMBLY, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the oil inlet pipe from the turbocharger.
IN-02708
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the exhaust stay to the turbocharger.
Tightening torque:
IN-02771
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
2) Remove the water pipe from the turbocharger.
IN-02708
IN-02768
2) Install the exhaust cover to the turbocharger.
3) Remove the water pipe connector from the tur-
bocharger. Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
IN-02769
IN-02707
IN(H4DOTC)-20
12LE_US.book 21
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
3) Install the water pipe connector to the turbo- E: INSPECTION

charger.
1. WASTE GATE ACTUATOR
NOTE:
Use a new gasket. 1) Remove the collector cover.
Tightening torque: EX(H4DOTC)-5, REMOVAL, Front Exhaust Pipe.>
36.5 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.9 ft-lb) 3) Remove the exhaust pipe cover.
IN-02769 EX-02594
4) Install the water pipe to the turbocharger. 4) Remove the boost hose (B) from the waste gate
NOTE: actuator (A) of the turbocharger, and connect the
Use a new gasket. Mighty Vac to the waste gate actuator (A).
Tightening torque:
31.5 Nm (3.2 kgf-m, 23.2 ft-lb)
(D)
(B)
(C)
(A)
IN-02770
(A) Waste gate actuator

IN-02768 (B) Boost hose
5) Install the oil inlet pipe to the turbocharger. (C) Control rod
(D) Control rod stroke
NOTE:
Use a new gasket. 5) Pressurize slowly with the Mighty Vac, and
Tightening torque: check the pressure when the control rod stroke (D)
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) becomes 2 mm (0.08 in). If it is not within the stan-
T2: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) dard, replace the turbocharger assembly.
CAUTION:
T2 Do not pressurize over 85.2 kPa (0.87 kgf/cm2,
12.35 psi) to prevent damaging the waste gate
actuator.
T1 Operating pressure (control rod stroke 2 mm
(0.08 in)):
Standard
70.8 76.7 kPa (0.72 0.78 kgf/cm2, 10.27
11.12 psi)
IN-02772
IN(H4DOTC)-21
12LE_US.book 22
Turbocharger
INTAKE (INDUCTION)

Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
EX-02594
1) Check that the turbocharger and pipe have no
loose part.
3) Check that there are no oil leaks or water leaks
from the pipe attachment section.
IN(H4DOTC)-22
12LE_US.book 23
Oil Catch Tank

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
9. Oil Catch Tank B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
CAUTION:
Use a new gasket.
Do not remove except when the oil catch tank is
When installing the oil catch tank, tighten to the
broken.
specified torque in the alphabetical order shown in
1) Lift up the vehicle. the figure.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> Tightening torque:
3) Remove the engine cover. T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 10.5 Nm (1.1 kgf-m, 7.7 ft-lb)
T1
(a)
T2 (c)
(b)
IN-02746
IN-02767
4) Disconnect vacuum hose (A) and oil outlet hose
(B) from the oil catch tank. Use a new clamp for the vacuum hose, fit the cut
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the vacuum hose (A) by fitting
clamp.
ST
ST
ME-04374
After installing, check the engine oil level and re-

ME-04374 SPECTION, Engine Oil.>
5) Remove bolts and nuts which secure the oil Tightening torque:
catch tank to the turbocharger and oil catch tank 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
stay, and remove the oil catch tank.
(A)
(B)
IN-02746
IN-02747
IN(H4DOTC)-23
12LE_US.book 24
Oil Catch Tank

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the oil catch tank does not have de-
2) Check that the vacuum hose and oil outlet hose
have no cracks, damage or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-24
12LE_US.book 25
Scavenge Pump
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
10.Scavenge Pump
A: REMOVAL
For removal procedures, refer to LU (H4SO) sec-
tion. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-30, REMOVAL, Scavenge
Pump.>
B: INSTALLATION
For installation procedures, refer to LU (H4SO)
section. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-30, INSTALLATION,
Scavenge Pump.>
C: INSPECTION
Refer to LU (H4SO) for inspection procedures.
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-30, INSPECTION, Scavenge
Pump.>
IN(H4DOTC)-25
12LE_US.book 26
Air By-pass Valve

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
11.Air By-pass Valve C: INSPECTION

A: REMOVAL 1. AIR BY-PASS VALVE
1) Remove the collector cover. 1) Check that the air by-pass valve has no defor-
2) Disconnect the vacuum control hose from the mation, cracks or other damages.
PCV pipe, and remove the vacuum control hose 2) Connect the Mighty Vac to the nipple (A) of the
from the clip (A). air by-pass valve.
(A)
(A)
IN-03045 IN-02715
3) Loosen the clamp which holds the air by-pass 3) Using the Mighty Vac, generate the negative
valve to the intake duct. pressure to 93.3 kPa (0.95 kgf/cm2, 13.5 psi).
Check that the Mighty Vac gauge needle holds 10
seconds without falling by 92.6 kPa (0.94 kgf/cm2,
13.4 psi).
4) Set a dial gauge to the end of valve rod of the air
by-pass valve.
IN-02712

6) Remove the air by-pass valve from the intake
duct.
IN-03046 IN-02716
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
IN(H4DOTC)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Air By-pass Valve

INTAKE (INDUCTION)
5) Using the Mighty Vac, generate the negative

pressure, and check the pressure when dial gauge
needle (valve stroke) shows 0.5 mm (0.02 in). If it is
not within the standard, replace the air by-pass
valve.
Opening pressure (valve stroke 0.5 mm (0.02
in)):
Standard
49.3 57.3 kPa (0.50 0.58 kgf/cm2,
7.15 8.31 psi)
Check that the vacuum hose and air by-pass pipe
have no cracks, damage or loose part.
IN(H4DOTC)-27
12LE_US.book 28
Resonator Chamber
INTAKE (INDUCTION)
12.Resonator Chamber
A: REMOVAL
er Case for removal procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.>
B: INSTALLATION
er Case for installation procedure. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, INSTALLATION, Air Cleaner
Case.>
C: INSPECTION
Check that the resonator chamber has no deforma-
IN(H4DOTC)-28
12LE_US.book 1
MECHANICAL
ME(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Compression ............................................................................................21
3. Idle Speed ................................................................................................22
4. Ignition Timing ..........................................................................................23
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum ...........................................................................24
6. Engine Oil Pressure .................................................................................25
7. Fuel Pressure ...........................................................................................26
8. Valve Clearance .......................................................................................27
9. Engine Assembly .....................................................................................31
10. Engine Mounting ......................................................................................38
11. Preparation for Overhaul ..........................................................................41
12. V-belt ........................................................................................................42
13. Crank Pulley .............................................................................................44
14. Timing Belt Cover .....................................................................................46
15. Timing Belt ...............................................................................................52
16. Cam Sprocket ..........................................................................................61
17. Crank Sprocket ........................................................................................62
18. Camshaft ..................................................................................................63
19. Cylinder Head ..........................................................................................74
20. Cylinder Block ..........................................................................................83
21. Intake and Exhaust Valve ......................................................................107
22. Piston .....................................................................................................108
23. Connecting Rod .....................................................................................109
24. Crankshaft ..............................................................................................110
25. Engine Trouble in General .....................................................................111
26. Engine Noise ..........................................................................................117
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
MECHANICAL
A: SPECIFICATION
Model 2.5 L
Horizontally opposed, liquid cooled,
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder,
Belt driven, double overhead camshaft,
Valve system mechanism
4-valve/cylinder
Bore Stroke mm (in) 99.5 79.0 (3.92 3.11)
Displacement cm3 (cu in) 2,457 (149.94)
Compression ratio 9.5
Compression pressure
kPa (kg/cm2, psi) Standard 981 1,177 (10 12, 142 171)
(at 200 300 rpm)
Number of piston rings Pressure ring: 2, Oil ring: 1
Max.
ATDC 5
retard
Open
Min.
BTDC 35
advance
Intake valve timing
Max.
ABDC 65
retard
Engine Close
Min.
ABDC 25
advance
Max.
BBDC 24
retard
Open
Min.
BBDC 64
advance
Exhaust valve timing
Max.
ATDC 26
retard
Close
Min.
BTDC 14
advance
+0.04 (0.0079+0.0016 0.0024)
Inspection Intake 0.20 0.06
mm value Exhaust 0.350.05 (0.01380.0020)
Valve clearance
(in) Adjustment Intake 0.20+0.01 0.03 (0.0079+0.0004 0.0012)
value Exhaust 0.350.02 (0.01380.0008)
Idle speed No load Standard 700100
rpm
(gear shift lever in neutral position) A/C ON Standard 700 850100
Ignition order 1324
Ignition timing BTDC/rpm Standard 1510/700
ME(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
MECHANICAL
NOTE:
OS: Oversize US: Undersize
Belt tension
Adjuster rod protrusion amount mm (in) 5.2 6.2 (0.205 0.244)
adjuster
Intake Standard 46.55 46.65 (1.833 1.837)
Cam lobe height mm (in)
Cam base circle diameter mm (in) Standard 37.0 (1.457)
Camshaft
Front Standard 37.946 37.963 (1.4939 1.4946)
Journal O.D. mm (in)
Center, rear Standard 29.946 29.963 (1.1790 1.1796)
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder block) mm (in) 0.035 (0.0014)
Cylinder
head
Seating angle between valve and valve seat 90
Valve seat Contacting width Intake Standard 0.6 1.4 (0.024 0.055)
between valve and mm (in)
valve seat Exhaust Standard 1.2 1.8 (0.047 0.071)
Clearance between Intake Standard 0.030 0.057 (0.0012 0.0022)
the valve guide and mm (in)
valve stem Exhaust Standard 0.040 0.067 (0.0016 0.0026)
Valve guide Inside diameter mm (in) 6.000 6.012 (0.2362 0.2367)

Valve stem outer diam- Intake 5.955 5.970 (0.2344 0.2350)
mm (in)
eters Exhaust 5.945 5.960 (0.2341 0.2346)
Valve guide protrusion amount mm (in) 15.8 16.2 (0.622 0.638)
Intake Standard 1.0 1.4 (0.039 0.055)
Head edge thickness mm (in)
Valve
Intake 104.4 (4.110)
Overall length mm (in)
Exhaust 104.65 (4.1201)
205 235
Set (20.90 23.96, 46.09 52.84)/36.0
(1.417)
Valve spring Tension/spring height N (kgf, lb)/mm (in)
426 490
Lift (43.44 49.96, 95.78 110.17)/26.5
(1.043)
Squareness 2.5, 2.1 mm (0.083 in) or less
Outer diameter mm (in) Standard 34.959 34.975 (1.3763 1.3770)
Valve lifter mating surface inner diameter mm (in) Standard 34.994 35.016 (1.3777 1.3786)
Valve lifter
Valve lifter and valve lifter mating surface
mm (in) Standard 0.019 0.057 (0.0007 0.0022)
clearance
Warping limit (mating surface with cylinder head) mm (in) 0.025 (0.0098)
Cylinder Cylindricality mm (in) Limit 0.015 (0.0006)
block Out-of-roundness mm (in) Limit 0.010 (0.0004)
Clearance between cylinder and piston at
mm (in) Standard 0.010 0.010 (0.00039 0.00039)
20C (68F)
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter) mm (in) To 100.005 (3.9372)
ME(H4DOTC)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
MECHANICAL
Piston grade point mm (in) 38.2 (1.50)

A 99.505 99.515 (3.9175 3.9179)
Standard
Piston B 99.495 99.505 (3.9171 3.9175)
Outer diameter mm (in)
0.25 (0.0098) OS 99.745 99.765 (3.9270 3.9278)
0.50 (0.0197) OS 99.995 100.015 (3.9368 3.9376)
Piston pin must be fitted into position with
Degree of fit
thumb at 20C (68F).
Piston pin
mm (in) Standard 0.004 0.008 (0.0002 0.0003)
pin
Top ring Standard 0.20 0.25 (0.0079 0.0098)
Piston ring gap mm (in) Second ring Standard 0.37 0.52 (0.015 0.0203)
Piston ring Oil ring Standard 0.20 0.50 (0.0079 0.0197)
Clearance between Top ring Standard 0.040 0.080 (0.0016 0.0031)
piston ring and piston mm (in)
ring groove Second ring Standard 0.030 0.070 (0.0012 0.0028)
Bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in length mm (in) Limit 0.1 (0.0039)
Connecting Oil clearance mm (in) Standard 0.017 0.045 (0.0007 0.0018)
rod and
Standard 1.490 1.506 (0.0587 0.0593)
connecting
rod bearing Bearing size 0.03 (0.0012) US 1.504 1.512 (0.0592 0.0595)
mm (in)
(Thickness at center) 0.05 (0.0020) US 1.514 1.522 (0.0596 0.0599)
0.25 (0.0098) US 1.614 1.622 (0.0635 0.0639)
Bushing of
Clearance between piston pin and bushing mm (in) Standard 0 0.022 (0 0.0009)
small end
Crank pin Out-of-roundness mm (in) Limit 0.003 (0.0001)
Crank journal Out-of-roundness mm (in) Limit 0.005 (0.0002)
Standard 51.976 52.000 (2.0463 2.0472)
0.03 (0.0012) US 51.954 51.970 (2.0454 2.0461)
Crank pin outer diameter mm (in)
0.05 (0.0020) US 51.934 51.950 (2.0447 2.0453)
0.25 (0.0098) US 51.734 51.750 (2.0368 2.0374)
Crankshaft Standard 59.984 60.008 (2.3616 2.3625)
and
0.03 (0.0012) US 59.962 59.978 (2.3607 2.3613)
crankshaft Crank journal outer diameter mm (in)
bearing 0.05 (0.0020) US 59.942 59.958 (2.3599 2.3605)
0.25 (0.0098) US 59.742 59.758 (2.3520 2.3527)
Standard 1.998 2.015 (0.0787 0.0793)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.017 2.020 (0.0794 0.0795)
#1, #3
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.027 2.030 (0.0798 0.0799)
Bearing size 0.25 (0.0098) US 2.127 2.130 (0.0837 0.0839)
mm (in)
(Thickness at center) Standard 2.000 2.017 (0.0787 0.0794)
0.03 (0.0012) US 2.019 2.022 (0.0795 0.0796)
#2, #4, #5
0.05 (0.0020) US 2.029 2.032 (0.0799 0.0800)
0.25 (0.0098) US 2.129 2.132 (0.0838 0.0839)
ME(H4DOTC)-4
12LE_US.book 5
General Description
MECHANICAL
B: COMPONENT
1. V-BELT
(5)
(6)
(4)
(3)
(7)
T4
A
(11)
T2
(8)
T4 (2)
T6 T5
A
B
(12)
T1 B
T7 T7
(9) T5
(10)
C C
(1)
(13)
T7
T3
ME-05750
(1) V-belt (8) Idler pulley ASSY Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Collector cover bracket (9) Stopper rod RH T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) V-belt tensioner ASSY (10) Stopper rod LH T2: 20 (2.0, 14.8)
(4) Power steering pump bracket (11) A/C compressor T3: 22 (2.2, 16.2)
(5) Generator (12) A/C compressor bracket B T4: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(6) Generator plate (13) Front cushion rubber T5: 26.5 (2.7, 19.5)
(7) A/C compressor bracket A T6: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T7: 36 (3.7, 26.6)
ME(H4DOTC)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
MECHANICAL
2. TIMING BELT
(19) (1)
(2)
T3 T4
(3)
T2
(19)
(4)
T3
(20)
(9) T2 (5)
(21) T8 T5
(12) T1
(6)
(8)
(20) T2
(17) (7)
T6 (23)
T7
T1
T2 (22) (21) T8 T2
(10)
T7
(14) (19)
(20)
T3
T7 (11)
(24)
(20)
(13)
T1 (22)
T2
T2
(15)
(16)
T2
T9
(25)
(18) T2
T2
ME-04884
(1) Timing belt cover No. 2 RH (13) Belt idler No. 2 (25) Oxygen sensor bracket
(2) Timing belt guide (14) Belt idler
(3) Crank sprocket (15) Timing belt cover LH Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Timing belt cover No. 2 LH (16) Front belt cover T1: 3.4 (0.3, 2.5)
(5) Tensioner bracket (17) Timing belt cover RH T2: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(6) Automatic belt tension adjuster (18) Crank pulley T3: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
ASSY
(7) Belt idler (19) Timing belt guide T4: 9.75 (1.0, 7.2)
(8) Exhaust cam sprocket RH (20) O-ring T5: 24.5 (2.5, 18.1)
(9) Intake cam sprocket RH (21) Intake actuator cover T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(10) Intake cam sprocket LH (22) Exhaust actuator cover T7: 39 (4.0, 28.8)
(11) Exhaust cam sprocket LH (23) Belt idler T8: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-61,
INSTALLATION, Cam
Sprocket.>
(12) Timing belt (24) Hose clip stay ASSY T9: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-44,
ME(H4DOTC)-6
12LE_US.book 7
General Description
MECHANICAL
3. CYLINDER HEAD AND CAMSHAFT
T6 (1)
T6
T1
(2)
(6)
T2
T6
T6 T4
T4
(27) (32) (38)
(8) (33)
(9)
T1
T6
(28)
T6 (4) (13)
(7)
(5) (14)
(10)
(12)
(3)
T5 (31)
(30) (29) (23)

(11)
T2 (34)
T3
(9) (24) T1
(8)
(15) T1
(33) (16)
(37)
(14) T4
(19)
T6
(27)
(26) (25)
(21)
T4
(17)
(32)
(27) (12) (20)
(36)
(18)
(29)
(35)
T6 T6
(22) T6
(11)
T3 T5 T6
ME-05035
ME(H4DOTC)-7
12LE_US.book 8
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Rocker cover RH (17) Exhaust camshaft LH (33) Union bolt without filter (without
protrusion)
(2) Rocker cover gasket RH (18) Front camshaft cap LH (34) Gasket
(3) Front camshaft cap RH (19) Intake camshaft cap LH (35) Exhaust oil flow control solenoid
valve LH
(4) Intake camshaft cap RH (20) Exhaust camshaft cap LH (36) Gasket LH
(5) Intake camshaft RH (21) Rocker cover gasket LH (37) Intake oil flow control solenoid
valve LH
(6) Intake oil flow control solenoid (22) Rocker cover LH (38) Rear camshaft cap
valve RH
(7) Exhaust camshaft cap RH (23) Oil filler cap
(8) Gasket (24) Oil filler duct Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(9) Oil return cover (25) O-ring T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(10) Exhaust camshaft RH (26) Oil pipe LH T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(11) Cylinder head bolt (27) Gasket T3: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(12) Oil seal (28) Oil pipe RH T4: 29 (3.0, 21.4)
(13) Cylinder head RH (29) Stud bolt T5: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-75,
INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Head.>
(14) Cylinder head gasket (30) Exhaust oil flow control solenoid T6: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-66,
valve RH INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
(15) Cylinder head LH (31) Gasket RH
(16) Intake camshaft LH (32) Union bolt with filter (with protru-
sion)
ME(H4DOTC)-8
12LE_US.book 9
General Description
MECHANICAL
4. CYLINDER HEAD AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
(1)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(3)
(2)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(12)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(12) (9)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ME-04990
(1) Exhaust valve (5) Intake valve oil seal (9) Valve lifter
(2) Intake valve (6) Valve spring (10) Exhaust valve oil seal
(3) Cylinder head (7) Valve spring retainer (11) Intake valve guide
(4) Valve spring seat (8) Valve spring retainer key (12) Exhaust valve guide
ME(H4DOTC)-9
12LE_US.book 10
General Description
MECHANICAL
5. CYLINDER BLOCK
T2 T2
T5
(34) (5)
T2
T2
(7)
T12
(33)
(34) (1)
(8) (10) (6)
T6
(30)
(29)
T2 T10
T6
(3)
(4) T2
(28) (2)
(9)
(10)
(14)
T10
(11)
(4) (10)
T2 T3 (3) (10) T6
(18) (42) (30)

T2 T9 (4)
(10)
(27)
T10
(19) (37) (12)
(32) (35) (3) (29)
(39) (43) (38)
T2
(46)
(25) T6 T12
T4
T5 T2 (15)
(23) (44) T2
(40) (31)
(13)
(46)
(26)
T4
(17)
(46)
T8
(20) (41)
(45)
T1 (46) T11
(22) (16)
(36)
(24)
T7 T11
(21)
ME-05751
ME(H4DOTC)-10
12LE_US.book 11
General Description
MECHANICAL
(1) Oil pressure switch (22) Drain plug gasket (43) Oil level switch
(2) Cylinder block RH (23) Oil level gauge guide (44) Oil cooler hose A
(3) Service hole plug (24) Oil filter (45) Oil cooler hose B
(4) Gasket (25) Gasket (46) Clip
(5) Oil separator cover (26) Water pump hose
(6) Water by-pass pipe (27) Nipple Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(7) Oil pump (28) Seal T1: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(8) Front oil seal (29) Washer T2: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(9) Rear oil seal (30) Seal washer T3: 10 (1.0, 7.4)
(10) O-ring (31) O-ring T4: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(11) Service hole cover (32) Gasket Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(12) Cylinder block LH (33) Engine rear hanger T5: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
(13) Water pump (34) Oil pump seal T6: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
(14) Baffle plate (35) Water pump sealing T7: 41.7 (4.3, 30.8)
(15) Oil cooler (36) O-ring T8: 54 (5.5, 39.8)
(16) Oil cooler pipe (37) Oil level gauge T9: 69 (7.0, 50.9)
(17) Connector (38) O-ring T10: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(18) Oil strainer (39) O-ring T11: <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-28, INSTAL-
LATION, Engine Oil Cooler.>
(19) Cylinder block lower (40) Oil drain pipe T12: <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-87,
INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
(20) Oil pan (41) Oil cooler pipe stay
(21) Drain plug (42) O-ring
ME(H4DOTC)-11
12LE_US.book 12
General Description
MECHANICAL
6. CRANKSHAFT AND PISTON
(1)
T2
(8)
(7) (2)
(3)
(4) (10)
(5)
(8) (6)
(11)
T1 (9)
(13)
(12) (11)
(12)
(9)
(11)
T1
(11) (6)
(14) (8)
(5)
(4)
(10) (3)
(8)
(7)
(17)
(16)
(15)
(16)
(15)
ME-04886
(1) Flywheel (8) Snap ring (15) Crankshaft bearing #1, #3

(2) Ball bearing (9) Connecting rod bolt (16) Crankshaft bearing #2, #4
(3) Top ring (10) Connecting rod (17) Crankshaft bearing #5
(4) Second ring (11) Connecting rod bearing
(5) Oil ring (12) Connecting rod cap Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(6) Piston (13) Crankshaft T1: 52 (5.3, 38.4)
(7) Piston pin (14) Woodruff key T2: <Ref. to CL-14, INSTALLATION,
Flywheel.>
ME(H4DOTC)-12
12LE_US.book 13
General Description
MECHANICAL
7. ENGINE MOUNTING
T5 (3)
(4)
T1
B
T2
B
T5
A (2)
T4
(1)
T3
T5
ME-05752
(1) Front mounting bracket (3) Engine mounting bracket Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Front cushion rubber (4) Turbocharger upper stay T1: 25 (2.5, 18.4)
T2: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
T3: 45 (4.6, 33.2)
T4: 58 (5.9, 42.8)
T5: 60 (6.1, 44.3)
ME(H4DOTC)-13
12LE_US.book 14
General Description
MECHANICAL
C: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
All parts should be thoroughly cleaned, paying special attention to engine oil passages, pistons and bear-
ings.
Rotating parts and sliding parts such as piston, bearing and gear should be coated with oil prior to assem-
bly.
Be careful not to let oil, grease or engine coolant contact the timing belt, clutch disc and flywheel.
All removed parts, if to be reused, should be reinstalled in the original positions and directions.
Bolts, nuts and washers should be replaced with new parts as required.
Even if necessary inspections have been made in advance, proceed with assembly work while making re-
checks.
Remove or install the engine in an area where chain hoists, lifting devices, etc. are available for ready use.
Be sure not to damage coated surfaces of body panels with tools, or not to stain seats and windows with
coolant or oil. Place a cover over fender, as required, for protection.
Prior to starting work, prepare the following:
Service tools, clean cloth, containers to catch coolant and oil, wire ropes, chain hoist, transmission jacks, etc.
Lift up or lower the vehicle when necessary. Make sure to support the correct positions.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
498267600 CYLINDER HEAD Used for replacing valve guides.
TABLE Used for removing and installing valve spring.
ST-498267600
ADAPTER RH (499817100).
ST-498457000
ME(H4DOTC)-14
12LE_US.book 15
General Description
MECHANICAL

ADAPTER LH (499817100).
ST-498457100
498747300 PISTON GUIDE Used for installing the piston into the cylinder.
ST-498747300
498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL Used for press-fitting of intake valve guide oil
GUIDE seals and exhaust valve guide oil seals.
ST-498857100
499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE Used for installing piston pin, piston and con-
necting rod.
ST-499017100
INSTALLER
ST-499587100
ME(H4DOTC)-15
12LE_US.book 16
General Description
MECHANICAL

SEAL INSTALLER Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
GUIDE (499597100).
ST-499587200
499587600 OIL SEAL Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
INSTALLER
ST-499587600
SEAL GUIDE Used together with CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL
ST-499597100
499597200 OIL SEAL GUIDE Used for installing the camshaft oil seal.
Used together with OIL SEAL INSTALLER
(499587600).
ST-499597200
499718000 VALVE SPRING Used for removing and installing valve spring.
REMOVER
ST-499718000
ME(H4DOTC)-16
12LE_US.book 17
General Description
MECHANICAL

499767200 VALVE GUIDE Used for removing valve guides.
REMOVER
ST-499767200
499767400 VALVE GUIDE Used for reaming valve guides.
REAMER
ST-499767400
499817100 ENGINE STAND Used for disassembling and assembling
engine.
Used together with ENGINE STAND
ADAPTER RH (498457000) & LH (498457100).
ST-499817100
WRENCH ley.
ST-499977100
499977500 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing intake cam
WRENCH sprocket and exhaust cam sprocket.
ST-499977500
ME(H4DOTC)-17
12LE_US.book 18
General Description
MECHANICAL

SOCKET
ST-499987500
18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE Used for installing intake valve guides and
ADJUSTER exhaust valve guides.
ST18251AA020
499097700 PISTON PIN Used for removing piston pin.
REMOVER ASSY
ST-499097700
hose.
CAILLAU. (code) 54.0.000.205
with a tool number.
ST18353AA000
18371AA000 CONNECTOR Used for disconnecting the quick connector on

REMOVER the fuel return hose side of the engine compart-
ment (intake manifold).
ST18371AA000
ME(H4DOTC)-18
12LE_US.book 19
General Description
MECHANICAL

18471AA000 FUEL PIPE Used for inspecting the fuel pressure.
ADAPTER
ST18471AA000
18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE Used for installing the crank pulley.
ST18854AA000
TOR RELEASE
ST42099AE000
42075AG690 FUEL HOSE Used for inspecting the fuel pressure.
NOTE:
This is the SUBARU genuine part.
ST42075AG690
1B022XU0 SUBARU SELECT Used for various inspections.
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
ME(H4DOTC)-19
12LE_US.book 20
General Description
MECHANICAL
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Compression gauge Used for measuring compression.
Vacuum gauge Used for measuring intake manifold vacuum.
Oil pressure gauge Used for measuring engine oil pressure.
Fuel pressure gauge Used for measuring fuel pressure.
ME(H4DOTC)-20
12LE_US.book 21
Compression
MECHANICAL
2. Compression 12) Crank the engine by starter motor and read the
value when the needle of the compression gauge
A: INSPECTION becomes stable.
CAUTION: NOTE:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be Perform at least two measurements per cylinder,
careful not to burn yourself during measure- and make sure that the values are correct.
ment. If the compression pressure is out of standard,
1) Remove the collector cover. check or adjust the pistons, valves and cylinders.
2) After warming-up the engine, turn the ignition Compression (fully open throttle):
switch to OFF. Standard
3) Make sure that the battery is fully charged. 981 1,177 kPa (10 12 kgf/cm2, 142
4) Remove the fuse of fuel pump from main fuse 171 psi)
box. Difference between cylinders
49 kPa (0.5 kgf/cm2, 7 psi) or less
FU-04800
5) Start the engine and run it until it stalls.

6) After the engine stalls, crank it for five more sec-
onds.
8) Remove all spark plugs. <Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-
4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
9) Fully open the throttle valve.
10) Check the starter motor for satisfactory perfor-
mance and operation.
11) Install the compression gauge to the spark plug
hole.
NOTE:
When using a screw-in type compression gauge,
the screw should be less than 18 mm (0.71 in) long.
ME-04361
ME(H4DOTC)-21
12LE_US.book 22
Idle Speed
MECHANICAL
3. Idle Speed
A: INSPECTION
1) Before checking the idle speed, check the fol-
lowing item:
clogging, ignition timing is correct, spark plugs
are in good condition, and hoses are connected
properly.
not illuminate.
3) Read the engine idle speed using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, READ
CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
NOTE:
Idle speed cannot be adjusted manually, be-
cause the idle speed is automatically adjusted.
If idle speed is out of standard, refer to the Gen-
eral Diagnosis Table under Engine Control Sys-
tem. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic
Diagnostic Procedure.>
(1) Check the idle speed when no-loaded.
(Headlight, heater fan, rear defroster, radiator
fan, A/C and etc. are OFF)
Idle speed (No load and gear shift lever in neu-
tral position):
Standard
700100 rpm
(2) Check the idle speed when loaded. (Turn
the A/C switch to ON and operate the com-
pressor for at least one minute before measure-
ment.)
Idle speed (A/C ON and gear shift lever in neu-
tral position):
Standard
700 850100 rpm
ME(H4DOTC)-22
12LE_US.book 23
Ignition Timing
MECHANICAL
4. Ignition Timing
A: INSPECTION
CAUTION:
After warming-up, engine becomes very hot. Be
careful not to burn yourself at measurement.
1) Before checking the ignition timing, check the
following item:
clogging, spark plugs are in good condition, and
hoses are connected properly.
not illuminate.
3) Read the ignition timing using Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, READ
CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
NOTE:
If ignition timing is out of standard, check the igni-
tion control system. Refer to Engine Control Sys-
tem. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic
Diagnostic Procedure.>
Ignition timing [BTDC/rpm]:
Standard
1510/700
ME(H4DOTC)-23
12LE_US.book 24
Intake Manifold Vacuum

MECHANICAL
5. Intake Manifold Vacuum

A: INSPECTION
3) Remove the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-17, REMOVAL, Intercooler.>
4) Disconnect the brake booster vacuum hose from the intake manifold, and attach the vacuum gauge.
ME-04362
5) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>

6) Keep the engine at idle speed and read the vacuum gauge indication.
NOTE:
Condition of engine inside can be diagnosed by observing the behavior of the vacuum gauge needle as de-
scribed in table below.
Intake manifold vacuum (at idling, A/C OFF):
Standard
66.7 kPa (500 mmHg, 19.70 inHg) or more
7) After inspection, install the related parts in the reverse order of removal.
Diagnosis of engine condition by inspection of intake manifold vacuum
Vacuum gauge needle behavior Possible engine condition
1. Needle is steady but lower than standard value. This ten- Leakage around intake manifold gasket, disconnection or dam-
dency becomes more evident as engine temperature rises. age of vacuum hose
2. Needle intermittently drops to position lower than standard Leakage around cylinder
value.
3. Needle drops suddenly and intermittently from standard Sticky valve
value.
4. When engine speed is gradually increased, needle begins to Weak or broken valve springs
vibrate rapidly at certain speed, and then vibration increases as
engine speed increases.
5. Needle vibrates above and below standard value in narrow Defective ignition system
range.
ME(H4DOTC)-24
12LE_US.book 25
Engine Oil Pressure

MECHANICAL
6. Engine Oil Pressure 6) Start the engine, and check the oil pressure.
NOTE:
A: INSPECTION Standard value is based on an engine oil temper-
1) Remove the collector cover. ature of 80C (176F).
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. If the oil pressure is out of specification, check oil
pump, oil filter and lubrication line. <Ref. to
LU(H4SO)-45, INSPECTION, Engine Lubrication
System Trouble in General.>
If the oil pressure warning light is ON and oil
pressure is within specification, check the oil pres-
sure switch. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-45, INSPECTION,
Engine Lubrication System Trouble in General.>
Engine oil pressure:
Standard
IG-02107 98 kPa (1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi) or more (at 600
3) Remove the oil pressure switch. <Ref. to rpm)
LU(H4SO)-25, REMOVAL, Oil Pressure Switch.> 392 kPa (4.0 kgf/cm2, 57 psi) or more (at
4) Install the oil pressure gauge to cylinder block. 6,000 rpm)
ME-04363
IG-02107
ME(H4DOTC)-25
12LE_US.book 26
Fuel Pressure
MECHANICAL
7. Fuel Pressure 6) Check the fuel pressure while disconnecting

pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake mani-
A: INSPECTION fold.
CAUTION: NOTE:
Before removing the fuel pressure gauge, re- The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa
lease the fuel pressure. (0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard
Be careful not to spill fuel. values during high-altitude operations.
Catch the fuel from hoses using a container If the fuel pressure is out of specification, check
or cloth. or replace the fuel pump, fuel line, pressure regula-
1) Remove the collector cover. tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose.
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to Fuel pressure:
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL PRES- Standard
SURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> 328 358 kPa (3.3 3.7 kgf/cm2, 48 52
3) Open the fuel filler lid and remove the fuel filler psi)
cap. 7) After connecting the vacuum hose to the pres-
4) Disconnect the fuel delivery hose from the fuel sure regulator, check the fuel pressure again.
delivery pipe, and connect the fuel pressure gauge.
NOTE:
CAUTION: The fuel pressure gauge registers 10 to 20 kPa
Be careful not to spill fuel. (0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm2, 1 to 3 psi) higher than standard
Catch the fuel from hoses using a container values during high-altitude operations.
or cloth. If the fuel pressure is out of specification, check
(1) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push or replace the fuel pump, fuel line, pressure regula-
ST in the direction of arrow mark to disconnect tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose.
the quick connector of the fuel delivery hose.
ST 42099AE000 QUICK CONNECTOR RE- Fuel pressure:
LEASE Standard
274 304 kPa (2.8 3.1 kgf/cm2, 40 44
psi)
ST 8) After inspection, install the related parts in the
ME-05753
(2) Connect the fuel pressure gauge with ST1

and ST2.
NOTE:
ST1 is a SUBARU genuine part.
ST1 42075AG690 FUEL HOSE
ST2 18471AA000 FUEL PIPE ADAPTER
ST2
ST1
ME-05754
ME(H4DOTC)-26
12LE_US.book 27
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
8. Valve Clearance (5) Disconnect PCV hose (A) and vacuum hose
(B) from the rocker cover RH.
A: INSPECTION NOTE:
1) Remove the engine from the vehicle. <Ref. to Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose (A) by fitting the
ME(H4DOTC)-31, REMOVAL, Engine Assembly.> cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
2) When inspecting #1 and #3 cylinders shown in the figure, and unlock the clamp.
(1) Remove the timing belt cover RH. <Ref. to ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
ME(H4DOTC)-52, TIMING BELT, REMOVAL,
Timing Belt.>
(2) Disconnect the connector (A) from the ex- ST
haust camshaft position sensor RH and the
connector (B) form the exhaust oil flow control
solenoid valve RH.
(A)
(B) ME-04374
(B)
(A)
ME-04490
(3) Remove the clip which holds the engine har-

ness to the rocker cover.
ME-05755
(6) Remove the rocker cover RH.
ME-05017
(4) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to

IG(H4DOTC)-6, REMOVAL, Ignition Coil.>
ME-05019
ME(H4DOTC)-27
12LE_US.book 28
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
3) When inspecting #2 and #4 cylinders (6) Disconnect PCV hose (A) and vacuum hose
(1) Remove the timing belt cover RH. <Ref. to (B) from the rocker cover LH.
ME(H4DOTC)-52, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> NOTE:
(2) Disconnect the connector (A) from the ex- Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose (A) by fitting the
haust camshaft position sensor LH and the con- cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the clamp as
nector (B) form the exhaust oil flow control shown in the figure, and unlock the clamp.
solenoid valve LH. ST 18353AA000 CLAMP PLIERS
ST
(A)
(B)
ME-05756
ME-04374
(3) Disconnect the oil level switch connector.
(B)
(A)
ME-05757
ME-04389
(7) Remove the rocker cover LH.
(4) Remove the clip (A) and bolt (B) securing
the engine harness or oil level switch harness to
the rocker cover LH.
(A)
(B)
ME-05022
ME-04485
(5) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to

ME(H4DOTC)-28
12LE_US.book 29
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
4) Turn the crank pulley clockwise until the round 5) Measure the clearance of intake valve and ex-
mark on the camshaft sprocket is set to position haust valve using thickness gauge (A).
shown in the figure. NOTE:
NOTE: Insert a thickness gauge in a direction as hori-
Turn the crank pulley using a socket wrench. zontal as possible with respect to the valve lifter.
Measurement of clearance of #1 cylinder intake Lift up the vehicle, and then measure the ex-
valve and #3 cylinder exhaust valve haust valve clearances.
If the measured value is not within the inspection
value, take notes of the value in order to adjust the
valve clearance later on.
Valve clearance (inspection value):
Intake
0.20+0.04 0.06 mm (0.0079+0.0016 0.0024 in)
Exhaust
0.350.05 mm (0.01380.0020 in)
ME-04090
Measurement of clearance of #2 cylinder ex-

haust valve and #3 cylinder intake valve
(A)
ME-04958
6) If necessary, adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to

ME(H4DOTC)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear-
ance.>
ME-03121
Measurement of clearance of #2 cylinder intake

valve and #4 cylinder exhaust valve
ME-03122
Measurement of clearance of #1 cylinder ex-

haust valve and #4 cylinder intake valve
ME-03123
ME(H4DOTC)-29
12LE_US.book 30
Valve Clearance
MECHANICAL
7) After inspection, install the related parts in the 4) Measure the thickness of valve lifter using mi-
reverse order of removal. crometer.
NOTE:
Refer to Camshaft when installing the rocker
cover. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-66, INSTALLATION,
Camshaft.>
Use a new clamp for the PCV hose clamp, fit the
ME-00025
ST
5) Select a valve lifter of suitable thickness using
the measured valve clearance and valve lifter thick-
ness, and install it.
NOTE:
Use a new valve lifter.
Unit: mm (in)
ME-04374 Intake valve: S = (V + T) 0.19 (0.0075)
Exhaust valve: S = (V + T) 0.35 (0.0138)
Tightening torque: S: Valve lifter thickness required
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) V: Measured valve clearance
T: Valve lifter thickness to be used
6) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-66,

INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
7) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
61, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprocket.>
8) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-55,
9) Measure all valves for valve clearance again at
this time. If the valve clearance is not within the ad-
ME-04487
justment value, repeat the procedure over again
B: ADJUSTMENT from the first step.
1) Measure all the valve clearances. <Ref. to Valve clearance (adjustment value):
ME(H4DOTC)-27, INSPECTION, Valve Clear- Intake
ance.> 0.20+0.01 0.03 mm (0.0079+0.0004 0.0012 in)
NOTE: Exhaust
Record the measured value of each valve clear- 0.350.02 mm (0.01380.0008 in)
ance. 10) After adjustment, install the related parts in the
ME-00024
2) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-

63, REMOVAL, Camshaft.>
3) Remove the valve lifter.
ME(H4DOTC)-30
12LE_US.book 31
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
9. Engine Assembly 13) Disconnect the bulkhead harness connector

from the engine harness connector (brown).
A: REMOVAL
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
ME-04376
(B) (B) 14) Remove the bolt securing the bulkhead har-
ness connector bracket, and disconnect the bulk-
head harness connector from the engine harness
connector (black).
ME-04375

AC-24, Refrigerant Recovery Procedure.>
ME-04377
15) Disconnect the connector (A) and connector

(B) from A/C compressor, and remove the clip (C)
securing the generator cord to the intake manifold
protector LH.
(A)
(C)
IG-02107
cap.
(B)
ME-04379
9) Remove the air by-pass valve. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-26, REMOVAL, Air By-pass Valve.>
10) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-
21, REMOVAL, Radiator.>
ME(H4DOTC)-31
12LE_US.book 32
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
16) Disconnect the following hoses. 19) Disconnect the ground cable on the engine
(1) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-76, RE- side, and remove the engine harness cover.
MOVAL, Hose and Pipe.>
(2) Brake booster vacuum hose
ME-04380
(3) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose
ME-04993

ME-04242 21) Attach ST to the fuel delivery pipe and push ST
delivery hose.
18) Remove the air intake boot from the intake
duct.
LEASE
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(A)
ST
IN-03035
(B) (C)
ME-04382

ME(H4DOTC)-32
12LE_US.book 33
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
22) Disconnect the fuel return hose using the ST. 23) Remove the clip and disconnect the evapora-
ST 18371AA000 CONNECTOR REMOVER tion hose from the fuel pipe.
CAUTION:
or cloth.
(1) Attach ST to the fuel return pipe as shown in
the figure.
FU-04611
24) Support the engine with a lifting device and

wire ropes.
ST
ME-04969
(2) Insert the front side of ST into the quick con-

nector.
LU-00222
ST
ME-04970
(3) Insert the back side of ST into the quick con-

nector and push ST in the direction of arrow
mark to disconnect the fuel return hose.
ME-04381

ST
ME-04971
ME-04246

CAUTION:
at the same time.
ME(H4DOTC)-33
12LE_US.book 34
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
28) Remove the bolts which secure the engine (1) Remove the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-9,
mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine REMOVAL, Starter.>
mounting. (2) Remove the bolts which hold the upper side
of the transmission to the engine.
ME-04247
29) Remove the bolts and nuts which hold the low- MT-01524
er side of transmission to the engine. 33) Remove the engine from the vehicle.
NOTE:
(1) Slightly raise the engine.
(2) Adjust the height of the transmission with
garage jack.
(3) Move the engine horizontally until main
shaft is withdrawn from clutch cover.
(4) Slowly move the engine away from engine
MT-00077 compartment.
30) Lower the vehicle. B: INSTALLATION
CAUTION: 1) Apply a small amount of grease to splines of
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes main shaft.
at the same time.
Grease:
31) Support the transmission with a garage jack.
NICHIMOLY N-130 or equivalent
NOTE: 2) Position the engine in engine compartment and
Fine adjustment of the transmission height can be align it with transmission.
performed with this operation.
NOTE:
3) Tighten the bolts which hold upper side of trans-
(A) mission to engine.
(B) Tightening torque:
50 Nm (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
ME-04959
(A) Transmission
(B) Garage jack
32) Separation of engine and transmission

CAUTION:
Before removing the engine away from trans- MT-01524
mission, check to be sure no work has been 4) Remove the garage jack.
overlooked. 5) Install the starter. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-10, IN-
STALLATION, Starter.>
ME(H4DOTC)-34
12LE_US.book 35
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
6) Lift up the vehicle. 11) Install the stopper rod.

When lifting up the vehicle, raise up wire ropes 36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
at the same time.
7) Attach the bolts and nuts which hold lower side
of the transmission to engine.
Tightening torque:
50 Nm (5.1 kgf-m, 36.9 ft-lb)
ME-04381
12) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.
MT-00077

Tightening torque:
58 Nm (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
LU-00222

14) Install the air intake boot to the intake duct.
Tightening torque:
2.5 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 1.8 ft-lb)
ME-04247

CAUTION:
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes
at the same time.
10) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine
mounting to the cradle. IN-03035
Tightening torque:
60 Nm (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb)
ME-04246
ME(H4DOTC)-35
12LE_US.book 36
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL
15) Install the engine harness cover, and connect 19) Connect the bulkhead harness connector to the
the ground cable. engine harness connector (black), and install the
bolt securing the bulkhead harness connector
Tightening torque:
bracket.
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 7 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 5.2 ft-lb) Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T1
T2
T1
ME-04377
20) Connect the bulkhead harness connector to the

engine harness connector (brown).
T2
ME-04994

17) Connect the following hoses. ME-04376
(1) Fuel delivery hose, fuel return hose and 21) Install the front exhaust pipe. <Ref. to
evaporation hose EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
(2) Heater inlet hose and heater outlet hose Pipe.>
(3) Brake booster vacuum hose 22) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-22,
(4) A/C pressure hose <Ref. to AC-76, INSTAL- INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
LATION, Hose and Pipe.> 23) Install the air by-pass valve. <Ref. to
18) Install the clip (C) securing the generator cord IN(H4DOTC)-26, INSTALLATION, Air By-pass
to the intake manifold protector LH, and connect Valve.>
the connector (A) and connector (B) to the A/C 24) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
compressor. 18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
(A) 25) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake
Duct.>
(C)
(B)
ME-04379
IG-02107
ME(H4DOTC)-36
12LE_US.book 37
Engine Assembly
MECHANICAL

Procedure.>
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
ME-04375
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the pipes, hoses, connectors and
clamps are securely connected.
2) Check that the engine coolant is up to specified
level.
3) Start the engine and check for exhaust gas leak-
age, engine coolant leakage, fuel leakage, noise or
vibration.
ME(H4DOTC)-37
12LE_US.book 38
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
10.Engine Mounting 10) Support the engine with a lifting device and
wire ropes.
A: REMOVAL
hood.
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
LU-00222
(B) (B) 11) Remove the stopper rod.
ME-04375

ME-04422

IG-02107

5) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly
CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radiator Main Fan ME-04249
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, RE- 13) Lift up the vehicle.
MOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
CAUTION:
at the same time.
mounting onto the engine, and remove the engine
mounting.
ME-04247
ME(H4DOTC)-38
12LE_US.book 39
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 5) Remove the lifting device and wire ropes.

Tightening torque:
58 Nm (5.9 kgf-m, 42.8 ft-lb)
LU-00222

EX(H4DOTC)-7, INSTALLATION, Front Exhaust
Pipe.>
ME-04247
2) Lower the vehicle. LATION, Front Under Cover.>
CAUTION: 9) Lower the vehicle.
When lifting down the vehicle, lower wire ropes 10) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
at the same time. and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. to
3) Attach the bolts and nuts which secure engine CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION, Radiator Main
mounting to the cradle. Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27,
INSTALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
Tightening torque: tor.>
60 Nm (6.1 kgf-m, 44.3 ft-lb) 11) Install the intercooler. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)-
18, INSTALLATION, Intercooler.>
ME-04249
4) Install the stopper rod.

IG-02107
Tightening torque:
36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) 13) Install the collector cover.
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(A) (A)
(B) (B)
ME-04422
ME-04375
ME(H4DOTC)-39
12LE_US.book 40
Engine Mounting
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY 2) Install the front cushion rubber to the engine

mounting bracket.
1) Remove the turbocharger upper stay from the
engine mounting bracket. Tightening torque:
25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
ME-04250
2) Remove the front cushion rubber from the en- ME-04251
gine mounting bracket. 3) Install the turbocharger upper stay to the engine
mounting bracket.
Tightening torque:
33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
ME-04251
3) Remove the front cushion rubber from the front

mounting bracket.
ME-04250
E: INSPECTION
Check that the engine mounting does not have de-
ME-04252
D: ASSEMBLY
1) Install the front cushion rubber to the front
mounting bracket.
Tightening torque:
45 Nm (4.6 kgf-m, 33.2 ft-lb)
ME-04252
ME(H4DOTC)-40
12LE_US.book 41
Preparation for Overhaul

MECHANICAL
11.Preparation for Overhaul

A: PROCEDURE
1) After removing the engine from vehicle body, at-
tach the ST to the engine as shown in the figure.
RH
LH
ST3 499817100 ENGINE STAND
ST2
ST1
ST3
ME-00057
2) In this section the procedures described under

each index are all connected and stated in order.
Engine overhaul will be completed when you go
through all steps in the procedure.
Therefore, in this section, to conduct the particular
procedure within the flow of a section, you need to
go back and conduct the procedure described pre-
viously in order to do that particular procedure.
ME(H4DOTC)-41
12LE_US.book 42
V-belt
MECHANICAL
12.V-belt 3) Remove the bolt securing the idler pulley to the

A/C compressor bracket, and remove the idler pul-
A: REMOVAL ley.
NOTE:
1. V-BELT
3) Attach the tool to the V-belt tensioner assembly,
and rotate the tool clockwise to loosen and remove ME-04385
the V-belt.
B: INSTALLATION
1. V-BELT
CAUTION:
When reusing the V-belt, wipe off dust and
water with cloth.
Do not use the V-belt if there is any oil, grease
or coolant on the belt.
Be careful not to rub the V-belt end surface
with bare hands; exposed core may cause inju-
ry.
Wipe off any dust, oil and water on the groove
of each pulley with cloth.
(E)
(F) (G)
(D)
(B)
ME-05758 (A)
(C)
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND
IDLER PULLEY ME-04386
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-42,
(A) V-belt
V-BELT, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
(B) V-belt tensioner ASSY
2) Remove the bolt securing the V-belt tensioner
assembly to the power steering pump bracket, and (C) Crank pulley
remove the V-belt tensioner assembly. (D) Idler pulley
(E) Generator pulley
(F) Power steering pump pulley
(G) A/C compressor pulley
ME-04384
ME(H4DOTC)-42
12LE_US.book 43
V-belt
MECHANICAL
2. V-BELT TENSIONER ASSEMBLY AND 4) Check the V-belt tension indicator (A) shows
IDLER PULLEY within the limit (B).
Tightening torque:
33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
(B) (A)
ME-05759
Tightening torque:
20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
ME-04387
ME-05760
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the V-belt for cracks, tear or wear.
3) Check that the V-belt tensioner assembly and
idler pulley do not have deformation, cracks or oth-
er damages.
ME(H4DOTC)-43
12LE_US.book 44
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
13.Crank Pulley (2) Draw reference lines (A) and (B) using a
marker to set the socket to the crank pulley bolt
A: REMOVAL as shown in the figure.
NOTE: NOTE:
When replacing a single part, perform the work with Set the socket onto the crank pulley bolt so that ref-
the engine assembly installed to body. erence lines (A) and (B) is visible.
1) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-42, ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
2) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and remove
the crank pulley bolt.
(A) (B) (A) (B)

(a) (b)
ST
ME-04524
3) Remove the crank pulley.

B: INSTALLATION
ST
1. METHOD WITHOUT ANGLE GAUGE
(A)
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed (B)
air.
ME-04526
2) Install the crank pulley.
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and (a) When using 6-point socket
thread. (b) When using 12-point socket
(1) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Draw end line (C) on ST using a marker at
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt. the same position as reference line (B) drawn
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH on the socket in step (2).
Tightening torque: ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
47 Nm (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
(C)
ST ST
(B)
ME-04527
ME-04525
ME(H4DOTC)-44
12LE_US.book 45
Crank Pulley
MECHANICAL
(4) Use the ST to lock the crank pulley, and (3) Set the ST2, use the ST1 to lock the crank
tighten the crank pulley bolt to the angle where pulley, and tighten the crank pulley bolt to the
reference line (A) and end line (C) are aligned. specified angle.
NOTE: NOTE:
It should be approx. 60 when reference line (A) Attach the magnet used for securing the ST2 (AN-
and end line (C) are aligned. GLE GAUGE) to ST1.
ST 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
Tightening angle: ST2 18854AA000 ANGLE GAUGE
605 Tightening angle:
605
(C)
ST1
ST
(A) ST2
ME-04528
5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-42, ME-04530
INSTALLATION, V-belt.> (4) Install the radiator main fan motor assembly
2. METHOD WITH ANGLE GAUGE CO(H4DOTC)-25, INSTALLATION, Radiator
1) Clean the crankshaft thread using compressed Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
air. CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radiator
2) Install the crank pulley. Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
3) Apply engine oil to the crank pulley bolt seat and 5) Install the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-42,
thread. INSTALLATION, V-belt.>
(1) Remove the radiator main fan motor assem- C: INSPECTION
bly and radiator sub fan motor assembly. <Ref. Check that the crank pulley has no deformation,
to CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radiator cracks or other damages.
Main Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub
Fan and Fan Motor.>
(2) Use the ST1 to lock the crank pulley, and
temporarily tighten the crank pulley bolt.
ST1 499977100 CRANK PULLEY WRENCH
Tightening torque:
47 Nm (4.8 kgf-m, 34.7 ft-lb)
ST1
ME-04529
ME(H4DOTC)-45
12LE_US.book 46
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
14.Timing Belt Cover (6) Disconnect the connector (A) from power
steering pump, and remove the power steering
A: REMOVAL pump together with the power steering pump
bracket from engine and rod stopper.
1. WORK ON THE VEHICLE
2) Disconnect the ground cable from battery. (A)
IN-03050

with the power steering pump bracket on RH
IG-02107
side wheel apron.
3) When removing the timing belt cover RH (8) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assem-
(1) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to bly. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Ra-
IN(H4DOTC)-12, REMOVAL, Air Intake Duct.> diator Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
(2) Loosen the clamp which holds the intake (9) Remove the engine coolant hose from the
duct to intercooler. clip (A).
(10) Remove the bolts which secure the intake
duct to the turbocharger, and remove the air by-
pass valve from the intake duct.
(A)
ME-04365
(3) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to

ME(H4DOTC)-42, REMOVAL, V-belt.>
IN-02696
(4) Remove the generator. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-
18, REMOVAL, Generator.> (11) Remove the intake duct from intake mani-
(5) Remove the suction hose from intake duct. fold.
IN-02740 IN-03043
ME(H4DOTC)-46
12LE_US.book 47
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
(12) Disconnect the vacuum hose from blow-by (19) Remove the clip holding the engine har-
pipe, and remove the bolt securing the blow-by ness.
pipe from the PCV pipe.
ME-04488
ME-05761
(20) Remove the remaining bolts which secure
(13) Disconnect the vacuum hose from PCV timing belt cover RH, and remove the timing
pipe. belt cover RH together with the hose clip stay
assembly (A).
(A)
ME-05762
ME-05015
(14) Remove vacuum hose (B), vacuum hose
(C), vacuum hose (D) and vacuum hose (E) 4) When removing the timing belt cover LH
from the clip (A). (1) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy-
(D) gen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and
(B)
remove the clip (A) securing the front oxygen
(A/F) sensor harness and rear oxygen sensor
(E)
harness.
(C)
(A)
ME-04893
(A)
(15) Remove the bolts which secure the upper
side of the timing belt cover RH.
(16) Lift up the vehicle.
EX-02575
(17) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35,
REMOVAL, Front Under Cover.> (2) Remove the bolts which secure the upper
(18) Remove the air by-pass valve. <Ref. to side of the timing belt cover LH.
IN(H4DOTC)-26, REMOVAL, Air By-pass (3) Lift up the vehicle.
Valve.> (4) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35,
REMOVAL, Front Under Cover.>
ME(H4DOTC)-47
12LE_US.book 48
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
(5) Loosen the remaining bolts which secure 2. WORK ON THE ENGINE UNIT ONLY
timing belt cover LH, and remove the timing belt 1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
cover LH together with the oxygen sensor ME(H4DOTC)-44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
bracket (A). 2) Remove the blow-by pipe from the PCV pipe.
(A)
ME-05026
ME-05763
5) When removing the front timing belt cover 3) Remove vacuum hose (B), vacuum hose (C),
(1) Remove the stopper rod. vacuum hose (D) and vacuum hose (E) from the
clip (A).
(B) (D)
(E)
(C)
(A)
ME-04381
(2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME-04895

ME(H4DOTC)-44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> 4) Remove the clip which holds the engine harness
(3) Remove the timing belt cover RH and timing to the hose clip stay assembly.
belt cover LH. Refer to step 3) and step 4) for
removal procedures.
(4) Remove the bolts securing the front timing
belt cover, and remove the front timing belt cov-
er.
ME-04353
5) Remove timing belt cover RH (B) together with

the hose clip stay assembly (A).
6) Remove timing belt cover (LH) (D) together with
ME-04996
the oxygen (A/F) sensor bracket (C).
ME(H4DOTC)-48
12LE_US.book 49
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
7) Remove front timing belt cover (E). Tightening torque:

5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
(E)
(A)
(D)
(B)
(C)
ME-04835
ME-04834
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
1. WORK ON THE VEHICLE 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
NOTE:
(b)
(a)
(h) ME-05765
(c)
Tightening torque:
A T1: 3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb)
C B
A D T2: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
B C D
E
G F
E H
F G H
(d)
(e)
(g) T1
(f) T2
ME-04427
ME-06114
Tightening torque:
(a) Blow-by pipe Refer to COMPONENT of STARTING/
(b) PCV pipe CHARGING SYSTEMS for the tightening
(c) Hose clip stay ASSY torque. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-5, GENERATOR,
(d) Vacuum hose (A) COMPONENT, General Description.>
(e) Vacuum hose (B)
(f) Vacuum hose (C)
(A)
(g) Vacuum hose (D)
(h) Clip
IN-02741
ME(H4DOTC)-49
12LE_US.book 50
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
Tightening torque: 2. WORK ON THE ENGINE UNIT ONLY

3 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.2 ft-lb) Install in the reverse order of removal.
NOTE:
(b)
(a)
(m)
(c)
(j)
(k)
ME-04365 A
C B
Tightening torque: A D
36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb) B C D

E
G F
E H
F G H
(l)
(e)
(f)
I (h)
I (j) (g) K
K J
(k)
J (i)
ME-05766
(d)
ME-05764
(a) Blow-by pipe

(b) PCV pipe
(c) Hose clip stay ASSY
(d) Intake duct
(e) Vacuum hose (A)
(f) Vacuum hose (B)
(g) Vacuum hose (C)
(h) Vacuum hose (D)
(i) To oil catch tank
(j) Clamp
(k) Clamp
(l) Clip
(m) Clip
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
ME-04834
ME(H4DOTC)-50
12LE_US.book 51
Timing Belt Cover

MECHANICAL
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-05763
C: INSPECTION
Check that the timing belt cover does not have de-
ME(H4DOTC)-51
12LE_US.book 52
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
15.Timing Belt
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
with the engine assembly installed to body.
stalled to body, the following parts must also be re-
moved/installed.
Radiator main fan motor assembly <Ref. to ME-04307
CO(H4DOTC)-25, REMOVAL, Radiator Main
Fan and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-25,
INSTALLATION, Radiator Main Fan and Fan
Motor.>
Radiator sub fan motor assembly <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.> <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, IN-
STALLATION, Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Mo-
tor.>
stalled to body, protect the radiator with cardboards ME-03126
or blankets. 4) If the alignment mark or arrow mark (which indi-
1. TIMING BELT cates the direction of rotation) on timing belt fade
away, put new marks before removing the timing
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to belt as shown in procedures below.
ME(H4DOTC)-44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> (1) Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the
2) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to alignment marks on crank sprocket, intake cam
ME(H4DOTC)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.> sprocket LH, exhaust cam sprocket LH, intake
3) Remove the timing belt guide. cam sprocket RH and exhaust cam sprocket
RH with marks on oil pump and notches of tim-
ing belt cover.
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
ME-00230
ST
ME-00231
ME-03124
ME(H4DOTC)-52
12LE_US.book 53
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
(2) Using white paint, put an alignment mark or 6) Remove the timing belt.
an arrow mark on timing belts in relation to the CAUTION:
crank sprocket and cam sprockets.
After the timing belt has been removed, never
rotate the intake and exhaust cam sprocket. If
the cam sprocket is rotated, the intake and ex-
haust valve heads strike together and valve
stems are bent.
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER
1) Remove the belt idler (A) and (B).
ME-00070
(B)
(A)
ME-04310
2) Remove the belt idler No. 2.

ME-04308
Z1: 54.5 teeth

Z2: 51 teeth
Z3: 28 teeth
Z1 Z2
Z3 Z3
ME-04977
3) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster as-

sembly.
ME-03128
5) Remove the belt idler (A).
ME-04978
(A)
ME-04309
ME(H4DOTC)-53
12LE_US.book 54
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION 2) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster as-

sembly.
ER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER Tightening torque:
39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten-
sion adjuster assembly.
CAUTION:
Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
move the adjuster rod down.
Do not use a lateral type vise.
Push the adjuster rod vertically.
Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually tak-
ing three minutes or more.
Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807 ME-04979
N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lbf).
Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the 3) Install the belt idler No. 2.
cylinder. However, do not press the adjuster Tightening torque:
rod below the end face of the cylinder. Doing so 39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
Do not release the press pressure until stop-
per pin is completely inserted.
(1) Attach the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly to vertical pressing tool.
(2) Slowly push in the adjuster rod with a pres-
sure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) or more until
the adjuster rod is aligned with the stopper pin
hole in the cylinder.
ME-04977
4) Install the belt idlers.

Tightening torque:
39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
ME-00239
(3) With a 2 mm (0.08 in) dia. stopper pin or a 2

mm (nominal) dia. hex wrench inserted into the
stopper pin hole in cylinder, secure the adjuster
rod.
ME-04980
ME-00350
ME(H4DOTC)-54
12LE_US.book 55
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
Tightening torque: 4) Align the single line mark (B) on the intake cam
25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb) sprocket RH with notch (A) on the timing belt cover.
Make sure that the double line marks (C) on intake
and exhaust cam sprockets are aligned.
(A)
(B)
(C)
ME-04981
2. TIMING BELT ME-04084

1) Prepare for installation of the automatic belt ten- 5) Align the single line mark (B) on exhaust cam
sion adjuster assembly. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-54, sprocket LH with notch (A) on the timing belt cover
AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION ADJUSTER AS- by turning the sprocket counterclockwise (as
SEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, INSTALLATION, viewed from front of engine).
Timing Belt.>
2) Align the mark (B) on crank sprocket with the
mark (A) on oil pump.
(A)
(B) (A)
(B)
ME-04311
6) Align the single line mark (B) on intake cam

ME-04082 sprocket LH with notch (A) on the timing belt cover
by turning the sprocket clockwise (as viewed from
3) Align the single line mark (B) on the exhaust cam front of engine). Make sure the double line marks
sprocket RH with notch (A) on the timing belt cover. (C) on the intake and exhaust cam sprockets are
aligned.
(A) (B)
(A)
(B)
(C)
ME-04083
ME-04086
ME(H4DOTC)-55
12LE_US.book 56
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
7) Make sure that the cam and crank sprockets are Do not allow the camshafts to rotate in the di-
positioned properly. rection shown in the upper figure. Doing this
CAUTION: may cause both the intake and exhaust valves
Intake and exhaust camshafts for this DOHC to lift simultaneously, resulting in mutual inter-
engine can be independently rotated with the ference of valve heads.
timing belts removed. As can be seen from the
figure, if the intake and exhaust valves are lifted (A)
simultaneously, heads will interfere with each

other, resulting in bent valves.
(A)
(A)
(B)
(A)
(A)
(B)
ME-04717
(A) Direction of rotation

(B) Timing belt installation position
(B)
ME-04111
(A) Intake camshaft

(B) Exhaust camshaft
When the timing belts are not installed, four

camshafts are held at the zero-lift position,
where all cams on camshafts are not pushing
down on the intake and exhaust valves. (Under
this condition, all valves remain unlifted.)
When the camshafts are rotated to install the
timing belts, #2 intake and #4 exhaust cam of
camshaft LH are held, pushing their corre-
sponding valves down. (Under this condition,
these valves are held lifted.) Camshaft RH are
held so that their cams do not push the valves
down.
Camshafts LH must be rotated from the zero-
lift position to the position where the timing belt
is to be installed with the smallest possible an-
gle, in order to prevent mutual interference of
intake and exhaust valve heads.
ME(H4DOTC)-56
12LE_US.book 57
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
8) Align the alignment mark on the timing belt with marks on the sprockets in the alphabetical order shown
in the figure. While aligning marks, position the timing belt properly, and install the timing belt.
CAUTION:
If the timing belt slips by 1 or more teeth, the valve and piston may hit each other.
Make sure that the direction of belt rotation is correct.
(1) (2)
(4) (5)
(3) (6)
(D) (B)
(A)
RH-IN LH-IN
RH-EX LH-EX
(E) (7) (C)

ME-04718
(1) Arrow mark (4) 54.5 teeth (6) 28 teeth

(2) Timing belt (5) 51 teeth (7) Install it in the end
(3) 28 teeth
9) Install the belt idlers.

Tightening torque:
39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
NOTE:
Make sure that the marks on the timing belt and sprockets are aligned.
ME-04982
ME(H4DOTC)-57
12LE_US.book 58
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
10) After ensuring that the marks on the timing belt

and sprockets are aligned, remove the stopper pin
from tensioner adjuster.
ME-04307
ME-00245
11) Install the timing belt guide.

(1) Temporarily tighten the bolts mounting the
timing belt guide.
NOTE:
Before installing the timing belt guide, clean the
timing belt guide mounting bolt holes of the timing
belt cover No. 2. ME-03126
Apply liquid gasket to the thread of the timing belt (2) Adjust the clearance between timing belt
guide mounting bolt on the cam sprocket section. and timing belt guide using a thickness gauge
(when reusing bolts) and tighten.
Liquid gasket: Clearance:
THREE BOND 1324 (Part No. 004403042) or 1.00.5 mm (0.0390.020 in)
equivalent
ME-00246
ME-00230
ME-03138
ME-03124
ME(H4DOTC)-58
12LE_US.book 59
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-04312
ME-03124
ME-03140
Tightening torque:
ME-04307
9.75 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
ME-00247 ME-03126

Cover.>
ME(H4DOTC)-59
12LE_US.book 60
Timing Belt
MECHANICAL
C: INSPECTION (3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff and moves

down, replace the automatic belt tension adjust-
1. TIMING BELT er assembly with a new part.
1) Check the timing belt teeth for breaks, cracks or CAUTION:
wear. If any fault is found, replace the timing belt. Always use a vertical type pressing tool to
2) Check the condition on the back surface of the move the adjuster rod down.
timing belt. If cracks are found, replace the timing Do not use a lateral type vise.
belt. Push the adjuster rod vertically.
CAUTION: Press-in the push adjuster rod gradually tak-
Be careful not to let oil, grease or coolant ing three minutes or more.
contact the timing belt. Remove quickly and Do not allow press pressure to exceed 9,807
thoroughly if this happens. N (1,000 kgf, 2,205 lbf).
Do not bend the timing belt sharply. Push in the adjuster rod to the end face of the
cylinder. However, do not press the adjuster
In radial diameter h:
60 mm (2.36 in) or more
4) Measure the amount of adjuster rod protrusion
L from the end surface of the cylinder. If it is not
within specifications, replace the automatic belt
tension adjuster assembly with a new part.
h
Protrusion amount of adjuster rod L:
5.2 6.2 mm (0.205 0.244 in)
L
ME-00248

ER
1) Visually check the oil seals for leaks, and rod
ends for abnormal wear and scratches. If neces-
sary, replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
assembly. ME-04106
NOTE: 3. BELT TENSION PULLEY

Slight traces of oil on the oil seal of the rod does not
1) Check the mating surfaces of timing belt and
indicate a problem.
contact point of adjuster rod for abnormal wear or
2) Check that the adjuster rod does not move when
scratches. Replace the automatic belt tension ad-
a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) is applied to
juster assembly with a new part if faulty.
it. This is to check adjuster rod stiffness.
2) Check the belt tension pulley for smooth rota-
3) If the adjuster rod is not stiff enough and moves
tion. Replace the automatic belt tension adjuster
freely when applying 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf),
assembly with a new part if abnormal noise or ex-
check it using the following procedures:
cessive play occurs.
(1) Slowly press the adjuster rod down to the 3) Check the belt tension pulley for grease leakage.
end surface of cylinder. Repeat this operation
two to three times. 4. BELT IDLER
(2) With the adjuster rod moved all the way up, 1) Check the belt idler for smooth rotation. Replace
apply a pressure of 165 N (16.8 kgf, 37.1 lbf) to if noise or excessive play occurs.
it, and check the adjuster rod stiffness. 2) Check the outer contacting surfaces of idler pul-
ley for abnormal wear and scratches.
3) Check the belt idler for grease leakage.
ME(H4DOTC)-60
12LE_US.book 61
Cam Sprocket
MECHANICAL
16.Cam Sprocket 3) Install the actuator covers of intake cam sprock-

et and exhaust cam sprocket.
A: REMOVAL NOTE:
NOTE: Use new O-rings.
When replacing a single part, perform the work with Tightening torque:
3.4 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
1) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.>
ME(H4DOTC)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt Cover.>
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- Cover.>
52, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> 6) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
4) Remove the actuator covers of the intake and 44, INSTALLATION, Crank Pulley.>
exhaust cam sprockets.
5) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and re- C: INSPECTION
move the cam sprocket bolt. 1) Check the cam sprocket teeth for abnormal wear
ST 499977500 CAM SPROCKET WRENCH and scratches.
2) Make sure there is no free play between cam
sprocket and key.
ST
ME-04313
6) Remove the cam sprocket.

B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the cam sprocket.
2) Use the ST to lock the cam sprocket, and install
the cam sprocket bolt.
NOTE:
Do not confuse cam sprockets (LH) and (RH) or
(INT) and (EXH) during installation.
Tightening torque:
Tighten to 30 Nm (3.1 kgf-m, 22.1 ft-lb) of
torque, and then tighten further by 45.
ST
ME-04313
ME(H4DOTC)-61
12LE_US.book 62
Crank Sprocket
MECHANICAL
17.Crank Sprocket
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
3) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
52, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.>
4) Remove the crank sprocket.
ME-04983
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the crank sprocket.
ME-04983

Cover.>
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the crank sprocket teeth for abnormal
wear and scratches.
2) Make sure there is no free play between crank
sprocket and key.
3) Check the crank sprocket protrusion used for
sensor for damage and contamination of foreign
matter.
ME(H4DOTC)-62
12LE_US.book 63
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
18.Camshaft 7) Disconnect the connector (A) from the exhaust

camshaft position sensor and the connector (B)
A: REMOVAL form the exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve.
ME(H4DOTC)-31, REMOVAL, Engine Assembly.>
2) Remove the crank pulley. <Ref. to (A)
ME(H4DOTC)-44, REMOVAL, Crank Pulley.> (B)
5) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to
6) Disconnect the connector of the intake oil flow
(A)
(B)
ME-05025
8) Remove the timing belt cover No. 2 RH (A) and

timing belt cover No. 2 LH (B).
NOTE:
Do not damage or lose the seal rubber when re-
moving the timing belt covers.
(A)
(B)
ME-05767
ME-04836
ME-04984
ME(H4DOTC)-63
12LE_US.book 64
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
10) Disconnect the oil level switch connector. 14) Disconnect PCV hose (A) and vacuum hose
(B) from the rocker cover.
NOTE:
Pinch the clamp of the PCV hose (A) by fitting the
shown in the figure, and unlock the clamp.
ST
ME-04389
11) Remove the clip (A) and bolt (B) securing the
engine harness or oil level switch harness to the
rocker cover.
(A) ME-04374
(B)
(A)
(A)
(B)
(B)
(A)
ME-04390
12) Remove the ignition coil. <Ref. to

13) Remove the scavenge pump. (RH side only) ME-05768
<Ref. to LU(H4SO)-30, REMOVAL, Scavenge
Pump.>
ME(H4DOTC)-64
12LE_US.book 65
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
15) Remove the rocker cover. 17) Loosen the bolts located on the upper side of
the front camshaft cap, intake camshaft cap and
rear camshaft cap (RH side only) equally, a little at
a time in alphabetical order, as shown in the figure.
(G) (A)
(C) (E)
(D) (F)
(H) (B)
(A)
(E) (C)
(F) (D)
(B)
ME-05036
16) Remove the union bolt without filter (without

protrusion) which secures the oil pipe to the front
ME-04317
camshaft cap.
18) Loosen the lower side of the front camshaft cap
(B) (A)
and the exhaust camshaft cap bolts equally, a little
(E ) at a time in alphabetical sequence shown in the fig-
(C) (E )
(E ) ure.
(A)
(C) (E)
(B)
(D) (F) (B)
(E )
(D)
(A)
(E )
(A)
ME-05030 (E) (C)

(F) (D)
(C) Oil pipe RH (B) ME-04349
(D) Oil pipe LH 19) Remove the front camshaft cap.
(E) Gasket 20) Remove the intake camshaft caps, intake cam-
shaft and rear camshaft caps (RH side only).
ME(H4DOTC)-65
12LE_US.book 66
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
21) Remove the exhaust camshaft caps and ex- Exhaust camshaft LH:
haust camshaft. Rotate 45 counterclockwise.
NOTE:
Arrange camshaft caps in order so that they can be (A)
(b) (a)
installed in their original positions. 77.5
22) Remove the oil seal. 11
CAUTION:
Do not scratch the journal surface when remov-
ing the oil seal.
23) Similarly, remove the camshaft RH and related
parts.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the camshaft. (B)
Apply engine oil to the cylinder head at camshaft (a)
77.5
(b)
journal installation location before installing the
11
camshaft. Install the camshaft so that each valve is
close to or in contact with base circle of the cam
lobe.
NOTE:
Set the camshaft to the position shown in the fig-
ure.
When set at the position shown in the figure, it is ME-05038
not necessary to rotate the camshaft RH when in-
(A) Cylinder head RH
stalling the timing belt, but it is necessary to rotate
the camshaft LH slightly. (B) Cylinder head LH
(a) Intake camshaft
Intake camshaft LH:
(b) Exhaust camshaft
Rotate 80 clockwise.
ME(H4DOTC)-66
12LE_US.book 67
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
2) Install the camshaft cap. (2) Apply small amount of liquid gasket to the
(1) Apply small amount of liquid gasket to the mating surface of rear camshaft cap (RH side
mating surface of front camshaft cap. only).
NOTE: NOTE:
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Do not apply liquid gasket excessively. Applying Do not apply liquid gasket excessively. Applying
excessively may cause excess gasket to come out excessively may cause excess gasket to come out
and flow toward oil seal, resulting in oil leak. and flow toward oil seal, resulting in oil leak.
Liquid gasket: Liquid gasket:
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
or equivalent or equivalent
Liquid gasket applying diameter: Liquid gasket applying diameter:
Mating surfaces other than ranges A and B 20.5 mm (0.07870.0197 in)
20.5 mm (0.07870.0197 in)
Mating surfaces of ranges A and B A-A (B)
31 mm (0.11810.0394 in) (D)
(C)
A
A B
B-B (B)
C C
B (D)
B (C)
A A B A-A (C)
(H)
C-C (B)
(E) (G) (D)
(A)
(C)
D
B-B (D) D
D-D (B)
(J)
(D)
B (I) (A) (C)
B
A A
ME-05770
(F)
(A) 12.51.0 mm (0.49210.0394 in)
(B)
ME-05769 (B) Liquid gasket applying position
(C) 20.5 mm (0.07870.0197 in)
(A) Range A (D) 0.50.5 mm (0.01970.0197 in)
(B) Range B
(C) Liquid gasket applying position of mating sur- (3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the cap
faces of ranges other than A and B journal surface, and install the camshaft cap to
(D) Liquid gasket applying position of mating sur- the camshaft.
faces of ranges A and B
(E) 44.8 mm (1.7638 in)
(F) 65 mm (2.5591 in)
(G) 20.5 mm (0.07870.0197 in)
(H) 0.50.5 mm (0.01970.0197 in)
(I) 31 mm (0.11810.0394 in)
(J) 1 mm (0.0394 in) or less
ME(H4DOTC)-67
12LE_US.book 68
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
(4) Gradually tighten the camshaft cap in at 4) Install the oil pipe to the front camshaft cap using
least two steps, in alphabetical order shown in the union bolt without filter (without protrusion).
the figure, and then tighten to the specified NOTE:
torque.
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
Tightening torque:
T1: 9.75 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
29 Nm (3.0 kgf-m, 21.4 ft-lb)
T2: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
(B) (A)
(M) (G)
(L) (C) (E )
(C) (E )
T1 (E )
T1
T2
T1 (K) (A) (E)
(N)
(F)
(J) T2 (B)
T1
(I) (D) (H)
(G)
(C) (L) (B)
T1
(E )
T2 (D)
(E) (A) (K)
(F)
(B) (J)
T2
(A)
T1
(E )
(H) (D) (I) ME-05033
ME-04352
(5) After tightening the camshaft cap, ensure (A) Union bolt with filter (with protrusion)
the camshaft rotates only slightly while holding (B) Union bolt without filter (without protrusion)
it at base circle. (C) Oil pipe RH
3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the periphery of (D) Oil pipe LH
the camshaft oil seal and oil seal lip, and install the (E) Gasket
oil seal on the camshaft using ST1 and ST2.
NOTE: 5) Install the tensioner bracket.
Use a new oil seal. Tightening torque:
ST1 499587600 OIL SEAL INSTALLER 24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb)
ST2 499597200 OIL SEAL GUIDE
ST1 ME-04984
ST2
ME-05002
ME(H4DOTC)-68
12LE_US.book 69
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
6) Install the timing belt cover No. 2 RH (A) and tim- (2) Apply liquid gasket to the specified point of
ing belt cover No. 2 LH (B). the cylinder head.
Tightening torque: NOTE:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb) Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
(A)
Liquid gasket:
(B)
or equivalent
ME-04836

9) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to
ance.>
cover. (outer section and ignition coil section)
NOTE:
ME-04321
(3) Install the rocker cover onto cylinder heads.

Ensure the gasket is properly positioned during
installation.
ME(H4DOTC)-69
12LE_US.book 70
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
(4) Temporarily tighten the rocker cover bolts in

(B)
alphabetical order shown in the figure, and then (A)
tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(C),(K)
(H) (E)
(B),(J)
(A),(I)
(B)
(A)
(F) (G)
(D),(L)
(C),(K) (H)
(E)
(B),(J) ME-05768
(A),(I)
13) Install the ignition coil. <Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-6,
INSTALLATION, Ignition Coil.>
14) Secure the engine harness or oil level switch
(G)
harness to the rocker cover with the clip (A) and
(D),(L) (F)
ME-04351 bolt (B).
11) Install the scavenge pump. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)- Tightening torque:
30, INSTALLATION, Scavenge Pump.> 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
12) Connect the PCV hose (A) and vacuum hose
(B) to the rocker cover.
NOTE: (A)
Use a new clamp for the PCV hose (A), fit the cut
ST
(A)
(B)
ME-04374
ME-04390
ME(H4DOTC)-70
12LE_US.book 71
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
15) Connect the connector to the oil level switch. 17) Connect the connector (A) from the exhaust
camshaft position sensor and the connector (B) to
the exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve.
(A)
(B)
ME-04389
16) Connect the connector to the intake oil flow

(A)
(B)
ME-05025

Cover.>
ME(H4DOTC)-34, INSTALLATION, Engine As-
sembly.>
ME-05767
ME(H4DOTC)-71
12LE_US.book 72
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
C: INSPECTION 6) Measure the outside diameter of camshaft jour-

nal. If the journal diameter is not within specifica-
1) Measure the bend, and repair or replace if nec-
tion, check the oil clearance.
essary.
Camshaft journal
Camshaft bend limit:
Front Center, rear
0.020 mm (0.00079 in)
Standard 37.946 37.963 29.946 29.963
mm (in) (1.4939 1.4946) (1.1790 1.1796)
7) Measure the oil clearance of camshaft journal.

(1) Clean the camshaft cap and cylinder head
camshaft journal.
(2) Place the camshaft on cylinder head. (With-
out installing the valve lifter)
(3) Place a plastigauge across each camshaft
journals.
ME-00118 (4) Gradually tighten the camshaft cap in at
2) Check the journal for damage and wear. Re- least two steps, in alphabetical order shown in
place if faulty. the figure, and then tighten to the specified
torque. Do not turn the camshaft.
3) Check the cutout portion used for camshaft sen-
sor for damage. Replace if faulty. Tightening torque:
4) Check the cam face condition, and remove the T1: 9.75 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.2 ft-lb)
minor faults by grinding with oil stone. Replace if T2: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
there is uneven wear or others.
5) Measure the cam lobe height H and cam base (L) (C) (G)
circle diameter A. If it exceeds the standard or off-
T1
set wear occurs, replace it.
T2
Cam lobe height H: (K) (A) (E)
Standard (F)
(J) T2 (B)
Intake T1
46.55 46.65 mm (1.833 1.837 in)
Exhaust (I) (D) (H)
45.85 45.95 mm (1.805 1.809 in)
Cam base circle diameter A: (G)
(C) (L)
Standard
37.0 mm (1.457 in) T1
T2
(E) (A) (K)
(F)
(B) (J)
T2
T1
H
(H) (D) (I)

ME-04350
(5) Remove the camshaft cap.

A
ME-00276
ME(H4DOTC)-72
12LE_US.book 73
Camshaft
MECHANICAL
(6) Measure the widest point of the plastigauge

on each journal. If oil clearance exceeds the
standard, replace the camshaft. If necessary,
replace the camshaft caps and cylinder head as
a set.
Camshaft oil clearance:
Standard
0.037 0.072 mm (0.0015 0.0028 in)
ME-00119
(7) Completely remove the plastigauge.

8) Measure the thrust clearance of camshaft with
the dial gauge set at end of camshaft. If the thrust
clearance is not within the standard or there is off-
set wear, replace the camshaft caps and cylinder
head as a set. If necessary replace the camshaft.
Camshaft thrust clearance:
Standard
0.068 0.116 mm (0.0027 0.0047 in)
ME-00121
ME(H4DOTC)-73
12LE_US.book 74
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
19.Cylinder Head NOTE:

Leave the bolts (A) and (D) engaged by three or
A: REMOVAL four threads to prevent the cylinder head from fall-
1) Remove the engine from the vehicle. <Ref. to ing.
FU(H4DOTC)-18, REMOVAL, Intake Manifold.> (A) (F) (D)

52, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> (C) (E) (B)
6) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to

7) Remove the bolts which secure A/C compressor
bracket to cylinder head. (LH side only) (D) (F) (A)
8) Remove the oil pipe. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-31, RE-
MOVAL, Oil Pipe.>
9) Remove the clip stay.
(B) (E) (C)
ME-04298
13) While tapping the cylinder head with a plastic

hammer, separate it from cylinder block. Remove
the bolts (A) and (D) to remove cylinder head.
ME-04323
10) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- (A) (F) (D)

11) Remove the oil level gauge guide. (LH side
only)
12) Remove the cylinder head bolts in alphabetical
order shown in the figure.
(C) (E) (B)
(D) (F) (A)
(B) (E) (C)
ME-04298
14) Remove the cylinder head gasket.

CAUTION:
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
cylinder head and cylinder block.
ME(H4DOTC)-74
12LE_US.book 75
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
B: INSTALLATION (11) Retighten bolts (A) and (B) by 40 45.

1) Install the cylinder head to the cylinder block. CAUTION:
CAUTION: Make sure the total tightening angle of steps
(10) and (11) does not exceed 90.
Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
cylinder head and cylinder block.
NOTE: (F) (A) (C)
Use a new cylinder head gasket.
(1) Clean the bolt threads and the bolt holes in
the cylinder block
CAUTION:
To avoid erroneous tightening of the bolts,
clean out the bolt holes sufficiently by blowing (D) (B) (E)
with compressed air to eliminate engine cool-

ant etc.
(2) Apply a sufficient coat of engine oil to the
washer and bolt thread. (C) (A) (F)
(3) Tighten all bolts to 40 Nm (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5
ft-lb) in alphabetical order.
CAUTION:
If the bolt makes stick-slip sound during tight- (E) (B) (D)
ening, repeat the procedure from step (1). In
this case, the cylinder head gasket can be re- ME-04319
used.
(5) Loosen all the bolts by 180 in the reverse 2) Install the oil level gauge guide. (LH side only)
order of installing, and loosen them further by Tightening torque:
180. 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(6) Tighten all bolts to 10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft- 3) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-66,
lb) in alphabetical order. INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
(7) Retighten all bolts to 30 Nm (3.1 kgf-m, 4) Install the clip stay.
(8) Retighten all bolts to 70 Nm (7.1 kgf-m, Tightening torque:
51.6 ft-lb) in alphabetical order. 36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
(9) Retighten all bolts by 80 90 in alphabet-
ical order.
(10) Retighten all bolts by 40 45 in alphabet-
ical order.
CAUTION:
The tightening angle of the bolt should not ex-
ceed 45.
ME-04323
5) Install the oil pipe. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-33, IN-

STALLATION, Oil Pipe.>
6) Install the A/C compressor bracket on cylinder
head. (LH side only)
Tightening torque:
36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
ME(H4DOTC)-75
12LE_US.book 76
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
8) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-54, (4) Temporarily tighten the rocker cover bolts in
INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.> alphabetical order shown in the figure, and then
9) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque:
ance.>
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker (C),(K)
cover. (outer section and ignition coil section) (H) (E)
NOTE:
(B),(J)
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the specified point of (A),(I)
the cylinder head.
NOTE:
(F) (G)
Liquid gasket: (D),(L)
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100) (C),(K) (H)
or equivalent (E)
(B),(J)
(A),(I)
(G) (F)
(D),(L)
ME-04351
11) Connect the PCV hose to the rocker cover.

Cover.>
fold.>
sembly.>
ME-04321
(3) Install the rocker cover onto cylinder heads.

Ensure the gasket is properly positioned during
installation.
ME(H4DOTC)-76
12LE_US.book 77
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the valve lifter.
2) Place the cylinder head on ST1.
ST1 498267600 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE
3) Using ST2, compress the valve spring and re-
move the valve spring retainer key. Remove each
valve and valve spring.
ST2 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER
NOTE:
Mark each valve to prevent confusion.
Pay careful attention not to damage the lips of in-
take valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil seals.
Keep all the removed parts in order for re-install-
ing in their original positions.
For removal and installation procedures of the
valve guide, intake valve oil seal and exhaust valve
oil seal, refer to INSPECTION. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-79, VALVE GUIDE, INSPECTION,
Cylinder Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-81, IN-
TAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL SEAL, IN-
SPECTION, Cylinder Head.>
ST2
ST1
ME-05003
ME(H4DOTC)-77
12LE_US.book 78
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(1)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(3)
(2)
(11) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)

(12)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(12) (9)
(4)
(10)
(6)
(7)
(8)
(9)
ME-04990
(1) Exhaust valve (5) Intake valve oil seal (9) Valve lifter
(2) Intake valve (6) Valve spring (10) Exhaust valve oil seal
(3) Cylinder head (7) Valve spring retainer (11) Intake valve guide
(4) Valve spring seat (8) Valve spring retainer key (12) Exhaust valve guide
1) Install the valve spring and valve.

(1) Coat the valve stem of each valve with engine oil and insert the valve into valve guide.
NOTE:
When inserting the valve into valve guide, use special care not to damage the oil seal lip.
(2) Set the cylinder head on ST1.
(3) Install the valve spring and valve spring retainer.
NOTE:
Be sure to install the valve spring with its close-coiled end facing the cylinder head side.
ME(H4DOTC)-78
12LE_US.book 79
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(4) Set the ST2 on valve spring. 2. VALVE SEAT

ST2 499718000 VALVE SPRING REMOVER Inspect the intake and exhaust valve seats, and
correct the contact surfaces with a valve seat cutter
if they are defective or when valve guides are re-
ST2 placed.
Contacting width W between valve and valve
seat:
Standard
Intake
ST1 0.6 1.4 mm (0.024 0.055 in)
ME-05003 Exhaust
1.2 1.8 mm (0.047 0.071 in)
(5) Compress the valve spring and fit the valve
spring retainer key.
(6) After installing, tap the valve spring retainers
lightly with a plastic hammer for better seating.
2) Apply oil to the surface of valve lifter.
3) Install the valve lifter.
W
E: INSPECTION
1. CYLINDER HEAD
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene- ME-04721
trant tester on the important sections to check for
fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak-
ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface.
2) Measure the warping of the cylinder head sur-
face that mates with cylinder block using a straight
edge (A) and thickness gauge (B).
If the warping exceeds the limit, correct the surface
by grinding it with a surface grinder.
Warping limit:
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
ME-00287
Grinding limit:
0.3 mm (0.012 in) 3. VALVE GUIDE
Standard height of cylinder head: 1) Check the clearance between valve guide and
127.5 mm (5.02 in) valve stem. The clearance can be checked by mea-
suring the outer diameter of valve stem with a mi-
NOTE: crometer and the inner diameter of valve guide with
Uneven torque for the cylinder head bolts can a caliper gauge respectively.
cause warping. When reinstalling, pay special at-
tention to the torque so as to tighten evenly. Clearance between the valve guide and valve
stem:
(A)
Standard
Intake
0.030 0.057 mm (0.0012 0.0022 in)
Exhaust
0.040 0.067 mm (0.0016 0.0026 in)
(B)
ME-00126
ME(H4DOTC)-79
12LE_US.book 80
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
2) If the clearance between valve guide and valve (5) Put a new valve guide, coated with sufficient
stem exceeds the standard, replace the valve oil, in the cylinder head, and insert the ST1 into
guide or valve itself, whichever shows the greater valve guide. Press in until the valve guide upper
amount of wear or damage. See the following pro- end is flush with the upper surface of ST2.
cedure for valve guide replacement. ST1 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER
Valve guide inner diameter: ST2 18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER
6.000 6.012 mm (0.2362 0.2367 in)
ST1
Valve stem outer diameters:
Intake
ST2
5.955 5.970 mm (0.2344 0.2350 in)
Exhaust
5.945 5.960 mm (0.2341 0.2346 in)
(1) Place the cylinder head on ST1 with the
combustion chamber upward so that valve
guides fit the holes in ST1.
ME-00130
(2) Insert the ST2 into valve guide and press it
down to remove the valve guide. (6) Check the valve guide protrusion amount
ST1 498267600 CYLINDER HEAD TABLE L.
ST2 499767200 VALVE GUIDE REMOVER Valve guide protrusion amount L:
15.8 16.2 mm (0.622 0.638 in)
ST2
L
ST1
ME-05004
(3) Turn the cylinder head upside down and ME-04522

place the ST as shown in the figure. (7) Ream the inside of valve guide using ST.
ST 18251AA020 VALVE GUIDE ADJUSTER Put the ST in valve guide, and rotate the ST
slowly clockwise while pushing it lightly. Bring
the ST back while rotating it clockwise.
NOTE:
Apply engine oil to the ST when reaming.
ST
If the inner surface of valve guide is damaged,
the edge of ST should be slightly ground with oil
stone.
If the inner surface of valve guide becomes lus-
trous and the ST does not chip, use a new ST or
ME-04107 remedy the ST.
(4) Before installing a new valve guide, make ST 499767400 VALVE GUIDE REAMER
sure that neither scratches nor damages exist
on the inner surface of valve guide holes in cyl-
inder head.
ST
ME-04393
ME(H4DOTC)-80
12LE_US.book 81
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
(8) After reaming, clean the valve guide to re- 5. VALVE SPRING
move chips. 1) Check the valve springs for damage, free length,
(9) Recheck the contact condition between and tension. Replace the valve spring if it is not
valve and valve seat after replacing the valve within the standard value presented in the table.
guide. 2) To measure the squareness of the valve spring,
4. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE stand the valve spring on a surface plate and mea-
sure its deflection at the top of valve spring using a
1) Inspect the flange of valve and valve stem, and right angle gauge.
replace the valve with a new part if damaged, worn,
deformed, or if dimension H in the figure is out- Free length mm (in) 47.32 (1.863)
side of the specified limit. 205 235 (20.90 23.96,
Tension/spring Set
46.09 52.84)/36.0 (1.417)
Head edge thickness H: height
N (kgf, lbf)/mm (in) Lift 426 490 (43.44 49.96,
Standard 95.78 110.17)/26.5 (1.043)
Intake (A) Squareness 2.5, 2.1 mm (0.083 in) or less
1.0 1.4 mm (0.039 0.055 in)
Exhaust (B)
1.3 1.7 mm (0.051 0.067 in)
(A)
ME-00283
6. INTAKE AND EXHAUST VALVE OIL

SEAL
1) For the following, replace the oil seal with a new
part. See the procedure 2) and subsequent for re-
(B) placement procedures.
When the lip is damaged.
When the spring is out of the specified position.
When readjusting the surfaces of valve and
H valve seat.
When replacing the valve guide.
ME-04825
2) Put a small amount of grinding compound on the

valve seat surface, and lap the valve and valve seat
surface. Replace with a new valve oil seal after lap-
ping.
NOTE:
It is possible to differentiate between the intake
valve and the exhaust valve by their overall length.
Valve overall length:
Intake
104.4 mm (4.110 in)
Exhaust
104.65 mm (4.1201 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-81
12LE_US.book 82
Cylinder Head
MECHANICAL
2) Place the cylinder head on ST1, and use ST2 to 3) Measure the inner diameter of valve lifter mating
press-fit the oil seal. surface on cylinder head.
Valve lifter mating surface inner diameter:
ST2 498857100 VALVE OIL SEAL GUIDE Standard
NOTE: 34.994 35.016 mm (1.3777 1.3786 in)
Apply engine oil to oil seal before press-fitting.
When press-fitting the oil seal, do not use a ham-
mer or strike in.
The intake valve oil seals and exhaust valve oil
seals are distinguished by their colors.
Color of rubber part:
Intake [Gray]
Exhaust [Green]
ME-00135
ST2
4) Check the clearance between valve lifter and
valve lifter mating surface. The clearance can be
checked by measuring the outer diameter of valve
lifter and the inner diameter of valve lifter. If it ex-
ceeds the standard or offset wear occurs, replace
the cylinder head.
Valve lifter and valve lifter mating surface clear-
ME-00133 ance:
7. VALVE LIFTER Standard
0.019 0.057 mm (0.0007 0.0022 in)
1) Check the valve lifter visually.
2) Measure the outer diameter of valve lifter.
Outer diameter of valve lifter:
Standard
34.959 34.975 mm (1.3763 1.3770 in)
ME-00134
ME(H4DOTC)-82
12LE_US.book 83
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
20.Cylinder Block 18) Remove the oil pump from cylinder block using
a flat tip screwdriver.
A: REMOVAL CAUTION:
NOTE: Be careful not to scratch the mating surface of
Before conducting this procedure, drain the engine the cylinder block and oil pump.
oil completely.
5) Remove the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)- ME-00138
6) Remove the cam sprocket. <Ref. to 19) Remove the front oil seal from the oil pump.
ME(H4DOTC)-61, REMOVAL, Cam Sprocket.> 20) Remove the clip holding the oil level switch har-
7) Remove the crank sprocket. <Ref. to ness from cylinder block.
ME(H4DOTC)-62, REMOVAL, Crank Sprocket.>
8) Remove the A/C compressor together with the
bracket.
9) Remove the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
10) Remove the cylinder head. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-74, REMOVAL, Cylinder Head.>
11) Remove the clutch disc and cover. <Ref. to CL-
11, REMOVAL, Clutch Disc and Cover.>
12) Remove the flywheel. <Ref. to CL-14, REMOV- ME-04392
AL, Flywheel.>
21) Remove the oil pan and cylinder block lower.
13) Remove the oil separator cover.
14) Remove the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-36, (1) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Filter.> on the upper side.
(2) Remove the bolts which secure the oil pan
15) Remove the oil cooler. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-27,
to the cylinder block lower.
REMOVAL, Engine Oil Cooler.>
(3) Insert an oil pan cutter blade into the gap be-
16) Remove the water pump. <Ref. to
tween cylinder block lower and oil pan, and re-
CO(H4DOTC)-16, REMOVAL, Water Pump.>
move the oil pan.
17) Remove the bolts which secure oil pump to cyl-
inder block. CAUTION:
Do not use a screwdriver or similar tools in
NOTE:
place of oil pan cutter.
When disassembling and checking the oil pump,
loosen the relief valve plug before removing the oil
pump.
LU-00015
ME(H4DOTC)-83
12LE_US.book 84
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(4) Remove the bolts which secure the cylinder

block lower to the cylinder block, and remove (C)
the cylinder block lower by using flat tip screw- (A)
driver.
CAUTION:
Insert the flat tip screwdriver at the position
shown in the figure, and avoid scratching the
mating surface of the cylinder block and cylin-
der block lower. (B)
(D)
ME-04426

ME-04888
23) Remove blow-by pipe assembly (A), blow-by
pipe (B), PCV hose assembly (C) and water pipe 24) Remove the water by-pass pipe.
assembly (D).
NOTE:
To unlock the clamp of the blow-by pipe assembly
(A), blow-by pipe (B) and PCV hose assembly (C),
pinch the clamp by fitting the cut out in the ST with
the protrusion on the clamp as shown in the figure.
ST
ME-04374
ME-04889
ME(H4DOTC)-84
12LE_US.book 85
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(7)
(8)
(4)
(7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-04723
(1) Service hole plug (4) Piston pin (7) Seal washer
(2) Gasket (5) Service hole cover (8) Washer
(3) Snap ring (6) O-ring
25) Remove the service hole plugs using a hexagon wrench [14 mm].
ME-00140

27) Rotate the crankshaft to bring #1 and #2 pistons to bottom dead center position, then remove the piston
snap ring through service hole of #1 and #2 cylinders.
ME-00141
ME(H4DOTC)-85
12LE_US.book 86
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
28) Draw out the piston pin from #1 and #2 pistons using ST.
ST 499097700 PISTON PIN REMOVER ASSY
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the original combination of piston, piston pin and cylinder.
ST
ME-03325
29) Similarly draw out the piston pins from #3 and #4 pistons.
30) Remove the cylinder block connecting bolt on the RH side.
31) Loosen the cylinder block connecting bolt on the LH side by 2 to 3 turns.
32) Set the part so that the cylinder block LH is on the upper side, and remove the cylinder block connecting
bolt.
33) Separate the cylinder block LH and RH.
NOTE:
When separating the cylinder block, do not allow the connecting rod to fall or damage the cylinder block.
(5)
(7)
(1)
(4)
(2)
(6) (4)
(3)
(1)
(5)
ME-04724
(1) Cylinder block (4) Crankshaft bearing (6) Seal washer

(2) Rear oil seal (5) Piston (7) Washer
(3) Crankshaft
ME(H4DOTC)-86
12LE_US.book 87
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
34) Remove the rear oil seal.

35) Remove the crankshaft together with connecting rod.
36) Remove the crankshaft bearings from cylinder block using a hammer handle.
NOTE:
Press the crankshaft bearing at the end opposite to locking lip to remove.
Be careful not to confuse the crankshaft bearing combination.
37) Remove each piston from the cylinder block using a wooden bar or hammer handle.
NOTE:
Be careful not to confuse the original combination of piston and cylinder.
B: INSTALLATION
(6)
(5)
(4)
(1) (7)
(3)
(3)
(7) (2)
(6)
(7)
(6)
ME-04725
(1) Crankshaft bearing (4) Rear oil seal (6) Seal washer
(2) Crankshaft (5) O-ring (7) Washer
(3) Cylinder block
1) Remove oil on the mating surface of cylinder block before installation. Apply a coat of engine oil to the
bearing and crankshaft journal.
2) Position the crankshaft and O-ring on cylinder block RH.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
ME(H4DOTC)-87
12LE_US.book 88
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
3) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of cyl- 7) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting
inder block RH, and position cylinder block LH. bolts (A D) further in alphabetical order.
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
Do not allow liquid gasket to jut into O-ring
grooves, oil passages, bearing grooves, etc.
Liquid gasket: (A)
or equivalent (D)
(B)
(C)
ME-00779
8) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting

bolts (E J) further in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque:
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
ME-00145
4) Apply a coat of engine oil to the washer and bolt

thread.
(E)
NOTE: (J)
(G)
Use a new seal washer.
bolts on the LH side (A D) in alphabetical order.
Tightening torque: (H)
(I) (F)
10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb)
ME-00780
9) Tighten the LH side cylinder block connecting

bolts (A D) further in alphabetical order.
(A) (A), (C): Angle tightening
(D)
Tightening angle:
90
(B), (D): Torque tightening
(B)
(C)
Tightening torque:
40 Nm (4.1 kgf-m, 29.5 ft-lb)
ME-00779

bolts on the RH side (E J) in alphabetical order.
(A)
Tightening torque:
10 Nm (1.0 kgf-m, 7.4 ft-lb) (D)
(B)
(E)
(J) (C)
(G) ME-00779
(H)
(I) (F)
ME-00780
ME(H4DOTC)-88
12LE_US.book 89
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
10) Tighten the RH side cylinder block connecting 13) Position the top ring gap at (A) or (B) in the fig-
bolts (E J) further in alphabetical order. ure.
14) Position the second ring gap at 180 on the re-
Tightening angle:
verse side the top ring gap.
90
(E)
(J)
(G)
(A) (B)
(H)
(I) (F)
ME-04737
ME-00780
15) Position the upper rail gap at (C) in the figure.
11) Tighten the 8 mm and 6 mm cylinder block con-
necting bolts on the LH side (A H) in alphabetical
order.
Tightening torque:
(A) (G): 25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
(H): 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(G) 25
(C) (A) (B)

(E)
(C)
ME-04738
16) Align the upper rail spin stopper (E) to the side
hole (D) on the piston.
(D) (E)
(D) (F)
(H) ME-00147
12) Apply a coat of engine oil to the oil seal inner

periphery and outer periphery, and install the rear
oil seal using ST1 and ST2.
NOTE:
Use a new rear oil seal.
ST1 499597100 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL ME-02471
GUIDE
17) Position the expander gap at (F) in the figure on
ST2 499587200 CRANKSHAFT OIL SEAL IN- the 180 opposite direction of (C).
STALLER
(A)
(F)
ST2
(B)
ST1 ME-04739
ME-04998
(A) Rear oil seal

(B) Flywheel attachment bolt
ME(H4DOTC)-89
12LE_US.book 90
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
18) Set the lower rail gap at position (G), located 120 clockwise from (C) in the figure.
(G) (C)
120
ME-04740
NOTE:
Make sure ring gaps do not face the same direction.
Make sure ring gaps are not within the piston skirt area.
19) Install the snap ring.
Before positioning the piston on the cylinder block, attach the snap ring in the service hole of the cylinder
block, and the piston hole on the opposite side.
NOTE:
Use new snap rings.
#3
#1
#4
(A)
#2
ME-04764
(A) Front side
(5) T
(4) (5)
(1) (3) (4)

(3)
(2)
(2)
(1)
ME-04730
(1) Piston (4) Gasket Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)

(2) Piston pin (5) Service hole plug T: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(3) Snap ring
ME(H4DOTC)-90
12LE_US.book 91
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
20) Install the piston. 21) Install the piston pin.

(1) Set the parts so that the #1 and #2 cylinders (1) Apply a coat of engine oil to ST3.
are on the upper side. (2) Insert ST3 into the service hole to align the
(2) Using the ST1, turn the crankshaft so that piston pin hole and the connecting rod small
#1 and #2 connecting rods are set at bottom end.
dead center. ST3 499017100 PISTON PIN GUIDE
ST1 499987500 CRANKSHAFT SOCKET
(3) Apply a coat of engine oil to the pistons and ST1
cylinders and insert pistons in their cylinders us- ST3
ing ST2.
ST2 498747300 PISTON GUIDE
ST1
ME-00158
(3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to piston pin,

and insert the piston pin into piston and con-
necting rod through service hole.
ST2
(4) Install the snap ring.
ME-00157
NOTE:
NOTE: Use new snap rings.
Face the piston front mark towards the front of the
engine.
(A)
ME-00159
ME-04830
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the threaded portion
of the service hole plug.
(A) Front mark Liquid gasket:
equivalent
ME-00160
ME(H4DOTC)-91
12LE_US.book 92
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(6) Install the service hole plug and gasket.

NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
70 Nm (7.1 kgf-m, 51.6 ft-lb)
ME-00140
(5)
T2 T1
(6)
(4)
(3)
(1) (2) (7)
(3)
(2)
(1)
ME-05040
(1) Piston (5) Service hole plug Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Piston pin (6) Service hole cover T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Snap ring (7) O-ring T2: 70 (7.1, 51.6)
(4) Gasket
(7) Set the parts so that the #3 and #4 cylinders are on the upper side. Following the same procedures
as used for #1 and #2 cylinders, install the pistons and piston pins.
(8) Install the service hole cover.
NOTE:
Use new O-rings.
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME(H4DOTC)-92
12LE_US.book 93
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
22) Install the water by-pass pipe. Tightening torque:

6.5 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.8 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb) (A)
(C)
T2
T1
T1
(B)
(D)
ME-04888

ME-04890 NOTE:
23) Install blow-by pipe assembly (A), blow-by pipe Use a new seal.
(B), PCV hose assembly (C) and water pipe as- Make sure that the seals (A) are installed secure-
sembly (D). ly on the baffle plate in a direction as shown in the
NOTE: figure below.
For the blow-by pipe assembly (A), blow-by pipe (A)
(B) and PCV hose assembly (C), use a new clamp,
fit the cut out in the ST with the protrusion on the
clamp as shown in the figure, and lock the clamp.
ST
LU-00052
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-04374
ME(H4DOTC)-93
12LE_US.book 94
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
25) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of 26) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of oil
cylinder block lower, and install the cylinder block pan, and install the oil pan.
lower. NOTE:
CAUTION: Before installing the oil pan, clean the mating
Be careful not to apply any liquid gasket to the surface of oil pan and cylinder block.
O-ring attachment section. Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket.
Use new O-rings. THREE BOND 1217G (Part No. K0877Y0100)
Before installing the cylinder block lower, clean or equivalent
the mating surface of cylinder block lower and cyl-
inder block.
Liquid gasket:
or equivalent
(A)
LU-02580
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
LU-02581
(A) O-ring
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
LU-02583
27) Secure the oil level switch harness to the cylin-

der block with clip.
T1
T2
ME-04327
ME-04392
ME(H4DOTC)-94
12LE_US.book 95
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
28) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surface of oil (2) Apply liquid gasket to the mating surfaces of
separator cover and the threaded portion of bolt (A) oil pump.
shown in the figure (when reusing the bolt), and NOTE:
then install the oil separator cover.
NOTE:
Liquid gasket:
Use new oil separator cover.
or equivalent
Liquid gasket:
Mating surface
THREE BOND 1217G (Part No.
K0877Y0100) or equivalent
Bolt thread (A) (when reusing the bolt)
equivalent
(A)
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.65 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
ME-00165
(A)
(A) O-ring
(3) Apply a thin coat of engine oil to the inside of

front oil seal.
ME-03333
29) Install the flywheel. <Ref. to CL-14, INSTALLA-

TION, Flywheel.>
30) Install the clutch disc and cover. <Ref. to CL-
11, INSTALLATION, Clutch Disc and Cover.>
31) Install the oil pump. ME-00312
(1) Using the ST, install the front oil seal.
(4) Install the oil pump to cylinder block.
ST 499587100 OIL SEAL INSTALLER
CAUTION:
NOTE:
Be careful not to damage the front oil seal
during installation.
Make sure the front oil seal lip is not folded.
NOTE:
Align the flat surface of oil pumps inner rotor with
that of crankshaft before installation.
Use new O-rings.
ST Do not forget to assemble O-rings.
LU-00021
ME(H4DOTC)-95
12LE_US.book 96
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(5) Apply liquid gasket to the three bolts thread 34) Install the oil cooler. (MT model) <Ref. to
shown in figure. (when reusing bolts) LU(H4SO)-28, INSTALLATION, Engine Oil Cool-
er.>
Liquid gasket:
35) Install the oil filter. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-36, IN-
STALLATION, Engine Oil Filter.>
equivalent
36) Install the cylinder head. <Ref. to
Tightening torque: ME(H4DOTC)-75, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb) Head.>
37) Install the camshaft. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
66, INSTALLATION, Camshaft.>
38) Install the A/C compressor together with the
bracket.
Tightening torque:
36 Nm (3.7 kgf-m, 26.6 ft-lb)
39) Install the crank sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-62, INSTALLATION, Crank Sprock-
et.>
ME-04946 40) Install the cam sprocket. <Ref. to
32) Install the water pump and gasket. ME(H4DOTC)-61, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
et.>
NOTE: 41) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
When installing the water pump, tighten bolts in 54, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt.>
two stages in alphabetical order as shown in the 42) Adjust the valve clearance. <Ref. to
figure. ME(H4DOTC)-30, ADJUSTMENT, Valve Clear-
Use a new gasket. ance.>
Use new water pump sealing. 43) Install the rocker cover.
Tightening torque: (1) Install the rocker cover gasket to the rocker
First: cover. (outer section and ignition coil section)
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb) NOTE:
Second: Use a new rocker cover gasket.
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
(B)
(C)
(A)
(D)
(E) (F)
CO-02578
ME(H4DOTC)-96
12LE_US.book 97
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(2) Apply liquid gasket to the specified point of (4) Temporarily tighten the rocker cover bolts in
the cylinder head. alphabetical order shown in the figure, and then
NOTE: tighten to specified torque in alphabetical order.
Install within 5 min. after applying liquid gasket. Tightening torque:
Liquid gasket: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(C),(K)
or equivalent (H) (E)
(B),(J)
(A),(I)
(F) (G)
(D),(L)
(C),(K) (H)
(E)
(B),(J)
(A),(I)
(G) (F)
(D),(L)
ME-04351
44) Connect the PCV hose to the rocker cover.

ME-04321 45) Install the timing belt cover. <Ref. to
(3) Install the rocker cover onto cylinder heads. ME(H4DOTC)-49, INSTALLATION, Timing Belt
Ensure the gasket is properly positioned during Cover.>
installation. 46) Install the crank pulley. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
fold.>
sembly.>
ME(H4DOTC)-97
12LE_US.book 98
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
C: DISASSEMBLY
(7)
(6)
(6)
(5)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
ME-04831
(1) Top ring (4) Snap ring (6) Connecting rod bearing
(2) Second ring (5) Connecting rod (7) Connecting rod cap
(3) Oil ring
1) Remove the connecting rod cap.

2) Remove the connecting rod bearing.
NOTE:
Keep the removed connecting rods, connecting rod caps and bearings in order so that they are kept in their
original combinations/groups, and not mixed together.
3) Remove the piston rings using piston ring expander.
4) Remove the oil ring by hand.
NOTE:
Arrange the removed piston rings in proper order, to prevent confusion.
5) Remove the snap ring.
ME(H4DOTC)-98
12LE_US.book 99
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
D: ASSEMBLY
(8)
(7)
T
(7)
(6)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(5)
(4)
ME-04832
(1) Top ring (5) Side mark Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Second ring (6) Connecting rod T: 52 (5.3, 38.4)
(3) Oil ring (7) Connecting rod bearing
(4) Snap ring (8) Connecting rod cap
1) Apply engine oil to the surface of the connecting rod bearings, and install the connecting rod bearings on
connecting rods and connecting rod caps.
2) Position each connecting rod with the side with a side mark facing forward, and install it.
3) Attach the connecting rod cap and tighten it with connecting rod bolt. Make sure the arrow on connecting
rod cap faces the front during installation.
NOTE:
Each connecting rod has its own mating cap. Make sure that they are assembled correctly by checking
their matching number.
When tightening the connecting rod bolts, apply oil on the threads.
Tightening torque:
52 Nm (5.3 kgf-m, 38.4 ft-lb)
4) Install the oil ring upper rail, expander and lower rail by hand.
5) Install the second ring and top ring using piston ring expander.
NOTE:
Assemble so that the piston ring mark R faces the top side of the piston.
ME(H4DOTC)-99
12LE_US.book 100
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
E: INSPECTION 2. CYLINDER AND PISTON

1) The cylinder bore size is stamped on the front
1. CYLINDER BLOCK upper face of the cylinder block.
1) Check for cracks or damage. Use liquid pene-
trant tester on the important sections to check for NOTE:
fissures. Check that there are no marks of gas leak- Measurement should be performed at a temper-
ing or water leaking on gasket installing surface. ature of 20C (68F).
2) Check the oil passages for clogging. Standard sized pistons are classified into two
3) Inspect the cylinder block surface that mates grades, A and B. These grades should be used
with cylinder head for warping by using a straight as guide lines in selecting a standard piston.
edge, and correct by grinding if necessary. Standard diameter:
Warping limit: A: 99.505 99.515 mm (3.9175 3.9179 in)
0.025 mm (0.00098 in) B: 99.495 99.505 mm (3.9171 3.9175 in)
Grinding limit:
0.1 mm (0.004 in)
Standard height of cylinder block:
201.0 mm (7.91 in)
(A) (B)
#5
4
#4
5
#3
#2 (F)
B
#1 (D)
A
(E) (C)
ME-00170
(A) Main journal size mark

(B) Cylinder block (RH) (LH) combination mark
(C) #1 cylinder bore size mark
(D) #2 cylinder bore size mark
(E) #3 cylinder bore size mark
(F) #4 cylinder bore size mark
ME(H4DOTC)-100
12LE_US.book 101
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2) Measure inner diameter of each cylinder. 4) Measure outer diameter of each piston.
Measure the inner diameter of each cylinder in both Measure the outer diameter of each piston at the
the thrust and piston pin directions at the heights as height as shown in the figure. (Thrust direction)
shown in the figure, using a cylinder bore gauge. NOTE:
NOTE: Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
Measurement should be performed at a temperature of 20C (68F).
ture of 20C (68F).
Piston grade point H:
Cylindricality: 38.2 mm (1.50 in)
Limit
Piston outer diameter:
0.015 mm (0.0006 in)
Standard
Out-of-roundness:
A: 99.505 99.515 mm (3.9175 3.9179 in)
Limit
B: 99.495 99.505 mm (3.9171 3.9175 in)
0.010 mm (0.0004 in)
0.25 mm (0.0098 in) oversize
99.745 99.765 mm (3.9270 3.9278 in)
(A) (B) 0.50 mm (0.0197 in) oversize
99.995 100.015 mm (3.9368 3.9376 in)
H1
ME-00172
H2
H3 5) Calculate the clearance between cylinder and
H4 piston.
NOTE:
Measurement should be performed at a tempera-
ture of 20C (68F).
Clearance between cylinder and piston at 20C
ME-04734 (68F):
(A) Piston pin direction Standard
(B) Thrust direction
0.010 0.010 mm (0.00039 0.00039 in)
6) Boring and honing
H1: 10 mm (0.39 in)
(1) If any of the measured value of cylindricality,
H2: 45 mm (1.77 in)
out-of-roundness or cylinder-to-piston clear-
H3: 80 mm (3.15 in) ance is out of standard or if there is any damage
H4: 115 mm (4.53 in) on the cylinder wall, rebore it to replace with an
oversize piston.
3) When the piston is to be replaced due to general
or cylinder wear, select a suitable sized piston by CAUTION:
measuring the piston clearance. When any of the cylinders needs reboring, all
other cylinders must be bored at the same time,
and replaced with oversize pistons.
ME(H4DOTC)-101
12LE_US.book 102
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
(2) If the cylinder inner diameter exceeds the 4) Check the snap ring installation groove (A) on
limit after boring and honing, replace the cylin- the piston for burr. If necessary, remove burr from
der block. the groove so that the piston pin can lightly move.
NOTE:
Immediately after reboring, the cylinder diameter
may differ from its real diameter due to temperature
rise. Thus, when measuring the cylinder diameter, (A)
wait until it has cooled to room temperature.
Cylinder inner diameter boring limit (diameter):
To 100.005 mm (3.9372 in)
3. PISTON AND PISTON PIN
1) Check the piston and piston pin for damage, ME-00175
cracks or wear. Replace if faulty. 5) Check the snap ring for distortion, cracks and
2) Check the piston ring groove for wear or dam- wear.
age. Replace if faulty.
3) Make sure that the piston pin can be inserted 4. PISTON RING
into the piston pin hole with a thumb at 20C (68F). 1) If the piston ring is broken, damaged or worn, or
Replace if faulty. if its tension is insufficient, or when the piston is re-
placed, replace the piston ring with a new part of
the same size as piston.
pin:
Standard NOTE:
0.004 0.008 mm (0.0002 0.0003 in) The top ring and second ring have the mark to
determine the direction for installing. When install-
ing the ring to piston, face marks to the top side.
Oil ring consists of the upper rail, expander and
lower rail. When installing oil ring on piston, be
careful of the direction of each rail.
(A)
ME-00173 (B)
(C)
(A)
(B)
ME-00174
(C)
ME-02480
(A) Upper rail

(B) Expander
(C) Lower rail
ME(H4DOTC)-102
12LE_US.book 103
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
2) Using the piston, insert the piston ring and oil 5. CONNECTING ROD
ring into the cylinder block so that they are perpen- 1) Replace the connecting rod, if the large or small
dicular to the cylinder wall, and measure the piston end thrust surface is damaged.
ring gap using a thickness gauge. 2) Check for bend or twist using a connecting rod
Standard aligner. Replace the connecting rod if the bend or
mm (in) twist exceeds the limit.
0.20 0.25
Top ring Limit of bend or twist per 100 mm (3.94 in) in
(0.0079 0.0098)
length:
0.37 0.52
Piston ring gap Second ring 0.10 mm (0.0039 in)
(0.015 0.020)
0.20 0.50
Oil ring rail (A)
(0.0079 0.0197)
(B)
ME-00177
3) Fit the piston ring straight into the piston ring (A)
groove, then measure the clearance between pis-
ton ring and piston ring groove with a thickness
gauge. (B)
NOTE:
Before measuring the clearance, clean the piston
ring groove and piston ring. ME-05475
Standard
mm (in) (A) Thickness gauge
0.040 0.080 (B) Connecting rod
Clearance between Top ring
(0.0016 0.0031)
piston ring and pis- 3) Install the connecting rod with bearings attached
ton ring groove 0.030 0.070
Second ring to the crankshaft, and using a thickness gauge,
(0.0012 0.0028)
measure the thrust clearance. If the thrust clear-
ance exceeds the standard or uneven wear is
found, replace the connecting rod.
Connecting rod thrust clearance:
Standard
0.070 0.330 mm (0.0028 0.0130 in)
ME-00178
ME-00180
4) Inspect the connecting rod bearing for scar,

peeling, seizure, melting, wear, etc.
ME(H4DOTC)-103
12LE_US.book 104
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
5) Measure the oil clearance on each connecting 6. CRANKSHAFT AND CRANKSHAFT

rod bearing using plastigauge. If any oil clearance BEARING
is not within the standard, replace the defective 1) Clean the crankshaft completely, and check it for
bearing with a new part of standard size or under- cracks using liquid penetrant tester. If defective, re-
size as necessary. place the crankshaft.
Connecting rod oil clearance: 2) Measure warping of the crankshaft. If it exceeds
Standard the limit, correct or replace it.
0.017 0.045 mm (0.0007 0.0018 in) NOTE:
Unit: mm (in) If a suitable V-block is not available, using just the
Bearing size #1 and #5 crankshaft bearings on cylinder block,
Outer diameter of position the crankshaft on cylinder block. Then,
Bearing (Thickness
crank pin
at center) measure the crankshaft bend using a dial gauge.
1.490 1.506 51.976 52.000 Crankshaft bend limit:
Standard
(0.0587 0.0593) (2.0463 2.0472)
0.035 mm (0.0014 in)
0.03 (0.0012) 1.504 1.512 51.954 51.970
Undersize (0.0592 0.0595) (2.0454 2.0461)
0.05 (0.0020) 1.514 1.522 51.934 51.950
Undersize (0.0596 0.0599) (2.0447 2.0453)
0.25 (0.0098) 1.614 1.622 51.734 51.750
Undersize (0.0635 0.0639) (2.0368 2.0374)
6) Inspect the bushing at connecting rod small end,

and replace the connecting rod if it is worn or dam-
aged.
7) Measure the piston pin clearance at connecting ME-00183
rod small end. If the measured value is not within
the standard, replace the connecting rod and piston
pin as a set.
Clearance between piston pin and bushing:
Standard
0 0.022 mm (0 0.0009 in)
ME-00181
ME-00174
ME(H4DOTC)-104
12LE_US.book 105
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
3) Inspect the crank journal and crank pin for wear. If they are not within the standard, replace the bearing
with a suitable (undersize) one, and replace or grind to correct the crankshaft as necessary. When grinding
the crank journal or crank pin, finish them to the specified dimensions according to the undersize bearing to
be used.
Crank pin:
Cylindricality
Limit
0.004 mm (0.0002 in)
Out-of-roundness
Limit
0.003 mm (0.0001 in)
To 51.750 mm (2.0374 in)
Crank journal:
Cylindricality
Limit
0.006 mm (0.0002 in)
Out-of-roundness
Limit
0.005 mm (0.0002 in)
To 59.758 mm (2.3527 in)
ME-00184
Unit: mm (in)
Crank journal diameter
Crank pin outer diameter
#1, #3 #2, #4, #5
59.984 60.008 59.984 60.008 51.976 52.000
Journal O.D.
(2.3616 2.3625) (2.3616 2.3625) (2.0463 2.0472)
Standard
Bearing size 1.998 2.015 2.000 2.017 1.490 1.506
59.962 59.978 59.962 59.978 51.954 51.970
Journal O.D.
0.03 (0.0012) (2.3607 2.3613) (2.3607 2.3613) (2.0454 2.0461)
59.942 59.958 59.942 59.958 51.934 51.950
Journal O.D.
0.05 (0.0020) (2.3599 2.3605) (2.3599 2.3605) (2.0447 2.0453)
59.742 59.758 59.742 59.758 51.734 51.750
Journal O.D.
0.25 (0.0098) (2.3520 2.3527) (2.3520 2.3527) (2.0368 2.0374)
ME(H4DOTC)-105
12LE_US.book 106
Cylinder Block
MECHANICAL
4) Use a thickness gauge to measure the thrust

clearance of crankshaft at #5 crank journal bearing.
If clearance exceeds the standard, replace the
bearing.
Crankshaft thrust clearance:
Standard
0.030 0.115 mm (0.0012 0.0045 in)
ME-00322
5) Inspect individual crankshaft bearings for signs

of flaking, seizure, melting and wear.
6) Measure the oil clearance on each crankshaft
bearing using plastigauge. If the measured value is
out of standard, replace the defective bearing with
an undersize one, and replace or grind to correct
the crankshaft as necessary.
Crankshaft oil clearance:
Standard
0.010 0.030 mm (0.00039 0.0012 in)
ME(H4DOTC)-106
12LE_US.book 107
Intake and Exhaust Valve

MECHANICAL
21.Intake and Exhaust Valve

A: SPECIFICATION
Refer to Cylinder Head for removal and installa-
tion procedures of the intake and exhaust valves.
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-74, REMOVAL, Cylinder
Head.> <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-75, INSTALLA-
TION, Cylinder Head.>
ME(H4DOTC)-107
12LE_US.book 108
Piston
MECHANICAL
22.Piston
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of pistons. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-
83, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.> <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-87, INSTALLATION, Cylinder
Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-108
12LE_US.book 109
Connecting Rod
MECHANICAL
23.Connecting Rod
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of connecting rod. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-83, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-87, INSTALLATION, Cylin-
der Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-109
12LE_US.book 110
Crankshaft
MECHANICAL
24.Crankshaft
A: SPECIFICATION
tion procedures of the crankshaft. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-83, REMOVAL, Cylinder Block.>
<Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-87, INSTALLATION, Cylin-
der Block.>
ME(H4DOTC)-110
12LE_US.book 111

MECHANICAL
25.Engine Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
NOTE:
The RANK shown in the chart shows the possibilities of the cause of trouble in order from Very often to
Rarely.
A Very often
B Sometimes
C Rarely
1. Engine does not start.
1) Starter does not turn. Starter Defective battery-to-starter harness B
Defective starter switch C
Defective starter B
Battery Improper connection of terminal A
Run-down battery A
Defective charging system B
Friction Seizure of crankshaft and connecting rod bearing C
Seized camshaft C
Seized or stuck piston and cylinder C
Immobilizer system <Ref. to IM(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
2) Initial combustion does Starter Defective starter C
not occur. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Fuel line Defective fuel pump and relay A
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
ME(H4DOTC)-111
12LE_US.book 112

MECHANICAL

3) Initial combustion occurs. Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Defective intake manifold gasket B
Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
4) Engine stalls after initial Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
combustion. Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct B
Loosened or cracked vacuum hose C
Fuel line Clogged fuel line C
Defective timing B
gasket
ME(H4DOTC)-112
12LE_US.book 113

MECHANICAL

2. Rough idle and engine Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
stall Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Defective PCV valve C
Clogged fuel line C
Timing belt Defective timing C
gasket
Defective rocker cover gasket C
Stuck or damaged throttle valve B
ME(H4DOTC)-113
12LE_US.book 114

MECHANICAL

3. Low output, hesitation and Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
poor acceleration Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element A
Clogged fuel line B
gasket
Over-cooling C
ME(H4DOTC)-114
12LE_US.book 115

MECHANICAL

4. Surging Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct A
Dirty air cleaner element B
Clogged fuel line B
gasket
5. Engine does not return to Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
idle. Intake system Loosened or cracked vacuum hose A
Others Stuck or damaged throttle valve A
6. Dieseling (Run-on) Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Others Evaporative emission control system malfunction B
7. After burning in exhaust Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
system Intake system Loosened or cracked intake duct C
gasket
ME(H4DOTC)-115
12LE_US.book 116

MECHANICAL

8. Knocking Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
Intake system Loosened oil filler cap B
Cooling system Over-heating A
9. Excessive engine oil con- Intake system Loosened or cracked PCV hose A
sumption Defective PCV valve B
Compression Defective valve stem A
Worn or stuck piston rings, cylinder and piston A
Lubrication system Loosened oil pump attaching bolts and defective gas- B
ket
Defective oil filter gasket B
Defective crankshaft oil seal B
Defective rocker cover gasket B
Loosened oil drain plug or defective gasket B
Loosened oil pan fitting bolts or defective oil pan B
10. Excessive fuel consump- Engine control system <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, Basic Diagnostic Procedure.> A
tion Intake system Dirty air cleaner element A
gasket
ME(H4DOTC)-116
12LE_US.book 117
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
26.Engine Noise
A: INSPECTION
Type of sound Condition Possible cause
Valve mechanism is defective.
Sound increases as engine Incorrect valve clearance
Regular clicking sound
speed increases. Worn camshaft
Broken valve spring
Worn crankshaft main bearing
Oil pressure is low.
Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
Heavy and dull clank
Loosened flywheel mounting bolt
Oil pressure is normal.
Damaged engine mounting
Ignition timing advanced
Sound is noticeable when
Accumulation of carbon inside combustion chamber
High-pitched clank accelerating with an overload
Wrong heat range of spark plug
condition.
Improper octane value gasoline
Clank when engine speed is Sound is reduced when the fuel Worn crankshaft main bearing
between 1,000 and 2,000 injector connector of the noisy Worn connecting rod bearing (large end)
rpms. cylinder is disconnected. *
Sound is reduced when the fuel Worn cylinder liner and piston ring
injector connector of the noisy Broken or stuck piston ring
Knocking sound when engine cylinder is disconnected. * Worn piston pin and hole at piston end of connecting rod
is operating under idling
speed and engine is warm Sound is not reduced if each Unusually worn valve lifter
fuel injector connector is dis- Worn cam sprocket
connected in turn. * Worn camshaft journal bore in cylinder head
Squeaky sound Insufficient generator lubrication
Rubbing sound Poor contact of generator brush and rotor
Gear scream when starting Defective ignition starter switch

engine Worn gear and starter pinion
Sound like polishing glass Loose V-belt

with a dry cloth Defective water pump shaft
Insufficient compression
Hissing sound
Air leakage in air intake system, hose, connection or manifold
Loose timing belt
Timing belt noise
Timing belt contacting with adjacent part
Valve noise Incorrect valve clearance
* When disconnecting the fuel injector connector, the malfunction indicator light illuminates and DTC is stored in ECM memory.
Therefore, perform the Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.> and Inspec-
tion Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-41, PROCEDURE, Inspection Mode.> after connecting the fuel injector connector.
ME(H4DOTC)-117
12LE_US.book 118
Engine Noise
MECHANICAL
ME(H4DOTC)-118
12LE_US.book 1
EXHAUST
EX(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Front Exhaust Pipe .....................................................................................5
3. Center Exhaust Pipe ................................................................................12
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe ...................................................................................15
5. Muffler ......................................................................................................17
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
EXHAUST
A: COMPONENT
1. FRONT EXHAUST PIPE
T1
T1 (1)
E
A
C B
D
(2)
T1 T3
(3)
T3
(6) (2)
(14)
(7) (8)
(4)
T2
C
(9)
T3
D
E
(10)
(5)
F
G
(11)
T3
A (14)
H
(13) T1
(12)
F B
H T2
T1
T1
EX-02732
(1) Exhaust pipe cover (8) Turbocharger Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (9) Gasket T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Front exhaust pipe (10) Center exhaust pipe (front) T2: 33 (3.4, 24.3)
(4) Gasket (11) Turbocharger upper stay T3: 42.5 (4.3, 31.3)
(5) Exhaust pipe stay (12) Turbocharger lower stay
(6) Intake duct (13) Engine cover
(7) O-ring (14) Self-locking nut
EX(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
EXHAUST
2. CENTER AND REAR EXHAUST PIPE, AND MUFFLER
(25)
(20)
(25)
T1 (20) (23)
(20)
(22)
(24) (21)
(24) (20)
T7 T7
T1
(21)
(18) (16) (20)
(17)
(21)
T7
T7 (21)
(15) T4
(19)
(26)
T1
B
(6)
T5 T3
T1 B
T1
(12)
T8 (4)
(8) A
T6
(1) T3
(11)
(9)
T9
(2)
(10)
(3) (13)
(14)
(5) A
T2
T2
(7)
EX-02783
EX(H4DOTC)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
EXHAUST
(1) Center exhaust pipe (front) (14) Center exhaust pipe band Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Front catalytic converter (15) Gasket T1: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(3) Rear catalytic converter (16) Rear exhaust pipe T2: 13 (1.3, 9.6)
(4) Center exhaust pipe inner cover (17) Spring T3: 18 (1.8, 13.3)
(front)
(5) Center exhaust pipe outer cover (18) Bolt T4: 23 (2.3, 17.0)
(front)
(6) Center exhaust pipe upper cover (19) Chamber T5: 35 (3.6, 25.8)
(front)
(7) Center exhaust pipe lower cover (20) Cushion rubber T6: 42.5 (4.3, 31.3)
(front)
(8) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (21) Self-locking nut T7: 48 (4.9, 35.4)
(9) Rear oxygen sensor (22) Muffler RH T8: <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-54,
INSTALLATION, Front Oxygen
(A/F) Sensor.>
(10) Gasket (23) Muffler LH T9: <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-56,
INSTALLATION, Rear Oxygen
Sensor.>
(11) Center exhaust pipe (rear) (24) Gasket
(12) Center exhaust pipe upper cover (25) Muffler cutter
(rear)
(13) Center exhaust pipe lower cover (26) Hanger bracket
(rear)
B: CAUTION
any work.
tery.
If any fat adheres to the exhaust pipe, wipe it off. Otherwise a fire may happen.
C: PREPARATION TOOL
1. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS

TORX socket E10 Used for removing and installing center exhaust pipe (front).
EX(H4DOTC)-4
12LE_US.book 5
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
2. Front Exhaust Pipe 9) Disconnect the engine coolant hose from the
water tank pipe and water pump.
A: REMOVAL
CAUTION:
parts.
IG-02107

EX-02576
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 10) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly.
6) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, REMOVAL, Radiator
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- Sub Fan and Fan Motor.>
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> 11) Remove the engine coolant hose from clip (A),
7) Lower the vehicle. and remove the bolts which secure the intake duct
8) Disconnect connectors from the front oxygen (A/ to the turbocharger.
F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and remove the (A)
clip (A) fastening the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
ness and rear oxygen sensor harness.
(A) EX-02567
EX-02575
EX(H4DOTC)-5
12LE_US.book 6
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
13) Remove oil inlet pipe B (B) from oil inlet pipe A 15) Remove the center exhaust pipe (rear) from the
(A), and remove the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe center exhaust pipe (front).
C (C) and oil inlet pipe A (A).
CAUTION:
loosing the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid the
part from rotating together while loosening the
nut.
EX-02552
16) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the center

exhaust pipe (rear).
(a)
EX-02549
(C)
EX-02561

pipe (rear) to the hanger bracket, and remove the
(B) (A) center exhaust pipe (rear).
EX-02550
14) Disconnect the air control hose (A), and loosen

the bolts which secure the intake duct to the turbo-
charger.
EX-02784
(A)
18) Remove the engine cover.
IN-02735
EX-02589
EX(H4DOTC)-6
12LE_US.book 7
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
19) Remove bolts and nuts which secure the oil B: INSTALLATION
catch tank to the turbocharger and oil catch tank
1) While holding the front exhaust pipe with trans-
stay, and remove the oil catch tank from the turbo-
mission jack, set the front exhaust pipe, and install
charger.
the nuts which hold the front exhaust pipe to the
cylinder head exhaust port.
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
42.5 Nm (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
EX-02590
20) Remove the bolts which secure the turbocharg-

er stay.
EX-02785
2) Attach the bolt which holds the turbocharger

stay.
Tightening torque:
33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
EX-02591
21) While holding the front exhaust pipe with trans-

mission jack, remove the nuts which hold the front
exhaust pipe to the cylinder head exhaust port, and
remove the front exhaust pipe.
EX-02591
EX-02785
EX(H4DOTC)-7
12LE_US.book 8
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
3) Set the oil catch tank to the turbocharger, and at- 6) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the center ex-
tach the bolt and nut which secure the oil catch tank haust pipe (rear).
to the turbocharger and oil catch tank stay. NOTE:
NOTE: Use a new gasket.
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
When installing the oil catch tank, tighten to the
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
specified torque in the alphabetical order shown in
the figure.
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 10.5 Nm (1.1 kgf-m, 7.7 ft-lb)
T1 EX-02561
(a)
7) Assemble the center exhaust pipe (rear) to the
T2 (c)
(b) center exhaust pipe (front).
NOTE:
EX-02593 Use a new gasket.
4) Install the engine cover. Tightening torque:
42.5 Nm (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
EX-02552
EX-02589 8) Tighten the bolts which hold center exhaust pipe

(rear) to the hanger bracket.
5) Install the center exhaust pipe (rear) and tempo-
rarily tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust Tightening torque:
pipe (rear) to the hanger bracket. 35 Nm (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
EX-02784 EX-02562
EX(H4DOTC)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
9) Install the bolts which secure the intake duct to 12) Lower the vehicle.
the turbocharger, and connect the air control hose 13) Install the engine coolant hose to the clip (A),
(A). and install the bolts which secure the intake duct to
NOTE: the turbocharger.
Use new O-rings. Tightening torque:
Be careful not to pinch the O-ring. 16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
Tightening torque: (A)
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
(A)
EX-02567
14) Install the radiator sub fan motor assembly.

IN-02735 <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-27, INSTALLATION, Radi-
10) Install the bolt which holds oil outlet pipe (C)
and oil inlet pipe A (A), and install oil inlet pipe B (B) 15) Connect the engine coolant hoses to the water
to oil inlet pipe A (A). tank pipe and water pump.
CAUTION:
tightening the oil inlet pipe flare nut, and avoid
the part from rotating together while tightening
the nut.
(a)
EX-02549
Tightening torque:
T1: 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
T2: 20 Nm (2.0 kgf-m, 14.8 ft-lb)
EX-02576
T1
(C)
(B) T2 (A)
EX-02555

EX(H4DOTC)-9
12LE_US.book 10
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
16) Connect connectors to the front oxygen (A/F) C: DISASSEMBLY

sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and secure the
1) Remove the exhaust pipe cover.
front oxygen (A/F) sensor harness and rear oxygen
sensor harness with the clip (A).
(A)
EX-02594
EX-02575 2) Remove nuts which secure the center exhaust

pipe (front) to the turbocharger, and remove the
17) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to
center exhaust pipe (front) together with turbo-
IN(H4DOTC)-12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake
charger upper stay (A) and turbocharger lower stay
Duct.>
(B).
(A)
(B)
EX-02595
IG-02107
3) Remove the turbocharger from the front exhaust
19) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14, pipe.
20) Check the engine oil level and replenish the en-
gine oil if necessary. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-13, IN-
EX-02786
4) Remove the exhaust pipe stay from the front ex-

haust pipe.
EX-02560
EX(H4DOTC)-10
12LE_US.book 11
Front Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
D: ASSEMBLY 4) Install the exhaust pipe cover.

1) Install the exhaust pipe stay to the front exhaust Tightening torque:
pipe. 6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
Tightening torque:
33 Nm (3.4 kgf-m, 24.3 ft-lb)
EX-02594
E: INSPECTION
EX-02560
2) Install the turbocharger to the front exhaust pipe. leaks.
NOTE: 2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
Tightening torque:
42.5 Nm (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
EX-02786
3) Install the center exhaust pipe (front) to the tur-

bocharger together with turbocharger upper stay
(A) and turbocharger lower stay (B).
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
42.5 Nm (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
(A)
(B)
EX-02595
EX(H4DOTC)-11
12LE_US.book 12
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
3. Center Exhaust Pipe 7) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the center
exhaust pipe (rear).
A: REMOVAL
EX-02561

pipe (rear) to the hanger bracket, and remove the
IG-02107 center exhaust pipe (rear).
3) Disconnect connectors from the front oxygen (A/
F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and remove the
clip (A) fastening the front oxygen (A/F) sensor har-
ness and rear oxygen sensor harness.
EX-02784
(A) 9) Remove the bolts which secure the turbocharger

stay.
EX-02575

6) Remove the center exhaust pipe (front) from the
center exhaust pipe (rear).
EX-02570
10) Remove the bolts which hold the oil catch tank
stay and engine cover to the turbocharger lower
stay.
EX-02552
EX-02556
EX(H4DOTC)-12
12LE_US.book 13
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
11) Remove nuts which hold center exhaust pipe 2) Install the center exhaust pipe (front) to the tur-
(front) to the turbocharger, and remove the turbo- bocharger together with turbocharger upper stay
charger lower stay (A). (A) and turbocharger lower stay (B).
NOTE:
Tightening torque:
42.5 Nm (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
(A)
(A)
EX-02568
12) Using the TORX socket E10, remove bolts

from the turbocharger, and remove the center ex- (B)
haust pipe (front) together with turbocharger upper
stay (A).
EX-02571
3) Install bolts which hold the oil catch tank stay

and engine cover to the turbocharger lower stay.
(A) Tightening torque:
6.4 Nm (0.7 kgf-m, 4.7 ft-lb)
EX-02569
B: INSTALLATION
1) Set the center exhaust pipe (front) together with
turbocharger upper stay (A), and install stud bolts
to the turbocharger by using the TORX socket EX-02556
E10.
4) Attach the bolt which holds the turbocharger
NOTE: stay.
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
14.7 Nm (1.5 kgf-m, 10.8 ft-lb)
(A)
EX-02570
EX-02569
EX(H4DOTC)-13
12LE_US.book 14
Center Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
5) Install the center exhaust pipe (rear) and tempo- 8) Tighten the bolts which hold center exhaust pipe
rarily tighten the bolt which holds center exhaust (rear) to the hanger bracket.
pipe (rear) to the hanger bracket.
Tightening torque:
35 Nm (3.6 kgf-m, 25.8 ft-lb)
EX-02784
6) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the center ex- EX-02562

haust pipe (rear).
NOTE: LATION, Front Under Cover.>
Use a new gasket. 10) Lower the vehicle.
Tightening torque: 11) Connect connectors to the front oxygen (A/F)
18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb) sensor and rear oxygen sensor, and secure the
front oxygen (A/F) sensor harness and rear oxygen
sensor harness with the clip (A).
(A)
EX-02561
7) Install the center exhaust pipe (front) to the cen- EX-02575

ter exhaust pipe (rear).
NOTE:
Use a new gasket.
Tightening torque:
42.5 Nm (4.3 kgf-m, 31.3 ft-lb)
IG-02107

C: INSPECTION
EX-02552 1) Check the connections and welds for exhaust
leaks.
EX(H4DOTC)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
4. Rear Exhaust Pipe B: INSTALLATION

A: REMOVAL area of cushion rubber.
CAUTION: 2) Install the rear exhaust pipe to cushion rubber.
Vehicle components are extremely hot after NOTE:
parts. was applied to the cushion rubber while removing/
1) Lift up the vehicle. installing.
2) Remove the center exhaust pipe (rear) from the
rear exhaust pipe.
EX-02787
EX-02561 3) Install the rear exhaust pipe to the muffler.

3) Remove the muffler from rear exhaust pipe. NOTE:
CAUTION:
Be careful not to drop the rear exhaust pipe. Tightening torque:
48 Nm (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
EX-02564
EX-02564
area of cushion rubber. 4) Install the center exhaust pipe (rear) to the rear
5) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the cushion exhaust pipe.
rubber. NOTE:
CAUTION: Use a new gasket.
Be careful not to let the muffler contact the rear Tightening torque:
bumper. 18 Nm (1.8 kgf-m, 13.3 ft-lb)
EX-02787
EX-02561
EX(H4DOTC)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Rear Exhaust Pipe

EXHAUST
C: INSPECTION
leaks.
EX(H4DOTC)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Muffler
EXHAUST
5. Muffler B: INSTALLATION
A: REMOVAL
NOTE:
CAUTION:
parts. installing.
2) Remove the rear exhaust pipe from the muffler. Tightening torque:
48 Nm (4.9 kgf-m, 35.4 ft-lb)
EX-02564
EX-02564
area of cushion rubber. C: INSPECTION
4) Remove the muffler from the cushion rubber.
CAUTION: leaks.
Be careful not to drop the muffler during remov- 2) Make sure there are no holes or rusting.
al. 3) Check the cushion rubber for wear or crack.
EX-02788
EX(H4DOTC)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Muffler
EXHAUST
EX(H4DOTC)-18
12LE_US.book 1
COOLING
CO(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Radiator Fan System .................................................................................7
3. Engine Coolant .........................................................................................14
4. Water Pump .............................................................................................16
5. Thermostat ...............................................................................................19
6. Radiator ....................................................................................................21
7. Radiator Cap ............................................................................................24
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan Motor ...........................................................25
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan Motor .............................................................27
10. Reservoir Tank .........................................................................................29
11. Engine Cooling System Trouble in General .............................................30
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
COOLING
A: SPECIFICATION
Electric fan + Forced engine coolant
Cooling system
circulation system
Total engine coolant capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) Approx. 6.5 (6.9, 5.7)
Type Centrifugal impeller type
Discharge rate 2 (US gal, Imp gal) /min. 200 (52.8, 44.0)
Discharge performance Pump speed Discharge pressure 6,000 rpm 225.4 kPa (23.0 mAq)
Engine coolant temperature 80C (176F)
Water pump
Impeller diameter mm (in) 76 (2.99)
Number of impeller vanes 8
Pump pulley diameter mm (in) 60 (2.36)
Clearance between impeller and pump case mm (in) Standard 0.5 1.5 (0.020 0.059)
Type Wax pellet type
Starting temperature to open 82 86C (180 187F)
Thermostat Fully opens 91C (196F)
Valve lift mm (in) 9.0 (0.354) or more
Valve bore mm (in) 35 (1.38)
Main fan W 120
Motor input
Sub fan W 120
Radiator fan
Main fan 320 mm (12.6 in)/5
Fan diameter / Blade
Sub fan 320 mm (12.6 in)/7
Type Down flow
687.4 340 16
Core dimensions Width Height Thickness mm (in)
(27.06 13.39 0.63)
Positive Standard 93 123 (0.95 1.25, 14 18)
Radiator
Pressure range in which pressure side Limit 83 (0.85, 12)
kPa (kg/cm2, psi)
cap valve is open Negative 1.0 4.9 (0.01 0.05, 0.1
Standard
pressure side 0.7)
Fins Corrugated fin type
Reservoir tank Capacity 2 (US qt, Imp qt) 0.45 (0.48, 0.40)
Recommended materials Item number Alternative


(Concentrated type)
Coolant
K0670Y0001
(Diluted type)
Water for dilution Distilled water Soft water or tap water
agent
CO(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
COOLING
B: COMPONENT
1. WATER PUMP
T1
T1
(7)
(8)
(3)
(2)
(9)
(1)
T3
(4)
T2 (5)
(6)
T2
CO-02798
(1) Water pump ASSY (6) Thermostat cover Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(2) Gasket (7) Water by-pass pipe T1: 6.4 (0.7, 4.7)
(3) Heater by-pass hose (8) Clip T2: 9 (0.9, 6.6)
(4) Thermostat (9) Water pump sealing T3: First 12 (1.2, 8.9)
Second 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(5) Gasket
CO(H4DOTC)-3
12LE_US.book 4
General Description
COOLING
2. RADIATOR AND RADIATOR FAN
(8)
A
(5)
(6) T3
(15)
(5)
(14)
(10) (7)
T4
(9)
(13)
(11)
(4)
T2
(3)
(19)
T1 T2
(2) A
(12)
T1
(5)
(16)
(18) (1)
(5)
(17)
CO-02745
(1) Radiator lower cushion (10) Radiator sub fan shroud (19) Radiator cap
(2) Radiator (11) Radiator main fan shroud
(3) Radiator upper cushion (12) Radiator main fan Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
(4) Radiator upper bracket (13) Radiator sub fan T1: 3.4 (0.3, 2.5)
(5) Clip (14) Main fan motor T2: 5 (0.5, 3.7)
(6) Radiator inlet hose (15) Sub fan motor T3: 7.5 (0.8, 5.5)
(7) Engine coolant reservoir tank cap (16) Radiator outlet hose T4: 12 (1.2, 8.9)
(8) Over flow hose (17) Radiator drain plug
(9) Engine coolant reservoir tank (18) O-ring
CO(H4DOTC)-4
12LE_US.book 5
General Description
COOLING
C: CAUTION
any work.
Before disconnecting connectors of sensors or units, be sure to disconnect the ground cable from battery.
Prepare a container and cloth to prevent scattering of engine coolant when performing work where engine
coolant can be spilled. If the fuel spills, wipe it off immediately to prevent from penetrating into floor or flowing
out for environmental protection.
Follow all government and local regulations concerning disposal of refuse when disposing engine coolant.
D: PREPARATION TOOL
1. SPECIAL TOOL
WRENCH ley.
ST-499977100
499977500 CAM SPROCKET Used for removing and installing intake cam
WRENCH sprocket and exhaust cam sprocket.
ST-499977500
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
CO(H4DOTC)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
COOLING
2. GENERAL TOOL
TOOL NAME REMARKS
Radiator cap tester Used for checking radiator and radiator cap.
CO(H4DOTC)-6
12LE_US.book 7
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
2. Radiator Fan System

A: WIRING DIAGRAM
MB-6 FB-35 MB-7 FB-39

M/B FUSE NO. 8 F/B FUSE NO. 26 M/B FUSE NO. 7 F/B FUSE NO. 22
(B) (IG) (B) (IG)
20
21
10
13
17
14
1
MAIN
FAN A/C
MOTOR MAIN MAIN SUB RELAY HOLDER
FAN FAN FAN
B473 RELAY 1 RELAY 2 RELAY B497
2
15
16
22
19
18
11
12
J/C B482
3
B479
12
11
B135 ECM
SUB FAN MOTOR
B473 B479 B497 B135
B482 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
3 4 5 1
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
1 2 6
2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 7
18
12 16 19
10 11 14 15
13 17 20 21 22
A/C RELAY HOLDER
CO-02631
CO(H4DOTC)-7
12LE_US.book 8
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
B: INSPECTION
OPERATING CONDITION:
Radiator fan operates depending on the radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature
or the radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load, whichever is higher as an operation
mode.
Radiator fan operation mode related to engine coolant temperature
(A)
(1)
(2)
(3) (B)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
CO-02946
(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) Engine coolant temperature
(1) High-Speed (4) 96C (205F) (7) 101C (214F)

(2) Low-Speed (5) 98C (208F)
(3) OFF (6) 100C (212F)
CO(H4DOTC)-8
12LE_US.book 9
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Radiator fan operation mode related to A/C compressor load
(A)
(1)
(2)
(3) (B)
(4) (5) (6) (7)
CO-02662
(A) Radiator fan operation mode (B) A/C compressor refrigerant pres-
sure
(1) High-Speed (4) 0.8 MPa (8.16 kgf/cm2, 116 psi) (7) 1.5 MPa (15.30 kgf/cm2, 218 psi)
(2) Low-Speed (5) 1.125 MPa (11.47 kgf/cm2, 163
psi)
(3) OFF (6) 1.25 MPa (12.75 kgf/cm2, 181 psi)
CO(H4DOTC)-9
12LE_US.book 10
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
DIAGNOSIS:
Radiator main fan and radiator sub fans do not rotate under the above operating conditions.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at low
itor.
NOTE:
2 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Do the radiator main fans and Radiator main fan Go to step 27.
1) Connect the delivery mode fuse. radiator sub fans rotate at high system is normal.
itor.
NOTE:
LAY.
2) Remove the sub fan relay from A/C relay
holder.
LAY.
CO(H4DOTC)-10
12LE_US.book 11
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

7 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 8. Replace the sub
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay.
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 No. 11:
8 CHECK SUB FAN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 9. Replace the sub
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 12 and fan relay.
No. 13 of the sub fan relay.
2) Measure the resistance between sub fan
relay terminals.
Terminals
No. 10 No. 11:
LAY CONNECTOR AND SUB FAN MOTOR circuit of harness
CONNECTOR. between sub fan
1) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan relay connector
motor. and sub fan motor
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector.
sub fan relay connector and sub fan motor con-
nector.
(B482) No. 1 (B497) No. 11:
10 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN SUB FAN MO- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 11. Repair the open
TOR CONNECTOR AND MAIN FAN RELAY 2 circuit of the har-
CONNECTOR. ness between sub
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay fan motor connec-
holder. tor and main fan
2) Measure the resistance of harness between relay 2 connector.
sub fan motor connector and main fan relay 2
connector.
(B482) No. 2 (B497) No. 18:
11 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the sub Repair the poor Go to step 12.
Check poor contact of sub fan motor connector. fan motor connector? contact of sub fan
motor connector.
12 CHECK SUB FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 13. Replace the sub
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter- rotate? fan motor.
minal No. 1 of the sub fan motor, and the ground
() terminal to terminal No. 2.
Measure the resistance between main fan relay fan relay 2.
2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 21 No. 18:
(B473) No. 1 (B497) No. 21:
CO(H4DOTC)-11
12LE_US.book 12
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

MOTOR. circuit of the har-
Measure the resistance between main fan ness between the
motor connector and chassis ground. main fan motor
(B473) No. 2 Chassis ground: chassis ground or
poor contact of the
joint connector.
16 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair the poor Go to step 17.
Check poor contact of main fan motor connec- main fan motor connector? contact of main fan
tor. motor connector.
17 CHECK MAIN FAN MOTOR. Does the radiator main fan Go to step 18. Replace the main
Connect the battery positive (+) terminal to ter- rotate? fan motor.
minal No. 1 of the main fan motor, and the
ground () terminal to terminal No. 2.
LAY CONNECTOR AND ECM. circuit of harness
1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. between sub fan
2) Measure the resistance between the sub relay connector
fan relay connector and ECM connector. and ECM.
(B135) No. 11 (B497) No. 12:
19 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Check the DTC.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM Repair the trouble
connector. cause. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-40, Read Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 1.
2) Remove the main fan relay 1 from A/C relay
holder.
relay 1 terminals.
Terminals
No. 14 No. 15:
1) Connect terminals No. 17 and No. 16 of the fan relay 1.
main fan relay 1 to the battery.
relay 1 terminals.
Terminals
No. 14 No. 15:
(B473) No. 1 (B497) No. 15:
CO(H4DOTC)-12
12LE_US.book 13
Radiator Fan System

COOLING
Step Check Yes No

2) Measure the resistance between the main main fan relay 1
fan relay 1 connector and ECM connector. connector and
Connector & terminal ECM.
(B135) No. 12 (B497) No. 16:
Measure the resistance between the main fan ness between
relay 2 connector and ECM connector. main fan relay 2
(B135) No. 12 (B497) No. 22: ECM.
25 CHECK FUSE. Is the fuse blown out? Replace the fuse. Go to step 26.
2) Remove the fuse No. 8 and No. 26.
26 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Repair the power
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM supply circuit to the
connector. main fuse box.
27 CHECK OPERATION OF RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator sub fan Go to step 20. Go to step 28.
If the both fans do not rotate at high speed in the rotate?
condition of step 2, check whether the radiator
sub fan is rotating.
RELAY 2. circuit of the har-
1) Remove the main fan relay 2 from A/C relay ness between
holder. main fan relay 2
2) Measure the resistance between main fan connector and
relay 2 connector and chassis ground. chassis ground or
Connector & terminal poor contact of the
(B497) No. 19 Chassis ground: joint connector.
29 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO MAIN FAN RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 30. Repair the power
LAY 2. supply line.
2) Measure the voltage between main fan relay
2 connector and chassis ground.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. more? fan relay 2.
2) Remove the main fan relay 2.
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 No. 19:
1) Connect the battery to terminals No. 20 and fan relay 2.
No. 22 of the main fan relay 2.
relay 2 terminals.
Terminals
No. 18 No. 19:
CO(H4DOTC)-13
12LE_US.book 14
Engine Coolant
COOLING
3. Engine Coolant NOTE:

The SUBARU Super Coolant contains anti-freeze
A: REPLACEMENT and anti-rust agents, and is especially made for
Subaru engines with an aluminum cylinder block.
1. DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT Be sure to use SUBARU Super Coolant, since oth-
1) Lift up the vehicle. er coolant may cause corrosion.
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- 3) Fill engine coolant into the reservoir tank up to
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> FULL level.
3) Remove the drain plug to drain engine coolant
into container.
NOTE:
Remove the radiator cap so that engine coolant will
drain faster.
FULL
LOW
CO-02633
4) Close the radiator cap and start the engine.

Race 5 to 6 times at 3,000 rpm or less, then stop
the engine. (Complete this operation within 40 sec-
onds.)
CO-02632 5) Wait for one minute after the engine stops, and
4) Install the drain plug. open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant level
5) Install the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, INSTAL- drops, add engine coolant into radiator up to the fill-
LATION, Front Under Cover.> er neck position.
6) Perform the procedures 4) and 5) again.
2. FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT 7) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
1) Pour cooling system conditioner from the filler properly.
neck of the radiator. 8) Start the engine and operate the heater at max-
imum hot position and the blower speed setting to
Cooling system protective agent: LO.
Refer to SPECIFICATION for cooling sys- 9) Run the engine at 2,000 rpm or less until radiator
tem protective agent. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- fan starts and stops.
2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
2) Pour engine coolant into the radiator up to the NOTE:
filler neck position. Be careful with the engine coolant temperature to
prevent overheating.
Recommended engine coolant: 10) Stop the engine and wait until the engine cool-
Refer to SPECIFICATION for recommended ant temperature lowers to 30C (86F) or less.
engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-2, 11) Open the radiator cap. If the engine coolant lev-
SPECIFICATION, General Description.> el drops, add engine coolant into radiator up to the
Engine coolant level: filler neck position and reservoir tank to the FULL
Refer to SPECIFICATION for engine cool- level.
ant level. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFI- 12) Attach the radiator cap and reservoir tank cap
CATION, General Description.> properly.
13) Set the heater setting to maximum hot position
Engine coolant concentration: and the blower speed setting to LO and start the
Refer to ADJUSTMENT for the recommend- engine. Perform racing at 3,000 rpm or less. If the
ed engine coolant concentration. <Ref. to flowing sound is heard from the heater core, repeat
CO(H4DOTC)-15, ADJUSTMENT, Engine the procedures from step 9).
Coolant.>
CO(H4DOTC)-14
12LE_US.book 15
Engine Coolant
COOLING
B: ADJUSTMENT
1. PROCEDURE TO ADJUST THE SUBARU SUPER COOLANT CONCENTRATION
CAUTION:
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration must be used from 50 to 60% to assure the best performance
of the anti-freeze and anti-rust agents.
To adjust the concentration of SUBARU Super Coolant according to temperature, find the proper SUBARU
Super Coolant concentration in the table, and add diluting water to the SUBARU Super Coolant (concentrat-
ed type) until it reaches the proper dilution.
Relationship of SUBARU Super Coolant concentration and freezing temperature
SUBARU Super Coolant concentration 50% 55% 60%
Freezing temperature 36C (33F) 41C (42F) 50C (58F)
Recommended engine coolant and water for dilution:

Refer to SPECIFICATION for the recommended engine coolant and diluting water. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFICATION, General Description.>
CO(H4DOTC)-15
12LE_US.book 16
Water Pump
COOLING
4. Water Pump 12) Remove the tensioner bracket.
A: REMOVAL
2) Remove the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-21,
REMOVAL, Radiator.>
3) Remove the V-belts. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-42,
REMOVAL, V-belt.>
5) Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to ME-04984
13) Disconnect the hose from water pump.
52, REMOVAL, Timing Belt.> 14) Remove the water pump.
7) Remove the automatic belt tension adjuster (A).
8) Remove the belt idler (B).
9) Remove the belt idler No. 2 (C).
(A)
(B)
(C)
CO-02726
10) Remove the cam sprocket LH. <Ref. to

CO-02608
CO-02940
CO(H4DOTC)-16
12LE_US.book 17
Water Pump
COOLING
B: INSTALLATION 4) Install the belt cover No. 2 LH.

1) Install the water pump onto cylinder block LH. Tightening torque:
Use a new gasket.
Use new water pump sealing.
When installing the water pump, tighten the bolts
in two stages in alphabetical sequence as shown in
figure.
Tightening torque:
First:
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
Second:
CO-02940
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
(B) ME(H4DOTC)-61, INSTALLATION, Cam Sprock-
et.>
(C) 6) Install the belt idler No. 2 (C).
(A) Tightening torque:
39 Nm (4.0 kgf-m, 28.8 ft-lb)
7) Install the belt idler (B).
(D)
Tightening torque:
25 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.4 ft-lb)
(E) (F) 8) Install the automatic belt tension adjuster (A)
with the tension rod held by a pin. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-54, AUTOMATIC BELT TENSION
ADJUSTER ASSEMBLY AND BELT IDLER, IN-
STALLATION, Timing Belt.>
(A)
(B)
CO-02578

(C)
3) Install the tensioner bracket.
CO-02726
Tightening torque:
24.5 Nm (2.5 kgf-m, 18.1 ft-lb) 9) Install the timing belt. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-55,
Cover.>
13) Install the radiator. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-22,
INSTALLATION, Radiator.>
ME-04984
CO(H4DOTC)-17
12LE_US.book 18
Water Pump
COOLING
C: INSPECTION
1) Check the water pump bearing for smooth rota-
tion.
2) Check the water pump pulley for abnormalities.
3) Make sure the impeller is not abnormally de-
formed or damaged.
4) Inspect the clearance between impeller and
pump case.
Clearance between impeller and pump case:
Standard
0.5 1.5 mm (0.020 0.059 in)
CO-00293
5) After water pump installation, check pulley shaft

for engine coolant leaks or noise. If leaks or noise
are noted, replace the water pump assembly.
CO(H4DOTC)-18
12LE_US.book 19
Thermostat
COOLING
5. Thermostat B: INSTALLATION
1) Install a gasket to thermostat.
A: REMOVAL
1) Lift up the vehicle. NOTE:
2) Remove the under cover. <Ref. to EI-35, RE- Use a new gasket.
MOVAL, Front Under Cover.> 2) Install the thermostat and thermostat cover.
3) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- NOTE:
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- Install the parts with the jiggle pin facing upward.
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.>
Tightening torque:
9 Nm (0.9 kgf-m, 6.6 ft-lb)
stat cover.
(D)
CO-02579
5) Remove the thermostat cover, and then remove (C)

the gasket and thermostat.
(B)
(A)
CO-02769

(B) Gasket
(C) (C) Thermostat
(D) Jiggle pin
(B)
(A) 3) Connect the radiator outlet hose to thermostat

cover.
CO-02735
(B) Gasket
(C) Thermostat
CO(H4DOTC)-19
12LE_US.book 20
Thermostat
COOLING
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the thermostat does not have defor-
2) Check that the thermostat valve closes com-
pletely at an ambient temperature.
3) Immerse the thermostat and a thermometer in
water. Raise water temperature gradually, and
check the temperature and valve lift when the valve
begins to open and when the valve is fully opened.
Replace the thermostat if faulty.
NOTE:
During the test, agitate the water for even tem-
perature distribution.
Leave the thermostat in the boiling water for five
minutes or more before measuring the valve lift.
Hold the thermostat with a wire or the like to
avoid contacting the container.
Starting temperature to open:
82 86C (180 187F)
Full open temperature:
91C (196F)
Total valve lift:
9.0 mm (0.354 in) or more
(A)
(B)
CO-02420
(A) Thermometer
(B) Thermostat
CO(H4DOTC)-20
12LE_US.book 21
Radiator
COOLING
6. Radiator 10) Disconnect the connector (A) from the main fan
motor and the connector (B) from the sub fan mo-
A: REMOVAL tor.
CAUTION:
The radiator is pressurized when the engine
and radiator are hot. Wait until engine and radi-
ator cool down before working on the radiator.
(A)
CO-02634
(B)
IG-02107

5) Drain engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)- CO-02635
14, DRAINING OF ENGINE COOLANT, RE- 11) Disconnect the radiator inlet hose from the wa-
PLACEMENT, Engine Coolant.> ter tank pipe.
stat cover.
CO-02636
CO-02579
12) Remove the grille bracket.
7) Lower the vehicle. NOTE:
8) Remove the air intake duct. <Ref. to Remove ten clips when removing the grille bracket.
9) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-29, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
CO-02637
CO(H4DOTC)-21
12LE_US.book 22
Radiator
COOLING
13) Remove the radiator upper brackets. 3) Install the radiator upper brackets.
Tightening torque:
12 Nm (1.2 kgf-m, 8.9 ft-lb)
CO-02638
14) Lift the radiator up and remove the radiator

from vehicle. CO-02638
15) Remove the radiator lower cushion from the ve-
4) Attach the grille bracket.
hicle body.
CO-02637
CO-02639
5) Connect the radiator inlet hose.
B: INSTALLATION
1) Install the radiator lower cushion to the vehicle
body.
CO-02636
CO-02639
2) Install the radiator to vehicle.

NOTE:
Make pins on the lower side of radiator be fitted into
the radiator lower cushions.
CO(H4DOTC)-22
12LE_US.book 23
Radiator
COOLING
6) Connect the connector (A) to the main fan motor 14) Fill engine coolant. <Ref. to CO(H4DOTC)-14,
and the connector (B) to the sub fan motor. FILLING OF ENGINE COOLANT, REPLACE-
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator does not have deforma-
loose part.
(A) 3) Remove the radiator cap, fill the radiator with en-
gine coolant, and then install the radiator cap tester
CO-02634
to the filler neck of radiator.
(B)
CO-02635 CO-02640
7) Install the reservoir tank. <Ref. to 4) Apply a pressure of 157 kPa (1.6 kg/cm2, 23 psi)
CO(H4DOTC)-29, INSTALLATION, Reservoir to the radiator and check the following points:
Tank.> Leakage from the radiator or its vicinity
8) Install the air intake duct. <Ref. to IN(H4DOTC)- Leakage from the hose or its connections
12, INSTALLATION, Air Intake Duct.>
CAUTION:
Engine should be turned off.
10) Connect the radiator outlet hose.
Wipe engine coolant from check points in ad-
vance.
Be careful not to deform the filler neck of the
radiator when installing and removing the radi-
ator cap tester.
Be careful of engine coolant from spurting
out when removing the radiator cap tester.
CO-02579

IG-02107
CO(H4DOTC)-23
12LE_US.book 24
Radiator Cap
COOLING
7. Radiator Cap
A: INSPECTION
1) Check that the radiator cap does not have defor-
2) Attach the radiator cap tester to radiator cap.
CO-00044
3) Increase pressure until the radiator cap tester

gauge needle stops. Radiator cap is functioning
properly if it holds the service limit pressure for 5
6 seconds. Replace the radiator cap if its valve
opens at less than the service limit.
Standard:
93 123 kPa (0.95 1.25 kgf/cm2, 14 18
psi)
Service limit:
83 kPa (0.85 kgf/cm2, 12 psi)
CAUTION:
Be sure to remove foreign matter and rust from
the cap in advance. Otherwise, results of pres-
sure test will be incorrect.
CO(H4DOTC)-24
12LE_US.book 25

COOLING
8. Radiator Main Fan and Fan B: INSTALLATION

Motor Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
1) Remove the collector cover. nected.
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the main fan motor connector and main
fan motor harness from the radiator main fan
shroud.
2) Remove the radiator main fan from the main fan
motor.
IG-02107
3) Remove the reservoir tank. <Ref. to

CO(H4DOTC)-29, REMOVAL, Reservoir Tank.>
4) Disconnect the connector from the main fan mo-
tor.
CO-02642
3) Remove the main fan motor from the radiator

main fan shroud.
CO-02866
5) Remove the bolts that secure the radiator main

fan motor assembly.
CO-02643
CO-02641
6) Remove the radiator main fan motor assembly

from the upper side of the vehicle.
CO(H4DOTC)-25
12LE_US.book 26

COOLING
D: ASSEMBLY
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
CO-02643
Tightening torque:
3.4 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
CO-02642
E: INSPECTION
Check that the radiator main fan, radiator main fan
shroud and main fan motor do not have deforma-
CO(H4DOTC)-26
12LE_US.book 27

COOLING
9. Radiator Sub Fan and Fan B: INSTALLATION

Motor Install in the reverse order of removal.
CAUTION:
A: REMOVAL Confirm that the radiator hose is securely con-
1) Remove the collector cover. nected.
Tightening torque:
7.5 Nm (0.8 kgf-m, 5.5 ft-lb)
C: DISASSEMBLY
1) Remove the sub fan motor connector and sub
fan motor harness from the radiator sub fan shroud.
2) Remove the radiator sub fan from the sub fan
motor.
IG-02107

4) Disconnect the connector from the sub fan mo-
tor.
CO-02645
3) Remove the sub fan motor from the radiator sub

fan shroud.
CO-02867
5) Remove the bolts that secure the radiator sub

fan motor assembly.
CO-02646
CO-02644
6) Remove the radiator sub fan motor assembly

from the upper side of the vehicle.
CO(H4DOTC)-27
12LE_US.book 28

COOLING
D: ASSEMBLY
Tightening torque:
5 Nm (0.5 kgf-m, 3.7 ft-lb)
CO-02646
Tightening torque:
3.4 Nm (0.3 kgf-m, 2.5 ft-lb)
CO-02645
E: INSPECTION
Check that the radiator sub fan, radiator sub fan
shroud and sub fan motor do not have deformation,
cracks or damage.
CO(H4DOTC)-28
12LE_US.book 29
Reservoir Tank
COOLING
10.Reservoir Tank
A: REMOVAL
1) Pull out the over flow hose (A).
2) Pull out the reservoir tank to the arrow direction
while pushing the claw (B).
(B)
(A)
CO-02647
B: INSTALLATION
C: INSPECTION
1) Check that the reservoir tank does not have de-
2) Check the over flow hose for cracks or damage.
3) Make sure the engine coolant level is between
FULL and LOW.
FULL
LOW
CO-02633
CO(H4DOTC)-29
12LE_US.book 30

COOLING
11.Engine Cooling System Trouble in General

A: INSPECTION
Replenish engine coolant, inspect for leakage, and
a. Insufficient engine coolant
repair it if necessary.
b. Loose timing belt Repair or replace timing belt tensioner.
c. Oil on timing belt Replace.
d. Malfunction of thermostat Replace.
e. Malfunction of water pump Replace.
f. Clogged engine coolant passage Clean.
Inspect and repair ignition control system. <Ref. to
g. Improper ignition timing EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, PROCEDURE, Basic Diagnos-
tic Procedure.>
h. Clogged or leaking radiator Clean, repair or replace.
Over-heating i. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Replace the engine coolant. If ineffective, check, repair
j. Improper engine oil in engine coolant
or replace engine components.
Inspect and repair the fuel injection system. <Ref. to
k. Air/fuel mixture ratio too lean EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2, PROCEDURE, Basic Diagnos-
tic Procedure.>
l. Excessive back pressure in exhaust system Clean or replace.
m. Insufficient clearance between piston and cylin-
Adjust or replace.
der
n. Slipping clutch Repair or replace.
o. Dragging brake Adjust.
Inspect the radiator fan relay, engine coolant tempera-
p. Defective radiator fan
ture sensor or fan motor and replace them.
a. Ambient temperature extremely low Partly cover radiator front area.
Over-cooling
b. Defective thermostat Replace.
a. Loosened or damaged connecting units on
Repair or replace.
hoses
b. Leakage from water pump Replace.
c. Leakage from water pipe Repair or replace.
Engine coolant Retighten cylinder head bolts or replace cylinder head
d. Leakage around cylinder head gasket
leaks gasket.
e. Damaged or cracked cylinder head and cylinder
Repair or replace.
block
f. Damaged or cracked thermostat cover Repair or replace.
g. Leakage from radiator Repair or replace.
a. Timing belt problem Replace.
b. Defective radiator fan Replace.
Noise
c. Defective water pump bearing Replace water pump.
d. Defective water pump mechanical seal Replace water pump.
CO(H4DOTC)-30
12LE_US.book 1
LUBRICATION
LU(H4DOTC)
Page
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
LUBRICATION
A: SPECIFICATION
Specifications for the turbo model are included in
the LU (H4SO) section. <Ref. to LU(H4SO)-2, Gen-
eral Description.>
LU(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 1
SP(H4DOTC)
Page
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Specifications for the turbo model are the same as
the non-turbo model. <Ref. to SP(H4SO)-2, Gener-
al Description.>
SP(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 1
IGNITION
IG(H4DOTC)
Page
2. Spark Plug ..................................................................................................4
3. Ignition Coil ................................................................................................6
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
IGNITION
A: SPECIFICATION
Item Specifications
Type FK0368
Ignition coil Ignition system Independent ignition coil
Manufacturer Diamond Electric
Manufacturer and type NGK: SILFR6B8
Thread size (diameter, pitch, length) mm 14, 1.25, 26.5
Spark plug
Spark plug gap mm (in) Standard 0.7 0.8 (0.028 0.031)
Electrode Iridium
B: COMPONENT
T1
T2
(2)
(1)
T2
(1)
(2)
T1
IG-02111
(1) Spark plug (2) Ignition coil Tightening torque:Nm (kgf-m, ft-lb)
T1: 16 (1.6, 11.8)
T2: 21 (2.1, 15.5)
IG(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 3
General Description
IGNITION
C: CAUTION
forming any work.
points.
the battery.
IG(H4DOTC)-3
12LE_US.book 4
Spark Plug
IGNITION
2. Spark Plug 2. LH SIDE

1) Remove the battery. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-28,
A: REMOVAL REMOVAL, Battery.>
Spark plug: 2) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil.
Refer to SPECIFICATION for the spark 3) Remove the ignition coil.
plug. <Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-2, SPECIFICA- NOTE:
TION, General Description.> Turn #4 ignition coil by 180 degrees to remove it.
1. RH SIDE
IG-02100

IG-02107 B: INSTALLATION
2) Remove the air cleaner case. <Ref. to
IN(H4DOTC)-8, REMOVAL, Air Cleaner Case.> 1. RH SIDE
3) Disconnect the connector from ignition coil. Install in the reverse order of removal.
4) Remove the ignition coil. Tightening torque (Spark plug):
Turn #3 ignition coil by 180 degrees to remove it. Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
2. LH SIDE
Tightening torque (Spark plug):
21 Nm (2.1 kgf-m, 15.5 ft-lb)
Tightening torque (Ignition coil):
16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
IG-02099 C: INSPECTION
5) Remove the spark plug with a spark plug socket. 1) Check the spark plug for abnormalities. If defec-
tive, replace the spark plug.
(C)
(A)
(B) IG-02094
(A) Terminal damage

(B) Crack or damage in insulator
(C) Damaged gasket
IG(H4DOTC)-4
12LE_US.book 5
Spark Plug
IGNITION
2) Check the spark plug electrode and condition of (4) Overheating:

the insulator. If abnormal, check and repair the White or light gray insulator with black or brown
cause and replace the spark plug. spots and bluish burnt electrodes indicate en-
(1) Normal: gine overheating, wrong selection of fuel, or
Brown to grayish-tan deposits and slight elec- loose spark plugs.
trode wear indicate correct spark plug heat
range.
IG-00014
3) Using a nylon brush, etc., clean and remove the

IG-00011 carbon or oxide deposits from the spark plug. If de-
(2) Carbon fouled: posits are too stubborn, replace the spark plugs.
Dry fluffy carbon deposits on insulator and elec- After cleaning the spark plugs, check the spark
trode are mostly caused by slow speed driving plug gap L using a gap gauge. If it is not within the
in the city, weak ignition, too rich fuel mixture, standard, replace the spark plug.
etc. NOTE:
Never use a plug cleaner.
Do not use a metal brush as it may damage the
electrode area.
Spark plug gap L:
Standard
0.7 0.8 mm (0.028 0.031 in)
IG-00012
L
(3) Oil fouled:
Wet black deposits show oil entrance into com-
bustion chamber through worn piston rings or
increased clearance between valve guides and
valve stems.
IG-02095
IG-00013
IG(H4DOTC)-5
12LE_US.book 6
Ignition Coil
IGNITION
3. Ignition Coil
A: REMOVAL
Direct ignition type is adopted. Refer to Spark
Plug for removal procedure. <Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.>
B: INSTALLATION
Tightening torque:
16 Nm (1.6 kgf-m, 11.8 ft-lb)
C: INSPECTION
For inspection procedure, refer to Diagnostics for
Engine Starting Failure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-68, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnos-
tics for Engine Starting Failure.>
IG(H4DOTC)-6
12LE_US.book 1
SC(H4DOTC)
Page
12LE_US.book 2
General Description
A: SPECIFICATION
Specifications for the turbo model are included in
the SC(H4SO) section. <Ref. to SC(H4SO)-2, Gen-
eral Description.>
SC(H4DOTC)-2
12LE_US.book 1
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)
Page
1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure .......................................................................2
2. Check List for Interview ..............................................................................4
4. Electrical Component Location ..................................................................9
5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal ................................................18
6. Engine Condition Data .............................................................................28
7. Data Link Connector ................................................................................29
8. General Scan Tool ...................................................................................30
9. Subaru Select Monitor ..............................................................................34
10. Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) .....................................................40
11. Inspection Mode .......................................................................................41
12. Drive Cycle ...............................................................................................47
13. Clear Memory Mode .................................................................................53
14. System Operation Check Mode ...............................................................54
15. Malfunction Indicator Light .......................................................................55
16. Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure ....................................................62
17. Diagnostic Procedure for Subaru Select Monitor Communication ...........73
18. List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................................................75
19. Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................84
20. General Diagnostic Table .......................................................................339
12LE_US.book 2

1. Basic Diagnostic Procedure

A: PROCEDURE
1. ENGINE
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE START FAILURE. Does the engine start? Go to step 2. Inspection using
1) Ask the customer when and how the trouble Diagnostics for
occurred using the interview check list. <Ref. to Engine Start Fail-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-4, CHECK, Check List for ure. <Ref. to
Interview.> EN(H4DOTC)(diag
2) Start the engine. )-62, Diagnostics
for Engine Starting
Failure.>
2 CHECK ILLUMINATION OF MALFUNCTION Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 3. Inspection using
INDICATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? General Diagnos-
tic Table. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-339, General
Diagnostic Table.>
3 CHECK COMMUNICATION STATUS. Does Subaru Select Monitor or Go to step 4. Inspection using
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. general scan tool communicate Diagnostics Pro-
2) Connect the Subaru Select Monitor or gen- with vehicle normally? cedure for Subaru
eral scan tool to the data link connector. Select Monitor
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON, and run the Communication.
Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool. <Ref. to
NOTE: EN(H4DOTC)(diag
Subaru Select Monitor )-73, Diagnostic
For detailed procedures, refer to Subaru Select Procedure for Sub-
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Sub- aru Select Monitor
aru Select Monitor.> Communication.>
General scan tool
4 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Record the DTC. Repair the related
Read DTC using Subaru Select Monitor or gen- Select Monitor or general scan Repair the trouble parts.
eral scan tool. tool? cause. <Ref. to NOTE:
NOTE: EN(H4DOTC)(diag If DTC is not
Subaru Select Monitor )-75, List of Diag- shown on display
Refer to Read Diagnostic Trouble Code for nostic Trouble although the mal-
detailed operation procedure. <Ref. to Code (DTC).> Go function indicator
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-40, Read Diagnostic Trou- to step 5. light illuminates,
ble Code (DTC).> perform the diag-
General scan tool nosis of malfunc-
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the tion indicator light
general scan tool operation manual. circuit or combina-
tion meter. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-55, Malfunc-
tion Indicator
Light.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-2
12LE_US.book 3

Step Check Yes No

5 CHECK FREEZE FRAME DATA. Is freeze frame data displayed Record the freeze Go to step 6.
Check the freeze frame data using the Subaru on Subaru Select Monitor or frame data. Repair
Select Monitor or general scan tool. general scan tool? the cause of fault,
NOTE: and go to the next
Subaru Select Monitor step. Go to step 6.
For detailed procedures, refer to Subaru Select
Monitor. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Sub-
aru Select Monitor.>
General scan tool
6 PERFORM DIAGNOSIS. Is DTC displayed on Subaru Inspect using Finish the diagno-
1) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to Select Monitor or general scan Diagnostic Proce- sis.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53, Clear Memory Mode.> tool? dure with Diagnos-
2) Perform the Inspection Mode or Drive Cycle. tic Trouble Code
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-41, Inspection (DTC). <Ref. to
Mode.> <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-47, Drive EN(H4DOTC)(diag
Cycle.> )-84, Diagnostic
Procedure with
Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-3
12LE_US.book 4

2. Check List for Interview

A: CHECK
1. CHECK LIST NO. 1
Check the following item when problem has occurred.
NOTE:
Customers name Engine No.
Date of purchase Fuel type
Date of repair km
Odometer reading
V.I.N. miles
Weather Fine
Cloudy
Rainy
Snowy
Various/Others:
Ambient air temperature C (F)
Hot
Warm
Cool
Cold
Place Highway
Suburbs
Inner city
Uphill
Downhill
Rough road
Others:
Engine temperature Cold
Warming-up
After warming-up
Any temperature
Others:
Engine speed rpm
Driving conditions Not affected
At starting
While idling
At racing
While accelerating
While cruising
While decelerating
While turning (RH/LH)
Headlight ON/ OFF Rear defogger ON/ OFF
Blower ON/ OFF Audio ON/ OFF
A/C compressor ON/ OFF Rear entertainment system ON/ OFF
Radiator fan ON/ OFF Car phone ON/ OFF
Front wiper ON/ OFF Wireless device ON/ OFF
Rear wiper ON/ OFF
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-4
12LE_US.book 5

2. CHECK LIST NO. 2

Check the following item about the vehicles state when the malfunction indicator light turns on.
NOTE:
a) Other warning lights or indicators illuminate: Yes / No
Fuel level warning light
Charge warning light
Engine coolant temperature warning light
Oil pressure warning light
ATF temperature warning light or SPORT indicator light
Drivers control center differential indicator light
ABS warning light
VDC warning light
Cruise indicator light
SI-CRUISE warning light
Immobilizer indicator light
STEERING warning light
Glow indicator light
Sedimenter warning light
Others:
b) Fuel level
Lack of fuel: Yes / No
Indicator position of fuel gauge:
Experienced running out of fuel: Yes / No
c) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of harness connectors or spark plug cords: Yes / No
What:
d) Intentional connecting or disconnecting of hoses: Yes / No
What:
e) Installing of other parts except genuine parts: Yes / No
What:
Where:
f) Occurrence of noise: Yes / No
From where:
What kind:
g) Occurrence of smell: Yes / No
From where:
What kind:
h) Intrusion of water into engine compartment or passenger compartment: Yes / No
i) Troubles occurred
Engine stalls during idling.
Engine stalls while driving.
Engine speed decreases.
Engine speed does not decrease.
Rough idling
Poor acceleration
Back fire
After fire
Does not shift.
Excessive shift shock
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-5
12LE_US.book 6
General Description
3. General Description 7) Use ECM mounting stud bolts at the body side
grounding point when measuring voltage and resis-
A: CAUTION tance inside the passenger compartment.
1) Airbag system wiring harness is routed near the
ECM, main relay and fuel pump relay.
CAUTION:
Do not use electrical test equipment on the
airbag system circuit.
Be careful not to damage the airbag system
wiring harness when servicing the ECM, TCM, (A)
main relay and fuel pump relay.
2) Never connect the battery in reverse polarity.
Doing so will damage the ECM instantly, and other EN-07713
parts will also be damaged.
(A) Stud bolt
3) Do not disconnect the battery terminals while the
engine is running. A large counter electromotive 8) Use the engine ground terminal or engine as-
force will be generated in the generator, and this sembly as the grounding point to chassis when
voltage may damage electronic parts such as ECM measuring the voltage and resistance in engine
etc. compartment.
4) Before disconnecting the connectors of each
sensor and ECM, be sure to turn the ignition switch
to OFF. Perform the Clear Memory Mode after con-
necting the connectors. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(di-
ag)-53, Clear Memory Mode.>
5) When measuring the voltage or resistance of in-
dividual sensor or all electrical control modules,
use a tapered pin with a diameter of less than 0.6
mm (0.024 in). Do not insert the pin 4 mm (0.16 in)
or more into the part.
EN-07823
CAUTION:
When replacing the ECM, be careful not to use 9) Every MFI-related part is a precision part. Do not
the wrong spec. ECM to avoid any damage on drop them.
the fuel injection system. 10) Observe the following cautions when installing
NOTE: a radio in vehicle.
When replacing the ECM of the models with Immo- CAUTION:
bilizer, immobilizer system must be registered. To The antenna must be kept as far apart as pos-
do so, all ignition keys and ID cards need to be pre- sible from control module. (ECM is installed at
pared. For detailed operation procedures, refer to the back of the glove box.)
PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor. The antenna feeder must be placed as far
6) Take care not to allow water to get into the con- apart as possible from the ECM and engine
nectors when servicing or washing the vehicle in control system harness.
rainy weather. Avoid exposure to water even if the Carefully adjust the antenna for correct
connectors are waterproof. matching.
When mounting a large power type radio, pay
special attention to the three items mentioned
above.
Incorrect installation of the radio may affect
the operation of ECM.
11) When disconnecting the fuel hose, release the
fuel pressure. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEAS-
ING OF FUEL PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-6
12LE_US.book 7
General Description
12) For the model with ABS, the ABS warning light C: NOTE
may illuminate when performing driving test with
The on-board diagnostic (OBD) system detects
jacked-up or lifted-up condition, but this is not a
and indicates a fault in various inputs and outputs
system malfunction. The reason for this is the
of the complex electronic control. Malfunction indi-
speed difference between the front and rear
cator light in the combination meter indicates oc-
wheels. When engine control system diagnosis is
currence of a fault or trouble.
finished, perform the VDC memory clearance pro-
cedure of self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(di- Further, against such a failure of sensors as may
ag)-25, Clear Memory Mode.> disable the drive, the fail-safe function is provided
to ensure the minimal drivability.
B: INSPECTION The OBD system incorporated with the vehicles
Before performing diagnostics, check the following within this type of engine complies with OBD-II reg-
item which might affect engine problems. ulations. The OBD system monitors the compo-
nents and the system malfunction listed in Engine
1. BATTERY Section which affects on emissions.
1) Measure the battery voltage and specific gravity When the system decides that a malfunction oc-
of the electrolyte. curs, malfunction indicator light illuminates. At the
same time of the malfunction indicator light illumi-
Standard voltage: 12 V nation or blinking, a DTC and a freeze frame en-
Specific gravity: 1.260 or more gine conditions are stored into on-board computer.
2) Check the condition of the main and other fuses, The OBD system stores freeze frame engine
and harnesses and connectors. Also check for condition data (engine load, engine coolant tem-
proper grounding. perature, fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed, etc.) into on-board computer when it detects
2. ENGINE GROUND a malfunction.
Make sure that the engine ground terminal is prop- Freeze frame engine condition data are stored
erly connected to the engine. until the DTCs are cleared. However when such
malfunctions as fuel trim fault and misfire are de-
tected with the freeze frame engine condition data
stored, they are rewritten into those related to the
fuel trim fault and misfire.
When the malfunction does not occur again for
three consecutive driving cycles*, malfunction indi-
cator light is turned off, but DTC remains at on-
board computer.
*: One driving cycle means the period between the
ignition switch ON and the ignition switch OFF after
EN-07823
driving.
When performing diagnosis, connect the Subaru
Select Monitor or general scan tool to the vehicle.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-7
12LE_US.book 8
General Description
D: PREPARATION TOOL
MONITOR III KIT
ST1B022XU0
SOCKET
ST-499987500
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-8
12LE_US.book 9

4. Electrical Component Location

A: LOCATION
1. CONTROL MODULE
(1)
(3) (4) (2)

EN-07794
(1) Engine control module (ECM) (3) Delivery (test) mode fuse (4) Data link connector
(2) Malfunction indicator light
(1)
CHECK
ENGINE
CHECK
ENGINE (2)
EN-07715 EN-07716
(3)
(4)
EN-07511 EN-07717
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-9
12LE_US.book 10

2. SENSOR
(8) (5) (1) (2) (4) (3) (5) (9)
(9) (6) (7) (6)

EN-07795
(1) Manifold absolute pressure sen- (4) Knock sensor (7) Crankshaft position sensor
sor
(2) Engine coolant temperature sen- (5) Intake camshaft position sensor (8) Mass air flow and intake air tem-
sor perature sensor
(3) Electronic throttle control (6) Exhaust camshaft position sensor (9) Tumble generator valve ASSY
(1)
(2)
EN-07751 EN-07747
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-10
12LE_US.book 11

(3)
(4)
EN-07756 EN-07748
(5)
(6)
EN-01798 EN-01929
(7)
(8)
EN-07862 EN-07749
(9)
EN-04992
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-11
12LE_US.book 12

(1)
(2)
(3) (4)
EN-07742
(1) Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (3) Rear oxygen sensor (4) Rear catalytic converter
(2) Front catalytic converter
(3)
(1)
EN-08536
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-12
12LE_US.book 13

(1) (2) (3)
(4)
EN-07796
(1) Fuel level sensor (3) Fuel tank pressure sensor (4) Fuel sub level sensor
(2) Fuel temperature sensor
(3)
(1)
(2)
EN-07725 EN-07719
(4)
EN-07720
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-13
12LE_US.book 14

3. SOLENOID VALVE, ACTUATOR, EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM PARTS AND IGNITION

SYSTEM PARTS
(3) (4) (2) (7) (3) (4) (7) (3)
(5) (1) (6) (5)

EN-07797
(1) Wastegate control solenoid valve (4) Intake oil flow control solenoid (6) Tumble generator valve ASSY
valve
(2) Purge control solenoid valve 1 (5) Exhaust oil flow control solenoid (7) Purge control solenoid valve 2
valve
(3) Ignition coil
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-14
12LE_US.book 15

(2) (7)
(1)
EN-07758 EN-07755
(3)
(4)
EN-01936 EN-01937
(6)
(5)
EN-07762 EN-07754
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-15
12LE_US.book 16

(6) (5) (4) (3) (2)
(11)
(7) (8) (9) (1)

(10) (12) (13) (14) EN-07798
(1) Starter (6) Fuel pump relay (11) Pressure control solenoid valve
(2) Fuel pump (7) Radiator main fan relay 1 (12) Canister
(3) Main relay (8) Radiator main fan relay 2 (13) Drain valve
(4) A/F, oxygen sensor relay (9) Radiator sub fan relay (14) Drain filter
(5) Electronic throttle control relay (10) Starter relay
(2)
(1)
EN-07519 EN-07753
(3)
(4)
(8)
(5)
(7)
(6)
(9)
EN-07726 EN-07521
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-16
12LE_US.book 17

(11)
(10)
EN-07727 EN-07825
(14)
(13)
(12)
EN-07723
4. TRANSMISSION
(1)
EN-07524
(1) Neutral position switch
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-17
12LE_US.book 18

5. Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal

TO A: B134 TO B: B135 TO C: B136 TO D: B137
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8
27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 31 30 29 28 27 26
EN-05288
Termi- Signal (V)

Connec-
Description nal Ignition SW ON Engine ON Note
tor No.
No. (engine OFF) (idling)
Signal (+) B137 17 0 7 +7 Waveform
Crankshaft
Signal () B137 25 0 0
position sensor
Shield B137 31 0 0
Signal (+) B136 19 2.8 3.2 2.8 3.2
Front oxygen
Signal () B136 18 2.4 2.7 2.4 2.7
(A/F) sensor
Shield B136 9 0 0
Signal B136 20 0 0 0.9
Rear oxygen Shield B136 9 0 0
sensor Ground
B135 30 0 0
(sensor)
Front oxygen Signal 1 B136 6 Waveform
(A/F) sensor
heater Signal 2 B136 5 Waveform
Rear oxygen sensor heater sig-
B135 6 0 13 Waveform
nal
After engine is warmed
Engine coolant Signal B137 22 1.0 1.4 1.0 1.4
up.
temperature
sensor Ground After engine is warmed
B134 29 0 0
(sensor) up.
Signal B136 22 0.3 4.5
Air flow sensor Shield B136 10 0 0
Ground B136 11 0 0
Intake air temperature sensor
B136 31 0.3 4.6 0.3 4.6
signal
Wastegate control solenoid
B134 33 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14 Waveform
valve
Starter switch B136 16 0 0 Cranking: 8 14
Ignition switch B136 30 10 13 12 14
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-18
12LE_US.book 19

Termi- Signal (V)

Connec-
tor No.
ON: 0 ON: 0
Neutral position switch B136 35
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
When fuse is installed:
Delivery (test) mode switch B136 34 10 13 12 14
0
Signal B137 2 2.8 2.8
Knock sensor
Shield B137 8 0 0
Ignition switch OFF:
Back-up power supply B136 2 10 13 12 14
10 13
B137 7 10 13 12 14
Control module power supply
B136 1 10 13 12 14
B134 19 5 5
Sensor power supply
B135 22 5 5
#1 B134 21 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#2 B134 22 0 0 or 5 Waveform
Ignition control
#3 B134 31 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#4 B134 32 0 0 or 5 Waveform
#1 B134 10 10 13 1 14 Waveform
#2 B134 11 10 13 1 14 Waveform
Fuel injector
#3 B134 12 10 13 1 14 Waveform
#4 B134 13 10 13 1 14 Waveform
Control B136 33 0 or 5 0 or 5 Waveform
Fuel pump con-
trol unit Diagnostic
B135 10 0 or 10 13 12 14
signal
Main fan relay control B135 12
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Sub fan relay control B135 11
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Engine speed output B135 15 0 13 or more Waveform
Purge control solenoid valve 1 B137 6 Waveform
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Purge control solenoid valve 2 B137 15 Waveform
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Signal B137 20 1.7 2.4 1.1 1.6
Manifold Power sup-
B134 19 5 5
absolute ply
pressure sensor Ground
B134 29 0 0
(sensor)
SSM communication B135 14 1 or less 4 or more 1 or less 4 or more
Main B134 18 (After engine is (After engine is Approx. 0.6
Electronic Sub B134 28 (After engine is (After engine is Approx. 1.5
Throttle warmed up.) warmed up.) Fully open: Approx. 4.2
Power
B134 19 5 5
supply
Ground
B134 29 0 0
(sensor)
(+) 500 Hz
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-19
12LE_US.book 20

Termi- Signal (V)

Connec-
tor No.
() 500 Hz
Electronic throttle control motor
B135 7 10 13 12 14
power supply
Electronic throttle control motor ON: 0 ON: 0 When ignition switch is
B135 17
relay OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14 turned to ON: ON
Intake oil flow ON: 10 13 ON: 12 14
Signal (+) B134 17
control solenoid OFF: 0 OFF: 0
valve (LH) Signal () B134 16 0 0
Intake oil flow ON: 10 13 ON: 12 14
Signal (+) B134 34
valve (RH) Signal () B134 27 0 0
Exhaust oil flow ON: 10 13 ON: 12 14
Signal (+) B134 5
valve (LH) Signal () B134 14 0 0
Exhaust oil flow ON: 10 13 ON: 12 14
Signal (+) B134 7
valve (RH) Signal () B134 15 0 0
B137 16 0 or 5 0 or 5 Waveform
(LH)
(RH)
Exhaust camshaft position sen-
sor (LH)
Exhaust camshaft position sen-
sor (RH)
B137 30 0 0
ground
Main sen- Fully closed: 1 Fully closed: 1
B135 23
sor signal Fully opened: 3.3 Fully opened: 3.3
Shield B136 4 0 0
Main power
B135 21 5 5
supply
Ground
Accelerator
(main B135 29 0 0
pedal position
sensor)
sensor
Sub signal Fully closed: 1 Fully closed: 1
B135 31
sensor Fully opened: 3.3 Fully opened: 3.3
Sub power
B135 22 5 5
supply
Ground
B135 30 0 0
(sub sensor)
ON: 0 ON: 0
Starter relay B135 26 ON: cranking
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
depressed: 0 depressed: 0
Clutch switch B135 9
Brake switch 1 depressed: 0 depressed: 0
B136 15
(brake switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-20
12LE_US.book 21

Termi- Signal (V)

Connec-
tor No.
Brake switch 2 depressed: 10 13 depressed: 12 14
B136 3
(stop light switch) When brake pedal is When brake pedal is
released: 0 released: 0
When operating noth- When operating noth-
ing: 3.5 4.5 ing: 3.5 4.5
When operating RES/ When operating RES/
ACC: 2.5 3.5 ACC: 2.5 3.5
When operating vehicle When operating vehicle
Cruise control command switch B136 12 distance setting: 1.5 distance setting: 1.5
2.5 2.5
When operating SET/ When operating SET/
COAST: 0.5 1.5 COAST: 0.5 1.5
When operating CAN- When operating CAN-
CEL: 0 0.5 CEL: 0 0.5
ON: 0 ON: 0
Cruise control main switch B136 13
OFF: 5 OFF: 5
CAN communi- (Hi) B136 17
cation (Lo) B136 28
Self-shutoff control B135 13 0 0
Power steering oil pressure ON: 0
B137 28 10 13
switch OFF: 12 14
Oil level switch B136 26 0 0 Oil level LOW: 10 14
Fully closed: Fully closed:
Tumble generator valve position 0.43 1.19 0.43 1.19
B137 11
sensor signal (RH) Fully opened: Fully opened:
2.83 4.69 2.83 4.69
Fully closed: Fully closed:
Tumble generator valve position 0.43 1.19 0.43 1.19
B137 10
sensor signal (LH) Fully opened: Fully opened:
2.83 4.69 2.83 4.69
Tumble generator valve (RH
B134 26 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14
closed)
Tumble generator valve (LH
B134 24 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14
closed)
Tumble generator valve (RH
B134 25 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14
open)
Tumble generator valve (LH
B134 23 0 or 10 13 0 or 12 14
open)
Immobilizer communication B135 25
Fuel tank pressure sensor B136 21 2.3 2.7 2.3 2.7
Pressure control solenoid valve B135 3
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Drain valve B135 4
OFF: 10 13 OFF: 12 14
Ambient temperature:
Fuel temperature sensor B136 23 2.5 3.8 2.5 3.8
25C (77F)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-21
12LE_US.book 22

Termi- Signal (V)

Connec-
tor No.
B134 29 0 0
Sensor
B135 30 0 0
Engine 1 B134 6 0 0
Engine 2 B134 4 0 0
Ground
Engine 3 B134 3 0 0
Engine 4 B137 1 0 0
Engine 5 B137 3 0 0
Body B136 4 0 0
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-22
12LE_US.book 23

Input/output name:
Crankshaft position sensor
Intake camshaft position sensor RH
Intake camshaft position sensor LH
Exhaust camshaft position sensor RH
Exhaust camshaft position sensor LH
After warming-up
At idling
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR 0
ONE CRANKSHAFT ROTATION
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR RH 0
ONE CAMSHAFT ROTATION
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR LH 0
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR RH 0
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR LH 0
10 ms
5V
EN-07431
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-23
12LE_US.book 24

F/B FUSE No. 4
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
C2 B9
M/B FUSE No. 12
C16 CLUTCH SWITCH

STARTER MOTOR
B14
IGNITION SWITCH
B26
F/B FUSE No. 21
STARTER CLUTCH STROKE
RELAY SENSOR
(CLUTCH START SWITCH) C34
DELIVERY
(TEST)
A21 MODE
F/B FUSE No. 12 IGNITION COIL No. 1 FUSE
C35
A22
IGNITION COIL No. 2
NEUTRAL
POSITION
SWITCH
A31
IGNITION COIL No. 3
C4
A32 JOINT
IGNITION COIL No. 4 CONNECTOR
1
B23
C30
B21
FUEL PUMP
RELAY B31 ACCELERATOR
C33 PEDAL
FUEL PUMP POSITION
M/B FUSE No. 20 CONTROL UNIT B10
SENSOR
B29
B22
FUEL
FUEL TEMPERATURE
PUMP JOINT
SENSOR CONNECTOR
B30
2
C23
2 3 4 5 6 7
EN-09184
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-24
12LE_US.book 25

M/B FUSE No. 16
M/B FUSE No. 15
4
A/F, OXYGEN
MAIN
SENSOR
RELAY
RELAY
C6
C5
FRONT
C18 OXYGEN
B13
(A/F)
C19 SENSOR
M/B FUSE No. 13
ELECTRONIC
THROTTLE C20
CONTROL
RELAY REAR
B7 OXYGEN
SENSOR
B17 B6
C1 C9
D7
PURGE CONTROL D6
SOLENOID VALVE 1
5 7
C21 FUEL TANK

PURGE CONTROL D15
PRESSURE SENSOR
SOLENOID VALVE 2
B15
COMBINATION METER
D16
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR LH
POWER STEERING
OIL PRESSURE
D24 SWITCH
INTAKE CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR RH D28
D29
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR LH
C26
D23
EXHAUST CAMSHAFT OIL LEVEL
POSITION SENSOR RH D30 SWITCH
EN-09185
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-25
12LE_US.book 26

8
3
6
MASS C31 A18

AIR FLOW &
INTAKE C11
AIR
TEMPERATURE C10
SENSOR
C22 A28
ELECTRONIC
A1 THROTTLE
CONTROL
A2
A19
A29
A10
FUEL INJECTOR No. 1
A23
A24
A11 TUMBLE
FUEL INJECTOR No. 2 D10
GENERATOR VALVE
ASSY LH
A12
FUEL INJECTOR No. 3
A25
A26
TUMBLE
D11
GENERATOR VALVE
ASSY RH
A13
FUEL INJECTOR No. 4
WASTEGATE CONTROL A33 MANIFOLD

SOLENOID VALVE ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
D20
SENSOR
PRESSURE CONTROL B3
ENGINE
SOLENOID VALVE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
D22
SENSOR
B4
DRAIN VALVE
D2 KNOCK SENSOR
D8
10
EN-09186
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-26
12LE_US.book 27

A17
INTAKE OIL FLOW CONTROL
A16 SOLENOID VALVE LH
C13
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH A34

INTAKE OIL FLOW CONTROL
C12 A27 SOLENOID VALVE RH
A5
EXHAUST OIL FLOW CONTROL
C3 A14
STOP LIGHT SWITCH SOLENOID VALVE LH
C15 A7
BRAKE SWITCH
EXHAUST OIL FLOW CONTROL
A15 SOLENOID VALVE RH
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT B25

(IMMOBILIZER) 10
D17
C17 CRANKSHAFT
D25 POSITION
BODY INTEGRATED UNIT SENSOR
(CAN COMMUNICATION) C28 D31
1 9
B12
MAIN FAN RELAY A3
D1
A4
A6
D3
B11
SUB FAN RELAY
ENGINE GROUND ENGINE GROUND
EN-09187
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-27
12LE_US.book 28
Engine Condition Data

6. Engine Condition Data

Remarks Specification
17.6 35.64 (%): Idling
Engine load
13.2 26.73 (%): 2,500 rpm racing
After engine is warmed up.
Place the shift lever in neutral position.
Turn the A/C to OFF.
Turn all the accessory switches to OFF.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-28
12LE_US.book 29
Data Link Connector

7. Data Link Connector

A: NOTE
This connector is used for Subaru Select Monitor.
CAUTION:
Do not connect any scan tools other than Subaru Select Monitor or general scan tool because the cir-
cuit for Subaru Select Monitor may be damaged.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
EN-07824
Terminal No. Contents Terminal No. Contents

1 Empty 9 Empty
2 Empty 10 Empty
3 Empty 11 Empty
4 Ground 12 Empty
5 Ground 13 Empty
6 CAN communication (Hi) 14 CAN communication (Lo)
7 Subaru Select Monitor signal 15 Empty
8 Empty 16 Power supply
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-29
12LE_US.book 30
General Scan Tool

8. General Scan Tool

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE GENERAL SCAN TOOL
1) Prepare a scan tool (general scan tool) required by SAE J1978.
2) Connect the general scan tool to data link connector located in the lower portion of the instrument panel
(on the drivers side).
EN-07712
3) Using the general scan tool, call up each data. General scan tool functions consist of:
(1) MODE $01: Current powertrain diagnostic data
(2) MODE $02: Powertrain freeze frame data
(3) MODE $03: Emission-related powertrain DTC
(4) MODE $04: Clear/Reset emission-related diagnostic information
(5) MODE $06: Request on-board monitoring test results for intermittently monitored systems
(6) MODE $07: Request on-board monitoring test results for continuously monitored systems
(7) MODE $09: Request vehicle information
4) Read out the data according to repair procedures. (For detailed operation procedure, refer to the general
scan tool operation manual.)
NOTE:
For details concerning DTC, refer to List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC). <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-
75, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
2. MODE $01 (CURRENT POWERTRAIN DIAGNOSTIC DATA)
Refer to data denoting the current operating condition of analog input/output, digital input/output or the pow-
ertrain system.
Number of emission-related powertrain DTC, and malfunction indicator light status and diag-
$01
nosis support information
$15 Oxygen sensor output voltage and short term fuel trim associated with oxygen sensor V and %
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-30
12LE_US.book 31
General Scan Tool


$21 Running distance after MIL turns on miles
$24 A/F value and A/F sensor output voltage and V
$2F Fuel level %
$30 Number of warm ups after DTC clear
$31 Travel distance after DTC clear miles
$34 A/F sensor value, current and mA
$3C Catalyst temperature C
$41 Diagnostic monitor of each drive cycle
$43 Absolute load %
$4D Engine operation time during MIL on min
$4E Elapsed time after DTC clear min
$51 Fuel used
$5A Relative accelerator opening angle %
$65 Neutral status
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturers operation manual to access current powertrain diagnostic data
(MODE $01).
3. MODE $02 (POWERTRAIN FREEZE FRAME DATA)
Refer to data denoting the operating condition when trouble is sensed by the on-board diagnosis system.
$02 DTC that caused the freeze frame data storage required by CARB
$15 Rear oxygen sensor voltage, compensation value V and %
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-31
12LE_US.book 32
General Scan Tool


$2F Fuel level %
$33 Atmospheric pressure kPa
$43 Absolute load %
$49 Absolute acceleration opening angle 1 %
$4A Absolute acceleration opening angle 2 %
$65 Neutral status
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturers operation manual to access freeze frame data (MODE $02).
4. MODE $03 (EMISSION-RELATED POWERTRAIN DTC)
Refer to List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) for information about data denoting emission-related pow-
ertrain DTC. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
5. MODE $04 (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION)
Refer to the mode used to clear or reset emission-related diagnostic information (OBD-II trouble diagnostic
information).
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturers instruction manual to clear the emission-related diagnostic in-
formation (MODE $04).
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10 seconds or
more after turning the ignition switch to ON, and then start the engine.
6. MODE $06
Refer to diagnostic value of troubleshooting and data of test limit indicated on the support data bit sequence
table. A list of the support data is shown in the following table.
$84 $1E
A/F sensor range failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$85 $1E
$86 $20
$91 $20
$92 $10
$A3 $20
$01 $A4 $10
$AC $10 A/F sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$AD $10
$AE $10
$AF $10
$CD $20
$CF $20
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-32
12LE_US.book 33
General Scan Tool


$07 $0B
$08 $0B Oxygen sensor drop failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$A5 $0B
$02 $05 $10
Oxygen sensor response failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$06 $10
$D1 $10
Oxygen sensor delay failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$D2 $01
$21 $89 $20 Catalyst deterioration diagnosis (Bank 1)
$8B $9D
$8C $9D
$35 VVT monitor (Bank 1)
$8D $9D
$8E $9D
$8B $9D
$8C $9D
$36 VVT monitor (Bank 2)
$8D $9D
$8E $9D
$39 $93 $FE Evaporative emission control system leak detected (Fuel filler cap off)
$94 $FE
$3B $95 $FE Evaporative emission control system (0.04 inch leak)
$A6 $FE
$96 $FE
$C1 $FE
$C2 $FE
$C3 $FE
$C4 $FE
$3C $C5 $FE Evaporative emission control system (0.02 inch leak)
$C6 $35
$C7 $FE
$C8 $FE
$C9 $FE
$CA $FE
$3D $98 $FE Evaporative emission control system (Purge flow)
$41 $9B $14 A/F sensor heater characteristics failure (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
$42 $A2 $24 Oxygen sensor heater characteristics failure (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
$0B $24
$A1 Misfire monitoring (All cylinders)
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
$0B $24
$0C $24
7. MODE $07
Refer to the data of DTC (pending code) for troubleshooting result about emission in the first time.
8. MODE $09
Refer to the data of vehicle specification (V.I.N., calibration ID, etc.).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-33
12LE_US.book 34

9. Subaru Select Monitor

A: OPERATION
1. HOW TO USE THE SUBARU SELECT MONITOR
NOTE:
2. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL MODE)
NOTE:
*: For models without cruise control, the brake switch signal does not change.
Unit of mea-
sure
Engine load Engine Load % 21.0%
80 100C or 176
212F
A/F correction #1 A/F Correction #1 % 10 +10%
A/F learning #1 A/F Learning #1 % 15 +15%
220 275 mmHg, 29.5
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold absolute pressure Mani. Absolute Pressure 37 kPa, 8.7 10 inHg
inHg or psig
or 4.2 5.3 psig
630 770 rpm (Agree
Engine speed signal Engine Speed rpm with the tachometer indi-
cation)
km/h or 0 km/h or 0 MPH (at park-
Meter vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed
MPH ing)
Ignition timing signal Ignition Timing deg 10 15 deg
20 50C or 68
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. C or F
122F
2.1 3.1 g/s or 0.35
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow g/s or lb/m
0.40 lb/m
Throttle opening angle signal Throttle Opening Angle % 2.0 2.4%
Rear oxygen sensor voltage Rear O2 Sensor V 0 1.0 V
Battery voltage Battery Voltage V 12 15 V
Mass air flow voltage Air Flow Sensor Voltage V 1.0 1.7 V
Injection 1 pulse width Fuel Injection #1 Pulse ms 1.2 2.2 ms
mmHg, kPa,
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure
inHg or psig
Air intake absolute pres-
mmHg, kPa,
Intake manifold relative pressure Mani. Relative Pressure sure Atmospheric
inHg or psig
pressure
Learned ignition timing Learned Ignition Timing deg 0 deg
Acceleration opening angle signal Accel. Opening Angle % 0.0%
Fuel temperature signal Fuel Temp. C or F +28C or 82F
Primary supercharged pressure control signal Primary Control % 0.0%
Purge control solenoid duty ratio CPC Valve Duty Ratio % 0 25%
Tumble generator valve RH opening signal TGV Position Sensor R V 0.81 V
Tumble generator valve LH opening signal TGV Position Sensor L V 0.81 V
Fuel pump duty ratio Fuel Pump Duty % 30 40%
AVCS advance angle amount RH VVT Adv. Ang. Amount R deg 5 deg
AVCS advance angle amount LH VVT Adv. Ang. Amount L deg 5 deg
Oil flow control solenoid valve duty ratio RH OCV Duty R % 0 20%
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34
12LE_US.book 35

Unit of mea-
sure
Oil flow control solenoid valve duty ratio LH OCV Duty L % 0 20%
Oil flow control solenoid valve current RH OCV Current R mA 40 100 mA
Oil flow control solenoid valve current LH OCV Current L mA 40 100 mA
A/F sensor current value 1 A/F Sensor #1 Current mA 20 20 mA
A/F Sensor #1 Resis-
A/F sensor resistance value 1 27 35 mA
tance
A/F sensor output lambda 1 A/F Sensor #1 1.0
Throttle motor duty Throttle Motor Duty % 5%
Throttle motor voltage Throttle Motor Voltage V 12 15 V
Sub throttle sensor voltage Sub-Throttle Sensor V 1.5 V
Main throttle sensor voltage Main-Throttle Sensor V 0.6 V
Sub accelerator sensor voltage Sub-Accelerator Sensor V 1.1 V
Main acceleration sensor voltage Main-Accelerator Sensor V 1.0 V
Memorized Cruise km/h or
Memory vehicle speed
Speed MPH
Fuel level sensor resistance Fuel level resistance 4 96
Odometer Odometer km
Exhaust AVCS retard angle amount RH Exh. VVT Retard Ang. R deg 5 deg
Exhaust AVCS retard angle amount LH Exh. VVT Retard Ang. L deg 5 deg
Exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve duty ratio RH Exh. OCV Duty R % 0 20%
Exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve duty ratio LH Exh. OCV Duty L % 0 20%
Exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve current value RH Exh. OCV Current R mA 40 100 mA
Exhaust oil flow control solenoid valve current value LH Exh. OCV Current L mA 40 100 mA
Knock sensor correction Knocking Correction deg 0.0 deg
mmHg, kPa, +8.8 mmHg, +1.2 kPa,
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure
inHg or psig +0.4 inHg or 0.2 psig
AT vehicle ID signal AT Vehicle ID Signal OFF
D-check require Flag D-check Require Flag OFF
Delivery Mode Connec-
Delivery (test) mode terminal tor (Test Mode Connec- OFF
tor)
Neutral position switch signal Neutral Position Switch ON
Soft idle switch signal Idle Switch Signal ON
Ignition switch signal Ignition Switch ON
Power steering switch signal P/S Switch OFF (when OFF)
Air conditioning switch signal A/C Switch OFF (when OFF)
Starter switch signal Starter Switch OFF
Rear oxygen monitor Rear O2 Rich Signal Rich/Lean
Knocking signal Knocking Signal OFF
Crankshaft position sensor signal Crankshaft Position Sig. ON
Camshaft position sensor signal Camshaft Position Sig. ON
Rear defogger switch signal Rear Defogger SW OFF (when OFF)
Blower fan switch signal Blower Fan SW OFF (when OFF)
Light switch signal Light Switch OFF (when OFF)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-35
12LE_US.book 36

Unit of mea-
sure
Pressure control solenoid valve signal PCV Solenoid Valve OFF (when OFF)
Tumble generator valve output signal TGV Output OFF
Tumble generator valve driving signal TGV Drive Closing direction
Drain valve signal Vent. Solenoid Valve OFF (when OFF)
Purge control solenoid valve 2 signal CPC Solenoid 2 OFF (when OFF)
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque down prohibition
Ban of Torque Down ON
output
Request Torque Down
Vehicle dynamics control (VDC) torque down demand OFF
VDC
ETC motor relay signal ETC Motor Relay ON
Clutch switch signal Clutch Switch OFF (when OFF)
Stop light switch signal Stop Light Switch OFF (when OFF)
SET/COAST switch signal SET/COAST Switch OFF (when OFF)
RES/ACC switch signal RESUME/ACCEL Switch OFF (when OFF)
Brake switch signal* Brake Switch OFF (when OFF)
Main switch signal Main Switch OFF (when OFF)
Cruise control cancel switch signal CC Cancel SW OFF (when OFF)
Malfunction indicator light signal MIL On Flag OFF (when unlit)
Oil level switch signal Oil level switch HIGH level
3. READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)
NOTE:
Unit of mea-
sure
Number of diagnosis code Number of Diag. Code: 0
Condition of malfunction indicator light MI(MIL) OFF
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Supp) YES
Monitoring test of misfire Misfire monitoring (Rdy) YES
(Supp)
(Rdy)
(Supp)
(Rdy)
Catalyst Diagnosis
(Supp)
Test of catalyst Catalyst Diagnosis (Rdy) NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Supp) NO
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Rdy) N/A
tem (Supp)
tem (Rdy)
Secondary air system test NO
(Supp)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-36
12LE_US.book 37

Unit of mea-
sure
(Rdy)
Test of air conditioning system refrigerant NO
(Supp)
(Rdy)
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Supp) YES
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Rdy) NO
O2 Heater Diagnosis
(Supp)
O2 Heater Diagnosis
(Rdy)
Test of EGR system EGR system (Supp) YES
Test of EGR system EGR system (Rdy) NO
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1 Cl_normal
Engine load data Calculated load value 19.2 %
Engine coolant temperature signal Coolant Temp. 96 C
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Short term fuel trim B1 17.2 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Long term fuel trim B1 5.5 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure 32 kPa
Engine speed signal Engine Speed 846 rpm
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed 0 km/h
#1 Cylinder ignition timing Ignition timing adv. #1 13.5
Intake air temperature signal Intake Air Temp. 44 C
Intake air amount Mass Air Flow 3.6 g/s
Throttle position signal Throttle Opening Angle 13 %
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 0.1 0.7 V
A/F correction (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Short term fuel trim #12 0.0 %
On-board diagnostic system OBD System OBD/OBD2
Front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 1) Oxygen sensor #11 Supported
Oxygen sensor (Bank 1 Sensor 2) Oxygen sensor #12 Supported
Travel distance after the malfunction indicator light illumi-
Lighted MI lamp history km
nates
A/F sensor output signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 2.468 V
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge 0 %
Number of warm ups after DTC clear Number of warm-ups
Travel distance after DTC clear Meter since DTC cleared km
Fuel tank pressure signal Fuel Tank Pressure 1171.5 Pa
Atmospheric pressure signal Atmosphere Pressure Atmospheric pressure kPa
A/F sensor output signal (Bank 1 Sensor 1) A/F Sensor #11 0.18 mA
Catalyst temperature #1 Catalyst Temperature #11 C
Misfire monitoring
(Enable)
Misfire monitoring
(Comp)
(Enable)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-37
12LE_US.book 38

Unit of mea-
sure
(Comp)
(Enable)
(Comp)
Catalyst Diagnosis
(Enable)
Catalyst Diagnosis
Test of catalyst NO
(Comp)
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Enable) N/A
Test of heating-type catalyst Heated catalyst (Comp) N/A
tem (Enable)
tem (Comp)
(Enable)
(Comp)
(Enable)
(Comp)
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Enable) YES
Test of oxygen sensor Oxygen sensor (Comp) NO
O2 Heater Diagnosis
(Enable)
O2 Heater Diagnosis
(Comp)
Test of EGR system EGR system (Enable) YES
Test of EGR system EGR system (Comp) NO
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage 13.848 V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value 21 %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio 0.993
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. 2 %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature Ambient temperature C
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 31 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. 0 %
Engine operating time while malfunction indicator light lit Time while MIL lighted min
Elapsed time after DTC clear Time since DTC cleared min
Type of fuel Type of fuel GAS
Relative acceleration opening angle Relative Accelera. Pos. 0 %
Neutral condition MT gear status NEUT
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-38
12LE_US.book 39

4. READ FREEZE FRAME DATA FOR ENGINE (OBD MODE)

NOTE:
Contents Display Unit of measure
DTC of freeze frame data Freeze frame data
Air fuel ratio control system for bank 1 Fuel system for Bank 1
Engine load data Calculated load value %
Short term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Short term fuel trim B1 %
Long term fuel trim by front oxygen (A/F) sensor (Bank 1) Long term fuel trim B1 %
Intake manifold absolute pressure signal Mani. Absolute Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psi
Vehicle speed signal Vehicle Speed km/h or MPH
Ignition timing adv. #1 Ignition timing adv. #1
Intake air temperature Intake Air Temp. C
Amount of intake air Mass Air Flow g/s
Throttle valve angle Throttle Opening Angle %
Oxygen sensor #12 Oxygen sensor #12 V
A/F correction #12 Short term fuel trim #12 %
OBD system OBD System
Oxygen sensor #11 Oxygen sensor #11
Oxygen sensor #12 Oxygen sensor #12
Elapsed time after starting engine Time Since Engine Start sec
Evaporative purge Commanded Evap Purge %
Fuel level Fuel Level %
Fuel tank pressure Fuel Tank Pressure mmHg, Pa, inHg or psig
Atmospheric pressure Atmosphere Pressure mmHg, kPa, inHg or psig
ECM power supply voltage Control module voltage V
Absolute load Absolute Load Value %
A/F target lambda Target Equivalence Ratio
Relative throttle opening angle Relative Throttle Pos. %
Ambient temperature Ambient Temperature C or F
Absolute throttle opening angle 2 Absolute Throttle Pos.#2 %
Target throttle opening angle Target Throt. Act. Cont. %
Neutral condition MT gear status
5. V.I.N. REGISTRATION
1) On Main Menu display, select {Each System Check}.
2) On System Selection Menu display, select {Engine Control System}.
3) Click the [OK] button after the information of engine type has been displayed.
4) On Engine Diagnosis display, select {Entry VIN}.
5) Perform the procedures shown on the display screen.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-39
12LE_US.book 40
Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

10.Read Diagnostic Trouble

Code (DTC)
A: OPERATION
NOTE:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
Refer to data denoting emission-related powertrain
DTC.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
NOTE:
Refer to general scan tool manufacturers instruc-
tion manual to access powertrain DTC (MODE
$03).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-40
12LE_US.book 41
Inspection Mode
11.Inspection Mode
A: PROCEDURE
Perform the diagnosis shown in the following DTC table.
When performing the diagnosis not listed in List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC), refer to the item on the
drive cycle. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-47, Drive Cycle.>
DTC Item Condition
P0011 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance
(Bank 1)
P0014 Exhaust AVCS System 1 (Range/Performance)
P0016 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank1)
P0017 Crank and Cam Timing B System Failure (Bank 1)
P0018 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft Position Correlation (Bank2)
P0019 Crank and Cam Timing B System Failure (Bank 2)
P0021 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing Over-Advanced or System Performance
(Bank 2)
P0024 Exhaust AVCS System 2 (Range/Performance)
P0102 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Low Input
P0103 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit High Input
P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit Low Input
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Barometric Pressure Circuit High Input
P0112 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Low
P0113 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit High
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit Low
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Circuit High
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch A Circuit Low
P0123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch A Circuit High
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank1 Sensor2)
P0182 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit Low Input
P0183 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit High Input
P0201 Injector #1
P0202 Injector #2
P0203 Injector #3
P0204 Injector #4
P0222 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch B Circuit Low
P0223 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch B Circuit High
P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit
P0245 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid A Low
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Circuit
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Circuit Range/Performance
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor A Circuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-41
12LE_US.book 42
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor A Circuit (Bank 2)
P0351 Ignition Coil A Primary/Secondary Circuit
P0352 Ignition Coil B Primary/Secondary Circuit
P0353 Ignition Coil C Primary/Secondary Circuit
P0354 Ignition Coil D Primary/Secondary Circuit
P0365 Camshaft Position Sensor B Circuit (Bank 1)
P0390 Camshaft Position Sensor B Circuit (Bank 2)
P0447 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Open
P0448 Evaporative Emission Control System Vent Control Circuit Shorted
P0452 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor Low Input
P0453 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor High Input
P0458 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit Low
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Low
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit High
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor A
P0512 Starter Request Circuit
P0604 Internal Control Module Random Access Memory (RAM) Error
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only Memory (ROM) Error
P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit Range/Performance
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/Performance (Bank 1)
P0851 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low
P0852 Park/Neutral Switch Input Circuit High
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1)
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Performance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1)
P1160 Return Spring Failure
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Solenoid Valve Circuit Low
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. Valve Circuit High
P1458 Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve 2
P1459 Canister Purge Control Solenoid Valve 2
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunction
P1570 Antenna
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure (Except Antenna Circuit)
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM
P1578 Meter Failure
P2006 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Closed (Bank 1)
P2007 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Closed (Bank 2)
P2008 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit / Open (Bank 1)
P2009 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Low (Bank 1)
P2011 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit / Open (Bank 2)
P2012 Intake Manifold Runner Control Circuit Low (Bank 2)
P2016 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank 1)
P2017 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank 1)
P2021 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank 2)
P2022 Intake Manifold Runner Position Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank 2)
P2088 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 1)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-42
12LE_US.book 43
Inspection Mode
DTC Item Condition

P2089 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 1)
P2090 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 1)
P2091 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 1)
P2092 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 2)
P2093 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 2)
P2094 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit Low (Bank 2)
P2095 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actuator Control Circuit High (Bank 2)
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Range/Performance
P2102 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit Low
P2103 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Circuit High
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor A Minimum Stop Performance
P2122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch D Circuit Low Input
P2123 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch D Circuit High Input
P2127 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch E Circuit Low Input
P2128 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch E Circuit High Input
P2135 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch A/B Voltage Correlation
P2138 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/Switch D/E Voltage Correlation
P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit Range/Performance
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus Off Detection
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data Not Loaded
U0122 CAN (VDC) Data Not Loaded
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data Not Loaded
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-43
12LE_US.book 44
Inspection Mode
1. PREPARATION FOR THE INSPECTION 2. SUBARU SELECT MONITOR

MODE 1) Check that no DTC remains after clearing mem-
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more ory. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53, Clear Memo-
and fuel remains approx. half [20 40 2 (5.3 ry Mode.>
10.6 US gal, 4.4 8.8 Imp gal)]. 2) Warm up the engine.
2) Lift up the vehicle using a garage jack and place 3) Prepare the Subaru Select Monitor kit. <Ref. to
it on rigid racks, or drive the vehicle onto free roll- EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-8, PREPARATION TOOL,
ers. General Description.>
WARNING:
Before lifting up the vehicle, ensure parking
brake is applied.
Do not use a pantograph jack in place of a rig-
id rack.
Secure a rope or wire to the front or rear tow-
ing hooks to prevent the lateral runout of front
wheels.
Before rotating the wheels, make sure that
there is no one in front of the vehicle. Besides EN-05692
while the wheels are rotating, make sure that no 4) Prepare PC with Subaru Select Monitor in-
one approaches the vehicle front side. stalled.
Make sure that there is nothing around the 5) Connect the USB cable to SDI (Subaru Diagno-
wheels. For AWD model, pay attention to all sis Interface) and USB port on the personal com-
four wheels. puter (dedicated port for the Subaru Select
While servicing, do not depress or release Monitor).
the clutch pedal or accelerator pedal quickly re-
gardless of the engine speed. Quick operation NOTE:
may cause the vehicle to drop off the free roller. The dedicated port for the Subaru Select Monitor
To prevent the vehicle from slipping due to means the USB port which was used to install the
vibration, do not place anything between rigid Subaru Select Monitor.
rack and the vehicle. 6) Connect the diagnosis cable to SDI.
main fuse box.
CAUTION:
vehicle.
(A)
(A)
EN-07555
(B)
EN-00041
(A) Rigid rack

(B) Free roller
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-44
12LE_US.book 45
Inspection Mode
8) Connect SDI to data link connector located in the 3. GENERAL SCAN TOOL
lower portion of the instrument panel (on the driv- 1) Check that no DTC remains after clearing mem-
ers side). ory. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-32, MODE $04
CAUTION: (CLEAR/RESET EMISSION-RELATED DIAG-
Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba- NOSTIC INFORMATION), OPERATION, General
ru Select Monitor and general scan tool. Scan Tool.>
main fuse box.
CAUTION:
vehicle.
(A)
EN-07712
9) Start the PC.

10) Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF)
and run the PC application for Subaru Select Mon-
itor.
11) On Main Menu display, select {Each System
Check}. EN-07555
12) On System Selection Menu display, select 4) Connect the general scan tool to data link con-
{Engine Control System}. nector located in the lower portion of the instrument
13) Click the [OK] button after the information of panel (on the drivers side).
engine type has been displayed.
14) On Engine Diagnosis display, select {Dealer CAUTION:
Check Mode Procedure}. Do not connect the scan tools except for Suba-
15) When the Perform Inspection (Dealer Check) ru Select Monitor and general scan tool.
Mode ? is shown on the screen, click the [Next]
button.
16) Perform subsequent procedures as instructed
on the display screen.
If trouble still remains in the memory, the corre-
sponding DTC appears on the display screen.
NOTE:
PC application help for Subaru Select Monitor.
For details concerning DTC, refer to List of Di- EN-07712
agnostic Trouble Code (DTC). 5) Start the engine.
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-75, List of Diagnos-
NOTE:
Depress the clutch pedal when starting engine.
Release the parking brake.
6) Turn the neutral position switch to ON by operat-
ing shift lever.
7) Keep the engine speed in 2,500 3,000 rpm
this does not indicate a malfunction. When en-
range for 40 seconds.
gine control system diagnosis is finished, per-
form the VDC memory clearance procedure of
self-diagnosis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25,
Clear Memory Mode.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-45
12LE_US.book 46
Inspection Mode
8) Place the shift lever in 1st gear and drive the ve-
hicle at 5 to 10 km/h (3 to 6 MPH).
NOTE:
For AWD model, release the parking brake.
this does not indicate a malfunction. When engine
control system diagnosis is finished, perform the
VDC memory clearance procedure of self-diagno-
sis function. <Ref. to VDC(diag)-25, Clear Memory
Mode.>
9) Using the general scan tool, check for DTC and
record the result(s).
NOTE:
nostic Trouble Code (DTC).
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-75, List of Diagnostic
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-46
12LE_US.book 47
Drive Cycle
12.Drive Cycle
A: PROCEDURE
It is necessary to perform the drive cycle listed below if DTC is not found in the Inspection Mode. It is possible
to complete diagnosis of the DTC by performing the indicated drive cycle. After the repair for the DTC, per-
form a necessary drive cycle and make sure the function recovers and the DTC is recorded.
1. PREPARATION FOR DRIVE CYCLE
1) Check that the battery voltage is 12 V or more and fuel remains approx. half [20 40 2 (5.3 10.6 US
gal, 4.4 8.8 Imp gal)].
2) After performing the diagnostics and Clear Memory Mode, check that no DTC remains. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is removed.
NOTE:
Perform the drive cycle after warming up the engine except when the engine coolant temperature at en-
gine start is specified.
Perform the drive cycle twice if the DTC in the list is marked with *. After completing the first drive cycle,
stop the engine and perform second diagnosis in same condition.
2. DRIVE CYCLE A
DTC Item Condition
*P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature for Closed Loop Fuel Control engine start is less than 20C
(68F).
*P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Temperature for Stable Operation
Coolant Thermostat (Engine Coolant Temperature Below Thermostat Regulat-
*P0128 engine start is less than 55C
ing Temperature)
(131F).
*P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 Sensor2)
*P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below Threshold (Bank 1)
*P0442 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Small Leak) engine start is less than 25C
(77F).
*P0451 Evaporative Emission Control System Pressure Sensor
*P0456 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Very Small Leak) engine start is less than 25C
(77F).
*P0457 Evaporative Emission Control System Leak Detected (Fuel Cap Loose/Off) engine start is less than 25C
(77F).
*P0459 Evaporative Emission System Purge Control Valve Circuit High
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Function Problem
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-47
12LE_US.book 48
Drive Cycle
DTC Item Condition

1) Drive for 20 minutes or more at a constant speed of 80 km/h (50 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for one minute.
3. DRIVE CYCLE B
DTC Item Condition
*P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermittent
*P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM Lower Than Expected
*P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM Higher Than Expected
*P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance
cycle C as well.
1) Drive at 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more.
2) Stop the vehicle and idle for ten minutes.
4. DRIVE CYCLE C
DTC Item Condition
*P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Correlation
*P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit Range/Performance
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1)
*P013A O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
*P013B O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
*P013E O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
*P013F O2 Sensor Delayed Response - Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2)
P0244 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid A Range/Performance
P0246 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate Solenoid A High
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-48
12LE_US.book 49
Drive Cycle
DTC Item Condition

P2004 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Open (Bank 1)
P2005 Intake Manifold Runner Control Stuck Open (Bank 2)
*P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance
cycle B as well.
Drive according to the drive pattern described below.
(H)
(C)
97 (60)
(D) (F) (G)
64 (40)
(B) (E)
(A)
0
50 100 150 (I)
EN-00842
(A) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (D) Decelerate with fully closed throt- (G) Stop the vehicle with throttle fully
more. tle to 64 km/h (40 MPH) or less. closed.
(B) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (E) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 64 (H) Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)
or more within 20 seconds. km/h (40 MPH) or less.
(C) Drive for 20 seconds or more at 97 (F) Accelerate to 97 km/h (60 MPH) (I) Sec.
km/h (60 MPH) or more. or more within 10 seconds.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-49
12LE_US.book 50
Drive Cycle
5. DRIVE CYCLE D
DTC Item Condition
*P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Circuit Range/Performance
NOTE:
In drive cycle D, one drive cycle will be established when both the drift diagnosis and stuck diagnosis have
completed.
DRIFT DIAGNOSIS
1) Make sure of the items below before starting the engine.
Engine coolant temperature is less than 30C (86F).
Remaining fuel is 10 2 (2.6 US gal, 2.2 Imp gal) or more.
Battery voltage is 10.9 V or more.
2) Idle the engine until engine coolant temperature is at least 10C (18F) higher than it was when engine
started.
3) After the engine has reached the state of procedure 2), idle the engine for another 5 minutes or more.
STUCK DIAGNOSIS
2) Perform the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53, Clear Memory Mode.>
3) Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 50 2 (13.2 US gal, 11 Imp gal).
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the battery terminals during stuck diagnosis. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the
battery terminals.)
6. DRIVE CYCLE E
DTC Item Condition
*P0461 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Range/Performance
3) Drive the vehicle for the distance equal to the fuel of 30 2 (7.9 US gal, 6.6 Imp gal).
NOTE:
Do not disconnect the battery terminals while diagnosing. (Data will be cleared by disconnecting the bat-
tery terminals.)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-50
12LE_US.book 51
Drive Cycle
7. DRIVE CYCLE F
DTC Item Condition
*P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 Circuit Range/Performance
1) Make sure that the engine coolant temperature is less than 30C (86F).
2) Drive according to the drive pattern described below.
(A)
(2) (4) (6)

80 km/h
(50 MPH)
0
(3) (5) (7) (B)
(1)
EN-07588
(A) Vehicle speed (B) Elapsed time
(1) Idle the engine for 10 seconds or (4) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a (6) Drive for 30 seconds or more at a
more after engine start. constant speed of 80 km/h (50 constant speed of 80 km/h (50
MPH) or more. MPH) or more.
(2) Drive for 8 minutes or more at a (5) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 (7) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30 sec-
constant speed of 80 km/h (50 seconds or more. onds.
MPH) or more.
(3) Stop the vehicle and idle for 30
seconds or more.
NOTE:
There is no given transition time between idling and cruising.
Driving at constant speed only on a downhill causes smaller engine load and may result in failure to obtain
a right diagnostic result.
When the engine stops while performing drive cycle F, perform it again from the state of procedure 1).
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-51
12LE_US.book 52
Drive Cycle
8. DRIVE CYCLE H
DTC Item Condition
*
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System Performance
*
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Performance
2) With the ignition switch ON (engine OFF), read the engine coolant temperature, intake air temperature and
fuel temperature. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE (NORMAL
3) If the values from step 2) satisfy the following two conditions, idle the engine for one minute.
Condition:
|Engine coolant temperature Intake air temperature| 5C (9F)
|Engine coolant temperature Fuel temperature| 2C (3.6F)
NOTE:
If the conditions are not satisfied, turn the ignition switch to OFF and wait until the parameters are satisfied.
Do not move the shift lever from neutral position during idling.
9. DRIVE CYCLE J
DTC Item Condition
P2610 ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off Timer Performance
1) Idle the engine for 15 minutes or more.

3) After 6 hours passed from the start of step 2), read the temporary code using the Subaru Select Monitor.
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-40, OPERATION, Read Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-52
12LE_US.book 53
Clear Memory Mode

13.Clear Memory Mode

A: OPERATION
NOTE:
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is
performed after memory clearance. Wait for 10
seconds or more after turning the ignition switch to
ON, and then start the engine.
For procedures clearing memory using the general
scan tool, refer to the general scan tool operation
manual.
NOTE:
Initial diagnosis of electronic throttle control is per-
formed after memory clearance. For this reason,
start the engine after 10 seconds or more have
elapsed since the ignition switch was turned to ON.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53
12LE_US.book 54
System Operation Check Mode

14.System Operation Check

Mode
A: OPERATION
CAUTION:
After executing the system operation check
mode, execute the Clear Memory Mode. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53, OPERATION, Clear
Memory Mode.>
NOTE:
For detailed operation procedures, refer to PC ap-
plication help for Subaru Select Monitor.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54
12LE_US.book 55

15.Malfunction Indicator Light

A: PROCEDURE
1. Activation of malfunction indicator light. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-55, ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT,

2. Malfunction indicator light does not come on. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Malfunction Indicator Light.>

3. Malfunction indicator light does not go off. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
GO OFF, Malfunction Indicator Light.>

4. Malfunction indicator light does not blink. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-58, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
BLINK, Malfunction Indicator Light.>

5. Malfunction indicator light remains blinking. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-60, MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS
BLINKING, Malfunction Indicator Light.>
B: ACTIVATION OF MALFUNCTION 2) After starting the engine, the malfunction indica-

INDICATOR LIGHT tor light goes out. If it does not go off, any of the en-
gine and emission control system has malfunction.
1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine
OFF), the malfunction indicator light (A) in the com- (1)
(3)
bination meter illuminates.
NOTE: (4)
If the malfunction indicator light does not illuminate, (2)

perform diagnostics of the malfunction indicator (3)
light circuit or the combination meter circuit. <Ref. (4)

to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57, MALFUNCTION INDI-
(5)
CATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON, Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light.> (6)
EN-01679
(1) No DTC
(2) Trouble occurs
(3) ON
CHECK
ENGINE
(4) OFF
(6) Engine start
CHECK
ENGINE (A)
EN-07714
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-55
12LE_US.book 56

3) If the diagnostic system detects a misfire which (3) Malfunction indicator light blinks at a cycle of
could damage the catalyst, the malfunction indica- 3 Hz after diagnosis if there is no trouble. Mal-
tor light will blink at a cycle of 1 Hz. function indicator light illuminates if faulty.
(1)
(1)
(2)
(2)
(3)
(4) (4)
(6)
(3)
(5)
EN-01680 EN-01681
(1) ON (1) ON
(2) OFF (2) OFF
(3) Ignition switch ON (3) Ignition switch ON
(4) Engine start (4) 1 second
(5) Misfire start
(6) 1 second
4) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse (A) of main

fuse box with ignition switch to OFF.
CAUTION:
vehicle.
(A)
EN-07555
(1) When the ignition switch is turned to ON

(engine OFF), the malfunction indicator light il-
luminates.
(2) After the engine starts, malfunction indicator
light blinks in a cycle of 0.5 Hz. (During diagno-
sis)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-56
12LE_US.book 57

C: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT COME ON

TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
When the ignition switch is turned to ON (engine OFF), malfunction indicator light does not illuminate.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK DTC. Is DTC of LAN system dis- Check the appro- Replace the meter
played? <Ref. to LAN(diag)-10, priate DTC using case assembly of
OPERATION, Read Diagnostic the List of Diag- combination meter.
Trouble Code (DTC).> nostic Trouble <Ref. to IDI-21,
Code (DTC). Combination
<Ref. to Meter.>
LAN(diag)-32, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
D: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT GO OFF

TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Although malfunction indicator light comes on when the engine runs, DTC is not shown on the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool display.
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK DTC. Is DTC of engine or LAN sys- Check the appro- Go to step 2.
tem displayed? <Ref. to priate DTC using
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-40, the List of Diag-
OPERATION, Read Diagnostic nostic Trouble
Trouble Code (DTC).> Code (DTC).
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-75, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
<Ref. to
LAN(diag)-32, List
of Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK COMBINATION METER. Does the malfunction indicator Replace the ECM. Replace the meter
Perform the self-diagnosis for combination light illuminate and go off nor- <Ref. to case assembly of
meter system. <Ref. to IDI-6, SELF-DIAGNO- mally? FU(H4DOTC)-58, combination meter.
SIS DISPLAY MODE, OPERATION, Combina- Engine Control <Ref. to IDI-21,
tion Meter System.> Module (ECM).> Combination
Meter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-57
12LE_US.book 58

E: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT BLINK

DIAGNOSIS:
The malfunction indicator light circuit is open or shorted.
The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is open.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light does not blink during Inspection Mode.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
1 3
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10 M/B
DRIVE CIRCUIT
DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE B138
FUSE No. 36
1 2
*
*
39
34
B136
4
E
ECM

*
B136
B72 B138 i10
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4 5 6 5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-09188
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-58
12LE_US.book 59

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. Repair the mal-
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate? function indicator
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. light circuit. <Ref.
2) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is to
removed. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. (engine OFF) )-57, MALFUNC-
TION INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT
COME ON, Mal-
function Indicator
Light.>
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND DE- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
LIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. and connector.
3) Install the delivery (test) mode fuse. the following item:
Do not use any fuses that are installed on harness between
the vehicle. ECM and delivery
4) Measure the resistance of harness between (test) mode fuse
ECM connectors. Poor contact of
Connector & terminal joint connector
(B136) No. 34 (B136) No. 4:
3 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the ECM.
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM <Ref. to
connector. FU(H4DOTC)-58,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-59
12LE_US.book 60

F: MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT REMAINS BLINKING

DIAGNOSIS:
The delivery (test) mode fuse circuit is short-circuited to ground.
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Malfunction indicator light blinks when delivery (test) mode fuse is not connected.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
IGNITION
B72 BATTERY
SWITCH
1 3
19
COMBINATION
METER
i10 M/B
DRIVE CIRCUIT
DELIVERY (TEST)
MODE B138
FUSE No. 36
1 2
*
*
39
34
B136
4
E
ECM

*
B136
B72 B138 i10
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
4 5 6 5 6 7 8 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-09188
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK DELIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 2. System is normal.
1) Check the delivery (test) mode fuse is light blink? NOTE:
removed. Malfunction indica-
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor light blinks at a
cycle of 3 Hz when
delivery (test)
mode fuse is at-
tached.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-60
12LE_US.book 61

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND DE- Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the ECM. Repair the short
LIVERY (TEST) MODE FUSE. more? <Ref. to circuit to ground in
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. FU(H4DOTC)-58, harness between
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. Engine Control ECM and delivery
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Module (ECM).> (test) mode fuse.
chassis ground.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-61
12LE_US.book 62

16.Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure

A: PROCEDURE
1. Check of the fuel amount

2. Inspection of starter motor circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-63, STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Start-
ing Failure.>

3. Inspection of ECM power supply and ground line. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-66, CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MODULE (ECM), Diagnostics for Engine Starting Failure.>

4. Inspection of ignition control system. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-68, IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM, Diagnostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>

5. Inspection of fuel pump circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-70, FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting Fail-
ure.>

6. Inspection of fuel injector circuit. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-71, FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT, Diagnostics for Engine Starting
Failure.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-62
12LE_US.book 63

B: STARTER MOTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53,
OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-41, PROCE-
DURE, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B72
IGNITION SWITCH
F/B No. 21
6
BATTERY
SBF-5 MAIN SBF
2 3
E
2
STARTER
RELAY
B493
STARTER MOTOR
1
3
2
CLUTCH STROKE SENSOR

(CLUTCH START SWITCH)
M
B501 B14
1
C16
B26
ECM
B: B135 C: B136
B72 B493 B: B135 C: B136 B501
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 1 2 3 4 5
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
4 5 6 3
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
4
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07805
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK BATTERY. Is the voltage 12 V or more? Go to step 2. Charge or replace
Check the battery voltage. the battery.
2 CHECK OPERATION OF STARTER MOTOR. Does the starter motor oper- Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
ate?
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-63
12LE_US.book 64

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK DTC. Is DTC displayed? <Ref. to Check the appro- The circuit has
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-40, priate DTC using returned to a nor-
OPERATION, Read Diagnostic the List of Diag- mal condition at
Trouble Code (DTC).> nostic Trouble this time. Repro-
Code (DTC). duce the failure,
<Ref. to and then perform
EN(H4DOTC)(diag the diagnosis
)-75, List of Diag- again.
nostic Trouble NOTE:
Code (DTC).> In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the starter Go to step 5.
TOR. motor. <Ref. to
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. SC(H4SO)-9,
2) Disconnect the connector from starter Starter.>
motor.
3) Depress the clutch pedal.
4) Turn the ignition switch to START.
5) Measure the voltage between the starter
motor connector and the engine ground.
(B14) No. 1 (+) Engine ground ():
5 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL FOR STARTER MO- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair the open Go to step 6.
TOR. circuit of the har-
1) Depress the clutch pedal. ness between
2) Turn the ignition switch to START. starter relay con-
3) Measure the voltage between starter relay nector and starter
connector and chassis ground. motor.
6 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN BATTERY Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 7. Repair the power
AND IGNITION SWITCH CONNECTOR. supply circuit.
2) Disconnect the connector from ignition
switch.
3) Measure the voltage between ignition
switch connector and chassis ground.
7 CHECK IGNITION SWITCH. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 8. Replace the igni-
Measure the resistance between ignition switch tion switch. <Ref.
terminals after turning the ignition switch to to SL-58,
START position. REPLACEMENT,
Terminals Ignition Key Lock.>
No. 2 No. 3:
No. 6 No. 3:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-64
12LE_US.book 65

Step Check Yes No

8 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF STARTER RE- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 9. Check the follow-
LAY. ing item and repair
1) Remove the starter relay. if necessary.
2) Connect the connector to ignition switch. Blown out of fuse
3) Turn the ignition switch to START. (F/B No. 21)
4) Measure the voltage between starter relay Open or short
connector and chassis ground. circuit to ground in
(B493) No. 4 (+) Chassis ground (): starter relay con-
(B493) No. 2 (+) Chassis ground (): nector and ignition
switch connector
9 CHECK STARTER RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 10. Replace the starter
1) Connect the battery to starter relay termi- relay. <Ref. to
nals No. 2 and No. 1. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
2) Measure the resistance between starter )-9, Electrical
relay terminals. Component Loca-
Terminals tion.>
No. 4 No. 3:
STARTER RELAY CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. starter relay con-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between nector.
ECM and starter relay connector.
(B136) No. 16 (B493) No. 3:
11 CHECK ECM INPUT VOLTAGE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check the ECM Go to step 12.
1) Install the starter relay. power supply and
2) Depress the clutch pedal. ground line. <Ref.
3) Turn the ignition switch to START. to
4) Measure the voltage between ECM connec- EN(H4DOTC)(diag
tor and chassis ground. )-66, CHECK
Connector & terminal POWER SUPPLY
(B135) No. 26 (+) Chassis ground (): AND GROUND
LINE OF ENGINE
CONTROL MOD-
ULE (ECM), Diag-
nostics for Engine
Starting Failure.>
CLUTCH START SWITCH CONNECTOR. circuit of harness
2) Disconnect the clutch start switch connec- clutch start switch
tor. connector.
ECM and clutch start switch connector.
(B135) No. 26 (B501) No. 1:
13 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF CLUTCH Is the voltage 10 V or more? Replace the clutch Repair open or
START SWITCH. start switch. <Ref. short circuit to
1) Turn the ignition switch to START. to CL-31, Clutch ground in harness
2) Measure the voltage between the clutch Switch.> between starter
start switch connector and chassis ground. relay and clutch
Connector & terminal start switch con-
(B501) No. 2 (+) Chassis ground (): nector.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-65
12LE_US.book 66

C: CHECK POWER SUPPLY AND GROUND LINE OF ENGINE CONTROL MOD-

ULE (ECM)
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY
M/B No. 16
4
3 M/B No. 12
1
2 IGNITION
B72
SWITCH BATTERY
1 3
C30
B13
C1
D7
C2
A : B134
E
B : B135
ECM
C : B136
D : B137
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
B21
40
35
34
37
36
E2
E E
B72 A: B134 B: B135 B220

B21
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13
4 5 6 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
19
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
C: B136 D: B137
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31 EN-07806
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK MAIN RELAY. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 2. Replace the main
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. relay. <Ref. to
2) Remove the main relay. EN(H4DOTC)(diag
3) Connect the battery to main relay terminals )-9, Electrical
No. 1 and No. 2. Component Loca-
4) Measure the resistance between main relay tion.>
terminals.
Terminals
No. 3 No. 4:
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-66
12LE_US.book 67

Step Check Yes No

1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. and connector.
2) Measure the resistance of harness between NOTE:
ECM and chassis ground. In this case, repair
(B134) No. 3 Chassis ground: Open circuit in
(B137) No. 1 Chassis ground: ground terminal
coupling connector
3 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the open or
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and of harness of
chassis ground. power supply cir-
Connector & terminal cuit.
4 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF MAIN RELAY. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 5. Repair the open or
Measure the voltage between main relay con- ground short circuit
nector and chassis ground. of harness of
Connector & terminal power supply cir-
(B220) No. 1 (+) Chassis ground (): cuit.
5 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 6. Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. circuit in harness
2) Install the main relay. between ECM and
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. main relay connec-
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and tor.
chassis ground.
6 CHECK INPUT VOLTAGE OF ECM. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Check ignition con- Repair the harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol system. <Ref. and connector.
2) Connect the connector to ECM. to NOTE:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4DOTC)(diag In this case, repair
4) Measure the voltage between ECM and )-68, IGNITION the following item:
chassis ground. CONTROL SYS- Open circuit in
Connector & terminal TEM, Diagnostics harness between
(B136) No. 1 (+) Chassis ground (): for Engine Starting ECM and main re-
(B137) No. 7 (+) Chassis ground (): Failure.> lay connector
Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
Poor contact of
ECM connector
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-67
12LE_US.book 68

D: IGNITION CONTROL SYSTEM

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
3 1
21
31
22
32
B72 IGNITION SWITCH
SBF-5
F/B No. 12
MAIN SBF
B21
BATTERY
49
20
31
10
9
E2
E
E31 E32 E33 E34
3
2
E

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E31 B21 B134 B72

E32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 5 6
E33
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E34 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
2
3
EN-07807
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK SPARK PLUG CONDITION. Is the spark plug condition nor- Go to step 2. Replace the spark
1) Remove the spark plug. <Ref. to mal? plug. <Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> IG(H4DOTC)-4,
2) Check the spark plug condition. <Ref. to Spark Plug.>
IG(H4DOTC)-4, INSPECTION, Spark Plug.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-68
12LE_US.book 69

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK IGNITION SYSTEM FOR SPARKS. Does spark occur at each cylin- Check fuel pump Go to step 3.
1) Connect the spark plug to ignition coil. der? system. <Ref. to
2) Release the fuel pressure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag
FU(H4DOTC)-66, RELEASING OF FUEL )-70, FUEL PUMP
PRESSURE, PROCEDURE, Fuel.> CIRCUIT, Diag-
3) Contact the spark plug thread portion to nostics for Engine
engine. Starting Failure.>
4) While opening the throttle valve fully, crank
the engine to check that spark occurs at each
cylinder.
Connector & terminal ground in power
(E31) No. 3 (+) Engine ground (): supply circuit
(E33) No. 3 (+) Engine ground (): coupling connector
(E34) No. 3 (+) Engine ground (): Blown out of fuse
(F/B No. 12)
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. NOTE:
ECM and ignition coil connector. the following item:
(B134) No. 22 (E32) No. 1: ECM and ignition
(B134) No. 31 (E33) No. 1: coil connector
coupling connector
Measure the resistance of harness between ness between
ECM and engine ground. ECM and ignition
Connector & terminal coil connector.
7 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Replace the igni-
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM tion coil. <Ref. to
connector. IG(H4DOTC)-6,
Ignition Coil.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-69
12LE_US.book 70

E: FUEL PUMP CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK OPERATING SOUND OF FUEL Does the fuel pump emit oper- Check the fuel Display the DTC.
PUMP. ating sound? injector circuit. <Ref. to
Make sure that the fuel pump operates for two <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag
seconds when turning the ignition switch to ON. EN(H4DOTC)(diag )-40, OPERA-
NOTE: )-71, FUEL INJEC- TION, Read Diag-
Fuel pump operation can be executed using the TOR CIRCUIT, nostic Trouble
Subaru Select Monitor. Diagnostics for Code (DTC).>
For detailed procedures, refer to SYSTEM OP- Engine Starting
ERATION CHECK MODE. <Ref. to Failure.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, System Operation
Check Mode.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-70
12LE_US.book 71

F: FUEL INJECTOR CIRCUIT

CAUTION:
Check or repair only faulty parts.
After servicing or replacing faulty parts, perform Clear Memory Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-
53, OPERATION, Clear Memory Mode.>, and Inspection Mode <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-41, PRO-
CEDURE, Inspection Mode.>.
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
54
53
52
51
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
1

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B220 B21 B134
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07809
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK OPERATION OF EACH FUEL INJEC- Does the fuel injector emit Check the fuel Go to step 2.
TOR. operating sound? pressure. <Ref. to
While cranking the engine, check each fuel ME(H4DOTC)-26,
injector emits operating sound. Use a sound INSPECTION,
scope or attach a screwdriver to the injector for Fuel Pressure.>
this check.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-71
12LE_US.book 72

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO EACH FUEL IN- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
JECTOR. and connector.
#1 (E5) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): injector connector
#2 (E16) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): Poor contact of
#3 (E6) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): main relay connec-
#4 (E17) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): tor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
ECM and fuel injector connector. Open circuit in
#4 (B134) No. 13 (E17) No. 2: coupling connector
Measure the resistance between ECM and harness between
chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal injector connector.
5 CHECK EACH FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 20 ? Go to step 6. Replace the faulty
Measure the resistance between each fuel fuel injector. <Ref.
injector terminals. to FU(H4DOTC)-
Terminals 45, Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 No. 2:
6 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM Repair the poor Inspection using
Check for poor contact of ECM connector. connector? contact of ECM General Diagnos-
connector. tic Table. <Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-339, INSPEC-
TION, General
Diagnostic Table.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-72
12LE_US.book 73

17.Diagnostic Procedure for Subaru Select Monitor Communication

A: COMMUNICATION FOR INITIALIZING IMPOSSIBLE
DIAGNOSIS:
Open or short circuit in data link connector
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Subaru Select Monitor communication failure
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
M/B No. 12
ECM
E
A: B134 B: B135
C: B136 D: B137
B14
C4
D1
A3
A6
D3
A4
B546
* *
*
* B21
34
35
36
37
40
B138 E2
DATA LINK
CONNECTOR
16
7
4
5
B40 : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL

E * ARRANGEMENT
A: B134 B: B135
B138 B546
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
B21
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
C: B136 D: B137
B40 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-09298
Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT. Does SDI or general scan tool Go to step 4. Go to step 2.
Connect the SDI (Subaru Diagnosis Interface) turn ON?
or general scan tool to data link connector.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-73
12LE_US.book 74

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the power
Measure the voltage between data link connec- supply circuit.
tor and chassis ground. NOTE:
(B40) No. 16 (+) Chassis ground (): the following item:
Open or ground
ness between bat-
tery and data link
connector
Blown out of fuse
(M/B No. 12)
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN DATA LINK Is the resistance less than 5 ? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CONNECTOR AND CHASSIS GROUND. contact of data link and connector.
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. connector. NOTE:
data link connector and chassis ground. the following item:
(B40) No. 5 Chassis ground: ECM and data link
connector
Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and engine
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
DATA LINK CONNECTOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM, TCM, In this case, repair
VDC CM, airbag CM and body integrated unit. the following item:
When disconnecting the connector from air- harness between
bag CM, always follow the precautions on ECM and data link
AB section. <Ref. to AB-9, CAUTION, Gener- connector
al Description.> Poor contact of
3) Measure the resistance of harness between coupling connector
ECM and data link connector.
(B135) No. 14 (B40) No. 7:
5 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Repair the poor Repair the ground
DATA LINK CONNECTOR. more? contact of the ECM short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between data link con- or data link con- ness between
nector and chassis ground. nector. ECM and data link
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-74
12LE_US.book 75

18.List of Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: LIST
DTC Item Note
P0011 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-84, DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Over-Advanced or System Perfor- TION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK
mance (Bank 1) 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0014 Exhaust AVCS System 1 (Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-85, DTC P0014 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 1
Performance) (RANGE/PERFORMANCE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0016 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-86, DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION -
Position Correlation (Bank1) CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK1), Diagnostic Procedure
P0017 Crank and Cam Timing B System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-87, DTC P0017 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B
Failure (Bank 1) SYSTEM FAILURE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0018 Crankshaft Position - Camshaft <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-88, DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION -
Position Correlation (Bank2) CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK2), Diagnostic Procedure
P0019 Crank and Cam Timing B System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-89, DTC P0019 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B
Failure (Bank 2) SYSTEM FAILURE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0021 Intake Camshaft Position - Timing <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-90, DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Over-Advanced or System Perfor- TION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK
mance (Bank 2) 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0024 Exhaust AVCS System 2 (Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-91, DTC P0024 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 2
Performance) (RANGE/PERFORMANCE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0030 HO2S Heater Control Circuit (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-92, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0031 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-94, DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0032 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-96, DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0037 HO2S Heater Control Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-98, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0038 HO2S Heater Control Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-100, DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL
(Bank 1 Sensor 2) CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0068 MAP/MAF - Throttle Position Cor- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-102, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE
relation POSITION CORRELATION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0101 Mass or Volume Air Flow Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-103, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR
Range/Performance FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Low Input FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
High Input FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-75
12LE_US.book 76

DTC Item Note

P0107 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baro- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-108, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
metric Pressure Circuit Low Input PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic
Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0108 Manifold Absolute Pressure/Baro- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-110, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
metric Pressure Circuit High Input PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic
P0111 Intake Air Temperature Sensor 1 <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-112, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE
Circuit Range/Performance SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
Circuit High SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0117 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-117, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEM-
cuit Low PERATURE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0118 Engine Coolant Temperature Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-119, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEM-
cuit High PERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0122 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-121, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSI-
Switch A Circuit Low TION SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
Switch A Circuit High TION SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0125 Insufficient Coolant Temperature <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-125, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT
for Closed Loop Fuel Control TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Proce-
P0126 Insufficient Engine Coolant Tem- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-126, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE
perature for Stable Operation COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Proce-
P0128 Coolant Thermostat (Engine Cool- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-127, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT
ant Temperature Below Thermo- (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULAT-
stat Regulating Temperature) ING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0131 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-128, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0132 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-130, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
P0133 O2 Sensor Circuit Slow Response <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-132, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW
(Bank 1 Sensor 1) RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P0134 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-133, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO
Detected (Bank 1 Sensor 1) ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0137 O2 Sensor Circuit Low Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-135, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW
ble Code (DTC).>
P0138 O2 Sensor Circuit High Voltage <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-137, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH
ble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-76
12LE_US.book 77

DTC Item Note

P013A O2 Sensor Slow Response - Rich <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-139, DTC P013A O2 SENSOR SLOW
P013B O2 Sensor Slow Response - Lean <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-140, DTC P013B O2 SENSOR SLOW
P013E O2 Sensor Delayed Response - <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-140, DTC P013E O2 SENSOR DELAYED
Rich to Lean (Bank 1 Sensor 2) RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure
P013F O2 Sensor Delayed Response - <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-140, DTC P013F O2 SENSOR DELAYED
Lean to Rich (Bank 1 Sensor 2) RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure
P0140 O2 Sensor Circuit No Activity <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-141, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO
Detected (Bank1 Sensor2) ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0141 O2 Sensor Heater Circuit (Bank1 <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-143, DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIR-
Sensor2) CUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0171 System Too Lean (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-143, DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK
1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0172 System Too Rich (Bank 1) <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-144, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK
1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0181 Fuel Temperature Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-146, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SEN-
cuit Range/Performance SOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with
cuit Low Input SOR A CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
cuit High Input SOR A CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P0201 Injector #1 <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-151, DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1, Diagnostic
Switch B Circuit Low TION SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
Switch B Circuit High TION SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with
P0230 Fuel Pump Primary Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-158, DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIR-
CUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0244 Turbo/Super Charger Wastegate <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-161, DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER
Solenoid A Range/Performance WASTEGATE SOLENOID A RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
Solenoid A Low WASTEGATE SOLENOID A LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
Solenoid A High WASTEGATE SOLENOID A HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-77
12LE_US.book 78

DTC Item Note

P0301 Cylinder 1 Misfire Detected <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-166, DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE
P0327 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit Low (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-172, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
1 or Single Sensor) LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0328 Knock Sensor 1 Circuit High (Bank <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-174, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT
1 or Single Sensor) HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0335 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-176, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
cuit SENSOR A CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0336 Crankshaft Position Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-178, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
cuit Range/Performance SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure
P0340 Camshaft Position Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-179, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
cuit (Bank 1 or Single Sensor) SOR A CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Procedure
P0345 Camshaft Position Sensor A Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-181, DTC P0345 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
cuit (Bank 2) SOR A CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0351 Ignition Coil A Primary/Secondary <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-183, DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/
(DTC).>
P0352 Ignition Coil B Primary/Secondary <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-185, DTC P0352 IGNITION COIL B PRIMARY/
(DTC).>
P0353 Ignition Coil C Primary/Secondary <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-185, DTC P0353 IGNITION COIL C PRIMARY/
(DTC).>
P0354 Ignition Coil D Primary/Secondary <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-185, DTC P0354 IGNITION COIL D PRIMARY/
(DTC).>
P0365 Camshaft Position Sensor B Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-186, DTC P0365 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
cuit (Bank 1) SOR B CIRCUIT (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0390 Camshaft Position Sensor B Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-188, DTC P0390 CAMSHAFT POSITION SEN-
cuit (Bank 2) SOR B CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0420 Catalyst System Efficiency Below <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-190, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFI-
Threshold (Bank 1) CIENCY BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P0442 Evaporative Emission Control Sys- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-194, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
tem Leak Detected (Small Leak) CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Proce-
tem Vent Control Circuit Open CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Proce-
tem Vent Control Circuit Shorted CONTROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-78
12LE_US.book 79

DTC Item Note

tem Pressure Sensor CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Procedure with
tem Pressure Sensor Low Input CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
tem Pressure Sensor High Input CONTROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Proce-
tem Leak Detected (Very Small CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic
Leak) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
tem Leak Detected (Fuel Cap CONTROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diag-
Loose/Off) nostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0458 Evaporative Emission System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-209, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
Purge Control Valve Circuit Low SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure
P0459 Evaporative Emission System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-211, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION
Purge Control Valve Circuit High SYSTEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure
P0461 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-213, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A
P0462 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-213, DTC P0462 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0463 Fuel Level Sensor A Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-214, DTC P0463 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0464 Fuel Level Sensor Circuit Intermit- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-215, DTC P0464 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR CIR-
tent CUIT INTERMITTENT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0500 Vehicle Speed Sensor A <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-215, DTC P0500 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR
A, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0506 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-216, DTC P0506 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Lower Than Expected TEM RPM LOWER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P0507 Idle Air Control System RPM <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-217, DTC P0507 IDLE AIR CONTROL SYS-
Higher Than Expected TEM RPM HIGHER THAN EXPECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P050A Cold Start Idle Air Control System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-218, DTC P050A COLD START IDLE AIR
Performance CONTROL SYSTEM PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnos-
P050B Cold Start Ignition Timing Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-226, DTC P050B COLD START IGNITION TIM-
mance ING PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P0512 Starter Request Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-227, DTC P0512 STARTER REQUEST CIR-
CUIT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P0513 Incorrect Immobilizer Key <Ref. to IM(diag)-16, DTC P0513 INCORRECT IMMOBILIZER KEY, Diag-
P0604 Internal Control Module Random <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-229, DTC P0604 INTERNAL CONTROL MOD-
Access Memory (RAM) Error ULE RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY (RAM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure
P0605 Internal Control Module Read Only <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-229, DTC P0605 INTERNAL CONTROL MOD-
Memory (ROM) Error ULE READ ONLY MEMORY (ROM) ERROR, Diagnostic Procedure with
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-79
12LE_US.book 80

DTC Item Note

P0607 Throttle Control System Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-230, DTC P0607 THROTTLE CONTROL SYS-
Range/Performance TEM CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P0638 Throttle Actuator Control Range/ <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-231, DTC P0638 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
Performance (Bank 1) CONTROL RANGE/PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
P0851 Neutral Switch Input Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-232, DTC P0851 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(MT Model) CIRCUIT LOW (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P0852 Neutral Switch Input Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-234, DTC P0852 NEUTRAL SWITCH INPUT
(MT Model) CIRCUIT HIGH (MT MODEL), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1152 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-236, DTC P1152 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
mance (Low) (Bank1 Sensor1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (LOW) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Proce-
P1153 O2 Sensor Circuit Range/Perfor- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-238, DTC P1153 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT
mance (High) (Bank1 Sensor1) RANGE/PERFORMANCE (HIGH) (BANK1 SENSOR1), Diagnostic Proce-
P1160 Return Spring Failure <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-239, DTC P1160 RETURN SPRING FAILURE,
P1400 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sole- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-240, DTC P1400 FUEL TANK PRESSURE
noid Valve Circuit Low CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with
P1420 Fuel Tank Pressure Control Sol. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-242, DTC P1420 FUEL TANK PRESSURE
Valve Circuit High CONTROL SOL. VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P1443 Vent Control Solenoid Valve Func- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-244, DTC P1443 VENT CONTROL SOLENOID
tion Problem VALVE FUNCTION PROBLEM, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P1458 Canister Purge Control Solenoid <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-245, DTC P1458 CANISTER PURGE CON-
Valve 2 TROL SOLENOID VALVE 2, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1459 Canister Purge Control Solenoid <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-247, DTC P1459 CANISTER PURGE CON-
Valve 2 TROL SOLENOID VALVE 2, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
P1518 Starter Switch Circuit Low Input <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-249, DTC P1518 STARTER SWITCH CIRCUIT
LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P1560 Back-Up Voltage Circuit Malfunc- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-251, DTC P1560 BACK-UP VOLTAGE CIR-
tion CUIT MALFUNCTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1570 Antenna <Ref. to IM(diag)-17, DTC P1570 ANTENNA, Diagnostic Procedure with
P1571 Reference Code Incompatibility <Ref. to IM(diag)-19, DTC P1571 REFERENCE CODE INCOMPATIBILITY,
P1572 IMM Circuit Failure (Except <Ref. to IM(diag)-20, DTC P1572 IMM CIRCUIT FAILURE (EXCEPT
Antenna Circuit) ANTENNA CIRCUIT), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P1574 Key Communication Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1574 KEY COMMUNICATION FAILURE, Diag-
P1576 EGI Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-22, DTC P1576 EGI CONTROL MODULE EEPROM, Diag-
P1577 IMM Control Module EEPROM <Ref. to IM(diag)-23, DTC P1577 IMM CONTROL MODULE EEPROM,
P1578 Meter Failure <Ref. to IM(diag)-24, DTC P1578 METER FAILURE, Diagnostic Procedure
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-80
12LE_US.book 81

DTC Item Note

P2004 Intake Manifold Runner Control <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-253, DTC P2004 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUN-
Stuck Open (Bank 1) NER CONTROL STUCK OPEN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Stuck Open (Bank 2) NER CONTROL STUCK OPEN (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Stuck Closed (Bank 1) NER CONTROL STUCK CLOSED (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
Stuck Closed (Bank 2) NER CONTROL STUCK CLOSED (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit / Open (Bank 1) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low (Bank 1) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
Circuit / Open (Bank 2) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT / OPEN (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with
Circuit Low (Bank 2) NER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
P2016 Intake Manifold Runner Position <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-265, DTC P2016 INTAKE MANIFOLD RUN-
Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic
1) Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic
Sensor / Switch Circuit Low (Bank NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic
Sensor / Switch Circuit High (Bank NER POSITION SENSOR / SWITCH CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic
P2088 Intake Camshaft Position Actuator <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-273, DTC P2088 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSI-
Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic Proce-
Control Circuit High (Bank 1) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Proce-
P2090 Exhaust Camshaft Position Actua- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-277, DTC P2090 EXHAUST CAMSHAFT
tor Control Circuit Low (Bank 1) POSITION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1), Diagnostic
tor Control Circuit High (Bank 1) POSITION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1), Diagnostic
Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic Proce-
Control Circuit High (Bank 2) TION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic Proce-
tor Control Circuit Low (Bank 2) POSITION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 2), Diagnostic
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-81
12LE_US.book 82

DTC Item Note

tor Control Circuit High (Bank 2) POSITION ACTUATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 2), Diagnostic
P2096 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-289, DTC P2096 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Too Lean (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2097 Post Catalyst Fuel Trim System <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-296, DTC P2097 POST CATALYST FUEL TRIM
Too Rich (Bank 1) SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
P2101 Throttle Actuator Control Motor Cir- <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-303, DTC P2101 THROTTLE ACTUATOR
cuit Range/Performance CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
cuit Low CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
cuit High CONTROL MOTOR CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
P2109 Throttle/Pedal Position Sensor A <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-311, DTC P2109 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSI-
Minimum Stop Performance TION SENSOR A MINIMUM STOP PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Proce-
Switch D Circuit Low Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch D Circuit High Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH D CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch E Circuit Low Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch E Circuit High Input TION SENSOR/SWITCH E CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Procedure
Switch A/B Voltage Correlation TION SENSOR/SWITCH A/B VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
Switch D/E Voltage Correlation TION SENSOR/SWITCH D/E VOLTAGE CORRELATION, Diagnostic Pro-
cedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P219A Bank 1 Air-Fuel Ratio Imbalance <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-325, DTC P219A BANK 1 AIR-FUEL RATIO
IMBALANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2227 Barometric Pressure Circuit <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-336, DTC P2227 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
P2228 Barometric Pressure Circuit Low <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-336, DTC P2228 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
P2229 Barometric Pressure Circuit High <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-337, DTC P2229 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
P2610 ECM/PCM Internal Engine Off <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-337, DTC P2610 ECM/PCM INTERNAL
Timer Performance ENGINE OFF TIMER PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Procedure with Diag-
U0073 CAN Failure, Bus Off Detection <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-338, DTC U0073 CAN FAILURE, BUS OFF
DETECTION, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0101 CAN (TCU) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-338, DTC U0101 CAN (TCU) DATA NOT
LOADED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-82
12LE_US.book 83

DTC Item Note

U0122 CAN (VDC) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-338, DTC U0122 CAN (VDC) DATA NOT
U0140 CAN (BCU) Data Not Loaded <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-338, DTC U0140 CAN (BCU) DATA NOT
U0402 CAN (TCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-338, DTC U0402 CAN (TCU) DATA ABNOR-
MAL, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
U0416 CAN (VDC) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-338, DTC U0416 CAN (VDC) DATA ABNOR-
U0422 CAN (BCU) Data Abnormal <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-338, DTC U0422 CAN (BCU) DATA ABNOR-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-83
12LE_US.book 84

19.Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC)

A: DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-10, DTC P0011 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION -
TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of VVT Adv. Ang. Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. Amount R approx. 0 deg? ing item and repair
2) Read the value of VVT Adv. Ang. Amount or replace if neces-
R using the Subaru Select Monitor. sary.
NOTE: Oil pipe (clog)
For detailed operation procedures, refer to Oil flow control
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. solenoid valve
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- (clog or dirt of oil
tor.> routing, setting of
spring)
Intake camshaft
(dirt, damage of
camshaft)
2 CHECK CURRENT DATA. When the value of OCV Duty Check the follow- Perform the follow-
1) Drive with acceleration and deceleration at R increases more than 10%, ing item and repair ing procedures,
80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. is the value of VVT Adv. Ang. or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: Amount R approx. 0 deg? sary. routing.
Drive to an extent that the duty output of oil flow Oil pipe (clog) Replace the
control solenoid valve increases. Oil flow control engine oil and idle
2) Read the values of OCV Duty R and solenoid valve the engine for 5
VVT Adv. Ang. Amount R using the Subaru (clog or dirt of oil minutes, and then
Select Monitor. routing, setting of replace the oil filter
NOTE: spring) and engine oil.
For detailed operation procedures, refer to Intake camshaft <Ref. to
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. (dirt, damage of LU(H4SO)-13,
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
tor.> Engine Oil.> <Ref.
to LU(H4SO)-36,
Engine Oil Filter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-84
12LE_US.book 85

B: DTC P0014 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 1 (RANGE/PERFORMANCE)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-12, DTC P0014 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 1
(RANGE/PERFORMANCE), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Exh. VVT Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. Retard Ang. R approx. 0 deg? ing item and repair
2) Read the value of Exh. VVT Retard Ang. or replace if neces-
R using the Subaru Select Monitor. sary.
spring)
Exhaust cam-
shaft (dirt, dam-
age of camshaft)
2 CHECK CURRENT DATA. When the value of Exh. OCV Check the follow- Perform the follow-
1) Drive with acceleration and deceleration at Duty R increases more than ing item and repair ing procedures,
80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. 10%, is the value of Exh. VVT or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: Retard Ang. R approx. 0 deg? sary. routing.
2) Read the values of Exh. OCV Duty R and solenoid valve the engine for 5
Exh. VVT Retard Ang. R using the Subaru (clog or dirt of oil minutes, and then
For detailed operation procedures, refer to Exhaust cam- <Ref. to
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. shaft (dirt, dam- LU(H4SO)-13,
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- age of camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
to LU(H4SO)-36,
Engine Oil Filter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-85
12LE_US.book 86

C: DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELA-

TION (BANK1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-14, DTC P0016 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAM-
SHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of VVT Adv. Ang. Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. Amount R approx. 0 deg, and ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Read the values of VVT Adv. Ang. Amount the value of OCV Duty R and clean the oil or replace if neces-
R and OCV Duty R using the Subaru Select approx. 10%? routing. sary.
Monitor. Replace the Oil pipe (clog)
NOTE: engine oil and idle Oil flow control
For detailed operation procedures, refer to the engine for 5 solenoid valve
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. minutes, and then (clog or dirt of oil
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- replace the oil filter routing, setting of
tor.> and engine oil. spring)
<Ref. to Intake camshaft
LU(H4SO)-13, (dirt, damage of
REPLACEMENT, camshaft)
Engine Oil.> <Ref. Timing belt
to LU(H4SO)-36, (matching of timing
Engine Oil Filter.> mark)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-86
12LE_US.book 87

D: DTC P0017 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B SYSTEM FAILURE (BANK 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-16, DTC P0017 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B SYS-
TEM FAILURE (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Exh. VVT Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. Retard Ang. R approx. 0 deg, ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Read the values of Exh. VVT Retard Ang. and the value of Exh. OCV and clean the oil or replace if neces-
R and Exh. OCV Duty R using the Subaru Duty R approx. 10%? routing. sary.
Select Monitor. Replace the Oil pipe (clog)
<Ref. to Exhaust cam-
LU(H4SO)-13, shaft (dirt, dam-
REPLACEMENT, age of camshaft)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-87
12LE_US.book 88

E: DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAMSHAFT POSITION CORRELA-

TION (BANK2)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-18, DTC P0018 CRANKSHAFT POSITION - CAM-
SHAFT POSITION CORRELATION (BANK2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of VVT Adv. Ang. Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. Amount L approx. 0 deg, and ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Read the values of VVT Adv. Ang. Amount the value of OCV Duty L and clean the oil or replace if neces-
L and OCV Duty L using the Subaru Select approx. 10%? routing. sary.
Monitor. Replace the Oil pipe (clog)
<Ref. to Intake camshaft
LU(H4SO)-13, (dirt, damage of
REPLACEMENT, camshaft)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-88
12LE_US.book 89

F: DTC P0019 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B SYSTEM FAILURE (BANK 2)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-18, DTC P0019 CRANK AND CAM TIMING B SYS-
TEM FAILURE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Exh. VVT Perform the follow- Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. Retard Ang. L approx. 0 deg, ing procedures, ing item and repair
2) Read the values of Exh. VVT Retard Ang. and the value of Exh. OCV and clean the oil or replace if neces-
L and Exh. OCV Duty L using the Subaru Duty L approx. 10%? routing. sary.
Select Monitor. Replace the Oil pipe (clog)
<Ref. to Exhaust cam-
LU(H4SO)-13, shaft (dirt, dam-
REPLACEMENT, age of camshaft)
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-89
12LE_US.book 90

G: DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION - TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 2)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-18, DTC P0021 INTAKE CAMSHAFT POSITION -
TIMING OVER-ADVANCED OR SYSTEM PERFORMANCE (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) De-
tecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of VVT Adv. Ang. Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. Amount L approx. 0 deg? ing item and repair
2) Read the value of VVT Adv. Ang. Amount or replace if neces-
L using the Subaru Select Monitor. sary.
spring)
Intake camshaft
(dirt, damage of
camshaft)
2 CHECK CURRENT DATA. When the value of OCV Duty Check the follow- Perform the follow-
1) Drive with acceleration and deceleration at L increases more than 10%, is ing item and repair ing procedures,
80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. the value of VVT Adv. Ang. or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: Amount L approx. 0 deg? sary. routing.
2) Read the values of OCV Duty L and VVT solenoid valve the engine for 5
Adv. Ang. Amount L using the Subaru Select (clog or dirt of oil minutes, and then
Monitor. routing, setting of replace the oil filter
For detailed operation procedures, refer to Intake camshaft <Ref. to
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. (dirt, damage of LU(H4SO)-13,
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
to LU(H4SO)-36,
Engine Oil Filter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-90
12LE_US.book 91

H: DTC P0024 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 2 (RANGE/PERFORMANCE)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-18, DTC P0024 EXHAUST AVCS SYSTEM 2
(RANGE/PERFORMANCE), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK CURRENT DATA. Is the value of Exh. VVT Go to step 2. Check the follow-
1) Start the engine and let it idle. Retard Ang. L approx. 0 deg? ing item and repair
2) Read the value of Exh. VVT Retard Ang. or replace if neces-
L using the Subaru Select Monitor. sary.
spring)
Exhaust cam-
shaft (dirt, dam-
age of camshaft)
2 CHECK CURRENT DATA. When the value of Exh. OCV Check the follow- Perform the follow-
1) Drive with acceleration and deceleration at Duty L increases more than ing item and repair ing procedures,
80 km/h (50 MPH) or less. 10%, is the value of Exh. VVT or replace if neces- and clean the oil
NOTE: Retard Ang. L approx. 0 deg? sary. routing.
2) Read the values of Exh. OCV Duty L and solenoid valve the engine for 5
Exh. VVT Retard Ang. L using the Subaru (clog or dirt of oil minutes, and then
For detailed operation procedures, refer to Exhaust cam- <Ref. to
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. shaft (dirt, dam- LU(H4SO)-13,
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- age of camshaft) REPLACEMENT,
to LU(H4SO)-36,
Engine Oil Filter.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-91
12LE_US.book 92

I: DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-19, DTC P0030 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-92
12LE_US.book 93

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
1) Start and warm up the engine. In this case, repair
3) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and Open circuit in
front oxygen (A/F) sensor. harness between
4) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and front oxy-
ECM and front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. gen (A/F) sensor
(B136) No. 19 (E24) No. 3:
(B136) No. 18 (E24) No. 4:
2 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 2 Go to step 3. Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen 3 ? oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor connector terminals. sor. <Ref. to
Terminals FU(H4DOTC)-54,
Sensor.>
sensor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-54,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-93
12LE_US.book 94

J: DTC P0031 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-94
12LE_US.book 95

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FRONT OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN (A/F) SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- In this case, repair
gen (A/F) sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between front oxygen harness between
(A/F) sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay and front
(E24) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): oxygen (A/F) sen-
sor connector
Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Malfunction of A/
F, oxygen sensor
relay
TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and front oxy-
(B136) No. 5 (E24) No. 2: gen (A/F) sensor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR. Is the resistance 2 3 ? Repair the poor Replace the front
Measure the resistance between front oxygen contact of ECM oxygen (A/F) sen-
(A/F) sensor terminals. connector. sor. <Ref. to
Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-95
12LE_US.book 96

K: DTC P0032 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-96
12LE_US.book 97

Step Check Yes No

FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and front oxygen (A/F)
chassis ground. sensor connector.
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. contact of ECM and connector.
coupling connector
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-97
12LE_US.book 98

L: DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

A/F, OXYGEN SENSOR RELAY
M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
REAR OXYGEN 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
* ARRANGEMENT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-98
12LE_US.book 99

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO REAR OXY- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
GEN SENSOR. supply line.
2) Disconnect the connector from rear oxygen In this case, repair
sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen harness between
sensor connector and engine ground. A/F, oxygen sen-
Connector & terminal sor relay and rear
(E25) No. 2 (+) Engine ground (): oxygen sensor
connector
Poor contact of
A/F, oxygen sen-
sor relay connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Malfunction of A/
F, oxygen sensor
relay
3) Measure the resistance between the ECM the following item:
and rear oxygen sensor connector. Open circuit in
(B135) No. 6 (E25) No. 1: ECM and rear oxy-
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance 5 7 ? Repair the poor Replace the rear
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen contact of ECM oxygen sensor.
sensor terminals. connector. <Ref. to
No. 1 No. 2: Rear Oxygen Sen-
sor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-99
12LE_US.book 100

M: DTC P0038 HO2S HEATER CONTROL CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
Step Check Yes No

REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
2) Measure the voltage between ECM and between ECM and
chassis ground. rear oxygen sensor
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-100
12LE_US.book 101

Step Check Yes No

1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. contact of ECM and connector.
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 102

N: DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION CORRELATION

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-29, DTC P0068 MAP/MAF - THROTTLE POSITION
CORRELATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
intake system?
2 CHECK MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE Is the value in Mani. Absolute Go to step 3. Replace the mani-
SENSOR. Pressure 73.3 106.6 kPa fold absolute pres-
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until (550 800 mmHg, 21.65 sure sensor. <Ref.
coolant temperature is higher than 75C 31.50 inHg) when the ignition is to FU(H4DOTC)-
(167F). turned ON, and 20.0 46.7 43, Manifold Abso-
2) Place the shift lever in neutral position. kPa (150 350 mmHg, 5.91 lute Pressure Sen-
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF. 13.78 inHg) during idling? sor.>
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni-
tor.>
General scan tool
3 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the value in Throttle Open- Go to step 4. Replace the elec-
Using the Subaru Select Monitor or a general ing Angle with the throttle fully tronic throttle con-
scan tool, read the value in Throttle Opening closed less than 5%? trol. <Ref. to
Angle. FU(H4DOTC)-15,
NOTE: Throttle Body.>
tor.>
General scan tool
4 CHECK THROTTLE OPENING ANGLE. Is the value in Throttle Open- Replace the mani- Replace the elec-
ing Angle with the throttle fully fold absolute pres- tronic throttle con-
open 85% or more? sure sensor. <Ref. trol. <Ref. to
to FU(H4DOTC)- FU(H4DOTC)-15,
43, Manifold Abso- Throttle Body.>
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>
12LE_US.book 103

O: DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-31, DTC P0101 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIR-
CUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK FOR ANY OTHER DTC ON DISPLAY. Is any other DTC displayed? Check the appro- Replace the mass
priate DTC using air flow and intake
the List of Diag- air temperature
nostic Trouble sensor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC). FU(H4DOTC)-42,
<Ref. to Mass Air Flow and
EN(H4DOTC)(diag Intake Air Temper-
)-75, List of Diag- ature Sensor.>
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
12LE_US.book 104

P: DTC P0102 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

* *
*
B83
B30
C11
C31
C10
C22
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B3 B220 B: B135 C: B136 B83
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
17
1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08684
12LE_US.book 105

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Voltage less than 0.2 V? detected, the cir-
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- the diagnosis
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MASS AIR Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE and connector.
SENSOR. NOTE:
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass the following item:
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. Open circuit in
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. harness between
4) Measure the voltage between mass air flow main relay and
and intake air temperature sensor connector mass air flow and
and engine ground. intake air tempera-
(B3) No. 3 (+) Engine ground (): nector
Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit in harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. between ECM and
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. the mass air flow
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. and intake air tem-
3) Measure the resistance of harness between perature sensor
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- connector.
perature sensor connector.
(B136) No. 22 (B3) No. 5:
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. harness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and mass air
chassis ground. flow and intake air
Connector & terminal temperature sen-
(B136) No. 22 Chassis ground: sor connector.
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or air flow and intake
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and air temperature
tor. intake air tempera- sensor. <Ref. to
ture sensor con- FU(H4DOTC)-42,
nector. Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>
12LE_US.book 106

Q: DTC P0103 MASS OR VOLUME AIR FLOW CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

* *
*
B83
B30
C11
C31
C10
C22
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B3 B220 B: B135 C: B136 B83
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
17
1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08684
12LE_US.book 107

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Voltage 5 V or more? detected, the cir-
tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the value of Air Flow Sensor Repair the short Go to step 3.
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- Voltage 5 V or more? circuit of harness
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply
2) Disconnect the connectors from the mass mass air flow and
air flow and intake air temperature sensor. intake air tempera-
3) Start the engine. ture sensor con-
4) Read the value of Air Flow Sensor Volt- nector.
age using Subaru Select Monitor.
NOTE:
tor.>
mass air flow and intake air temperature sensor Open circuit in
connector and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and mass air
(B3) No. 4 Engine ground: flow and intake air
temperature sen-
sor connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mass Repair the poor Replace the mass
Check for poor contact of mass air flow and air flow and intake air tempera- contact of mass air air flow and intake
intake air temperature sensor connector. ture sensor connector? flow and intake air air temperature
temperature sen- sensor. <Ref. to
sor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-42,
Mass Air Flow and
Intake Air Temper-
ature Sensor.>
12LE_US.book 108

R: DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-37, DTC P0107 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
1 2 3
1
2
3
E21
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
23
28
6
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
D20
A19
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07667
12LE_US.book 109

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Pressure less than 13.3 kPa detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Mani. Absolute Pres- (100 mmHg, 3.94 inHg)? cuit has returned to
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- NOTE:
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF MANIFOLD Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SENSOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold In this case, repair
absolute pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between manifold harness between
absolute pressure sensor connector and ECM and manifold
engine ground. absolute pressure
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
ECM and manifold absolute pressure sensor harness between
connector. ECM and manifold
Connector & terminal absolute pressure
(B137) No. 20 (E21) No. 2: sensor connector.
Poor contact of
coupling connector
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- more? short circuit of har-
SOR CONNECTOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and manifold
chassis ground. absolute pressure
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of ECM or Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of ECM and manifold manifold absolute pressure contact of ECM or fold absolute pres-
absolute pressure sensor connector. sensor connector? manifold absolute sure sensor. <Ref.
pressure sensor to FU(H4DOTC)-
connector. 43, Manifold Abso-
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>
12LE_US.book 110

S: DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-39, DTC P0108 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE/
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MANIFOLD E21
ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE
SENSOR
1 2 3
1
2
3
E21
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134
E2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
23
28
6
B21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
A29
D20
A19
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07667
12LE_US.book 111

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Pressure 119.5 kPa (896.5 detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Mani. Absolute Pres- mmHg, 35.29 inHg) or more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the value of Mani. Absolute Repair the short Go to step 3.
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE SEN- Pressure 119.5 kPa (896.5 circuit to power in
SOR CONNECTOR. mmHg, 35.29 inHg) or more? harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and manifold
2) Disconnect the connector from manifold absolute pressure
absolute pressure sensor. sensor connector.
eral scan tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
manifold absolute pressure sensor connector Open circuit of
and engine ground. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and manifold
(E21) No. 1 Engine ground: absolute pressure
sensor connector.
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of mani- Repair the poor Replace the mani-
Check for poor contact of manifold absolute fold absolute pressure sensor contact of manifold absolute pres-
pressure sensor connector. connector? fold absolute pressure sensor. <Ref.
sure sensor to FU(H4DOTC)-
connector. 43, Manifold Abso-
lute Pressure Sen-
sor.>
12LE_US.book 112

T: DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-41, DTC P0111 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SEN-
SOR 1 CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERA- Is the value of Coolant Temp. Replace the mass Go to DTC P0125.
TURE. 75C (167F) or more? air flow and intake <Ref. to
1) Start the engine and warm up completely. air temperature EN(H4DOTC)(diag
2) Read the value of Coolant Temp. using sensor. <Ref. to )-125, DTC P0125
the Subaru Select Monitor or a general scan FU(H4DOTC)-42, INSUFFICIENT
tool. Mass Air Flow and COOLANT TEM-
NOTE: Intake Air Temper- PERATURE FOR
Subaru Select Monitor ature Sensor.> CLOSED LOOP
For detailed operation procedures, refer to FUEL CONTROL,
READ CURRENT DATA FOR ENGINE. <Ref. Diagnostic Proce-
to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-34, Subaru Select Moni- dure with Diagnos-
tor.> tic Trouble Code
General scan tool (DTC).>
12LE_US.book 113

U: DTC P0112 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW

SOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

* *
*
B83
B30
C11
C31
C10
C22
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B3 B220 B: B135 C: B136 B83
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
17
1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08684
12LE_US.book 114

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Temp. 120C (248F) or detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Intake Air Temp. using more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the mass Repair the short
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- more? air flow and intake circuit to ground in
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. air temperature harness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sensor. <Ref. to ECM and mass air
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and FU(H4DOTC)-42, flow and intake air
the mass air flow and intake air temperature Mass Air Flow and temperature sen-
sensor. Intake Air Temper- sor connector.
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and ature Sensor.>
chassis ground.
12LE_US.book 115

V: DTC P0113 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH

SOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
3
B220
MASS AIR FLOW & E

INTAKE AIR
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
B3
2

* *
*
B83
B30
C11
C31
C10
C22
B: B135 C: B136 ECM
B3 B220 B: B135 C: B136 B83
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
17
1 5 9 13 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
19
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08684
12LE_US.book 116

Step Check Yes No

1) Start the engine. Temp. less than 40C ( detected, the cir-
2) Read the value of Intake Air Temp. using 40F)? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
Check for poor contact of ECM and mass air mass air flow and intake air contact of ECM or
flow and intake air temperature sensor connec- temperature sensor connector? mass air flow and
tor. intake air tempera-
ture sensor con-
nector.
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and the following item:
the mass air flow and intake air temperature Open circuit in
sensor. harness between
3) Measure the resistance of harness between ECM and mass air
ECM and the mass air flow and intake air tem- flow and intake air
perature sensor connector. temperature sen-
Connector & terminal sor connector
(B135) No. 30 (B3) No. 2: coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the mass
MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR TEM- circuit of harness air flow and intake
PERATURE SENSOR CONNECTOR. to power supply air temperature
1) Connect all connectors. between ECM and sensor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. mass air flow and FU(H4DOTC)-42,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and intake air tempera- Mass Air Flow and
chassis ground. ture sensor con- Intake Air Temper-
Connector & terminal nector. ature Sensor.>
12LE_US.book 117

W: DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT LOW

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-47, DTC P0117 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E8
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1 2
E8
2
1
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E2 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
12
26 27 28 29 30 31
6
B21
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D22
A29
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07668
12LE_US.book 118

Step Check Yes No

ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND EN- Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the Repair short cir-
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR more? engine coolant cuit in harness to
CONNECTOR. temperature sen- ground between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. sor. <Ref. to ECM and engine
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and FU(H4DOTC)-34, coolant tempera-
engine coolant temperature sensor. Engine Coolant ture sensor con-
3) Measure the resistance between ECM and Temperature Sen- nector.
chassis ground. sor.>
12LE_US.book 119

X: DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE CIRCUIT HIGH

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-49, DTC P0118 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E8
ENGINE
COOLANT
TEMPERATURE
SENSOR 1 2
E8
2
1
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E2 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
12
26 27 28 29 30 31
6
B21
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
D22
A29
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07668
12LE_US.book 120

Step Check Yes No

ness may be the
cause.
Check for poor contact of ECM and engine cool- engine coolant temperature contact of ECM or
ant temperature sensor connector. sensor connector? engine coolant
temperature sen-
sor connector.
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
engine coolant temperature sensor. Open circuit in
ECM and engine coolant temperature sensor ECM and engine
connector. coolant tempera-
(B137) No. 22 (E8) No. 2: nector
coupling connector
GINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE SENSOR circuit to power in engine coolant
CONNECTOR. harness between temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. ECM and engine sor. <Ref. to
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. coolant tempera- FU(H4DOTC)-34,
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Engine Coolant
chassis ground. nector. Temperature Sen-
Connector & terminal sor.>
12LE_US.book 121

Y: DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT

LOW
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-51, DTC P0122 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SEN-
SOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE M/B No. 13
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E E THROTTLE CONTROL
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813
12LE_US.book 122

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
(B134) No. 18 (B136) No. 4:
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4DOTC)-15, ECM and elec-
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-58,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
12LE_US.book 123

Z: DTC P0123 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT

HIGH
SOR/SWITCH A CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813
12LE_US.book 124

Step Check Yes No

NECTOR. NOTE:
and electronic throttle control. Open circuit in
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit of harness
NECTOR. to power supply
throttle control connector and engine ground. control connector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit of harness
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- to power supply
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. Replace the elec- electronic throttle
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle con- control connector.
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 18: FU(H4DOTC)-15,
Throttle Body.>
12LE_US.book 125

AA:DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP

FUEL CONTROL
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-55, DTC P0125 INSUFFICIENT COOLANT TEMPER-
ATURE FOR CLOSED LOOP FUEL CONTROL, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine does not return to idle.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK TIRE SIZE. Is the tire size as specified and Go to step 2. Replace the tire.
the same size as three other
wheels?
2 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant normal? Go to step 3. Fill or replace the
Check the following items: engine coolant.
Amount of engine coolant <Ref. to
Engine coolant freeze CO(H4DOTC)-14,
Contamination of engine coolant REPLACEMENT,
Engine Coolant.>
3 CHECK THERMOSTAT. Does the thermostat remain Replace the ther- Replace the
opened? mostat. <Ref. to engine coolant
CO(H4DOTC)-19, temperature sen-
Thermostat.> sor. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-34,
Engine Coolant
Temperature Sen-
sor.>
12LE_US.book 126

AB:DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE FOR STA-

BLE OPERATION
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-57, DTC P0126 INSUFFICIENT ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE FOR STABLE OPERATION, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Hard to start
Improper idling
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE Is the resistance of engine cool- Repair the poor Replace the
SENSOR. ant temperature sensor differ- contact of ECM engine coolant
1) Disconnect the connectors from the engine ent between when engine connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature sensor. coolant is cold and after sor. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between engine warmed up? FU(H4DOTC)-34,
coolant temperature sensor terminals when the Engine Coolant
engine coolant is cold and after warmed up. Temperature Sen-
Terminals sor.>
No. 1 No. 2:
12LE_US.book 127

AC:DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-59, DTC P0128 COOLANT THERMOSTAT (ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE BELOW THERMOSTAT REGULATING TEMPERATURE), Diagnostic Trouble
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Thermostat remains open.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
1 CHECK ENGINE COOLANT. Is the engine coolant amount Go to step 2. Refill the engine
normal? coolant. <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-14,
Engine Coolant.>
2 CHECK RADIATOR FAN. Does the radiator fan continu- Repair radiator fan Replace the ther-
1) Start the engine. ously rotate for 3 minutes or circuit. <Ref. to mostat. <Ref. to
2) Check the radiator fan operation. more during idling? CO(H4DOTC)-25, CO(H4DOTC)-19,
Radiator Main Fan Thermostat.>
and Fan Motor.>
and <Ref. to
CO(H4DOTC)-27,
Radiator Sub Fan
and Fan Motor.>
12LE_US.book 128

AD:DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-63, DTC P0131 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLT-
AGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
12LE_US.book 129

Step Check Yes No

TOR. ness between
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and gen (A/F) sensor
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. connector.
chassis ground.
sor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-54,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
12LE_US.book 130

AE:DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-65, DTC P0132 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
Step Check Yes No

TOR. inside.
12LE_US.book 131

Step Check Yes No

2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 8 V or more? Repair the short Replace the front
FRONT OXYGEN (A/F) SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in oxygen (A/F) sen-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between ECM and FU(H4DOTC)-54,
2) Disconnect the connectors from front oxy- front oxygen (A/F) Front Oxygen (A/F)
gen (A/F) sensor. sensor connector. Sensor.>
chassis ground.
12LE_US.book 132

AF:DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RESPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-67, DTC P0133 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT SLOW RE-
SPONSE (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
Loose installation of front portion of exhaust FU(H4DOTC)-54,
12LE_US.book 133

AG:DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-70, DTC P0134 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK 1 SENSOR 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
E24
M/B No.15
12 1 2
3 4
11 8
10
B22 E3
1
9 B220
E
B220
FRONT OXYGEN 17
(A/F) SENSOR 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19
E24
B21
2
3
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
E3
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
7
1
2
B22
E
B22
1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8
9 10 11 12
13 14 15 16
C19
C18
C9
C5
C6
A: B134
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
C: B136 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
ECM
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
D: B137 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
E2 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
E E 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08618
12LE_US.book 134

Step Check Yes No

TOR. NOTE:
front oxygen (A/F) sensor connector. Open circuit in
coupling connector
sensor connector. FU(H4DOTC)-54,
Front Oxygen (A/F)
Sensor.>
12LE_US.book 135

AH:DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-72, DTC P0137 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT LOW VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
12LE_US.book 136

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
inside.
(B135) No. 30 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. FU(H4DOTC)-56, In this case, repair
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
Check the following items. FU(H4DOTC)-56,
system parts sor.>
Damage (crack, hole etc.) between front oxy-
gen (A/F) sensor and rear oxygen sensor
12LE_US.book 137

AI: DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLTAGE (BANK 1 SENSOR 2)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-74, DTC P0138 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT HIGH VOLT-
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
12LE_US.book 138

Step Check Yes No

rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
inside.
(B135) No. 30 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
system parts sor.>
12LE_US.book 139

AJ:DTC P013A O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 2)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-75, DTC P013A O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE -
RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
12LE_US.book 140

Step Check Yes No

nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
REAR OXYGEN SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen ness between
sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and rear oxy-
Connector & terminal gen sensor con-
(E25) No. 3 Chassis ground: nector.
3 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the rear Even if DTC is
Measure the resistance between rear oxygen oxygen sensor. detected, the cir-
sensor terminals. <Ref. to cuit has returned to
Terminals FU(H4DOTC)-56, a normal condition
No. 3 No. 4 Rear Oxygen Sen- at this time. Repro-
sor.> duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
AK:DTC P013B O2 SENSOR SLOW RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1 SEN-

SOR 2)
NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P013A. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-139, DTC P013A O2 SEN-
SOR SLOW RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic
AL:DTC P013E O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - RICH TO LEAN (BANK 1
SENSOR 2)
NOTE:
AM:DTC P013F O2 SENSOR DELAYED RESPONSE - LEAN TO RICH (BANK 1
SENSOR 2)
NOTE:
12LE_US.book 141

AN:DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY DETECTED (BANK1

SENSOR2)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-83, DTC P0140 O2 SENSOR CIRCUIT NO ACTIVITY
DETECTED (BANK1 SENSOR2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
12LE_US.book 142

Step Check Yes No

maximum)
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
rpm.
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
inside.
(B135) No. 30 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 143

Step Check Yes No

gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
NOTE: <Ref. to
system parts sor.>
AO:DTC P0141 O2 SENSOR HEATER CIRCUIT (BANK1 SENSOR2)

Refer to DTC P0037 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-98, DTC P0037 HO2S HEATER
CONTROL CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 SENSOR 2), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code
(DTC).>
AP:DTC P0171 SYSTEM TOO LEAN (BANK 1)
Refer to DTC P0172 for diagnostic procedure. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-144, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO
RICH (BANK 1), Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
12LE_US.book 144

AQ:DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1)

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-88, DTC P0172 SYSTEM TOO RICH (BANK 1), Diag-
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
intake system?
CAUTION: Clogged fuel
Be careful not to spill fuel. return line or bent
Measure the fuel pressure while disconnecting hose
pressure regulator vacuum hose from intake Fuel pressure is
manifold. <Ref. to ME(H4DOTC)-26, INSPEC- too low:
TION, Fuel Pressure.> Improper fuel
CAUTION: pump discharge
Release fuel pressure before removing the Clogged fuel
fuel pressure gauge. supply line
NOTE:
If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze the
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel
pressure again.
After connecting the pressure regulator vacuum 304 kPa (2.8 3.1 kg/cm2, 40 ing item.
hose, measure fuel pressure. <Ref. to 44 psi)? Fuel pressure is
ME(H4DOTC)-26, INSPECTION, Fuel Pres- too high:
sure.> Faulty pressure
CAUTION: regulator
Release fuel pressure before removing the Clogged fuel
fuel pressure gauge. return line or bent
NOTE: hose
If fuel pressure does not increase, squeeze Fuel pressure is
fuel return hose 2 to 3 times, then measure fuel too low:
pressure again. Faulty pressure
If the measured value at this step is out of regulator
specification, check or replace pressure regula- Improper fuel
tor and pressure regulator vacuum hose. pump discharge
Clogged fuel
supply line
12LE_US.book 145

Step Check Yes No

the Subaru Select Monitor or a general scan FU(H4DOTC)-34,
tor.>
General scan tool
(167F). FU(H4DOTC)-42,
2) Place the shift lever in neutral position. Mass Air Flow and
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF. Intake Air Temper-
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF. ature Sensor.>
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
7 CHECK MASS AIR FLOW AND INTAKE AIR Subtract ambient temperature Repair the poor Check the mass air
TEMPERATURE SENSOR. from Intake Air Temp.. Is the contact of ECM flow and intake air
1) Start the engine and warm up engine until obtained value 10 50C ( connector. temperature sen-
coolant temperature is higher than 75C 18 90F)? sor.
(167F). <Ref. to
2) Place the shift lever in neutral position. FU(H4DOTC)-42,
3) Turn the A/C switch to OFF. Mass Air Flow and
4) Turn all the accessory switches to OFF. Intake Air Temper-
5) Open the front hood. ature Sensor.>
tool.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
12LE_US.book 146

AR:DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFOR-

MANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-90, DTC P0181 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using temperature sen-
the List of Diag- sor. <Ref. to
nostic Trouble EC(H4DOTC)-15,
Code (DTC). Fuel Temperature
<Ref. to Sensor.>
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-75, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
12LE_US.book 147

AS:DTC P0182 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT LOW INPUT

CIRCUIT LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
3
2
R58
R57
11
7
R15
R333
3
8
i155
i3
11
5
B38
*
*
B83
B30
C23
B: B135 : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

ECM
*
C: B136
R57 R58 B38 B: B135 C: B136 B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08685
12LE_US.book 148

Step Check Yes No

tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the fuel Repair the ground
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? temperature sen- short circuit of har-
TOR. sor. <Ref. to ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. EC(H4DOTC)-15, ECM and fuel
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and Fuel Temperature pump connector.
fuel temperature sensor. Sensor.>
chassis ground.
12LE_US.book 149

AT:DTC P0183 FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT

CIRCUIT HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
FUEL TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
3
2
R58
R57
11
7
R15
R333
3
8
i155
i3
11
5
B38
*
*
B83
B30
C23
B: B135 : TERMINAL No. OPTIONAL ARRANGEMENT

ECM
*
C: B136
R57 R58 B38 B: B135 C: B136 B83
i155 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 5 6
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
1 2 3 4 7 8 9 10 11 12 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
5 6 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11
EN-08685
12LE_US.book 150

Step Check Yes No

tor.> again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair any poor Go to step 3.
Check any poor contact of the ECM and fuel ECM or fuel temperature sen- contact of the ECM
temperature sensor connectors. sor connectors? or fuel temperature
sensor connectors.
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
fuel temperature sensor. Open circuit in
between the ECM and fuel temperature sensor ECM and fuel tem-
connector. perature sensor
(B136) No. 23 (R58) No. 2: Poor contact of
(B135) No. 30 (R58) No. 3: coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 5 V or more? Repair the short Replace the fuel
FUEL TEMPERATURE SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in temperature sen-
1) Connect all connectors. between the ECM EC(H4DOTC)-15,
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. and fuel tempera- Fuel Temperature
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and ture sensor con- Sensor.>
chassis ground. nector.
12LE_US.book 151

AU:DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-97, DTC P0201 INJECTOR #1, Diagnostic Trouble
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
54
53
52
51
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
1

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B220 B21 B134
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07809
12LE_US.book 152

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO FUEL INJEC- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
TOR. and connector.
DTC P0201; (E5) No. 1 (+) Engine injector connector
ground (): Poor contact of
DTC P0202; (E16) No. 1 (+) Engine main relay connec-
ground (): tor
DTC P0204; (E17) No. 1 (+) Engine
ground ():
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. ECM connector
3) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- and fuel injector
tor connector and engine ground. connector.
ECM connector and fuel injector connector. In this case, repair
DTC P0201; (B134) No. 10 (E5) No. 2: Open circuit in
DTC P0204; (B134) No. 13 (E17) No. 2: and fuel injector
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR. Is the resistance 5 20 ? Go to step 5. Replace the fuel
Measure the resistance between fuel injector injector. <Ref. to
terminals on the corresponding cylinder. FU(H4DOTC)-45,
No. 1 No. 2:
connector.
12LE_US.book 153

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK FUEL INJECTOR OPERATION. Does the fuel injector emit Even if DTC is Repair the poor
1) Connect all connectors. operating sound? detected, the cir- contact of fuel
2) Start the engine. cuit has returned to injector connector.
3) Check if the corresponding fuel injector a normal condition
emits operating sound. at this time. Repro-
Use a sound scope to check the operating and then perform
sound. the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
AV:DTC P0202 INJECTOR #2

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0201. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-151, DTC P0201 INJECTOR
AW:DTC P0203 INJECTOR #3
NOTE:
AX:DTC P0204 INJECTOR #4
NOTE:
12LE_US.book 154

AY:DTC P0222 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT

LOW
SOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813
12LE_US.book 155

Step Check Yes No

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM tronic throttle con-
and electronic throttle control. trol connector.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK SHORT CIRCUIT INSIDE THE ECM. Is the resistance 1 M or Replace the elec- Repair the ground
1) Connect the connector to ECM. more? tronic throttle con- short circuit of har-
2) Measure the resistance between electronic trol. <Ref. to ness between
throttle control connector and engine ground. FU(H4DOTC)-15, ECM and elec-
Replace the ECM if
defective. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-58,
Engine Control
Module (ECM).>
12LE_US.book 156

AZ:DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT

HIGH
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-101, DTC P0223 THROTTLE/PEDAL POSITION
SENSOR/SWITCH B CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
B220
CONTROL RELAY
16 M/B No. 16
13 3 4
14
15 MAIN RELAY
B220
B17
B7
ECM
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137 E

A19
A29
A28
A18
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
A1
A2
C4
B138
*
B21
*
37
36
40
35
34
28
39
38
24
25
6
E2
*
5
1
2
3
ELECTRONIC
E
E57
B21
B220 B138 E57

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
17 1 2 3 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 5 9 13 5 6 7 8 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 6 10 14
19
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A: B134 B: B135 C: B136 D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-07813
12LE_US.book 157

Step Check Yes No

NECTOR. NOTE:
and electronic throttle control. Open circuit in
coupling connector
NECTOR. NOTE:
ground
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- circuit of harness
NECTOR. to power supply
throttle control connector and engine ground. control connector.
ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL CON- more? contact of elec- circuit of harness
NECTOR. tronic throttle con- to power supply
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. trol connector. between ECM and
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM. Replace the elec- electronic throttle
3) Measure the resistance between ECM con- tronic throttle con- control connector.
(B134) No. 19 (B134) No. 28: FU(H4DOTC)-15,
Throttle Body.>
12LE_US.book 158

BA:DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIRCUIT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-103, DTC P0230 FUEL PUMP PRIMARY CIRCUIT,
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY
M/B No. 20
14 20 21
i3 B38 FUEL PUMP

B220
RELAY
i155
2
R333
E
8
FUEL PUMP
CONTROL UNIT
R122
10
5
6
7
9
R15 R333
1
1
4
R57 i155
i3
10
4
B38
C33
B10
5
FUEL ECM E
PUMP
M B: B135
R58
C: B136
R58 R122 C: B136
B220 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
5 6 7 8 9 10 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
3 4 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
17
1 5 9 13 5 6 B38 R57 i155 B: B135 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
2 6 10 14
19 1 2 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 4 5 6 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
7 8 9 10 11 12 8 9 10 11 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
13 14 15 16 17 18 19 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-07808
12LE_US.book 159

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT TO FUEL Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the power
PUMP CONTROL UNIT. supply circuit.
2) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump In this case, repair
control unit. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Open or ground
4) Measure the voltage between fuel pump short circuit of har-
control unit connector and chassis ground. ness between fuel
Connector & terminal pump relay and
(R122) No. 8 (+) Chassis ground (): fuel pump control
unit connector
Poor contact of
fuel pump relay
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
2 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT OF FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 5 ? Go to step 3. Repair the open
CONTROL UNIT. circuit in harness
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. between fuel pump
2) Measure the resistance of harness between control unit and
fuel pump control unit connector and chassis chassis ground.
ground.
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance less than 1 ? Go to step 4. Repair the harness
CONTROL UNIT AND FUEL PUMP CONNEC- and connector.
TOR. NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connector from fuel pump. In this case, repair
fuel pump control unit and fuel pump connector. Open circuit in
(R122) No. 9 (R58) No. 5: fuel pump control
(R122) No. 10 (R58) No. 6: unit and fuel pump
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN FUEL PUMP Is the resistance 1 M or Go to step 5. Repair the short
CONTROL UNIT AND FUEL PUMP CONNEC- more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between fuel pump fuel pump control
control unit connector and chassis ground. unit and fuel pump
FUEL PUMP CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR. and connector.
1) Disconnect the connector from ECM. NOTE:
ECM and fuel pump control unit connector. the following item:
(B136) No. 33 (R122) No. 6: harness between
(B135) No. 10 (R122) No. 7: ECM and fuel
pump control unit
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 160

Step Check Yes No

FUEL PUMP CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR. more? circuit to ground in
Measure the resistance between fuel pump harness between
control unit connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel
Connector & terminal pump control unit
(R122) No. 6 Chassis ground: connector.
Check for poor contact of ECM and fuel pump
fuel pump control unit connec- contact of ECM or
control unit connector. tor? fuel pump control
unit connector.
8 CHECK EXPERIENCE OF RUNNING OUT OF Has the vehicle experienced Finish the diagno- Replace the fuel
FUEL. running out of fuel? sis. pump control unit.
NOTE: <Ref. to
DTC may be re- FU(H4DOTC)-65,
corded as a result Fuel Pump Control
of fuel pump idling Unit.>
while running out
of fuel.
12LE_US.book 161

BB:DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID A

RANGE/PERFORMANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-105, DTC P0244 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER
WASTEGATE SOLENOID A RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using
the List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).
<Ref. to
EN(H4DOTC)(diag
)-75, List of Diag-
nostic Trouble
Code (DTC).>
2 CHECK WASTEGATE ACTUATOR PIPING Are there any damage or dis- Connect the Replace the waste-
AND WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID connection of hose in waste- wastegate actuator gate control sole-
VALVE PIPING. gate actuator piping or pipe or wastegate noid valve. <Ref. to
wastegate control solenoid control solenoid FU(H4DOTC)-52,
valve piping? valve pipe properly. Wastegate Control
If defective, Solenoid Valve.>
replace the hose.
12LE_US.book 162

BC:DTC P0245 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID A LOW

WASTEGATE SOLENOID A LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
B220
4
3
17
2 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
1 2 6 10 14
19
B220
B134
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B134 ECM
E64
33
1 2
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
48
50
E2
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E64
1
2
WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
EN-07814
12LE_US.book 163

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO WASTEGATE Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE. supply circuit.
Measure the voltage between wastegate con-
trol solenoid valve connector and engine
ground.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE more? short circuit of har-
CONNECTOR. ness between
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and waste-
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and gate control sole-
wastegate control solenoid valve. noid valve
3) Measure the resistance between wastegate connector.
ground.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE and connector.
CONNECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and wastegate control solenoid valve con- the following item:
nector. Open circuit of
(B134) No. 33 (E64) No. 2: ECM and waste-
gate control sole-
noid valve
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 164

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLE- Is the resistance 10 100 ? Repair poor con- Replace the waste-
NOID VALVE. tact of wastegate gate control sole-
1) Remove the wastegate control solenoid control solenoid noid valve. <Ref. to
valve. valve connector. FU(H4DOTC)-52,
2) Measure the resistance between wastegate Wastegate Control
control solenoid valve terminals. Solenoid Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 No. 2:
12LE_US.book 165

BD:DTC P0246 TURBO/SUPER CHARGER WASTEGATE SOLENOID A HIGH

WASTEGATE SOLENOID A HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
B220
4
3
17
2 1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
1 2 6 10 14
19
B220
B134
E
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
B134 ECM
E64
33
1 2
B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
B21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
48
50
E2
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E64
1
2
WASTEGATE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
EN-07814
12LE_US.book 166

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 10 V or more? Repair short cir- Go to step 2.
WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE cuit of the harness
CONNECTOR. to power supply
2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and wastegate control
wastegate control solenoid valve. solenoid valve con-
chassis ground.
2 CHECK WASTEGATE CONTROL SOLE- Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the waste- Repair the poor
NOID VALVE. gate control sole- contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. noid valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between wastegate FU(H4DOTC)-52,
control solenoid valve terminals. Wastegate Control
No. 1 No. 2:
BE:DTC P0301 CYLINDER 1 MISFIRE DETECTED

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0304. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-167, DTC P0304 CYLIN-
DER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
NOTE:
NOTE:
12LE_US.book 167


Immediately at fault recognition (A misfire which could damage catalyst occurs.)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-115, DTC P0304 CYLINDER 4 MISFIRE DETECTED,
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Improper idling
Rough driving
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
E
B220
B134 ECM
10
11
12
13
B21
48
54
53
52
51
E2
E5 E16 E6 E17
1

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E5 E16 B220 B21 B134
E6 E17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
2 6 10 14
1 2 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07809
12LE_US.book 168

Step Check Yes No

ders.
ECM and fuel injector connector on faulty cylin- In this case, repair
ders. the following item:
coupling connector
terminals on faulty cylinder. to FU(H4DOTC)-
Terminals 45, Fuel Injector.>
No. 1 No. 2:
connector of faulty cylinders and engine injector circuit. In this case, repair
ground. the following item:
#2 (E16) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): the main relay and
#3 (E6) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): fuel injector con-
#4 (E17) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): nector on faulty
cylinders
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
main relay connec-
tor
12LE_US.book 169

Step Check Yes No

2) Measure the resistance between fuel injec- to FU(H4DOTC)-
tor terminals on faulty cylinder. 45, Fuel Injector.>
Terminals
No. 1 No. 2:
8 CHECK INSTALLATION OF CAMSHAFT PO- Is the camshaft position sensor Tighten the cam- Go to step 9.
SITION SENSOR/CRANKSHAFT POSITION or crankshaft position sensor shaft position sen-
SENSOR. loosely installed? sor or crankshaft
position sensor.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-37,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.> <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-35,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
ME(H4DOTC)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt ME(H4DOTC)-62,
Cover.> Crank Sprocket.>
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4DOTC)-52,
SOCKET
11 CHECK FUEL LEVEL. Is the fuel meter indication Go to step 12. Refill the fuel so
higher than the Lower level? that the fuel meter
indication is higher
than the Lower
level, and proceed
to the next step. Go
to step 12.
12 CHECK STATUS OF MALFUNCTION INDI- Does the malfunction indicator Go to step 14. Go to step 13.
CATOR LIGHT. light illuminate or blink?
1) Clear the memory using the Subaru Select
Monitor or general scan tool.
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-53, Clear Memory
Mode.>
2) Start the engine, and drive the vehicle 10
minutes or more.
12LE_US.book 170

Step Check Yes No

13 CHECK CAUSE OF MISFIRE. Was the cause of misfire identi- Finish diagnostics Repair the poor
fied when the engine is run- operation, if the contact of connec-
ning? engine has no tor.
abnormality. NOTE:
the following item:
Poor contact of
ignition coil con-
nector
Poor contact of
fuel injector con-
nector on faulty
cylinders
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
14 CHECK AIR INTAKE SYSTEM. Is there any fault in air intake Repair the air Go to step 15.
system? intake system.
NOTE:
Check the follow-
ing items.
Are there air
leaks or air suction
caused by loose or
dislocated nuts
and bolts?
Are there cracks
or any disconnec-
tion of hoses?
15 CHECK MISFIRE SYMPTOM. Does the Subaru Select Moni- Go to step 18. Go to step 16.
1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor or general scan tool indicate
2) Check for DTC. <Ref. to only one DTC?
EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-40, Read Diagnostic Trou-
ble Code (DTC).>
18 ONLY ONE CYLINDER. Is there any fault in the cylin- Repair or replace Go to DTC P0171.
der? faulty parts. <Ref. to
Check the follow- )-143, DTC P0171
tio (DTC).>
12LE_US.book 171

Step Check Yes No

tio (DTC).>
Skipping timing
belt teeth
tio (DTC).>
Skipping timing
belt teeth
21 CYLINDER AT RANDOM. Is the engine idle rough? Go to DTC P0171. Repair or replace
<Ref. to faulty parts.
EN(H4DOTC)(diag NOTE:
)-143, DTC P0171 Check the follow-
SYSTEM TOO ing items.
LEAN (BANK 1), Spark plug
Diagnostic Proce- Ignition coil
dure with Diagnos- Fuel injector
tic Trouble Code Compression ra-
(DTC).> tio
12LE_US.book 172

BI: DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-
SOR)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-116, DTC P0327 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT LOW
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Knocking occurs.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1 2
2
E14
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
6
B21 26 27 28 29 30 31
E B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A29
D2
D8
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07671
12LE_US.book 173

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance 600 k or Go to step 2. Repair the poor
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. more? contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. connector.
nectors.
(B137) No. 2 (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance 600 k or Replace the knock Repair the harness
1) Disconnect the connector from knock sen- more? sensor. <Ref. to and connector.
sor. FU(H4DOTC)-39, NOTE:
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> In this case, repair
sensor terminals. the following item:
Terminals Open circuit in
ECM and knock
sensor connector
Poor contact of
knock sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 174

BJ:DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SEN-

SOR)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-118, DTC P0328 KNOCK SENSOR 1 CIRCUIT HIGH
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Knocking occurs.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
KNOCK SENSOR
E14
1 2
2
E14
A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
28 29 30 31 32 33 34
D: B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E2 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
6
B21 26 27 28 29 30 31
E B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
A29
D2
D8
A: B134
ECM
D: B137
EN-07671
12LE_US.book 175

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 500 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
KNOCK SENSOR CONNECTOR. k?
nectors.
(B137) No. 2 (B134) No. 29:
2 CHECK KNOCK SENSOR. Is the resistance less than 500 Replace the knock Repair the ground
1) Disconnect the connector from knock sen- k? sensor. <Ref. to short circuit of har-
sor. FU(H4DOTC)-39, ness between
2) Measure the resistance between knock Knock Sensor.> ECM and knock
sensor connectors. sensor connector.
Terminals NOTE:
No. 1 No. 2: The harness be-
tween both con-
nectors are
shielded. Remove
the shield and re-
pair the short cir-
cuit of the harness.
3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF ECM. Is the voltage 2 V or more? Even if DTC is Repair the poor
1) Connect the connector to ECM. detected, the cir- contact of ECM
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. cuit has returned to connector.
3) Measure the voltage between ECM and a normal condition
chassis ground. at this time. Repro-
Connector & terminal duce the failure,
(B137) No. 2 (+) Chassis ground (): and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary poor con-
tact of connector,
temporary open or
ness may be the
cause.
12LE_US.book 176

BK:DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-120, DTC P0335 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
A CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
CRANKSHAFT
POSITION SENSOR
E10
1 2
2
E10
B137
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 28 29 30 31
B21
E2
14
B21 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
E 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
25
17
31
B137 ECM
EN-07686
12LE_US.book 177

Step Check Yes No

securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-35,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is the resistance between 1 and Go to step 3. Replace the crank-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. 4 k? shaft position sen-
2) Remove the crankshaft position sensor. sor. <Ref. to
<Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)-35, REMOVAL, Crank- FU(H4DOTC)-35,
shaft Position Sensor.> Crankshaft Posi-
3) Measure the resistance between terminals tion Sensor.>
of crankshaft position sensor.
Terminals
No. 1 No. 2:
3 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the resistance less than 1 ? Repair the poor Repair the harness
CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CON- contact of ECM and connector.
NECTOR. and crankshaft NOTE:
1) Disconnect the connectors from ECM. position sensor In this case, repair
2) Measure the resistance of harness between connector. the following item:
ECM and crankshaft position sensor connector. Open circuit in
(B137) No. 17 (E10) No. 1: ECM and crank-
(B137) No. 25 (E10) No. 2: shaft position sen-
sor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 178

BL:DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT RANGE/PER-

FORMANCE
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-122, DTC P0336 CRANKSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
A CIRCUIT RANGE/PERFORMANCE, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
Turn the ignition switch to OFF. securely? sor installation bolt
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-35,
Crankshaft Posi-
tion Sensor.>
2 CHECK CRANK SPROCKET. Are crank sprocket teeth Replace the crank Go to step 3.
Remove the timing belt cover. <Ref. to cracked or damaged? sprocket. <Ref. to
ME(H4DOTC)-46, REMOVAL, Timing Belt ME(H4DOTC)-62,
Cover.> Crank Sprocket.>
3 CHECK INSTALLATION CONDITION OF Is the timing belt dislocated Repair the installa- Replace the crank-
Turn the crankshaft using ST, and align the timing belt. <Ref. to sor. <Ref. to
alignment mark on crank sprocket with align- ME(H4DOTC)-52, FU(H4DOTC)-35,
ment mark on cylinder block. Timing Belt.> Crankshaft Posi-
ST 499987500 CRANKSHAFT tion Sensor.>
SOCKET
12LE_US.book 179

BM:DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SIN-

GLE SENSOR)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-124, DTC P0340 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR
A CIRCUIT (BANK 1 OR SINGLE SENSOR), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
INTAKE INTAKE
B220 CAMSHAFT CAMSHAFT
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E35 E36
E2
48
13
2
5
B21
16
24
30
B137 ECM
E35 B220 B137 B21
E36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 6 10 14 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
19 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07815
12LE_US.book 180

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK POWER SUPPLY OF CAMSHAFT Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 2. Repair the harness
POSITION SENSOR. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from camshaft In this case, repair
position sensor. the following item:
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Open circuit or
4) Measure the voltage between camshaft short circuit to
position sensor connector and engine ground. ground in harness
Connector & terminal between main re-
(E36) No. 1 (+) Engine ground (): lay connector and
camshaft position
sensor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
camshaft position sensor connector. harness between
Connector & terminal ECM and camshaft
(B137) No. 24 (E36) No. 2: position sensor
Poor contact of
coupling connector
CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR CONNEC- circuit to power in
TOR. the harness
Measure the voltage between camshaft posi- between ECM and
tion sensor connector and engine ground. camshaft position
5 CHECK CONDITION OF CAMSHAFT POSI- Is the camshaft position sensor Go to step 6. Tighten the cam-
TION SENSOR. installation bolt tightened shaft position sen-
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-37,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
6 CHECK CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR. Is there any abnormality in Replace the cam- Repair the follow-
Check the waveform of the camshaft position waveform? shaft position sen- ing item.
sensor. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-18, sor. <Ref. to Poor contact of
Engine Control Module (ECM) I/O Signal.> FU(H4DOTC)-37, ECM connector
Camshaft Position Poor contact of
Sensor.> camshaft position
sensor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 181

BN:DTC P0345 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR A CIRCUIT (BANK 2)

A CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
INTAKE INTAKE
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E35 E36
E2
48
13
2
5
B21
16
24
30
B137 ECM
E35 B220 B137 B21
E36 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 6 10 14 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
19 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07815
12LE_US.book 182

Step Check Yes No

camshaft position
sensor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. the harness
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-37,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
sensor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 183

BO:DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-126, DTC P0351 IGNITION COIL A PRIMARY/SEC-
ONDARY CIRCUIT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
B134 ECM
3 1
21
31
22
32
B72 IGNITION SWITCH
SBF-5
F/B No. 12
MAIN SBF
B21
BATTERY
49
20
31
10
9
E2
E
E31 E32 E33 E34
3

No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4
E31 B21 B134 B72

E32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 4 5 6
E33
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
E34 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
1
2
3
EN-07807
12LE_US.book 184

Step Check Yes No

DTC P0351; (E31) No. 3 (+) Engine of power supply
ground (): circuit
DTC P0352; (E32) No. 3 (+) Engine Blown out of fuse
ground (): (F/B No. 12)
DTC P0354; (E34) No. 3 (+) Engine
ground ():
2) Measure the resistance between ignition ECM connector
coil connector and engine ground. and ignition coil
ECM connector and ignition coil connector. In this case, repair
DTC P0351; (B134) No. 21 (E31) No. 1: Open circuit of
DTC P0354; (B134) No. 32 (E34) No. 1: and the ignition coil
connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
connector.
6 CHECK SPARK PLUG CONDITION. Is the spark plug condition nor- Replace the igni- Replace the spark
1) Remove the spark plug of the correspond- mal? tion coil. <Ref. to plug. <Ref. to
ing cylinder. <Ref. to IG(H4DOTC)-4, IG(H4DOTC)-6, IG(H4DOTC)-4,
REMOVAL, Spark Plug.> Ignition Coil.> Spark Plug.>
2) Check the spark plug condition. <Ref. to
IG(H4DOTC)-4, INSPECTION, Spark Plug.>
12LE_US.book 185

BP:DTC P0352 IGNITION COIL B PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0351. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-183, DTC P0351 IGNITION
BQ:DTC P0353 IGNITION COIL C PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
NOTE:
BR:DTC P0354 IGNITION COIL D PRIMARY/SECONDARY CIRCUIT
NOTE:
12LE_US.book 186

BS:DTC P0365 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR B CIRCUIT (BANK 1)

B CIRCUIT (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
EXHAUST EXHAUST
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E65 E62
E2
26
48
15
5
B21
29
23
30
B137 ECM
E62 B220 B137 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E65
17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 6 10 14 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
19 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07816
12LE_US.book 187

Step Check Yes No

camshaft position
sensor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. the harness
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-37,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
sensor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 188

BT:DTC P0390 CAMSHAFT POSITION SENSOR B CIRCUIT (BANK 2)

B CIRCUIT (BANK 2), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY

M/B No. 16
4
3
2
1
EXHAUST EXHAUST
POSITION POSITION
SENSOR LH SENSOR RH
E
2
3
1
2
3
E65 E62
E2
26
48
15
5
B21
29
23
30
B137 ECM
E62 B220 B137 B21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
E65
17 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
1 5 9 13
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
2 6 10 14 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
19 26 27 28 29 30 31
1 2 3
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
EN-07816
12LE_US.book 189

Step Check Yes No

camshaft position
sensor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. the harness
securely. <Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-37,
Camshaft Position
Sensor.>
sensor connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
12LE_US.book 190


1)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-128, DTC P0420 CATALYST SYSTEM EFFICIENCY
BELOW THRESHOLD (BANK 1), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Engine stalls.
Idle mixture is out of specifications.
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
BATTERY B83 E25

M/B No.15 1 2 3
12 4 5 6
1 2
11 16 3 4
10
B22 E3 B220
2
9
E
B220 17
3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
SENSOR 2 6 10 14
19
E25
B21
4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
42 43 44 45 46 47
48 49 50 51 52 53 54
E3
15
10
9
B22
E
B22 A: B134
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
5 6 7 8 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
* 9 10 11 12 28 29 30 31 32 33 34
* 13 14 15 16
C20
B30
C9
B6
B83
B: B135
A: B134 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
B: B135
ECM 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
C: B136 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
D: B137
C: B136
D3
A6
A4
A3
D1
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
B21 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
37
36
40
35
34
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
E2
D: B137
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
E E 26 27 28 29 30 31
EN-08619
12LE_US.book 191

Step Check Yes No

1 CHECK EXHAUST SYSTEM. Is there any fault in exhaust Repair or replace Go to step 2.
Check for gas leaks or air suction caused by system? the exhaust sys-
loose or dislocated nuts and bolts, and open tem. <Ref. to
hole at exhaust pipes. EX(H4DOTC)-2,
NOTE: General Descrip-
Check the following positions. tion.>
Between cylinder head and front exhaust
pipe
Between front exhaust pipe and front catalytic
converter
Between front catalytic converter and rear
catalytic converter
Loose or improperly attached front oxygen
(A/F) sensor or rear oxygen sensor
2 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Even if DTC is Go to step 3.
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE DRIVING). played? detected, the cir-
1) Drive at a constant speed between 80 cuit has returned to
112 km/h (50 70 MPH). a normal condition
2) After 5 minutes have elapsed in the condi- at this time. Repro-
tion of step 1), use the Subaru Select Monitor duce the failure,
while still driving to read the waveform data. and then perform
At normal condition the diagnosis
again.
1
NOTE:
REAR OXYGEN In this case, tem-
SENSOR VOLTAGE porary poor con-
(V)
tact of connector,
0 temporary open or
1.5
A/F SENSOR
ness may be the
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1 cause.
0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06666
At abnormal condition (numerous inversion)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
1.5
A/F SENSOR
OUTPUT LAMBDA 1
0.5
10 sec/div
EN-06667
12LE_US.book 192

Step Check Yes No

3 CHECK WAVEFORM DATA ON THE SUBA- Is a normal waveform dis- Go to step 4. The waveform is
RU SELECT MONITOR (WHILE IDLING). played? displayed at abnor-
1) Run the engine at idle. mal condition 1: Go
2) In the condition of step 1), use the Subaru to step 4.
Select Monitor to read the waveform data. The waveform is
At normal condition displayed at abnor-
mal condition 2: Go
1
to step 5.
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06668
At abnormal condition 1 (numerous inversion)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06669
At abnormal condition 2 (noise input)
REAR OXYGEN
SENSOR VOLTAGE
(V)
0
10 sec/div
EN-06670
4 CHECK CATALYTIC CONVERTER. Is the catalytic converter dam- Replace the cata- Go to step 5.
aged? lytic converter.
<Ref. to
EC(H4DOTC)-3,
Front Catalytic
Converter.>
inside.
12LE_US.book 193

Step Check Yes No

2) Disconnect the connector from ECM and Repair the follow-
rear oxygen sensor. ing locations.
(B135) No. 30 (E25) No. 4: nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
7 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the voltage 0.2 0.5 V? Go to step 8. Repair the harness
1) Connect the connector to ECM. NOTE:
2) Turn the ignition switch to ON. Repair the follow-
3) Measure the voltage between rear oxygen ing locations.
sensor connector and chassis ground. Open circuit in
gen sensor con-
nector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
8 CHECK REAR OXYGEN SENSOR SHIELD. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the rear Repair the open
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oxygen sensor. circuit of rear oxy-
2) Expose the rear oxygen sensor connector <Ref. to gen sensor har-
body side harness sensor shield. FU(H4DOTC)-56, ness.
3) Measure the resistance between sensor Rear Oxygen Sen-
shield and chassis ground. sor.>
12LE_US.book 194


ED (SMALL LEAK)
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-130, DTC P0442 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON-
TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Fuel odor
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-75,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
4 CHECK DRAIN VALVE OPERATION. Does the drain valve operate? Go to step 5. Replace the drain
CAUTION: EC(H4DOTC)-22,
the vehicle.
3) Perform operation check for the drain valve
using the Subaru Select Monitor.
NOTE:
The drain valve can be operated using Subaru
<Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-54, System Oper-
ation Check Mode.>
5 CHECK OPERATION OF PURGE CONTROL Does the purge control sole- Go to step 6. Replace the purge
SOLENOID VALVE. noid valve operate? control solenoid
Perform operation check for the purge control valve. <Ref. to
solenoid valve using the Subaru Select Monitor. EC(H4DOTC)-9,
NOTE: Purge Control
Check Mode.>
12LE_US.book 195

Step Check Yes No

6 CHECK OPERATION OF PRESSURE CON- Does the pressure control sole- Go to step 7. Replace the pres-
TROL SOLENOID VALVE. noid valve operate? sure control sole-
Perform operation check for the pressure con- noid valve. <Ref. to
trol solenoid valve using the Subaru Select EC(H4DOTC)-19,
Monitor. Pressure Control
NOTE: Solenoid Valve
The pressure control solenoid valve operation Assembly.>
can be executed using the Subaru Select Mon-
itor. For detailed procedures, refer to SYSTEM
OPERATION CHECK MODE. <Ref. to
Check Mode.>
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 1.0 mm (0.04 in) dia. on evapo- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ration line? line. <Ref. to
2) Remove the delivery (test) mode fuse. FU(H4DOTC)-88,
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>
mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4DOTC)-5,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- there any hole of more than 1.0 the fuel tank. <Ref.
68, Fuel Tank.> mm (0.04 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4DOTC)-
68, Fuel Tank.>
12LE_US.book 196


TROL CIRCUIT OPEN
TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT OPEN, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
PURGE CONTROL PURGE CONTROL
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE 1 SOLENOID VALVE 2
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620
12LE_US.book 197

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO DRAIN VALVE. Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
Measure the voltage between drain valve con- supply circuit.
nector and chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. more? short circuit of har-
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM ECM and drain
and drain valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the drain
valve connector and chassis ground.
DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. and connector.
ECM and drain valve connector. In this case, repair
(B135) No. 4 (R144) No. 2: Open circuit of
harness between
ECM and drain
valve connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance 10 100 ? Repair the poor Replace the drain
Measure the resistance between drain valve contact of drain valve. <Ref. to
terminals. valve connector. EC(H4DOTC)-22,
Terminals Drain Valve.>
No. 1 No. 2:
12LE_US.book 198


CIRCUIT SHORTED
TROL SYSTEM VENT CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORTED, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620
12LE_US.book 199

Step Check Yes No

DRAIN VALVE CONNECTOR. circuit to power in
2) Disconnect the connectors from the ECM between ECM and
and drain valve. drain valve con-
chassis ground.
2 CHECK DRAIN VALVE. Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the drain Repair the poor
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to contact of ECM
2) Measure the resistance between drain valve EC(H4DOTC)-22, connector.
terminals. Drain Valve.>
Terminals
No. 1 No. 2:
12LE_US.book 200


SENSOR
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
2) Open the fuel flap.
2 CHECK PRESSURE/VACUUM LINE. Is there any fault in pressure/ Repair or replace Replace the fuel
NOTE: vacuum line? the hoses and tank pressure sen-
Check the following items. pipes. sor. <Ref. to
Disconnection, leakage and clogging of the EC(H4DOTC)-17,
vacuum hoses and pipes between fuel tank Fuel Tank Pres-
pressure sensor and fuel tank sure Sensor.>
Disconnection, leakage and clogging of air
ventilation hoses and pipes between fuel filler
pipe and fuel tank
12LE_US.book 201


SENSOR LOW INPUT
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR LOW INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
2
1
3
R47
R57
10
R15
R333
11
10
9
i155
i3
12
2

B38 *
*
*
B83
B22
C21
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R47 R57 B38 B83 B: B135 C: B136
i155 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08621
12LE_US.book 202

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. sure less than 7.45 kPa ( detected, the cir-
2) Using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen- 55.89 mmHg, 2.2003 inHg)? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR Is the voltage 4.5 V or more? Go to step 3. Repair the harness
POWER SUPPLY. and connector.
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank In this case, repair
pressure sensor. the following item:
4) Measure the voltage between the fuel tank harness between
pressure sensor connector and chassis ground. ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 3 (+) Chassis ground (): connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
TOR. NOTE:
the ECM and fuel tank pressure sensor connec- harness between
tor. ECM and fuel tank
(B136) No. 21 (R47) No. 2: connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- more? short circuit of har-
TOR. ness between
Measure the resistance between ECM and ECM and fuel tank
chassis ground. pressure sensor
5 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of the Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact between the ECM and ECM or fuel tank pressure sen- contact of the ECM tank pressure sen-
fuel tank pressure sensor connector. sor connector? or fuel tank pressor. <Ref. to
sure sensor con- EC(H4DOTC)-17,
nector. Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>
12LE_US.book 203


SENSOR HIGH INPUT
TROL SYSTEM PRESSURE SENSOR HIGH INPUT, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
FUEL TANK
PRESSURE
SENSOR
2
1
3
R47
R57
10
R15
R333
11
10
9
i155
i3
12
2

B38 *
*
*
B83
B22
C21
B30
B: B135
ECM
C: B136
R47 R57 B38 B83 B: B135 C: B136
i155 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 4 5 6 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 2 7 8 9 10 11 12 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
3 4 5 6 7 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
8 9 10 11 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08621
12LE_US.book 204

Step Check Yes No

1) Turn the ignition switch to ON. sure 7.98 kPa (59.86 mmHg, detected, the cir-
2) Using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen- 2.357 inHg) or more? cuit has returned to
ness may be the
cause.
2 CHECK HARNESS BETWEEN ECM AND Is the value in Fuel Tank Pres- Repair the short Go to step 3.
FUEL TANK PRESSURE SENSOR CONNEC- sure 7.98 kPa (59.86 mmHg, circuit to power in
TOR. 2.357 inHg) or more? the harness
2) Disconnect the connector from the fuel tank fuel tank pressure
pressure sensor. sensor connector.
4) Using the Subaru Select Monitor or a gen-
eral scan tool, read the value in Fuel Tank
Pressure.
NOTE:
tor.>
General scan tool
TOR. NOTE:
fuel tank pressure sensor connector and engine Open circuit of
Connector & terminal ECM and fuel tank
(R47) No. 1 Engine ground: pressure sensor
connector
Poor contact of
ECM connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
4 CHECK FOR POOR CONTACT. Is there poor contact of fuel Repair the poor Replace the fuel
Check for poor contact of the fuel tank pressure tank pressure sensor connec- contact of fuel tank tank pressure sen-
sensor connector. tor? pressure sensor sor. <Ref. to
connector. EC(H4DOTC)-17,
Fuel Tank Pres-
sure Sensor.>
12LE_US.book 205


TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (VERY SMALL LEAK), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Crite-
ria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Fuel odor
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-75,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
the vehicle.
NOTE:
ation Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
Check Mode.>
12LE_US.book 206

Step Check Yes No

Check Mode.>
TROL SYSTEM LINE. 0.5 mm (0.020 in) dia. on evap- the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. oration line? line. <Ref. to
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>
mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to EC(H4DOTC)-5,
Canister.>
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- there any hole of more than 0.5 the fuel tank. <Ref.
68, Fuel Tank.> mm (0.020 in) dia. in it? to FU(H4DOTC)-
68, Fuel Tank.>
12LE_US.book 207


TROL SYSTEM LEAK DETECTED (FUEL CAP LOOSE/OFF), Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting
Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Fuel odor
Fuel filler cap loose or lost
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
NOTE:
tightening.
genuine fuel filler
cap.
<Ref. to
FU(H4DOTC)-75,
Fuel Filler Pipe.>
the vehicle.
NOTE:
ation Check Mode.>
NOTE: Purge Control
Check Mode.>
12LE_US.book 208

Step Check Yes No

Check Mode.>
7 CHECK EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- Is there any disconnection, Repair or replace Go to step 8.
TROL SYSTEM LINE. damage or clogging on the the evaporation
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. evaporation line? line. <Ref. to
Fuel Delivery,
Return and Evapo-
ration Lines.>
8 CHECK CANISTER. Is the canister damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 9.
the canister. <Ref.
to EC(H4DOTC)-5,
Canister.>
9 CHECK FUEL TANK. Is the fuel tank damaged? Repair or replace Go to step 10.
Remove the fuel tank. <Ref. to FU(H4DOTC)- the fuel tank. <Ref.
68, Fuel Tank.> to FU(H4DOTC)-
68, Fuel Tank.>
10 CHECK ANY OTHER MECHANICAL TROU- Are there holes, cracks, clog- Repair or replace Repair the poor
BLE IN EVAPORATIVE EMISSION CON- ging, or disconnection, miscon- the hoses or pipes. contact of ECM
TROL SYSTEM. nection of hoses or pipes in connector.
evaporative emission control
system?
12LE_US.book 209


CIRCUIT LOW
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-156, DTC P0458 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT LOW, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620
12LE_US.book 210

Step Check Yes No

chassis ground.
a normal condition
duce the failure,
and then perform
the diagnosis
again.
NOTE:
In this case, tem-
porary open or
ness or temporary
poor contact of
connector may be
the cause.
3 CHECK POWER SUPPLY TO PURGE CON- Is the voltage 10 V or more? Go to step 4. Repair the power
TROL SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR. supply circuit.
Measure the voltage between purge control
solenoid valve connector and engine ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- more? short circuit of har-
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. ECM and purge
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and control solenoid
purge control solenoid valve. valve connector.
3) Measure the resistance between the purge
ground.
PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- and connector.
NECTOR. NOTE:
ECM and purge control solenoid valve connec- the following item:
tor. Open circuit in
(B137) No. 6 (E4) No. 2: ECM and purge
control solenoid
valve connector
Poor contact of
coupling connector
6 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance 10 100 ? Repair the poor Replace the purge
VALVE. contact of purge control solenoid
1) Remove the purge control solenoid valve. control solenoid valve. <Ref. to
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- valve connector. EC(H4DOTC)-9,
No. 1 No. 2:
12LE_US.book 211


CIRCUIT HIGH
GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-158, DTC P0459 EVAPORATIVE EMISSION SYS-
TEM PURGE CONTROL VALVE CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) Detecting Criteria.>
TROUBLE SYMPTOM:
Improper idling
CAUTION:
WIRING DIAGRAM:
MAIN RELAY BATTERY
M/B No.16
4
3
2
1
B220
B: B135 D: B137 ECM E
D15
D6
B3
B4
B38
15
3
B21
i3
44
11
48
E2
i155
5
i54
12
11
R333
R99
R15
5
R57
R68 R144 E4 E52

2
2
1
1
1
2
2
PRESSURE
CONTROL DRAIN VALVE
SOLENOID VALVE
E4 R68 R144 i54 R57 i155 B38 B21
E52 1 2 3 4 1 2 1 2
1 2 1 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 3 4 5 6 7 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
11 12 13 14 15 16 8 9 10 11 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22
1 2 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33
D: B137 B: B135 B220
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 42 43 44 45 46 47
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 17
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1 5 9 13 48 49 50 51 52 53 54
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3 4 7 8 11 12 15 16 18 20 21
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 2 6 10 14
18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 19
26 27 28 29 30 31 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35
EN-08620
12LE_US.book 212

Step Check Yes No

PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE CON- circuit to power in
NECTOR. the harness
2) Disconnect the connectors from ECM and purge control sole-
purge control solenoid valve. noid valve connec-
3) Turn the ignition switch to ON. tor.
chassis ground.
2 CHECK PURGE CONTROL SOLENOID Is the resistance less than 1 ? Replace the purge Repair the poor
VALVE. control solenoid contact of ECM
1) Turn the ignition switch to OFF. valve. <Ref. to connector.
2) Measure the resistance between purge con- EC(H4DOTC)-9,
No. 1 No. 2:
12LE_US.book 213


GENERAL DESCRIPTION <Ref. to GD(H4DOTC)-160, DTC P0461 FUEL LEVEL SENSOR A CIRCUIT
CAUTION:
Step Check Yes No
priate DTC using level sensor and
the List of Diag- fuel sub level sen-
nostic Trouble sor. <Ref. to
Code (DTC). FU(H4DOTC)-81,
<Ref. to Fuel Level Sen-
EN(H4DOTC)(diag sor.> <Ref. to
)-75, List of Diag- FU(H4DOTC)-83,
nostic Trouble Fuel Sub Level
Code (DTC).> Sensor.>

NOTE:
For the diagnostic procedure, refer to DTC P0463. <Ref. to EN(H4DOTC)(diag)-214, DTC P0463 FUEL LEV-
EL SENSOR A CIRCUIT HIGH, Diagnostic Procedure with Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC).>
12LE_US.book 214

Subaru Legacy &amp; Outback 09-14, 04-05

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Subaru Legacy &amp; Outback 09-14, 04-05

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

12LE_US.

The manuals contain the latest information at the

HOW TO USE THIS MANUALS

How to Use This Manuals

1. How to Use This Manuals

How to Use This Manuals

: Should be lubricated with oil.

(20) : Should be lubricated with grease.

How to Use This Manuals

4. DEFINITION OF NOTE, CAUTION AND WARNING

How to Use This Manuals

15.Main Shaft (A)

11) Tighten the lock nuts to the specified torque us-

(A) Component (D) Cautions (G) Tightening torque

How to Use This Manuals

How to Use This Manuals

How to Use This Manuals

TCS Traction Control System

5AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 5-forward speeds and 1-reverse

TCC: Torque Converter Clutch

5AT: Electronically controlled fully-automatic, 5-forward speeds and 1-reverse

TCC: Torque Converter Clutch

12.OIL 16.REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OPERA-

(1) Hose remover

When draining hose using pliers, be sure to

If you keep using the hose, perform the in-

(1) Push against the spool. (Insert the hose and

(1) Fender cover (3) Tray (5) Container box

5. REMOVED PART 4. BACKUP/POWER SUPPLY FUSE

Automatic full open/close of drivers window

9. LIFT AND JACK

(A) 80 mm (3.1 in) or more

Align the cushion rubber center part of plate lift

(1) Jack-up point

(1) Jack-up point

(1) (2) (1)

(1) Jack-up point (2) Attachment

Jack-up point (When using a garage jack)

(A) Front (B) Rear

(1) Hook for tie-down (2) Tie-down hole

Chain direction at tie-down condition

For sea transportation

Vehicle sinking volume at tie-down condition

(C) (C) (A)

Notes for the use of tie-down hook

(A) Hook cover (B) Towing hook (eyebolt)

(A) Hook cover (B) Towing hook (eyebolt)

Raising the front wheels Prohibited for full-time AWD model.

Marked : OK, Marked : Prohibited, Marked : Conditionally OK.

(1) Normal attached position

(1) Normal attached position (2) Installation position at full open

14.GENERAL SCAN TOOL

16.SPEEDOMETER TEST (3) Conduct the speedometer test work.

(2) When the brake dragging force is large.

When measurement is difficult to carry out

(A) Balancer body

2) For drive wheel, drive the tires with engine for

(1) Engine serial number (punch mark)

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION REAR DIFFERENTIAL

(1) Transmission serial number label and MT type

FMVSS LABEL, CMVSS LABEL

MODEL NUMBER LABEL

3. MODEL NUMBER PLATE

The engine and transmission type are as follows.

Subaru Legacy & Outback 09-14, 04-05

Subaru Legacy & Outback 09-14, 04-05